Title: 'Amazon Web Services' Database Services
Version: 0.9.0
Description: Interface to 'Amazon Web Services' database services, including 'Relational Database Service' ('RDS'), 'DynamoDB' 'NoSQL' database, and more https://aws.amazon.com/.
License: Apache License (≥ 2.0)
URL: https://github.com/paws-r/paws, https://paws-r.r-universe.dev/paws.database
BugReports: https://github.com/paws-r/paws/issues
Imports: paws.common (≥ 0.8.0)
Suggests: testthat
Encoding: UTF-8
RoxygenNote: 7.3.2
Collate: 'dax_service.R' 'dax_interfaces.R' 'dax_operations.R' 'docdb_service.R' 'docdb_interfaces.R' 'docdb_operations.R' 'docdbelastic_service.R' 'docdbelastic_interfaces.R' 'docdbelastic_operations.R' 'dynamodb_service.R' 'dynamodb_interfaces.R' 'dynamodb_operations.R' 'dynamodbstreams_service.R' 'dynamodbstreams_interfaces.R' 'dynamodbstreams_operations.R' 'elasticache_service.R' 'elasticache_interfaces.R' 'elasticache_operations.R' 'keyspaces_service.R' 'keyspaces_interfaces.R' 'keyspaces_operations.R' 'lakeformation_service.R' 'lakeformation_interfaces.R' 'lakeformation_operations.R' 'memorydb_service.R' 'memorydb_interfaces.R' 'memorydb_operations.R' 'neptune_service.R' 'neptune_interfaces.R' 'neptune_operations.R' 'neptunedata_service.R' 'neptunedata_interfaces.R' 'neptunedata_operations.R' 'qldb_service.R' 'qldb_interfaces.R' 'qldb_operations.R' 'qldbsession_service.R' 'qldbsession_interfaces.R' 'qldbsession_operations.R' 'rds_service.R' 'rds_operations.R' 'rds_custom.R' 'rds_interfaces.R' 'rdsdataservice_service.R' 'rdsdataservice_interfaces.R' 'rdsdataservice_operations.R' 'redshift_service.R' 'redshift_interfaces.R' 'redshift_operations.R' 'redshiftdataapiservice_service.R' 'redshiftdataapiservice_interfaces.R' 'redshiftdataapiservice_operations.R' 'redshiftserverless_service.R' 'redshiftserverless_interfaces.R' 'redshiftserverless_operations.R' 'reexports_paws.common.R' 'simpledb_service.R' 'simpledb_interfaces.R' 'simpledb_operations.R' 'timestreamquery_service.R' 'timestreamquery_interfaces.R' 'timestreamquery_operations.R' 'timestreamwrite_service.R' 'timestreamwrite_interfaces.R' 'timestreamwrite_operations.R'
NeedsCompilation: no
Packaged: 2025-03-14 09:21:20 UTC; dyfanjones
Author: David Kretch [aut], Adam Banker [aut], Dyfan Jones [cre], Amazon.com, Inc. [cph]
Maintainer: Dyfan Jones <dyfan.r.jones@gmail.com>
Repository: CRAN
Date/Publication: 2025-03-14 14:40:02 UTC

Amazon DynamoDB Accelerator (DAX)

Description

DAX is a managed caching service engineered for Amazon DynamoDB. DAX dramatically speeds up database reads by caching frequently-accessed data from DynamoDB, so applications can access that data with sub-millisecond latency. You can create a DAX cluster easily, using the AWS Management Console. With a few simple modifications to your code, your application can begin taking advantage of the DAX cluster and realize significant improvements in read performance.

Usage

dax(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- dax(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

create_cluster Creates a DAX cluster
create_parameter_group Creates a new parameter group
create_subnet_group Creates a new subnet group
decrease_replication_factor Removes one or more nodes from a DAX cluster
delete_cluster Deletes a previously provisioned DAX cluster
delete_parameter_group Deletes the specified parameter group
delete_subnet_group Deletes a subnet group
describe_clusters Returns information about all provisioned DAX clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific DAX cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied
describe_default_parameters Returns the default system parameter information for the DAX caching software
describe_events Returns events related to DAX clusters and parameter groups
describe_parameter_groups Returns a list of parameter group descriptions
describe_parameters Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group
describe_subnet_groups Returns a list of subnet group descriptions
increase_replication_factor Adds one or more nodes to a DAX cluster
list_tags List all of the tags for a DAX cluster
reboot_node Reboots a single node of a DAX cluster
tag_resource Associates a set of tags with a DAX resource
untag_resource Removes the association of tags from a DAX resource
update_cluster Modifies the settings for a DAX cluster
update_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a parameter group
update_subnet_group Modifies an existing subnet group

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- dax()
svc$create_cluster(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Creates a DAX cluster

Description

Creates a DAX cluster. All nodes in the cluster run the same DAX caching software.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_create_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_create_cluster(
  ClusterName,
  NodeType,
  Description = NULL,
  ReplicationFactor,
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  SubnetGroupName = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
  IamRoleArn,
  ParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  SSESpecification = NULL,
  ClusterEndpointEncryptionType = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • A name must contain from 1 to 20 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • A name cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

NodeType

[required] The compute and memory capacity of the nodes in the cluster.

Description

A description of the cluster.

ReplicationFactor

[required] The number of nodes in the DAX cluster. A replication factor of 1 will create a single-node cluster, without any read replicas. For additional fault tolerance, you can create a multiple node cluster with one or more read replicas. To do this, set ReplicationFactor to a number between 3 (one primary and two read replicas) and 10 (one primary and nine read replicas). ⁠If the AvailabilityZones⁠ parameter is provided, its length must equal the ReplicationFactor.

AWS recommends that you have at least two read replicas per cluster.

AvailabilityZones

The Availability Zones (AZs) in which the cluster nodes will reside after the cluster has been created or updated. If provided, the length of this list must equal the ReplicationFactor parameter. If you omit this parameter, DAX will spread the nodes across Availability Zones for the highest availability.

SubnetGroupName

The name of the subnet group to be used for the replication group.

DAX clusters can only run in an Amazon VPC environment. All of the subnets that you specify in a subnet group must exist in the same VPC.

SecurityGroupIds

A list of security group IDs to be assigned to each node in the DAX cluster. (Each of the security group ID is system-generated.)

If this parameter is not specified, DAX assigns the default VPC security group to each node.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the DAX cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period. Valid values for ddd are:

  • sun

  • mon

  • tue

  • wed

  • thu

  • fri

  • sat

Example: sun:05:00-sun:09:00

If you don't specify a preferred maintenance window when you create or modify a cache cluster, DAX assigns a 60-minute maintenance window on a randomly selected day of the week.

NotificationTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic to which notifications will be sent.

The Amazon SNS topic owner must be same as the DAX cluster owner.

IamRoleArn

[required] A valid Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that identifies an IAM role. At runtime, DAX will assume this role and use the role's permissions to access DynamoDB on your behalf.

ParameterGroupName

The parameter group to be associated with the DAX cluster.

Tags

A set of tags to associate with the DAX cluster.

SSESpecification

Represents the settings used to enable server-side encryption on the cluster.

ClusterEndpointEncryptionType

The type of encryption the cluster's endpoint should support. Values are:

  • NONE for no encryption

  • TLS for Transport Layer Security


Creates a new parameter group

Description

Creates a new parameter group. A parameter group is a collection of parameters that you apply to all of the nodes in a DAX cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_create_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_create_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName, Description = NULL)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group to apply to all of the clusters in this replication group.

Description

A description of the parameter group.


Creates a new subnet group

Description

Creates a new subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_create_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_create_subnet_group(SubnetGroupName, Description = NULL, SubnetIds)

Arguments

SubnetGroupName

[required] A name for the subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Description

A description for the subnet group

SubnetIds

[required] A list of VPC subnet IDs for the subnet group.


Removes one or more nodes from a DAX cluster

Description

Removes one or more nodes from a DAX cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_decrease_replication_factor/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_decrease_replication_factor(
  ClusterName,
  NewReplicationFactor,
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  NodeIdsToRemove = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the DAX cluster from which you want to remove nodes.

NewReplicationFactor

[required] The new number of nodes for the DAX cluster.

AvailabilityZones

The Availability Zone(s) from which to remove nodes.

NodeIdsToRemove

The unique identifiers of the nodes to be removed from the cluster.


Deletes a previously provisioned DAX cluster

Description

Deletes a previously provisioned DAX cluster. DeleteCluster deletes all associated nodes, node endpoints and the DAX cluster itself. When you receive a successful response from this action, DAX immediately begins deleting the cluster; you cannot cancel or revert this action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_delete_cluster(ClusterName)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the cluster to be deleted.


Deletes the specified parameter group

Description

Deletes the specified parameter group. You cannot delete a parameter group if it is associated with any DAX clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_delete_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_delete_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group to delete.


Deletes a subnet group

Description

Deletes a subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_delete_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_delete_subnet_group(SubnetGroupName)

Arguments

SubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the subnet group to delete.


Returns information about all provisioned DAX clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific DAX cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied

Description

Returns information about all provisioned DAX clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific DAX cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_describe_clusters(ClusterNames = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

ClusterNames

The names of the DAX clusters being described.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more results exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

The value for MaxResults must be between 20 and 100.

NextToken

An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value specified by MaxResults.


Returns the default system parameter information for the DAX caching software

Description

Returns the default system parameter information for the DAX caching software.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_default_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_describe_default_parameters(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more results exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

The value for MaxResults must be between 20 and 100.

NextToken

An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value specified by MaxResults.


Returns events related to DAX clusters and parameter groups

Description

Returns events related to DAX clusters and parameter groups. You can obtain events specific to a particular DAX cluster or parameter group by providing the name as a parameter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_events/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_describe_events(
  SourceName = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceName

The identifier of the event source for which events will be returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response.

SourceType

The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.

StartTime

The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format.

EndTime

The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format.

Duration

The number of minutes' worth of events to retrieve.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more results exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

The value for MaxResults must be between 20 and 100.

NextToken

An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value specified by MaxResults.


Returns a list of parameter group descriptions

Description

Returns a list of parameter group descriptions. If a parameter group name is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions for that group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_describe_parameter_groups(
  ParameterGroupNames = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupNames

The names of the parameter groups.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more results exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

The value for MaxResults must be between 20 and 100.

NextToken

An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value specified by MaxResults.


Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group

Description

Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_describe_parameters(
  ParameterGroupName,
  Source = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group.

Source

How the parameter is defined. For example, system denotes a system-defined parameter.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more results exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

The value for MaxResults must be between 20 and 100.

NextToken

An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value specified by MaxResults.


Returns a list of subnet group descriptions

Description

Returns a list of subnet group descriptions. If a subnet group name is specified, the list will contain only the description of that group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_describe_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_describe_subnet_groups(
  SubnetGroupNames = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

SubnetGroupNames

The name of the subnet group.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more results exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

The value for MaxResults must be between 20 and 100.

NextToken

An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only results beyond the token, up to the value specified by MaxResults.


Adds one or more nodes to a DAX cluster

Description

Adds one or more nodes to a DAX cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_increase_replication_factor/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_increase_replication_factor(
  ClusterName,
  NewReplicationFactor,
  AvailabilityZones = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the DAX cluster that will receive additional nodes.

NewReplicationFactor

[required] The new number of nodes for the DAX cluster.

AvailabilityZones

The Availability Zones (AZs) in which the cluster nodes will be created. All nodes belonging to the cluster are placed in these Availability Zones. Use this parameter if you want to distribute the nodes across multiple AZs.


List all of the tags for a DAX cluster

Description

List all of the tags for a DAX cluster. You can call list_tags up to 10 times per second, per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_list_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_list_tags(ResourceName, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The name of the DAX resource to which the tags belong.

NextToken

An optional token returned from a prior request. Use this token for pagination of results from this action. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only results beyond the token.


Reboots a single node of a DAX cluster

Description

Reboots a single node of a DAX cluster. The reboot action takes place as soon as possible. During the reboot, the node status is set to REBOOTING.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_reboot_node/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_reboot_node(ClusterName, NodeId)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the DAX cluster containing the node to be rebooted.

NodeId

[required] The system-assigned ID of the node to be rebooted.


Associates a set of tags with a DAX resource

Description

Associates a set of tags with a DAX resource. You can call tag_resource up to 5 times per second, per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_tag_resource(ResourceName, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The name of the DAX resource to which tags should be added.

Tags

[required] The tags to be assigned to the DAX resource.


Removes the association of tags from a DAX resource

Description

Removes the association of tags from a DAX resource. You can call untag_resource up to 5 times per second, per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_untag_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The name of the DAX resource from which the tags should be removed.

TagKeys

[required] A list of tag keys. If the DAX cluster has any tags with these keys, then the tags are removed from the cluster.


Modifies the settings for a DAX cluster

Description

Modifies the settings for a DAX cluster. You can use this action to change one or more cluster configuration parameters by specifying the parameters and the new values.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_update_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_update_cluster(
  ClusterName,
  Description = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
  NotificationTopicStatus = NULL,
  ParameterGroupName = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the DAX cluster to be modified.

Description

A description of the changes being made to the cluster.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

A range of time when maintenance of DAX cluster software will be performed. For example: sun:01:00-sun:09:00. Cluster maintenance normally takes less than 30 minutes, and is performed automatically within the maintenance window.

NotificationTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that identifies the topic.

NotificationTopicStatus

The current state of the topic. A value of “active” means that notifications will be sent to the topic. A value of “inactive” means that notifications will not be sent to the topic.

ParameterGroupName

The name of a parameter group for this cluster.

SecurityGroupIds

A list of user-specified security group IDs to be assigned to each node in the DAX cluster. If this parameter is not specified, DAX assigns the default VPC security group to each node.


Modifies the parameters of a parameter group

Description

Modifies the parameters of a parameter group. You can modify up to 20 parameters in a single request by submitting a list parameter name and value pairs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_update_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_update_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName, ParameterNameValues)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group.

ParameterNameValues

[required] An array of name-value pairs for the parameters in the group. Each element in the array represents a single parameter.

record-ttl-millis and query-ttl-millis are the only supported parameter names. For more details, see Configuring TTL Settings.


Modifies an existing subnet group

Description

Modifies an existing subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dax_update_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

dax_update_subnet_group(SubnetGroupName, Description = NULL, SubnetIds = NULL)

Arguments

SubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the subnet group.

Description

A description of the subnet group.

SubnetIds

A list of subnet IDs in the subnet group.


Amazon DocumentDB with MongoDB compatibility

Description

Amazon DocumentDB is a fast, reliable, and fully managed database service. Amazon DocumentDB makes it easy to set up, operate, and scale MongoDB-compatible databases in the cloud. With Amazon DocumentDB, you can run the same application code and use the same drivers and tools that you use with MongoDB.

Usage

docdb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- docdb(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

add_source_identifier_to_subscription Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription
add_tags_to_resource Adds metadata tags to an Amazon DocumentDB resource
apply_pending_maintenance_action Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to an Amazon DocumentDB instance)
copy_db_cluster_parameter_group Copies the specified cluster parameter group
copy_db_cluster_snapshot Copies a snapshot of a cluster
create_db_cluster Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB cluster
create_db_cluster_parameter_group Creates a new cluster parameter group
create_db_cluster_snapshot Creates a snapshot of a cluster
create_db_instance Creates a new instance
create_db_subnet_group Creates a new subnet group
create_event_subscription Creates an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription
create_global_cluster Creates an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster that can span multiple multiple Amazon Web Services Regions
delete_db_cluster Deletes a previously provisioned cluster
delete_db_cluster_parameter_group Deletes a specified cluster parameter group
delete_db_cluster_snapshot Deletes a cluster snapshot
delete_db_instance Deletes a previously provisioned instance
delete_db_subnet_group Deletes a subnet group
delete_event_subscription Deletes an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription
delete_global_cluster Deletes a global cluster
describe_certificates Returns a list of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon DocumentDB for this Amazon Web Services account
describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions
describe_db_cluster_parameters Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cluster parameter group
describe_db_clusters Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB clusters
describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes Returns a list of cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot
describe_db_cluster_snapshots Returns information about cluster snapshots
describe_db_engine_versions Returns a list of the available engines
describe_db_instances Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB instances
describe_db_subnet_groups Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions
describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine
describe_event_categories Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type
describe_events Returns events related to instances, security groups, snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days
describe_event_subscriptions Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account
describe_global_clusters Returns information about Amazon DocumentDB global clusters
describe_orderable_db_instance_options Returns a list of orderable instance options for the specified engine
describe_pending_maintenance_actions Returns a list of resources (for example, instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action
failover_db_cluster Forces a failover for a cluster
failover_global_cluster Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global cluster when failing over a global cluster occurs
list_tags_for_resource Lists all tags on an Amazon DocumentDB resource
modify_db_cluster Modifies a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB cluster
modify_db_cluster_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group
modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual cluster snapshot
modify_db_instance Modifies settings for an instance
modify_db_subnet_group Modifies an existing subnet group
modify_event_subscription Modifies an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription
modify_global_cluster Modify a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster
reboot_db_instance You might need to reboot your instance, usually for maintenance reasons
remove_from_global_cluster Detaches an Amazon DocumentDB secondary cluster from a global cluster
remove_source_identifier_from_subscription Removes a source identifier from an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription
remove_tags_from_resource Removes metadata tags from an Amazon DocumentDB resource
reset_db_cluster_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group to the default value
restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot Creates a new cluster from a snapshot or cluster snapshot
restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time Restores a cluster to an arbitrary point in time
start_db_cluster Restarts the stopped cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier
stop_db_cluster Stops the running cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier
switchover_global_cluster Switches over the specified secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster to be the new primary Amazon DocumentDB cluster in the global database cluster

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- docdb()
svc$add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription

Description

Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_add_source_identifier_to_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_add_source_identifier_to_subscription(SubscriptionName, SourceIdentifier)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription that you want to add a source identifier to.

SourceIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the event source to be added:

  • If the source type is an instance, a DBInstanceIdentifier must be provided.

  • If the source type is a security group, a DBSecurityGroupName must be provided.

  • If the source type is a parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName must be provided.

  • If the source type is a snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier must be provided.


Adds metadata tags to an Amazon DocumentDB resource

Description

Adds metadata tags to an Amazon DocumentDB resource. You can use these tags with cost allocation reporting to track costs that are associated with Amazon DocumentDB resources or in a Condition statement in an Identity and Access Management (IAM) policy for Amazon DocumentDB.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceName, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon DocumentDB resource that the tags are added to. This value is an Amazon Resource Name .

Tags

[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon DocumentDB resource.


Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to an Amazon DocumentDB instance)

Description

Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to an Amazon DocumentDB instance).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_apply_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_apply_pending_maintenance_action(
  ResourceIdentifier,
  ApplyAction,
  OptInType
)

Arguments

ResourceIdentifier

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that the pending maintenance action applies to.

ApplyAction

[required] The pending maintenance action to apply to this resource.

Valid values: system-update, db-upgrade

OptInType

[required] A value that specifies the type of opt-in request or undoes an opt-in request. An opt-in request of type immediate can't be undone.

Valid values:

  • immediate - Apply the maintenance action immediately.

  • next-maintenance - Apply the maintenance action during the next maintenance window for the resource.

  • ⁠undo-opt-in⁠ - Cancel any existing next-maintenance opt-in requests.


Copies the specified cluster parameter group

Description

Copies the specified cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the source cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid cluster parameter group.

  • If the source cluster parameter group is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the copy, specify a valid parameter group identifier; for example, my-db-cluster-param-group, or a valid ARN.

  • If the source parameter group is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than the copy, specify a valid cluster parameter group ARN; for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:sample-cluster:sample-parameter-group.

TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the copied cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Cannot be null, empty, or blank.

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster-param-group1

TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription

[required] A description for the copied cluster parameter group.

Tags

The tags that are to be assigned to the parameter group.


Copies a snapshot of a cluster

Description

Copies a snapshot of a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_copy_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_copy_db_cluster_snapshot(
  SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL,
  CopyTags = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster snapshot to copy. This parameter is not case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid system snapshot in the available state.

  • If the source snapshot is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the copy, specify a valid snapshot identifier.

  • If the source snapshot is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than the copy, specify a valid cluster snapshot ARN.

Example: my-cluster-snapshot1

TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the new cluster snapshot to create from the source cluster snapshot. This parameter is not case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster-snapshot2

KmsKeyId

The KMS key ID for an encrypted cluster snapshot. The KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), KMS key identifier, or the KMS key alias for the KMS encryption key.

If you copy an encrypted cluster snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for KmsKeyId to encrypt the copy with a new KMS encryption key. If you don't specify a value for KmsKeyId, then the copy of the cluster snapshot is encrypted with the same KMS key as the source cluster snapshot.

If you copy an encrypted cluster snapshot that is shared from another Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for KmsKeyId.

To copy an encrypted cluster snapshot to another Amazon Web Services Region, set KmsKeyId to the KMS key ID that you want to use to encrypt the copy of the cluster snapshot in the destination Region. KMS encryption keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can't use encryption keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.

If you copy an unencrypted cluster snapshot and specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, an error is returned.

PreSignedUrl

The URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for thecopy_db_cluster_snapshot API action in the Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source cluster snapshot to copy. You must use the PreSignedUrl parameter when copying a cluster snapshot from another Amazon Web Services Region.

If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or --source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a pre-signed URL that is a valid request for the operation that can be executed in the source Amazon Web Services Region.

The presigned URL must be a valid request for the copy_db_cluster_snapshot API action that can be executed in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the cluster snapshot to be copied. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:

  • SourceRegion - The ID of the region that contains the snapshot to be copied.

  • SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier - The identifier for the the encrypted cluster snapshot to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted cluster snapshot from the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region, then your SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier looks something like the following: arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345678012:sample-cluster:sample-cluster-snapshot.

  • TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier - The identifier for the new cluster snapshot to be created. This parameter isn't case sensitive.

CopyTags

Set to true to copy all tags from the source cluster snapshot to the target cluster snapshot, and otherwise false. The default is false.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the cluster snapshot.


Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB cluster

Description

Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_create_db_cluster(
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MasterUsername = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL
)

Arguments

AvailabilityZones

A list of Amazon EC2 Availability Zones that instances in the cluster can be created in.

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1.

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 1 to 35.

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the cluster parameter group to associate with this cluster.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this cluster.

DBSubnetGroupName

A subnet group to associate with this cluster.

Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.

Example: mySubnetgroup

Engine

[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this cluster.

Valid values: docdb

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to use. The --engine-version will default to the latest major engine version. For production workloads, we recommend explicitly declaring this parameter with the intended major engine version.

Port

The port number on which the instances in the cluster accept connections.

MasterUsername

The name of the master user for the cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must be from 1 to 63 letters or numbers.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.

MasterUserPassword

The password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except forward slash (/), double quote ("), or the "at" symbol (@).

Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 100 characters.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week.

Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the cluster.

StorageEncrypted

Specifies whether the cluster is encrypted.

KmsKeyId

The KMS key identifier for an encrypted cluster.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a cluster using the same Amazon Web Services account that owns the KMS encryption key that is used to encrypt the new cluster, you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key.

If an encryption key is not specified in KmsKeyId:

  • If the StorageEncrypted parameter is true, Amazon DocumentDB uses your default encryption key.

KMS creates the default encryption key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Web Services Regions.

PreSignedUrl

Not currently supported.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

A list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. You can enable audit logs or profiler logs. For more information, see Auditing Amazon DocumentDB Events and Profiling Amazon DocumentDB Operations.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether this cluster can be deleted. If DeletionProtection is enabled, the cluster cannot be deleted unless it is modified and DeletionProtection is disabled. DeletionProtection protects clusters from being accidentally deleted.

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier of the new global cluster.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB cluster.

For information on storage types for Amazon DocumentDB clusters, see Cluster storage configurations in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide.

Valid values for storage type - standard | iopt1

Default value is standard

When you create a DocumentDB DB cluster with the storage type set to iopt1, the storage type is returned in the response. The storage type isn't returned when you set it to standard.

ManageMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

Constraint: You can't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if MasterUserPassword is specified.

MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by Amazon DocumentDB in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

If you don't specify MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId, then the aws/secretsmanager KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can't use the aws/secretsmanager KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.


Creates a new cluster parameter group

Description

Creates a new cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_create_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must not match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

This value is stored as a lowercase string.

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The cluster parameter group family name.

Description

[required] The description for the cluster parameter group.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the cluster parameter group.


Creates a snapshot of a cluster

Description

Creates a snapshot of a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_create_db_cluster_snapshot(
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster snapshot. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster-snapshot1

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to create a snapshot for. This parameter is not case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

Example: my-cluster

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the cluster snapshot.


Creates a new instance

Description

Creates a new instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_create_db_instance(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  DBInstanceClass,
  Engine,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  PromotionTier = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: mydbinstance

DBInstanceClass

[required] The compute and memory capacity of the instance; for example, db.r5.large.

Engine

[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this instance.

Valid value: docdb

AvailabilityZone

The Amazon EC2 Availability Zone that the instance is created in.

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Web Services Region.

Example: ⁠us-east-1d⁠

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week.

Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

This parameter does not apply to Amazon DocumentDB. Amazon DocumentDB does not perform minor version upgrades regardless of the value set.

Default: false

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the instance. You can assign up to 10 tags to an instance.

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster that the instance will belong to.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

A value that indicates whether to copy tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.

PromotionTier

A value that specifies the order in which an Amazon DocumentDB replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance.

Default: 1

Valid values: 0-15

EnablePerformanceInsights

A value that indicates whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB Instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights.

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon DocumentDB uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services region.

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate.

For more information, see Updating Your Amazon DocumentDB TLS Certificates and Encrypting Data in Transit in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide.


Creates a new subnet group

Description

Creates a new subnet group. subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two Availability Zones in the Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_create_db_subnet_group(
  DBSubnetGroupName,
  DBSubnetGroupDescription,
  SubnetIds,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name for the subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 letters, numbers, periods, underscores, spaces, or hyphens. Must not be default.

Example: mySubnetgroup

DBSubnetGroupDescription

[required] The description for the subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the subnet group.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the subnet group.


Creates an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription

Description

Creates an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription. This action requires a topic Amazon Resource Name (ARN) created by using the Amazon DocumentDB console, the Amazon SNS console, or the Amazon SNS API. To obtain an ARN with Amazon SNS, you must create a topic in Amazon SNS and subscribe to the topic. The ARN is displayed in the Amazon SNS console.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_create_event_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SnsTopicArn,
  SourceType = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  SourceIds = NULL,
  Enabled = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the subscription.

Constraints: The name must be fewer than 255 characters.

SnsTopicArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. Amazon SNS creates the ARN when you create a topic and subscribe to it.

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by an instance, you would set this parameter to db-instance. If this value is not specified, all events are returned.

Valid values: db-instance, db-cluster, db-parameter-group, db-security-group, db-cluster-snapshot

EventCategories

A list of event categories for a SourceType that you want to subscribe to.

SourceIds

The list of identifiers of the event sources for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Constraints:

  • If SourceIds are provided, SourceType must also be provided.

  • If the source type is an instance, a DBInstanceIdentifier must be provided.

  • If the source type is a security group, a DBSecurityGroupName must be provided.

  • If the source type is a parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName must be provided.

  • If the source type is a snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier must be provided.

Enabled

A Boolean value; set to true to activate the subscription, set to false to create the subscription but not active it.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the event subscription.


Creates an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster that can span multiple multiple Amazon Web Services Regions

Description

Creates an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster that can span multiple multiple Amazon Web Services Regions. The global cluster contains one primary cluster with read-write capability, and up-to give read-only secondary clusters. Global clusters uses storage-based fast replication across regions with latencies less than one second, using dedicated infrastructure with no impact to your workload’s performance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_create_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_create_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the new global cluster.

SourceDBClusterIdentifier

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to use as the primary cluster of the global cluster. This parameter is optional.

Engine

The name of the database engine to be used for this cluster.

EngineVersion

The engine version of the global cluster.

DeletionProtection

The deletion protection setting for the new global cluster. The global cluster can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.

DatabaseName

The name for your database of up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. If you do not provide a name, Amazon DocumentDB will not create a database in the global cluster you are creating.

StorageEncrypted

The storage encryption setting for the new global cluster.


Deletes a previously provisioned cluster

Description

Deletes a previously provisioned cluster. When you delete a cluster, all automated backups for that cluster are deleted and can't be recovered. Manual DB cluster snapshots of the specified cluster are not deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_delete_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
  FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier for the cluster to be deleted. This parameter isn't case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.

SkipFinalSnapshot

Determines whether a final cluster snapshot is created before the cluster is deleted. If true is specified, no cluster snapshot is created. If false is specified, a cluster snapshot is created before the DB cluster is deleted.

If SkipFinalSnapshot is false, you must specify a FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter.

Default: false

FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier

The cluster snapshot identifier of the new cluster snapshot created when SkipFinalSnapshot is set to false.

Specifying this parameter and also setting the SkipFinalShapshot parameter to true results in an error.

Constraints:

  • Must be from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.


Deletes a specified cluster parameter group

Description

Deletes a specified cluster parameter group. The cluster parameter group to be deleted can't be associated with any clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(DBClusterParameterGroupName)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must be the name of an existing cluster parameter group.

  • You can't delete a default cluster parameter group.

  • Cannot be associated with any clusters.


Deletes a cluster snapshot

Description

Deletes a cluster snapshot. If the snapshot is being copied, the copy operation is terminated.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_delete_db_cluster_snapshot(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster snapshot to delete.

Constraints: Must be the name of an existing cluster snapshot in the available state.


Deletes a previously provisioned instance

Description

Deletes a previously provisioned instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_delete_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The instance identifier for the instance to be deleted. This parameter isn't case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the name of an existing instance.


Deletes a subnet group

Description

Deletes a subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_delete_db_subnet_group(DBSubnetGroupName)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the database subnet group to delete.

You can't delete the default subnet group.

Constraints:

Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.

Example: mySubnetgroup


Deletes an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription

Description

Deletes an Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_delete_event_subscription(SubscriptionName)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription that you want to delete.


Deletes a global cluster

Description

Deletes a global cluster. The primary and secondary clusters must already be detached or deleted before attempting to delete a global cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_delete_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_delete_global_cluster(GlobalClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the global cluster being deleted.


Returns a list of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon DocumentDB for this Amazon Web Services account

Description

Returns a list of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon DocumentDB for this Amazon Web Services account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_certificates/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_certificates(
  CertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

CertificateIdentifier

The user-supplied certificate identifier. If this parameter is specified, information for only the specified certificate is returned. If this parameter is omitted, a list of up to MaxRecords certificates is returned. This parameter is not case sensitive.

Constraints

  • Must match an existing CertificateIdentifier.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints:

  • Minimum: 20

  • Maximum: 100

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_certificates request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions. If a DBClusterParameterGroupName parameter is specified, the list contains only the description of the specified cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of a specific cluster parameter group to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If provided, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cluster parameter group

Description

Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_db_cluster_parameters(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  Source = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of a specific cluster parameter group to return parameter details for.

Constraints:

  • If provided, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

Source

A value that indicates to return only parameters for a specific source. Parameter sources can be engine, service, or customer.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot

Description

Returns a list of cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the cluster snapshot to describe the attributes for.


Returns information about cluster snapshots

Description

Returns information about cluster snapshots. This API operation supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_db_cluster_snapshots(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotType = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  IncludeShared = NULL,
  IncludePublic = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

The ID of the cluster to retrieve the list of cluster snapshots for. This parameter can't be used with the DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier parameter. This parameter is not case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If provided, must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

A specific cluster snapshot identifier to describe. This parameter can't be used with the DBClusterIdentifier parameter. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • If provided, must match the identifier of an existing DBClusterSnapshot.

  • If this identifier is for an automated snapshot, the SnapshotType parameter must also be specified.

SnapshotType

The type of cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:

  • automated - Return all cluster snapshots that Amazon DocumentDB has automatically created for your Amazon Web Services account.

  • manual - Return all cluster snapshots that you have manually created for your Amazon Web Services account.

  • shared - Return all manual cluster snapshots that have been shared to your Amazon Web Services account.

  • public - Return all cluster snapshots that have been marked as public.

If you don't specify a SnapshotType value, then both automated and manual cluster snapshots are returned. You can include shared cluster snapshots with these results by setting the IncludeShared parameter to true. You can include public cluster snapshots with these results by setting theIncludePublic parameter to true.

The IncludeShared and IncludePublic parameters don't apply for SnapshotType values of manual or automated. The IncludePublic parameter doesn't apply when SnapshotType is set to shared. The IncludeShared parameter doesn't apply when SnapshotType is set to public.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

IncludeShared

Set to true to include shared manual cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore, and otherwise false. The default is false.

IncludePublic

Set to true to include manual cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account, and otherwise false. The default is false.


Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB clusters

Description

Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB clusters. This API operation supports pagination. For certain management features such as cluster and instance lifecycle management, Amazon DocumentDB leverages operational technology that is shared with Amazon RDS and Amazon Neptune. Use the ⁠filterName=engine,Values=docdb⁠ filter parameter to return only Amazon DocumentDB clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_db_clusters(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

The user-provided cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If provided, must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more clusters to describe.

Supported filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts cluster identifiers and cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the clusters identified by these ARNs.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of the available engines

Description

Returns a list of the available engines.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_engine_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_db_engine_versions(
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  DefaultOnly = NULL,
  ListSupportedCharacterSets = NULL,
  ListSupportedTimezones = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

The database engine to return.

EngineVersion

The database engine version to return.

Example: ⁠3.6.0⁠

DBParameterGroupFamily

The name of a specific parameter group family to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If provided, must match an existing DBParameterGroupFamily.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

DefaultOnly

Indicates that only the default version of the specified engine or engine and major version combination is returned.

ListSupportedCharacterSets

If this parameter is specified and the requested engine supports the CharacterSetName parameter for create_db_instance, the response includes a list of supported character sets for each engine version.

ListSupportedTimezones

If this parameter is specified and the requested engine supports the TimeZone parameter for create_db_instance, the response includes a list of supported time zones for each engine version.


Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB instances

Description

Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB instances. This API supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_instances/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_db_instances(
  DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

The user-provided instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific instance is returned. This parameter isn't case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If provided, must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more instances to describe.

Supported filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts cluster identifiers and cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only the information about the instances that are associated with the clusters that are identified by these ARNs.

  • db-instance-id - Accepts instance identifiers and instance ARNs. The results list includes only the information about the instances that are identified by these ARNs.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions. If a DBSubnetGroupName is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions of the specified DBSubnetGroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_db_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_db_subnet_groups(
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

The name of the subnet group to return details for.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine

Description

Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The name of the cluster parameter group family to return the engine parameter information for.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type

Description

Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_event_categories/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_event_categories(SourceType = NULL, Filters = NULL)

Arguments

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events.

Valid values: db-instance, db-parameter-group, db-security-group

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.


Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account

Description

Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account. The description for a subscription includes SubscriptionName, SNSTopicARN, CustomerID, SourceType, SourceID, CreationTime, and Status.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_event_subscriptions(
  SubscriptionName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription that you want to describe.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns events related to instances, security groups, snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days

Description

Returns events related to instances, security groups, snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days. You can obtain events specific to a particular DB instance, security group, snapshot, or parameter group by providing the name as a parameter. By default, the events of the past hour are returned.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_events/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_events(
  SourceIdentifier = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceIdentifier

The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response.

Constraints:

  • If SourceIdentifier is provided, SourceType must also be provided.

  • If the source type is DBInstance, a DBInstanceIdentifier must be provided.

  • If the source type is DBSecurityGroup, a DBSecurityGroupName must be provided.

  • If the source type is DBParameterGroup, a DBParameterGroupName must be provided.

  • If the source type is DBSnapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier must be provided.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

SourceType

The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.

StartTime

The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format.

Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z

EndTime

The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format.

Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z

Duration

The number of minutes to retrieve events for.

Default: 60

EventCategories

A list of event categories that trigger notifications for an event notification subscription.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about Amazon DocumentDB global clusters

Description

Returns information about Amazon DocumentDB global clusters. This API supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_global_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_global_clusters(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The user-supplied cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more global DB clusters to describe.

Supported filters: db-cluster-id accepts cluster identifiers and cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list will only include information about the clusters identified by these ARNs.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_global_clusters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of orderable instance options for the specified engine

Description

Returns a list of orderable instance options for the specified engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_orderable_db_instance_options/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  Vpc = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

[required] The name of the engine to retrieve instance options for.

EngineVersion

The engine version filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that match the specified engine version.

DBInstanceClass

The instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that match the specified instance class.

LicenseModel

The license model filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that match the specified license model.

Vpc

The virtual private cloud (VPC) filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available VPC or non-VPC offerings.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of resources (for example, instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action

Description

Returns a list of resources (for example, instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_describe_pending_maintenance_actions/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
  ResourceIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceIdentifier

The ARN of a resource to return pending maintenance actions for.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more resources to return pending maintenance actions for.

Supported filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts cluster identifiers and cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only pending maintenance actions for the clusters identified by these ARNs.

  • db-instance-id - Accepts instance identifiers and instance ARNs. The results list includes only pending maintenance actions for the DB instances identified by these ARNs.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.


Forces a failover for a cluster

Description

Forces a failover for a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_failover_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_failover_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  TargetDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

A cluster identifier to force a failover for. This parameter is not case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

TargetDBInstanceIdentifier

The name of the instance to promote to the primary instance.

You must specify the instance identifier for an Amazon DocumentDB replica in the cluster. For example, mydbcluster-replica1.


Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global cluster when failing over a global cluster occurs

Description

Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global cluster when failing over a global cluster occurs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_failover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_failover_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  TargetDbClusterIdentifier,
  AllowDataLoss = NULL,
  Switchover = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the Amazon DocumentDB global cluster to apply this operation. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the cluster is created. In other words, it's the name of the global cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing global cluster.

  • Minimum length of 1. Maximum length of 255.

Pattern: ⁠[A-Za-z][0-9A-Za-z-:._]*⁠

TargetDbClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster that you want to promote to the primary for the global cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Amazon DocumentDB can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services region.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing secondary cluster.

  • Minimum length of 1. Maximum length of 255.

Pattern: ⁠[A-Za-z][0-9A-Za-z-:._]*⁠

AllowDataLoss

Specifies whether to allow data loss for this global cluster operation. Allowing data loss triggers a global failover operation.

If you don't specify AllowDataLoss, the global cluster operation defaults to a switchover.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified together with the Switchover parameter.

Switchover

Specifies whether to switch over this global database cluster.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified together with the AllowDataLoss parameter.


Lists all tags on an Amazon DocumentDB resource

Description

Lists all tags on an Amazon DocumentDB resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceName, Filters = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon DocumentDB resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.


Modifies a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB cluster

Description

Modifies a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB cluster. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_modify_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  NewDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  RotateMasterUserPassword = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier for the cluster that is being modified. This parameter is not case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

NewDBClusterIdentifier

The new cluster identifier for the cluster when renaming a cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster2

ApplyImmediately

A value that specifies whether the changes in this request and any pending changes are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the cluster. If this parameter is set to false, changes to the cluster are applied during the next maintenance window.

The ApplyImmediately parameter affects only the NewDBClusterIdentifier and MasterUserPassword values. If you set this parameter value to false, the changes to the NewDBClusterIdentifier and MasterUserPassword values are applied during the next maintenance window. All other changes are applied immediately, regardless of the value of the ApplyImmediately parameter.

Default: false

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1.

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 1 to 35.

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the cluster parameter group to use for the cluster.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of virtual private cloud (VPC) security groups that the cluster will belong to.

Port

The port number on which the cluster accepts connections.

Constraints: Must be a value from 1150 to 65535.

Default: The same port as the original cluster.

MasterUserPassword

The password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except forward slash (/), double quote ("), or the "at" symbol (@).

Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 100 characters.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week.

Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration

The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to Amazon CloudWatch Logs for a specific instance or cluster. The EnableLogTypes and DisableLogTypes arrays determine which logs are exported (or not exported) to CloudWatch Logs.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade. Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless ApplyImmediately is enabled.

To list all of the available engine versions for Amazon DocumentDB use the following command:

⁠aws docdb describe-db-engine-versions --engine docdb --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

AllowMajorVersionUpgrade

A value that indicates whether major version upgrades are allowed.

Constraints: You must allow major version upgrades when specifying a value for the EngineVersion parameter that is a different major version than the DB cluster's current version.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether this cluster can be deleted. If DeletionProtection is enabled, the cluster cannot be deleted unless it is modified and DeletionProtection is disabled. DeletionProtection protects clusters from being accidentally deleted.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB cluster.

For information on storage types for Amazon DocumentDB clusters, see Cluster storage configurations in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide.

Valid values for storage type - standard | iopt1

Default value is standard

ManageMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. If the cluster doesn't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this management. In this case, you can't specify MasterUserPassword. If the cluster already manages the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, and you specify that the master user password is not managed with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, then you must specify MasterUserPassword. In this case, Amazon DocumentDB deletes the secret and uses the new password for the master user specified by MasterUserPassword.

MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:

  • The cluster doesn't manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. If the cluster already manages the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can't change the KMS key that is used to encrypt the secret.

  • You are enabling ManageMasterUserPassword to manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager. If you are turning on ManageMasterUserPassword and don't specify MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId, then the aws/secretsmanager KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can't use the aws/secretsmanager KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

RotateMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password.

This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by Amazon DocumentDB in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the cluster. The secret value contains the updated password.

Constraint: You must apply the change immediately when rotating the master user password.


Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group

Description

Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName, ParameterValue, and ApplyMethod. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  Parameters
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cluster parameter group to modify.

Parameters

[required] A list of parameters in the cluster parameter group to modify.


Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual cluster snapshot

Description

Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  AttributeName,
  ValuesToAdd = NULL,
  ValuesToRemove = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the cluster snapshot to modify the attributes for.

AttributeName

[required] The name of the cluster snapshot attribute to modify.

To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual cluster snapshot, set this value to restore.

ValuesToAdd

A list of cluster snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by AttributeName.

To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account IDs. To make the manual cluster snapshot restorable by any Amazon Web Services account, set it to all. Do not add the all value for any manual cluster snapshots that contain private information that you don't want to be available to all Amazon Web Services accounts.

ValuesToRemove

A list of cluster snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified by AttributeName.

To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account identifiers. To remove authorization for any Amazon Web Services account to copy or restore the cluster snapshot, set it to all . If you specify all, an Amazon Web Services account whose account ID is explicitly added to the restore attribute can still copy or restore a manual cluster snapshot.


Modifies settings for an instance

Description

Modifies settings for an instance. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_modify_db_instance(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  NewDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  PromotionTier = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  CertificateRotationRestart = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

DBInstanceClass

The new compute and memory capacity of the instance; for example, db.r5.large. Not all instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions.

If you modify the instance class, an outage occurs during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless ApplyImmediately is specified as true for this request.

Default: Uses existing setting.

ApplyImmediately

Specifies whether the modifications in this request and any pending modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the instance.

If this parameter is set to false, changes to the instance are applied during the next maintenance window. Some parameter changes can cause an outage and are applied on the next reboot.

Default: false

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range (in UTC) during which system maintenance can occur, which might result in an outage. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage except in the following situation, and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. If there are pending actions that cause a reboot, and the maintenance window is changed to include the current time, changing this parameter causes a reboot of the instance. If you are moving this window to the current time, there must be at least 30 minutes between the current time and end of the window to ensure that pending changes are applied.

Default: Uses existing setting.

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun

Constraints: Must be at least 30 minutes.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

This parameter does not apply to Amazon DocumentDB. Amazon DocumentDB does not perform minor version upgrades regardless of the value set.

NewDBInstanceIdentifier

The new instance identifier for the instance when renaming an instance. When you change the instance identifier, an instance reboot occurs immediately if you set ⁠Apply Immediately⁠ to true. It occurs during the next maintenance window if you set ⁠Apply Immediately⁠ to false. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: mydbinstance

CACertificateIdentifier

Indicates the certificate that needs to be associated with the instance.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

A value that indicates whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.

PromotionTier

A value that specifies the order in which an Amazon DocumentDB replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance.

Default: 1

Valid values: 0-15

EnablePerformanceInsights

A value that indicates whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB Instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights.

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon DocumentDB uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services region.

CertificateRotationRestart

Specifies whether the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate.

By default, the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate. The certificate is not updated until the DB instance is restarted.

Set this parameter only if you are not using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance.

If you are using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance, see Updating Your Amazon DocumentDB TLS Certificates and Encrypting Data in Transit in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide.


Modifies an existing subnet group

Description

Modifies an existing subnet group. subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two Availability Zones in the Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_modify_db_subnet_group(
  DBSubnetGroupName,
  DBSubnetGroupDescription = NULL,
  SubnetIds
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name for the subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. You can't modify the default subnet group.

Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.

Example: mySubnetgroup

DBSubnetGroupDescription

The description for the subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the subnet group.


Modifies an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription

Description

Modifies an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_modify_event_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SnsTopicArn = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  Enabled = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription.

SnsTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it.

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by an instance, set this parameter to db-instance. If this value is not specified, all events are returned.

Valid values: db-instance, db-parameter-group, db-security-group

EventCategories

A list of event categories for a SourceType that you want to subscribe to.

Enabled

A Boolean value; set to true to activate the subscription.


Modify a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster

Description

Modify a setting for an Amazon DocumentDB global cluster. You can change one or more configuration parameters (for example: deletion protection), or the global cluster identifier by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_modify_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_modify_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  NewGlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the global cluster being modified. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing global cluster.

NewGlobalClusterIdentifier

The new identifier for a global cluster when you modify a global cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens

    The first character must be a letter

    Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-cluster2

DeletionProtection

Indicates if the global cluster has deletion protection enabled. The global cluster can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.


You might need to reboot your instance, usually for maintenance reasons

Description

You might need to reboot your instance, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain changes, or if you change the cluster parameter group that is associated with the instance, you must reboot the instance for the changes to take effect.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_reboot_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_reboot_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, ForceFailover = NULL)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

ForceFailover

When true, the reboot is conducted through a Multi-AZ failover.

Constraint: You can't specify true if the instance is not configured for Multi-AZ.


Detaches an Amazon DocumentDB secondary cluster from a global cluster

Description

Detaches an Amazon DocumentDB secondary cluster from a global cluster. The cluster becomes a standalone cluster with read-write capability instead of being read-only and receiving data from a primary in a different region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_remove_from_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_remove_from_global_cluster(GlobalClusterIdentifier, DbClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier to detach from the Amazon DocumentDB global cluster.

DbClusterIdentifier

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifying the cluster that was detached from the Amazon DocumentDB global cluster.


Removes a source identifier from an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription

Description

Removes a source identifier from an existing Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SourceIdentifier
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB event notification subscription that you want to remove a source identifier from.

SourceIdentifier

[required] The source identifier to be removed from the subscription, such as the instance identifier for an instance, or the name of a security group.


Removes metadata tags from an Amazon DocumentDB resource

Description

Removes metadata tags from an Amazon DocumentDB resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon DocumentDB resource that the tags are removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

TagKeys

[required] The tag key (name) of the tag to be removed.


Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group to the default value

Description

Modifies the parameters of a cluster parameter group to the default value. To reset specific parameters, submit a list of the following: ParameterName and ApplyMethod. To reset the entire cluster parameter group, specify the DBClusterParameterGroupName and ResetAllParameters parameters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  ResetAllParameters = NULL,
  Parameters = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cluster parameter group to reset.

ResetAllParameters

A value that is set to true to reset all parameters in the cluster parameter group to their default values, and false otherwise. You can't use this parameter if there is a list of parameter names specified for the Parameters parameter.

Parameters

A list of parameter names in the cluster parameter group to reset to the default values. You can't use this parameter if the ResetAllParameters parameter is set to true.


Creates a new cluster from a snapshot or cluster snapshot

Description

Creates a new cluster from a snapshot or cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot(
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  SnapshotIdentifier,
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL
)

Arguments

AvailabilityZones

Provides the list of Amazon EC2 Availability Zones that instances in the restored DB cluster can be created in.

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the cluster to create from the snapshot or cluster snapshot. This parameter isn't case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-snapshot-id

SnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the snapshot or cluster snapshot to restore from.

You can use either the name or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify a cluster snapshot. However, you can use only the ARN to specify a snapshot.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing snapshot.

Engine

[required] The database engine to use for the new cluster.

Default: The same as source.

Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source.

EngineVersion

The version of the database engine to use for the new cluster.

Port

The port number on which the new cluster accepts connections.

Constraints: Must be a value from 1150 to 65535.

Default: The same port as the original cluster.

DBSubnetGroupName

The name of the subnet group to use for the new cluster.

Constraints: If provided, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.

Example: mySubnetgroup

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of virtual private cloud (VPC) security groups that the new cluster will belong to.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the restored cluster.

KmsKeyId

The KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted cluster from a DB snapshot or cluster snapshot.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are restoring a cluster with the same Amazon Web Services account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key.

If you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then the following occurs:

  • If the snapshot or cluster snapshot in SnapshotIdentifier is encrypted, then the restored cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the snapshot or the cluster snapshot.

  • If the snapshot or the cluster snapshot in SnapshotIdentifier is not encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is not encrypted.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

A list of log types that must be enabled for exporting to Amazon CloudWatch Logs.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether this cluster can be deleted. If DeletionProtection is enabled, the cluster cannot be deleted unless it is modified and DeletionProtection is disabled. DeletionProtection protects clusters from being accidentally deleted.

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster.

Type: String.       Required: No.

If this argument is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group is used. If supplied, must match the name of an existing default DB cluster parameter group. The string must consist of from 1 to 255 letters, numbers or hyphens. Its first character must be a letter, and it cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB cluster.

For information on storage types for Amazon DocumentDB clusters, see Cluster storage configurations in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide.

Valid values for storage type - standard | iopt1

Default value is standard


Restores a cluster to an arbitrary point in time

Description

Restores a cluster to an arbitrary point in time. Users can restore to any point in time before LatestRestorableTime for up to BackupRetentionPeriod days. The target cluster is created from the source cluster with the same configuration as the original cluster, except that the new cluster is created with the default security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  RestoreType = NULL,
  SourceDBClusterIdentifier,
  RestoreToTime = NULL,
  UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the new cluster to be created.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

RestoreType

The type of restore to be performed. You can specify one of the following values:

  • full-copy - The new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.

  • copy-on-write - The new DB cluster is restored as a clone of the source DB cluster.

Constraints: You can't specify copy-on-write if the engine version of the source DB cluster is earlier than 1.11.

If you don't specify a RestoreType value, then the new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.

SourceDBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the source cluster from which to restore.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

RestoreToTime

The date and time to restore the cluster to.

Valid values: A time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format.

Constraints:

  • Must be before the latest restorable time for the instance.

  • Must be specified if the UseLatestRestorableTime parameter is not provided.

  • Cannot be specified if the UseLatestRestorableTime parameter is true.

  • Cannot be specified if the RestoreType parameter is copy-on-write.

Example: ⁠2015-03-07T23:45:00Z⁠

UseLatestRestorableTime

A value that is set to true to restore the cluster to the latest restorable backup time, and false otherwise.

Default: false

Constraints: Cannot be specified if the RestoreToTime parameter is provided.

Port

The port number on which the new cluster accepts connections.

Constraints: Must be a value from 1150 to 65535.

Default: The default port for the engine.

DBSubnetGroupName

The subnet group name to use for the new cluster.

Constraints: If provided, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.

Example: mySubnetgroup

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of VPC security groups that the new cluster belongs to.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the restored cluster.

KmsKeyId

The KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted cluster from an encrypted cluster.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are restoring a cluster with the same Amazon Web Services account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key.

You can restore to a new cluster and encrypt the new cluster with an KMS key that is different from the KMS key used to encrypt the source cluster. The new DB cluster is encrypted with the KMS key identified by the KmsKeyId parameter.

If you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then the following occurs:

  • If the cluster is encrypted, then the restored cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the source cluster.

  • If the cluster is not encrypted, then the restored cluster is not encrypted.

If DBClusterIdentifier refers to a cluster that is not encrypted, then the restore request is rejected.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

A list of log types that must be enabled for exporting to Amazon CloudWatch Logs.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether this cluster can be deleted. If DeletionProtection is enabled, the cluster cannot be deleted unless it is modified and DeletionProtection is disabled. DeletionProtection protects clusters from being accidentally deleted.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB cluster.

For information on storage types for Amazon DocumentDB clusters, see Cluster storage configurations in the Amazon DocumentDB Developer Guide.

Valid values for storage type - standard | iopt1

Default value is standard


Restarts the stopped cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier

Description

Restarts the stopped cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier. For more information, see Stopping and Starting an Amazon DocumentDB Cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_start_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_start_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to restart. Example: docdb-2019-05-28-15-24-52


Stops the running cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier

Description

Stops the running cluster that is specified by DBClusterIdentifier. The cluster must be in the available state. For more information, see Stopping and Starting an Amazon DocumentDB Cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_stop_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_stop_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to stop. Example: docdb-2019-05-28-15-24-52


Switches over the specified secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster to be the new primary Amazon DocumentDB cluster in the global database cluster

Description

Switches over the specified secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster to be the new primary Amazon DocumentDB cluster in the global database cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdb_switchover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdb_switchover_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  TargetDbClusterIdentifier
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the Amazon DocumentDB global database cluster to switch over. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the cluster is created. In other words, it's the name of the global cluster. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing global cluster (Amazon DocumentDB global database).

  • Minimum length of 1. Maximum length of 255.

Pattern: ⁠[A-Za-z][0-9A-Za-z-:._]*⁠

TargetDbClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the secondary Amazon DocumentDB cluster to promote to the new primary for the global database cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Amazon DocumentDB can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services region.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing secondary cluster.

  • Minimum length of 1. Maximum length of 255.

Pattern: ⁠[A-Za-z][0-9A-Za-z-:._]*⁠


Amazon DocumentDB Elastic Clusters

Description

Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters

Amazon DocumentDB elastic-clusters support workloads with millions of reads/writes per second and petabytes of storage capacity. Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters also simplify how developers interact with Amazon DocumentDB elastic-clusters by eliminating the need to choose, manage or upgrade instances.

Amazon DocumentDB elastic-clusters were created to:

Usage

docdbelastic(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- docdbelastic(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

apply_pending_maintenance_action The type of pending maintenance action to be applied to the resource
copy_cluster_snapshot Copies a snapshot of an elastic cluster
create_cluster Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB elastic cluster and returns its cluster structure
create_cluster_snapshot Creates a snapshot of an elastic cluster
delete_cluster Delete an elastic cluster
delete_cluster_snapshot Delete an elastic cluster snapshot
get_cluster Returns information about a specific elastic cluster
get_cluster_snapshot Returns information about a specific elastic cluster snapshot
get_pending_maintenance_action Retrieves all maintenance actions that are pending
list_clusters Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters
list_cluster_snapshots Returns information about snapshots for a specified elastic cluster
list_pending_maintenance_actions Retrieves a list of all maintenance actions that are pending
list_tags_for_resource Lists all tags on a elastic cluster resource
restore_cluster_from_snapshot Restores an elastic cluster from a snapshot
start_cluster Restarts the stopped elastic cluster that is specified by clusterARN
stop_cluster Stops the running elastic cluster that is specified by clusterArn
tag_resource Adds metadata tags to an elastic cluster resource
untag_resource Removes metadata tags from an elastic cluster resource
update_cluster Modifies an elastic cluster

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- docdbelastic()
svc$apply_pending_maintenance_action(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


The type of pending maintenance action to be applied to the resource

Description

The type of pending maintenance action to be applied to the resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_apply_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_apply_pending_maintenance_action(
  applyAction,
  applyOn = NULL,
  optInType,
  resourceArn
)

Arguments

applyAction

[required] The pending maintenance action to apply to the resource.

Valid actions are:

  • ENGINE_UPDATE

  • ENGINE_UPGRADE

  • SECURITY_UPDATE

  • OS_UPDATE

  • MASTER_USER_PASSWORD_UPDATE

applyOn

A specific date to apply the pending maintenance action. Required if opt-in-type is APPLY_ON. Format: ⁠yyyy/MM/dd HH:mm-yyyy/MM/dd HH:mm⁠

optInType

[required] A value that specifies the type of opt-in request, or undoes an opt-in request. An opt-in request of type IMMEDIATE can't be undone.

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon DocumentDB Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which the pending maintenance action applies.


Copies a snapshot of an elastic cluster

Description

Copies a snapshot of an elastic cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_copy_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_copy_cluster_snapshot(
  copyTags = NULL,
  kmsKeyId = NULL,
  snapshotArn,
  tags = NULL,
  targetSnapshotName
)

Arguments

copyTags

Set to true to copy all tags from the source cluster snapshot to the target elastic cluster snapshot. The default is false.

kmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key ID for an encrypted elastic cluster snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier, or the Amazon Web Services KMS key alias for the Amazon Web Services KMS encryption key.

If you copy an encrypted elastic cluster snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for KmsKeyId to encrypt the copy with a new Amazon Web ServicesS KMS encryption key. If you don't specify a value for KmsKeyId, then the copy of the elastic cluster snapshot is encrypted with the same AWS KMS key as the source elastic cluster snapshot.

To copy an encrypted elastic cluster snapshot to another Amazon Web Services region, set KmsKeyId to the Amazon Web Services KMS key ID that you want to use to encrypt the copy of the elastic cluster snapshot in the destination region. Amazon Web Services KMS encryption keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services region that they are created in, and you can't use encryption keys from one Amazon Web Services region in another Amazon Web Services region.

If you copy an unencrypted elastic cluster snapshot and specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, an error is returned.

snapshotArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifier of the elastic cluster snapshot.

tags

The tags to be assigned to the elastic cluster snapshot.

targetSnapshotName

[required] The identifier of the new elastic cluster snapshot to create from the source cluster snapshot. This parameter is not case sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: elastic-cluster-snapshot-5


Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB elastic cluster and returns its cluster structure

Description

Creates a new Amazon DocumentDB elastic cluster and returns its cluster structure.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_create_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_create_cluster(
  adminUserName,
  adminUserPassword,
  authType,
  backupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  clientToken = NULL,
  clusterName,
  kmsKeyId = NULL,
  preferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  preferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  shardCapacity,
  shardCount,
  shardInstanceCount = NULL,
  subnetIds = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)

Arguments

adminUserName

[required] The name of the Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters administrator.

Constraints:

  • Must be from 1 to 63 letters or numbers.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot be a reserved word.

adminUserPassword

[required] The password for the Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters administrator. The password can contain any printable ASCII characters.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 8 to 100 characters.

  • Cannot contain a forward slash (/), double quote ("), or the "at" symbol (@).

authType

[required] The authentication type used to determine where to fetch the password used for accessing the elastic cluster. Valid types are PLAIN_TEXT or SECRET_ARN.

backupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automatic snapshots are retained.

clientToken

The client token for the elastic cluster.

clusterName

[required] The name of the new elastic cluster. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster

kmsKeyId

The KMS key identifier to use to encrypt the new elastic cluster.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a cluster using the same Amazon account that owns this KMS encryption key, you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN as the KMS encryption key.

If an encryption key is not specified, Amazon DocumentDB uses the default encryption key that KMS creates for your account. Your account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Region.

preferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, as determined by the backupRetentionPeriod.

preferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

Default: a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week.

Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

shardCapacity

[required] The number of vCPUs assigned to each elastic cluster shard. Maximum is 64. Allowed values are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64.

shardCount

[required] The number of shards assigned to the elastic cluster. Maximum is 32.

shardInstanceCount

The number of replica instances applying to all shards in the elastic cluster. A shardInstanceCount value of 1 means there is one writer instance, and any additional instances are replicas that can be used for reads and to improve availability.

subnetIds

The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the new elastic cluster.

tags

The tags to be assigned to the new elastic cluster.

vpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the new elastic cluster.


Creates a snapshot of an elastic cluster

Description

Creates a snapshot of an elastic cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_create_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_create_cluster_snapshot(clusterArn, snapshotName, tags = NULL)

Arguments

clusterArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster of which you want to create a snapshot.

snapshotName

[required] The name of the new elastic cluster snapshot.

tags

The tags to be assigned to the new elastic cluster snapshot.


Delete an elastic cluster

Description

Delete an elastic cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_delete_cluster(clusterArn)

Arguments

clusterArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster that is to be deleted.


Delete an elastic cluster snapshot

Description

Delete an elastic cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_delete_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_delete_cluster_snapshot(snapshotArn)

Arguments

snapshotArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster snapshot that is to be deleted.


Returns information about a specific elastic cluster

Description

Returns information about a specific elastic cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_get_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_get_cluster(clusterArn)

Arguments

clusterArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster.


Returns information about a specific elastic cluster snapshot

Description

Returns information about a specific elastic cluster snapshot

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_get_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_get_cluster_snapshot(snapshotArn)

Arguments

snapshotArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster snapshot.


Retrieves all maintenance actions that are pending

Description

Retrieves all maintenance actions that are pending.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_get_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_get_pending_maintenance_action(resourceArn)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] Retrieves pending maintenance actions for a specific Amazon Resource Name (ARN).


Returns information about snapshots for a specified elastic cluster

Description

Returns information about snapshots for a specified elastic cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_list_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_list_cluster_snapshots(
  clusterArn = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  snapshotType = NULL
)

Arguments

clusterArn

The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster.

maxResults

The maximum number of elastic cluster snapshot results to receive in the response.

nextToken

A pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond this token, up to the value specified by max-results.

If there is no more data in the responce, the nextToken will not be returned.

snapshotType

The type of cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:

  • automated - Return all cluster snapshots that Amazon DocumentDB has automatically created for your Amazon Web Services account.

  • manual - Return all cluster snapshots that you have manually created for your Amazon Web Services account.


Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters

Description

Returns information about provisioned Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_list_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_list_clusters(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of elastic cluster snapshot results to receive in the response.

nextToken

A pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond this token, up to the value specified by max-results.

If there is no more data in the responce, the nextToken will not be returned.


Retrieves a list of all maintenance actions that are pending

Description

Retrieves a list of all maintenance actions that are pending.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_list_pending_maintenance_actions/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_list_pending_maintenance_actions(
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

The maximum number of results to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified maxResults value, a pagination token (marker) is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

nextToken

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by maxResults.


Lists all tags on a elastic cluster resource

Description

Lists all tags on a elastic cluster resource

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster resource.


Restores an elastic cluster from a snapshot

Description

Restores an elastic cluster from a snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_restore_cluster_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_restore_cluster_from_snapshot(
  clusterName,
  kmsKeyId = NULL,
  shardCapacity = NULL,
  shardInstanceCount = NULL,
  snapshotArn,
  subnetIds = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)

Arguments

clusterName

[required] The name of the elastic cluster.

kmsKeyId

The KMS key identifier to use to encrypt the new Amazon DocumentDB elastic clusters cluster.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a cluster using the same Amazon account that owns this KMS encryption key, you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN as the KMS encryption key.

If an encryption key is not specified here, Amazon DocumentDB uses the default encryption key that KMS creates for your account. Your account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Region.

shardCapacity

The capacity of each shard in the new restored elastic cluster.

shardInstanceCount

The number of replica instances applying to all shards in the elastic cluster. A shardInstanceCount value of 1 means there is one writer instance, and any additional instances are replicas that can be used for reads and to improve availability.

snapshotArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster snapshot.

subnetIds

The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the elastic cluster.

tags

A list of the tag names to be assigned to the restored elastic cluster, in the form of an array of key-value pairs in which the key is the tag name and the value is the key value.

vpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the elastic cluster.


Restarts the stopped elastic cluster that is specified by clusterARN

Description

Restarts the stopped elastic cluster that is specified by clusterARN.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_start_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_start_cluster(clusterArn)

Arguments

clusterArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster.


Stops the running elastic cluster that is specified by clusterArn

Description

Stops the running elastic cluster that is specified by clusterArn. The elastic cluster must be in the available state.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_stop_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_stop_cluster(clusterArn)

Arguments

clusterArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster.


Adds metadata tags to an elastic cluster resource

Description

Adds metadata tags to an elastic cluster resource

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster resource.

tags

[required] The tags that are assigned to the elastic cluster resource.


Removes metadata tags from an elastic cluster resource

Description

Removes metadata tags from an elastic cluster resource

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster resource.

tagKeys

[required] The tag keys to be removed from the elastic cluster resource.


Modifies an elastic cluster

Description

Modifies an elastic cluster. This includes updating admin-username/password, upgrading the API version, and setting up a backup window and maintenance window

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/docdbelastic_update_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

docdbelastic_update_cluster(
  adminUserPassword = NULL,
  authType = NULL,
  backupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  clientToken = NULL,
  clusterArn,
  preferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  preferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  shardCapacity = NULL,
  shardCount = NULL,
  shardInstanceCount = NULL,
  subnetIds = NULL,
  vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)

Arguments

adminUserPassword

The password associated with the elastic cluster administrator. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except forward slash (/), double quote ("), or the "at" symbol (@).

Constraints: Must contain from 8 to 100 characters.

authType

The authentication type used to determine where to fetch the password used for accessing the elastic cluster. Valid types are PLAIN_TEXT or SECRET_ARN.

backupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automatic snapshots are retained.

clientToken

The client token for the elastic cluster.

clusterArn

[required] The ARN identifier of the elastic cluster.

preferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, as determined by the backupRetentionPeriod.

preferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

Default: a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week.

Valid days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

shardCapacity

The number of vCPUs assigned to each elastic cluster shard. Maximum is 64. Allowed values are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64.

shardCount

The number of shards assigned to the elastic cluster. Maximum is 32.

shardInstanceCount

The number of replica instances applying to all shards in the elastic cluster. A shardInstanceCount value of 1 means there is one writer instance, and any additional instances are replicas that can be used for reads and to improve availability.

subnetIds

The Amazon EC2 subnet IDs for the elastic cluster.

vpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the elastic cluster.


Amazon DynamoDB

Description

Amazon DynamoDB is a fully managed NoSQL database service that provides fast and predictable performance with seamless scalability. DynamoDB lets you offload the administrative burdens of operating and scaling a distributed database, so that you don't have to worry about hardware provisioning, setup and configuration, replication, software patching, or cluster scaling.

With DynamoDB, you can create database tables that can store and retrieve any amount of data, and serve any level of request traffic. You can scale up or scale down your tables' throughput capacity without downtime or performance degradation, and use the Amazon Web Services Management Console to monitor resource utilization and performance metrics.

DynamoDB automatically spreads the data and traffic for your tables over a sufficient number of servers to handle your throughput and storage requirements, while maintaining consistent and fast performance. All of your data is stored on solid state disks (SSDs) and automatically replicated across multiple Availability Zones in an Amazon Web Services Region, providing built-in high availability and data durability.

Usage

dynamodb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- dynamodb(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

batch_execute_statement This operation allows you to perform batch reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL
batch_get_item The BatchGetItem operation returns the attributes of one or more items from one or more tables
batch_write_item The BatchWriteItem operation puts or deletes multiple items in one or more tables
create_backup Creates a backup for an existing table
create_global_table Creates a global table from an existing table
create_table The CreateTable operation adds a new table to your account
delete_backup Deletes an existing backup of a table
delete_item Deletes a single item in a table by primary key
delete_resource_policy Deletes the resource-based policy attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream
delete_table The DeleteTable operation deletes a table and all of its items
describe_backup Describes an existing backup of a table
describe_continuous_backups Checks the status of continuous backups and point in time recovery on the specified table
describe_contributor_insights Returns information about contributor insights for a given table or global secondary index
describe_endpoints Returns the regional endpoint information
describe_export Describes an existing table export
describe_global_table Returns information about the specified global table
describe_global_table_settings Describes Region-specific settings for a global table
describe_import Represents the properties of the import
describe_kinesis_streaming_destination Returns information about the status of Kinesis streaming
describe_limits Returns the current provisioned-capacity quotas for your Amazon Web Services account in a Region, both for the Region as a whole and for any one DynamoDB table that you create there
describe_table Returns information about the table, including the current status of the table, when it was created, the primary key schema, and any indexes on the table
describe_table_replica_auto_scaling Describes auto scaling settings across replicas of the global table at once
describe_time_to_live Gives a description of the Time to Live (TTL) status on the specified table
disable_kinesis_streaming_destination Stops replication from the DynamoDB table to the Kinesis data stream
enable_kinesis_streaming_destination Starts table data replication to the specified Kinesis data stream at a timestamp chosen during the enable workflow
execute_statement This operation allows you to perform reads and singleton writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL
execute_transaction This operation allows you to perform transactional reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL
export_table_to_point_in_time Exports table data to an S3 bucket
get_item The GetItem operation returns a set of attributes for the item with the given primary key
get_resource_policy Returns the resource-based policy document attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream, in JSON format
import_table Imports table data from an S3 bucket
list_backups List DynamoDB backups that are associated with an Amazon Web Services account and weren't made with Amazon Web Services Backup
list_contributor_insights Returns a list of ContributorInsightsSummary for a table and all its global secondary indexes
list_exports Lists completed exports within the past 90 days
list_global_tables Lists all global tables that have a replica in the specified Region
list_imports Lists completed imports within the past 90 days
list_tables Returns an array of table names associated with the current account and endpoint
list_tags_of_resource List all tags on an Amazon DynamoDB resource
put_item Creates a new item, or replaces an old item with a new item
put_resource_policy Attaches a resource-based policy document to the resource, which can be a table or stream
query You must provide the name of the partition key attribute and a single value for that attribute
restore_table_from_backup Creates a new table from an existing backup
restore_table_to_point_in_time Restores the specified table to the specified point in time within EarliestRestorableDateTime and LatestRestorableDateTime
scan The Scan operation returns one or more items and item attributes by accessing every item in a table or a secondary index
tag_resource Associate a set of tags with an Amazon DynamoDB resource
transact_get_items TransactGetItems is a synchronous operation that atomically retrieves multiple items from one or more tables (but not from indexes) in a single account and Region
transact_write_items TransactWriteItems is a synchronous write operation that groups up to 100 action requests
untag_resource Removes the association of tags from an Amazon DynamoDB resource
update_continuous_backups UpdateContinuousBackups enables or disables point in time recovery for the specified table
update_contributor_insights Updates the status for contributor insights for a specific table or index
update_global_table Adds or removes replicas in the specified global table
update_global_table_settings Updates settings for a global table
update_item Edits an existing item's attributes, or adds a new item to the table if it does not already exist
update_kinesis_streaming_destination The command to update the Kinesis stream destination
update_table Modifies the provisioned throughput settings, global secondary indexes, or DynamoDB Streams settings for a given table
update_table_replica_auto_scaling Updates auto scaling settings on your global tables at once
update_time_to_live The UpdateTimeToLive method enables or disables Time to Live (TTL) for the specified table

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- dynamodb()
# This example reads multiple items from the Music table using a batch of
# three GetItem requests.  Only the AlbumTitle attribute is returned.
svc$batch_get_item(
  RequestItems = list(
    Music = list(
      Keys = list(
        list(
          Artist = list(
            S = "No One You Know"
          ),
          SongTitle = list(
            S = "Call Me Today"
          )
        ),
        list(
          Artist = list(
            S = "Acme Band"
          ),
          SongTitle = list(
            S = "Happy Day"
          )
        ),
        list(
          Artist = list(
            S = "No One You Know"
          ),
          SongTitle = list(
            S = "Scared of My Shadow"
          )
        )
      ),
      ProjectionExpression = "AlbumTitle"
    )
  )
)

## End(Not run)


This operation allows you to perform batch reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL

Description

This operation allows you to perform batch reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL. Each read statement in a batch_execute_statement must specify an equality condition on all key attributes. This enforces that each SELECT statement in a batch returns at most a single item. For more information, see Running batch operations with PartiQL for DynamoDB .

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_batch_execute_statement/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_batch_execute_statement(Statements, ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL)

Arguments

Statements

[required] The list of PartiQL statements representing the batch to run.

ReturnConsumedCapacity

The BatchGetItem operation returns the attributes of one or more items from one or more tables

Description

The batch_get_item operation returns the attributes of one or more items from one or more tables. You identify requested items by primary key.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_batch_get_item/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_batch_get_item(RequestItems, ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL)

Arguments

RequestItems

[required] A map of one or more table names or table ARNs and, for each table, a map that describes one or more items to retrieve from that table. Each table name or ARN can be used only once per batch_get_item request.

Each element in the map of items to retrieve consists of the following:

  • ConsistentRead - If true, a strongly consistent read is used; if false (the default), an eventually consistent read is used.

  • ExpressionAttributeNames - One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in the ProjectionExpression parameter. The following are some use cases for using ExpressionAttributeNames:

    • To access an attribute whose name conflicts with a DynamoDB reserved word.

    • To create a placeholder for repeating occurrences of an attribute name in an expression.

    • To prevent special characters in an attribute name from being misinterpreted in an expression.

    Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:

    • Percentile

    The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you could specify the following for ExpressionAttributeNames:

    • {"#P":"Percentile"}

    You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:

    • ⁠#P = :val⁠

    Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime.

    For more information about expression attribute names, see Accessing Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

  • Keys - An array of primary key attribute values that define specific items in the table. For each primary key, you must provide all of the key attributes. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide the partition key value. For a composite key, you must provide both the partition key value and the sort key value.

  • ProjectionExpression - A string that identifies one or more attributes to retrieve from the table. These attributes can include scalars, sets, or elements of a JSON document. The attributes in the expression must be separated by commas.

    If no attribute names are specified, then all attributes are returned. If any of the requested attributes are not found, they do not appear in the result.

    For more information, see Accessing Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

  • AttributesToGet - This is a legacy parameter. Use ProjectionExpression instead. For more information, see AttributesToGet in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ReturnConsumedCapacity

The BatchWriteItem operation puts or deletes multiple items in one or more tables

Description

The batch_write_item operation puts or deletes multiple items in one or more tables. A single call to batch_write_item can transmit up to 16MB of data over the network, consisting of up to 25 item put or delete operations. While individual items can be up to 400 KB once stored, it's important to note that an item's representation might be greater than 400KB while being sent in DynamoDB's JSON format for the API call. For more details on this distinction, see Naming Rules and Data Types.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_batch_write_item/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_batch_write_item(
  RequestItems,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL
)

Arguments

RequestItems

[required] A map of one or more table names or table ARNs and, for each table, a list of operations to be performed (DeleteRequest or PutRequest). Each element in the map consists of the following:

  • DeleteRequest - Perform a delete_item operation on the specified item. The item to be deleted is identified by a Key subelement:

    • Key - A map of primary key attribute values that uniquely identify the item. Each entry in this map consists of an attribute name and an attribute value. For each primary key, you must provide all of the key attributes. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide values for both the partition key and the sort key.

  • PutRequest - Perform a put_item operation on the specified item. The item to be put is identified by an Item subelement:

    • Item - A map of attributes and their values. Each entry in this map consists of an attribute name and an attribute value. Attribute values must not be null; string and binary type attributes must have lengths greater than zero; and set type attributes must not be empty. Requests that contain empty values are rejected with a ValidationException exception.

      If you specify any attributes that are part of an index key, then the data types for those attributes must match those of the schema in the table's attribute definition.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics

Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to SIZE, the response includes statistics about item collections, if any, that were modified during the operation are returned in the response. If set to NONE (the default), no statistics are returned.


Creates a backup for an existing table

Description

Creates a backup for an existing table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_create_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_create_backup(TableName, BackupName)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

BackupName

[required] Specified name for the backup.


Creates a global table from an existing table

Description

Creates a global table from an existing table. A global table creates a replication relationship between two or more DynamoDB tables with the same table name in the provided Regions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_create_global_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_create_global_table(GlobalTableName, ReplicationGroup)

Arguments

GlobalTableName

[required] The global table name.

ReplicationGroup

[required] The Regions where the global table needs to be created.


The CreateTable operation adds a new table to your account

Description

The create_table operation adds a new table to your account. In an Amazon Web Services account, table names must be unique within each Region. That is, you can have two tables with same name if you create the tables in different Regions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_create_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_create_table(
  AttributeDefinitions,
  TableName,
  KeySchema,
  LocalSecondaryIndexes = NULL,
  GlobalSecondaryIndexes = NULL,
  BillingMode = NULL,
  ProvisionedThroughput = NULL,
  StreamSpecification = NULL,
  SSESpecification = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  TableClass = NULL,
  DeletionProtectionEnabled = NULL,
  WarmThroughput = NULL,
  ResourcePolicy = NULL,
  OnDemandThroughput = NULL
)

Arguments

AttributeDefinitions

[required] An array of attributes that describe the key schema for the table and indexes.

TableName

[required] The name of the table to create. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

KeySchema

[required] Specifies the attributes that make up the primary key for a table or an index. The attributes in KeySchema must also be defined in the AttributeDefinitions array. For more information, see Data Model in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

Each KeySchemaElement in the array is composed of:

  • AttributeName - The name of this key attribute.

  • KeyType - The role that the key attribute will assume:

    • HASH - partition key

    • RANGE - sort key

The partition key of an item is also known as its hash attribute. The term "hash attribute" derives from the DynamoDB usage of an internal hash function to evenly distribute data items across partitions, based on their partition key values.

The sort key of an item is also known as its range attribute. The term "range attribute" derives from the way DynamoDB stores items with the same partition key physically close together, in sorted order by the sort key value.

For a simple primary key (partition key), you must provide exactly one element with a KeyType of HASH.

For a composite primary key (partition key and sort key), you must provide exactly two elements, in this order: The first element must have a KeyType of HASH, and the second element must have a KeyType of RANGE.

For more information, see Working with Tables in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

LocalSecondaryIndexes

One or more local secondary indexes (the maximum is 5) to be created on the table. Each index is scoped to a given partition key value. There is a 10 GB size limit per partition key value; otherwise, the size of a local secondary index is unconstrained.

Each local secondary index in the array includes the following:

  • IndexName - The name of the local secondary index. Must be unique only for this table.

  • KeySchema - Specifies the key schema for the local secondary index. The key schema must begin with the same partition key as the table.

  • Projection - Specifies attributes that are copied (projected) from the table into the index. These are in addition to the primary key attributes and index key attributes, which are automatically projected. Each attribute specification is composed of:

    • ProjectionType - One of the following:

      • KEYS_ONLY - Only the index and primary keys are projected into the index.

      • INCLUDE - Only the specified table attributes are projected into the index. The list of projected attributes is in NonKeyAttributes.

      • ALL - All of the table attributes are projected into the index.

    • NonKeyAttributes - A list of one or more non-key attribute names that are projected into the secondary index. The total count of attributes provided in NonKeyAttributes, summed across all of the secondary indexes, must not exceed 100. If you project the same attribute into two different indexes, this counts as two distinct attributes when determining the total.

GlobalSecondaryIndexes

One or more global secondary indexes (the maximum is 20) to be created on the table. Each global secondary index in the array includes the following:

  • IndexName - The name of the global secondary index. Must be unique only for this table.

  • KeySchema - Specifies the key schema for the global secondary index.

  • Projection - Specifies attributes that are copied (projected) from the table into the index. These are in addition to the primary key attributes and index key attributes, which are automatically projected. Each attribute specification is composed of:

    • ProjectionType - One of the following:

      • KEYS_ONLY - Only the index and primary keys are projected into the index.

      • INCLUDE - Only the specified table attributes are projected into the index. The list of projected attributes is in NonKeyAttributes.

      • ALL - All of the table attributes are projected into the index.

    • NonKeyAttributes - A list of one or more non-key attribute names that are projected into the secondary index. The total count of attributes provided in NonKeyAttributes, summed across all of the secondary indexes, must not exceed 100. If you project the same attribute into two different indexes, this counts as two distinct attributes when determining the total.

  • ProvisionedThroughput - The provisioned throughput settings for the global secondary index, consisting of read and write capacity units.

BillingMode

Controls how you are charged for read and write throughput and how you manage capacity. This setting can be changed later.

  • PROVISIONED - We recommend using PROVISIONED for predictable workloads. PROVISIONED sets the billing mode to Provisioned capacity mode.

  • PAY_PER_REQUEST - We recommend using PAY_PER_REQUEST for unpredictable workloads. PAY_PER_REQUEST sets the billing mode to On-demand capacity mode.

ProvisionedThroughput

Represents the provisioned throughput settings for a specified table or index. The settings can be modified using the update_table operation.

If you set BillingMode as PROVISIONED, you must specify this property. If you set BillingMode as PAY_PER_REQUEST, you cannot specify this property.

For current minimum and maximum provisioned throughput values, see Service, Account, and Table Quotas in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

StreamSpecification

The settings for DynamoDB Streams on the table. These settings consist of:

  • StreamEnabled - Indicates whether DynamoDB Streams is to be enabled (true) or disabled (false).

  • StreamViewType - When an item in the table is modified, StreamViewType determines what information is written to the table's stream. Valid values for StreamViewType are:

    • KEYS_ONLY - Only the key attributes of the modified item are written to the stream.

    • NEW_IMAGE - The entire item, as it appears after it was modified, is written to the stream.

    • OLD_IMAGE - The entire item, as it appeared before it was modified, is written to the stream.

    • NEW_AND_OLD_IMAGES - Both the new and the old item images of the item are written to the stream.

SSESpecification

Represents the settings used to enable server-side encryption.

Tags

A list of key-value pairs to label the table. For more information, see Tagging for DynamoDB.

TableClass

The table class of the new table. Valid values are STANDARD and STANDARD_INFREQUENT_ACCESS.

DeletionProtectionEnabled

Indicates whether deletion protection is to be enabled (true) or disabled (false) on the table.

WarmThroughput

Represents the warm throughput (in read units per second and write units per second) for creating a table.

ResourcePolicy

An Amazon Web Services resource-based policy document in JSON format that will be attached to the table.

When you attach a resource-based policy while creating a table, the policy application is strongly consistent.

The maximum size supported for a resource-based policy document is 20 KB. DynamoDB counts whitespaces when calculating the size of a policy against this limit. For a full list of all considerations that apply for resource-based policies, see Resource-based policy considerations.

You need to specify the create_table and put_resource_policy IAM actions for authorizing a user to create a table with a resource-based policy.

OnDemandThroughput

Sets the maximum number of read and write units for the specified table in on-demand capacity mode. If you use this parameter, you must specify MaxReadRequestUnits, MaxWriteRequestUnits, or both.


Deletes an existing backup of a table

Description

Deletes an existing backup of a table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_delete_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_delete_backup(BackupArn)

Arguments

BackupArn

[required] The ARN associated with the backup.


Deletes a single item in a table by primary key

Description

Deletes a single item in a table by primary key. You can perform a conditional delete operation that deletes the item if it exists, or if it has an expected attribute value.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_delete_item/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_delete_item(
  TableName,
  Key,
  Expected = NULL,
  ConditionalOperator = NULL,
  ReturnValues = NULL,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL,
  ConditionExpression = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL,
  ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table from which to delete the item. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

Key

[required] A map of attribute names to AttributeValue objects, representing the primary key of the item to delete.

For the primary key, you must provide all of the key attributes. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide values for both the partition key and the sort key.

Expected

This is a legacy parameter. Use ConditionExpression instead. For more information, see Expected in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConditionalOperator

This is a legacy parameter. Use ConditionExpression instead. For more information, see ConditionalOperator in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ReturnValues

Use ReturnValues if you want to get the item attributes as they appeared before they were deleted. For delete_item, the valid values are:

  • NONE - If ReturnValues is not specified, or if its value is NONE, then nothing is returned. (This setting is the default for ReturnValues.)

  • ALL_OLD - The content of the old item is returned.

There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed.

The ReturnValues parameter is used by several DynamoDB operations; however, delete_item does not recognize any values other than NONE or ALL_OLD.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics

Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to SIZE, the response includes statistics about item collections, if any, that were modified during the operation are returned in the response. If set to NONE (the default), no statistics are returned.

ConditionExpression

A condition that must be satisfied in order for a conditional delete_item to succeed.

An expression can contain any of the following:

  • Functions: attribute_exists | attribute_not_exists | attribute_type | contains | begins_with | size

    These function names are case-sensitive.

  • Comparison operators: ⁠= | <> | < | > | <= | >= | BETWEEN | IN ⁠

  • Logical operators: AND | OR | NOT

For more information about condition expressions, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeNames

One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression. The following are some use cases for using ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • To access an attribute whose name conflicts with a DynamoDB reserved word.

  • To create a placeholder for repeating occurrences of an attribute name in an expression.

  • To prevent special characters in an attribute name from being misinterpreted in an expression.

Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:

  • Percentile

The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you could specify the following for ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • {"#P":"Percentile"}

You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:

  • ⁠#P = :val⁠

Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime.

For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeValues

One or more values that can be substituted in an expression.

Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether the value of the ProductStatus attribute was one of the following:

Available | Backordered | Discontinued

You would first need to specify ExpressionAttributeValues as follows:

⁠{ ":avail":{"S":"Available"}, ":back":{"S":"Backordered"}, ":disc":{"S":"Discontinued"} }⁠

You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:

⁠ProductStatus IN (:avail, :back, :disc)⁠

For more information on expression attribute values, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure

An optional parameter that returns the item attributes for a delete_item operation that failed a condition check.

There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed.


Deletes the resource-based policy attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream

Description

Deletes the resource-based policy attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_delete_resource_policy(ResourceArn, ExpectedRevisionId = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DynamoDB resource from which the policy will be removed. The resources you can specify include tables and streams. If you remove the policy of a table, it will also remove the permissions for the table's indexes defined in that policy document. This is because index permissions are defined in the table's policy.

ExpectedRevisionId

A string value that you can use to conditionally delete your policy. When you provide an expected revision ID, if the revision ID of the existing policy on the resource doesn't match or if there's no policy attached to the resource, the request will fail and return a PolicyNotFoundException.


The DeleteTable operation deletes a table and all of its items

Description

The delete_table operation deletes a table and all of its items. After a delete_table request, the specified table is in the DELETING state until DynamoDB completes the deletion. If the table is in the ACTIVE state, you can delete it. If a table is in CREATING or UPDATING states, then DynamoDB returns a ResourceInUseException. If the specified table does not exist, DynamoDB returns a ResourceNotFoundException. If table is already in the DELETING state, no error is returned.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_delete_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_delete_table(TableName)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table to delete. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.


Describes an existing backup of a table

Description

Describes an existing backup of a table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_backup(BackupArn)

Arguments

BackupArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the backup.


Checks the status of continuous backups and point in time recovery on the specified table

Description

Checks the status of continuous backups and point in time recovery on the specified table. Continuous backups are ENABLED on all tables at table creation. If point in time recovery is enabled, PointInTimeRecoveryStatus will be set to ENABLED.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_continuous_backups/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_continuous_backups(TableName)

Arguments

TableName

[required] Name of the table for which the customer wants to check the continuous backups and point in time recovery settings.

You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.


Returns information about contributor insights for a given table or global secondary index

Description

Returns information about contributor insights for a given table or global secondary index.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_contributor_insights/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_contributor_insights(TableName, IndexName = NULL)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table to describe. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

IndexName

The name of the global secondary index to describe, if applicable.


Returns the regional endpoint information

Description

Returns the regional endpoint information. For more information on policy permissions, please see Internetwork traffic privacy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_endpoints()

Describes an existing table export

Description

Describes an existing table export.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_export/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_export(ExportArn)

Arguments

ExportArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the export.


Returns information about the specified global table

Description

Returns information about the specified global table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_global_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_global_table(GlobalTableName)

Arguments

GlobalTableName

[required] The name of the global table.


Describes Region-specific settings for a global table

Description

Describes Region-specific settings for a global table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_global_table_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_global_table_settings(GlobalTableName)

Arguments

GlobalTableName

[required] The name of the global table to describe.


Represents the properties of the import

Description

Represents the properties of the import.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_import/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_import(ImportArn)

Arguments

ImportArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the table you're importing to.


Returns information about the status of Kinesis streaming

Description

Returns information about the status of Kinesis streaming.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_kinesis_streaming_destination/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_kinesis_streaming_destination(TableName)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table being described. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.


Returns the current provisioned-capacity quotas for your Amazon Web Services account in a Region, both for the Region as a whole and for any one DynamoDB table that you create there

Description

Returns the current provisioned-capacity quotas for your Amazon Web Services account in a Region, both for the Region as a whole and for any one DynamoDB table that you create there.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_limits/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_limits()

Returns information about the table, including the current status of the table, when it was created, the primary key schema, and any indexes on the table

Description

Returns information about the table, including the current status of the table, when it was created, the primary key schema, and any indexes on the table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_table(TableName)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table to describe. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.


Describes auto scaling settings across replicas of the global table at once

Description

Describes auto scaling settings across replicas of the global table at once.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_table_replica_auto_scaling/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_table_replica_auto_scaling(TableName)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.


Gives a description of the Time to Live (TTL) status on the specified table

Description

Gives a description of the Time to Live (TTL) status on the specified table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_describe_time_to_live/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_describe_time_to_live(TableName)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table to be described. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.


Stops replication from the DynamoDB table to the Kinesis data stream

Description

Stops replication from the DynamoDB table to the Kinesis data stream. This is done without deleting either of the resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_disable_kinesis_streaming_destination/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_disable_kinesis_streaming_destination(
  TableName,
  StreamArn,
  EnableKinesisStreamingConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the DynamoDB table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

StreamArn

[required] The ARN for a Kinesis data stream.

EnableKinesisStreamingConfiguration

The source for the Kinesis streaming information that is being enabled.


Starts table data replication to the specified Kinesis data stream at a timestamp chosen during the enable workflow

Description

Starts table data replication to the specified Kinesis data stream at a timestamp chosen during the enable workflow. If this operation doesn't return results immediately, use DescribeKinesisStreamingDestination to check if streaming to the Kinesis data stream is ACTIVE.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_enable_kinesis_streaming_destination/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_enable_kinesis_streaming_destination(
  TableName,
  StreamArn,
  EnableKinesisStreamingConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the DynamoDB table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

StreamArn

[required] The ARN for a Kinesis data stream.

EnableKinesisStreamingConfiguration

The source for the Kinesis streaming information that is being enabled.


This operation allows you to perform reads and singleton writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL

Description

This operation allows you to perform reads and singleton writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_execute_statement/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_execute_statement(
  Statement,
  Parameters = NULL,
  ConsistentRead = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  Limit = NULL,
  ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure = NULL
)

Arguments

Statement

[required] The PartiQL statement representing the operation to run.

Parameters

The parameters for the PartiQL statement, if any.

ConsistentRead

The consistency of a read operation. If set to true, then a strongly consistent read is used; otherwise, an eventually consistent read is used.

NextToken

Set this value to get remaining results, if NextToken was returned in the statement response.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
Limit

The maximum number of items to evaluate (not necessarily the number of matching items). If DynamoDB processes the number of items up to the limit while processing the results, it stops the operation and returns the matching values up to that point, along with a key in LastEvaluatedKey to apply in a subsequent operation so you can pick up where you left off. Also, if the processed dataset size exceeds 1 MB before DynamoDB reaches this limit, it stops the operation and returns the matching values up to the limit, and a key in LastEvaluatedKey to apply in a subsequent operation to continue the operation.

ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure

An optional parameter that returns the item attributes for an execute_statement operation that failed a condition check.

There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed.


This operation allows you to perform transactional reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL

Description

This operation allows you to perform transactional reads or writes on data stored in DynamoDB, using PartiQL.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_execute_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_execute_transaction(
  TransactStatements,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL
)

Arguments

TransactStatements

[required] The list of PartiQL statements representing the transaction to run.

ClientRequestToken

Set this value to get remaining results, if NextToken was returned in the statement response.

ReturnConsumedCapacity

Determines the level of detail about either provisioned or on-demand throughput consumption that is returned in the response. For more information, see transact_get_items and transact_write_items.


Exports table data to an S3 bucket

Description

Exports table data to an S3 bucket. The table must have point in time recovery enabled, and you can export data from any time within the point in time recovery window.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_export_table_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_export_table_to_point_in_time(
  TableArn,
  ExportTime = NULL,
  ClientToken = NULL,
  S3Bucket,
  S3BucketOwner = NULL,
  S3Prefix = NULL,
  S3SseAlgorithm = NULL,
  S3SseKmsKeyId = NULL,
  ExportFormat = NULL,
  ExportType = NULL,
  IncrementalExportSpecification = NULL
)

Arguments

TableArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the table to export.

ExportTime

Time in the past from which to export table data, counted in seconds from the start of the Unix epoch. The table export will be a snapshot of the table's state at this point in time.

ClientToken

Providing a ClientToken makes the call to ExportTableToPointInTimeInput idempotent, meaning that multiple identical calls have the same effect as one single call.

A client token is valid for 8 hours after the first request that uses it is completed. After 8 hours, any request with the same client token is treated as a new request. Do not resubmit the same request with the same client token for more than 8 hours, or the result might not be idempotent.

If you submit a request with the same client token but a change in other parameters within the 8-hour idempotency window, DynamoDB returns an ImportConflictException.

S3Bucket

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket to export the snapshot to.

S3BucketOwner

The ID of the Amazon Web Services account that owns the bucket the export will be stored in.

S3BucketOwner is a required parameter when exporting to a S3 bucket in another account.

S3Prefix

The Amazon S3 bucket prefix to use as the file name and path of the exported snapshot.

S3SseAlgorithm

Type of encryption used on the bucket where export data will be stored. Valid values for S3SseAlgorithm are:

  • AES256 - server-side encryption with Amazon S3 managed keys

  • KMS - server-side encryption with KMS managed keys

S3SseKmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS managed key used to encrypt the S3 bucket where export data will be stored (if applicable).

ExportFormat

The format for the exported data. Valid values for ExportFormat are DYNAMODB_JSON or ION.

ExportType

Choice of whether to execute as a full export or incremental export. Valid values are FULL_EXPORT or INCREMENTAL_EXPORT. The default value is FULL_EXPORT. If INCREMENTAL_EXPORT is provided, the IncrementalExportSpecification must also be used.

IncrementalExportSpecification

Optional object containing the parameters specific to an incremental export.


The GetItem operation returns a set of attributes for the item with the given primary key

Description

The get_item operation returns a set of attributes for the item with the given primary key. If there is no matching item, get_item does not return any data and there will be no Item element in the response.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_get_item/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_get_item(
  TableName,
  Key,
  AttributesToGet = NULL,
  ConsistentRead = NULL,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  ProjectionExpression = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table containing the requested item. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

Key

[required] A map of attribute names to AttributeValue objects, representing the primary key of the item to retrieve.

For the primary key, you must provide all of the attributes. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide values for both the partition key and the sort key.

AttributesToGet

This is a legacy parameter. Use ProjectionExpression instead. For more information, see AttributesToGet in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConsistentRead

Determines the read consistency model: If set to true, then the operation uses strongly consistent reads; otherwise, the operation uses eventually consistent reads.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
ProjectionExpression

A string that identifies one or more attributes to retrieve from the table. These attributes can include scalars, sets, or elements of a JSON document. The attributes in the expression must be separated by commas.

If no attribute names are specified, then all attributes are returned. If any of the requested attributes are not found, they do not appear in the result.

For more information, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeNames

One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression. The following are some use cases for using ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • To access an attribute whose name conflicts with a DynamoDB reserved word.

  • To create a placeholder for repeating occurrences of an attribute name in an expression.

  • To prevent special characters in an attribute name from being misinterpreted in an expression.

Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:

  • Percentile

The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you could specify the following for ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • {"#P":"Percentile"}

You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:

  • ⁠#P = :val⁠

Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime.

For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.


Returns the resource-based policy document attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream, in JSON format

Description

Returns the resource-based policy document attached to the resource, which can be a table or stream, in JSON format.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_get_resource_policy(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DynamoDB resource to which the policy is attached. The resources you can specify include tables and streams.


Imports table data from an S3 bucket

Description

Imports table data from an S3 bucket.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_import_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_import_table(
  ClientToken = NULL,
  S3BucketSource,
  InputFormat,
  InputFormatOptions = NULL,
  InputCompressionType = NULL,
  TableCreationParameters
)

Arguments

ClientToken

Providing a ClientToken makes the call to ImportTableInput idempotent, meaning that multiple identical calls have the same effect as one single call.

A client token is valid for 8 hours after the first request that uses it is completed. After 8 hours, any request with the same client token is treated as a new request. Do not resubmit the same request with the same client token for more than 8 hours, or the result might not be idempotent.

If you submit a request with the same client token but a change in other parameters within the 8-hour idempotency window, DynamoDB returns an IdempotentParameterMismatch exception.

S3BucketSource

[required] The S3 bucket that provides the source for the import.

InputFormat

[required] The format of the source data. Valid values for ImportFormat are CSV, DYNAMODB_JSON or ION.

InputFormatOptions

Additional properties that specify how the input is formatted,

InputCompressionType

Type of compression to be used on the input coming from the imported table.

TableCreationParameters

[required] Parameters for the table to import the data into.


List DynamoDB backups that are associated with an Amazon Web Services account and weren't made with Amazon Web Services Backup

Description

List DynamoDB backups that are associated with an Amazon Web Services account and weren't made with Amazon Web Services Backup. To list these backups for a given table, specify TableName. list_backups returns a paginated list of results with at most 1 MB worth of items in a page. You can also specify a maximum number of entries to be returned in a page.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_backups/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_list_backups(
  TableName = NULL,
  Limit = NULL,
  TimeRangeLowerBound = NULL,
  TimeRangeUpperBound = NULL,
  ExclusiveStartBackupArn = NULL,
  BackupType = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

Lists the backups from the table specified in TableName. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

Limit

Maximum number of backups to return at once.

TimeRangeLowerBound

Only backups created after this time are listed. TimeRangeLowerBound is inclusive.

TimeRangeUpperBound

Only backups created before this time are listed. TimeRangeUpperBound is exclusive.

ExclusiveStartBackupArn

LastEvaluatedBackupArn is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the backup last evaluated when the current page of results was returned, inclusive of the current page of results. This value may be specified as the ExclusiveStartBackupArn of a new list_backups operation in order to fetch the next page of results.

BackupType

The backups from the table specified by BackupType are listed.

Where BackupType can be:

  • USER - On-demand backup created by you. (The default setting if no other backup types are specified.)

  • SYSTEM - On-demand backup automatically created by DynamoDB.

  • ALL - All types of on-demand backups (USER and SYSTEM).


Returns a list of ContributorInsightsSummary for a table and all its global secondary indexes

Description

Returns a list of ContributorInsightsSummary for a table and all its global secondary indexes.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_contributor_insights/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_list_contributor_insights(
  TableName = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

NextToken

A token to for the desired page, if there is one.

MaxResults

Maximum number of results to return per page.


Lists completed exports within the past 90 days

Description

Lists completed exports within the past 90 days.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_exports/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_list_exports(TableArn = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

TableArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the exported table.

MaxResults

Maximum number of results to return per page.

NextToken

An optional string that, if supplied, must be copied from the output of a previous call to list_exports. When provided in this manner, the API fetches the next page of results.


Lists all global tables that have a replica in the specified Region

Description

Lists all global tables that have a replica in the specified Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_global_tables/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_list_global_tables(
  ExclusiveStartGlobalTableName = NULL,
  Limit = NULL,
  RegionName = NULL
)

Arguments

ExclusiveStartGlobalTableName

The first global table name that this operation will evaluate.

Limit

The maximum number of table names to return, if the parameter is not specified DynamoDB defaults to 100.

If the number of global tables DynamoDB finds reaches this limit, it stops the operation and returns the table names collected up to that point, with a table name in the LastEvaluatedGlobalTableName to apply in a subsequent operation to the ExclusiveStartGlobalTableName parameter.

RegionName

Lists the global tables in a specific Region.


Lists completed imports within the past 90 days

Description

Lists completed imports within the past 90 days.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_imports/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_list_imports(TableArn = NULL, PageSize = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

TableArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the table that was imported to.

PageSize

The number of ImportSummary objects returned in a single page.

NextToken

An optional string that, if supplied, must be copied from the output of a previous call to list_imports. When provided in this manner, the API fetches the next page of results.


Returns an array of table names associated with the current account and endpoint

Description

Returns an array of table names associated with the current account and endpoint. The output from list_tables is paginated, with each page returning a maximum of 100 table names.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_tables/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_list_tables(ExclusiveStartTableName = NULL, Limit = NULL)

Arguments

ExclusiveStartTableName

The first table name that this operation will evaluate. Use the value that was returned for LastEvaluatedTableName in a previous operation, so that you can obtain the next page of results.

Limit

A maximum number of table names to return. If this parameter is not specified, the limit is 100.


List all tags on an Amazon DynamoDB resource

Description

List all tags on an Amazon DynamoDB resource. You can call ListTagsOfResource up to 10 times per second, per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_list_tags_of_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_list_tags_of_resource(ResourceArn, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon DynamoDB resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

NextToken

An optional string that, if supplied, must be copied from the output of a previous call to ListTagOfResource. When provided in this manner, this API fetches the next page of results.


Creates a new item, or replaces an old item with a new item

Description

Creates a new item, or replaces an old item with a new item. If an item that has the same primary key as the new item already exists in the specified table, the new item completely replaces the existing item. You can perform a conditional put operation (add a new item if one with the specified primary key doesn't exist), or replace an existing item if it has certain attribute values. You can return the item's attribute values in the same operation, using the ReturnValues parameter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_put_item/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_put_item(
  TableName,
  Item,
  Expected = NULL,
  ReturnValues = NULL,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL,
  ConditionalOperator = NULL,
  ConditionExpression = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL,
  ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table to contain the item. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

Item

[required] A map of attribute name/value pairs, one for each attribute. Only the primary key attributes are required; you can optionally provide other attribute name-value pairs for the item.

You must provide all of the attributes for the primary key. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide both values for both the partition key and the sort key.

If you specify any attributes that are part of an index key, then the data types for those attributes must match those of the schema in the table's attribute definition.

Empty String and Binary attribute values are allowed. Attribute values of type String and Binary must have a length greater than zero if the attribute is used as a key attribute for a table or index.

For more information about primary keys, see Primary Key in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

Each element in the Item map is an AttributeValue object.

Expected

This is a legacy parameter. Use ConditionExpression instead. For more information, see Expected in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ReturnValues

Use ReturnValues if you want to get the item attributes as they appeared before they were updated with the put_item request. For put_item, the valid values are:

  • NONE - If ReturnValues is not specified, or if its value is NONE, then nothing is returned. (This setting is the default for ReturnValues.)

  • ALL_OLD - If put_item overwrote an attribute name-value pair, then the content of the old item is returned.

The values returned are strongly consistent.

There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed.

The ReturnValues parameter is used by several DynamoDB operations; however, put_item does not recognize any values other than NONE or ALL_OLD.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics

Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to SIZE, the response includes statistics about item collections, if any, that were modified during the operation are returned in the response. If set to NONE (the default), no statistics are returned.

ConditionalOperator

This is a legacy parameter. Use ConditionExpression instead. For more information, see ConditionalOperator in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConditionExpression

A condition that must be satisfied in order for a conditional put_item operation to succeed.

An expression can contain any of the following:

  • Functions: attribute_exists | attribute_not_exists | attribute_type | contains | begins_with | size

    These function names are case-sensitive.

  • Comparison operators: ⁠= | <> | < | > | <= | >= | BETWEEN | IN ⁠

  • Logical operators: AND | OR | NOT

For more information on condition expressions, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeNames

One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression. The following are some use cases for using ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • To access an attribute whose name conflicts with a DynamoDB reserved word.

  • To create a placeholder for repeating occurrences of an attribute name in an expression.

  • To prevent special characters in an attribute name from being misinterpreted in an expression.

Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:

  • Percentile

The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you could specify the following for ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • {"#P":"Percentile"}

You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:

  • ⁠#P = :val⁠

Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime.

For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeValues

One or more values that can be substituted in an expression.

Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether the value of the ProductStatus attribute was one of the following:

Available | Backordered | Discontinued

You would first need to specify ExpressionAttributeValues as follows:

⁠{ ":avail":{"S":"Available"}, ":back":{"S":"Backordered"}, ":disc":{"S":"Discontinued"} }⁠

You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:

⁠ProductStatus IN (:avail, :back, :disc)⁠

For more information on expression attribute values, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure

An optional parameter that returns the item attributes for a put_item operation that failed a condition check.

There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed.


Attaches a resource-based policy document to the resource, which can be a table or stream

Description

Attaches a resource-based policy document to the resource, which can be a table or stream. When you attach a resource-based policy using this API, the policy application is eventually consistent .

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_put_resource_policy(
  ResourceArn,
  Policy,
  ExpectedRevisionId = NULL,
  ConfirmRemoveSelfResourceAccess = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DynamoDB resource to which the policy will be attached. The resources you can specify include tables and streams.

You can control index permissions using the base table's policy. To specify the same permission level for your table and its indexes, you can provide both the table and index Amazon Resource Name (ARN)s in the Resource field of a given Statement in your policy document. Alternatively, to specify different permissions for your table, indexes, or both, you can define multiple Statement fields in your policy document.

Policy

[required] An Amazon Web Services resource-based policy document in JSON format.

  • The maximum size supported for a resource-based policy document is 20 KB. DynamoDB counts whitespaces when calculating the size of a policy against this limit.

  • Within a resource-based policy, if the action for a DynamoDB service-linked role (SLR) to replicate data for a global table is denied, adding or deleting a replica will fail with an error.

For a full list of all considerations that apply while attaching a resource-based policy, see Resource-based policy considerations.

ExpectedRevisionId

A string value that you can use to conditionally update your policy. You can provide the revision ID of your existing policy to make mutating requests against that policy.

When you provide an expected revision ID, if the revision ID of the existing policy on the resource doesn't match or if there's no policy attached to the resource, your request will be rejected with a PolicyNotFoundException.

To conditionally attach a policy when no policy exists for the resource, specify NO_POLICY for the revision ID.

ConfirmRemoveSelfResourceAccess

Set this parameter to true to confirm that you want to remove your permissions to change the policy of this resource in the future.


You must provide the name of the partition key attribute and a single value for that attribute

Description

You must provide the name of the partition key attribute and a single value for that attribute. query returns all items with that partition key value. Optionally, you can provide a sort key attribute and use a comparison operator to refine the search results.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_query(
  TableName,
  IndexName = NULL,
  Select = NULL,
  AttributesToGet = NULL,
  Limit = NULL,
  ConsistentRead = NULL,
  KeyConditions = NULL,
  QueryFilter = NULL,
  ConditionalOperator = NULL,
  ScanIndexForward = NULL,
  ExclusiveStartKey = NULL,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  ProjectionExpression = NULL,
  FilterExpression = NULL,
  KeyConditionExpression = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table containing the requested items. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

IndexName

The name of an index to query. This index can be any local secondary index or global secondary index on the table. Note that if you use the IndexName parameter, you must also provide TableName.

Select

The attributes to be returned in the result. You can retrieve all item attributes, specific item attributes, the count of matching items, or in the case of an index, some or all of the attributes projected into the index.

  • ALL_ATTRIBUTES - Returns all of the item attributes from the specified table or index. If you query a local secondary index, then for each matching item in the index, DynamoDB fetches the entire item from the parent table. If the index is configured to project all item attributes, then all of the data can be obtained from the local secondary index, and no fetching is required.

  • ALL_PROJECTED_ATTRIBUTES - Allowed only when querying an index. Retrieves all attributes that have been projected into the index. If the index is configured to project all attributes, this return value is equivalent to specifying ALL_ATTRIBUTES.

  • COUNT - Returns the number of matching items, rather than the matching items themselves. Note that this uses the same quantity of read capacity units as getting the items, and is subject to the same item size calculations.

  • SPECIFIC_ATTRIBUTES - Returns only the attributes listed in ProjectionExpression. This return value is equivalent to specifying ProjectionExpression without specifying any value for Select.

    If you query or scan a local secondary index and request only attributes that are projected into that index, the operation will read only the index and not the table. If any of the requested attributes are not projected into the local secondary index, DynamoDB fetches each of these attributes from the parent table. This extra fetching incurs additional throughput cost and latency.

    If you query or scan a global secondary index, you can only request attributes that are projected into the index. Global secondary index queries cannot fetch attributes from the parent table.

If neither Select nor ProjectionExpression are specified, DynamoDB defaults to ALL_ATTRIBUTES when accessing a table, and ALL_PROJECTED_ATTRIBUTES when accessing an index. You cannot use both Select and ProjectionExpression together in a single request, unless the value for Select is SPECIFIC_ATTRIBUTES. (This usage is equivalent to specifying ProjectionExpression without any value for Select.)

If you use the ProjectionExpression parameter, then the value for Select can only be SPECIFIC_ATTRIBUTES. Any other value for Select will return an error.

AttributesToGet

This is a legacy parameter. Use ProjectionExpression instead. For more information, see AttributesToGet in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

Limit

The maximum number of items to evaluate (not necessarily the number of matching items). If DynamoDB processes the number of items up to the limit while processing the results, it stops the operation and returns the matching values up to that point, and a key in LastEvaluatedKey to apply in a subsequent operation, so that you can pick up where you left off. Also, if the processed dataset size exceeds 1 MB before DynamoDB reaches this limit, it stops the operation and returns the matching values up to the limit, and a key in LastEvaluatedKey to apply in a subsequent operation to continue the operation. For more information, see Query and Scan in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConsistentRead

Determines the read consistency model: If set to true, then the operation uses strongly consistent reads; otherwise, the operation uses eventually consistent reads.

Strongly consistent reads are not supported on global secondary indexes. If you query a global secondary index with ConsistentRead set to true, you will receive a ValidationException.

KeyConditions

This is a legacy parameter. Use KeyConditionExpression instead. For more information, see KeyConditions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

QueryFilter

This is a legacy parameter. Use FilterExpression instead. For more information, see QueryFilter in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConditionalOperator

This is a legacy parameter. Use FilterExpression instead. For more information, see ConditionalOperator in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ScanIndexForward

Specifies the order for index traversal: If true (default), the traversal is performed in ascending order; if false, the traversal is performed in descending order.

Items with the same partition key value are stored in sorted order by sort key. If the sort key data type is Number, the results are stored in numeric order. For type String, the results are stored in order of UTF-8 bytes. For type Binary, DynamoDB treats each byte of the binary data as unsigned.

If ScanIndexForward is true, DynamoDB returns the results in the order in which they are stored (by sort key value). This is the default behavior. If ScanIndexForward is false, DynamoDB reads the results in reverse order by sort key value, and then returns the results to the client.

ExclusiveStartKey

The primary key of the first item that this operation will evaluate. Use the value that was returned for LastEvaluatedKey in the previous operation.

The data type for ExclusiveStartKey must be String, Number, or Binary. No set data types are allowed.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
ProjectionExpression

A string that identifies one or more attributes to retrieve from the table. These attributes can include scalars, sets, or elements of a JSON document. The attributes in the expression must be separated by commas.

If no attribute names are specified, then all attributes will be returned. If any of the requested attributes are not found, they will not appear in the result.

For more information, see Accessing Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

FilterExpression

A string that contains conditions that DynamoDB applies after the query operation, but before the data is returned to you. Items that do not satisfy the FilterExpression criteria are not returned.

A FilterExpression does not allow key attributes. You cannot define a filter expression based on a partition key or a sort key.

A FilterExpression is applied after the items have already been read; the process of filtering does not consume any additional read capacity units.

For more information, see Filter Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

KeyConditionExpression

The condition that specifies the key values for items to be retrieved by the query action.

The condition must perform an equality test on a single partition key value.

The condition can optionally perform one of several comparison tests on a single sort key value. This allows query to retrieve one item with a given partition key value and sort key value, or several items that have the same partition key value but different sort key values.

The partition key equality test is required, and must be specified in the following format:

partitionKeyName = ⁠:partitionkeyval⁠

If you also want to provide a condition for the sort key, it must be combined using AND with the condition for the sort key. Following is an example, using the = comparison operator for the sort key:

partitionKeyName = ⁠:partitionkeyval⁠ AND sortKeyName = ⁠:sortkeyval⁠

Valid comparisons for the sort key condition are as follows:

  • sortKeyName = ⁠:sortkeyval⁠ - true if the sort key value is equal to ⁠:sortkeyval⁠.

  • sortKeyName < ⁠:sortkeyval⁠ - true if the sort key value is less than ⁠:sortkeyval⁠.

  • sortKeyName <= ⁠:sortkeyval⁠ - true if the sort key value is less than or equal to ⁠:sortkeyval⁠.

  • sortKeyName > ⁠:sortkeyval⁠ - true if the sort key value is greater than ⁠:sortkeyval⁠.

  • sortKeyName ⁠>= ⁠ ⁠:sortkeyval⁠ - true if the sort key value is greater than or equal to ⁠:sortkeyval⁠.

  • sortKeyName BETWEEN ⁠:sortkeyval1⁠ AND ⁠:sortkeyval2⁠ - true if the sort key value is greater than or equal to ⁠:sortkeyval1⁠, and less than or equal to ⁠:sortkeyval2⁠.

  • ⁠begins_with (⁠ sortKeyName, ⁠:sortkeyval⁠ ⁠)⁠ - true if the sort key value begins with a particular operand. (You cannot use this function with a sort key that is of type Number.) Note that the function name begins_with is case-sensitive.

Use the ExpressionAttributeValues parameter to replace tokens such as ⁠:partitionval⁠ and ⁠:sortval⁠ with actual values at runtime.

You can optionally use the ExpressionAttributeNames parameter to replace the names of the partition key and sort key with placeholder tokens. This option might be necessary if an attribute name conflicts with a DynamoDB reserved word. For example, the following KeyConditionExpression parameter causes an error because Size is a reserved word:

  • ⁠Size = :myval⁠

To work around this, define a placeholder (such a ⁠#S⁠) to represent the attribute name Size. KeyConditionExpression then is as follows:

  • ⁠#S = :myval⁠

For a list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

For more information on ExpressionAttributeNames and ExpressionAttributeValues, see Using Placeholders for Attribute Names and Values in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeNames

One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression. The following are some use cases for using ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • To access an attribute whose name conflicts with a DynamoDB reserved word.

  • To create a placeholder for repeating occurrences of an attribute name in an expression.

  • To prevent special characters in an attribute name from being misinterpreted in an expression.

Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:

  • Percentile

The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you could specify the following for ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • {"#P":"Percentile"}

You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:

  • ⁠#P = :val⁠

Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime.

For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeValues

One or more values that can be substituted in an expression.

Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether the value of the ProductStatus attribute was one of the following:

Available | Backordered | Discontinued

You would first need to specify ExpressionAttributeValues as follows:

⁠{ ":avail":{"S":"Available"}, ":back":{"S":"Backordered"}, ":disc":{"S":"Discontinued"} }⁠

You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:

⁠ProductStatus IN (:avail, :back, :disc)⁠

For more information on expression attribute values, see Specifying Conditions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.


Creates a new table from an existing backup

Description

Creates a new table from an existing backup. Any number of users can execute up to 50 concurrent restores (any type of restore) in a given account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_restore_table_from_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_restore_table_from_backup(
  TargetTableName,
  BackupArn,
  BillingModeOverride = NULL,
  GlobalSecondaryIndexOverride = NULL,
  LocalSecondaryIndexOverride = NULL,
  ProvisionedThroughputOverride = NULL,
  OnDemandThroughputOverride = NULL,
  SSESpecificationOverride = NULL
)

Arguments

TargetTableName

[required] The name of the new table to which the backup must be restored.

BackupArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the backup.

BillingModeOverride

The billing mode of the restored table.

GlobalSecondaryIndexOverride

List of global secondary indexes for the restored table. The indexes provided should match existing secondary indexes. You can choose to exclude some or all of the indexes at the time of restore.

LocalSecondaryIndexOverride

List of local secondary indexes for the restored table. The indexes provided should match existing secondary indexes. You can choose to exclude some or all of the indexes at the time of restore.

ProvisionedThroughputOverride

Provisioned throughput settings for the restored table.

OnDemandThroughputOverride
SSESpecificationOverride

The new server-side encryption settings for the restored table.


Restores the specified table to the specified point in time within EarliestRestorableDateTime and LatestRestorableDateTime

Description

Restores the specified table to the specified point in time within EarliestRestorableDateTime and LatestRestorableDateTime. You can restore your table to any point in time in the last 35 days. You can set the recovery period to any value between 1 and 35 days. Any number of users can execute up to 50 concurrent restores (any type of restore) in a given account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_restore_table_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_restore_table_to_point_in_time(
  SourceTableArn = NULL,
  SourceTableName = NULL,
  TargetTableName,
  UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
  RestoreDateTime = NULL,
  BillingModeOverride = NULL,
  GlobalSecondaryIndexOverride = NULL,
  LocalSecondaryIndexOverride = NULL,
  ProvisionedThroughputOverride = NULL,
  OnDemandThroughputOverride = NULL,
  SSESpecificationOverride = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceTableArn

The DynamoDB table that will be restored. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

SourceTableName

Name of the source table that is being restored.

TargetTableName

[required] The name of the new table to which it must be restored to.

UseLatestRestorableTime

Restore the table to the latest possible time. LatestRestorableDateTime is typically 5 minutes before the current time.

RestoreDateTime

Time in the past to restore the table to.

BillingModeOverride

The billing mode of the restored table.

GlobalSecondaryIndexOverride

List of global secondary indexes for the restored table. The indexes provided should match existing secondary indexes. You can choose to exclude some or all of the indexes at the time of restore.

LocalSecondaryIndexOverride

List of local secondary indexes for the restored table. The indexes provided should match existing secondary indexes. You can choose to exclude some or all of the indexes at the time of restore.

ProvisionedThroughputOverride

Provisioned throughput settings for the restored table.

OnDemandThroughputOverride
SSESpecificationOverride

The new server-side encryption settings for the restored table.


The Scan operation returns one or more items and item attributes by accessing every item in a table or a secondary index

Description

The scan operation returns one or more items and item attributes by accessing every item in a table or a secondary index. To have DynamoDB return fewer items, you can provide a FilterExpression operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_scan/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_scan(
  TableName,
  IndexName = NULL,
  AttributesToGet = NULL,
  Limit = NULL,
  Select = NULL,
  ScanFilter = NULL,
  ConditionalOperator = NULL,
  ExclusiveStartKey = NULL,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  TotalSegments = NULL,
  Segment = NULL,
  ProjectionExpression = NULL,
  FilterExpression = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL,
  ConsistentRead = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table containing the requested items or if you provide IndexName, the name of the table to which that index belongs.

You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

IndexName

The name of a secondary index to scan. This index can be any local secondary index or global secondary index. Note that if you use the IndexName parameter, you must also provide TableName.

AttributesToGet

This is a legacy parameter. Use ProjectionExpression instead. For more information, see AttributesToGet in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

Limit

The maximum number of items to evaluate (not necessarily the number of matching items). If DynamoDB processes the number of items up to the limit while processing the results, it stops the operation and returns the matching values up to that point, and a key in LastEvaluatedKey to apply in a subsequent operation, so that you can pick up where you left off. Also, if the processed dataset size exceeds 1 MB before DynamoDB reaches this limit, it stops the operation and returns the matching values up to the limit, and a key in LastEvaluatedKey to apply in a subsequent operation to continue the operation. For more information, see Working with Queries in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

Select

The attributes to be returned in the result. You can retrieve all item attributes, specific item attributes, the count of matching items, or in the case of an index, some or all of the attributes projected into the index.

  • ALL_ATTRIBUTES - Returns all of the item attributes from the specified table or index. If you query a local secondary index, then for each matching item in the index, DynamoDB fetches the entire item from the parent table. If the index is configured to project all item attributes, then all of the data can be obtained from the local secondary index, and no fetching is required.

  • ALL_PROJECTED_ATTRIBUTES - Allowed only when querying an index. Retrieves all attributes that have been projected into the index. If the index is configured to project all attributes, this return value is equivalent to specifying ALL_ATTRIBUTES.

  • COUNT - Returns the number of matching items, rather than the matching items themselves. Note that this uses the same quantity of read capacity units as getting the items, and is subject to the same item size calculations.

  • SPECIFIC_ATTRIBUTES - Returns only the attributes listed in ProjectionExpression. This return value is equivalent to specifying ProjectionExpression without specifying any value for Select.

    If you query or scan a local secondary index and request only attributes that are projected into that index, the operation reads only the index and not the table. If any of the requested attributes are not projected into the local secondary index, DynamoDB fetches each of these attributes from the parent table. This extra fetching incurs additional throughput cost and latency.

    If you query or scan a global secondary index, you can only request attributes that are projected into the index. Global secondary index queries cannot fetch attributes from the parent table.

If neither Select nor ProjectionExpression are specified, DynamoDB defaults to ALL_ATTRIBUTES when accessing a table, and ALL_PROJECTED_ATTRIBUTES when accessing an index. You cannot use both Select and ProjectionExpression together in a single request, unless the value for Select is SPECIFIC_ATTRIBUTES. (This usage is equivalent to specifying ProjectionExpression without any value for Select.)

If you use the ProjectionExpression parameter, then the value for Select can only be SPECIFIC_ATTRIBUTES. Any other value for Select will return an error.

ScanFilter

This is a legacy parameter. Use FilterExpression instead. For more information, see ScanFilter in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConditionalOperator

This is a legacy parameter. Use FilterExpression instead. For more information, see ConditionalOperator in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExclusiveStartKey

The primary key of the first item that this operation will evaluate. Use the value that was returned for LastEvaluatedKey in the previous operation.

The data type for ExclusiveStartKey must be String, Number or Binary. No set data types are allowed.

In a parallel scan, a scan request that includes ExclusiveStartKey must specify the same segment whose previous scan returned the corresponding value of LastEvaluatedKey.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
TotalSegments

For a parallel scan request, TotalSegments represents the total number of segments into which the scan operation will be divided. The value of TotalSegments corresponds to the number of application workers that will perform the parallel scan. For example, if you want to use four application threads to scan a table or an index, specify a TotalSegments value of 4.

The value for TotalSegments must be greater than or equal to 1, and less than or equal to 1000000. If you specify a TotalSegments value of 1, the scan operation will be sequential rather than parallel.

If you specify TotalSegments, you must also specify Segment.

Segment

For a parallel scan request, Segment identifies an individual segment to be scanned by an application worker.

Segment IDs are zero-based, so the first segment is always 0. For example, if you want to use four application threads to scan a table or an index, then the first thread specifies a Segment value of 0, the second thread specifies 1, and so on.

The value of LastEvaluatedKey returned from a parallel scan request must be used as ExclusiveStartKey with the same segment ID in a subsequent scan operation.

The value for Segment must be greater than or equal to 0, and less than the value provided for TotalSegments.

If you provide Segment, you must also provide TotalSegments.

ProjectionExpression

A string that identifies one or more attributes to retrieve from the specified table or index. These attributes can include scalars, sets, or elements of a JSON document. The attributes in the expression must be separated by commas.

If no attribute names are specified, then all attributes will be returned. If any of the requested attributes are not found, they will not appear in the result.

For more information, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

FilterExpression

A string that contains conditions that DynamoDB applies after the scan operation, but before the data is returned to you. Items that do not satisfy the FilterExpression criteria are not returned.

A FilterExpression is applied after the items have already been read; the process of filtering does not consume any additional read capacity units.

For more information, see Filter Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeNames

One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression. The following are some use cases for using ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • To access an attribute whose name conflicts with a DynamoDB reserved word.

  • To create a placeholder for repeating occurrences of an attribute name in an expression.

  • To prevent special characters in an attribute name from being misinterpreted in an expression.

Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:

  • Percentile

The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide). To work around this, you could specify the following for ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • {"#P":"Percentile"}

You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:

  • ⁠#P = :val⁠

Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime.

For more information on expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeValues

One or more values that can be substituted in an expression.

Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether the value of the ProductStatus attribute was one of the following:

Available | Backordered | Discontinued

You would first need to specify ExpressionAttributeValues as follows:

⁠{ ":avail":{"S":"Available"}, ":back":{"S":"Backordered"}, ":disc":{"S":"Discontinued"} }⁠

You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:

⁠ProductStatus IN (:avail, :back, :disc)⁠

For more information on expression attribute values, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConsistentRead

A Boolean value that determines the read consistency model during the scan:

  • If ConsistentRead is false, then the data returned from scan might not contain the results from other recently completed write operations (put_item, update_item, or delete_item).

  • If ConsistentRead is true, then all of the write operations that completed before the scan began are guaranteed to be contained in the scan response.

The default setting for ConsistentRead is false.

The ConsistentRead parameter is not supported on global secondary indexes. If you scan a global secondary index with ConsistentRead set to true, you will receive a ValidationException.


Associate a set of tags with an Amazon DynamoDB resource

Description

Associate a set of tags with an Amazon DynamoDB resource. You can then activate these user-defined tags so that they appear on the Billing and Cost Management console for cost allocation tracking. You can call TagResource up to five times per second, per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] Identifies the Amazon DynamoDB resource to which tags should be added. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Tags

[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon DynamoDB resource.


TransactGetItems is a synchronous operation that atomically retrieves multiple items from one or more tables (but not from indexes) in a single account and Region

Description

transact_get_items is a synchronous operation that atomically retrieves multiple items from one or more tables (but not from indexes) in a single account and Region. A transact_get_items call can contain up to 100 TransactGetItem objects, each of which contains a Get structure that specifies an item to retrieve from a table in the account and Region. A call to transact_get_items cannot retrieve items from tables in more than one Amazon Web Services account or Region. The aggregate size of the items in the transaction cannot exceed 4 MB.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_transact_get_items/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_transact_get_items(TransactItems, ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL)

Arguments

TransactItems

[required] An ordered array of up to 100 TransactGetItem objects, each of which contains a Get structure.

ReturnConsumedCapacity

A value of TOTAL causes consumed capacity information to be returned, and a value of NONE prevents that information from being returned. No other value is valid.


TransactWriteItems is a synchronous write operation that groups up to 100 action requests

Description

transact_write_items is a synchronous write operation that groups up to 100 action requests. These actions can target items in different tables, but not in different Amazon Web Services accounts or Regions, and no two actions can target the same item. For example, you cannot both ConditionCheck and Update the same item. The aggregate size of the items in the transaction cannot exceed 4 MB.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_transact_write_items/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_transact_write_items(
  TransactItems,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL,
  ClientRequestToken = NULL
)

Arguments

TransactItems

[required] An ordered array of up to 100 TransactWriteItem objects, each of which contains a ConditionCheck, Put, Update, or Delete object. These can operate on items in different tables, but the tables must reside in the same Amazon Web Services account and Region, and no two of them can operate on the same item.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics

Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to SIZE, the response includes statistics about item collections (if any), that were modified during the operation and are returned in the response. If set to NONE (the default), no statistics are returned.

ClientRequestToken

Providing a ClientRequestToken makes the call to transact_write_items idempotent, meaning that multiple identical calls have the same effect as one single call.

Although multiple identical calls using the same client request token produce the same result on the server (no side effects), the responses to the calls might not be the same. If the ReturnConsumedCapacity parameter is set, then the initial transact_write_items call returns the amount of write capacity units consumed in making the changes. Subsequent transact_write_items calls with the same client token return the number of read capacity units consumed in reading the item.

A client request token is valid for 10 minutes after the first request that uses it is completed. After 10 minutes, any request with the same client token is treated as a new request. Do not resubmit the same request with the same client token for more than 10 minutes, or the result might not be idempotent.

If you submit a request with the same client token but a change in other parameters within the 10-minute idempotency window, DynamoDB returns an IdempotentParameterMismatch exception.


Removes the association of tags from an Amazon DynamoDB resource

Description

Removes the association of tags from an Amazon DynamoDB resource. You can call untag_resource up to five times per second, per account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The DynamoDB resource that the tags will be removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

TagKeys

[required] A list of tag keys. Existing tags of the resource whose keys are members of this list will be removed from the DynamoDB resource.


UpdateContinuousBackups enables or disables point in time recovery for the specified table

Description

update_continuous_backups enables or disables point in time recovery for the specified table. A successful update_continuous_backups call returns the current ContinuousBackupsDescription. Continuous backups are ENABLED on all tables at table creation. If point in time recovery is enabled, PointInTimeRecoveryStatus will be set to ENABLED.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_continuous_backups/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_continuous_backups(TableName, PointInTimeRecoverySpecification)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

PointInTimeRecoverySpecification

[required] Represents the settings used to enable point in time recovery.


Updates the status for contributor insights for a specific table or index

Description

Updates the status for contributor insights for a specific table or index. CloudWatch Contributor Insights for DynamoDB graphs display the partition key and (if applicable) sort key of frequently accessed items and frequently throttled items in plaintext. If you require the use of Amazon Web Services Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt this table’s partition key and sort key data with an Amazon Web Services managed key or customer managed key, you should not enable CloudWatch Contributor Insights for DynamoDB for this table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_contributor_insights/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_contributor_insights(
  TableName,
  IndexName = NULL,
  ContributorInsightsAction
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

IndexName

The global secondary index name, if applicable.

ContributorInsightsAction

[required] Represents the contributor insights action.


Adds or removes replicas in the specified global table

Description

Adds or removes replicas in the specified global table. The global table must already exist to be able to use this operation. Any replica to be added must be empty, have the same name as the global table, have the same key schema, have DynamoDB Streams enabled, and have the same provisioned and maximum write capacity units.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_global_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_global_table(GlobalTableName, ReplicaUpdates)

Arguments

GlobalTableName

[required] The global table name.

ReplicaUpdates

[required] A list of Regions that should be added or removed from the global table.


Updates settings for a global table

Description

Updates settings for a global table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_global_table_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_global_table_settings(
  GlobalTableName,
  GlobalTableBillingMode = NULL,
  GlobalTableProvisionedWriteCapacityUnits = NULL,
  GlobalTableProvisionedWriteCapacityAutoScalingSettingsUpdate = NULL,
  GlobalTableGlobalSecondaryIndexSettingsUpdate = NULL,
  ReplicaSettingsUpdate = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalTableName

[required] The name of the global table

GlobalTableBillingMode

The billing mode of the global table. If GlobalTableBillingMode is not specified, the global table defaults to PROVISIONED capacity billing mode.

  • PROVISIONED - We recommend using PROVISIONED for predictable workloads. PROVISIONED sets the billing mode to Provisioned capacity mode.

  • PAY_PER_REQUEST - We recommend using PAY_PER_REQUEST for unpredictable workloads. PAY_PER_REQUEST sets the billing mode to On-demand capacity mode.

GlobalTableProvisionedWriteCapacityUnits

The maximum number of writes consumed per second before DynamoDB returns a ThrottlingException.

GlobalTableProvisionedWriteCapacityAutoScalingSettingsUpdate

Auto scaling settings for managing provisioned write capacity for the global table.

GlobalTableGlobalSecondaryIndexSettingsUpdate

Represents the settings of a global secondary index for a global table that will be modified.

ReplicaSettingsUpdate

Represents the settings for a global table in a Region that will be modified.


Edits an existing item's attributes, or adds a new item to the table if it does not already exist

Description

Edits an existing item's attributes, or adds a new item to the table if it does not already exist. You can put, delete, or add attribute values. You can also perform a conditional update on an existing item (insert a new attribute name-value pair if it doesn't exist, or replace an existing name-value pair if it has certain expected attribute values).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_item/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_item(
  TableName,
  Key,
  AttributeUpdates = NULL,
  Expected = NULL,
  ConditionalOperator = NULL,
  ReturnValues = NULL,
  ReturnConsumedCapacity = NULL,
  ReturnItemCollectionMetrics = NULL,
  UpdateExpression = NULL,
  ConditionExpression = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeNames = NULL,
  ExpressionAttributeValues = NULL,
  ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table containing the item to update. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

Key

[required] The primary key of the item to be updated. Each element consists of an attribute name and a value for that attribute.

For the primary key, you must provide all of the attributes. For example, with a simple primary key, you only need to provide a value for the partition key. For a composite primary key, you must provide values for both the partition key and the sort key.

AttributeUpdates

This is a legacy parameter. Use UpdateExpression instead. For more information, see AttributeUpdates in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

Expected

This is a legacy parameter. Use ConditionExpression instead. For more information, see Expected in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConditionalOperator

This is a legacy parameter. Use ConditionExpression instead. For more information, see ConditionalOperator in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ReturnValues

Use ReturnValues if you want to get the item attributes as they appear before or after they are successfully updated. For update_item, the valid values are:

  • NONE - If ReturnValues is not specified, or if its value is NONE, then nothing is returned. (This setting is the default for ReturnValues.)

  • ALL_OLD - Returns all of the attributes of the item, as they appeared before the UpdateItem operation.

  • UPDATED_OLD - Returns only the updated attributes, as they appeared before the UpdateItem operation.

  • ALL_NEW - Returns all of the attributes of the item, as they appear after the UpdateItem operation.

  • UPDATED_NEW - Returns only the updated attributes, as they appear after the UpdateItem operation.

There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed.

The values returned are strongly consistent.

ReturnConsumedCapacity
ReturnItemCollectionMetrics

Determines whether item collection metrics are returned. If set to SIZE, the response includes statistics about item collections, if any, that were modified during the operation are returned in the response. If set to NONE (the default), no statistics are returned.

UpdateExpression

An expression that defines one or more attributes to be updated, the action to be performed on them, and new values for them.

The following action values are available for UpdateExpression.

  • SET - Adds one or more attributes and values to an item. If any of these attributes already exist, they are replaced by the new values. You can also use SET to add or subtract from an attribute that is of type Number. For example: ⁠SET myNum = myNum + :val⁠

    SET supports the following functions:

    • if_not_exists (path, operand) - if the item does not contain an attribute at the specified path, then if_not_exists evaluates to operand; otherwise, it evaluates to path. You can use this function to avoid overwriting an attribute that may already be present in the item.

    • list_append (operand, operand) - evaluates to a list with a new element added to it. You can append the new element to the start or the end of the list by reversing the order of the operands.

    These function names are case-sensitive.

  • REMOVE - Removes one or more attributes from an item.

  • ADD - Adds the specified value to the item, if the attribute does not already exist. If the attribute does exist, then the behavior of ADD depends on the data type of the attribute:

    • If the existing attribute is a number, and if Value is also a number, then Value is mathematically added to the existing attribute. If Value is a negative number, then it is subtracted from the existing attribute.

      If you use ADD to increment or decrement a number value for an item that doesn't exist before the update, DynamoDB uses 0 as the initial value.

      Similarly, if you use ADD for an existing item to increment or decrement an attribute value that doesn't exist before the update, DynamoDB uses 0 as the initial value. For example, suppose that the item you want to update doesn't have an attribute named itemcount, but you decide to ADD the number 3 to this attribute anyway. DynamoDB will create the itemcount attribute, set its initial value to 0, and finally add 3 to it. The result will be a new itemcount attribute in the item, with a value of 3.

    • If the existing data type is a set and if Value is also a set, then Value is added to the existing set. For example, if the attribute value is the set ⁠[1,2]⁠, and the ADD action specified ⁠[3]⁠, then the final attribute value is ⁠[1,2,3]⁠. An error occurs if an ADD action is specified for a set attribute and the attribute type specified does not match the existing set type.

      Both sets must have the same primitive data type. For example, if the existing data type is a set of strings, the Value must also be a set of strings.

    The ADD action only supports Number and set data types. In addition, ADD can only be used on top-level attributes, not nested attributes.

  • DELETE - Deletes an element from a set.

    If a set of values is specified, then those values are subtracted from the old set. For example, if the attribute value was the set ⁠[a,b,c]⁠ and the DELETE action specifies ⁠[a,c]⁠, then the final attribute value is ⁠[b]⁠. Specifying an empty set is an error.

    The DELETE action only supports set data types. In addition, DELETE can only be used on top-level attributes, not nested attributes.

You can have many actions in a single expression, such as the following: ⁠SET a=:value1, b=:value2 DELETE :value3, :value4, :value5⁠

For more information on update expressions, see Modifying Items and Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ConditionExpression

A condition that must be satisfied in order for a conditional update to succeed.

An expression can contain any of the following:

  • Functions: attribute_exists | attribute_not_exists | attribute_type | contains | begins_with | size

    These function names are case-sensitive.

  • Comparison operators: ⁠= | <> | < | > | <= | >= | BETWEEN | IN ⁠

  • Logical operators: AND | OR | NOT

For more information about condition expressions, see Specifying Conditions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeNames

One or more substitution tokens for attribute names in an expression. The following are some use cases for using ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • To access an attribute whose name conflicts with a DynamoDB reserved word.

  • To create a placeholder for repeating occurrences of an attribute name in an expression.

  • To prevent special characters in an attribute name from being misinterpreted in an expression.

Use the # character in an expression to dereference an attribute name. For example, consider the following attribute name:

  • Percentile

The name of this attribute conflicts with a reserved word, so it cannot be used directly in an expression. (For the complete list of reserved words, see Reserved Words in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.) To work around this, you could specify the following for ExpressionAttributeNames:

  • {"#P":"Percentile"}

You could then use this substitution in an expression, as in this example:

  • ⁠#P = :val⁠

Tokens that begin with the : character are expression attribute values, which are placeholders for the actual value at runtime.

For more information about expression attribute names, see Specifying Item Attributes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ExpressionAttributeValues

One or more values that can be substituted in an expression.

Use the : (colon) character in an expression to dereference an attribute value. For example, suppose that you wanted to check whether the value of the ProductStatus attribute was one of the following:

Available | Backordered | Discontinued

You would first need to specify ExpressionAttributeValues as follows:

⁠{ ":avail":{"S":"Available"}, ":back":{"S":"Backordered"}, ":disc":{"S":"Discontinued"} }⁠

You could then use these values in an expression, such as this:

⁠ProductStatus IN (:avail, :back, :disc)⁠

For more information on expression attribute values, see Condition Expressions in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

ReturnValuesOnConditionCheckFailure

An optional parameter that returns the item attributes for an update_item operation that failed a condition check.

There is no additional cost associated with requesting a return value aside from the small network and processing overhead of receiving a larger response. No read capacity units are consumed.


The command to update the Kinesis stream destination

Description

The command to update the Kinesis stream destination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_kinesis_streaming_destination/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_kinesis_streaming_destination(
  TableName,
  StreamArn,
  UpdateKinesisStreamingConfiguration = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The table name for the Kinesis streaming destination input. You can also provide the ARN of the table in this parameter.

StreamArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the Kinesis stream input.

UpdateKinesisStreamingConfiguration

The command to update the Kinesis stream configuration.


Modifies the provisioned throughput settings, global secondary indexes, or DynamoDB Streams settings for a given table

Description

Modifies the provisioned throughput settings, global secondary indexes, or DynamoDB Streams settings for a given table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_table(
  AttributeDefinitions = NULL,
  TableName,
  BillingMode = NULL,
  ProvisionedThroughput = NULL,
  GlobalSecondaryIndexUpdates = NULL,
  StreamSpecification = NULL,
  SSESpecification = NULL,
  ReplicaUpdates = NULL,
  TableClass = NULL,
  DeletionProtectionEnabled = NULL,
  MultiRegionConsistency = NULL,
  OnDemandThroughput = NULL,
  WarmThroughput = NULL
)

Arguments

AttributeDefinitions

An array of attributes that describe the key schema for the table and indexes. If you are adding a new global secondary index to the table, AttributeDefinitions must include the key element(s) of the new index.

TableName

[required] The name of the table to be updated. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

BillingMode

Controls how you are charged for read and write throughput and how you manage capacity. When switching from pay-per-request to provisioned capacity, initial provisioned capacity values must be set. The initial provisioned capacity values are estimated based on the consumed read and write capacity of your table and global secondary indexes over the past 30 minutes.

  • PROVISIONED - We recommend using PROVISIONED for predictable workloads. PROVISIONED sets the billing mode to Provisioned capacity mode.

  • PAY_PER_REQUEST - We recommend using PAY_PER_REQUEST for unpredictable workloads. PAY_PER_REQUEST sets the billing mode to On-demand capacity mode.

ProvisionedThroughput

The new provisioned throughput settings for the specified table or index.

GlobalSecondaryIndexUpdates

An array of one or more global secondary indexes for the table. For each index in the array, you can request one action:

  • Create - add a new global secondary index to the table.

  • Update - modify the provisioned throughput settings of an existing global secondary index.

  • Delete - remove a global secondary index from the table.

You can create or delete only one global secondary index per update_table operation.

For more information, see Managing Global Secondary Indexes in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

StreamSpecification

Represents the DynamoDB Streams configuration for the table.

You receive a ValidationException if you try to enable a stream on a table that already has a stream, or if you try to disable a stream on a table that doesn't have a stream.

SSESpecification

The new server-side encryption settings for the specified table.

ReplicaUpdates

A list of replica update actions (create, delete, or update) for the table.

For global tables, this property only applies to global tables using Version 2019.11.21 (Current version).

TableClass

The table class of the table to be updated. Valid values are STANDARD and STANDARD_INFREQUENT_ACCESS.

DeletionProtectionEnabled

Indicates whether deletion protection is to be enabled (true) or disabled (false) on the table.

MultiRegionConsistency

Specifies the consistency mode for a new global table. This parameter is only valid when you create a global table by specifying one or more Create actions in the ReplicaUpdates action list.

You can specify one of the following consistency modes:

  • EVENTUAL: Configures a new global table for multi-Region eventual consistency. This is the default consistency mode for global tables.

  • STRONG: Configures a new global table for multi-Region strong consistency (preview).

    Multi-Region strong consistency (MRSC) is a new DynamoDB global tables capability currently available in preview mode. For more information, see Global tables multi-Region strong consistency.

If you don't specify this parameter, the global table consistency mode defaults to EVENTUAL.

OnDemandThroughput

Updates the maximum number of read and write units for the specified table in on-demand capacity mode. If you use this parameter, you must specify MaxReadRequestUnits, MaxWriteRequestUnits, or both.

WarmThroughput

Represents the warm throughput (in read units per second and write units per second) for updating a table.


Updates auto scaling settings on your global tables at once

Description

Updates auto scaling settings on your global tables at once.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_table_replica_auto_scaling/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_table_replica_auto_scaling(
  GlobalSecondaryIndexUpdates = NULL,
  TableName,
  ProvisionedWriteCapacityAutoScalingUpdate = NULL,
  ReplicaUpdates = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalSecondaryIndexUpdates

Represents the auto scaling settings of the global secondary indexes of the replica to be updated.

TableName

[required] The name of the global table to be updated. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

ProvisionedWriteCapacityAutoScalingUpdate
ReplicaUpdates

Represents the auto scaling settings of replicas of the table that will be modified.


The UpdateTimeToLive method enables or disables Time to Live (TTL) for the specified table

Description

The update_time_to_live method enables or disables Time to Live (TTL) for the specified table. A successful update_time_to_live call returns the current TimeToLiveSpecification. It can take up to one hour for the change to fully process. Any additional update_time_to_live calls for the same table during this one hour duration result in a ValidationException.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodb_update_time_to_live/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodb_update_time_to_live(TableName, TimeToLiveSpecification)

Arguments

TableName

[required] The name of the table to be configured. You can also provide the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the table in this parameter.

TimeToLiveSpecification

[required] Represents the settings used to enable or disable Time to Live for the specified table.


Amazon DynamoDB Streams

Description

Amazon DynamoDB

Amazon DynamoDB Streams provides API actions for accessing streams and processing stream records. To learn more about application development with Streams, see Capturing Table Activity with DynamoDB Streams in the Amazon DynamoDB Developer Guide.

Usage

dynamodbstreams(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- dynamodbstreams(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

describe_stream Returns information about a stream, including the current status of the stream, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the composition of its shards, and its corresponding DynamoDB table
get_records Retrieves the stream records from a given shard
get_shard_iterator Returns a shard iterator
list_streams Returns an array of stream ARNs associated with the current account and endpoint

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- dynamodbstreams()
# The following example describes a stream with a given stream ARN.
svc$describe_stream(
  StreamArn = "arn:aws:dynamodb:us-west-2:111122223333:table/Forum/stream/2..."
)

## End(Not run)


Returns information about a stream, including the current status of the stream, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the composition of its shards, and its corresponding DynamoDB table

Description

Returns information about a stream, including the current status of the stream, its Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the composition of its shards, and its corresponding DynamoDB table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodbstreams_describe_stream/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodbstreams_describe_stream(
  StreamArn,
  Limit = NULL,
  ExclusiveStartShardId = NULL
)

Arguments

StreamArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the stream.

Limit

The maximum number of shard objects to return. The upper limit is 100.

ExclusiveStartShardId

The shard ID of the first item that this operation will evaluate. Use the value that was returned for LastEvaluatedShardId in the previous operation.


Retrieves the stream records from a given shard

Description

Retrieves the stream records from a given shard.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodbstreams_get_records/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodbstreams_get_records(ShardIterator, Limit = NULL)

Arguments

ShardIterator

[required] A shard iterator that was retrieved from a previous GetShardIterator operation. This iterator can be used to access the stream records in this shard.

Limit

The maximum number of records to return from the shard. The upper limit is 1000.


Returns a shard iterator

Description

Returns a shard iterator. A shard iterator provides information about how to retrieve the stream records from within a shard. Use the shard iterator in a subsequent get_records request to read the stream records from the shard.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodbstreams_get_shard_iterator/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodbstreams_get_shard_iterator(
  StreamArn,
  ShardId,
  ShardIteratorType,
  SequenceNumber = NULL
)

Arguments

StreamArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the stream.

ShardId

[required] The identifier of the shard. The iterator will be returned for this shard ID.

ShardIteratorType

[required] Determines how the shard iterator is used to start reading stream records from the shard:

  • AT_SEQUENCE_NUMBER - Start reading exactly from the position denoted by a specific sequence number.

  • AFTER_SEQUENCE_NUMBER - Start reading right after the position denoted by a specific sequence number.

  • TRIM_HORIZON - Start reading at the last (untrimmed) stream record, which is the oldest record in the shard. In DynamoDB Streams, there is a 24 hour limit on data retention. Stream records whose age exceeds this limit are subject to removal (trimming) from the stream.

  • LATEST - Start reading just after the most recent stream record in the shard, so that you always read the most recent data in the shard.

SequenceNumber

The sequence number of a stream record in the shard from which to start reading.


Returns an array of stream ARNs associated with the current account and endpoint

Description

Returns an array of stream ARNs associated with the current account and endpoint. If the TableName parameter is present, then list_streams will return only the streams ARNs for that table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/dynamodbstreams_list_streams/ for full documentation.

Usage

dynamodbstreams_list_streams(
  TableName = NULL,
  Limit = NULL,
  ExclusiveStartStreamArn = NULL
)

Arguments

TableName

If this parameter is provided, then only the streams associated with this table name are returned.

Limit

The maximum number of streams to return. The upper limit is 100.

ExclusiveStartStreamArn

The ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of the first item that this operation will evaluate. Use the value that was returned for LastEvaluatedStreamArn in the previous operation.


Amazon ElastiCache

Description

Amazon ElastiCache is a web service that makes it easier to set up, operate, and scale a distributed cache in the cloud.

With ElastiCache, customers get all of the benefits of a high-performance, in-memory cache with less of the administrative burden involved in launching and managing a distributed cache. The service makes setup, scaling, and cluster failure handling much simpler than in a self-managed cache deployment.

In addition, through integration with Amazon CloudWatch, customers get enhanced visibility into the key performance statistics associated with their cache and can receive alarms if a part of their cache runs hot.

Usage

elasticache(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- elasticache(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

add_tags_to_resource A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive
authorize_cache_security_group_ingress Allows network ingress to a cache security group
batch_apply_update_action Apply the service update
batch_stop_update_action Stop the service update
complete_migration Complete the migration of data
copy_serverless_cache_snapshot Creates a copy of an existing serverless cache’s snapshot
copy_snapshot Makes a copy of an existing snapshot
create_cache_cluster Creates a cluster
create_cache_parameter_group Creates a new Amazon ElastiCache cache parameter group
create_cache_security_group Creates a new cache security group
create_cache_subnet_group Creates a new cache subnet group
create_global_replication_group Global Datastore offers fully managed, fast, reliable and secure cross-region replication
create_replication_group Creates a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) or a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group
create_serverless_cache Creates a serverless cache
create_serverless_cache_snapshot This API creates a copy of an entire ServerlessCache at a specific moment in time
create_snapshot Creates a copy of an entire cluster or replication group at a specific moment in time
create_user For Valkey engine version 7
create_user_group For Valkey engine version 7
decrease_node_groups_in_global_replication_group Decreases the number of node groups in a Global datastore
decrease_replica_count Dynamically decreases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group
delete_cache_cluster Deletes a previously provisioned cluster
delete_cache_parameter_group Deletes the specified cache parameter group
delete_cache_security_group Deletes a cache security group
delete_cache_subnet_group Deletes a cache subnet group
delete_global_replication_group Deleting a Global datastore is a two-step process:
delete_replication_group Deletes an existing replication group
delete_serverless_cache Deletes a specified existing serverless cache
delete_serverless_cache_snapshot Deletes an existing serverless cache snapshot
delete_snapshot Deletes an existing snapshot
delete_user For Valkey engine version 7
delete_user_group For Valkey engine version 7
describe_cache_clusters Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cache cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied
describe_cache_engine_versions Returns a list of the available cache engines and their versions
describe_cache_parameter_groups Returns a list of cache parameter group descriptions
describe_cache_parameters Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cache parameter group
describe_cache_security_groups Returns a list of cache security group descriptions
describe_cache_subnet_groups Returns a list of cache subnet group descriptions
describe_engine_default_parameters Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified cache engine
describe_events Returns events related to clusters, cache security groups, and cache parameter groups
describe_global_replication_groups Returns information about a particular global replication group
describe_replication_groups Returns information about a particular replication group
describe_reserved_cache_nodes Returns information about reserved cache nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved cache node
describe_reserved_cache_nodes_offerings Lists available reserved cache node offerings
describe_serverless_caches Returns information about a specific serverless cache
describe_serverless_cache_snapshots Returns information about serverless cache snapshots
describe_service_updates Returns details of the service updates
describe_snapshots Returns information about cluster or replication group snapshots
describe_update_actions Returns details of the update actions
describe_user_groups Returns a list of user groups
describe_users Returns a list of users
disassociate_global_replication_group Remove a secondary cluster from the Global datastore using the Global datastore name
export_serverless_cache_snapshot Provides the functionality to export the serverless cache snapshot data to Amazon S3
failover_global_replication_group Used to failover the primary region to a secondary region
increase_node_groups_in_global_replication_group Increase the number of node groups in the Global datastore
increase_replica_count Dynamically increases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group
list_allowed_node_type_modifications Lists all available node types that you can scale with your cluster's replication group's current node type
list_tags_for_resource Lists all tags currently on a named resource
modify_cache_cluster Modifies the settings for a cluster
modify_cache_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group
modify_cache_subnet_group Modifies an existing cache subnet group
modify_global_replication_group Modifies the settings for a Global datastore
modify_replication_group Modifies the settings for a replication group
modify_replication_group_shard_configuration Modifies a replication group's shards (node groups) by allowing you to add shards, remove shards, or rebalance the keyspaces among existing shards
modify_serverless_cache This API modifies the attributes of a serverless cache
modify_user Changes user password(s) and/or access string
modify_user_group Changes the list of users that belong to the user group
purchase_reserved_cache_nodes_offering Allows you to purchase a reserved cache node offering
rebalance_slots_in_global_replication_group Redistribute slots to ensure uniform distribution across existing shards in the cluster
reboot_cache_cluster Reboots some, or all, of the cache nodes within a provisioned cluster
remove_tags_from_resource Removes the tags identified by the TagKeys list from the named resource
reset_cache_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group to the engine or system default value
revoke_cache_security_group_ingress Revokes ingress from a cache security group
start_migration Start the migration of data
test_failover Represents the input of a TestFailover operation which tests automatic failover on a specified node group (called shard in the console) in a replication group (called cluster in the console)
test_migration Async API to test connection between source and target replication group

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- elasticache()
# Adds up to 10 tags, key/value pairs, to a cluster or snapshot resource.
svc$add_tags_to_resource(
  ResourceName = "arn:aws:elasticache:us-east-1:1234567890:cluster:my-mem-cluster",
  Tags = list(
    list(
      Key = "APIVersion",
      Value = "20150202"
    ),
    list(
      Key = "Service",
      Value = "ElastiCache"
    )
  )
)

## End(Not run)


A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive

Description

A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive. You can use tags to categorize and track all your ElastiCache resources, with the exception of global replication group. When you add or remove tags on replication groups, those actions will be replicated to all nodes in the replication group. For more information, see Resource-level permissions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceName, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which the tags are to be added, for example arn:aws:elasticache:us-west-2:0123456789:cluster:myCluster or arn:aws:elasticache:us-west-2:0123456789:snapshot:mySnapshot. ElastiCache resources are cluster and snapshot.

For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Service Namespaces.

Tags

[required] A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Allows network ingress to a cache security group

Description

Allows network ingress to a cache security group. Applications using ElastiCache must be running on Amazon EC2, and Amazon EC2 security groups are used as the authorization mechanism.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_authorize_cache_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_authorize_cache_security_group_ingress(
  CacheSecurityGroupName,
  EC2SecurityGroupName,
  EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId
)

Arguments

CacheSecurityGroupName

[required] The cache security group that allows network ingress.

EC2SecurityGroupName

[required] The Amazon EC2 security group to be authorized for ingress to the cache security group.

EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId

[required] The Amazon account number of the Amazon EC2 security group owner. Note that this is not the same thing as an Amazon access key ID - you must provide a valid Amazon account number for this parameter.


Apply the service update

Description

Apply the service update. For more information on service updates and applying them, see Applying Service Updates.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_batch_apply_update_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_batch_apply_update_action(
  ReplicationGroupIds = NULL,
  CacheClusterIds = NULL,
  ServiceUpdateName
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupIds

The replication group IDs

CacheClusterIds

The cache cluster IDs

ServiceUpdateName

[required] The unique ID of the service update


Stop the service update

Description

Stop the service update. For more information on service updates and stopping them, see Stopping Service Updates.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_batch_stop_update_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_batch_stop_update_action(
  ReplicationGroupIds = NULL,
  CacheClusterIds = NULL,
  ServiceUpdateName
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupIds

The replication group IDs

CacheClusterIds

The cache cluster IDs

ServiceUpdateName

[required] The unique ID of the service update


Complete the migration of data

Description

Complete the migration of data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_complete_migration/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_complete_migration(ReplicationGroupId, Force = NULL)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The ID of the replication group to which data is being migrated.

Force

Forces the migration to stop without ensuring that data is in sync. It is recommended to use this option only to abort the migration and not recommended when application wants to continue migration to ElastiCache.


Creates a copy of an existing serverless cache’s snapshot

Description

Creates a copy of an existing serverless cache’s snapshot. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_copy_serverless_cache_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_copy_serverless_cache_snapshot(
  SourceServerlessCacheSnapshotName,
  TargetServerlessCacheSnapshotName,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceServerlessCacheSnapshotName

[required] The identifier of the existing serverless cache’s snapshot to be copied. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

TargetServerlessCacheSnapshotName

[required] The identifier for the snapshot to be created. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

KmsKeyId

The identifier of the KMS key used to encrypt the target snapshot. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to the target snapshot resource. A tag is a key-value pair. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Default: NULL


Makes a copy of an existing snapshot

Description

Makes a copy of an existing snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_copy_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_copy_snapshot(
  SourceSnapshotName,
  TargetSnapshotName,
  TargetBucket = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceSnapshotName

[required] The name of an existing snapshot from which to make a copy.

TargetSnapshotName

[required] A name for the snapshot copy. ElastiCache does not permit overwriting a snapshot, therefore this name must be unique within its context - ElastiCache or an Amazon S3 bucket if exporting.

TargetBucket

The Amazon S3 bucket to which the snapshot is exported. This parameter is used only when exporting a snapshot for external access.

When using this parameter to export a snapshot, be sure Amazon ElastiCache has the needed permissions to this S3 bucket. For more information, see Step 2: Grant ElastiCache Access to Your Amazon S3 Bucket in the Amazon ElastiCache User Guide.

For more information, see Exporting a Snapshot in the Amazon ElastiCache User Guide.

KmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the target snapshot.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Creates a cluster

Description

Creates a cluster. All nodes in the cluster run the same protocol-compliant cache engine software, either Memcached, Valkey or Redis OSS.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_cache_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_cache_cluster(
  CacheClusterId,
  ReplicationGroupId = NULL,
  AZMode = NULL,
  PreferredAvailabilityZone = NULL,
  PreferredAvailabilityZones = NULL,
  NumCacheNodes = NULL,
  CacheNodeType = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
  CacheSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  CacheSecurityGroupNames = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  SnapshotArns = NULL,
  SnapshotName = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
  SnapshotWindow = NULL,
  AuthToken = NULL,
  OutpostMode = NULL,
  PreferredOutpostArn = NULL,
  PreferredOutpostArns = NULL,
  LogDeliveryConfigurations = NULL,
  TransitEncryptionEnabled = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  IpDiscovery = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheClusterId

[required] The node group (shard) identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • A name must contain from 1 to 50 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • A name cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

ReplicationGroupId

The ID of the replication group to which this cluster should belong. If this parameter is specified, the cluster is added to the specified replication group as a read replica; otherwise, the cluster is a standalone primary that is not part of any replication group.

If the specified replication group is Multi-AZ enabled and the Availability Zone is not specified, the cluster is created in Availability Zones that provide the best spread of read replicas across Availability Zones.

This parameter is only valid if the Engine parameter is redis.

AZMode

Specifies whether the nodes in this Memcached cluster are created in a single Availability Zone or created across multiple Availability Zones in the cluster's region.

This parameter is only supported for Memcached clusters.

If the AZMode and PreferredAvailabilityZones are not specified, ElastiCache assumes single-az mode.

PreferredAvailabilityZone

The EC2 Availability Zone in which the cluster is created.

All nodes belonging to this cluster are placed in the preferred Availability Zone. If you want to create your nodes across multiple Availability Zones, use PreferredAvailabilityZones.

Default: System chosen Availability Zone.

PreferredAvailabilityZones

A list of the Availability Zones in which cache nodes are created. The order of the zones in the list is not important.

This option is only supported on Memcached.

If you are creating your cluster in an Amazon VPC (recommended) you can only locate nodes in Availability Zones that are associated with the subnets in the selected subnet group.

The number of Availability Zones listed must equal the value of NumCacheNodes.

If you want all the nodes in the same Availability Zone, use PreferredAvailabilityZone instead, or repeat the Availability Zone multiple times in the list.

Default: System chosen Availability Zones.

NumCacheNodes

The initial number of cache nodes that the cluster has.

For clusters running Valkey or Redis OSS, this value must be 1. For clusters running Memcached, this value must be between 1 and 40.

If you need more than 40 nodes for your Memcached cluster, please fill out the ElastiCache Limit Increase Request form at http://aws.amazon.com/contact-us/elasticache-node-limit-request/.

CacheNodeType

The compute and memory capacity of the nodes in the node group (shard).

The following node types are supported by ElastiCache. Generally speaking, the current generation types provide more memory and computational power at lower cost when compared to their equivalent previous generation counterparts.

  • General purpose:

    • Current generation:

      M7g node types: cache.m7g.large, cache.m7g.xlarge, cache.m7g.2xlarge, cache.m7g.4xlarge, cache.m7g.8xlarge, cache.m7g.12xlarge, cache.m7g.16xlarge

      For region availability, see Supported Node Types

      M6g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and for Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.m6g.large, cache.m6g.xlarge, cache.m6g.2xlarge, cache.m6g.4xlarge, cache.m6g.8xlarge, cache.m6g.12xlarge, cache.m6g.16xlarge

      M5 node types: cache.m5.large, cache.m5.xlarge, cache.m5.2xlarge, cache.m5.4xlarge, cache.m5.12xlarge, cache.m5.24xlarge

      M4 node types: cache.m4.large, cache.m4.xlarge, cache.m4.2xlarge, cache.m4.4xlarge, cache.m4.10xlarge

      T4g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.t4g.micro, cache.t4g.small, cache.t4g.medium

      T3 node types: cache.t3.micro, cache.t3.small, cache.t3.medium

      T2 node types: cache.t2.micro, cache.t2.small, cache.t2.medium

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      T1 node types: cache.t1.micro

      M1 node types: cache.m1.small, cache.m1.medium, cache.m1.large, cache.m1.xlarge

      M3 node types: cache.m3.medium, cache.m3.large, cache.m3.xlarge, cache.m3.2xlarge

  • Compute optimized:

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      C1 node types: cache.c1.xlarge

  • Memory optimized:

    • Current generation:

      R7g node types: cache.r7g.large, cache.r7g.xlarge, cache.r7g.2xlarge, cache.r7g.4xlarge, cache.r7g.8xlarge, cache.r7g.12xlarge, cache.r7g.16xlarge

      For region availability, see Supported Node Types

      R6g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and for Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.r6g.large, cache.r6g.xlarge, cache.r6g.2xlarge, cache.r6g.4xlarge, cache.r6g.8xlarge, cache.r6g.12xlarge, cache.r6g.16xlarge

      R5 node types: cache.r5.large, cache.r5.xlarge, cache.r5.2xlarge, cache.r5.4xlarge, cache.r5.12xlarge, cache.r5.24xlarge

      R4 node types: cache.r4.large, cache.r4.xlarge, cache.r4.2xlarge, cache.r4.4xlarge, cache.r4.8xlarge, cache.r4.16xlarge

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      M2 node types: cache.m2.xlarge, cache.m2.2xlarge, cache.m2.4xlarge

      R3 node types: cache.r3.large, cache.r3.xlarge, cache.r3.2xlarge, cache.r3.4xlarge, cache.r3.8xlarge

Additional node type info

  • All current generation instance types are created in Amazon VPC by default.

  • Valkey or Redis OSS append-only files (AOF) are not supported for T1 or T2 instances.

  • Valkey or Redis OSS Multi-AZ with automatic failover is not supported on T1 instances.

  • The configuration variables appendonly and appendfsync are not supported on Valkey, or on Redis OSS version 2.8.22 and later.

Engine

The name of the cache engine to be used for this cluster.

Valid values for this parameter are: memcached | redis

EngineVersion

The version number of the cache engine to be used for this cluster. To view the supported cache engine versions, use the DescribeCacheEngineVersions operation.

Important: You can upgrade to a newer engine version (see Selecting a Cache Engine and Version), but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing cluster or replication group and create it anew with the earlier engine version.

CacheParameterGroupName

The name of the parameter group to associate with this cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default parameter group for the specified engine is used. You cannot use any parameter group which has cluster-enabled='yes' when creating a cluster.

CacheSubnetGroupName

The name of the subnet group to be used for the cluster.

Use this parameter only when you are creating a cluster in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC).

If you're going to launch your cluster in an Amazon VPC, you need to create a subnet group before you start creating a cluster. For more information, see Subnets and Subnet Groups.

CacheSecurityGroupNames

A list of security group names to associate with this cluster.

Use this parameter only when you are creating a cluster outside of an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC).

SecurityGroupIds

One or more VPC security groups associated with the cluster.

Use this parameter only when you are creating a cluster in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC).

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource.

SnapshotArns

A single-element string list containing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN) that uniquely identifies a Valkey or Redis OSS RDB snapshot file stored in Amazon S3. The snapshot file is used to populate the node group (shard). The Amazon S3 object name in the ARN cannot contain any commas.

This parameter is only valid if the Engine parameter is redis.

Example of an Amazon S3 ARN: arn:aws:s3:::my_bucket/snapshot1.rdb

SnapshotName

The name of a Valkey or Redis OSS snapshot from which to restore data into the new node group (shard). The snapshot status changes to restoring while the new node group (shard) is being created.

This parameter is only valid if the Engine parameter is redis.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period.

Port

The port number on which each of the cache nodes accepts connections.

NotificationTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic to which notifications are sent.

The Amazon SNS topic owner must be the same as the cluster owner.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

If you are running Valkey 7.2 and above or Redis OSS engine version 6.0 and above, set this parameter to yes to opt-in to the next auto minor version upgrade campaign. This parameter is disabled for previous versions.

SnapshotRetentionLimit

The number of days for which ElastiCache retains automatic snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set SnapshotRetentionLimit to 5, a snapshot taken today is retained for 5 days before being deleted.

This parameter is only valid if the Engine parameter is redis.

Default: 0 (i.e., automatic backups are disabled for this cache cluster).

SnapshotWindow

The daily time range (in UTC) during which ElastiCache begins taking a daily snapshot of your node group (shard).

Example: 05:00-09:00

If you do not specify this parameter, ElastiCache automatically chooses an appropriate time range.

This parameter is only valid if the Engine parameter is redis.

AuthToken

Reserved parameter. The password used to access a password protected server.

Password constraints:

  • Must be only printable ASCII characters.

  • Must be at least 16 characters and no more than 128 characters in length.

  • The only permitted printable special characters are !, &, #, $, ^, \<, \>, and -. Other printable special characters cannot be used in the AUTH token.

For more information, see AUTH password at http://redis.io/commands/AUTH.

OutpostMode

Specifies whether the nodes in the cluster are created in a single outpost or across multiple outposts.

PreferredOutpostArn

The outpost ARN in which the cache cluster is created.

PreferredOutpostArns

The outpost ARNs in which the cache cluster is created.

LogDeliveryConfigurations

Specifies the destination, format and type of the logs.

TransitEncryptionEnabled

A flag that enables in-transit encryption when set to true.

NetworkType

Must be either ipv4 | ipv6 | dual_stack. IPv6 is supported for workloads using Valkey 7.2 and above, Redis OSS engine version 6.2 and above or Memcached engine version 1.6.6 and above on all instances built on the Nitro system.

IpDiscovery

The network type you choose when modifying a cluster, either ipv4 | ipv6. IPv6 is supported for workloads using Valkey 7.2 and above, Redis OSS engine version 6.2 and above or Memcached engine version 1.6.6 and above on all instances built on the Nitro system.


Creates a new Amazon ElastiCache cache parameter group

Description

Creates a new Amazon ElastiCache cache parameter group. An ElastiCache cache parameter group is a collection of parameters and their values that are applied to all of the nodes in any cluster or replication group using the CacheParameterGroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_cache_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_cache_parameter_group(
  CacheParameterGroupName,
  CacheParameterGroupFamily,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheParameterGroupName

[required] A user-specified name for the cache parameter group.

CacheParameterGroupFamily

[required] The name of the cache parameter group family that the cache parameter group can be used with.

Valid values are: memcached1.4 | memcached1.5 | memcached1.6 | redis2.6 | redis2.8 | redis3.2 | redis4.0 | redis5.0 | redis6.x | redis7

Description

[required] A user-specified description for the cache parameter group.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Creates a new cache security group

Description

Creates a new cache security group. Use a cache security group to control access to one or more clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_cache_security_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_cache_security_group(
  CacheSecurityGroupName,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheSecurityGroupName

[required] A name for the cache security group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters. Cannot be the word "Default".

Example: mysecuritygroup

Description

[required] A description for the cache security group.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Creates a new cache subnet group

Description

Creates a new cache subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_cache_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_cache_subnet_group(
  CacheSubnetGroupName,
  CacheSubnetGroupDescription,
  SubnetIds,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheSubnetGroupName

[required] A name for the cache subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

Example: mysubnetgroup

CacheSubnetGroupDescription

[required] A description for the cache subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] A list of VPC subnet IDs for the cache subnet group.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Global Datastore offers fully managed, fast, reliable and secure cross-region replication

Description

Global Datastore offers fully managed, fast, reliable and secure cross-region replication. Using Global Datastore with Valkey or Redis OSS, you can create cross-region read replica clusters for ElastiCache to enable low-latency reads and disaster recovery across regions. For more information, see Replication Across Regions Using Global Datastore.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_global_replication_group(
  GlobalReplicationGroupIdSuffix,
  GlobalReplicationGroupDescription = NULL,
  PrimaryReplicationGroupId
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupIdSuffix

[required] The suffix name of a Global datastore. Amazon ElastiCache automatically applies a prefix to the Global datastore ID when it is created. Each Amazon Region has its own prefix. For instance, a Global datastore ID created in the US-West-1 region will begin with "dsdfu" along with the suffix name you provide. The suffix, combined with the auto-generated prefix, guarantees uniqueness of the Global datastore name across multiple regions.

For a full list of Amazon Regions and their respective Global datastore iD prefixes, see Using the Amazon CLI with Global datastores .

GlobalReplicationGroupDescription

Provides details of the Global datastore

PrimaryReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the primary cluster that accepts writes and will replicate updates to the secondary cluster.


Creates a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) or a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group

Description

Creates a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) or a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_replication_group(
  ReplicationGroupId,
  ReplicationGroupDescription,
  GlobalReplicationGroupId = NULL,
  PrimaryClusterId = NULL,
  AutomaticFailoverEnabled = NULL,
  MultiAZEnabled = NULL,
  NumCacheClusters = NULL,
  PreferredCacheClusterAZs = NULL,
  NumNodeGroups = NULL,
  ReplicasPerNodeGroup = NULL,
  NodeGroupConfiguration = NULL,
  CacheNodeType = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
  CacheSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  CacheSecurityGroupNames = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  SnapshotArns = NULL,
  SnapshotName = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
  SnapshotWindow = NULL,
  AuthToken = NULL,
  TransitEncryptionEnabled = NULL,
  AtRestEncryptionEnabled = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  UserGroupIds = NULL,
  LogDeliveryConfigurations = NULL,
  DataTieringEnabled = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  IpDiscovery = NULL,
  TransitEncryptionMode = NULL,
  ClusterMode = NULL,
  ServerlessCacheSnapshotName = NULL
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The replication group identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • A name must contain from 1 to 40 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • A name cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

ReplicationGroupDescription

[required] A user-created description for the replication group.

GlobalReplicationGroupId

The name of the Global datastore

PrimaryClusterId

The identifier of the cluster that serves as the primary for this replication group. This cluster must already exist and have a status of available.

This parameter is not required if NumCacheClusters, NumNodeGroups, or ReplicasPerNodeGroup is specified.

AutomaticFailoverEnabled

Specifies whether a read-only replica is automatically promoted to read/write primary if the existing primary fails.

AutomaticFailoverEnabled must be enabled for Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication groups.

Default: false

MultiAZEnabled

A flag indicating if you have Multi-AZ enabled to enhance fault tolerance. For more information, see Minimizing Downtime: Multi-AZ.

NumCacheClusters

The number of clusters this replication group initially has.

This parameter is not used if there is more than one node group (shard). You should use ReplicasPerNodeGroup instead.

If AutomaticFailoverEnabled is true, the value of this parameter must be at least 2. If AutomaticFailoverEnabled is false you can omit this parameter (it will default to 1), or you can explicitly set it to a value between 2 and 6.

The maximum permitted value for NumCacheClusters is 6 (1 primary plus 5 replicas).

PreferredCacheClusterAZs

A list of EC2 Availability Zones in which the replication group's clusters are created. The order of the Availability Zones in the list is the order in which clusters are allocated. The primary cluster is created in the first AZ in the list.

This parameter is not used if there is more than one node group (shard). You should use NodeGroupConfiguration instead.

If you are creating your replication group in an Amazon VPC (recommended), you can only locate clusters in Availability Zones associated with the subnets in the selected subnet group.

The number of Availability Zones listed must equal the value of NumCacheClusters.

Default: system chosen Availability Zones.

NumNodeGroups

An optional parameter that specifies the number of node groups (shards) for this Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) either omit this parameter or set it to 1.

Default: 1

ReplicasPerNodeGroup

An optional parameter that specifies the number of replica nodes in each node group (shard). Valid values are 0 to 5.

NodeGroupConfiguration

A list of node group (shard) configuration options. Each node group (shard) configuration has the following members: PrimaryAvailabilityZone, ReplicaAvailabilityZones, ReplicaCount, and Slots.

If you're creating a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) or a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group, you can use this parameter to individually configure each node group (shard), or you can omit this parameter. However, it is required when seeding a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) cluster from a S3 rdb file. You must configure each node group (shard) using this parameter because you must specify the slots for each node group.

CacheNodeType

The compute and memory capacity of the nodes in the node group (shard).

The following node types are supported by ElastiCache. Generally speaking, the current generation types provide more memory and computational power at lower cost when compared to their equivalent previous generation counterparts.

  • General purpose:

    • Current generation:

      M7g node types: cache.m7g.large, cache.m7g.xlarge, cache.m7g.2xlarge, cache.m7g.4xlarge, cache.m7g.8xlarge, cache.m7g.12xlarge, cache.m7g.16xlarge

      For region availability, see Supported Node Types

      M6g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and for Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.m6g.large, cache.m6g.xlarge, cache.m6g.2xlarge, cache.m6g.4xlarge, cache.m6g.8xlarge, cache.m6g.12xlarge, cache.m6g.16xlarge

      M5 node types: cache.m5.large, cache.m5.xlarge, cache.m5.2xlarge, cache.m5.4xlarge, cache.m5.12xlarge, cache.m5.24xlarge

      M4 node types: cache.m4.large, cache.m4.xlarge, cache.m4.2xlarge, cache.m4.4xlarge, cache.m4.10xlarge

      T4g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.t4g.micro, cache.t4g.small, cache.t4g.medium

      T3 node types: cache.t3.micro, cache.t3.small, cache.t3.medium

      T2 node types: cache.t2.micro, cache.t2.small, cache.t2.medium

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      T1 node types: cache.t1.micro

      M1 node types: cache.m1.small, cache.m1.medium, cache.m1.large, cache.m1.xlarge

      M3 node types: cache.m3.medium, cache.m3.large, cache.m3.xlarge, cache.m3.2xlarge

  • Compute optimized:

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      C1 node types: cache.c1.xlarge

  • Memory optimized:

    • Current generation:

      R7g node types: cache.r7g.large, cache.r7g.xlarge, cache.r7g.2xlarge, cache.r7g.4xlarge, cache.r7g.8xlarge, cache.r7g.12xlarge, cache.r7g.16xlarge

      For region availability, see Supported Node Types

      R6g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and for Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.r6g.large, cache.r6g.xlarge, cache.r6g.2xlarge, cache.r6g.4xlarge, cache.r6g.8xlarge, cache.r6g.12xlarge, cache.r6g.16xlarge

      R5 node types: cache.r5.large, cache.r5.xlarge, cache.r5.2xlarge, cache.r5.4xlarge, cache.r5.12xlarge, cache.r5.24xlarge

      R4 node types: cache.r4.large, cache.r4.xlarge, cache.r4.2xlarge, cache.r4.4xlarge, cache.r4.8xlarge, cache.r4.16xlarge

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      M2 node types: cache.m2.xlarge, cache.m2.2xlarge, cache.m2.4xlarge

      R3 node types: cache.r3.large, cache.r3.xlarge, cache.r3.2xlarge, cache.r3.4xlarge, cache.r3.8xlarge

Additional node type info

  • All current generation instance types are created in Amazon VPC by default.

  • Valkey or Redis OSS append-only files (AOF) are not supported for T1 or T2 instances.

  • Valkey or Redis OSS Multi-AZ with automatic failover is not supported on T1 instances.

  • The configuration variables appendonly and appendfsync are not supported on Valkey, or on Redis OSS version 2.8.22 and later.

Engine

The name of the cache engine to be used for the clusters in this replication group. The value must be set to Redis.

EngineVersion

The version number of the cache engine to be used for the clusters in this replication group. To view the supported cache engine versions, use the describe_cache_engine_versions operation.

Important: You can upgrade to a newer engine version (see Selecting a Cache Engine and Version) in the ElastiCache User Guide, but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing cluster or replication group and create it anew with the earlier engine version.

CacheParameterGroupName

The name of the parameter group to associate with this replication group. If this argument is omitted, the default cache parameter group for the specified engine is used.

If you are running Valkey or Redis OSS version 3.2.4 or later, only one node group (shard), and want to use a default parameter group, we recommend that you specify the parameter group by name.

  • To create a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group, use CacheParameterGroupName=default.redis3.2.

  • To create a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group, use CacheParameterGroupName=default.redis3.2.cluster.on.

CacheSubnetGroupName

The name of the cache subnet group to be used for the replication group.

If you're going to launch your cluster in an Amazon VPC, you need to create a subnet group before you start creating a cluster. For more information, see Subnets and Subnet Groups.

CacheSecurityGroupNames

A list of cache security group names to associate with this replication group.

SecurityGroupIds

One or more Amazon VPC security groups associated with this replication group.

Use this parameter only when you are creating a replication group in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC).

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. Tags are comma-separated key,value pairs (e.g. Key=myKey, Value=myKeyValue. You can include multiple tags as shown following: Key=myKey, Value=myKeyValue Key=mySecondKey, Value=mySecondKeyValue. Tags on replication groups will be replicated to all nodes.

SnapshotArns

A list of Amazon Resource Names (ARN) that uniquely identify the Valkey or Redis OSS RDB snapshot files stored in Amazon S3. The snapshot files are used to populate the new replication group. The Amazon S3 object name in the ARN cannot contain any commas. The new replication group will have the number of node groups (console: shards) specified by the parameter NumNodeGroups or the number of node groups configured by NodeGroupConfiguration regardless of the number of ARNs specified here.

Example of an Amazon S3 ARN: arn:aws:s3:::my_bucket/snapshot1.rdb

SnapshotName

The name of a snapshot from which to restore data into the new replication group. The snapshot status changes to restoring while the new replication group is being created.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period.

Valid values for ddd are:

  • sun

  • mon

  • tue

  • wed

  • thu

  • fri

  • sat

Example: sun:23:00-mon:01:30

Port

The port number on which each member of the replication group accepts connections.

NotificationTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic to which notifications are sent.

The Amazon SNS topic owner must be the same as the cluster owner.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

If you are running Valkey 7.2 and above or Redis OSS engine version 6.0 and above, set this parameter to yes to opt-in to the next auto minor version upgrade campaign. This parameter is disabled for previous versions.

SnapshotRetentionLimit

The number of days for which ElastiCache retains automatic snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set SnapshotRetentionLimit to 5, a snapshot that was taken today is retained for 5 days before being deleted.

Default: 0 (i.e., automatic backups are disabled for this cluster).

SnapshotWindow

The daily time range (in UTC) during which ElastiCache begins taking a daily snapshot of your node group (shard).

Example: 05:00-09:00

If you do not specify this parameter, ElastiCache automatically chooses an appropriate time range.

AuthToken

Reserved parameter. The password used to access a password protected server.

AuthToken can be specified only on replication groups where TransitEncryptionEnabled is true.

For HIPAA compliance, you must specify TransitEncryptionEnabled as true, an AuthToken, and a CacheSubnetGroup.

Password constraints:

  • Must be only printable ASCII characters.

  • Must be at least 16 characters and no more than 128 characters in length.

  • The only permitted printable special characters are !, &, #, $, ^, \<, \>, and -. Other printable special characters cannot be used in the AUTH token.

For more information, see AUTH password at http://redis.io/commands/AUTH.

TransitEncryptionEnabled

A flag that enables in-transit encryption when set to true.

This parameter is valid only if the Engine parameter is redis, the EngineVersion parameter is ⁠3.2.6⁠, ⁠4.x⁠ or later, and the cluster is being created in an Amazon VPC.

If you enable in-transit encryption, you must also specify a value for CacheSubnetGroup.

Required: Only available when creating a replication group in an Amazon VPC using Redis OSS version ⁠3.2.6⁠, ⁠4.x⁠ or later.

Default: false

For HIPAA compliance, you must specify TransitEncryptionEnabled as true, an AuthToken, and a CacheSubnetGroup.

AtRestEncryptionEnabled

A flag that enables encryption at rest when set to true.

You cannot modify the value of AtRestEncryptionEnabled after the replication group is created. To enable encryption at rest on a replication group you must set AtRestEncryptionEnabled to true when you create the replication group.

Required: Only available when creating a replication group in an Amazon VPC using Redis OSS version ⁠3.2.6⁠, ⁠4.x⁠ or later.

Default: false

KmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the disk in the cluster.

UserGroupIds

The user group to associate with the replication group.

LogDeliveryConfigurations

Specifies the destination, format and type of the logs.

DataTieringEnabled

Enables data tiering. Data tiering is only supported for replication groups using the r6gd node type. This parameter must be set to true when using r6gd nodes. For more information, see Data tiering.

NetworkType

Must be either ipv4 | ipv6 | dual_stack. IPv6 is supported for workloads using Valkey 7.2 and above, Redis OSS engine version 6.2 and above or Memcached engine version 1.6.6 and above on all instances built on the Nitro system.

IpDiscovery

The network type you choose when creating a replication group, either ipv4 | ipv6. IPv6 is supported for workloads using Valkey 7.2 and above, Redis OSS engine version 6.2 and above or Memcached engine version 1.6.6 and above on all instances built on the Nitro system.

TransitEncryptionMode

A setting that allows you to migrate your clients to use in-transit encryption, with no downtime.

When setting TransitEncryptionEnabled to true, you can set your TransitEncryptionMode to preferred in the same request, to allow both encrypted and unencrypted connections at the same time. Once you migrate all your Valkey or Redis OSS clients to use encrypted connections you can modify the value to required to allow encrypted connections only.

Setting TransitEncryptionMode to required is a two-step process that requires you to first set the TransitEncryptionMode to preferred, after that you can set TransitEncryptionMode to required.

This process will not trigger the replacement of the replication group.

ClusterMode

Enabled or Disabled. To modify cluster mode from Disabled to Enabled, you must first set the cluster mode to Compatible. Compatible mode allows your Valkey or Redis OSS clients to connect using both cluster mode enabled and cluster mode disabled. After you migrate all Valkey or Redis OSS clients to use cluster mode enabled, you can then complete cluster mode configuration and set the cluster mode to Enabled.

ServerlessCacheSnapshotName

The name of the snapshot used to create a replication group. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS only.


Creates a serverless cache

Description

Creates a serverless cache.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_serverless_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_serverless_cache(
  ServerlessCacheName,
  Description = NULL,
  Engine,
  MajorEngineVersion = NULL,
  CacheUsageLimits = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  SnapshotArnsToRestore = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  UserGroupId = NULL,
  SubnetIds = NULL,
  SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
  DailySnapshotTime = NULL
)

Arguments

ServerlessCacheName

[required] User-provided identifier for the serverless cache. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Description

User-provided description for the serverless cache. The default is NULL, i.e. if no description is provided then an empty string will be returned. The maximum length is 255 characters.

Engine

[required] The name of the cache engine to be used for creating the serverless cache.

MajorEngineVersion

The version of the cache engine that will be used to create the serverless cache.

CacheUsageLimits

Sets the cache usage limits for storage and ElastiCache Processing Units for the cache.

KmsKeyId

ARN of the customer managed key for encrypting the data at rest. If no KMS key is provided, a default service key is used.

SecurityGroupIds

A list of the one or more VPC security groups to be associated with the serverless cache. The security group will authorize traffic access for the VPC end-point (private-link). If no other information is given this will be the VPC’s Default Security Group that is associated with the cluster VPC end-point.

SnapshotArnsToRestore

The ARN(s) of the snapshot that the new serverless cache will be created from. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

Tags

The list of tags (key, value) pairs to be added to the serverless cache resource. Default is NULL.

UserGroupId

The identifier of the UserGroup to be associated with the serverless cache. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. Default is NULL.

SubnetIds

A list of the identifiers of the subnets where the VPC endpoint for the serverless cache will be deployed. All the subnetIds must belong to the same VPC.

SnapshotRetentionLimit

The number of snapshots that will be retained for the serverless cache that is being created. As new snapshots beyond this limit are added, the oldest snapshots will be deleted on a rolling basis. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

DailySnapshotTime

The daily time that snapshots will be created from the new serverless cache. By default this number is populated with 0, i.e. no snapshots will be created on an automatic daily basis. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.


This API creates a copy of an entire ServerlessCache at a specific moment in time

Description

This API creates a copy of an entire ServerlessCache at a specific moment in time. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_serverless_cache_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_serverless_cache_snapshot(
  ServerlessCacheSnapshotName,
  ServerlessCacheName,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ServerlessCacheSnapshotName

[required] The name for the snapshot being created. Must be unique for the customer account. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Must be between 1 and 255 characters.

ServerlessCacheName

[required] The name of an existing serverless cache. The snapshot is created from this cache. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

KmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the snapshot. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Default: NULL

Tags

A list of tags to be added to the snapshot resource. A tag is a key-value pair. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.


Creates a copy of an entire cluster or replication group at a specific moment in time

Description

Creates a copy of an entire cluster or replication group at a specific moment in time.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_snapshot(
  ReplicationGroupId = NULL,
  CacheClusterId = NULL,
  SnapshotName,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

The identifier of an existing replication group. The snapshot is created from this replication group.

CacheClusterId

The identifier of an existing cluster. The snapshot is created from this cluster.

SnapshotName

[required] A name for the snapshot being created.

KmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the snapshot.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


For Valkey engine version 7

Description

For Valkey engine version 7.2 onwards and Redis OSS 6.0 and onwards: Creates a user. For more information, see Using Role Based Access Control (RBAC).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_user(
  UserId,
  UserName,
  Engine,
  Passwords = NULL,
  AccessString,
  NoPasswordRequired = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  AuthenticationMode = NULL
)

Arguments

UserId

[required] The ID of the user.

UserName

[required] The username of the user.

Engine

[required] The current supported value is Redis.

Passwords

Passwords used for this user. You can create up to two passwords for each user.

AccessString

[required] Access permissions string used for this user.

NoPasswordRequired

Indicates a password is not required for this user.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.

AuthenticationMode

Specifies how to authenticate the user.


For Valkey engine version 7

Description

For Valkey engine version 7.2 onwards and Redis OSS 6.0 onwards: Creates a user group. For more information, see Using Role Based Access Control (RBAC)

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_create_user_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_create_user_group(UserGroupId, Engine, UserIds = NULL, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

UserGroupId

[required] The ID of the user group.

Engine

[required] The current supported value is Redis user.

UserIds

The list of user IDs that belong to the user group.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only.


Decreases the number of node groups in a Global datastore

Description

Decreases the number of node groups in a Global datastore

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_decrease_node_groups_in_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_decrease_node_groups_in_global_replication_group(
  GlobalReplicationGroupId,
  NodeGroupCount,
  GlobalNodeGroupsToRemove = NULL,
  GlobalNodeGroupsToRetain = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the Global datastore

NodeGroupCount

[required] The number of node groups (shards) that results from the modification of the shard configuration

GlobalNodeGroupsToRemove

If the value of NodeGroupCount is less than the current number of node groups (shards), then either NodeGroupsToRemove or NodeGroupsToRetain is required. GlobalNodeGroupsToRemove is a list of NodeGroupIds to remove from the cluster. ElastiCache will attempt to remove all node groups listed by GlobalNodeGroupsToRemove from the cluster.

GlobalNodeGroupsToRetain

If the value of NodeGroupCount is less than the current number of node groups (shards), then either NodeGroupsToRemove or NodeGroupsToRetain is required. GlobalNodeGroupsToRetain is a list of NodeGroupIds to retain from the cluster. ElastiCache will attempt to retain all node groups listed by GlobalNodeGroupsToRetain from the cluster.

ApplyImmediately

[required] Indicates that the shard reconfiguration process begins immediately. At present, the only permitted value for this parameter is true.


Dynamically decreases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group

Description

Dynamically decreases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group. This operation is performed with no cluster down time.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_decrease_replica_count/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_decrease_replica_count(
  ReplicationGroupId,
  NewReplicaCount = NULL,
  ReplicaConfiguration = NULL,
  ReplicasToRemove = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The id of the replication group from which you want to remove replica nodes.

NewReplicaCount

The number of read replica nodes you want at the completion of this operation. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication groups, this is the number of replica nodes in the replication group. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication groups, this is the number of replica nodes in each of the replication group's node groups.

The minimum number of replicas in a shard or replication group is:

  • Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled)

    • If Multi-AZ is enabled: 1

    • If Multi-AZ is not enabled: 0

  • Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled): 0 (though you will not be able to failover to a replica if your primary node fails)

ReplicaConfiguration

A list of ConfigureShard objects that can be used to configure each shard in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group. The ConfigureShard has three members: NewReplicaCount, NodeGroupId, and PreferredAvailabilityZones.

ReplicasToRemove

A list of the node ids to remove from the replication group or node group (shard).

ApplyImmediately

[required] If True, the number of replica nodes is decreased immediately. ApplyImmediately=False is not currently supported.


Deletes a previously provisioned cluster

Description

Deletes a previously provisioned cluster. delete_cache_cluster deletes all associated cache nodes, node endpoints and the cluster itself. When you receive a successful response from this operation, Amazon ElastiCache immediately begins deleting the cluster; you cannot cancel or revert this operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_cache_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_cache_cluster(
  CacheClusterId,
  FinalSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheClusterId

[required] The cluster identifier for the cluster to be deleted. This parameter is not case sensitive.

FinalSnapshotIdentifier

The user-supplied name of a final cluster snapshot. This is the unique name that identifies the snapshot. ElastiCache creates the snapshot, and then deletes the cluster immediately afterward.


Deletes the specified cache parameter group

Description

Deletes the specified cache parameter group. You cannot delete a cache parameter group if it is associated with any cache clusters. You cannot delete the default cache parameter groups in your account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_cache_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_cache_parameter_group(CacheParameterGroupName)

Arguments

CacheParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cache parameter group to delete.

The specified cache security group must not be associated with any clusters.


Deletes a cache security group

Description

Deletes a cache security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_cache_security_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_cache_security_group(CacheSecurityGroupName)

Arguments

CacheSecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the cache security group to delete.

You cannot delete the default security group.


Deletes a cache subnet group

Description

Deletes a cache subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_cache_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_cache_subnet_group(CacheSubnetGroupName)

Arguments

CacheSubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the cache subnet group to delete.

Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.


Deleting a Global datastore is a two-step process:

Description

Deleting a Global datastore is a two-step process:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_global_replication_group(
  GlobalReplicationGroupId,
  RetainPrimaryReplicationGroup
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the Global datastore

RetainPrimaryReplicationGroup

[required] The primary replication group is retained as a standalone replication group.


Deletes an existing replication group

Description

Deletes an existing replication group. By default, this operation deletes the entire replication group, including the primary/primaries and all of the read replicas. If the replication group has only one primary, you can optionally delete only the read replicas, while retaining the primary by setting RetainPrimaryCluster=true.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_replication_group(
  ReplicationGroupId,
  RetainPrimaryCluster = NULL,
  FinalSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The identifier for the cluster to be deleted. This parameter is not case sensitive.

RetainPrimaryCluster

If set to true, all of the read replicas are deleted, but the primary node is retained.

FinalSnapshotIdentifier

The name of a final node group (shard) snapshot. ElastiCache creates the snapshot from the primary node in the cluster, rather than one of the replicas; this is to ensure that it captures the freshest data. After the final snapshot is taken, the replication group is immediately deleted.


Deletes a specified existing serverless cache

Description

Deletes a specified existing serverless cache.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_serverless_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_serverless_cache(
  ServerlessCacheName,
  FinalSnapshotName = NULL
)

Arguments

ServerlessCacheName

[required] The identifier of the serverless cache to be deleted.

FinalSnapshotName

Name of the final snapshot to be taken before the serverless cache is deleted. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Default: NULL, i.e. a final snapshot is not taken.


Deletes an existing serverless cache snapshot

Description

Deletes an existing serverless cache snapshot. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_serverless_cache_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_serverless_cache_snapshot(ServerlessCacheSnapshotName)

Arguments

ServerlessCacheSnapshotName

[required] Idenfitier of the snapshot to be deleted. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.


Deletes an existing snapshot

Description

Deletes an existing snapshot. When you receive a successful response from this operation, ElastiCache immediately begins deleting the snapshot; you cannot cancel or revert this operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_snapshot(SnapshotName)

Arguments

SnapshotName

[required] The name of the snapshot to be deleted.


For Valkey engine version 7

Description

For Valkey engine version 7.2 onwards and Redis OSS 6.0 onwards: Deletes a user. The user will be removed from all user groups and in turn removed from all replication groups. For more information, see Using Role Based Access Control (RBAC).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_user(UserId)

Arguments

UserId

[required] The ID of the user.


For Valkey engine version 7

Description

For Valkey engine version 7.2 onwards and Redis OSS 6.0 onwards: Deletes a user group. The user group must first be disassociated from the replication group before it can be deleted. For more information, see Using Role Based Access Control (RBAC).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_delete_user_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_delete_user_group(UserGroupId)

Arguments

UserGroupId

[required] The ID of the user group.


Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cache cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied

Description

Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cache cluster if a cluster identifier is supplied.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_cache_clusters(
  CacheClusterId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  ShowCacheNodeInfo = NULL,
  ShowCacheClustersNotInReplicationGroups = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheClusterId

The user-supplied cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, only information about that specific cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case sensitive.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

ShowCacheNodeInfo

An optional flag that can be included in the DescribeCacheCluster request to retrieve information about the individual cache nodes.

ShowCacheClustersNotInReplicationGroups

An optional flag that can be included in the DescribeCacheCluster request to show only nodes (API/CLI: clusters) that are not members of a replication group. In practice, this means Memcached and single node Valkey or Redis OSS clusters.


Returns a list of the available cache engines and their versions

Description

Returns a list of the available cache engines and their versions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_engine_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_cache_engine_versions(
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  CacheParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  DefaultOnly = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

The cache engine to return. Valid values: memcached | redis

EngineVersion

The cache engine version to return.

Example: ⁠1.4.14⁠

CacheParameterGroupFamily

The name of a specific cache parameter group family to return details for.

Valid values are: memcached1.4 | memcached1.5 | memcached1.6 | redis2.6 | redis2.8 | redis3.2 | redis4.0 | redis5.0 | redis6.x | redis6.2 | redis7 | valkey7

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

DefaultOnly

If true, specifies that only the default version of the specified engine or engine and major version combination is to be returned.


Returns a list of cache parameter group descriptions

Description

Returns a list of cache parameter group descriptions. If a cache parameter group name is specified, the list contains only the descriptions for that group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_cache_parameter_groups(
  CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheParameterGroupName

The name of a specific cache parameter group to return details for.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cache parameter group

Description

Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular cache parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_cache_parameters(
  CacheParameterGroupName,
  Source = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheParameterGroupName

[required] The name of a specific cache parameter group to return details for.

Source

The parameter types to return.

Valid values: user | system | engine-default

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of cache security group descriptions

Description

Returns a list of cache security group descriptions. If a cache security group name is specified, the list contains only the description of that group. This applicable only when you have ElastiCache in Classic setup

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_security_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_cache_security_groups(
  CacheSecurityGroupName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheSecurityGroupName

The name of the cache security group to return details for.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of cache subnet group descriptions

Description

Returns a list of cache subnet group descriptions. If a subnet group name is specified, the list contains only the description of that group. This is applicable only when you have ElastiCache in VPC setup. All ElastiCache clusters now launch in VPC by default.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_cache_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_cache_subnet_groups(
  CacheSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheSubnetGroupName

The name of the cache subnet group to return details for.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified cache engine

Description

Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified cache engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_engine_default_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_engine_default_parameters(
  CacheParameterGroupFamily,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheParameterGroupFamily

[required] The name of the cache parameter group family.

Valid values are: memcached1.4 | memcached1.5 | memcached1.6 | redis2.6 | redis2.8 | redis3.2 | redis4.0 | redis5.0 | redis6.x | redis6.2 | redis7

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns events related to clusters, cache security groups, and cache parameter groups

Description

Returns events related to clusters, cache security groups, and cache parameter groups. You can obtain events specific to a particular cluster, cache security group, or cache parameter group by providing the name as a parameter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_events/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_events(
  SourceIdentifier = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceIdentifier

The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, all sources are included in the response.

SourceType

The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.

StartTime

The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format.

Example: 2017-03-30T07:03:49.555Z

EndTime

The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format.

Example: 2017-03-30T07:03:49.555Z

Duration

The number of minutes worth of events to retrieve.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about a particular global replication group

Description

Returns information about a particular global replication group. If no identifier is specified, returns information about all Global datastores.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_global_replication_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_global_replication_groups(
  GlobalReplicationGroupId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  ShowMemberInfo = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupId

The name of the Global datastore

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

ShowMemberInfo

Returns the list of members that comprise the Global datastore.


Returns information about a particular replication group

Description

Returns information about a particular replication group. If no identifier is specified, describe_replication_groups returns information about all replication groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_replication_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_replication_groups(
  ReplicationGroupId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

The identifier for the replication group to be described. This parameter is not case sensitive.

If you do not specify this parameter, information about all replication groups is returned.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about reserved cache nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved cache node

Description

Returns information about reserved cache nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved cache node.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_reserved_cache_nodes/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_reserved_cache_nodes(
  ReservedCacheNodeId = NULL,
  ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId = NULL,
  CacheNodeType = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  ProductDescription = NULL,
  OfferingType = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedCacheNodeId

The reserved cache node identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reservation ID.

ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId

The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only purchased reservations matching the specified offering identifier.

CacheNodeType

The cache node type filter value. Use this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified cache node type.

The following node types are supported by ElastiCache. Generally speaking, the current generation types provide more memory and computational power at lower cost when compared to their equivalent previous generation counterparts.

  • General purpose:

    • Current generation:

      M7g node types: cache.m7g.large, cache.m7g.xlarge, cache.m7g.2xlarge, cache.m7g.4xlarge, cache.m7g.8xlarge, cache.m7g.12xlarge, cache.m7g.16xlarge

      For region availability, see Supported Node Types

      M6g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and for Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.m6g.large, cache.m6g.xlarge, cache.m6g.2xlarge, cache.m6g.4xlarge, cache.m6g.8xlarge, cache.m6g.12xlarge, cache.m6g.16xlarge

      M5 node types: cache.m5.large, cache.m5.xlarge, cache.m5.2xlarge, cache.m5.4xlarge, cache.m5.12xlarge, cache.m5.24xlarge

      M4 node types: cache.m4.large, cache.m4.xlarge, cache.m4.2xlarge, cache.m4.4xlarge, cache.m4.10xlarge

      T4g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.t4g.micro, cache.t4g.small, cache.t4g.medium

      T3 node types: cache.t3.micro, cache.t3.small, cache.t3.medium

      T2 node types: cache.t2.micro, cache.t2.small, cache.t2.medium

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      T1 node types: cache.t1.micro

      M1 node types: cache.m1.small, cache.m1.medium, cache.m1.large, cache.m1.xlarge

      M3 node types: cache.m3.medium, cache.m3.large, cache.m3.xlarge, cache.m3.2xlarge

  • Compute optimized:

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      C1 node types: cache.c1.xlarge

  • Memory optimized:

    • Current generation:

      R7g node types: cache.r7g.large, cache.r7g.xlarge, cache.r7g.2xlarge, cache.r7g.4xlarge, cache.r7g.8xlarge, cache.r7g.12xlarge, cache.r7g.16xlarge

      For region availability, see Supported Node Types

      R6g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and for Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.r6g.large, cache.r6g.xlarge, cache.r6g.2xlarge, cache.r6g.4xlarge, cache.r6g.8xlarge, cache.r6g.12xlarge, cache.r6g.16xlarge

      R5 node types: cache.r5.large, cache.r5.xlarge, cache.r5.2xlarge, cache.r5.4xlarge, cache.r5.12xlarge, cache.r5.24xlarge

      R4 node types: cache.r4.large, cache.r4.xlarge, cache.r4.2xlarge, cache.r4.4xlarge, cache.r4.8xlarge, cache.r4.16xlarge

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      M2 node types: cache.m2.xlarge, cache.m2.2xlarge, cache.m2.4xlarge

      R3 node types: cache.r3.large, cache.r3.xlarge, cache.r3.2xlarge, cache.r3.4xlarge, cache.r3.8xlarge

Additional node type info

  • All current generation instance types are created in Amazon VPC by default.

  • Valkey or Redis OSS append-only files (AOF) are not supported for T1 or T2 instances.

  • Valkey or Redis OSS Multi-AZ with automatic failover is not supported on T1 instances.

  • The configuration variables appendonly and appendfsync are not supported on Valkey, or on Redis OSS version 2.8.22 and later.

Duration

The duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Use this parameter to show only reservations for this duration.

Valid Values: 1 | 3 | 31536000 | 94608000

ProductDescription

The product description filter value. Use this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified product description.

OfferingType

The offering type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type.

Valid values: "Light Utilization"|"Medium Utilization"|"Heavy Utilization"|"All Upfront"|"Partial Upfront"| "No Upfront"

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Lists available reserved cache node offerings

Description

Lists available reserved cache node offerings.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_reserved_cache_nodes_offerings/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_reserved_cache_nodes_offerings(
  ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId = NULL,
  CacheNodeType = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  ProductDescription = NULL,
  OfferingType = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId

The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier.

Example: ⁠438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706⁠

CacheNodeType

The cache node type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified cache node type.

The following node types are supported by ElastiCache. Generally speaking, the current generation types provide more memory and computational power at lower cost when compared to their equivalent previous generation counterparts.

  • General purpose:

    • Current generation:

      M7g node types: cache.m7g.large, cache.m7g.xlarge, cache.m7g.2xlarge, cache.m7g.4xlarge, cache.m7g.8xlarge, cache.m7g.12xlarge, cache.m7g.16xlarge

      For region availability, see Supported Node Types

      M6g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and for Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.m6g.large, cache.m6g.xlarge, cache.m6g.2xlarge, cache.m6g.4xlarge, cache.m6g.8xlarge, cache.m6g.12xlarge, cache.m6g.16xlarge

      M5 node types: cache.m5.large, cache.m5.xlarge, cache.m5.2xlarge, cache.m5.4xlarge, cache.m5.12xlarge, cache.m5.24xlarge

      M4 node types: cache.m4.large, cache.m4.xlarge, cache.m4.2xlarge, cache.m4.4xlarge, cache.m4.10xlarge

      T4g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.t4g.micro, cache.t4g.small, cache.t4g.medium

      T3 node types: cache.t3.micro, cache.t3.small, cache.t3.medium

      T2 node types: cache.t2.micro, cache.t2.small, cache.t2.medium

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      T1 node types: cache.t1.micro

      M1 node types: cache.m1.small, cache.m1.medium, cache.m1.large, cache.m1.xlarge

      M3 node types: cache.m3.medium, cache.m3.large, cache.m3.xlarge, cache.m3.2xlarge

  • Compute optimized:

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      C1 node types: cache.c1.xlarge

  • Memory optimized:

    • Current generation:

      R7g node types: cache.r7g.large, cache.r7g.xlarge, cache.r7g.2xlarge, cache.r7g.4xlarge, cache.r7g.8xlarge, cache.r7g.12xlarge, cache.r7g.16xlarge

      For region availability, see Supported Node Types

      R6g node types (available only for Redis OSS engine version 5.0.6 onward and for Memcached engine version 1.5.16 onward): cache.r6g.large, cache.r6g.xlarge, cache.r6g.2xlarge, cache.r6g.4xlarge, cache.r6g.8xlarge, cache.r6g.12xlarge, cache.r6g.16xlarge

      R5 node types: cache.r5.large, cache.r5.xlarge, cache.r5.2xlarge, cache.r5.4xlarge, cache.r5.12xlarge, cache.r5.24xlarge

      R4 node types: cache.r4.large, cache.r4.xlarge, cache.r4.2xlarge, cache.r4.4xlarge, cache.r4.8xlarge, cache.r4.16xlarge

    • Previous generation: (not recommended. Existing clusters are still supported but creation of new clusters is not supported for these types.)

      M2 node types: cache.m2.xlarge, cache.m2.2xlarge, cache.m2.4xlarge

      R3 node types: cache.r3.large, cache.r3.xlarge, cache.r3.2xlarge, cache.r3.4xlarge, cache.r3.8xlarge

Additional node type info

  • All current generation instance types are created in Amazon VPC by default.

  • Valkey or Redis OSS append-only files (AOF) are not supported for T1 or T2 instances.

  • Valkey or Redis OSS Multi-AZ with automatic failover is not supported on T1 instances.

  • The configuration variables appendonly and appendfsync are not supported on Valkey, or on Redis OSS version 2.8.22 and later.

Duration

Duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Use this parameter to show only reservations for a given duration.

Valid Values: 1 | 3 | 31536000 | 94608000

ProductDescription

The product description filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified product description.

OfferingType

The offering type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type.

Valid Values: "Light Utilization"|"Medium Utilization"|"Heavy Utilization" |"All Upfront"|"Partial Upfront"| "No Upfront"

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 100.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about serverless cache snapshots

Description

Returns information about serverless cache snapshots. By default, this API lists all of the customer’s serverless cache snapshots. It can also describe a single serverless cache snapshot, or the snapshots associated with a particular serverless cache. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_serverless_cache_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_serverless_cache_snapshots(
  ServerlessCacheName = NULL,
  ServerlessCacheSnapshotName = NULL,
  SnapshotType = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

ServerlessCacheName

The identifier of serverless cache. If this parameter is specified, only snapshots associated with that specific serverless cache are described. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

ServerlessCacheSnapshotName

The identifier of the serverless cache’s snapshot. If this parameter is specified, only this snapshot is described. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

SnapshotType

The type of snapshot that is being described. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

NextToken

An optional marker returned from a prior request to support pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by max-results. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified max-results value, a market is included in the response so that remaining results can be retrieved. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only.The default is 50. The Validation Constraints are a maximum of 50.


Returns information about a specific serverless cache

Description

Returns information about a specific serverless cache. If no identifier is specified, then the API returns information on all the serverless caches belonging to this Amazon Web Services account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_serverless_caches/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_serverless_caches(
  ServerlessCacheName = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ServerlessCacheName

The identifier for the serverless cache. If this parameter is specified, only information about that specific serverless cache is returned. Default: NULL

MaxResults

The maximum number of records in the response. If more records exist than the specified max-records value, the next token is included in the response so that remaining results can be retrieved. The default is 50.

NextToken

An optional marker returned from a prior request to support pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxResults.


Returns details of the service updates

Description

Returns details of the service updates

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_service_updates/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_service_updates(
  ServiceUpdateName = NULL,
  ServiceUpdateStatus = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ServiceUpdateName

The unique ID of the service update

ServiceUpdateStatus

The status of the service update

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about cluster or replication group snapshots

Description

Returns information about cluster or replication group snapshots. By default, describe_snapshots lists all of your snapshots; it can optionally describe a single snapshot, or just the snapshots associated with a particular cache cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_snapshots(
  ReplicationGroupId = NULL,
  CacheClusterId = NULL,
  SnapshotName = NULL,
  SnapshotSource = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  ShowNodeGroupConfig = NULL
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

A user-supplied replication group identifier. If this parameter is specified, only snapshots associated with that specific replication group are described.

CacheClusterId

A user-supplied cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, only snapshots associated with that specific cluster are described.

SnapshotName

A user-supplied name of the snapshot. If this parameter is specified, only this snapshot are described.

SnapshotSource

If set to system, the output shows snapshots that were automatically created by ElastiCache. If set to user the output shows snapshots that were manually created. If omitted, the output shows both automatically and manually created snapshots.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 50

Constraints: minimum 20; maximum 50.

ShowNodeGroupConfig

A Boolean value which if true, the node group (shard) configuration is included in the snapshot description.


Returns details of the update actions

Description

Returns details of the update actions

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_update_actions/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_update_actions(
  ServiceUpdateName = NULL,
  ReplicationGroupIds = NULL,
  CacheClusterIds = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  ServiceUpdateStatus = NULL,
  ServiceUpdateTimeRange = NULL,
  UpdateActionStatus = NULL,
  ShowNodeLevelUpdateStatus = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ServiceUpdateName

The unique ID of the service update

ReplicationGroupIds

The replication group IDs

CacheClusterIds

The cache cluster IDs

Engine

The Elasticache engine to which the update applies. Either Valkey, Redis OSS or Memcached.

ServiceUpdateStatus

The status of the service update

ServiceUpdateTimeRange

The range of time specified to search for service updates that are in available status

UpdateActionStatus

The status of the update action.

ShowNodeLevelUpdateStatus

Dictates whether to include node level update status in the response

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of user groups

Description

Returns a list of user groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_user_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_user_groups(
  UserGroupId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

UserGroupId

The ID of the user group.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords. \>


Returns a list of users

Description

Returns a list of users.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_describe_users/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_describe_users(
  Engine = NULL,
  UserId = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

The engine.

UserId

The ID of the user.

Filters

Filter to determine the list of User IDs to return.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Marker

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords. \>


Remove a secondary cluster from the Global datastore using the Global datastore name

Description

Remove a secondary cluster from the Global datastore using the Global datastore name. The secondary cluster will no longer receive updates from the primary cluster, but will remain as a standalone cluster in that Amazon region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_disassociate_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_disassociate_global_replication_group(
  GlobalReplicationGroupId,
  ReplicationGroupId,
  ReplicationGroupRegion
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the Global datastore

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the secondary cluster you wish to remove from the Global datastore

ReplicationGroupRegion

[required] The Amazon region of secondary cluster you wish to remove from the Global datastore


Provides the functionality to export the serverless cache snapshot data to Amazon S3

Description

Provides the functionality to export the serverless cache snapshot data to Amazon S3. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_export_serverless_cache_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_export_serverless_cache_snapshot(
  ServerlessCacheSnapshotName,
  S3BucketName
)

Arguments

ServerlessCacheSnapshotName

[required] The identifier of the serverless cache snapshot to be exported to S3. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only.

S3BucketName

[required] Name of the Amazon S3 bucket to export the snapshot to. The Amazon S3 bucket must also be in same region as the snapshot. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only.


Used to failover the primary region to a secondary region

Description

Used to failover the primary region to a secondary region. The secondary region will become primary, and all other clusters will become secondary.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_failover_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_failover_global_replication_group(
  GlobalReplicationGroupId,
  PrimaryRegion,
  PrimaryReplicationGroupId
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the Global datastore

PrimaryRegion

[required] The Amazon region of the primary cluster of the Global datastore

PrimaryReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the primary replication group


Increase the number of node groups in the Global datastore

Description

Increase the number of node groups in the Global datastore

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_increase_node_groups_in_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_increase_node_groups_in_global_replication_group(
  GlobalReplicationGroupId,
  NodeGroupCount,
  RegionalConfigurations = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the Global datastore

NodeGroupCount

[required] Total number of node groups you want

RegionalConfigurations

Describes the replication group IDs, the Amazon regions where they are stored and the shard configuration for each that comprise the Global datastore

ApplyImmediately

[required] Indicates that the process begins immediately. At present, the only permitted value for this parameter is true.


Dynamically increases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group

Description

Dynamically increases the number of replicas in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication group or the number of replica nodes in one or more node groups (shards) of a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group. This operation is performed with no cluster down time.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_increase_replica_count/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_increase_replica_count(
  ReplicationGroupId,
  NewReplicaCount = NULL,
  ReplicaConfiguration = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The id of the replication group to which you want to add replica nodes.

NewReplicaCount

The number of read replica nodes you want at the completion of this operation. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled) replication groups, this is the number of replica nodes in the replication group. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication groups, this is the number of replica nodes in each of the replication group's node groups.

ReplicaConfiguration

A list of ConfigureShard objects that can be used to configure each shard in a Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication group. The ConfigureShard has three members: NewReplicaCount, NodeGroupId, and PreferredAvailabilityZones.

ApplyImmediately

[required] If True, the number of replica nodes is increased immediately. ApplyImmediately=False is not currently supported.


Lists all available node types that you can scale with your cluster's replication group's current node type

Description

Lists all available node types that you can scale with your cluster's replication group's current node type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_list_allowed_node_type_modifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_list_allowed_node_type_modifications(
  CacheClusterId = NULL,
  ReplicationGroupId = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheClusterId

The name of the cluster you want to scale up to a larger node instanced type. ElastiCache uses the cluster id to identify the current node type of this cluster and from that to create a list of node types you can scale up to.

You must provide a value for either the CacheClusterId or the ReplicationGroupId.

ReplicationGroupId

The name of the replication group want to scale up to a larger node type. ElastiCache uses the replication group id to identify the current node type being used by this replication group, and from that to create a list of node types you can scale up to.

You must provide a value for either the CacheClusterId or the ReplicationGroupId.


Lists all tags currently on a named resource

Description

Lists all tags currently on a named resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceName)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want the list of tags, for example arn:aws:elasticache:us-west-2:0123456789:cluster:myCluster or arn:aws:elasticache:us-west-2:0123456789:snapshot:mySnapshot.

For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces.


Modifies the settings for a cluster

Description

Modifies the settings for a cluster. You can use this operation to change one or more cluster configuration parameters by specifying the parameters and the new values.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_cache_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_cache_cluster(
  CacheClusterId,
  NumCacheNodes = NULL,
  CacheNodeIdsToRemove = NULL,
  AZMode = NULL,
  NewAvailabilityZones = NULL,
  CacheSecurityGroupNames = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
  CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
  NotificationTopicStatus = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
  SnapshotWindow = NULL,
  CacheNodeType = NULL,
  AuthToken = NULL,
  AuthTokenUpdateStrategy = NULL,
  LogDeliveryConfigurations = NULL,
  IpDiscovery = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheClusterId

[required] The cluster identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

NumCacheNodes

The number of cache nodes that the cluster should have. If the value for NumCacheNodes is greater than the sum of the number of current cache nodes and the number of cache nodes pending creation (which may be zero), more nodes are added. If the value is less than the number of existing cache nodes, nodes are removed. If the value is equal to the number of current cache nodes, any pending add or remove requests are canceled.

If you are removing cache nodes, you must use the CacheNodeIdsToRemove parameter to provide the IDs of the specific cache nodes to remove.

For clusters running Valkey or Redis OSS, this value must be 1. For clusters running Memcached, this value must be between 1 and 40.

Adding or removing Memcached cache nodes can be applied immediately or as a pending operation (see ApplyImmediately).

A pending operation to modify the number of cache nodes in a cluster during its maintenance window, whether by adding or removing nodes in accordance with the scale out architecture, is not queued. The customer's latest request to add or remove nodes to the cluster overrides any previous pending operations to modify the number of cache nodes in the cluster. For example, a request to remove 2 nodes would override a previous pending operation to remove 3 nodes. Similarly, a request to add 2 nodes would override a previous pending operation to remove 3 nodes and vice versa. As Memcached cache nodes may now be provisioned in different Availability Zones with flexible cache node placement, a request to add nodes does not automatically override a previous pending operation to add nodes. The customer can modify the previous pending operation to add more nodes or explicitly cancel the pending request and retry the new request. To cancel pending operations to modify the number of cache nodes in a cluster, use the modify_cache_cluster request and set NumCacheNodes equal to the number of cache nodes currently in the cluster.

CacheNodeIdsToRemove

A list of cache node IDs to be removed. A node ID is a numeric identifier (0001, 0002, etc.). This parameter is only valid when NumCacheNodes is less than the existing number of cache nodes. The number of cache node IDs supplied in this parameter must match the difference between the existing number of cache nodes in the cluster or pending cache nodes, whichever is greater, and the value of NumCacheNodes in the request.

For example: If you have 3 active cache nodes, 7 pending cache nodes, and the number of cache nodes in this modify_cache_cluster call is 5, you must list 2 (7 - 5) cache node IDs to remove.

AZMode

Specifies whether the new nodes in this Memcached cluster are all created in a single Availability Zone or created across multiple Availability Zones.

Valid values: single-az | cross-az.

This option is only supported for Memcached clusters.

You cannot specify single-az if the Memcached cluster already has cache nodes in different Availability Zones. If cross-az is specified, existing Memcached nodes remain in their current Availability Zone.

Only newly created nodes are located in different Availability Zones.

NewAvailabilityZones

This option is only supported on Memcached clusters.

The list of Availability Zones where the new Memcached cache nodes are created.

This parameter is only valid when NumCacheNodes in the request is greater than the sum of the number of active cache nodes and the number of cache nodes pending creation (which may be zero). The number of Availability Zones supplied in this list must match the cache nodes being added in this request.

Scenarios:

  • Scenario 1: You have 3 active nodes and wish to add 2 nodes. Specify NumCacheNodes=5 (3 + 2) and optionally specify two Availability Zones for the two new nodes.

  • Scenario 2: You have 3 active nodes and 2 nodes pending creation (from the scenario 1 call) and want to add 1 more node. Specify NumCacheNodes=6 ((3 + 2) + 1) and optionally specify an Availability Zone for the new node.

  • Scenario 3: You want to cancel all pending operations. Specify NumCacheNodes=3 to cancel all pending operations.

The Availability Zone placement of nodes pending creation cannot be modified. If you wish to cancel any nodes pending creation, add 0 nodes by setting NumCacheNodes to the number of current nodes.

If cross-az is specified, existing Memcached nodes remain in their current Availability Zone. Only newly created nodes can be located in different Availability Zones. For guidance on how to move existing Memcached nodes to different Availability Zones, see the Availability Zone Considerations section of Cache Node Considerations for Memcached.

Impact of new add/remove requests upon pending requests

  • Scenario-1

    • Pending Action: Delete

    • New Request: Delete

    • Result: The new delete, pending or immediate, replaces the pending delete.

  • Scenario-2

    • Pending Action: Delete

    • New Request: Create

    • Result: The new create, pending or immediate, replaces the pending delete.

  • Scenario-3

    • Pending Action: Create

    • New Request: Delete

    • Result: The new delete, pending or immediate, replaces the pending create.

  • Scenario-4

    • Pending Action: Create

    • New Request: Create

    • Result: The new create is added to the pending create.

      Important: If the new create request is Apply Immediately - Yes, all creates are performed immediately. If the new create request is Apply Immediately - No, all creates are pending.

CacheSecurityGroupNames

A list of cache security group names to authorize on this cluster. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

You can use this parameter only with clusters that are created outside of an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC).

Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters. Must not be "Default".

SecurityGroupIds

Specifies the VPC Security Groups associated with the cluster.

This parameter can be used only with clusters that are created in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC).

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period.

Valid values for ddd are:

  • sun

  • mon

  • tue

  • wed

  • thu

  • fri

  • sat

Example: sun:23:00-mon:01:30

NotificationTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic to which notifications are sent.

The Amazon SNS topic owner must be same as the cluster owner.

CacheParameterGroupName

The name of the cache parameter group to apply to this cluster. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible for parameters when the ApplyImmediately parameter is specified as true for this request.

NotificationTopicStatus

The status of the Amazon SNS notification topic. Notifications are sent only if the status is active.

Valid values: active | inactive

ApplyImmediately

If true, this parameter causes the modifications in this request and any pending modifications to be applied, asynchronously and as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the cluster.

If false, changes to the cluster are applied on the next maintenance reboot, or the next failure reboot, whichever occurs first.

If you perform a modify_cache_cluster before a pending modification is applied, the pending modification is replaced by the newer modification.

Valid values: true | false

Default: false

Engine

Modifies the engine listed in a cluster message. The options are redis, memcached or valkey.

EngineVersion

The upgraded version of the cache engine to be run on the cache nodes.

Important: You can upgrade to a newer engine version (see Selecting a Cache Engine and Version), but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing cluster and create it anew with the earlier engine version.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

If you are running Valkey 7.2 or Redis OSS engine version 6.0 or later, set this parameter to yes to opt-in to the next auto minor version upgrade campaign. This parameter is disabled for previous versions.

SnapshotRetentionLimit

The number of days for which ElastiCache retains automatic cluster snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set SnapshotRetentionLimit to 5, a snapshot that was taken today is retained for 5 days before being deleted.

If the value of SnapshotRetentionLimit is set to zero (0), backups are turned off.

SnapshotWindow

The daily time range (in UTC) during which ElastiCache begins taking a daily snapshot of your cluster.

CacheNodeType

A valid cache node type that you want to scale this cluster up to.

AuthToken

Reserved parameter. The password used to access a password protected server. This parameter must be specified with the auth-token-update parameter. Password constraints:

  • Must be only printable ASCII characters

  • Must be at least 16 characters and no more than 128 characters in length

  • Cannot contain any of the following characters: '/', '"', or '@', '%'

For more information, see AUTH password at AUTH.

AuthTokenUpdateStrategy

Specifies the strategy to use to update the AUTH token. This parameter must be specified with the auth-token parameter. Possible values:

  • ROTATE - default, if no update strategy is provided

  • SET - allowed only after ROTATE

  • DELETE - allowed only when transitioning to RBAC

For more information, see Authenticating Users with AUTH

LogDeliveryConfigurations

Specifies the destination, format and type of the logs.

IpDiscovery

The network type you choose when modifying a cluster, either ipv4 | ipv6. IPv6 is supported for workloads using Valkey 7.2 and above, Redis OSS engine version 6.2 and above or Memcached engine version 1.6.6 and above on all instances built on the Nitro system.


Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group

Description

Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group. You can modify up to 20 parameters in a single request by submitting a list parameter name and value pairs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_cache_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_cache_parameter_group(
  CacheParameterGroupName,
  ParameterNameValues
)

Arguments

CacheParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cache parameter group to modify.

ParameterNameValues

[required] An array of parameter names and values for the parameter update. You must supply at least one parameter name and value; subsequent arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters may be modified per request.


Modifies an existing cache subnet group

Description

Modifies an existing cache subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_cache_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_cache_subnet_group(
  CacheSubnetGroupName,
  CacheSubnetGroupDescription = NULL,
  SubnetIds = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheSubnetGroupName

[required] The name for the cache subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

Example: mysubnetgroup

CacheSubnetGroupDescription

A description of the cache subnet group.

SubnetIds

The EC2 subnet IDs for the cache subnet group.


Modifies the settings for a Global datastore

Description

Modifies the settings for a Global datastore.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_global_replication_group(
  GlobalReplicationGroupId,
  ApplyImmediately,
  CacheNodeType = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
  GlobalReplicationGroupDescription = NULL,
  AutomaticFailoverEnabled = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the Global datastore

ApplyImmediately

[required] This parameter causes the modifications in this request and any pending modifications to be applied, asynchronously and as soon as possible. Modifications to Global Replication Groups cannot be requested to be applied in PreferredMaintenceWindow.

CacheNodeType

A valid cache node type that you want to scale this Global datastore to.

Engine

Modifies the engine listed in a global replication group message. The options are redis, memcached or valkey.

EngineVersion

The upgraded version of the cache engine to be run on the clusters in the Global datastore.

CacheParameterGroupName

The name of the cache parameter group to use with the Global datastore. It must be compatible with the major engine version used by the Global datastore.

GlobalReplicationGroupDescription

A description of the Global datastore

AutomaticFailoverEnabled

Determines whether a read replica is automatically promoted to read/write primary if the existing primary encounters a failure.


Modifies the settings for a replication group

Description

Modifies the settings for a replication group. This is limited to Valkey and Redis OSS 7 and above.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_replication_group(
  ReplicationGroupId,
  ReplicationGroupDescription = NULL,
  PrimaryClusterId = NULL,
  SnapshottingClusterId = NULL,
  AutomaticFailoverEnabled = NULL,
  MultiAZEnabled = NULL,
  NodeGroupId = NULL,
  CacheSecurityGroupNames = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  NotificationTopicArn = NULL,
  CacheParameterGroupName = NULL,
  NotificationTopicStatus = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
  SnapshotWindow = NULL,
  CacheNodeType = NULL,
  AuthToken = NULL,
  AuthTokenUpdateStrategy = NULL,
  UserGroupIdsToAdd = NULL,
  UserGroupIdsToRemove = NULL,
  RemoveUserGroups = NULL,
  LogDeliveryConfigurations = NULL,
  IpDiscovery = NULL,
  TransitEncryptionEnabled = NULL,
  TransitEncryptionMode = NULL,
  ClusterMode = NULL
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The identifier of the replication group to modify.

ReplicationGroupDescription

A description for the replication group. Maximum length is 255 characters.

PrimaryClusterId

For replication groups with a single primary, if this parameter is specified, ElastiCache promotes the specified cluster in the specified replication group to the primary role. The nodes of all other clusters in the replication group are read replicas.

SnapshottingClusterId

The cluster ID that is used as the daily snapshot source for the replication group. This parameter cannot be set for Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) replication groups.

AutomaticFailoverEnabled

Determines whether a read replica is automatically promoted to read/write primary if the existing primary encounters a failure.

Valid values: true | false

MultiAZEnabled

A flag to indicate MultiAZ is enabled.

NodeGroupId

Deprecated. This parameter is not used.

CacheSecurityGroupNames

A list of cache security group names to authorize for the clusters in this replication group. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

This parameter can be used only with replication group containing clusters running outside of an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC).

Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters. Must not be Default.

SecurityGroupIds

Specifies the VPC Security Groups associated with the clusters in the replication group.

This parameter can be used only with replication group containing clusters running in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC).

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period.

Valid values for ddd are:

  • sun

  • mon

  • tue

  • wed

  • thu

  • fri

  • sat

Example: sun:23:00-mon:01:30

NotificationTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic to which notifications are sent.

The Amazon SNS topic owner must be same as the replication group owner.

CacheParameterGroupName

The name of the cache parameter group to apply to all of the clusters in this replication group. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible for parameters when the ApplyImmediately parameter is specified as true for this request.

NotificationTopicStatus

The status of the Amazon SNS notification topic for the replication group. Notifications are sent only if the status is active.

Valid values: active | inactive

ApplyImmediately

If true, this parameter causes the modifications in this request and any pending modifications to be applied, asynchronously and as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the replication group.

If false, changes to the nodes in the replication group are applied on the next maintenance reboot, or the next failure reboot, whichever occurs first.

Valid values: true | false

Default: false

Engine

Modifies the engine listed in a replication group message. The options are redis, memcached or valkey.

EngineVersion

The upgraded version of the cache engine to be run on the clusters in the replication group.

Important: You can upgrade to a newer engine version (see Selecting a Cache Engine and Version), but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing replication group and create it anew with the earlier engine version.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

If you are running Valkey or Redis OSS engine version 6.0 or later, set this parameter to yes if you want to opt-in to the next auto minor version upgrade campaign. This parameter is disabled for previous versions.

SnapshotRetentionLimit

The number of days for which ElastiCache retains automatic node group (shard) snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set SnapshotRetentionLimit to 5, a snapshot that was taken today is retained for 5 days before being deleted.

Important If the value of SnapshotRetentionLimit is set to zero (0), backups are turned off.

SnapshotWindow

The daily time range (in UTC) during which ElastiCache begins taking a daily snapshot of the node group (shard) specified by SnapshottingClusterId.

Example: 05:00-09:00

If you do not specify this parameter, ElastiCache automatically chooses an appropriate time range.

CacheNodeType

A valid cache node type that you want to scale this replication group to.

AuthToken

Reserved parameter. The password used to access a password protected server. This parameter must be specified with the auth-token-update-strategy parameter. Password constraints:

  • Must be only printable ASCII characters

  • Must be at least 16 characters and no more than 128 characters in length

  • Cannot contain any of the following characters: '/', '"', or '@', '%'

For more information, see AUTH password at AUTH.

AuthTokenUpdateStrategy

Specifies the strategy to use to update the AUTH token. This parameter must be specified with the auth-token parameter. Possible values:

  • ROTATE - default, if no update strategy is provided

  • SET - allowed only after ROTATE

  • DELETE - allowed only when transitioning to RBAC

For more information, see Authenticating Users with AUTH

UserGroupIdsToAdd

The ID of the user group you are associating with the replication group.

UserGroupIdsToRemove

The ID of the user group to disassociate from the replication group, meaning the users in the group no longer can access the replication group.

RemoveUserGroups

Removes the user group associated with this replication group.

LogDeliveryConfigurations

Specifies the destination, format and type of the logs.

IpDiscovery

The network type you choose when modifying a cluster, either ipv4 | ipv6. IPv6 is supported for workloads using Valkey 7.2 and above, Redis OSS engine version 6.2 and above or Memcached engine version 1.6.6 and above on all instances built on the Nitro system.

TransitEncryptionEnabled

A flag that enables in-transit encryption when set to true. If you are enabling in-transit encryption for an existing cluster, you must also set TransitEncryptionMode to preferred.

TransitEncryptionMode

A setting that allows you to migrate your clients to use in-transit encryption, with no downtime.

You must set TransitEncryptionEnabled to true, for your existing cluster, and set TransitEncryptionMode to preferred in the same request to allow both encrypted and unencrypted connections at the same time. Once you migrate all your Valkey or Redis OSS clients to use encrypted connections you can set the value to required to allow encrypted connections only.

Setting TransitEncryptionMode to required is a two-step process that requires you to first set the TransitEncryptionMode to preferred, after that you can set TransitEncryptionMode to required.

ClusterMode

Enabled or Disabled. To modify cluster mode from Disabled to Enabled, you must first set the cluster mode to Compatible. Compatible mode allows your Valkey or Redis OSS clients to connect using both cluster mode enabled and cluster mode disabled. After you migrate all Valkey or Redis OSS clients to use cluster mode enabled, you can then complete cluster mode configuration and set the cluster mode to Enabled.


Modifies a replication group's shards (node groups) by allowing you to add shards, remove shards, or rebalance the keyspaces among existing shards

Description

Modifies a replication group's shards (node groups) by allowing you to add shards, remove shards, or rebalance the keyspaces among existing shards.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_replication_group_shard_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_replication_group_shard_configuration(
  ReplicationGroupId,
  NodeGroupCount,
  ApplyImmediately,
  ReshardingConfiguration = NULL,
  NodeGroupsToRemove = NULL,
  NodeGroupsToRetain = NULL
)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode enabled) cluster (replication group) on which the shards are to be configured.

NodeGroupCount

[required] The number of node groups (shards) that results from the modification of the shard configuration.

ApplyImmediately

[required] Indicates that the shard reconfiguration process begins immediately. At present, the only permitted value for this parameter is true.

Value: true

ReshardingConfiguration

Specifies the preferred availability zones for each node group in the cluster. If the value of NodeGroupCount is greater than the current number of node groups (shards), you can use this parameter to specify the preferred availability zones of the cluster's shards. If you omit this parameter ElastiCache selects availability zones for you.

You can specify this parameter only if the value of NodeGroupCount is greater than the current number of node groups (shards).

NodeGroupsToRemove

If the value of NodeGroupCount is less than the current number of node groups (shards), then either NodeGroupsToRemove or NodeGroupsToRetain is required. NodeGroupsToRemove is a list of NodeGroupIds to remove from the cluster.

ElastiCache will attempt to remove all node groups listed by NodeGroupsToRemove from the cluster.

NodeGroupsToRetain

If the value of NodeGroupCount is less than the current number of node groups (shards), then either NodeGroupsToRemove or NodeGroupsToRetain is required. NodeGroupsToRetain is a list of NodeGroupIds to retain in the cluster.

ElastiCache will attempt to remove all node groups except those listed by NodeGroupsToRetain from the cluster.


This API modifies the attributes of a serverless cache

Description

This API modifies the attributes of a serverless cache.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_serverless_cache/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_serverless_cache(
  ServerlessCacheName,
  Description = NULL,
  CacheUsageLimits = NULL,
  RemoveUserGroup = NULL,
  UserGroupId = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
  DailySnapshotTime = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  MajorEngineVersion = NULL
)

Arguments

ServerlessCacheName

[required] User-provided identifier for the serverless cache to be modified.

Description

User provided description for the serverless cache. Default = NULL, i.e. the existing description is not removed/modified. The description has a maximum length of 255 characters.

CacheUsageLimits

Modify the cache usage limit for the serverless cache.

RemoveUserGroup

The identifier of the UserGroup to be removed from association with the Valkey and Redis OSS serverless cache. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. Default is NULL.

UserGroupId

The identifier of the UserGroup to be associated with the serverless cache. Available for Valkey and Redis OSS only. Default is NULL - the existing UserGroup is not removed.

SecurityGroupIds

The new list of VPC security groups to be associated with the serverless cache. Populating this list means the current VPC security groups will be removed. This security group is used to authorize traffic access for the VPC end-point (private-link). Default = NULL - the existing list of VPC security groups is not removed.

SnapshotRetentionLimit

The number of days for which Elasticache retains automatic snapshots before deleting them. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. Default = NULL, i.e. the existing snapshot-retention-limit will not be removed or modified. The maximum value allowed is 35 days.

DailySnapshotTime

The daily time during which Elasticache begins taking a daily snapshot of the serverless cache. Available for Valkey, Redis OSS and Serverless Memcached only. The default is NULL, i.e. the existing snapshot time configured for the cluster is not removed.

Engine

Modifies the engine listed in a serverless cache request. The options are redis, memcached or valkey.

MajorEngineVersion

Modifies the engine vesion listed in a serverless cache request.


Changes user password(s) and/or access string

Description

Changes user password(s) and/or access string.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_user(
  UserId,
  AccessString = NULL,
  AppendAccessString = NULL,
  Passwords = NULL,
  NoPasswordRequired = NULL,
  AuthenticationMode = NULL,
  Engine = NULL
)

Arguments

UserId

[required] The ID of the user.

AccessString

Access permissions string used for this user.

AppendAccessString

Adds additional user permissions to the access string.

Passwords

The passwords belonging to the user. You are allowed up to two.

NoPasswordRequired

Indicates no password is required for the user.

AuthenticationMode

Specifies how to authenticate the user.

Engine

The engine for a specific user.


Changes the list of users that belong to the user group

Description

Changes the list of users that belong to the user group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_modify_user_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_modify_user_group(
  UserGroupId,
  UserIdsToAdd = NULL,
  UserIdsToRemove = NULL,
  Engine = NULL
)

Arguments

UserGroupId

[required] The ID of the user group.

UserIdsToAdd

The list of user IDs to add to the user group.

UserIdsToRemove

The list of user IDs to remove from the user group.

Engine

The engine for a user group.


Allows you to purchase a reserved cache node offering

Description

Allows you to purchase a reserved cache node offering. Reserved nodes are not eligible for cancellation and are non-refundable. For more information, see Managing Costs with Reserved Nodes.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_purchase_reserved_cache_nodes_offering/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_purchase_reserved_cache_nodes_offering(
  ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId,
  ReservedCacheNodeId = NULL,
  CacheNodeCount = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedCacheNodesOfferingId

[required] The ID of the reserved cache node offering to purchase.

Example: ⁠438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706⁠

ReservedCacheNodeId

A customer-specified identifier to track this reservation.

The Reserved Cache Node ID is an unique customer-specified identifier to track this reservation. If this parameter is not specified, ElastiCache automatically generates an identifier for the reservation.

Example: myreservationID

CacheNodeCount

The number of cache node instances to reserve.

Default: 1

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Redistribute slots to ensure uniform distribution across existing shards in the cluster

Description

Redistribute slots to ensure uniform distribution across existing shards in the cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_rebalance_slots_in_global_replication_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_rebalance_slots_in_global_replication_group(
  GlobalReplicationGroupId,
  ApplyImmediately
)

Arguments

GlobalReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the Global datastore

ApplyImmediately

[required] If True, redistribution is applied immediately.


Reboots some, or all, of the cache nodes within a provisioned cluster

Description

Reboots some, or all, of the cache nodes within a provisioned cluster. This operation applies any modified cache parameter groups to the cluster. The reboot operation takes place as soon as possible, and results in a momentary outage to the cluster. During the reboot, the cluster status is set to REBOOTING.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_reboot_cache_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_reboot_cache_cluster(CacheClusterId, CacheNodeIdsToReboot)

Arguments

CacheClusterId

[required] The cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

CacheNodeIdsToReboot

[required] A list of cache node IDs to reboot. A node ID is a numeric identifier (0001, 0002, etc.). To reboot an entire cluster, specify all of the cache node IDs.


Removes the tags identified by the TagKeys list from the named resource

Description

Removes the tags identified by the TagKeys list from the named resource. A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive. You can use tags to categorize and track all your ElastiCache resources, with the exception of global replication group. When you add or remove tags on replication groups, those actions will be replicated to all nodes in the replication group. For more information, see Resource-level permissions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource from which you want the tags removed, for example arn:aws:elasticache:us-west-2:0123456789:cluster:myCluster or arn:aws:elasticache:us-west-2:0123456789:snapshot:mySnapshot.

For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Service Namespaces.

TagKeys

[required] A list of TagKeys identifying the tags you want removed from the named resource.


Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group to the engine or system default value

Description

Modifies the parameters of a cache parameter group to the engine or system default value. You can reset specific parameters by submitting a list of parameter names. To reset the entire cache parameter group, specify the ResetAllParameters and CacheParameterGroupName parameters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_reset_cache_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_reset_cache_parameter_group(
  CacheParameterGroupName,
  ResetAllParameters = NULL,
  ParameterNameValues = NULL
)

Arguments

CacheParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cache parameter group to reset.

ResetAllParameters

If true, all parameters in the cache parameter group are reset to their default values. If false, only the parameters listed by ParameterNameValues are reset to their default values.

Valid values: true | false

ParameterNameValues

An array of parameter names to reset to their default values. If ResetAllParameters is true, do not use ParameterNameValues. If ResetAllParameters is false, you must specify the name of at least one parameter to reset.


Revokes ingress from a cache security group

Description

Revokes ingress from a cache security group. Use this operation to disallow access from an Amazon EC2 security group that had been previously authorized.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_revoke_cache_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_revoke_cache_security_group_ingress(
  CacheSecurityGroupName,
  EC2SecurityGroupName,
  EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId
)

Arguments

CacheSecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the cache security group to revoke ingress from.

EC2SecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the Amazon EC2 security group to revoke access from.

EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId

[required] The Amazon account number of the Amazon EC2 security group owner. Note that this is not the same thing as an Amazon access key ID - you must provide a valid Amazon account number for this parameter.


Start the migration of data

Description

Start the migration of data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_start_migration/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_start_migration(ReplicationGroupId, CustomerNodeEndpointList)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The ID of the replication group to which data should be migrated.

CustomerNodeEndpointList

[required] List of endpoints from which data should be migrated. For Valkey or Redis OSS (cluster mode disabled), the list should have only one element.


Represents the input of a TestFailover operation which tests automatic failover on a specified node group (called shard in the console) in a replication group (called cluster in the console)

Description

Represents the input of a test_failover operation which tests automatic failover on a specified node group (called shard in the console) in a replication group (called cluster in the console).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_test_failover/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_test_failover(ReplicationGroupId, NodeGroupId)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The name of the replication group (console: cluster) whose automatic failover is being tested by this operation.

NodeGroupId

[required] The name of the node group (called shard in the console) in this replication group on which automatic failover is to be tested. You may test automatic failover on up to 15 node groups in any rolling 24-hour period.


Async API to test connection between source and target replication group

Description

Async API to test connection between source and target replication group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/elasticache_test_migration/ for full documentation.

Usage

elasticache_test_migration(ReplicationGroupId, CustomerNodeEndpointList)

Arguments

ReplicationGroupId

[required] The ID of the replication group to which data is to be migrated.

CustomerNodeEndpointList

[required] List of endpoints from which data should be migrated. List should have only one element.


Amazon Keyspaces

Description

Amazon Keyspaces (for Apache Cassandra) is a scalable, highly available, and managed Apache Cassandra-compatible database service. Amazon Keyspaces makes it easy to migrate, run, and scale Cassandra workloads in the Amazon Web Services Cloud. With just a few clicks on the Amazon Web Services Management Console or a few lines of code, you can create keyspaces and tables in Amazon Keyspaces, without deploying any infrastructure or installing software.

In addition to supporting Cassandra Query Language (CQL) requests via open-source Cassandra drivers, Amazon Keyspaces supports data definition language (DDL) operations to manage keyspaces and tables using the Amazon Web Services SDK and CLI, as well as infrastructure as code (IaC) services and tools such as CloudFormation and Terraform. This API reference describes the supported DDL operations in detail.

For the list of all supported CQL APIs, see Supported Cassandra APIs, operations, and data types in Amazon Keyspaces in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

To learn how Amazon Keyspaces API actions are recorded with CloudTrail, see Amazon Keyspaces information in CloudTrail in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

For more information about Amazon Web Services APIs, for example how to implement retry logic or how to sign Amazon Web Services API requests, see Amazon Web Services APIs in the General Reference.

Usage

keyspaces(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- keyspaces(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

create_keyspace The CreateKeyspace operation adds a new keyspace to your account
create_table The CreateTable operation adds a new table to the specified keyspace
create_type The CreateType operation creates a new user-defined type in the specified keyspace
delete_keyspace The DeleteKeyspace operation deletes a keyspace and all of its tables
delete_table The DeleteTable operation deletes a table and all of its data
delete_type The DeleteType operation deletes a user-defined type (UDT)
get_keyspace Returns the name of the specified keyspace, the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the replication strategy, the Amazon Web Services Regions of a multi-Region keyspace, and the status of newly added Regions after an UpdateKeyspace operation
get_table Returns information about the table, including the table's name and current status, the keyspace name, configuration settings, and metadata
get_table_auto_scaling_settings Returns auto scaling related settings of the specified table in JSON format
get_type The GetType operation returns information about the type, for example the field definitions, the timestamp when the type was last modified, the level of nesting, the status, and details about if the type is used in other types and tables
list_keyspaces The ListKeyspaces operation returns a list of keyspaces
list_tables The ListTables operation returns a list of tables for a specified keyspace
list_tags_for_resource Returns a list of all tags associated with the specified Amazon Keyspaces resource
list_types The ListTypes operation returns a list of types for a specified keyspace
restore_table Restores the table to the specified point in time within the earliest_restorable_timestamp and the current time
tag_resource Associates a set of tags with a Amazon Keyspaces resource
untag_resource Removes the association of tags from a Amazon Keyspaces resource
update_keyspace Adds a new Amazon Web Services Region to the keyspace
update_table Adds new columns to the table or updates one of the table's settings, for example capacity mode, auto scaling, encryption, point-in-time recovery, or ttl settings

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- keyspaces()
svc$create_keyspace(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


The CreateKeyspace operation adds a new keyspace to your account

Description

The create_keyspace operation adds a new keyspace to your account. In an Amazon Web Services account, keyspace names must be unique within each Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_create_keyspace/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_create_keyspace(
  keyspaceName,
  tags = NULL,
  replicationSpecification = NULL
)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace to be created.

tags

A list of key-value pair tags to be attached to the keyspace.

For more information, see Adding tags and labels to Amazon Keyspaces resources in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

replicationSpecification

The replication specification of the keyspace includes:

  • replicationStrategy - the required value is SINGLE_REGION or MULTI_REGION.

  • regionList - if the replicationStrategy is MULTI_REGION, the regionList requires the current Region and at least one additional Amazon Web Services Region where the keyspace is going to be replicated in. The maximum number of supported replication Regions including the current Region is six.


The CreateTable operation adds a new table to the specified keyspace

Description

The create_table operation adds a new table to the specified keyspace. Within a keyspace, table names must be unique.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_create_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_create_table(
  keyspaceName,
  tableName,
  schemaDefinition,
  comment = NULL,
  capacitySpecification = NULL,
  encryptionSpecification = NULL,
  pointInTimeRecovery = NULL,
  ttl = NULL,
  defaultTimeToLive = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  clientSideTimestamps = NULL,
  autoScalingSpecification = NULL,
  replicaSpecifications = NULL
)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace that the table is going to be created in.

tableName

[required] The name of the table.

schemaDefinition

[required] The schemaDefinition consists of the following parameters.

For each column to be created:

  • name - The name of the column.

  • type - An Amazon Keyspaces data type. For more information, see Data types in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

The primary key of the table consists of the following columns:

  • partitionKeys - The partition key can be a single column, or it can be a compound value composed of two or more columns. The partition key portion of the primary key is required and determines how Amazon Keyspaces stores your data.

  • name - The name of each partition key column.

  • clusteringKeys - The optional clustering column portion of your primary key determines how the data is clustered and sorted within each partition.

  • name - The name of the clustering column.

  • orderBy - Sets the ascendant (ASC) or descendant (DESC) order modifier.

    To define a column as static use staticColumns - Static columns store values that are shared by all rows in the same partition:

  • name - The name of the column.

  • type - An Amazon Keyspaces data type.

comment

This parameter allows to enter a description of the table.

capacitySpecification

Specifies the read/write throughput capacity mode for the table. The options are:

  • throughputMode:PAY_PER_REQUEST and

  • throughputMode:PROVISIONED - Provisioned capacity mode requires readCapacityUnits and writeCapacityUnits as input.

The default is throughput_mode:PAY_PER_REQUEST.

For more information, see Read/write capacity modes in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

encryptionSpecification

Specifies how the encryption key for encryption at rest is managed for the table. You can choose one of the following KMS key (KMS key):

  • type:AWS_OWNED_KMS_KEY - This key is owned by Amazon Keyspaces.

  • type:CUSTOMER_MANAGED_KMS_KEY - This key is stored in your account and is created, owned, and managed by you. This option requires the kms_key_identifier of the KMS key in Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format as input.

The default is type:AWS_OWNED_KMS_KEY.

For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

pointInTimeRecovery

Specifies if pointInTimeRecovery is enabled or disabled for the table. The options are:

  • status=ENABLED

  • status=DISABLED

If it's not specified, the default is status=DISABLED.

For more information, see Point-in-time recovery in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

ttl

Enables Time to Live custom settings for the table. The options are:

  • status:enabled

  • status:disabled

The default is status:disabled. After ttl is enabled, you can't disable it for the table.

For more information, see Expiring data by using Amazon Keyspaces Time to Live (TTL) in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

defaultTimeToLive

The default Time to Live setting in seconds for the table.

For more information, see Setting the default TTL value for a table in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

tags

A list of key-value pair tags to be attached to the resource.

For more information, see Adding tags and labels to Amazon Keyspaces resources in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

clientSideTimestamps

Enables client-side timestamps for the table. By default, the setting is disabled. You can enable client-side timestamps with the following option:

  • status: "enabled"

Once client-side timestamps are enabled for a table, this setting cannot be disabled.

autoScalingSpecification

The optional auto scaling settings for a table in provisioned capacity mode. Specifies if the service can manage throughput capacity automatically on your behalf.

Auto scaling helps you provision throughput capacity for variable workloads efficiently by increasing and decreasing your table's read and write capacity automatically in response to application traffic. For more information, see Managing throughput capacity automatically with Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

By default, auto scaling is disabled for a table.

replicaSpecifications

The optional Amazon Web Services Region specific settings of a multi-Region table. These settings overwrite the general settings of the table for the specified Region.

For a multi-Region table in provisioned capacity mode, you can configure the table's read capacity differently for each Region's replica. The write capacity, however, remains synchronized between all replicas to ensure that there's enough capacity to replicate writes across all Regions. To define the read capacity for a table replica in a specific Region, you can do so by configuring the following parameters.

  • region: The Region where these settings are applied. (Required)

  • readCapacityUnits: The provisioned read capacity units. (Optional)

  • readCapacityAutoScaling: The read capacity auto scaling settings for the table. (Optional)


The CreateType operation creates a new user-defined type in the specified keyspace

Description

The create_type operation creates a new user-defined type in the specified keyspace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_create_type/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_create_type(keyspaceName, typeName, fieldDefinitions)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace.

typeName

[required] The name of the user-defined type.

UDT names must contain 48 characters or less, must begin with an alphabetic character, and can only contain alpha-numeric characters and underscores. Amazon Keyspaces converts upper case characters automatically into lower case characters.

Alternatively, you can declare a UDT name in double quotes. When declaring a UDT name inside double quotes, Amazon Keyspaces preserves upper casing and allows special characters.

You can also use double quotes as part of the name when you create the UDT, but you must escape each double quote character with an additional double quote character.

fieldDefinitions

[required] The field definitions, consisting of names and types, that define this type.


The DeleteKeyspace operation deletes a keyspace and all of its tables

Description

The delete_keyspace operation deletes a keyspace and all of its tables.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_delete_keyspace/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_delete_keyspace(keyspaceName)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace to be deleted.


The DeleteTable operation deletes a table and all of its data

Description

The delete_table operation deletes a table and all of its data. After a delete_table request is received, the specified table is in the DELETING state until Amazon Keyspaces completes the deletion. If the table is in the ACTIVE state, you can delete it. If a table is either in the CREATING or UPDATING states, then Amazon Keyspaces returns a ResourceInUseException. If the specified table does not exist, Amazon Keyspaces returns a ResourceNotFoundException. If the table is already in the DELETING state, no error is returned.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_delete_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_delete_table(keyspaceName, tableName)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace of the to be deleted table.

tableName

[required] The name of the table to be deleted.


The DeleteType operation deletes a user-defined type (UDT)

Description

The delete_type operation deletes a user-defined type (UDT). You can only delete a type that is not used in a table or another UDT.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_delete_type/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_delete_type(keyspaceName, typeName)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace of the to be deleted type.

typeName

[required] The name of the type to be deleted.


Returns the name of the specified keyspace, the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the replication strategy, the Amazon Web Services Regions of a multi-Region keyspace, and the status of newly added Regions after an UpdateKeyspace operation

Description

Returns the name of the specified keyspace, the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), the replication strategy, the Amazon Web Services Regions of a multi-Region keyspace, and the status of newly added Regions after an update_keyspace operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_get_keyspace/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_get_keyspace(keyspaceName)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace.


Returns information about the table, including the table's name and current status, the keyspace name, configuration settings, and metadata

Description

Returns information about the table, including the table's name and current status, the keyspace name, configuration settings, and metadata.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_get_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_get_table(keyspaceName, tableName)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace that the table is stored in.

tableName

[required] The name of the table.


Returns auto scaling related settings of the specified table in JSON format

Description

Returns auto scaling related settings of the specified table in JSON format. If the table is a multi-Region table, the Amazon Web Services Region specific auto scaling settings of the table are included.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_get_table_auto_scaling_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_get_table_auto_scaling_settings(keyspaceName, tableName)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace.

tableName

[required] The name of the table.


The GetType operation returns information about the type, for example the field definitions, the timestamp when the type was last modified, the level of nesting, the status, and details about if the type is used in other types and tables

Description

The get_type operation returns information about the type, for example the field definitions, the timestamp when the type was last modified, the level of nesting, the status, and details about if the type is used in other types and tables.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_get_type/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_get_type(keyspaceName, typeName)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace that contains this type.

typeName

[required] The formatted name of the type. For example, if the name of the type was created without double quotes, Amazon Keyspaces saved the name in lower-case characters. If the name was created in double quotes, you must use double quotes to specify the type name.


The ListKeyspaces operation returns a list of keyspaces

Description

The list_keyspaces operation returns a list of keyspaces.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_list_keyspaces/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_list_keyspaces(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL)

Arguments

nextToken

The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation.

maxResults

The total number of keyspaces to return in the output. If the total number of keyspaces available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as an argument of a subsequent API invocation.


The ListTables operation returns a list of tables for a specified keyspace

Description

The list_tables operation returns a list of tables for a specified keyspace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_list_tables/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_list_tables(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL, keyspaceName)

Arguments

nextToken

The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as an argument of a subsequent API invocation.

maxResults

The total number of tables to return in the output. If the total number of tables available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as an argument of a subsequent API invocation.

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace.


Returns a list of all tags associated with the specified Amazon Keyspaces resource

Description

Returns a list of all tags associated with the specified Amazon Keyspaces resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_list_tags_for_resource(
  resourceArn,
  nextToken = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Keyspaces resource.

nextToken

The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation.

maxResults

The total number of tags to return in the output. If the total number of tags available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as an argument of a subsequent API invocation.


The ListTypes operation returns a list of types for a specified keyspace

Description

The list_types operation returns a list of types for a specified keyspace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_list_types/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_list_types(nextToken = NULL, maxResults = NULL, keyspaceName)

Arguments

nextToken

The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as an argument of a subsequent API invocation.

maxResults

The total number of types to return in the output. If the total number of types available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as an argument of a subsequent API invocation.

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace that contains the listed types.


Restores the table to the specified point in time within the earliest_restorable_timestamp and the current time

Description

Restores the table to the specified point in time within the earliest_restorable_timestamp and the current time. For more information about restore points, see Time window for PITR continuous backups in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_restore_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_restore_table(
  sourceKeyspaceName,
  sourceTableName,
  targetKeyspaceName,
  targetTableName,
  restoreTimestamp = NULL,
  capacitySpecificationOverride = NULL,
  encryptionSpecificationOverride = NULL,
  pointInTimeRecoveryOverride = NULL,
  tagsOverride = NULL,
  autoScalingSpecification = NULL,
  replicaSpecifications = NULL
)

Arguments

sourceKeyspaceName

[required] The keyspace name of the source table.

sourceTableName

[required] The name of the source table.

targetKeyspaceName

[required] The name of the target keyspace.

targetTableName

[required] The name of the target table.

restoreTimestamp

The restore timestamp in ISO 8601 format.

capacitySpecificationOverride

Specifies the read/write throughput capacity mode for the target table. The options are:

  • throughputMode:PAY_PER_REQUEST

  • throughputMode:PROVISIONED - Provisioned capacity mode requires readCapacityUnits and writeCapacityUnits as input.

The default is throughput_mode:PAY_PER_REQUEST.

For more information, see Read/write capacity modes in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

encryptionSpecificationOverride

Specifies the encryption settings for the target table. You can choose one of the following KMS key (KMS key):

  • type:AWS_OWNED_KMS_KEY - This key is owned by Amazon Keyspaces.

  • type:CUSTOMER_MANAGED_KMS_KEY - This key is stored in your account and is created, owned, and managed by you. This option requires the kms_key_identifier of the KMS key in Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format as input.

The default is type:AWS_OWNED_KMS_KEY.

For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

pointInTimeRecoveryOverride

Specifies the pointInTimeRecovery settings for the target table. The options are:

  • status=ENABLED

  • status=DISABLED

If it's not specified, the default is status=DISABLED.

For more information, see Point-in-time recovery in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

tagsOverride

A list of key-value pair tags to be attached to the restored table.

For more information, see Adding tags and labels to Amazon Keyspaces resources in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

autoScalingSpecification

The optional auto scaling settings for the restored table in provisioned capacity mode. Specifies if the service can manage throughput capacity of a provisioned table automatically on your behalf. Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling helps you provision throughput capacity for variable workloads efficiently by increasing and decreasing your table's read and write capacity automatically in response to application traffic.

For more information, see Managing throughput capacity automatically with Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

replicaSpecifications

The optional Region specific settings of a multi-Regional table.


Associates a set of tags with a Amazon Keyspaces resource

Description

Associates a set of tags with a Amazon Keyspaces resource. You can then activate these user-defined tags so that they appear on the Cost Management Console for cost allocation tracking. For more information, see Adding tags and labels to Amazon Keyspaces resources in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Keyspaces resource to which to add tags.

tags

[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon Keyspaces resource.


Removes the association of tags from a Amazon Keyspaces resource

Description

Removes the association of tags from a Amazon Keyspaces resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_untag_resource(resourceArn, tags)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Keyspaces resource that the tags will be removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

tags

[required] A list of existing tags to be removed from the Amazon Keyspaces resource.


Adds a new Amazon Web Services Region to the keyspace

Description

Adds a new Amazon Web Services Region to the keyspace. You can add a new Region to a keyspace that is either a single or a multi-Region keyspace. Amazon Keyspaces is going to replicate all tables in the keyspace to the new Region. To successfully replicate all tables to the new Region, they must use client-side timestamps for conflict resolution. To enable client-side timestamps, specify clientSideTimestamps.status = enabled when invoking the API. For more information about client-side timestamps, see Client-side timestamps in Amazon Keyspaces in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_update_keyspace/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_update_keyspace(
  keyspaceName,
  replicationSpecification,
  clientSideTimestamps = NULL
)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace.

replicationSpecification

[required]

clientSideTimestamps

Adds new columns to the table or updates one of the table's settings, for example capacity mode, auto scaling, encryption, point-in-time recovery, or ttl settings

Description

Adds new columns to the table or updates one of the table's settings, for example capacity mode, auto scaling, encryption, point-in-time recovery, or ttl settings. Note that you can only update one specific table setting per update operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/keyspaces_update_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

keyspaces_update_table(
  keyspaceName,
  tableName,
  addColumns = NULL,
  capacitySpecification = NULL,
  encryptionSpecification = NULL,
  pointInTimeRecovery = NULL,
  ttl = NULL,
  defaultTimeToLive = NULL,
  clientSideTimestamps = NULL,
  autoScalingSpecification = NULL,
  replicaSpecifications = NULL
)

Arguments

keyspaceName

[required] The name of the keyspace the specified table is stored in.

tableName

[required] The name of the table.

addColumns

For each column to be added to the specified table:

  • name - The name of the column.

  • type - An Amazon Keyspaces data type. For more information, see Data types in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

capacitySpecification

Modifies the read/write throughput capacity mode for the table. The options are:

  • throughputMode:PAY_PER_REQUEST and

  • throughputMode:PROVISIONED - Provisioned capacity mode requires readCapacityUnits and writeCapacityUnits as input.

The default is throughput_mode:PAY_PER_REQUEST.

For more information, see Read/write capacity modes in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

encryptionSpecification

Modifies the encryption settings of the table. You can choose one of the following KMS key (KMS key):

  • type:AWS_OWNED_KMS_KEY - This key is owned by Amazon Keyspaces.

  • type:CUSTOMER_MANAGED_KMS_KEY - This key is stored in your account and is created, owned, and managed by you. This option requires the kms_key_identifier of the KMS key in Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format as input.

The default is AWS_OWNED_KMS_KEY.

For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

pointInTimeRecovery

Modifies the pointInTimeRecovery settings of the table. The options are:

  • status=ENABLED

  • status=DISABLED

If it's not specified, the default is status=DISABLED.

For more information, see Point-in-time recovery in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

ttl

Modifies Time to Live custom settings for the table. The options are:

  • status:enabled

  • status:disabled

The default is status:disabled. After ttl is enabled, you can't disable it for the table.

For more information, see Expiring data by using Amazon Keyspaces Time to Live (TTL) in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

defaultTimeToLive

The default Time to Live setting in seconds for the table.

For more information, see Setting the default TTL value for a table in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

clientSideTimestamps

Enables client-side timestamps for the table. By default, the setting is disabled. You can enable client-side timestamps with the following option:

  • status: "enabled"

Once client-side timestamps are enabled for a table, this setting cannot be disabled.

autoScalingSpecification

The optional auto scaling settings to update for a table in provisioned capacity mode. Specifies if the service can manage throughput capacity of a provisioned table automatically on your behalf. Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling helps you provision throughput capacity for variable workloads efficiently by increasing and decreasing your table's read and write capacity automatically in response to application traffic.

If auto scaling is already enabled for the table, you can use update_table to update the minimum and maximum values or the auto scaling policy settings independently.

For more information, see Managing throughput capacity automatically with Amazon Keyspaces auto scaling in the Amazon Keyspaces Developer Guide.

replicaSpecifications

The Region specific settings of a multi-Regional table.


AWS Lake Formation

Description

Lake Formation

Defines the public endpoint for the Lake Formation service.

Usage

lakeformation(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- lakeformation(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

add_lf_tags_to_resource Attaches one or more LF-tags to an existing resource
assume_decorated_role_with_saml Allows a caller to assume an IAM role decorated as the SAML user specified in the SAML assertion included in the request
batch_grant_permissions Batch operation to grant permissions to the principal
batch_revoke_permissions Batch operation to revoke permissions from the principal
cancel_transaction Attempts to cancel the specified transaction
commit_transaction Attempts to commit the specified transaction
create_data_cells_filter Creates a data cell filter to allow one to grant access to certain columns on certain rows
create_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration Creates an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation to allow IAM Identity Center users and groups to access Data Catalog resources
create_lake_formation_opt_in Enforce Lake Formation permissions for the given databases, tables, and principals
create_lf_tag Creates an LF-tag with the specified name and values
create_lf_tag_expression Creates a new LF-Tag expression with the provided name, description, catalog ID, and expression body
delete_data_cells_filter Deletes a data cell filter
delete_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration Deletes an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation
delete_lake_formation_opt_in Remove the Lake Formation permissions enforcement of the given databases, tables, and principals
delete_lf_tag Deletes the specified LF-tag given a key name
delete_lf_tag_expression Deletes the LF-Tag expression
delete_objects_on_cancel For a specific governed table, provides a list of Amazon S3 objects that will be written during the current transaction and that can be automatically deleted if the transaction is canceled
deregister_resource Deregisters the resource as managed by the Data Catalog
describe_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration Retrieves the instance ARN and application ARN for the connection
describe_resource Retrieves the current data access role for the given resource registered in Lake Formation
describe_transaction Returns the details of a single transaction
extend_transaction Indicates to the service that the specified transaction is still active and should not be treated as idle and aborted
get_data_cells_filter Returns a data cells filter
get_data_lake_principal Returns the identity of the invoking principal
get_data_lake_settings Retrieves the list of the data lake administrators of a Lake Formation-managed data lake
get_effective_permissions_for_path Returns the Lake Formation permissions for a specified table or database resource located at a path in Amazon S3
get_lf_tag Returns an LF-tag definition
get_lf_tag_expression Returns the details about the LF-Tag expression
get_query_state Returns the state of a query previously submitted
get_query_statistics Retrieves statistics on the planning and execution of a query
get_resource_lf_tags Returns the LF-tags applied to a resource
get_table_objects Returns the set of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table
get_temporary_glue_partition_credentials This API is identical to GetTemporaryTableCredentials except that this is used when the target Data Catalog resource is of type Partition
get_temporary_glue_table_credentials Allows a caller in a secure environment to assume a role with permission to access Amazon S3
get_work_unit_results Returns the work units resulting from the query
get_work_units Retrieves the work units generated by the StartQueryPlanning operation
grant_permissions Grants permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3
list_data_cells_filter Lists all the data cell filters on a table
list_lake_formation_opt_ins Retrieve the current list of resources and principals that are opt in to enforce Lake Formation permissions
list_lf_tag_expressions Returns the LF-Tag expressions in caller’s account filtered based on caller's permissions
list_lf_tags Lists LF-tags that the requester has permission to view
list_permissions Returns a list of the principal permissions on the resource, filtered by the permissions of the caller
list_resources Lists the resources registered to be managed by the Data Catalog
list_table_storage_optimizers Returns the configuration of all storage optimizers associated with a specified table
list_transactions Returns metadata about transactions and their status
put_data_lake_settings Sets the list of data lake administrators who have admin privileges on all resources managed by Lake Formation
register_resource Registers the resource as managed by the Data Catalog
remove_lf_tags_from_resource Removes an LF-tag from the resource
revoke_permissions Revokes permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3
search_databases_by_lf_tags This operation allows a search on DATABASE resources by TagCondition
search_tables_by_lf_tags This operation allows a search on TABLE resources by LFTags
start_query_planning Submits a request to process a query statement
start_transaction Starts a new transaction and returns its transaction ID
update_data_cells_filter Updates a data cell filter
update_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration Updates the IAM Identity Center connection parameters
update_lf_tag Updates the list of possible values for the specified LF-tag key
update_lf_tag_expression Updates the name of the LF-Tag expression to the new description and expression body provided
update_resource Updates the data access role used for vending access to the given (registered) resource in Lake Formation
update_table_objects Updates the manifest of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table
update_table_storage_optimizer Updates the configuration of the storage optimizers for a table

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- lakeformation()
svc$add_lf_tags_to_resource(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Attaches one or more LF-tags to an existing resource

Description

Attaches one or more LF-tags to an existing resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_add_lf_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_add_lf_tags_to_resource(CatalogId = NULL, Resource, LFTags)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Resource

[required] The database, table, or column resource to which to attach an LF-tag.

LFTags

[required] The LF-tags to attach to the resource.


Allows a caller to assume an IAM role decorated as the SAML user specified in the SAML assertion included in the request

Description

Allows a caller to assume an IAM role decorated as the SAML user specified in the SAML assertion included in the request. This decoration allows Lake Formation to enforce access policies against the SAML users and groups. This API operation requires SAML federation setup in the caller’s account as it can only be called with valid SAML assertions. Lake Formation does not scope down the permission of the assumed role. All permissions attached to the role via the SAML federation setup will be included in the role session.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_assume_decorated_role_with_saml/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_assume_decorated_role_with_saml(
  SAMLAssertion,
  RoleArn,
  PrincipalArn,
  DurationSeconds = NULL
)

Arguments

SAMLAssertion

[required] A SAML assertion consisting of an assertion statement for the user who needs temporary credentials. This must match the SAML assertion that was issued to IAM. This must be Base64 encoded.

RoleArn

[required] The role that represents an IAM principal whose scope down policy allows it to call credential vending APIs such as GetTemporaryTableCredentials. The caller must also have iam:PassRole permission on this role.

PrincipalArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SAML provider in IAM that describes the IdP.

DurationSeconds

The time period, between 900 and 43,200 seconds, for the timeout of the temporary credentials.


Batch operation to grant permissions to the principal

Description

Batch operation to grant permissions to the principal.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_batch_grant_permissions/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_batch_grant_permissions(CatalogId = NULL, Entries)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Entries

[required] A list of up to 20 entries for resource permissions to be granted by batch operation to the principal.


Batch operation to revoke permissions from the principal

Description

Batch operation to revoke permissions from the principal.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_batch_revoke_permissions/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_batch_revoke_permissions(CatalogId = NULL, Entries)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Entries

[required] A list of up to 20 entries for resource permissions to be revoked by batch operation to the principal.


Attempts to cancel the specified transaction

Description

Attempts to cancel the specified transaction. Returns an exception if the transaction was previously committed.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_cancel_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_cancel_transaction(TransactionId)

Arguments

TransactionId

[required] The transaction to cancel.


Attempts to commit the specified transaction

Description

Attempts to commit the specified transaction. Returns an exception if the transaction was previously aborted. This API action is idempotent if called multiple times for the same transaction.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_commit_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_commit_transaction(TransactionId)

Arguments

TransactionId

[required] The transaction to commit.


Creates a data cell filter to allow one to grant access to certain columns on certain rows

Description

Creates a data cell filter to allow one to grant access to certain columns on certain rows.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_create_data_cells_filter(TableData)

Arguments

TableData

[required] A DataCellsFilter structure containing information about the data cells filter.


Creates an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation to allow IAM Identity Center users and groups to access Data Catalog resources

Description

Creates an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation to allow IAM Identity Center users and groups to access Data Catalog resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_create_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  InstanceArn = NULL,
  ExternalFiltering = NULL,
  ShareRecipients = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, view definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

InstanceArn

The ARN of the IAM Identity Center instance for which the operation will be executed. For more information about ARNs, see Amazon Resource Names (ARNs) and Amazon Web Services Service Namespaces in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

ExternalFiltering

A list of the account IDs of Amazon Web Services accounts of third-party applications that are allowed to access data managed by Lake Formation.

ShareRecipients

A list of Amazon Web Services account IDs and/or Amazon Web Services organization/organizational unit ARNs that are allowed to access data managed by Lake Formation.

If the ShareRecipients list includes valid values, a resource share is created with the principals you want to have access to the resources.

If the ShareRecipients value is null or the list is empty, no resource share is created.


Enforce Lake Formation permissions for the given databases, tables, and principals

Description

Enforce Lake Formation permissions for the given databases, tables, and principals.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_lake_formation_opt_in/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_create_lake_formation_opt_in(Principal, Resource)

Arguments

Principal

[required]

Resource

[required]


Creates an LF-tag with the specified name and values

Description

Creates an LF-tag with the specified name and values.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_lf_tag/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_create_lf_tag(CatalogId = NULL, TagKey, TagValues)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

TagKey

[required] The key-name for the LF-tag.

TagValues

[required] A list of possible values an attribute can take.


Creates a new LF-Tag expression with the provided name, description, catalog ID, and expression body

Description

Creates a new LF-Tag expression with the provided name, description, catalog ID, and expression body. This call fails if a LF-Tag expression with the same name already exists in the caller’s account or if the underlying LF-Tags don't exist. To call this API operation, caller needs the following Lake Formation permissions:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_create_lf_tag_expression/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_create_lf_tag_expression(
  Name,
  Description = NULL,
  CatalogId = NULL,
  Expression
)

Arguments

Name

[required] A name for the expression.

Description

A description with information about the LF-Tag expression.

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Expression

[required] A list of LF-Tag conditions (key-value pairs).


Deletes a data cell filter

Description

Deletes a data cell filter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_delete_data_cells_filter(
  TableCatalogId = NULL,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  TableName = NULL,
  Name = NULL
)

Arguments

TableCatalogId

The ID of the catalog to which the table belongs.

DatabaseName

A database in the Glue Data Catalog.

TableName

A table in the database.

Name

The name given by the user to the data filter cell.


Deletes an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation

Description

Deletes an IAM Identity Center connection with Lake Formation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_delete_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration(
  CatalogId = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, view definition, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.


Remove the Lake Formation permissions enforcement of the given databases, tables, and principals

Description

Remove the Lake Formation permissions enforcement of the given databases, tables, and principals.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_lake_formation_opt_in/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_delete_lake_formation_opt_in(Principal, Resource)

Arguments

Principal

[required]

Resource

[required]


Deletes the specified LF-tag given a key name

Description

Deletes the specified LF-tag given a key name. If the input parameter tag key was not found, then the operation will throw an exception. When you delete an LF-tag, the LFTagPolicy attached to the LF-tag becomes invalid. If the deleted LF-tag was still assigned to any resource, the tag policy attach to the deleted LF-tag will no longer be applied to the resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_lf_tag/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_delete_lf_tag(CatalogId = NULL, TagKey)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

TagKey

[required] The key-name for the LF-tag to delete.


Deletes the LF-Tag expression

Description

Deletes the LF-Tag expression. The caller must be a data lake admin or have DROP permissions on the LF-Tag expression. Deleting a LF-Tag expression will also delete all LFTagPolicy permissions referencing the LF-Tag expression.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_lf_tag_expression/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_delete_lf_tag_expression(Name, CatalogId = NULL)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name for the LF-Tag expression.

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID in which the LF-Tag expression is saved.


For a specific governed table, provides a list of Amazon S3 objects that will be written during the current transaction and that can be automatically deleted if the transaction is canceled

Description

For a specific governed table, provides a list of Amazon S3 objects that will be written during the current transaction and that can be automatically deleted if the transaction is canceled. Without this call, no Amazon S3 objects are automatically deleted when a transaction cancels.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_delete_objects_on_cancel/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_delete_objects_on_cancel(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  TransactionId,
  Objects
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The Glue data catalog that contains the governed table. Defaults to the current account ID.

DatabaseName

[required] The database that contains the governed table.

TableName

[required] The name of the governed table.

TransactionId

[required] ID of the transaction that the writes occur in.

Objects

[required] A list of VirtualObject structures, which indicates the Amazon S3 objects to be deleted if the transaction cancels.


Deregisters the resource as managed by the Data Catalog

Description

Deregisters the resource as managed by the Data Catalog.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_deregister_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_deregister_resource(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to deregister.


Retrieves the instance ARN and application ARN for the connection

Description

Retrieves the instance ARN and application ARN for the connection.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_describe_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_describe_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration(
  CatalogId = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.


Retrieves the current data access role for the given resource registered in Lake Formation

Description

Retrieves the current data access role for the given resource registered in Lake Formation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_describe_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_describe_resource(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The resource ARN.


Returns the details of a single transaction

Description

Returns the details of a single transaction.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_describe_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_describe_transaction(TransactionId)

Arguments

TransactionId

[required] The transaction for which to return status.


Indicates to the service that the specified transaction is still active and should not be treated as idle and aborted

Description

Indicates to the service that the specified transaction is still active and should not be treated as idle and aborted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_extend_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_extend_transaction(TransactionId = NULL)

Arguments

TransactionId

The transaction to extend.


Returns a data cells filter

Description

Returns a data cells filter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_data_cells_filter(
  TableCatalogId,
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  Name
)

Arguments

TableCatalogId

[required] The ID of the catalog to which the table belongs.

DatabaseName

[required] A database in the Glue Data Catalog.

TableName

[required] A table in the database.

Name

[required] The name given by the user to the data filter cell.


Returns the identity of the invoking principal

Description

Returns the identity of the invoking principal.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_data_lake_principal/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_data_lake_principal()

Retrieves the list of the data lake administrators of a Lake Formation-managed data lake

Description

Retrieves the list of the data lake administrators of a Lake Formation-managed data lake.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_data_lake_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_data_lake_settings(CatalogId = NULL)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.


Returns the Lake Formation permissions for a specified table or database resource located at a path in Amazon S3

Description

Returns the Lake Formation permissions for a specified table or database resource located at a path in Amazon S3. get_effective_permissions_for_path will not return databases and tables if the catalog is encrypted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_effective_permissions_for_path/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_effective_permissions_for_path(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  ResourceArn,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want to get permissions.

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return.


Returns an LF-tag definition

Description

Returns an LF-tag definition.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_lf_tag/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_lf_tag(CatalogId = NULL, TagKey)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

TagKey

[required] The key-name for the LF-tag.


Returns the details about the LF-Tag expression

Description

Returns the details about the LF-Tag expression. The caller must be a data lake admin or must have DESCRIBE permission on the LF-Tag expression resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_lf_tag_expression/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_lf_tag_expression(Name, CatalogId = NULL)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name for the LF-Tag expression

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID.


Returns the state of a query previously submitted

Description

Returns the state of a query previously submitted. Clients are expected to poll get_query_state to monitor the current state of the planning before retrieving the work units. A query state is only visible to the principal that made the initial call to start_query_planning.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_query_state/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_query_state(QueryId)

Arguments

QueryId

[required] The ID of the plan query operation.


Retrieves statistics on the planning and execution of a query

Description

Retrieves statistics on the planning and execution of a query.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_query_statistics/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_query_statistics(QueryId)

Arguments

QueryId

[required] The ID of the plan query operation.


Returns the LF-tags applied to a resource

Description

Returns the LF-tags applied to a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_resource_lf_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_resource_lf_tags(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  Resource,
  ShowAssignedLFTags = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Resource

[required] The database, table, or column resource for which you want to return LF-tags.

ShowAssignedLFTags

Indicates whether to show the assigned LF-tags.


Returns the set of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table

Description

Returns the set of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table. A transaction ID or timestamp can be specified for time-travel queries.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_table_objects/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_table_objects(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  TransactionId = NULL,
  QueryAsOfTime = NULL,
  PartitionPredicate = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The catalog containing the governed table. Defaults to the caller’s account.

DatabaseName

[required] The database containing the governed table.

TableName

[required] The governed table for which to retrieve objects.

TransactionId

The transaction ID at which to read the governed table contents. If this transaction has aborted, an error is returned. If not set, defaults to the most recent committed transaction. Cannot be specified along with QueryAsOfTime.

QueryAsOfTime

The time as of when to read the governed table contents. If not set, the most recent transaction commit time is used. Cannot be specified along with TransactionId.

PartitionPredicate

A predicate to filter the objects returned based on the partition keys defined in the governed table.

  • The comparison operators supported are: =, \>, \<, \>=, \<=

  • The logical operators supported are: AND

  • The data types supported are integer, long, date(yyyy-MM-dd), timestamp(yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ssXXX or yyyy-MM-dd HH:mm:ss"), string and decimal.

MaxResults

Specifies how many values to return in a page.

NextToken

A continuation token if this is not the first call to retrieve these objects.


This API is identical to GetTemporaryTableCredentials except that this is used when the target Data Catalog resource is of type Partition

Description

This API is identical to GetTemporaryTableCredentials except that this is used when the target Data Catalog resource is of type Partition. Lake Formation restricts the permission of the vended credentials with the same scope down policy which restricts access to a single Amazon S3 prefix.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_temporary_glue_partition_credentials/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_temporary_glue_partition_credentials(
  TableArn,
  Partition,
  Permissions = NULL,
  DurationSeconds = NULL,
  AuditContext = NULL,
  SupportedPermissionTypes = NULL
)

Arguments

TableArn

[required] The ARN of the partitions' table.

Partition

[required] A list of partition values identifying a single partition.

Permissions

Filters the request based on the user having been granted a list of specified permissions on the requested resource(s).

DurationSeconds

The time period, between 900 and 21,600 seconds, for the timeout of the temporary credentials.

AuditContext

A structure representing context to access a resource (column names, query ID, etc).

SupportedPermissionTypes

A list of supported permission types for the partition. Valid values are COLUMN_PERMISSION and CELL_FILTER_PERMISSION.


Allows a caller in a secure environment to assume a role with permission to access Amazon S3

Description

Allows a caller in a secure environment to assume a role with permission to access Amazon S3. In order to vend such credentials, Lake Formation assumes the role associated with a registered location, for example an Amazon S3 bucket, with a scope down policy which restricts the access to a single prefix.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_temporary_glue_table_credentials/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_temporary_glue_table_credentials(
  TableArn,
  Permissions = NULL,
  DurationSeconds = NULL,
  AuditContext = NULL,
  SupportedPermissionTypes = NULL,
  S3Path = NULL,
  QuerySessionContext = NULL
)

Arguments

TableArn

[required] The ARN identifying a table in the Data Catalog for the temporary credentials request.

Permissions

Filters the request based on the user having been granted a list of specified permissions on the requested resource(s).

DurationSeconds

The time period, between 900 and 21,600 seconds, for the timeout of the temporary credentials.

AuditContext

A structure representing context to access a resource (column names, query ID, etc).

SupportedPermissionTypes

A list of supported permission types for the table. Valid values are COLUMN_PERMISSION and CELL_FILTER_PERMISSION.

S3Path

The Amazon S3 path for the table.

QuerySessionContext

A structure used as a protocol between query engines and Lake Formation or Glue. Contains both a Lake Formation generated authorization identifier and information from the request's authorization context.


Returns the work units resulting from the query

Description

Returns the work units resulting from the query. Work units can be executed in any order and in parallel.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_work_unit_results/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_work_unit_results(QueryId, WorkUnitId, WorkUnitToken)

Arguments

QueryId

[required] The ID of the plan query operation for which to get results.

WorkUnitId

[required] The work unit ID for which to get results. Value generated by enumerating WorkUnitIdMin to WorkUnitIdMax (inclusive) from the WorkUnitRange in the output of get_work_units.

WorkUnitToken

[required] A work token used to query the execution service. Token output from get_work_units.


Retrieves the work units generated by the StartQueryPlanning operation

Description

Retrieves the work units generated by the start_query_planning operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_get_work_units/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_get_work_units(NextToken = NULL, PageSize = NULL, QueryId)

Arguments

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is a continuation call.

PageSize

The size of each page to get in the Amazon Web Services service call. This does not affect the number of items returned in the command's output. Setting a smaller page size results in more calls to the Amazon Web Services service, retrieving fewer items in each call. This can help prevent the Amazon Web Services service calls from timing out.

QueryId

[required] The ID of the plan query operation.


Grants permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3

Description

Grants permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_grant_permissions/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_grant_permissions(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  Principal,
  Resource,
  Permissions,
  PermissionsWithGrantOption = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Principal

[required] The principal to be granted the permissions on the resource. Supported principals are IAM users or IAM roles, and they are defined by their principal type and their ARN.

Note that if you define a resource with a particular ARN, then later delete, and recreate a resource with that same ARN, the resource maintains the permissions already granted.

Resource

[required] The resource to which permissions are to be granted. Resources in Lake Formation are the Data Catalog, databases, and tables.

Permissions

[required] The permissions granted to the principal on the resource. Lake Formation defines privileges to grant and revoke access to metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3. Lake Formation requires that each principal be authorized to perform a specific task on Lake Formation resources.

PermissionsWithGrantOption

Indicates a list of the granted permissions that the principal may pass to other users. These permissions may only be a subset of the permissions granted in the Privileges.


Lists all the data cell filters on a table

Description

Lists all the data cell filters on a table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_list_data_cells_filter(
  Table = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

Table

A table in the Glue Data Catalog.

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is a continuation call.

MaxResults

The maximum size of the response.


Retrieve the current list of resources and principals that are opt in to enforce Lake Formation permissions

Description

Retrieve the current list of resources and principals that are opt in to enforce Lake Formation permissions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_lake_formation_opt_ins/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_list_lake_formation_opt_ins(
  Principal = NULL,
  Resource = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

Principal
Resource

A structure for the resource.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return.

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list.


Returns the LF-Tag expressions in caller’s account filtered based on caller's permissions

Description

Returns the LF-Tag expressions in caller’s account filtered based on caller's permissions. Data Lake and read only admins implicitly can see all tag expressions in their account, else caller needs DESCRIBE permissions on tag expression.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_lf_tag_expressions/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_list_lf_tag_expressions(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return.

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list.


Lists LF-tags that the requester has permission to view

Description

Lists LF-tags that the requester has permission to view.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_lf_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_list_lf_tags(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  ResourceShareType = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

ResourceShareType

If resource share type is ALL, returns both in-account LF-tags and shared LF-tags that the requester has permission to view. If resource share type is FOREIGN, returns all share LF-tags that the requester can view. If no resource share type is passed, lists LF-tags in the given catalog ID that the requester has permission to view.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return.

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list.


Returns a list of the principal permissions on the resource, filtered by the permissions of the caller

Description

Returns a list of the principal permissions on the resource, filtered by the permissions of the caller. For example, if you are granted an ALTER permission, you are able to see only the principal permissions for ALTER.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_permissions/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_list_permissions(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  Principal = NULL,
  ResourceType = NULL,
  Resource = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  IncludeRelated = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Principal

Specifies a principal to filter the permissions returned.

ResourceType

Specifies a resource type to filter the permissions returned.

Resource

A resource where you will get a list of the principal permissions.

This operation does not support getting privileges on a table with columns. Instead, call this operation on the table, and the operation returns the table and the table w columns.

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return.

IncludeRelated

Indicates that related permissions should be included in the results.


Lists the resources registered to be managed by the Data Catalog

Description

Lists the resources registered to be managed by the Data Catalog.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_resources/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_list_resources(
  FilterConditionList = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

FilterConditionList

Any applicable row-level and/or column-level filtering conditions for the resources.

MaxResults

The maximum number of resource results.

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve these resources.


Returns the configuration of all storage optimizers associated with a specified table

Description

Returns the configuration of all storage optimizers associated with a specified table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_table_storage_optimizers/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_list_table_storage_optimizers(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  StorageOptimizerType = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The Catalog ID of the table.

DatabaseName

[required] Name of the database where the table is present.

TableName

[required] Name of the table.

StorageOptimizerType

The specific type of storage optimizers to list. The supported value is compaction.

MaxResults

The number of storage optimizers to return on each call.

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is a continuation call.


Returns metadata about transactions and their status

Description

Returns metadata about transactions and their status. To prevent the response from growing indefinitely, only uncommitted transactions and those available for time-travel queries are returned.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_list_transactions/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_list_transactions(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  StatusFilter = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The catalog for which to list transactions. Defaults to the account ID of the caller.

StatusFilter

A filter indicating the status of transactions to return. Options are ALL | COMPLETED | COMMITTED | ABORTED | ACTIVE. The default is ALL.

MaxResults

The maximum number of transactions to return in a single call.

NextToken

A continuation token if this is not the first call to retrieve transactions.


Sets the list of data lake administrators who have admin privileges on all resources managed by Lake Formation

Description

Sets the list of data lake administrators who have admin privileges on all resources managed by Lake Formation. For more information on admin privileges, see Granting Lake Formation Permissions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_put_data_lake_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_put_data_lake_settings(CatalogId = NULL, DataLakeSettings)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

DataLakeSettings

[required] A structure representing a list of Lake Formation principals designated as data lake administrators.


Registers the resource as managed by the Data Catalog

Description

Registers the resource as managed by the Data Catalog.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_register_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_register_resource(
  ResourceArn,
  UseServiceLinkedRole = NULL,
  RoleArn = NULL,
  WithFederation = NULL,
  HybridAccessEnabled = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that you want to register.

UseServiceLinkedRole

Designates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) service-linked role by registering this role with the Data Catalog. A service-linked role is a unique type of IAM role that is linked directly to Lake Formation.

For more information, see Using Service-Linked Roles for Lake Formation.

RoleArn

The identifier for the role that registers the resource.

WithFederation

Whether or not the resource is a federated resource.

HybridAccessEnabled

Specifies whether the data access of tables pointing to the location can be managed by both Lake Formation permissions as well as Amazon S3 bucket policies.


Removes an LF-tag from the resource

Description

Removes an LF-tag from the resource. Only database, table, or tableWithColumns resource are allowed. To tag columns, use the column inclusion list in tableWithColumns to specify column input.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_remove_lf_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_remove_lf_tags_from_resource(CatalogId = NULL, Resource, LFTags)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Resource

[required] The database, table, or column resource where you want to remove an LF-tag.

LFTags

[required] The LF-tags to be removed from the resource.


Revokes permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3

Description

Revokes permissions to the principal to access metadata in the Data Catalog and data organized in underlying data storage such as Amazon S3.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_revoke_permissions/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_revoke_permissions(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  Principal,
  Resource,
  Permissions,
  PermissionsWithGrantOption = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Principal

[required] The principal to be revoked permissions on the resource.

Resource

[required] The resource to which permissions are to be revoked.

Permissions

[required] The permissions revoked to the principal on the resource. For information about permissions, see Security and Access Control to Metadata and Data.

PermissionsWithGrantOption

Indicates a list of permissions for which to revoke the grant option allowing the principal to pass permissions to other principals.


This operation allows a search on DATABASE resources by TagCondition

Description

This operation allows a search on DATABASE resources by TagCondition. This operation is used by admins who want to grant user permissions on certain TagConditions. Before making a grant, the admin can use SearchDatabasesByTags to find all resources where the given TagConditions are valid to verify whether the returned resources can be shared.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_search_databases_by_lf_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_search_databases_by_lf_tags(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  CatalogId = NULL,
  Expression
)

Arguments

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return.

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Expression

[required] A list of conditions (LFTag structures) to search for in database resources.


This operation allows a search on TABLE resources by LFTags

Description

This operation allows a search on TABLE resources by LFTags. This will be used by admins who want to grant user permissions on certain LF-tags. Before making a grant, the admin can use search_tables_by_lf_tags to find all resources where the given LFTags are valid to verify whether the returned resources can be shared.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_search_tables_by_lf_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_search_tables_by_lf_tags(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  CatalogId = NULL,
  Expression
)

Arguments

NextToken

A continuation token, if this is not the first call to retrieve this list.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return.

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

Expression

[required] A list of conditions (LFTag structures) to search for in table resources.


Submits a request to process a query statement

Description

Submits a request to process a query statement.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_start_query_planning/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_start_query_planning(QueryPlanningContext, QueryString)

Arguments

QueryPlanningContext

[required] A structure containing information about the query plan.

QueryString

[required] A PartiQL query statement used as an input to the planner service.


Starts a new transaction and returns its transaction ID

Description

Starts a new transaction and returns its transaction ID. Transaction IDs are opaque objects that you can use to identify a transaction.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_start_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_start_transaction(TransactionType = NULL)

Arguments

TransactionType

Indicates whether this transaction should be read only or read and write. Writes made using a read-only transaction ID will be rejected. Read-only transactions do not need to be committed.


Updates a data cell filter

Description

Updates a data cell filter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_data_cells_filter/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_update_data_cells_filter(TableData)

Arguments

TableData

[required] A DataCellsFilter structure containing information about the data cells filter.


Updates the IAM Identity Center connection parameters

Description

Updates the IAM Identity Center connection parameters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_update_lake_formation_identity_center_configuration(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  ShareRecipients = NULL,
  ApplicationStatus = NULL,
  ExternalFiltering = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, view definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

ShareRecipients

A list of Amazon Web Services account IDs or Amazon Web Services organization/organizational unit ARNs that are allowed to access to access data managed by Lake Formation.

If the ShareRecipients list includes valid values, then the resource share is updated with the principals you want to have access to the resources.

If the ShareRecipients value is null, both the list of share recipients and the resource share remain unchanged.

If the ShareRecipients value is an empty list, then the existing share recipients list will be cleared, and the resource share will be deleted.

ApplicationStatus

Allows to enable or disable the IAM Identity Center connection.

ExternalFiltering

A list of the account IDs of Amazon Web Services accounts of third-party applications that are allowed to access data managed by Lake Formation.


Updates the list of possible values for the specified LF-tag key

Description

Updates the list of possible values for the specified LF-tag key. If the LF-tag does not exist, the operation throws an EntityNotFoundException. The values in the delete key values will be deleted from list of possible values. If any value in the delete key values is attached to a resource, then API errors out with a 400 Exception - "Update not allowed". Untag the attribute before deleting the LF-tag key's value.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_lf_tag/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_update_lf_tag(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  TagKey,
  TagValuesToDelete = NULL,
  TagValuesToAdd = NULL
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID. The Data Catalog is the persistent metadata store. It contains database definitions, table definitions, and other control information to manage your Lake Formation environment.

TagKey

[required] The key-name for the LF-tag for which to add or delete values.

TagValuesToDelete

A list of LF-tag values to delete from the LF-tag.

TagValuesToAdd

A list of LF-tag values to add from the LF-tag.


Updates the name of the LF-Tag expression to the new description and expression body provided

Description

Updates the name of the LF-Tag expression to the new description and expression body provided. Updating a LF-Tag expression immediately changes the permission boundaries of all existing LFTagPolicy permission grants that reference the given LF-Tag expression.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_lf_tag_expression/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_update_lf_tag_expression(
  Name,
  Description = NULL,
  CatalogId = NULL,
  Expression
)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name for the LF-Tag expression.

Description

The description with information about the saved LF-Tag expression.

CatalogId

The identifier for the Data Catalog. By default, the account ID.

Expression

[required] The LF-Tag expression body composed of one more LF-Tag key-value pairs.


Updates the data access role used for vending access to the given (registered) resource in Lake Formation

Description

Updates the data access role used for vending access to the given (registered) resource in Lake Formation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_update_resource(
  RoleArn,
  ResourceArn,
  WithFederation = NULL,
  HybridAccessEnabled = NULL
)

Arguments

RoleArn

[required] The new role to use for the given resource registered in Lake Formation.

ResourceArn

[required] The resource ARN.

WithFederation

Whether or not the resource is a federated resource.

HybridAccessEnabled

Specifies whether the data access of tables pointing to the location can be managed by both Lake Formation permissions as well as Amazon S3 bucket policies.


Updates the manifest of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table

Description

Updates the manifest of Amazon S3 objects that make up the specified governed table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_table_objects/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_update_table_objects(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  TransactionId = NULL,
  WriteOperations
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The catalog containing the governed table to update. Defaults to the caller’s account ID.

DatabaseName

[required] The database containing the governed table to update.

TableName

[required] The governed table to update.

TransactionId

The transaction at which to do the write.

WriteOperations

[required] A list of WriteOperation objects that define an object to add to or delete from the manifest for a governed table.


Updates the configuration of the storage optimizers for a table

Description

Updates the configuration of the storage optimizers for a table.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/lakeformation_update_table_storage_optimizer/ for full documentation.

Usage

lakeformation_update_table_storage_optimizer(
  CatalogId = NULL,
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  StorageOptimizerConfig
)

Arguments

CatalogId

The Catalog ID of the table.

DatabaseName

[required] Name of the database where the table is present.

TableName

[required] Name of the table for which to enable the storage optimizer.

StorageOptimizerConfig

[required] Name of the configuration for the storage optimizer.


Amazon MemoryDB

Description

MemoryDB is a fully managed, Redis OSS-compatible, in-memory database that delivers ultra-fast performance and Multi-AZ durability for modern applications built using microservices architectures. MemoryDB stores the entire database in-memory, enabling low latency and high throughput data access. It is compatible with Redis OSS, a popular open source data store, enabling you to leverage Redis OSS’ flexible and friendly data structures, APIs, and commands.

Usage

memorydb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- memorydb(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

batch_update_cluster Apply the service update to a list of clusters supplied
copy_snapshot Makes a copy of an existing snapshot
create_acl Creates an Access Control List
create_cluster Creates a cluster
create_multi_region_cluster Creates a new multi-Region cluster
create_parameter_group Creates a new MemoryDB parameter group
create_snapshot Creates a copy of an entire cluster at a specific moment in time
create_subnet_group Creates a subnet group
create_user Creates a MemoryDB user
delete_acl Deletes an Access Control List
delete_cluster Deletes a cluster
delete_multi_region_cluster Deletes an existing multi-Region cluster
delete_parameter_group Deletes the specified parameter group
delete_snapshot Deletes an existing snapshot
delete_subnet_group Deletes a subnet group
delete_user Deletes a user
describe_ac_ls Returns a list of ACLs
describe_clusters Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cluster if a cluster name is supplied
describe_engine_versions Returns a list of the available Redis OSS engine versions
describe_events Returns events related to clusters, security groups, and parameter groups
describe_multi_region_clusters Returns details about one or more multi-Region clusters
describe_parameter_groups Returns a list of parameter group descriptions
describe_parameters Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group
describe_reserved_nodes Returns information about reserved nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved node
describe_reserved_nodes_offerings Lists available reserved node offerings
describe_service_updates Returns details of the service updates
describe_snapshots Returns information about cluster snapshots
describe_subnet_groups Returns a list of subnet group descriptions
describe_users Returns a list of users
failover_shard Used to failover a shard
list_allowed_multi_region_cluster_updates Lists the allowed updates for a multi-Region cluster
list_allowed_node_type_updates Lists all available node types that you can scale to from your cluster's current node type
list_tags Lists all tags currently on a named resource
purchase_reserved_nodes_offering Allows you to purchase a reserved node offering
reset_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a parameter group to the engine or system default value
tag_resource A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive
untag_resource Use this operation to remove tags on a resource
update_acl Changes the list of users that belong to the Access Control List
update_cluster Modifies the settings for a cluster
update_multi_region_cluster Updates the configuration of an existing multi-Region cluster
update_parameter_group Updates the parameters of a parameter group
update_subnet_group Updates a subnet group
update_user Changes user password(s) and/or access string

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- memorydb()
svc$batch_update_cluster(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Apply the service update to a list of clusters supplied

Description

Apply the service update to a list of clusters supplied. For more information on service updates and applying them, see Applying the service updates.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_batch_update_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_batch_update_cluster(ClusterNames, ServiceUpdate = NULL)

Arguments

ClusterNames

[required] The cluster names to apply the updates.

ServiceUpdate

The unique ID of the service update


Makes a copy of an existing snapshot

Description

Makes a copy of an existing snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_copy_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_copy_snapshot(
  SourceSnapshotName,
  TargetSnapshotName,
  TargetBucket = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceSnapshotName

[required] The name of an existing snapshot from which to make a copy.

TargetSnapshotName

[required] A name for the snapshot copy. MemoryDB does not permit overwriting a snapshot, therefore this name must be unique within its context - MemoryDB or an Amazon S3 bucket if exporting.

TargetBucket

The Amazon S3 bucket to which the snapshot is exported. This parameter is used only when exporting a snapshot for external access. When using this parameter to export a snapshot, be sure MemoryDB has the needed permissions to this S3 bucket. For more information, see Step 2: Grant MemoryDB Access to Your Amazon S3 Bucket.

KmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the target snapshot.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Creates an Access Control List

Description

Creates an Access Control List. For more information, see Authenticating users with Access Contol Lists (ACLs).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_acl/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_create_acl(ACLName, UserNames = NULL, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

ACLName

[required] The name of the Access Control List.

UserNames

The list of users that belong to the Access Control List.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Creates a cluster

Description

Creates a cluster. All nodes in the cluster run the same protocol-compliant engine software.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_create_cluster(
  ClusterName,
  NodeType,
  MultiRegionClusterName = NULL,
  ParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Description = NULL,
  NumShards = NULL,
  NumReplicasPerShard = NULL,
  SubnetGroupName = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  MaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  SnsTopicArn = NULL,
  TLSEnabled = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  SnapshotArns = NULL,
  SnapshotName = NULL,
  SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  SnapshotWindow = NULL,
  ACLName,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  DataTiering = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the cluster. This value must be unique as it also serves as the cluster identifier.

NodeType

[required] The compute and memory capacity of the nodes in the cluster.

MultiRegionClusterName

The name of the multi-Region cluster to be created.

ParameterGroupName

The name of the parameter group associated with the cluster.

Description

An optional description of the cluster.

NumShards

The number of shards the cluster will contain. The default value is 1.

NumReplicasPerShard

The number of replicas to apply to each shard. The default value is 1. The maximum is 5.

SubnetGroupName

The name of the subnet group to be used for the cluster.

SecurityGroupIds

A list of security group names to associate with this cluster.

MaintenanceWindow

Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period.

Valid values for ddd are:

  • sun

  • mon

  • tue

  • wed

  • thu

  • fri

  • sat

Example: sun:23:00-mon:01:30

Port

The port number on which each of the nodes accepts connections.

SnsTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Simple Notification Service (SNS) topic to which notifications are sent.

TLSEnabled

A flag to enable in-transit encryption on the cluster.

KmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the cluster.

SnapshotArns

A list of Amazon Resource Names (ARN) that uniquely identify the RDB snapshot files stored in Amazon S3. The snapshot files are used to populate the new cluster. The Amazon S3 object name in the ARN cannot contain any commas.

SnapshotName

The name of a snapshot from which to restore data into the new cluster. The snapshot status changes to restoring while the new cluster is being created.

SnapshotRetentionLimit

The number of days for which MemoryDB retains automatic snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set SnapshotRetentionLimit to 5, a snapshot that was taken today is retained for 5 days before being deleted.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. Tags are comma-separated key,value pairs (e.g. Key=myKey, Value=myKeyValue. You can include multiple tags as shown following: Key=myKey, Value=myKeyValue Key=mySecondKey, Value=mySecondKeyValue.

SnapshotWindow

The daily time range (in UTC) during which MemoryDB begins taking a daily snapshot of your shard.

Example: 05:00-09:00

If you do not specify this parameter, MemoryDB automatically chooses an appropriate time range.

ACLName

[required] The name of the Access Control List to associate with the cluster.

Engine

The name of the engine to be used for the cluster.

EngineVersion

The version number of the Redis OSS engine to be used for the cluster.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

When set to true, the cluster will automatically receive minor engine version upgrades after launch.

DataTiering

Enables data tiering. Data tiering is only supported for clusters using the r6gd node type. This parameter must be set when using r6gd nodes. For more information, see Data tiering.


Creates a new multi-Region cluster

Description

Creates a new multi-Region cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_multi_region_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_create_multi_region_cluster(
  MultiRegionClusterNameSuffix,
  Description = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  NodeType,
  MultiRegionParameterGroupName = NULL,
  NumShards = NULL,
  TLSEnabled = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

MultiRegionClusterNameSuffix

[required] A suffix to be added to the multi-Region cluster name.

Description

A description for the multi-Region cluster.

Engine

The name of the engine to be used for the multi-Region cluster.

EngineVersion

The version of the engine to be used for the multi-Region cluster.

NodeType

[required] The node type to be used for the multi-Region cluster.

MultiRegionParameterGroupName

The name of the multi-Region parameter group to be associated with the cluster.

NumShards

The number of shards for the multi-Region cluster.

TLSEnabled

Whether to enable TLS encryption for the multi-Region cluster.

Tags

A list of tags to be applied to the multi-Region cluster.


Creates a new MemoryDB parameter group

Description

Creates a new MemoryDB parameter group. A parameter group is a collection of parameters and their values that are applied to all of the nodes in any cluster. For more information, see Configuring engine parameters using parameter groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_create_parameter_group(
  ParameterGroupName,
  Family,
  Description = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group.

Family

[required] The name of the parameter group family that the parameter group can be used with.

Description

An optional description of the parameter group.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Creates a copy of an entire cluster at a specific moment in time

Description

Creates a copy of an entire cluster at a specific moment in time.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_create_snapshot(
  ClusterName,
  SnapshotName,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The snapshot is created from this cluster.

SnapshotName

[required] A name for the snapshot being created.

KmsKeyId

The ID of the KMS key used to encrypt the snapshot.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Creates a subnet group

Description

Creates a subnet group. A subnet group is a collection of subnets (typically private) that you can designate for your clusters running in an Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) environment. When you create a cluster in an Amazon VPC, you must specify a subnet group. MemoryDB uses that subnet group to choose a subnet and IP addresses within that subnet to associate with your nodes. For more information, see Subnets and subnet groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_create_subnet_group(
  SubnetGroupName,
  Description = NULL,
  SubnetIds,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the subnet group.

Description

A description for the subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] A list of VPC subnet IDs for the subnet group.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Creates a MemoryDB user

Description

Creates a MemoryDB user. For more information, see Authenticating users with Access Contol Lists (ACLs).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_create_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_create_user(UserName, AuthenticationMode, AccessString, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

UserName

[required] The name of the user. This value must be unique as it also serves as the user identifier.

AuthenticationMode

[required] Denotes the user's authentication properties, such as whether it requires a password to authenticate.

AccessString

[required] Access permissions string used for this user.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Deletes an Access Control List

Description

Deletes an Access Control List. The ACL must first be disassociated from the cluster before it can be deleted. For more information, see Authenticating users with Access Contol Lists (ACLs).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_acl/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_delete_acl(ACLName)

Arguments

ACLName

[required] The name of the Access Control List to delete.


Deletes a cluster

Description

Deletes a cluster. It also deletes all associated nodes and node endpoints.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_delete_cluster(
  ClusterName,
  MultiRegionClusterName = NULL,
  FinalSnapshotName = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the cluster to be deleted

MultiRegionClusterName

The name of the multi-Region cluster to be deleted.

FinalSnapshotName

The user-supplied name of a final cluster snapshot. This is the unique name that identifies the snapshot. MemoryDB creates the snapshot, and then deletes the cluster immediately afterward.


Deletes an existing multi-Region cluster

Description

Deletes an existing multi-Region cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_multi_region_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_delete_multi_region_cluster(MultiRegionClusterName)

Arguments

MultiRegionClusterName

[required] The name of the multi-Region cluster to be deleted.


Deletes the specified parameter group

Description

Deletes the specified parameter group. You cannot delete a parameter group if it is associated with any clusters. You cannot delete the default parameter groups in your account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_delete_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group to delete.


Deletes an existing snapshot

Description

Deletes an existing snapshot. When you receive a successful response from this operation, MemoryDB immediately begins deleting the snapshot; you cannot cancel or revert this operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_delete_snapshot(SnapshotName)

Arguments

SnapshotName

[required] The name of the snapshot to delete.


Deletes a subnet group

Description

Deletes a subnet group. You cannot delete a default subnet group or one that is associated with any clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_delete_subnet_group(SubnetGroupName)

Arguments

SubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the subnet group to delete.


Deletes a user

Description

Deletes a user. The user will be removed from all ACLs and in turn removed from all clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_delete_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_delete_user(UserName)

Arguments

UserName

[required] The name of the user to delete


Returns a list of ACLs

Description

Returns a list of ACLs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_ac_ls/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_ac_ls(ACLName = NULL, MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

ACLName

The name of the ACL.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.


Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cluster if a cluster name is supplied

Description

Returns information about all provisioned clusters if no cluster identifier is specified, or about a specific cluster if a cluster name is supplied.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_clusters(
  ClusterName = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  ShowShardDetails = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

The name of the cluster.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.

ShowShardDetails

An optional flag that can be included in the request to retrieve information about the individual shard(s).


Returns a list of the available Redis OSS engine versions

Description

Returns a list of the available Redis OSS engine versions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_engine_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_engine_versions(
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  ParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  DefaultOnly = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

The name of the engine for which to list available versions.

EngineVersion

The Redis OSS engine version

ParameterGroupFamily

The name of a specific parameter group family to return details for.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.

DefaultOnly

If true, specifies that only the default version of the specified engine or engine and major version combination is to be returned.


Returns events related to clusters, security groups, and parameter groups

Description

Returns events related to clusters, security groups, and parameter groups. You can obtain events specific to a particular cluster, security group, or parameter group by providing the name as a parameter. By default, only the events occurring within the last hour are returned; however, you can retrieve up to 14 days' worth of events if necessary.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_events/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_events(
  SourceName = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceName

The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, all sources are included in the response.

SourceType

The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.

StartTime

The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. Example: 2017-03-30T07:03:49.555Z

EndTime

The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. Example: 2017-03-30T07:03:49.555Z

Duration

The number of minutes worth of events to retrieve.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.


Returns details about one or more multi-Region clusters

Description

Returns details about one or more multi-Region clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_multi_region_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_multi_region_clusters(
  MultiRegionClusterName = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  ShowClusterDetails = NULL
)

Arguments

MultiRegionClusterName

The name of a specific multi-Region cluster to describe.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return.

NextToken

A token to specify where to start paginating.

ShowClusterDetails

Details about the multi-Region cluster.


Returns a list of parameter group descriptions

Description

Returns a list of parameter group descriptions. If a parameter group name is specified, the list contains only the descriptions for that group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_parameter_groups(
  ParameterGroupName = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

The name of a specific parameter group to return details for.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.


Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group

Description

Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_parameters(
  ParameterGroupName,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] he name of a specific parameter group to return details for.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.


Returns information about reserved nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved node

Description

Returns information about reserved nodes for this account, or about a specified reserved node.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_reserved_nodes/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_reserved_nodes(
  ReservationId = NULL,
  ReservedNodesOfferingId = NULL,
  NodeType = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  OfferingType = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservationId

The reserved node identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reservation ID.

ReservedNodesOfferingId

The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only purchased reservations matching the specified offering identifier.

NodeType

The node type filter value. Use this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified node type. For more information, see Supported node types.

Duration

The duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Use this parameter to show only reservations for this duration.

OfferingType

The offering type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type. Valid values: "All Upfront"|"Partial Upfront"| "No Upfront"

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Lists available reserved node offerings

Description

Lists available reserved node offerings.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_reserved_nodes_offerings/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_reserved_nodes_offerings(
  ReservedNodesOfferingId = NULL,
  NodeType = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  OfferingType = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedNodesOfferingId

The offering identifier filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier.

NodeType

The node type for the reserved nodes. For more information, see Supported node types.

Duration

Duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Use this parameter to show only reservations for a given duration.

OfferingType

The offering type filter value. Use this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type. Valid values: "All Upfront"|"Partial Upfront"| "No Upfront"

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional marker returned from a prior request. Use this marker for pagination of results from this operation. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns details of the service updates

Description

Returns details of the service updates.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_service_updates/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_service_updates(
  ServiceUpdateName = NULL,
  ClusterNames = NULL,
  Status = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ServiceUpdateName

The unique ID of the service update to describe.

ClusterNames

The list of cluster names to identify service updates to apply.

Status

The status(es) of the service updates to filter on.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.


Returns information about cluster snapshots

Description

Returns information about cluster snapshots. By default, DescribeSnapshots lists all of your snapshots; it can optionally describe a single snapshot, or just the snapshots associated with a particular cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_snapshots(
  ClusterName = NULL,
  SnapshotName = NULL,
  Source = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  ShowDetail = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

A user-supplied cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, only snapshots associated with that specific cluster are described.

SnapshotName

A user-supplied name of the snapshot. If this parameter is specified, only this named snapshot is described.

Source

If set to system, the output shows snapshots that were automatically created by MemoryDB. If set to user the output shows snapshots that were manually created. If omitted, the output shows both automatically and manually created snapshots.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

ShowDetail

A Boolean value which if true, the shard configuration is included in the snapshot description.


Returns a list of subnet group descriptions

Description

Returns a list of subnet group descriptions. If a subnet group name is specified, the list contains only the description of that group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_subnet_groups(
  SubnetGroupName = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

SubnetGroupName

The name of the subnet group to return details for.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.


Returns a list of users

Description

Returns a list of users.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_describe_users/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_describe_users(
  UserName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

UserName

The name of the user.

Filters

Filter to determine the list of users to return.

MaxResults

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxResults value, a token is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

NextToken

An optional argument to pass in case the total number of records exceeds the value of MaxResults. If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page. Keep all other arguments unchanged.


Used to failover a shard

Description

Used to failover a shard. This API is designed for testing the behavior of your application in case of MemoryDB failover. It is not designed to be used as a production-level tool for initiating a failover to overcome a problem you may have with the cluster. Moreover, in certain conditions such as large scale operational events, Amazon may block this API.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_failover_shard/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_failover_shard(ClusterName, ShardName)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The cluster being failed over.

ShardName

[required] The name of the shard.


Lists the allowed updates for a multi-Region cluster

Description

Lists the allowed updates for a multi-Region cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_list_allowed_multi_region_cluster_updates/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_list_allowed_multi_region_cluster_updates(MultiRegionClusterName)

Arguments

MultiRegionClusterName

[required] The name of the multi-Region cluster.


Lists all available node types that you can scale to from your cluster's current node type

Description

Lists all available node types that you can scale to from your cluster's current node type. When you use the UpdateCluster operation to scale your cluster, the value of the NodeType parameter must be one of the node types returned by this operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_list_allowed_node_type_updates/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_list_allowed_node_type_updates(ClusterName)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the cluster you want to scale. MemoryDB uses the cluster name to identify the current node type being used by this cluster, and from that to create a list of node types you can scale up to.


Lists all tags currently on a named resource

Description

Lists all tags currently on a named resource. A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive. You can use tags to categorize and track your MemoryDB resources. For more information, see Tagging your MemoryDB resources.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_list_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_list_tags(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource for which you want the list of tags.


Allows you to purchase a reserved node offering

Description

Allows you to purchase a reserved node offering. Reserved nodes are not eligible for cancellation and are non-refundable.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_purchase_reserved_nodes_offering/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_purchase_reserved_nodes_offering(
  ReservedNodesOfferingId,
  ReservationId = NULL,
  NodeCount = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedNodesOfferingId

[required] The ID of the reserved node offering to purchase.

ReservationId

A customer-specified identifier to track this reservation.

NodeCount

The number of node instances to reserve.

Tags

A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Modifies the parameters of a parameter group to the engine or system default value

Description

Modifies the parameters of a parameter group to the engine or system default value. You can reset specific parameters by submitting a list of parameter names. To reset the entire parameter group, specify the AllParameters and ParameterGroupName parameters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_reset_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_reset_parameter_group(
  ParameterGroupName,
  AllParameters = NULL,
  ParameterNames = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group to reset.

AllParameters

If true, all parameters in the parameter group are reset to their default values. If false, only the parameters listed by ParameterNames are reset to their default values.

ParameterNames

An array of parameter names to reset to their default values. If AllParameters is true, do not use ParameterNames. If AllParameters is false, you must specify the name of at least one parameter to reset.


A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive

Description

A tag is a key-value pair where the key and value are case-sensitive. You can use tags to categorize and track all your MemoryDB resources. When you add or remove tags on clusters, those actions will be replicated to all nodes in the cluster. For more information, see Resource-level permissions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which the tags are to be added.

Tags

[required] A list of tags to be added to this resource. A tag is a key-value pair. A tag key must be accompanied by a tag value, although null is accepted.


Use this operation to remove tags on a resource

Description

Use this operation to remove tags on a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to which the tags are to be removed.

TagKeys

[required] The list of keys of the tags that are to be removed.


Changes the list of users that belong to the Access Control List

Description

Changes the list of users that belong to the Access Control List.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_acl/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_update_acl(ACLName, UserNamesToAdd = NULL, UserNamesToRemove = NULL)

Arguments

ACLName

[required] The name of the Access Control List.

UserNamesToAdd

The list of users to add to the Access Control List.

UserNamesToRemove

The list of users to remove from the Access Control List.


Modifies the settings for a cluster

Description

Modifies the settings for a cluster. You can use this operation to change one or more cluster configuration settings by specifying the settings and the new values.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_update_cluster(
  ClusterName,
  Description = NULL,
  SecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  MaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  SnsTopicArn = NULL,
  SnsTopicStatus = NULL,
  ParameterGroupName = NULL,
  SnapshotWindow = NULL,
  SnapshotRetentionLimit = NULL,
  NodeType = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  ReplicaConfiguration = NULL,
  ShardConfiguration = NULL,
  ACLName = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterName

[required] The name of the cluster to update.

Description

The description of the cluster to update.

SecurityGroupIds

The SecurityGroupIds to update.

MaintenanceWindow

Specifies the weekly time range during which maintenance on the cluster is performed. It is specified as a range in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi (24H Clock UTC). The minimum maintenance window is a 60 minute period.

Valid values for ddd are:

  • sun

  • mon

  • tue

  • wed

  • thu

  • fri

  • sat

Example: sun:23:00-mon:01:30

SnsTopicArn

The SNS topic ARN to update.

SnsTopicStatus

The status of the Amazon SNS notification topic. Notifications are sent only if the status is active.

ParameterGroupName

The name of the parameter group to update.

SnapshotWindow

The daily time range (in UTC) during which MemoryDB begins taking a daily snapshot of your cluster.

SnapshotRetentionLimit

The number of days for which MemoryDB retains automatic cluster snapshots before deleting them. For example, if you set SnapshotRetentionLimit to 5, a snapshot that was taken today is retained for 5 days before being deleted.

NodeType

A valid node type that you want to scale this cluster up or down to.

Engine

The name of the engine to be used for the cluster.

EngineVersion

The upgraded version of the engine to be run on the nodes. You can upgrade to a newer engine version, but you cannot downgrade to an earlier engine version. If you want to use an earlier engine version, you must delete the existing cluster and create it anew with the earlier engine version.

ReplicaConfiguration

The number of replicas that will reside in each shard.

ShardConfiguration

The number of shards in the cluster.

ACLName

The Access Control List that is associated with the cluster.


Updates the configuration of an existing multi-Region cluster

Description

Updates the configuration of an existing multi-Region cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_multi_region_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_update_multi_region_cluster(
  MultiRegionClusterName,
  NodeType = NULL,
  Description = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  ShardConfiguration = NULL,
  MultiRegionParameterGroupName = NULL,
  UpdateStrategy = NULL
)

Arguments

MultiRegionClusterName

[required] The name of the multi-Region cluster to be updated.

NodeType

The new node type to be used for the multi-Region cluster.

Description

A new description for the multi-Region cluster.

EngineVersion

The new engine version to be used for the multi-Region cluster.

ShardConfiguration
MultiRegionParameterGroupName

The new multi-Region parameter group to be associated with the cluster.

UpdateStrategy

Whether to force the update even if it may cause data loss.


Updates the parameters of a parameter group

Description

Updates the parameters of a parameter group. You can modify up to 20 parameters in a single request by submitting a list parameter name and value pairs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_update_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName, ParameterNameValues)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group to update.

ParameterNameValues

[required] An array of parameter names and values for the parameter update. You must supply at least one parameter name and value; subsequent arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters may be updated per request.


Updates a subnet group

Description

Updates a subnet group. For more information, see Updating a subnet group

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_update_subnet_group(
  SubnetGroupName,
  Description = NULL,
  SubnetIds = NULL
)

Arguments

SubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the subnet group

Description

A description of the subnet group

SubnetIds

The EC2 subnet IDs for the subnet group.


Changes user password(s) and/or access string

Description

Changes user password(s) and/or access string.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/memorydb_update_user/ for full documentation.

Usage

memorydb_update_user(UserName, AuthenticationMode = NULL, AccessString = NULL)

Arguments

UserName

[required] The name of the user

AuthenticationMode

Denotes the user's authentication properties, such as whether it requires a password to authenticate.

AccessString

Access permissions string used for this user.


Amazon Neptune

Description

Amazon Neptune is a fast, reliable, fully-managed graph database service that makes it easy to build and run applications that work with highly connected datasets. The core of Amazon Neptune is a purpose-built, high-performance graph database engine optimized for storing billions of relationships and querying the graph with milliseconds latency. Amazon Neptune supports popular graph models Property Graph and W3C's RDF, and their respective query languages Apache TinkerPop Gremlin and SPARQL, allowing you to easily build queries that efficiently navigate highly connected datasets. Neptune powers graph use cases such as recommendation engines, fraud detection, knowledge graphs, drug discovery, and network security.

This interface reference for Amazon Neptune contains documentation for a programming or command line interface you can use to manage Amazon Neptune. Note that Amazon Neptune is asynchronous, which means that some interfaces might require techniques such as polling or callback functions to determine when a command has been applied. In this reference, the parameter descriptions indicate whether a command is applied immediately, on the next instance reboot, or during the maintenance window. The reference structure is as follows, and we list following some related topics from the user guide.

Usage

neptune(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- neptune(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

add_role_to_db_cluster Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with an Neptune DB cluster
add_source_identifier_to_subscription Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription
add_tags_to_resource Adds metadata tags to an Amazon Neptune resource
apply_pending_maintenance_action Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance)
copy_db_cluster_parameter_group Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group
copy_db_cluster_snapshot Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster
copy_db_parameter_group Copies the specified DB parameter group
create_db_cluster Creates a new Amazon Neptune DB cluster
create_db_cluster_endpoint Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
create_db_cluster_parameter_group Creates a new DB cluster parameter group
create_db_cluster_snapshot Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster
create_db_instance Creates a new DB instance
create_db_parameter_group Creates a new DB parameter group
create_db_subnet_group Creates a new DB subnet group
create_event_subscription Creates an event notification subscription
create_global_cluster Creates a Neptune global database spread across multiple Amazon Regions
delete_db_cluster The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster
delete_db_cluster_endpoint Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
delete_db_cluster_parameter_group Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group
delete_db_cluster_snapshot Deletes a DB cluster snapshot
delete_db_instance The DeleteDBInstance action deletes a previously provisioned DB instance
delete_db_parameter_group Deletes a specified DBParameterGroup
delete_db_subnet_group Deletes a DB subnet group
delete_event_subscription Deletes an event notification subscription
delete_global_cluster Deletes a global database
describe_db_cluster_endpoints Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions
describe_db_cluster_parameters Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group
describe_db_clusters Returns information about provisioned DB clusters, and supports pagination
describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot
describe_db_cluster_snapshots Returns information about DB cluster snapshots
describe_db_engine_versions Returns a list of the available DB engines
describe_db_instances Returns information about provisioned instances, and supports pagination
describe_db_parameter_groups Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions
describe_db_parameters Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group
describe_db_subnet_groups Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions
describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine
describe_engine_default_parameters Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine
describe_event_categories Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type
describe_events Returns events related to DB instances, DB security groups, DB snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days
describe_event_subscriptions Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account
describe_global_clusters Returns information about Neptune global database clusters
describe_orderable_db_instance_options Returns a list of orderable DB instance options for the specified engine
describe_pending_maintenance_actions Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action
describe_valid_db_instance_modifications You can call DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance
failover_db_cluster Forces a failover for a DB cluster
failover_global_cluster Initiates the failover process for a Neptune global database
list_tags_for_resource Lists all tags on an Amazon Neptune resource
modify_db_cluster Modify a setting for a DB cluster
modify_db_cluster_endpoint Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Neptune DB cluster
modify_db_cluster_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group
modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot
modify_db_instance Modifies settings for a DB instance
modify_db_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group
modify_db_subnet_group Modifies an existing DB subnet group
modify_event_subscription Modifies an existing event notification subscription
modify_global_cluster Modify a setting for an Amazon Neptune global cluster
promote_read_replica_db_cluster Not supported
reboot_db_instance You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons
remove_from_global_cluster Detaches a Neptune DB cluster from a Neptune global database
remove_role_from_db_cluster Disassociates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster
remove_source_identifier_from_subscription Removes a source identifier from an existing event notification subscription
remove_tags_from_resource Removes metadata tags from an Amazon Neptune resource
reset_db_cluster_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value
reset_db_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value
restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot
restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time
start_db_cluster Starts an Amazon Neptune DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon console, the Amazon CLI stop-db-cluster command, or the StopDBCluster API
stop_db_cluster Stops an Amazon Neptune DB cluster

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- neptune()
svc$add_role_to_db_cluster(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with an Neptune DB cluster

Description

Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with an Neptune DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_add_role_to_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_add_role_to_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  RoleArn,
  FeatureName = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB cluster to associate the IAM role with.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the Neptune DB cluster, for example ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/NeptuneAccessRole⁠.

FeatureName

The name of the feature for the Neptune DB cluster that the IAM role is to be associated with. For the list of supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.


Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription

Description

Adds a source identifier to an existing event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_add_source_identifier_to_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SourceIdentifier
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the event notification subscription you want to add a source identifier to.

SourceIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the event source to be added.

Constraints:

  • If the source type is a DB instance, then a DBInstanceIdentifier must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB security group, a DBSecurityGroupName must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier must be supplied.


Adds metadata tags to an Amazon Neptune resource

Description

Adds metadata tags to an Amazon Neptune resource. These tags can also be used with cost allocation reporting to track cost associated with Amazon Neptune resources, or used in a Condition statement in an IAM policy for Amazon Neptune.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceName, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon Neptune resource that the tags are added to. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Tags

[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon Neptune resource.


Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance)

Description

Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_apply_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_apply_pending_maintenance_action(
  ResourceIdentifier,
  ApplyAction,
  OptInType
)

Arguments

ResourceIdentifier

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that the pending maintenance action applies to. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

ApplyAction

[required] The pending maintenance action to apply to this resource.

Valid values: system-update, db-upgrade

OptInType

[required] A value that specifies the type of opt-in request, or undoes an opt-in request. An opt-in request of type immediate can't be undone.

Valid values:

  • immediate - Apply the maintenance action immediately.

  • next-maintenance - Apply the maintenance action during the next maintenance window for the resource.

  • ⁠undo-opt-in⁠ - Cancel any existing next-maintenance opt-in requests.


Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group

Description

Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the source DB cluster parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid DB cluster parameter group.

  • If the source DB cluster parameter group is in the same Amazon Region as the copy, specify a valid DB parameter group identifier, for example my-db-cluster-param-group, or a valid ARN.

  • If the source DB parameter group is in a different Amazon Region than the copy, specify a valid DB cluster parameter group ARN, for example arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:cluster-pg:custom-cluster-group1.

TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the copied DB cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Cannot be null, empty, or blank

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-cluster-param-group1

TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription

[required] A description for the copied DB cluster parameter group.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the copied DB cluster parameter group.


Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster

Description

Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_copy_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_copy_db_cluster_snapshot(
  SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL,
  CopyTags = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to copy. This parameter is not case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid system snapshot in the "available" state.

  • Specify a valid DB snapshot identifier.

Example: my-cluster-snapshot1

TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot to create from the source DB cluster snapshot. This parameter is not case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster-snapshot2

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Amazon KMS key ID for an encrypted DB cluster snapshot. The KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), KMS key identifier, or the KMS key alias for the KMS encryption key.

If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from your Amazon account, you can specify a value for KmsKeyId to encrypt the copy with a new KMS encryption key. If you don't specify a value for KmsKeyId, then the copy of the DB cluster snapshot is encrypted with the same KMS key as the source DB cluster snapshot.

If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot that is shared from another Amazon account, then you must specify a value for KmsKeyId.

KMS encryption keys are specific to the Amazon Region that they are created in, and you can't use encryption keys from one Amazon Region in another Amazon Region.

You cannot encrypt an unencrypted DB cluster snapshot when you copy it. If you try to copy an unencrypted DB cluster snapshot and specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, an error is returned.

PreSignedUrl

Not currently supported.

CopyTags

True to copy all tags from the source DB cluster snapshot to the target DB cluster snapshot, and otherwise false. The default is false.

Tags

The tags to assign to the new DB cluster snapshot copy.


Copies the specified DB parameter group

Description

Copies the specified DB parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_copy_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_copy_db_parameter_group(
  SourceDBParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBParameterGroupDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier or ARN for the source DB parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid DB parameter group.

  • Must specify a valid DB parameter group identifier, for example my-db-param-group, or a valid ARN.

TargetDBParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the copied DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Cannot be null, empty, or blank.

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-db-parameter-group

TargetDBParameterGroupDescription

[required] A description for the copied DB parameter group.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the copied DB parameter group.


Creates a new Amazon Neptune DB cluster

Description

Creates a new Amazon Neptune DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_db_cluster(
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  CharacterSetName = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MasterUsername = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  ReplicationSourceIdentifier = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL
)

Arguments

AvailabilityZones

A list of EC2 Availability Zones that instances in the DB cluster can be created in.

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1.

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 1 to 35

CharacterSetName

(Not supported by Neptune)

CopyTagsToSnapshot

If set to true, tags are copied to any snapshot of the DB cluster that is created.

DatabaseName

The name for your database of up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. If you do not provide a name, Amazon Neptune will not create a database in the DB cluster you are creating.

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster1

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default is used.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster.

DBSubnetGroupName

A DB subnet group to associate with this DB cluster.

Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.

Example: mySubnetgroup

Engine

[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this DB cluster.

Valid Values: neptune

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to use for the new DB cluster.

Example: ⁠1.0.2.1⁠

Port

The port number on which the instances in the DB cluster accept connections.

Default: 8182

MasterUsername

Not supported by Neptune.

MasterUserPassword

Not supported by Neptune.

OptionGroupName

(Not supported by Neptune)

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region. To see the time blocks available, see Neptune Maintenance Window in the Amazon Neptune User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Neptune Maintenance Window in the Amazon Neptune User Guide.

Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

ReplicationSourceIdentifier

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance or DB cluster if this DB cluster is created as a Read Replica.

Tags

The tags to assign to the new DB cluster.

StorageEncrypted

Specifies whether the DB cluster is encrypted.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a DB cluster with the same Amazon account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new DB cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key.

If an encryption key is not specified in KmsKeyId:

  • If ReplicationSourceIdentifier identifies an encrypted source, then Amazon Neptune will use the encryption key used to encrypt the source. Otherwise, Amazon Neptune will use your default encryption key.

  • If the StorageEncrypted parameter is true and ReplicationSourceIdentifier is not specified, then Amazon Neptune will use your default encryption key.

Amazon KMS creates the default encryption key for your Amazon account. Your Amazon account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Region.

If you create a Read Replica of an encrypted DB cluster in another Amazon Region, you must set KmsKeyId to a KMS key ID that is valid in the destination Amazon Region. This key is used to encrypt the Read Replica in that Amazon Region.

PreSignedUrl

This parameter is not currently supported.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

If set to true, enables Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) authentication for the entire DB cluster (this cannot be set at an instance level).

Default: false.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

A list of the log types that this DB cluster should export to CloudWatch Logs. Valid log types are: audit (to publish audit logs) and slowquery (to publish slow-query logs). See Publishing Neptune logs to Amazon CloudWatch logs.

DeletionProtection

A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is enabled.

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration

Contains the scaling configuration of a Neptune Serverless DB cluster.

For more information, see Using Amazon Neptune Serverless in the Amazon Neptune User Guide.

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The ID of the Neptune global database to which this new DB cluster should be added.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB cluster.

Valid Values:

  • standard | iopt1

Default:

  • standard

When you create a Neptune cluster with the storage type set to iopt1, the storage type is returned in the response. The storage type isn't returned when you set it to standard.


Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Neptune DB cluster

Description

Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Neptune DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_db_cluster_endpoint(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  DBClusterEndpointIdentifier,
  EndpointType,
  StaticMembers = NULL,
  ExcludedMembers = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

DBClusterEndpointIdentifier

[required] The identifier to use for the new endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

EndpointType

[required] The type of the endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, ANY.

StaticMembers

List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.

ExcludedMembers

List of DB instance identifiers that aren't part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the Amazon Neptune resource.


Creates a new DB cluster parameter group

Description

Creates a new DB cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

This value is stored as a lowercase string.

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The DB cluster parameter group family name. A DB cluster parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB cluster parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB cluster running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB cluster parameter group family.

Description

[required] The description for the DB cluster parameter group.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the new DB cluster parameter group.


Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster

Description

Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_db_cluster_snapshot(
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster1-snapshot1

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster to create a snapshot for. This parameter is not case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

Example: my-cluster1

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the DB cluster snapshot.


Creates a new DB instance

Description

Creates a new DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_db_instance(
  DBName = NULL,
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass,
  Engine,
  MasterUsername = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  CharacterSetName = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  StorageType = NULL,
  TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
  TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  PromotionTier = NULL,
  Timezone = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL
)

Arguments

DBName

Not supported.

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: mydbinstance

AllocatedStorage

Not supported by Neptune.

DBInstanceClass

[required] The compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example, db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Regions.

Engine

[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this instance.

Valid Values: neptune

MasterUsername

Not supported by Neptune.

MasterUserPassword

Not supported by Neptune.

DBSecurityGroups

A list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance.

Default: The default DB security group for the database engine.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.

Not applicable. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster.

Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC.

AvailabilityZone

The EC2 Availability Zone that the DB instance is created in

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Region.

Example: ⁠us-east-1d⁠

Constraint: The AvailabilityZone parameter can't be specified if the MultiAZ parameter is set to true. The specified Availability Zone must be in the same Amazon Region as the current endpoint.

DBSubnetGroupName

A DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance.

If there is no DB subnet group, then it is a non-VPC DB instance.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region, occurring on a random day of the week.

Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

DBParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If this argument is omitted, the default DBParameterGroup for the specified engine is used.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained.

Not applicable. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster.

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 0 to 35

  • Cannot be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to Read Replicas

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created.

Not applicable. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster.

Port

The port number on which the database accepts connections.

Not applicable. The port is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster.

Default: 8182

Type: Integer

MultiAZ

Specifies if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. You can't set the AvailabilityZone parameter if the MultiAZ parameter is set to true.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to use. Currently, setting this parameter has no effect.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Indicates that minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window.

Default: true

LicenseModel

License model information for this DB instance.

Valid values: license-included | bring-your-own-license | general-public-license

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for the DB instance.

OptionGroupName

(Not supported by Neptune)

CharacterSetName

(Not supported by Neptune)

PubliclyAccessible

This flag should no longer be used.

Tags

The tags to assign to the new instance.

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster that the instance will belong to.

For information on creating a DB cluster, see create_db_cluster.

Type: String

StorageType

Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.

Not applicable. Storage is managed by the DB Cluster.

TdeCredentialArn

The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.

TdeCredentialPassword

The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.

StorageEncrypted

Specifies whether the DB instance is encrypted.

Not applicable. The encryption for DB instances is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster.

Default: false

KmsKeyId

The Amazon KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are creating a DB instance with the same Amazon account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new DB instance, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KM encryption key.

Not applicable. The KMS key identifier is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster.

If the StorageEncrypted parameter is true, and you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then Amazon Neptune will use your default encryption key. Amazon KMS creates the default encryption key for your Amazon account. Your Amazon account has a different default encryption key for each Amazon Region.

Domain

Specify the Active Directory Domain to create the instance in.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

True to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance, and otherwise false. The default is false.

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, then you must also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

Valid Values: ⁠0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60⁠

MonitoringRoleArn

The ARN for the IAM role that permits Neptune to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

DomainIAMRoleName

Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.

PromotionTier

A value that specifies the order in which an Read Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance.

Default: 1

Valid Values: 0 - 15

Timezone

The time zone of the DB instance.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Not supported by Neptune (ignored).

EnablePerformanceInsights

(Not supported by Neptune)

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

(Not supported by Neptune)

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to CloudWatch Logs.

DeletionProtection

A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled. See Deleting a DB Instance.

DB instances in a DB cluster can be deleted even when deletion protection is enabled in their parent DB cluster.


Creates a new DB parameter group

Description

Creates a new DB parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_db_parameter_group(
  DBParameterGroupName,
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

This value is stored as a lowercase string.

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The DB parameter group family name. A DB parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB instance running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB parameter group family.

Description

[required] The description for the DB parameter group.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the new DB parameter group.


Creates a new DB subnet group

Description

Creates a new DB subnet group. DB subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two AZs in the Amazon Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_db_subnet_group(
  DBSubnetGroupName,
  DBSubnetGroupDescription,
  SubnetIds,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints: Must contain no more than 255 letters, numbers, periods, underscores, spaces, or hyphens. Must not be default.

Example: mySubnetgroup

DBSubnetGroupDescription

[required] The description for the DB subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] The EC2 Subnet IDs for the DB subnet group.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the new DB subnet group.


Creates an event notification subscription

Description

Creates an event notification subscription. This action requires a topic ARN (Amazon Resource Name) created by either the Neptune console, the SNS console, or the SNS API. To obtain an ARN with SNS, you must create a topic in Amazon SNS and subscribe to the topic. The ARN is displayed in the SNS console.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_event_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SnsTopicArn,
  SourceType = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  SourceIds = NULL,
  Enabled = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the subscription.

Constraints: The name must be less than 255 characters.

SnsTopicArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it.

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you would set this parameter to db-instance. if this value is not specified, all events are returned.

Valid values: db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot

EventCategories

A list of event categories for a SourceType that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given SourceType by using the DescribeEventCategories action.

SourceIds

The list of identifiers of the event sources for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Constraints:

  • If SourceIds are supplied, SourceType must also be provided.

  • If the source type is a DB instance, then a DBInstanceIdentifier must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB security group, a DBSecurityGroupName must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier must be supplied.

Enabled

A Boolean value; set to true to activate the subscription, set to false to create the subscription but not active it.

Tags

The tags to be applied to the new event subscription.


Creates a Neptune global database spread across multiple Amazon Regions

Description

Creates a Neptune global database spread across multiple Amazon Regions. The global database contains a single primary cluster with read-write capability, and read-only secondary clusters that receive data from the primary cluster through high-speed replication performed by the Neptune storage subsystem.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_create_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_create_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the new global database cluster.

SourceDBClusterIdentifier

(Optional) The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an existing Neptune DB cluster to use as the primary cluster of the new global database.

Engine

The name of the database engine to be used in the global database.

Valid values: neptune

EngineVersion

The Neptune engine version to be used by the global database.

Valid values: ⁠1.2.0.0⁠ or above.

DeletionProtection

The deletion protection setting for the new global database. The global database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.

StorageEncrypted

The storage encryption setting for the new global database cluster.


The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster

Description

The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster. When you delete a DB cluster, all automated backups for that DB cluster are deleted and can't be recovered. Manual DB cluster snapshots of the specified DB cluster are not deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
  FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster to be deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.

SkipFinalSnapshot

Determines whether a final DB cluster snapshot is created before the DB cluster is deleted. If true is specified, no DB cluster snapshot is created. If false is specified, a DB cluster snapshot is created before the DB cluster is deleted.

You must specify a FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter if SkipFinalSnapshot is false.

Default: false

FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier

The DB cluster snapshot identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot created when SkipFinalSnapshot is set to false.

Specifying this parameter and also setting the SkipFinalShapshot parameter to true results in an error.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens


Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Neptune DB cluster

Description

Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Neptune DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_db_cluster_endpoint(DBClusterEndpointIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterEndpointIdentifier

[required] The identifier associated with the custom endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.


Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group

Description

Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group. The DB cluster parameter group to be deleted can't be associated with any DB clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(DBClusterParameterGroupName)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must be the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.

  • You can't delete a default DB cluster parameter group.

  • Cannot be associated with any DB clusters.


Deletes a DB cluster snapshot

Description

Deletes a DB cluster snapshot. If the snapshot is being copied, the copy operation is terminated.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_db_cluster_snapshot(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to delete.

Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB cluster snapshot in the available state.


The DeleteDBInstance action deletes a previously provisioned DB instance

Description

The DeleteDBInstance action deletes a previously provisioned DB instance. When you delete a DB instance, all automated backups for that instance are deleted and can't be recovered. Manual DB snapshots of the DB instance to be deleted by delete_db_instance are not deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_db_instance(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
  FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier for the DB instance to be deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the name of an existing DB instance.

SkipFinalSnapshot

Determines whether a final DB snapshot is created before the DB instance is deleted. If true is specified, no DBSnapshot is created. If false is specified, a DB snapshot is created before the DB instance is deleted.

Note that when a DB instance is in a failure state and has a status of 'failed', 'incompatible-restore', or 'incompatible-network', it can only be deleted when the SkipFinalSnapshot parameter is set to "true".

Specify true when deleting a Read Replica.

The FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter must be specified if SkipFinalSnapshot is false.

Default: false

FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier

The DBSnapshotIdentifier of the new DBSnapshot created when SkipFinalSnapshot is set to false.

Specifying this parameter and also setting the SkipFinalShapshot parameter to true results in an error.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters or numbers.

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

  • Cannot be specified when deleting a Read Replica.


Deletes a specified DBParameterGroup

Description

Deletes a specified DBParameterGroup. The DBParameterGroup to be deleted can't be associated with any DB instances.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_db_parameter_group(DBParameterGroupName)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must be the name of an existing DB parameter group

  • You can't delete a default DB parameter group

  • Cannot be associated with any DB instances


Deletes a DB subnet group

Description

Deletes a DB subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_db_subnet_group(DBSubnetGroupName)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the database subnet group to delete.

You can't delete the default subnet group.

Constraints:

Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.

Example: mySubnetgroup


Deletes an event notification subscription

Description

Deletes an event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_event_subscription(SubscriptionName)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the event notification subscription you want to delete.


Deletes a global database

Description

Deletes a global database. The primary and all secondary clusters must already be detached or deleted first.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_delete_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_delete_global_cluster(GlobalClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the global database cluster being deleted.


Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Neptune DB cluster

Description

Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Neptune DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_cluster_endpoints(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DBClusterEndpointIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

DBClusterEndpointIdentifier

The identifier of the endpoint to describe. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Filters

A set of name-value pairs that define which endpoints to include in the output. The filters are specified as name-value pairs, in the format ⁠Name=endpoint_type,Values=endpoint_type1,endpoint_type2,...⁠. Name can be one of: db-cluster-endpoint-type, db-cluster-endpoint-custom-type, db-cluster-endpoint-id, db-cluster-endpoint-status. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-type filter can be one or more of: reader, writer, custom. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-custom-type filter can be one or more of: reader, any. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-status filter can be one or more of: available, creating, deleting, inactive, modifying.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_endpoints request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions. If a DBClusterParameterGroupName parameter is specified, the list will contain only the description of the specified DB cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group

Description

Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_cluster_parameters(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  Source = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return parameter details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

Source

A value that indicates to return only parameters for a specific source. Parameter sources can be engine, service, or customer.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_parameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot

Description

Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to describe the attributes for.


Returns information about DB cluster snapshots

Description

Returns information about DB cluster snapshots. This API action supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_cluster_snapshots(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotType = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  IncludeShared = NULL,
  IncludePublic = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

The ID of the DB cluster to retrieve the list of DB cluster snapshots for. This parameter can't be used in conjunction with the DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier parameter. This parameter is not case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

A specific DB cluster snapshot identifier to describe. This parameter can't be used in conjunction with the DBClusterIdentifier parameter. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBClusterSnapshot.

  • If this identifier is for an automated snapshot, the SnapshotType parameter must also be specified.

SnapshotType

The type of DB cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:

  • automated - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon Neptune for my Amazon account.

  • manual - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon account.

  • shared - Return all manual DB cluster snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon account.

  • public - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been marked as public.

If you don't specify a SnapshotType value, then both automated and manual DB cluster snapshots are returned. You can include shared DB cluster snapshots with these results by setting the IncludeShared parameter to true. You can include public DB cluster snapshots with these results by setting the IncludePublic parameter to true.

The IncludeShared and IncludePublic parameters don't apply for SnapshotType values of manual or automated. The IncludePublic parameter doesn't apply when SnapshotType is set to shared. The IncludeShared parameter doesn't apply when SnapshotType is set to public.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_snapshots request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

IncludeShared

True to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon accounts that this Amazon account has been given permission to copy or restore, and otherwise false. The default is false.

You can give an Amazon account permission to restore a manual DB cluster snapshot from another Amazon account by the modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute API action.

IncludePublic

True to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon account, and otherwise false. The default is false. The default is false.

You can share a manual DB cluster snapshot as public by using the modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute API action.


Returns information about provisioned DB clusters, and supports pagination

Description

Returns information about provisioned DB clusters, and supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_clusters(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe.

Supported filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list will only include information about the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.

  • engine - Accepts an engine name (such as neptune), and restricts the results list to DB clusters created by that engine.

For example, to invoke this API from the Amazon CLI and filter so that only Neptune DB clusters are returned, you could use the following command:

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_clusters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of the available DB engines

Description

Returns a list of the available DB engines.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_engine_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_engine_versions(
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  DefaultOnly = NULL,
  ListSupportedCharacterSets = NULL,
  ListSupportedTimezones = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

The database engine to return.

EngineVersion

The database engine version to return.

Example: ⁠5.1.49⁠

DBParameterGroupFamily

The name of a specific DB parameter group family to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match an existing DBParameterGroupFamily.

Filters

Not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the MaxRecords value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the following results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

DefaultOnly

Indicates that only the default version of the specified engine or engine and major version combination is returned.

ListSupportedCharacterSets

If this parameter is specified and the requested engine supports the CharacterSetName parameter for create_db_instance, the response includes a list of supported character sets for each engine version.

ListSupportedTimezones

If this parameter is specified and the requested engine supports the TimeZone parameter for create_db_instance, the response includes a list of supported time zones for each engine version.


Returns information about provisioned instances, and supports pagination

Description

Returns information about provisioned instances, and supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_instances/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_instances(
  DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

The user-supplied instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB instance is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB instances to describe.

Supported filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list will only include information about the DB instances associated with the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.

  • engine - Accepts an engine name (such as neptune), and restricts the results list to DB instances created by that engine.

For example, to invoke this API from the Amazon CLI and filter so that only Neptune DB instances are returned, you could use the following command:

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_instances request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions. If a DBParameterGroupName is specified, the list will contain only the description of the specified DB parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_parameter_groups(
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_parameter_groups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group

Description

Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_parameters(
  DBParameterGroupName,
  Source = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.

Source

The parameter types to return.

Default: All parameter types returned

Valid Values: user | system | engine-default

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_parameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions. If a DBSubnetGroupName is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions of the specified DBSubnetGroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_db_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_db_subnet_groups(
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

The name of the DB subnet group to return details for.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBSubnetGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine

Description

Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group family to return engine parameter information for.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine

Description

Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_engine_default_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_engine_default_parameters(
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The name of the DB parameter group family.

Filters

Not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_engine_default_parameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type

Description

Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_event_categories/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_event_categories(SourceType = NULL, Filters = NULL)

Arguments

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events.

Valid values: db-instance | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.


Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account

Description

Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account. The description for a subscription includes SubscriptionName, SNSTopicARN, CustomerID, SourceType, SourceID, CreationTime, and Status.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_event_subscriptions(
  SubscriptionName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

The name of the event notification subscription you want to describe.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords .


Returns events related to DB instances, DB security groups, DB snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days

Description

Returns events related to DB instances, DB security groups, DB snapshots, and DB parameter groups for the past 14 days. Events specific to a particular DB instance, DB security group, database snapshot, or DB parameter group can be obtained by providing the name as a parameter. By default, the past hour of events are returned.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_events/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_events(
  SourceIdentifier = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceIdentifier

The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response.

Constraints:

  • If SourceIdentifier is supplied, SourceType must also be provided.

  • If the source type is DBInstance, then a DBInstanceIdentifier must be supplied.

  • If the source type is DBSecurityGroup, a DBSecurityGroupName must be supplied.

  • If the source type is DBParameterGroup, a DBParameterGroupName must be supplied.

  • If the source type is DBSnapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier must be supplied.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

SourceType

The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.

StartTime

The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z

EndTime

The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z

Duration

The number of minutes to retrieve events for.

Default: 60

EventCategories

A list of event categories that trigger notifications for a event notification subscription.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeEvents request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about Neptune global database clusters

Description

Returns information about Neptune global database clusters. This API supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_global_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_global_clusters(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, only information about the specified DB cluster is returned. This parameter is not case-sensitive.

Constraints: If supplied, must match an existing DB cluster identifier.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination marker token is included in the response that you can use to retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

(Optional) A pagination token returned by a previous call to describe_global_clusters. If this parameter is specified, the response will only include records beyond the marker, up to the number specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of orderable DB instance options for the specified engine

Description

Returns a list of orderable DB instance options for the specified engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_orderable_db_instance_options/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  Vpc = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

[required] The name of the engine to retrieve DB instance options for.

EngineVersion

The engine version filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified engine version.

DBInstanceClass

The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified DB instance class.

LicenseModel

The license model filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified license model.

Vpc

The VPC filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available VPC or non-VPC offerings.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords .


Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action

Description

Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_pending_maintenance_actions/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
  ResourceIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceIdentifier

The ARN of a resource to return pending maintenance actions for.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more resources to return pending maintenance actions for.

Supported filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list will only include pending maintenance actions for the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.

  • db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance ARNs. The results list will only include pending maintenance actions for the DB instances identified by these ARNs.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_pending_maintenance_actions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to a number of records specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.


You can call DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance

Description

You can call describe_valid_db_instance_modifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance. You can use this information when you call modify_db_instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_describe_valid_db_instance_modifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_describe_valid_db_instance_modifications(DBInstanceIdentifier)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The customer identifier or the ARN of your DB instance.


Forces a failover for a DB cluster

Description

Forces a failover for a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_failover_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_failover_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  TargetDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

A DB cluster identifier to force a failover for. This parameter is not case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

TargetDBInstanceIdentifier

The name of the instance to promote to the primary instance.

You must specify the instance identifier for an Read Replica in the DB cluster. For example, mydbcluster-replica1.


Initiates the failover process for a Neptune global database

Description

Initiates the failover process for a Neptune global database.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_failover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_failover_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  TargetDbClusterIdentifier
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] Identifier of the Neptune global database that should be failed over. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the Neptune global database was created. In other words, it's the name of the global database that you want to fail over.

Constraints: Must match the identifier of an existing Neptune global database.

TargetDbClusterIdentifier

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the secondary Neptune DB cluster that you want to promote to primary for the global database.


Lists all tags on an Amazon Neptune resource

Description

Lists all tags on an Amazon Neptune resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceName, Filters = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon Neptune resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.


Modify a setting for a DB cluster

Description

Modify a setting for a DB cluster. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  NewDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  DBInstanceParameterGroupName = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter is not case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

NewDBClusterIdentifier

The new DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster when renaming a DB cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • The first character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-cluster2

ApplyImmediately

A value that specifies whether the modifications in this request and any pending modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the DB cluster. If this parameter is set to false, changes to the DB cluster are applied during the next maintenance window.

The ApplyImmediately parameter only affects NewDBClusterIdentifier values. If you set the ApplyImmediately parameter value to false, then changes to NewDBClusterIdentifier values are applied during the next maintenance window. All other changes are applied immediately, regardless of the value of the ApplyImmediately parameter.

Default: false

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1.

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 1 to 35

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to use for the DB cluster.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of VPC security groups that the DB cluster will belong to.

Port

The port number on which the DB cluster accepts connections.

Constraints: Value must be 1150-65535

Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.

MasterUserPassword

Not supported by Neptune.

OptionGroupName

Not supported by Neptune.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Region, occurring on a random day of the week.

Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

True to enable mapping of Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts, and otherwise false.

Default: false

CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration

The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB cluster. See Using the CLI to publish Neptune audit logs to CloudWatch Logs.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade. Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is set to true.

For a list of valid engine versions, see Engine Releases for Amazon Neptune, or call describe_db_engine_versions.

AllowMajorVersionUpgrade

A value that indicates whether upgrades between different major versions are allowed.

Constraints: You must set the allow-major-version-upgrade flag when providing an EngineVersion parameter that uses a different major version than the DB cluster's current version.

DBInstanceParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to apply to all instances of the DB cluster.

When you apply a parameter group using DBInstanceParameterGroupName, parameter changes aren't applied during the next maintenance window but instead are applied immediately.

Default: The existing name setting

Constraints:

  • The DB parameter group must be in the same DB parameter group family as the target DB cluster version.

  • The DBInstanceParameterGroupName parameter is only valid in combination with the AllowMajorVersionUpgrade parameter.

DeletionProtection

A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

If set to true, tags are copied to any snapshot of the DB cluster that is created.

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration

Contains the scaling configuration of a Neptune Serverless DB cluster.

For more information, see Using Amazon Neptune Serverless in the Amazon Neptune User Guide.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB cluster.

Valid Values:

  • standard | iopt1

Default:

  • standard


Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Neptune DB cluster

Description

Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Neptune DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_db_cluster_endpoint(
  DBClusterEndpointIdentifier,
  EndpointType = NULL,
  StaticMembers = NULL,
  ExcludedMembers = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterEndpointIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the endpoint to modify. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

EndpointType

The type of the endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, ANY.

StaticMembers

List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.

ExcludedMembers

List of DB instance identifiers that aren't part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.


Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group

Description

Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName, ParameterValue, and ApplyMethod. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  Parameters
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group to modify.

Parameters

[required] A list of parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to modify.


Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot

Description

Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  AttributeName,
  ValuesToAdd = NULL,
  ValuesToRemove = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to modify the attributes for.

AttributeName

[required] The name of the DB cluster snapshot attribute to modify.

To manage authorization for other Amazon accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this value to restore.

ValuesToAdd

A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by AttributeName.

To authorize other Amazon accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon account IDs, or all to make the manual DB cluster snapshot restorable by any Amazon account. Do not add the all value for any manual DB cluster snapshots that contain private information that you don't want available to all Amazon accounts.

ValuesToRemove

A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified by AttributeName.

To remove authorization for other Amazon accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon account identifiers, or all to remove authorization for any Amazon account to copy or restore the DB cluster snapshot. If you specify all, an Amazon account whose account ID is explicitly added to the restore attribute can still copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot.


Modifies settings for a DB instance

Description

Modifies settings for a DB instance. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request. To learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance, call describe_valid_db_instance_modifications before you call modify_db_instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_db_instance(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  NewDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
  TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  DBPortNumber = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  PromotionTier = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

AllocatedStorage

Not supported by Neptune.

DBInstanceClass

The new compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example, db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Regions.

If you modify the DB instance class, an outage occurs during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless ApplyImmediately is specified as true for this request.

Default: Uses existing setting

DBSubnetGroupName

The new DB subnet group for the DB instance. You can use this parameter to move your DB instance to a different VPC.

Changing the subnet group causes an outage during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you specify true for the ApplyImmediately parameter.

Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.

Example: mySubnetGroup

DBSecurityGroups

A list of DB security groups to authorize on this DB instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match existing DBSecurityGroups.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to authorize on this DB instance. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

Not applicable. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match existing VpcSecurityGroupIds.

ApplyImmediately

Specifies whether the modifications in this request and any pending modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the DB instance.

If this parameter is set to false, changes to the DB instance are applied during the next maintenance window. Some parameter changes can cause an outage and are applied on the next call to reboot_db_instance, or the next failure reboot.

Default: false

MasterUserPassword

Not supported by Neptune.

DBParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to apply to the DB instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage. The parameter group name itself is changed immediately, but the actual parameter changes are not applied until you reboot the instance without failover. The db instance will NOT be rebooted automatically and the parameter changes will NOT be applied during the next maintenance window.

Default: Uses existing setting

Constraints: The DB parameter group must be in the same DB parameter group family as this DB instance.

BackupRetentionPeriod

Not applicable. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.

Default: Uses existing setting

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled.

Not applicable. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi

  • Must be in Universal Time Coordinated (UTC)

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window

  • Must be at least 30 minutes

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range (in UTC) during which system maintenance can occur, which might result in an outage. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage, except in the following situation, and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. If there are pending actions that cause a reboot, and the maintenance window is changed to include the current time, then changing this parameter will cause a reboot of the DB instance. If moving this window to the current time, there must be at least 30 minutes between the current time and end of the window to ensure pending changes are applied.

Default: Uses existing setting

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun

Constraints: Must be at least 30 minutes

MultiAZ

Specifies if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is set to true for this request.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to upgrade to. Currently, setting this parameter has no effect. To upgrade your database engine to the most recent release, use the apply_pending_maintenance_action API.

AllowMajorVersionUpgrade

Indicates that major version upgrades are allowed. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Indicates that minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage except in the following case and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. An outage will result if this parameter is set to true during the maintenance window, and a newer minor version is available, and Neptune has enabled auto patching for that engine version.

LicenseModel

Not supported by Neptune.

Iops

The new Provisioned IOPS (I/O operations per second) value for the instance.

Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage and the change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is set to true for this request.

Default: Uses existing setting

OptionGroupName

(Not supported by Neptune)

NewDBInstanceIdentifier

The new DB instance identifier for the DB instance when renaming a DB instance. When you change the DB instance identifier, an instance reboot will occur immediately if you set ⁠Apply Immediately⁠ to true, or will occur during the next maintenance window if ⁠Apply Immediately⁠ to false. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: mydbinstance

StorageType

Not supported.

TdeCredentialArn

The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.

TdeCredentialPassword

The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.

CACertificateIdentifier

Indicates the certificate that needs to be associated with the instance.

Domain

Not supported.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

True to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance, and otherwise false. The default is false.

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, then you must also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

Valid Values: ⁠0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60⁠

DBPortNumber

The port number on which the database accepts connections.

The value of the DBPortNumber parameter must not match any of the port values specified for options in the option group for the DB instance.

Your database will restart when you change the DBPortNumber value regardless of the value of the ApplyImmediately parameter.

Default: 8182

PubliclyAccessible

This flag should no longer be used.

MonitoringRoleArn

The ARN for the IAM role that permits Neptune to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

DomainIAMRoleName

Not supported

PromotionTier

A value that specifies the order in which a Read Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance.

Default: 1

Valid Values: 0 - 15

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

True to enable mapping of Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts, and otherwise false.

You can enable IAM database authentication for the following database engines

Not applicable. Mapping Amazon IAM accounts to database accounts is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.

Default: false

EnablePerformanceInsights

(Not supported by Neptune)

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

(Not supported by Neptune)

CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration

The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB instance or DB cluster.

DeletionProtection

A value that indicates whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled. See Deleting a DB Instance.


Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group

Description

Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName, ParameterValue, and ApplyMethod. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_db_parameter_group(DBParameterGroupName, Parameters)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.

Parameters

[required] An array of parameter names, values, and the apply method for the parameter update. At least one parameter name, value, and apply method must be supplied; subsequent arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

Valid Values (for the application method): immediate | pending-reboot

You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters, and changes are applied when you reboot the DB instance without failover.


Modifies an existing DB subnet group

Description

Modifies an existing DB subnet group. DB subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two AZs in the Amazon Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_db_subnet_group(
  DBSubnetGroupName,
  DBSubnetGroupDescription = NULL,
  SubnetIds
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. You can't modify the default subnet group.

Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.

Example: mySubnetgroup

DBSubnetGroupDescription

The description for the DB subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] The EC2 subnet IDs for the DB subnet group.


Modifies an existing event notification subscription

Description

Modifies an existing event notification subscription. Note that you can't modify the source identifiers using this call; to change source identifiers for a subscription, use the add_source_identifier_to_subscription and remove_source_identifier_from_subscription calls.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_event_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SnsTopicArn = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  Enabled = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the event notification subscription.

SnsTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it.

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you would set this parameter to db-instance. if this value is not specified, all events are returned.

Valid values: db-instance | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot

EventCategories

A list of event categories for a SourceType that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given SourceType by using the DescribeEventCategories action.

Enabled

A Boolean value; set to true to activate the subscription.


Modify a setting for an Amazon Neptune global cluster

Description

Modify a setting for an Amazon Neptune global cluster. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and their new values in the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_modify_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_modify_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  NewGlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier for the global cluster being modified. This parameter is not case-sensitive.

Constraints: Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster.

NewGlobalClusterIdentifier

A new cluster identifier to assign to the global database. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-cluster2

DeletionProtection

Indicates whether the global database has deletion protection enabled. The global database cannot be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade. Changing this parameter will result in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless ApplyImmediately is enabled.

To list all of the available Neptune engine versions, use the following command:

AllowMajorVersionUpgrade

A value that indicates whether major version upgrades are allowed.

Constraints: You must allow major version upgrades if you specify a value for the EngineVersion parameter that is a different major version than the DB cluster's current version.

If you upgrade the major version of a global database, the cluster and DB instance parameter groups are set to the default parameter groups for the new version, so you will need to apply any custom parameter groups after completing the upgrade.


Not supported

Description

Not supported.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_promote_read_replica_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_promote_read_replica_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] Not supported.


You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons

Description

You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain modifications, or if you change the DB parameter group associated with the DB instance, you must reboot the instance for the changes to take effect.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_reboot_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_reboot_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, ForceFailover = NULL)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

ForceFailover

When true, the reboot is conducted through a MultiAZ failover.

Constraint: You can't specify true if the instance is not configured for MultiAZ.


Detaches a Neptune DB cluster from a Neptune global database

Description

Detaches a Neptune DB cluster from a Neptune global database. A secondary cluster becomes a normal standalone cluster with read-write capability instead of being read-only, and no longer receives data from a the primary cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_remove_from_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_remove_from_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  DbClusterIdentifier
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the Neptune global database from which to detach the specified Neptune DB cluster.

DbClusterIdentifier

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifying the cluster to be detached from the Neptune global database cluster.


Disassociates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster

Description

Disassociates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_remove_role_from_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_remove_role_from_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  RoleArn,
  FeatureName = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB cluster to disassociate the IAM role from.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the DB cluster, for example ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/NeptuneAccessRole⁠.

FeatureName

The name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be disassociated from. For the list of supported feature names, see describe_db_engine_versions.


Removes a source identifier from an existing event notification subscription

Description

Removes a source identifier from an existing event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SourceIdentifier
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the event notification subscription you want to remove a source identifier from.

SourceIdentifier

[required] The source identifier to be removed from the subscription, such as the DB instance identifier for a DB instance or the name of a security group.


Removes metadata tags from an Amazon Neptune resource

Description

Removes metadata tags from an Amazon Neptune resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon Neptune resource that the tags are removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

TagKeys

[required] The tag key (name) of the tag to be removed.


Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value

Description

Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value. To reset specific parameters submit a list of the following: ParameterName and ApplyMethod. To reset the entire DB cluster parameter group, specify the DBClusterParameterGroupName and ResetAllParameters parameters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  ResetAllParameters = NULL,
  Parameters = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group to reset.

ResetAllParameters

A value that is set to true to reset all parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to their default values, and false otherwise. You can't use this parameter if there is a list of parameter names specified for the Parameters parameter.

Parameters

A list of parameter names in the DB cluster parameter group to reset to the default values. You can't use this parameter if the ResetAllParameters parameter is set to true.


Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value

Description

Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value. To reset specific parameters, provide a list of the following: ParameterName and ApplyMethod. To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the DBParameterGroup name and ResetAllParameters parameters. When resetting the entire group, dynamic parameters are updated immediately and static parameters are set to pending-reboot to take effect on the next DB instance restart or reboot_db_instance request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_reset_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_reset_db_parameter_group(
  DBParameterGroupName,
  ResetAllParameters = NULL,
  Parameters = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.

ResetAllParameters

Specifies whether (true) or not (false) to reset all parameters in the DB parameter group to default values.

Default: true

Parameters

To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the DBParameterGroup name and ResetAllParameters parameters. To reset specific parameters, provide a list of the following: ParameterName and ApplyMethod. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

Valid Values (for Apply method): pending-reboot


Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot

Description

Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot(
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  SnapshotIdentifier,
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL
)

Arguments

AvailabilityZones

Provides the list of EC2 Availability Zones that instances in the restored DB cluster can be created in.

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB cluster to create from the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-snapshot-id

SnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot to restore from.

You can use either the name or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify a DB cluster snapshot. However, you can use only the ARN to specify a DB snapshot.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing Snapshot.

Engine

[required] The database engine to use for the new DB cluster.

Default: The same as source

Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source

EngineVersion

The version of the database engine to use for the new DB cluster.

Port

The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections.

Constraints: Value must be 1150-65535

Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.

DBSubnetGroupName

The name of the DB subnet group to use for the new DB cluster.

Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.

Example: mySubnetgroup

DatabaseName

Not supported.

OptionGroupName

(Not supported by Neptune)

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster will belong to.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the restored DB cluster.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are restoring a DB cluster with the same Amazon account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new DB cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key.

If you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then the following will occur:

  • If the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot in SnapshotIdentifier is encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.

  • If the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot in SnapshotIdentifier is not encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is not encrypted.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

True to enable mapping of Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts, and otherwise false.

Default: false

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to Amazon CloudWatch Logs.

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with the new DB cluster.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

DeletionProtection

A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

If set to true, tags are copied to any snapshot of the restored DB cluster that is created.

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration

Contains the scaling configuration of a Neptune Serverless DB cluster.

For more information, see Using Amazon Neptune Serverless in the Amazon Neptune User Guide.

StorageType

Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.

Valid values: standard, iopt1

Default: standard


Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time

Description

Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time. Users can restore to any point in time before LatestRestorableTime for up to BackupRetentionPeriod days. The target DB cluster is created from the source DB cluster with the same configuration as the original DB cluster, except that the new DB cluster is created with the default DB security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  RestoreType = NULL,
  SourceDBClusterIdentifier,
  RestoreToTime = NULL,
  UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the new DB cluster to be created.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

RestoreType

The type of restore to be performed. You can specify one of the following values:

  • full-copy - The new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.

  • copy-on-write - The new DB cluster is restored as a clone of the source DB cluster.

If you don't specify a RestoreType value, then the new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.

SourceDBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the source DB cluster from which to restore.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

RestoreToTime

The date and time to restore the DB cluster to.

Valid Values: Value must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format

Constraints:

  • Must be before the latest restorable time for the DB instance

  • Must be specified if UseLatestRestorableTime parameter is not provided

  • Cannot be specified if UseLatestRestorableTime parameter is true

  • Cannot be specified if RestoreType parameter is copy-on-write

Example: ⁠2015-03-07T23:45:00Z⁠

UseLatestRestorableTime

A value that is set to true to restore the DB cluster to the latest restorable backup time, and false otherwise.

Default: false

Constraints: Cannot be specified if RestoreToTime parameter is provided.

Port

The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections.

Constraints: Value must be 1150-65535

Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.

DBSubnetGroupName

The DB subnet group name to use for the new DB cluster.

Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.

Example: mySubnetgroup

OptionGroupName

(Not supported by Neptune)

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster belongs to.

Tags

The tags to be applied to the restored DB cluster.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from an encrypted DB cluster.

The KMS key identifier is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key. If you are restoring a DB cluster with the same Amazon account that owns the KMS encryption key used to encrypt the new DB cluster, then you can use the KMS key alias instead of the ARN for the KMS encryption key.

You can restore to a new DB cluster and encrypt the new DB cluster with a KMS key that is different than the KMS key used to encrypt the source DB cluster. The new DB cluster is encrypted with the KMS key identified by the KmsKeyId parameter.

If you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then the following will occur:

  • If the DB cluster is encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the source DB cluster.

  • If the DB cluster is not encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is not encrypted.

If DBClusterIdentifier refers to a DB cluster that is not encrypted, then the restore request is rejected.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

True to enable mapping of Amazon Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts, and otherwise false.

Default: false

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs.

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with the new DB cluster.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

DeletionProtection

A value that indicates whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection is disabled.

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration

Contains the scaling configuration of a Neptune Serverless DB cluster.

For more information, see Using Amazon Neptune Serverless in the Amazon Neptune User Guide.

StorageType

Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.

Valid values: standard, iopt1

Default: standard


Starts an Amazon Neptune DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon console, the Amazon CLI stop-db-cluster command, or the StopDBCluster API

Description

Starts an Amazon Neptune DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon console, the Amazon CLI stop-db-cluster command, or the StopDBCluster API.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_start_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_start_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier of the Neptune DB cluster to be started. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.


Stops an Amazon Neptune DB cluster

Description

Stops an Amazon Neptune DB cluster. When you stop a DB cluster, Neptune retains the DB cluster's metadata, including its endpoints and DB parameter groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptune_stop_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptune_stop_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier of the Neptune DB cluster to be stopped. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.


Amazon NeptuneData

Description

Neptune Data API

The Amazon Neptune data API provides SDK support for more than 40 of Neptune's data operations, including data loading, query execution, data inquiry, and machine learning. It supports the Gremlin and openCypher query languages, and is available in all SDK languages. It automatically signs API requests and greatly simplifies integrating Neptune into your applications.

Usage

neptunedata(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- neptunedata(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

cancel_gremlin_query Cancels a Gremlin query
cancel_loader_job Cancels a specified load job
cancel_ml_data_processing_job Cancels a Neptune ML data processing job
cancel_ml_model_training_job Cancels a Neptune ML model training job
cancel_ml_model_transform_job Cancels a specified model transform job
cancel_open_cypher_query Cancels a specified openCypher query
create_ml_endpoint Creates a new Neptune ML inference endpoint that lets you query one specific model that the model-training process constructed
delete_ml_endpoint Cancels the creation of a Neptune ML inference endpoint
delete_propertygraph_statistics Deletes statistics for Gremlin and openCypher (property graph) data
delete_sparql_statistics Deletes SPARQL statistics
execute_fast_reset The fast reset REST API lets you reset a Neptune graph quicky and easily, removing all of its data
execute_gremlin_explain_query Executes a Gremlin Explain query
execute_gremlin_profile_query Executes a Gremlin Profile query, which runs a specified traversal, collects various metrics about the run, and produces a profile report as output
execute_gremlin_query This commands executes a Gremlin query
execute_open_cypher_explain_query Executes an openCypher explain request
execute_open_cypher_query Executes an openCypher query
get_engine_status Retrieves the status of the graph database on the host
get_gremlin_query_status Gets the status of a specified Gremlin query
get_loader_job_status Gets status information about a specified load job
get_ml_data_processing_job Retrieves information about a specified data processing job
get_ml_endpoint Retrieves details about an inference endpoint
get_ml_model_training_job Retrieves information about a Neptune ML model training job
get_ml_model_transform_job Gets information about a specified model transform job
get_open_cypher_query_status Retrieves the status of a specified openCypher query
get_propertygraph_statistics Gets property graph statistics (Gremlin and openCypher)
get_propertygraph_stream Gets a stream for a property graph
get_propertygraph_summary Gets a graph summary for a property graph
get_rdf_graph_summary Gets a graph summary for an RDF graph
get_sparql_statistics Gets RDF statistics (SPARQL)
get_sparql_stream Gets a stream for an RDF graph
list_gremlin_queries Lists active Gremlin queries
list_loader_jobs Retrieves a list of the loadIds for all active loader jobs
list_ml_data_processing_jobs Returns a list of Neptune ML data processing jobs
list_ml_endpoints Lists existing inference endpoints
list_ml_model_training_jobs Lists Neptune ML model-training jobs
list_ml_model_transform_jobs Returns a list of model transform job IDs
list_open_cypher_queries Lists active openCypher queries
manage_propertygraph_statistics Manages the generation and use of property graph statistics
manage_sparql_statistics Manages the generation and use of RDF graph statistics
start_loader_job Starts a Neptune bulk loader job to load data from an Amazon S3 bucket into a Neptune DB instance
start_ml_data_processing_job Creates a new Neptune ML data processing job for processing the graph data exported from Neptune for training
start_ml_model_training_job Creates a new Neptune ML model training job
start_ml_model_transform_job Creates a new model transform job

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- neptunedata()
svc$cancel_gremlin_query(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Cancels a Gremlin query

Description

Cancels a Gremlin query. See Gremlin query cancellation for more information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_gremlin_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_cancel_gremlin_query(queryId)

Arguments

queryId

[required] The unique identifier that identifies the query to be canceled.


Cancels a specified load job

Description

Cancels a specified load job. This is an HTTP DELETE request. See Neptune Loader Get-Status API for more information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_loader_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_cancel_loader_job(loadId)

Arguments

loadId

[required] The ID of the load job to be deleted.


Cancels a Neptune ML data processing job

Description

Cancels a Neptune ML data processing job. See The dataprocessing command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_ml_data_processing_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_cancel_ml_data_processing_job(
  id,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
  clean = NULL
)

Arguments

id

[required] The unique identifier of the data-processing job.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

clean

If set to TRUE, this flag specifies that all Neptune ML S3 artifacts should be deleted when the job is stopped. The default is FALSE.


Cancels a Neptune ML model training job

Description

Cancels a Neptune ML model training job. See Model training using the modeltraining command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_ml_model_training_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_cancel_ml_model_training_job(
  id,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
  clean = NULL
)

Arguments

id

[required] The unique identifier of the model-training job to be canceled.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

clean

If set to TRUE, this flag specifies that all Amazon S3 artifacts should be deleted when the job is stopped. The default is FALSE.


Cancels a specified model transform job

Description

Cancels a specified model transform job. See Use a trained model to generate new model artifacts.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_ml_model_transform_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_cancel_ml_model_transform_job(
  id,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
  clean = NULL
)

Arguments

id

[required] The unique ID of the model transform job to be canceled.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

clean

If this flag is set to TRUE, all Neptune ML S3 artifacts should be deleted when the job is stopped. The default is FALSE.


Cancels a specified openCypher query

Description

Cancels a specified openCypher query. See Neptune openCypher status endpoint for more information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_cancel_open_cypher_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_cancel_open_cypher_query(queryId, silent = NULL)

Arguments

queryId

[required] The unique ID of the openCypher query to cancel.

silent

If set to TRUE, causes the cancelation of the openCypher query to happen silently.


Creates a new Neptune ML inference endpoint that lets you query one specific model that the model-training process constructed

Description

Creates a new Neptune ML inference endpoint that lets you query one specific model that the model-training process constructed. See Managing inference endpoints using the endpoints command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_create_ml_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_create_ml_endpoint(
  id = NULL,
  mlModelTrainingJobId = NULL,
  mlModelTransformJobId = NULL,
  update = NULL,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
  modelName = NULL,
  instanceType = NULL,
  instanceCount = NULL,
  volumeEncryptionKMSKey = NULL
)

Arguments

id

A unique identifier for the new inference endpoint. The default is an autogenerated timestamped name.

mlModelTrainingJobId

The job Id of the completed model-training job that has created the model that the inference endpoint will point to. You must supply either the mlModelTrainingJobId or the mlModelTransformJobId.

mlModelTransformJobId

The job Id of the completed model-transform job. You must supply either the mlModelTrainingJobId or the mlModelTransformJobId.

update

If set to true, update indicates that this is an update request. The default is false. You must supply either the mlModelTrainingJobId or the mlModelTransformJobId.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role providing Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will be thrown.

modelName

Model type for training. By default the Neptune ML model is automatically based on the modelType used in data processing, but you can specify a different model type here. The default is rgcn for heterogeneous graphs and kge for knowledge graphs. The only valid value for heterogeneous graphs is rgcn. Valid values for knowledge graphs are: kge, transe, distmult, and rotate.

instanceType

The type of Neptune ML instance to use for online servicing. The default is ml.m5.xlarge. Choosing the ML instance for an inference endpoint depends on the task type, the graph size, and your budget.

instanceCount

The minimum number of Amazon EC2 instances to deploy to an endpoint for prediction. The default is 1

volumeEncryptionKMSKey

The Amazon Key Management Service (Amazon KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt data on the storage volume attached to the ML compute instances that run the training job. The default is None.


Cancels the creation of a Neptune ML inference endpoint

Description

Cancels the creation of a Neptune ML inference endpoint. See Managing inference endpoints using the endpoints command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_delete_ml_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_delete_ml_endpoint(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL, clean = NULL)

Arguments

id

[required] The unique identifier of the inference endpoint.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role providing Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will be thrown.

clean

If this flag is set to TRUE, all Neptune ML S3 artifacts should be deleted when the job is stopped. The default is FALSE.


Deletes statistics for Gremlin and openCypher (property graph) data

Description

Deletes statistics for Gremlin and openCypher (property graph) data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_delete_propertygraph_statistics/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_delete_propertygraph_statistics()

Deletes SPARQL statistics

Description

Deletes SPARQL statistics

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_delete_sparql_statistics/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_delete_sparql_statistics()

The fast reset REST API lets you reset a Neptune graph quicky and easily, removing all of its data

Description

The fast reset REST API lets you reset a Neptune graph quicky and easily, removing all of its data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_fast_reset/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_execute_fast_reset(action, token = NULL)

Arguments

action

[required] The fast reset action. One of the following values:

  • initiateDatabaseReset   –   This action generates a unique token needed to actually perform the fast reset.

  • performDatabaseReset   –   This action uses the token generated by the initiateDatabaseReset action to actually perform the fast reset.

token

The fast-reset token to initiate the reset.


Executes a Gremlin Explain query

Description

Executes a Gremlin Explain query.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_gremlin_explain_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_execute_gremlin_explain_query(gremlinQuery)

Arguments

gremlinQuery

[required] The Gremlin explain query string.


Executes a Gremlin Profile query, which runs a specified traversal, collects various metrics about the run, and produces a profile report as output

Description

Executes a Gremlin Profile query, which runs a specified traversal, collects various metrics about the run, and produces a profile report as output. See Gremlin profile API in Neptune for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_gremlin_profile_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_execute_gremlin_profile_query(
  gremlinQuery,
  results = NULL,
  chop = NULL,
  serializer = NULL,
  indexOps = NULL
)

Arguments

gremlinQuery

[required] The Gremlin query string to profile.

results

If this flag is set to TRUE, the query results are gathered and displayed as part of the profile report. If FALSE, only the result count is displayed.

chop

If non-zero, causes the results string to be truncated at that number of characters. If set to zero, the string contains all the results.

serializer

If non-null, the gathered results are returned in a serialized response message in the format specified by this parameter. See Gremlin profile API in Neptune for more information.

indexOps

If this flag is set to TRUE, the results include a detailed report of all index operations that took place during query execution and serialization.


This commands executes a Gremlin query

Description

This commands executes a Gremlin query. Amazon Neptune is compatible with Apache TinkerPop3 and Gremlin, so you can use the Gremlin traversal language to query the graph, as described under The Graph in the Apache TinkerPop3 documentation. More details can also be found in Accessing a Neptune graph with Gremlin.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_gremlin_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_execute_gremlin_query(gremlinQuery, serializer = NULL)

Arguments

gremlinQuery

[required] Using this API, you can run Gremlin queries in string format much as you can using the HTTP endpoint. The interface is compatible with whatever Gremlin version your DB cluster is using (see the Tinkerpop client section to determine which Gremlin releases your engine version supports).

serializer

If non-null, the query results are returned in a serialized response message in the format specified by this parameter. See the GraphSON section in the TinkerPop documentation for a list of the formats that are currently supported.


Executes an openCypher explain request

Description

Executes an openCypher explain request. See The openCypher explain feature for more information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_open_cypher_explain_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_execute_open_cypher_explain_query(
  openCypherQuery,
  parameters = NULL,
  explainMode
)

Arguments

openCypherQuery

[required] The openCypher query string.

parameters

The openCypher query parameters.

explainMode

[required] The openCypher explain mode. Can be one of: static, dynamic, or details.


Executes an openCypher query

Description

Executes an openCypher query. See Accessing the Neptune Graph with openCypher for more information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_execute_open_cypher_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_execute_open_cypher_query(openCypherQuery, parameters = NULL)

Arguments

openCypherQuery

[required] The openCypher query string to be executed.

parameters

The openCypher query parameters for query execution. See Examples of openCypher parameterized queries for more information.


Retrieves the status of the graph database on the host

Description

Retrieves the status of the graph database on the host.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_engine_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_engine_status()

Gets the status of a specified Gremlin query

Description

Gets the status of a specified Gremlin query.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_gremlin_query_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_gremlin_query_status(queryId)

Arguments

queryId

[required] The unique identifier that identifies the Gremlin query.


Gets status information about a specified load job

Description

Gets status information about a specified load job. Neptune keeps track of the most recent 1,024 bulk load jobs, and stores the last 10,000 error details per job.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_loader_job_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_loader_job_status(
  loadId,
  details = NULL,
  errors = NULL,
  page = NULL,
  errorsPerPage = NULL
)

Arguments

loadId

[required] The load ID of the load job to get the status of.

details

Flag indicating whether or not to include details beyond the overall status (TRUE or FALSE; the default is FALSE).

errors

Flag indicating whether or not to include a list of errors encountered (TRUE or FALSE; the default is FALSE).

The list of errors is paged. The page and errorsPerPage parameters allow you to page through all the errors.

page

The error page number (a positive integer; the default is 1). Only valid when the errors parameter is set to TRUE.

errorsPerPage

The number of errors returned in each page (a positive integer; the default is 10). Only valid when the errors parameter set to TRUE.


Retrieves information about a specified data processing job

Description

Retrieves information about a specified data processing job. See The dataprocessing command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_ml_data_processing_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_ml_data_processing_job(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)

Arguments

id

[required] The unique identifier of the data-processing job to be retrieved.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.


Retrieves details about an inference endpoint

Description

Retrieves details about an inference endpoint. See Managing inference endpoints using the endpoints command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_ml_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_ml_endpoint(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)

Arguments

id

[required] The unique identifier of the inference endpoint.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.


Retrieves information about a Neptune ML model training job

Description

Retrieves information about a Neptune ML model training job. See Model training using the modeltraining command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_ml_model_training_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_ml_model_training_job(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)

Arguments

id

[required] The unique identifier of the model-training job to retrieve.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.


Gets information about a specified model transform job

Description

Gets information about a specified model transform job. See Use a trained model to generate new model artifacts.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_ml_model_transform_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_ml_model_transform_job(id, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)

Arguments

id

[required] The unique identifier of the model-transform job to be reetrieved.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.


Retrieves the status of a specified openCypher query

Description

Retrieves the status of a specified openCypher query.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_open_cypher_query_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_open_cypher_query_status(queryId)

Arguments

queryId

[required] The unique ID of the openCypher query for which to retrieve the query status.


Gets property graph statistics (Gremlin and openCypher)

Description

Gets property graph statistics (Gremlin and openCypher).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_propertygraph_statistics/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_propertygraph_statistics()

Gets a stream for a property graph

Description

Gets a stream for a property graph.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_propertygraph_stream/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_propertygraph_stream(
  limit = NULL,
  iteratorType = NULL,
  commitNum = NULL,
  opNum = NULL,
  encoding = NULL
)

Arguments

limit

Specifies the maximum number of records to return. There is also a size limit of 10 MB on the response that can't be modified and that takes precedence over the number of records specified in the limit parameter. The response does include a threshold-breaching record if the 10 MB limit was reached.

The range for limit is 1 to 100,000, with a default of 10.

iteratorType

Can be one of:

  • AT_SEQUENCE_NUMBER   –   Indicates that reading should start from the event sequence number specified jointly by the commitNum and opNum parameters.

  • AFTER_SEQUENCE_NUMBER   –   Indicates that reading should start right after the event sequence number specified jointly by the commitNum and opNum parameters.

  • TRIM_HORIZON   –   Indicates that reading should start at the last untrimmed record in the system, which is the oldest unexpired (not yet deleted) record in the change-log stream.

  • LATEST   –   Indicates that reading should start at the most recent record in the system, which is the latest unexpired (not yet deleted) record in the change-log stream.

commitNum

The commit number of the starting record to read from the change-log stream. This parameter is required when iteratorType isAT_SEQUENCE_NUMBER or AFTER_SEQUENCE_NUMBER, and ignored when iteratorType is TRIM_HORIZON or LATEST.

opNum

The operation sequence number within the specified commit to start reading from in the change-log stream data. The default is 1.

encoding

If set to TRUE, Neptune compresses the response using gzip encoding.


Gets a graph summary for a property graph

Description

Gets a graph summary for a property graph.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_propertygraph_summary/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_propertygraph_summary(mode = NULL)

Arguments

mode

Mode can take one of two values: BASIC (the default), and DETAILED.


Gets a graph summary for an RDF graph

Description

Gets a graph summary for an RDF graph.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_rdf_graph_summary/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_rdf_graph_summary(mode = NULL)

Arguments

mode

Mode can take one of two values: BASIC (the default), and DETAILED.


Gets RDF statistics (SPARQL)

Description

Gets RDF statistics (SPARQL).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_sparql_statistics/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_sparql_statistics()

Gets a stream for an RDF graph

Description

Gets a stream for an RDF graph.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_get_sparql_stream/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_get_sparql_stream(
  limit = NULL,
  iteratorType = NULL,
  commitNum = NULL,
  opNum = NULL,
  encoding = NULL
)

Arguments

limit

Specifies the maximum number of records to return. There is also a size limit of 10 MB on the response that can't be modified and that takes precedence over the number of records specified in the limit parameter. The response does include a threshold-breaching record if the 10 MB limit was reached.

The range for limit is 1 to 100,000, with a default of 10.

iteratorType

Can be one of:

  • AT_SEQUENCE_NUMBER   –   Indicates that reading should start from the event sequence number specified jointly by the commitNum and opNum parameters.

  • AFTER_SEQUENCE_NUMBER   –   Indicates that reading should start right after the event sequence number specified jointly by the commitNum and opNum parameters.

  • TRIM_HORIZON   –   Indicates that reading should start at the last untrimmed record in the system, which is the oldest unexpired (not yet deleted) record in the change-log stream.

  • LATEST   –   Indicates that reading should start at the most recent record in the system, which is the latest unexpired (not yet deleted) record in the change-log stream.

commitNum

The commit number of the starting record to read from the change-log stream. This parameter is required when iteratorType isAT_SEQUENCE_NUMBER or AFTER_SEQUENCE_NUMBER, and ignored when iteratorType is TRIM_HORIZON or LATEST.

opNum

The operation sequence number within the specified commit to start reading from in the change-log stream data. The default is 1.

encoding

If set to TRUE, Neptune compresses the response using gzip encoding.


Lists active Gremlin queries

Description

Lists active Gremlin queries. See Gremlin query status API for details about the output.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_gremlin_queries/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_list_gremlin_queries(includeWaiting = NULL)

Arguments

includeWaiting

If set to TRUE, the list returned includes waiting queries. The default is FALSE;


Retrieves a list of the loadIds for all active loader jobs

Description

Retrieves a list of the loadIds for all active loader jobs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_loader_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_list_loader_jobs(limit = NULL, includeQueuedLoads = NULL)

Arguments

limit

The number of load IDs to list. Must be a positive integer greater than zero and not more than 100 (which is the default).

includeQueuedLoads

An optional parameter that can be used to exclude the load IDs of queued load requests when requesting a list of load IDs by setting the parameter to FALSE. The default value is TRUE.


Returns a list of Neptune ML data processing jobs

Description

Returns a list of Neptune ML data processing jobs. See Listing active data-processing jobs using the Neptune ML dataprocessing command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_ml_data_processing_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_list_ml_data_processing_jobs(
  maxItems = NULL,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL
)

Arguments

maxItems

The maximum number of items to return (from 1 to 1024; the default is 10).

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.


Lists existing inference endpoints

Description

Lists existing inference endpoints. See Managing inference endpoints using the endpoints command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_ml_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_list_ml_endpoints(maxItems = NULL, neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL)

Arguments

maxItems

The maximum number of items to return (from 1 to 1024; the default is 10.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.


Lists Neptune ML model-training jobs

Description

Lists Neptune ML model-training jobs. See Model training using the modeltraining command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_ml_model_training_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_list_ml_model_training_jobs(
  maxItems = NULL,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL
)

Arguments

maxItems

The maximum number of items to return (from 1 to 1024; the default is 10).

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.


Returns a list of model transform job IDs

Description

Returns a list of model transform job IDs. See Use a trained model to generate new model artifacts.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_ml_model_transform_jobs/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_list_ml_model_transform_jobs(
  maxItems = NULL,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL
)

Arguments

maxItems

The maximum number of items to return (from 1 to 1024; the default is 10).

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.


Lists active openCypher queries

Description

Lists active openCypher queries. See Neptune openCypher status endpoint for more information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_list_open_cypher_queries/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_list_open_cypher_queries(includeWaiting = NULL)

Arguments

includeWaiting

When set to TRUE and other parameters are not present, causes status information to be returned for waiting queries as well as for running queries.


Manages the generation and use of property graph statistics

Description

Manages the generation and use of property graph statistics.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_manage_propertygraph_statistics/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_manage_propertygraph_statistics(mode = NULL)

Arguments

mode

The statistics generation mode. One of: DISABLE_AUTOCOMPUTE, ENABLE_AUTOCOMPUTE, or REFRESH, the last of which manually triggers DFE statistics generation.


Manages the generation and use of RDF graph statistics

Description

Manages the generation and use of RDF graph statistics.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_manage_sparql_statistics/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_manage_sparql_statistics(mode = NULL)

Arguments

mode

The statistics generation mode. One of: DISABLE_AUTOCOMPUTE, ENABLE_AUTOCOMPUTE, or REFRESH, the last of which manually triggers DFE statistics generation.


Starts a Neptune bulk loader job to load data from an Amazon S3 bucket into a Neptune DB instance

Description

Starts a Neptune bulk loader job to load data from an Amazon S3 bucket into a Neptune DB instance. See Using the Amazon Neptune Bulk Loader to Ingest Data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_start_loader_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_start_loader_job(
  source,
  format,
  s3BucketRegion,
  iamRoleArn,
  mode = NULL,
  failOnError = NULL,
  parallelism = NULL,
  parserConfiguration = NULL,
  updateSingleCardinalityProperties = NULL,
  queueRequest = NULL,
  dependencies = NULL,
  userProvidedEdgeIds = NULL
)

Arguments

source

[required] The source parameter accepts an S3 URI that identifies a single file, multiple files, a folder, or multiple folders. Neptune loads every data file in any folder that is specified.

The URI can be in any of the following formats.

  • ⁠s3://(bucket_name)/(object-key-name)⁠

  • ⁠https://s3.amazonaws.com/(bucket_name)/(object-key-name)⁠

  • ⁠https://s3.us-east-1.amazonaws.com/(bucket_name)/(object-key-name)⁠

The object-key-name element of the URI is equivalent to the prefix parameter in an S3 ListObjects API call. It identifies all the objects in the specified S3 bucket whose names begin with that prefix. That can be a single file or folder, or multiple files and/or folders.

The specified folder or folders can contain multiple vertex files and multiple edge files.

format

[required] The format of the data. For more information about data formats for the Neptune Loader command, see Load Data Formats.

Allowed values

s3BucketRegion

[required] The Amazon region of the S3 bucket. This must match the Amazon Region of the DB cluster.

iamRoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for an IAM role to be assumed by the Neptune DB instance for access to the S3 bucket. The IAM role ARN provided here should be attached to the DB cluster (see Adding the IAM Role to an Amazon Neptune Cluster.

mode

The load job mode.

Allowed values: RESUME, NEW, AUTO.

Default value: AUTO.

  • RESUME   –   In RESUME mode, the loader looks for a previous load from this source, and if it finds one, resumes that load job. If no previous load job is found, the loader stops.

    The loader avoids reloading files that were successfully loaded in a previous job. It only tries to process failed files. If you dropped previously loaded data from your Neptune cluster, that data is not reloaded in this mode. If a previous load job loaded all files from the same source successfully, nothing is reloaded, and the loader returns success.

  • NEW   –   In NEW mode, the creates a new load request regardless of any previous loads. You can use this mode to reload all the data from a source after dropping previously loaded data from your Neptune cluster, or to load new data available at the same source.

  • AUTO   –   In AUTO mode, the loader looks for a previous load job from the same source, and if it finds one, resumes that job, just as in RESUME mode.

    If the loader doesn't find a previous load job from the same source, it loads all data from the source, just as in NEW mode.

failOnError

failOnError   –   A flag to toggle a complete stop on an error.

Allowed values: "TRUE", "FALSE".

Default value: "TRUE".

When this parameter is set to "FALSE", the loader tries to load all the data in the location specified, skipping any entries with errors.

When this parameter is set to "TRUE", the loader stops as soon as it encounters an error. Data loaded up to that point persists.

parallelism

The optional parallelism parameter can be set to reduce the number of threads used by the bulk load process.

Allowed values:

  • LOW –   The number of threads used is the number of available vCPUs divided by 8.

  • MEDIUM –   The number of threads used is the number of available vCPUs divided by 2.

  • HIGH –   The number of threads used is the same as the number of available vCPUs.

  • OVERSUBSCRIBE –   The number of threads used is the number of available vCPUs multiplied by 2. If this value is used, the bulk loader takes up all available resources.

    This does not mean, however, that the OVERSUBSCRIBE setting results in 100% CPU utilization. Because the load operation is I/O bound, the highest CPU utilization to expect is in the 60% to 70% range.

Default value: HIGH

The parallelism setting can sometimes result in a deadlock between threads when loading openCypher data. When this happens, Neptune returns the LOAD_DATA_DEADLOCK error. You can generally fix the issue by setting parallelism to a lower setting and retrying the load command.

parserConfiguration

parserConfiguration   –   An optional object with additional parser configuration values. Each of the child parameters is also optional:

  • namedGraphUri   –   The default graph for all RDF formats when no graph is specified (for non-quads formats and NQUAD entries with no graph).

    The default is ⁠https://aws.amazon.com/neptune/vocab/v01/DefaultNamedGraph⁠.

  • baseUri   –   The base URI for RDF/XML and Turtle formats.

    The default is ⁠https://aws.amazon.com/neptune/default⁠.

  • allowEmptyStrings   –   Gremlin users need to be able to pass empty string values("") as node and edge properties when loading CSV data. If allowEmptyStrings is set to false (the default), such empty strings are treated as nulls and are not loaded.

    If allowEmptyStrings is set to true, the loader treats empty strings as valid property values and loads them accordingly.

updateSingleCardinalityProperties

updateSingleCardinalityProperties is an optional parameter that controls how the bulk loader treats a new value for single-cardinality vertex or edge properties. This is not supported for loading openCypher data.

Allowed values: "TRUE", "FALSE".

Default value: "FALSE".

By default, or when updateSingleCardinalityProperties is explicitly set to "FALSE", the loader treats a new value as an error, because it violates single cardinality.

When updateSingleCardinalityProperties is set to "TRUE", on the other hand, the bulk loader replaces the existing value with the new one. If multiple edge or single-cardinality vertex property values are provided in the source file(s) being loaded, the final value at the end of the bulk load could be any one of those new values. The loader only guarantees that the existing value has been replaced by one of the new ones.

queueRequest

This is an optional flag parameter that indicates whether the load request can be queued up or not.

You don't have to wait for one load job to complete before issuing the next one, because Neptune can queue up as many as 64 jobs at a time, provided that their queueRequest parameters are all set to "TRUE". The queue order of the jobs will be first-in-first-out (FIFO).

If the queueRequest parameter is omitted or set to "FALSE", the load request will fail if another load job is already running.

Allowed values: "TRUE", "FALSE".

Default value: "FALSE".

dependencies

This is an optional parameter that can make a queued load request contingent on the successful completion of one or more previous jobs in the queue.

Neptune can queue up as many as 64 load requests at a time, if their queueRequest parameters are set to "TRUE". The dependencies parameter lets you make execution of such a queued request dependent on the successful completion of one or more specified previous requests in the queue.

For example, if load Job-A and Job-B are independent of each other, but load Job-C needs Job-A and Job-B to be finished before it begins, proceed as follows:

  1. Submit load-job-A and load-job-B one after another in any order, and save their load-ids.

  2. Submit load-job-C with the load-ids of the two jobs in its dependencies field:

Because of the dependencies parameter, the bulk loader will not start Job-C until Job-A and Job-B have completed successfully. If either one of them fails, Job-C will not be executed, and its status will be set to LOAD_FAILED_BECAUSE_DEPENDENCY_NOT_SATISFIED.

You can set up multiple levels of dependency in this way, so that the failure of one job will cause all requests that are directly or indirectly dependent on it to be cancelled.

userProvidedEdgeIds

This parameter is required only when loading openCypher data that contains relationship IDs. It must be included and set to True when openCypher relationship IDs are explicitly provided in the load data (recommended).

When userProvidedEdgeIds is absent or set to True, an ⁠:ID⁠ column must be present in every relationship file in the load.

When userProvidedEdgeIds is present and set to False, relationship files in the load must not contain an ⁠:ID⁠ column. Instead, the Neptune loader automatically generates an ID for each relationship.

It's useful to provide relationship IDs explicitly so that the loader can resume loading after error in the CSV data have been fixed, without having to reload any relationships that have already been loaded. If relationship IDs have not been explicitly assigned, the loader cannot resume a failed load if any relationship file has had to be corrected, and must instead reload all the relationships.


Creates a new Neptune ML data processing job for processing the graph data exported from Neptune for training

Description

Creates a new Neptune ML data processing job for processing the graph data exported from Neptune for training. See The dataprocessing command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_start_ml_data_processing_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_start_ml_data_processing_job(
  id = NULL,
  previousDataProcessingJobId = NULL,
  inputDataS3Location,
  processedDataS3Location,
  sagemakerIamRoleArn = NULL,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
  processingInstanceType = NULL,
  processingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB = NULL,
  processingTimeOutInSeconds = NULL,
  modelType = NULL,
  configFileName = NULL,
  subnets = NULL,
  securityGroupIds = NULL,
  volumeEncryptionKMSKey = NULL,
  s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey = NULL
)

Arguments

id

A unique identifier for the new job. The default is an autogenerated UUID.

previousDataProcessingJobId

The job ID of a completed data processing job run on an earlier version of the data.

inputDataS3Location

[required] The URI of the Amazon S3 location where you want SageMaker to download the data needed to run the data processing job.

processedDataS3Location

[required] The URI of the Amazon S3 location where you want SageMaker to save the results of a data processing job.

sagemakerIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role for SageMaker execution. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of an IAM role that SageMaker can assume to perform tasks on your behalf. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

processingInstanceType

The type of ML instance used during data processing. Its memory should be large enough to hold the processed dataset. The default is the smallest ml.r5 type whose memory is ten times larger than the size of the exported graph data on disk.

processingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB

The disk volume size of the processing instance. Both input data and processed data are stored on disk, so the volume size must be large enough to hold both data sets. The default is 0. If not specified or 0, Neptune ML chooses the volume size automatically based on the data size.

processingTimeOutInSeconds

Timeout in seconds for the data processing job. The default is 86,400 (1 day).

modelType

One of the two model types that Neptune ML currently supports: heterogeneous graph models (heterogeneous), and knowledge graph (kge). The default is none. If not specified, Neptune ML chooses the model type automatically based on the data.

configFileName

A data specification file that describes how to load the exported graph data for training. The file is automatically generated by the Neptune export toolkit. The default is training-data-configuration.json.

subnets

The IDs of the subnets in the Neptune VPC. The default is None.

securityGroupIds

The VPC security group IDs. The default is None.

volumeEncryptionKMSKey

The Amazon Key Management Service (Amazon KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt data on the storage volume attached to the ML compute instances that run the training job. The default is None.

s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey

The Amazon Key Management Service (Amazon KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt the output of the processing job. The default is none.


Creates a new Neptune ML model training job

Description

Creates a new Neptune ML model training job. See Model training using the modeltraining command.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_start_ml_model_training_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_start_ml_model_training_job(
  id = NULL,
  previousModelTrainingJobId = NULL,
  dataProcessingJobId,
  trainModelS3Location,
  sagemakerIamRoleArn = NULL,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
  baseProcessingInstanceType = NULL,
  trainingInstanceType = NULL,
  trainingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB = NULL,
  trainingTimeOutInSeconds = NULL,
  maxHPONumberOfTrainingJobs = NULL,
  maxHPOParallelTrainingJobs = NULL,
  subnets = NULL,
  securityGroupIds = NULL,
  volumeEncryptionKMSKey = NULL,
  s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey = NULL,
  enableManagedSpotTraining = NULL,
  customModelTrainingParameters = NULL
)

Arguments

id

A unique identifier for the new job. The default is An autogenerated UUID.

previousModelTrainingJobId

The job ID of a completed model-training job that you want to update incrementally based on updated data.

dataProcessingJobId

[required] The job ID of the completed data-processing job that has created the data that the training will work with.

trainModelS3Location

[required] The location in Amazon S3 where the model artifacts are to be stored.

sagemakerIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role for SageMaker execution.This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

baseProcessingInstanceType

The type of ML instance used in preparing and managing training of ML models. This is a CPU instance chosen based on memory requirements for processing the training data and model.

trainingInstanceType

The type of ML instance used for model training. All Neptune ML models support CPU, GPU, and multiGPU training. The default is ml.p3.2xlarge. Choosing the right instance type for training depends on the task type, graph size, and your budget.

trainingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB

The disk volume size of the training instance. Both input data and the output model are stored on disk, so the volume size must be large enough to hold both data sets. The default is 0. If not specified or 0, Neptune ML selects a disk volume size based on the recommendation generated in the data processing step.

trainingTimeOutInSeconds

Timeout in seconds for the training job. The default is 86,400 (1 day).

maxHPONumberOfTrainingJobs

Maximum total number of training jobs to start for the hyperparameter tuning job. The default is 2. Neptune ML automatically tunes the hyperparameters of the machine learning model. To obtain a model that performs well, use at least 10 jobs (in other words, set maxHPONumberOfTrainingJobs to 10). In general, the more tuning runs, the better the results.

maxHPOParallelTrainingJobs

Maximum number of parallel training jobs to start for the hyperparameter tuning job. The default is 2. The number of parallel jobs you can run is limited by the available resources on your training instance.

subnets

The IDs of the subnets in the Neptune VPC. The default is None.

securityGroupIds

The VPC security group IDs. The default is None.

volumeEncryptionKMSKey

The Amazon Key Management Service (KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt data on the storage volume attached to the ML compute instances that run the training job. The default is None.

s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey

The Amazon Key Management Service (KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt the output of the processing job. The default is none.

enableManagedSpotTraining

Optimizes the cost of training machine-learning models by using Amazon Elastic Compute Cloud spot instances. The default is False.

customModelTrainingParameters

The configuration for custom model training. This is a JSON object.


Creates a new model transform job

Description

Creates a new model transform job. See Use a trained model to generate new model artifacts.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/neptunedata_start_ml_model_transform_job/ for full documentation.

Usage

neptunedata_start_ml_model_transform_job(
  id = NULL,
  dataProcessingJobId = NULL,
  mlModelTrainingJobId = NULL,
  trainingJobName = NULL,
  modelTransformOutputS3Location,
  sagemakerIamRoleArn = NULL,
  neptuneIamRoleArn = NULL,
  customModelTransformParameters = NULL,
  baseProcessingInstanceType = NULL,
  baseProcessingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB = NULL,
  subnets = NULL,
  securityGroupIds = NULL,
  volumeEncryptionKMSKey = NULL,
  s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey = NULL
)

Arguments

id

A unique identifier for the new job. The default is an autogenerated UUID.

dataProcessingJobId

The job ID of a completed data-processing job. You must include either dataProcessingJobId and a mlModelTrainingJobId, or a trainingJobName.

mlModelTrainingJobId

The job ID of a completed model-training job. You must include either dataProcessingJobId and a mlModelTrainingJobId, or a trainingJobName.

trainingJobName

The name of a completed SageMaker training job. You must include either dataProcessingJobId and a mlModelTrainingJobId, or a trainingJobName.

modelTransformOutputS3Location

[required] The location in Amazon S3 where the model artifacts are to be stored.

sagemakerIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role for SageMaker execution. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

neptuneIamRoleArn

The ARN of an IAM role that provides Neptune access to SageMaker and Amazon S3 resources. This must be listed in your DB cluster parameter group or an error will occur.

customModelTransformParameters

Configuration information for a model transform using a custom model. The customModelTransformParameters object contains the following fields, which must have values compatible with the saved model parameters from the training job:

baseProcessingInstanceType

The type of ML instance used in preparing and managing training of ML models. This is an ML compute instance chosen based on memory requirements for processing the training data and model.

baseProcessingInstanceVolumeSizeInGB

The disk volume size of the training instance in gigabytes. The default is 0. Both input data and the output model are stored on disk, so the volume size must be large enough to hold both data sets. If not specified or 0, Neptune ML selects a disk volume size based on the recommendation generated in the data processing step.

subnets

The IDs of the subnets in the Neptune VPC. The default is None.

securityGroupIds

The VPC security group IDs. The default is None.

volumeEncryptionKMSKey

The Amazon Key Management Service (KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt data on the storage volume attached to the ML compute instances that run the training job. The default is None.

s3OutputEncryptionKMSKey

The Amazon Key Management Service (KMS) key that SageMaker uses to encrypt the output of the processing job. The default is none.


Amazon QLDB

Description

The resource management API for Amazon QLDB

Usage

qldb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- qldb(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

cancel_journal_kinesis_stream Ends a given Amazon QLDB journal stream
create_ledger Creates a new ledger in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region
delete_ledger Deletes a ledger and all of its contents
describe_journal_kinesis_stream Returns detailed information about a given Amazon QLDB journal stream
describe_journal_s3_export Returns information about a journal export job, including the ledger name, export ID, creation time, current status, and the parameters of the original export creation request
describe_ledger Returns information about a ledger, including its state, permissions mode, encryption at rest settings, and when it was created
export_journal_to_s3 Exports journal contents within a date and time range from a ledger into a specified Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) bucket
get_block Returns a block object at a specified address in a journal
get_digest Returns the digest of a ledger at the latest committed block in the journal
get_revision Returns a revision data object for a specified document ID and block address
list_journal_kinesis_streams_for_ledger Returns all Amazon QLDB journal streams for a given ledger
list_journal_s3_exports Returns all journal export jobs for all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region
list_journal_s3_exports_for_ledger Returns all journal export jobs for a specified ledger
list_ledgers Returns all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region
list_tags_for_resource Returns all tags for a specified Amazon QLDB resource
stream_journal_to_kinesis Creates a journal stream for a given Amazon QLDB ledger
tag_resource Adds one or more tags to a specified Amazon QLDB resource
untag_resource Removes one or more tags from a specified Amazon QLDB resource
update_ledger Updates properties on a ledger
update_ledger_permissions_mode Updates the permissions mode of a ledger

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- qldb()
svc$cancel_journal_kinesis_stream(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Ends a given Amazon QLDB journal stream

Description

Ends a given Amazon QLDB journal stream. Before a stream can be canceled, its current status must be ACTIVE.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_cancel_journal_kinesis_stream/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_cancel_journal_kinesis_stream(LedgerName, StreamId)

Arguments

LedgerName

[required] The name of the ledger.

StreamId

[required] The UUID (represented in Base62-encoded text) of the QLDB journal stream to be canceled.


Creates a new ledger in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region

Description

Creates a new ledger in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_create_ledger/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_create_ledger(
  Name,
  Tags = NULL,
  PermissionsMode,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  KmsKey = NULL
)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger that you want to create. The name must be unique among all of the ledgers in your Amazon Web Services account in the current Region.

Naming constraints for ledger names are defined in Quotas in Amazon QLDB in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide.

Tags

The key-value pairs to add as tags to the ledger that you want to create. Tag keys are case sensitive. Tag values are case sensitive and can be null.

PermissionsMode

[required] The permissions mode to assign to the ledger that you want to create. This parameter can have one of the following values:

  • ALLOW_ALL: A legacy permissions mode that enables access control with API-level granularity for ledgers.

    This mode allows users who have the SendCommand API permission for this ledger to run all PartiQL commands (hence, ALLOW_ALL) on any tables in the specified ledger. This mode disregards any table-level or command-level IAM permissions policies that you create for the ledger.

  • STANDARD: (Recommended) A permissions mode that enables access control with finer granularity for ledgers, tables, and PartiQL commands.

    By default, this mode denies all user requests to run any PartiQL commands on any tables in this ledger. To allow PartiQL commands to run, you must create IAM permissions policies for specific table resources and PartiQL actions, in addition to the SendCommand API permission for the ledger. For information, see Getting started with the standard permissions mode in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide.

We strongly recommend using the STANDARD permissions mode to maximize the security of your ledger data.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether the ledger is protected from being deleted by any user. If not defined during ledger creation, this feature is enabled (true) by default.

If deletion protection is enabled, you must first disable it before you can delete the ledger. You can disable it by calling the update_ledger operation to set this parameter to false.

KmsKey

The key in Key Management Service (KMS) to use for encryption of data at rest in the ledger. For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide.

Use one of the following options to specify this parameter:

  • AWS_OWNED_KMS_KEY: Use an KMS key that is owned and managed by Amazon Web Services on your behalf.

  • Undefined: By default, use an Amazon Web Services owned KMS key.

  • A valid symmetric customer managed KMS key: Use the specified symmetric encryption KMS key in your account that you create, own, and manage.

    Amazon QLDB does not support asymmetric keys. For more information, see Using symmetric and asymmetric keys in the Key Management Service Developer Guide.

To specify a customer managed KMS key, you can use its key ID, Amazon Resource Name (ARN), alias name, or alias ARN. When using an alias name, prefix it with "alias/". To specify a key in a different Amazon Web Services account, you must use the key ARN or alias ARN.

For example:

  • Key ID: ⁠1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠

  • Key ARN: ⁠arn:aws:kms:us-east-2:111122223333:key/1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠

  • Alias name: alias/ExampleAlias

  • Alias ARN: arn:aws:kms:us-east-2:111122223333:alias/ExampleAlias

For more information, see Key identifiers (KeyId) in the Key Management Service Developer Guide.


Deletes a ledger and all of its contents

Description

Deletes a ledger and all of its contents. This action is irreversible.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_delete_ledger/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_delete_ledger(Name)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger that you want to delete.


Returns detailed information about a given Amazon QLDB journal stream

Description

Returns detailed information about a given Amazon QLDB journal stream. The output includes the Amazon Resource Name (ARN), stream name, current status, creation time, and the parameters of the original stream creation request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_describe_journal_kinesis_stream/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_describe_journal_kinesis_stream(LedgerName, StreamId)

Arguments

LedgerName

[required] The name of the ledger.

StreamId

[required] The UUID (represented in Base62-encoded text) of the QLDB journal stream to describe.


Returns information about a journal export job, including the ledger name, export ID, creation time, current status, and the parameters of the original export creation request

Description

Returns information about a journal export job, including the ledger name, export ID, creation time, current status, and the parameters of the original export creation request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_describe_journal_s3_export/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_describe_journal_s3_export(Name, ExportId)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger.

ExportId

[required] The UUID (represented in Base62-encoded text) of the journal export job to describe.


Returns information about a ledger, including its state, permissions mode, encryption at rest settings, and when it was created

Description

Returns information about a ledger, including its state, permissions mode, encryption at rest settings, and when it was created.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_describe_ledger/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_describe_ledger(Name)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger that you want to describe.


Exports journal contents within a date and time range from a ledger into a specified Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) bucket

Description

Exports journal contents within a date and time range from a ledger into a specified Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3) bucket. A journal export job can write the data objects in either the text or binary representation of Amazon Ion format, or in JSON Lines text format.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_export_journal_to_s3/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_export_journal_to_s3(
  Name,
  InclusiveStartTime,
  ExclusiveEndTime,
  S3ExportConfiguration,
  RoleArn,
  OutputFormat = NULL
)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger.

InclusiveStartTime

[required] The inclusive start date and time for the range of journal contents to export.

The InclusiveStartTime must be in ⁠ISO 8601⁠ date and time format and in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For example: ⁠2019-06-13T21:36:34Z⁠.

The InclusiveStartTime must be before ExclusiveEndTime.

If you provide an InclusiveStartTime that is before the ledger's CreationDateTime, Amazon QLDB defaults it to the ledger's CreationDateTime.

ExclusiveEndTime

[required] The exclusive end date and time for the range of journal contents to export.

The ExclusiveEndTime must be in ⁠ISO 8601⁠ date and time format and in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For example: ⁠2019-06-13T21:36:34Z⁠.

The ExclusiveEndTime must be less than or equal to the current UTC date and time.

S3ExportConfiguration

[required] The configuration settings of the Amazon S3 bucket destination for your export request.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that grants QLDB permissions for a journal export job to do the following:

  • Write objects into your Amazon S3 bucket.

  • (Optional) Use your customer managed key in Key Management Service (KMS) for server-side encryption of your exported data.

To pass a role to QLDB when requesting a journal export, you must have permissions to perform the iam:PassRole action on the IAM role resource. This is required for all journal export requests.

OutputFormat

The output format of your exported journal data. A journal export job can write the data objects in either the text or binary representation of Amazon Ion format, or in JSON Lines text format.

Default: ION_TEXT

In JSON Lines format, each journal block in an exported data object is a valid JSON object that is delimited by a newline. You can use this format to directly integrate JSON exports with analytics tools such as Amazon Athena and Glue because these services can parse newline-delimited JSON automatically.


Returns a block object at a specified address in a journal

Description

Returns a block object at a specified address in a journal. Also returns a proof of the specified block for verification if DigestTipAddress is provided.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_get_block/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_get_block(Name, BlockAddress, DigestTipAddress = NULL)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger.

BlockAddress

[required] The location of the block that you want to request. An address is an Amazon Ion structure that has two fields: strandId and sequenceNo.

For example: ⁠{strandId:"BlFTjlSXze9BIh1KOszcE3",sequenceNo:14}⁠.

DigestTipAddress

The latest block location covered by the digest for which to request a proof. An address is an Amazon Ion structure that has two fields: strandId and sequenceNo.

For example: ⁠{strandId:"BlFTjlSXze9BIh1KOszcE3",sequenceNo:49}⁠.


Returns the digest of a ledger at the latest committed block in the journal

Description

Returns the digest of a ledger at the latest committed block in the journal. The response includes a 256-bit hash value and a block address.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_get_digest/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_get_digest(Name)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger.


Returns a revision data object for a specified document ID and block address

Description

Returns a revision data object for a specified document ID and block address. Also returns a proof of the specified revision for verification if DigestTipAddress is provided.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_get_revision/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_get_revision(Name, BlockAddress, DocumentId, DigestTipAddress = NULL)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger.

BlockAddress

[required] The block location of the document revision to be verified. An address is an Amazon Ion structure that has two fields: strandId and sequenceNo.

For example: ⁠{strandId:"BlFTjlSXze9BIh1KOszcE3",sequenceNo:14}⁠.

DocumentId

[required] The UUID (represented in Base62-encoded text) of the document to be verified.

DigestTipAddress

The latest block location covered by the digest for which to request a proof. An address is an Amazon Ion structure that has two fields: strandId and sequenceNo.

For example: ⁠{strandId:"BlFTjlSXze9BIh1KOszcE3",sequenceNo:49}⁠.


Returns all Amazon QLDB journal streams for a given ledger

Description

Returns all Amazon QLDB journal streams for a given ledger.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_journal_kinesis_streams_for_ledger/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_list_journal_kinesis_streams_for_ledger(
  LedgerName,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

LedgerName

[required] The name of the ledger.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return in a single list_journal_kinesis_streams_for_ledger request. (The actual number of results returned might be fewer.)

NextToken

A pagination token, indicating that you want to retrieve the next page of results. If you received a value for NextToken in the response from a previous list_journal_kinesis_streams_for_ledger call, you should use that value as input here.


Returns all journal export jobs for all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region

Description

Returns all journal export jobs for all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_journal_s3_exports/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_list_journal_s3_exports(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return in a single list_journal_s3_exports request. (The actual number of results returned might be fewer.)

NextToken

A pagination token, indicating that you want to retrieve the next page of results. If you received a value for NextToken in the response from a previous list_journal_s3_exports call, then you should use that value as input here.


Returns all journal export jobs for a specified ledger

Description

Returns all journal export jobs for a specified ledger.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_journal_s3_exports_for_ledger/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_list_journal_s3_exports_for_ledger(
  Name,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger.

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return in a single list_journal_s3_exports_for_ledger request. (The actual number of results returned might be fewer.)

NextToken

A pagination token, indicating that you want to retrieve the next page of results. If you received a value for NextToken in the response from a previous list_journal_s3_exports_for_ledger call, then you should use that value as input here.


Returns all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region

Description

Returns all ledgers that are associated with the current Amazon Web Services account and Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_ledgers/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_list_ledgers(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

MaxResults

The maximum number of results to return in a single list_ledgers request. (The actual number of results returned might be fewer.)

NextToken

A pagination token, indicating that you want to retrieve the next page of results. If you received a value for NextToken in the response from a previous list_ledgers call, then you should use that value as input here.


Returns all tags for a specified Amazon QLDB resource

Description

Returns all tags for a specified Amazon QLDB resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for which to list the tags. For example:

arn:aws:qldb:us-east-1:123456789012:ledger/exampleLedger


Creates a journal stream for a given Amazon QLDB ledger

Description

Creates a journal stream for a given Amazon QLDB ledger. The stream captures every document revision that is committed to the ledger's journal and delivers the data to a specified Amazon Kinesis Data Streams resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_stream_journal_to_kinesis/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_stream_journal_to_kinesis(
  LedgerName,
  RoleArn,
  Tags = NULL,
  InclusiveStartTime,
  ExclusiveEndTime = NULL,
  KinesisConfiguration,
  StreamName
)

Arguments

LedgerName

[required] The name of the ledger.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that grants QLDB permissions for a journal stream to write data records to a Kinesis Data Streams resource.

To pass a role to QLDB when requesting a journal stream, you must have permissions to perform the iam:PassRole action on the IAM role resource. This is required for all journal stream requests.

Tags

The key-value pairs to add as tags to the stream that you want to create. Tag keys are case sensitive. Tag values are case sensitive and can be null.

InclusiveStartTime

[required] The inclusive start date and time from which to start streaming journal data. This parameter must be in ⁠ISO 8601⁠ date and time format and in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For example: ⁠2019-06-13T21:36:34Z⁠.

The InclusiveStartTime cannot be in the future and must be before ExclusiveEndTime.

If you provide an InclusiveStartTime that is before the ledger's CreationDateTime, QLDB effectively defaults it to the ledger's CreationDateTime.

ExclusiveEndTime

The exclusive date and time that specifies when the stream ends. If you don't define this parameter, the stream runs indefinitely until you cancel it.

The ExclusiveEndTime must be in ⁠ISO 8601⁠ date and time format and in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For example: ⁠2019-06-13T21:36:34Z⁠.

KinesisConfiguration

[required] The configuration settings of the Kinesis Data Streams destination for your stream request.

StreamName

[required] The name that you want to assign to the QLDB journal stream. User-defined names can help identify and indicate the purpose of a stream.

Your stream name must be unique among other active streams for a given ledger. Stream names have the same naming constraints as ledger names, as defined in Quotas in Amazon QLDB in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide.


Adds one or more tags to a specified Amazon QLDB resource

Description

Adds one or more tags to a specified Amazon QLDB resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_tag_resource(ResourceArn, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to which you want to add the tags. For example:

arn:aws:qldb:us-east-1:123456789012:ledger/exampleLedger

Tags

[required] The key-value pairs to add as tags to the specified QLDB resource. Tag keys are case sensitive. If you specify a key that already exists for the resource, your request fails and returns an error. Tag values are case sensitive and can be null.


Removes one or more tags from a specified Amazon QLDB resource

Description

Removes one or more tags from a specified Amazon QLDB resource. You can specify up to 50 tag keys to remove.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_untag_resource(ResourceArn, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) from which to remove the tags. For example:

arn:aws:qldb:us-east-1:123456789012:ledger/exampleLedger

TagKeys

[required] The list of tag keys to remove.


Updates properties on a ledger

Description

Updates properties on a ledger.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_update_ledger/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_update_ledger(Name, DeletionProtection = NULL, KmsKey = NULL)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether the ledger is protected from being deleted by any user. If not defined during ledger creation, this feature is enabled (true) by default.

If deletion protection is enabled, you must first disable it before you can delete the ledger. You can disable it by calling the update_ledger operation to set this parameter to false.

KmsKey

The key in Key Management Service (KMS) to use for encryption of data at rest in the ledger. For more information, see Encryption at rest in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide.

Use one of the following options to specify this parameter:

  • AWS_OWNED_KMS_KEY: Use an KMS key that is owned and managed by Amazon Web Services on your behalf.

  • Undefined: Make no changes to the KMS key of the ledger.

  • A valid symmetric customer managed KMS key: Use the specified symmetric encryption KMS key in your account that you create, own, and manage.

    Amazon QLDB does not support asymmetric keys. For more information, see Using symmetric and asymmetric keys in the Key Management Service Developer Guide.

To specify a customer managed KMS key, you can use its key ID, Amazon Resource Name (ARN), alias name, or alias ARN. When using an alias name, prefix it with "alias/". To specify a key in a different Amazon Web Services account, you must use the key ARN or alias ARN.

For example:

  • Key ID: ⁠1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠

  • Key ARN: ⁠arn:aws:kms:us-east-2:111122223333:key/1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠

  • Alias name: alias/ExampleAlias

  • Alias ARN: arn:aws:kms:us-east-2:111122223333:alias/ExampleAlias

For more information, see Key identifiers (KeyId) in the Key Management Service Developer Guide.


Updates the permissions mode of a ledger

Description

Updates the permissions mode of a ledger.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldb_update_ledger_permissions_mode/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldb_update_ledger_permissions_mode(Name, PermissionsMode)

Arguments

Name

[required] The name of the ledger.

PermissionsMode

[required] The permissions mode to assign to the ledger. This parameter can have one of the following values:

  • ALLOW_ALL: A legacy permissions mode that enables access control with API-level granularity for ledgers.

    This mode allows users who have the SendCommand API permission for this ledger to run all PartiQL commands (hence, ALLOW_ALL) on any tables in the specified ledger. This mode disregards any table-level or command-level IAM permissions policies that you create for the ledger.

  • STANDARD: (Recommended) A permissions mode that enables access control with finer granularity for ledgers, tables, and PartiQL commands.

    By default, this mode denies all user requests to run any PartiQL commands on any tables in this ledger. To allow PartiQL commands to run, you must create IAM permissions policies for specific table resources and PartiQL actions, in addition to the SendCommand API permission for the ledger. For information, see Getting started with the standard permissions mode in the Amazon QLDB Developer Guide.

We strongly recommend using the STANDARD permissions mode to maximize the security of your ledger data.


Amazon QLDB Session

Description

The transactional data APIs for Amazon QLDB

Instead of interacting directly with this API, we recommend using the QLDB driver or the QLDB shell to execute data transactions on a ledger.

Usage

qldbsession(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- qldbsession(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

send_command Sends a command to an Amazon QLDB ledger

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- qldbsession()
svc$send_command(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Sends a command to an Amazon QLDB ledger

Description

Sends a command to an Amazon QLDB ledger.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/qldbsession_send_command/ for full documentation.

Usage

qldbsession_send_command(
  SessionToken = NULL,
  StartSession = NULL,
  StartTransaction = NULL,
  EndSession = NULL,
  CommitTransaction = NULL,
  AbortTransaction = NULL,
  ExecuteStatement = NULL,
  FetchPage = NULL
)

Arguments

SessionToken

Specifies the session token for the current command. A session token is constant throughout the life of the session.

To obtain a session token, run the StartSession command. This SessionToken is required for every subsequent command that is issued during the current session.

StartSession

Command to start a new session. A session token is obtained as part of the response.

StartTransaction

Command to start a new transaction.

EndSession

Command to end the current session.

CommitTransaction

Command to commit the specified transaction.

AbortTransaction

Command to abort the current transaction.

ExecuteStatement

Command to execute a statement in the specified transaction.

FetchPage

Command to fetch a page.


Amazon Relational Database Service

Description

Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) is a web service that makes it easier to set up, operate, and scale a relational database in the cloud. It provides cost-efficient, resizeable capacity for an industry-standard relational database and manages common database administration tasks, freeing up developers to focus on what makes their applications and businesses unique.

Amazon RDS gives you access to the capabilities of a MySQL, MariaDB, PostgreSQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, Db2, or Amazon Aurora database server. These capabilities mean that the code, applications, and tools you already use today with your existing databases work with Amazon RDS without modification. Amazon RDS automatically backs up your database and maintains the database software that powers your DB instance. Amazon RDS is flexible: you can scale your DB instance's compute resources and storage capacity to meet your application's demand. As with all Amazon Web Services, there are no up-front investments, and you pay only for the resources you use.

This interface reference for Amazon RDS contains documentation for a programming or command line interface you can use to manage Amazon RDS. Amazon RDS is asynchronous, which means that some interfaces might require techniques such as polling or callback functions to determine when a command has been applied. In this reference, the parameter descriptions indicate whether a command is applied immediately, on the next instance reboot, or during the maintenance window. The reference structure is as follows, and we list following some related topics from the user guide.

Amazon RDS API Reference

Amazon RDS User Guide

Usage

rds(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- rds(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

add_role_to_db_cluster Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB cluster
add_role_to_db_instance Associates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB instance
add_source_identifier_to_subscription Adds a source identifier to an existing RDS event notification subscription
add_tags_to_resource Adds metadata tags to an Amazon RDS resource
apply_pending_maintenance_action Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance)
authorize_db_security_group_ingress Enables ingress to a DBSecurityGroup using one of two forms of authorization
backtrack_db_cluster Backtracks a DB cluster to a specific time, without creating a new DB cluster
build_auth_token Return an authentication token for a database connection
build_auth_token_v2 Generates an auth token used to connect to a db with IAM credentials
cancel_export_task Cancels an export task in progress that is exporting a snapshot or cluster to Amazon S3
copy_db_cluster_parameter_group Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group
copy_db_cluster_snapshot Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster
copy_db_parameter_group Copies the specified DB parameter group
copy_db_snapshot Copies the specified DB snapshot
copy_option_group Copies the specified option group
create_blue_green_deployment Creates a blue/green deployment
create_custom_db_engine_version Creates a custom DB engine version (CEV)
create_db_cluster Creates a new Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster
create_db_cluster_endpoint Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
create_db_cluster_parameter_group Creates a new DB cluster parameter group
create_db_cluster_snapshot Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster
create_db_instance Creates a new DB instance
create_db_instance_read_replica Creates a new DB instance that acts as a read replica for an existing source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster
create_db_parameter_group Creates a new DB parameter group
create_db_proxy Creates a new DB proxy
create_db_proxy_endpoint Creates a DBProxyEndpoint
create_db_security_group Creates a new DB security group
create_db_shard_group Creates a new DB shard group for Aurora Limitless Database
create_db_snapshot Creates a snapshot of a DB instance
create_db_subnet_group Creates a new DB subnet group
create_event_subscription Creates an RDS event notification subscription
create_global_cluster Creates an Aurora global database spread across multiple Amazon Web Services Regions
create_integration Creates a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift
create_option_group Creates a new option group
create_tenant_database Creates a tenant database in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration
delete_blue_green_deployment Deletes a blue/green deployment
delete_custom_db_engine_version Deletes a custom engine version
delete_db_cluster The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster
delete_db_cluster_automated_backup Deletes automated backups using the DbClusterResourceId value of the source DB cluster or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups
delete_db_cluster_endpoint Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
delete_db_cluster_parameter_group Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group
delete_db_cluster_snapshot Deletes a DB cluster snapshot
delete_db_instance Deletes a previously provisioned DB instance
delete_db_instance_automated_backup Deletes automated backups using the DbiResourceId value of the source DB instance or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups
delete_db_parameter_group Deletes a specified DB parameter group
delete_db_proxy Deletes an existing DB proxy
delete_db_proxy_endpoint Deletes a DBProxyEndpoint
delete_db_security_group Deletes a DB security group
delete_db_shard_group Deletes an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group
delete_db_snapshot Deletes a DB snapshot
delete_db_subnet_group Deletes a DB subnet group
delete_event_subscription Deletes an RDS event notification subscription
delete_global_cluster Deletes a global database cluster
delete_integration Deletes a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift
delete_option_group Deletes an existing option group
delete_tenant_database Deletes a tenant database from your DB instance
deregister_db_proxy_targets Remove the association between one or more DBProxyTarget data structures and a DBProxyTargetGroup
describe_account_attributes Lists all of the attributes for a customer account
describe_blue_green_deployments Describes one or more blue/green deployments
describe_certificates Lists the set of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon RDS for this Amazon Web Services account
describe_db_cluster_automated_backups Displays backups for both current and deleted DB clusters
describe_db_cluster_backtracks Returns information about backtracks for a DB cluster
describe_db_cluster_endpoints Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions
describe_db_cluster_parameters Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group
describe_db_clusters Describes existing Amazon Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters
describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot
describe_db_cluster_snapshots Returns information about DB cluster snapshots
describe_db_engine_versions Describes the properties of specific versions of DB engines
describe_db_instance_automated_backups Displays backups for both current and deleted instances
describe_db_instances Describes provisioned RDS instances
describe_db_log_files Returns a list of DB log files for the DB instance
describe_db_parameter_groups Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions
describe_db_parameters Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group
describe_db_proxies Returns information about DB proxies
describe_db_proxy_endpoints Returns information about DB proxy endpoints
describe_db_proxy_target_groups Returns information about DB proxy target groups, represented by DBProxyTargetGroup data structures
describe_db_proxy_targets Returns information about DBProxyTarget objects
describe_db_recommendations Describes the recommendations to resolve the issues for your DB instances, DB clusters, and DB parameter groups
describe_db_security_groups Returns a list of DBSecurityGroup descriptions
describe_db_shard_groups Describes existing Aurora Limitless Database DB shard groups
describe_db_snapshot_attributes Returns a list of DB snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB snapshot
describe_db_snapshots Returns information about DB snapshots
describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases Describes the tenant databases that exist in a DB snapshot
describe_db_subnet_groups Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions
describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine
describe_engine_default_parameters Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine
describe_event_categories Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type
describe_events Returns events related to DB instances, DB clusters, DB parameter groups, DB security groups, DB snapshots, DB cluster snapshots, and RDS Proxies for the past 14 days
describe_event_subscriptions Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account
describe_export_tasks Returns information about a snapshot or cluster export to Amazon S3
describe_global_clusters Returns information about Aurora global database clusters
describe_integrations Describe one or more zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift
describe_option_group_options Describes all available options for the specified engine
describe_option_groups Describes the available option groups
describe_orderable_db_instance_options Describes the orderable DB instance options for a specified DB engine
describe_pending_maintenance_actions Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action
describe_reserved_db_instances Returns information about reserved DB instances for this account, or about a specified reserved DB instance
describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings Lists available reserved DB instance offerings
describe_source_regions Returns a list of the source Amazon Web Services Regions where the current Amazon Web Services Region can create a read replica, copy a DB snapshot from, or replicate automated backups from
describe_tenant_databases Describes the tenant databases in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration
describe_valid_db_instance_modifications You can call DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance
disable_http_endpoint Disables the HTTP endpoint for the specified DB cluster
download_db_log_file_portion Downloads all or a portion of the specified log file, up to 1 MB in size
enable_http_endpoint Enables the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster
failover_db_cluster Forces a failover for a DB cluster
failover_global_cluster Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global database cluster to fail over or switch over a global database
list_tags_for_resource Lists all tags on an Amazon RDS resource
modify_activity_stream Changes the audit policy state of a database activity stream to either locked (default) or unlocked
modify_certificates Override the system-default Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) certificate for Amazon RDS for new DB instances, or remove the override
modify_current_db_cluster_capacity Set the capacity of an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster to a specific value
modify_custom_db_engine_version Modifies the status of a custom engine version (CEV)
modify_db_cluster Modifies the settings of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or a Multi-AZ DB cluster
modify_db_cluster_endpoint Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
modify_db_cluster_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group
modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot
modify_db_instance Modifies settings for a DB instance
modify_db_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group
modify_db_proxy Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy
modify_db_proxy_endpoint Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy endpoint
modify_db_proxy_target_group Modifies the properties of a DBProxyTargetGroup
modify_db_recommendation Updates the recommendation status and recommended action status for the specified recommendation
modify_db_shard_group Modifies the settings of an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group
modify_db_snapshot Updates a manual DB snapshot with a new engine version
modify_db_snapshot_attribute Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB snapshot
modify_db_subnet_group Modifies an existing DB subnet group
modify_event_subscription Modifies an existing RDS event notification subscription
modify_global_cluster Modifies a setting for an Amazon Aurora global database cluster
modify_integration Modifies a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift
modify_option_group Modifies an existing option group
modify_tenant_database Modifies an existing tenant database in a DB instance
promote_read_replica Promotes a read replica DB instance to a standalone DB instance
promote_read_replica_db_cluster Promotes a read replica DB cluster to a standalone DB cluster
purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering Purchases a reserved DB instance offering
reboot_db_cluster You might need to reboot your DB cluster, usually for maintenance reasons
reboot_db_instance You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons
reboot_db_shard_group You might need to reboot your DB shard group, usually for maintenance reasons
register_db_proxy_targets Associate one or more DBProxyTarget data structures with a DBProxyTargetGroup
remove_from_global_cluster Detaches an Aurora secondary cluster from an Aurora global database cluster
remove_role_from_db_cluster Removes the asssociation of an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster
remove_role_from_db_instance Disassociates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB instance
remove_source_identifier_from_subscription Removes a source identifier from an existing RDS event notification subscription
remove_tags_from_resource Removes metadata tags from an Amazon RDS resource
reset_db_cluster_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value
reset_db_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value
restore_db_cluster_from_s3 Creates an Amazon Aurora DB cluster from MySQL data stored in an Amazon S3 bucket
restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot
restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time
restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot Creates a new DB instance from a DB snapshot
restore_db_instance_from_s3 Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) supports importing MySQL databases by using backup files
restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time Restores a DB instance to an arbitrary point in time
revoke_db_security_group_ingress Revokes ingress from a DBSecurityGroup for previously authorized IP ranges or EC2 or VPC security groups
start_activity_stream Starts a database activity stream to monitor activity on the database
start_db_cluster Starts an Amazon Aurora DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-cluster CLI command, or the StopDBCluster operation
start_db_instance Starts an Amazon RDS DB instance that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-instance CLI command, or the StopDBInstance operation
start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication Enables replication of automated backups to a different Amazon Web Services Region
start_export_task Starts an export of DB snapshot or DB cluster data to Amazon S3
stop_activity_stream Stops a database activity stream that was started using the Amazon Web Services console, the start-activity-stream CLI command, or the StartActivityStream operation
stop_db_cluster Stops an Amazon Aurora DB cluster
stop_db_instance Stops an Amazon RDS DB instance temporarily
stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication Stops automated backup replication for a DB instance
switchover_blue_green_deployment Switches over a blue/green deployment
switchover_global_cluster Switches over the specified secondary DB cluster to be the new primary DB cluster in the global database cluster
switchover_read_replica Switches over an Oracle standby database in an Oracle Data Guard environment, making it the new primary database

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- rds()
# This example add a source identifier to an event notification
# subscription.
svc$add_source_identifier_to_subscription(
  SourceIdentifier = "mymysqlinstance",
  SubscriptionName = "mymysqleventsubscription"
)

## End(Not run)


Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB cluster

Description

Associates an Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_add_role_to_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_add_role_to_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier, RoleArn, FeatureName = NULL)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB cluster to associate the IAM role with.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the Aurora DB cluster, for example ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AuroraAccessRole⁠.

FeatureName

The name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be associated with. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.


Associates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB instance

Description

Associates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_add_role_to_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_add_role_to_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, RoleArn, FeatureName)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB instance to associate the IAM role with.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to associate with the DB instance, for example ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AccessRole⁠.

FeatureName

[required] The name of the feature for the DB instance that the IAM role is to be associated with. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.


Adds a source identifier to an existing RDS event notification subscription

Description

Adds a source identifier to an existing RDS event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_add_source_identifier_to_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_add_source_identifier_to_subscription(SubscriptionName, SourceIdentifier)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to add a source identifier to.

SourceIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the event source to be added.

Constraints:

  • If the source type is a DB instance, a DBInstanceIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB cluster, a DBClusterIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB security group, a DBSecurityGroupName value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a DBProxyName value must be supplied.


Adds metadata tags to an Amazon RDS resource

Description

Adds metadata tags to an Amazon RDS resource. These tags can also be used with cost allocation reporting to track cost associated with Amazon RDS resources, or used in a Condition statement in an IAM policy for Amazon RDS.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_add_tags_to_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_add_tags_to_resource(ResourceName, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon RDS resource that the tags are added to. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Tags

[required] The tags to be assigned to the Amazon RDS resource.


Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance)

Description

Applies a pending maintenance action to a resource (for example, to a DB instance).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_apply_pending_maintenance_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_apply_pending_maintenance_action(
  ResourceIdentifier,
  ApplyAction,
  OptInType
)

Arguments

ResourceIdentifier

[required] The RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource that the pending maintenance action applies to. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an RDS Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

ApplyAction

[required] The pending maintenance action to apply to this resource.

Valid Values:

  • ca-certificate-rotation

  • db-upgrade

  • hardware-maintenance

  • os-upgrade

  • system-update

For more information about these actions, see Maintenance actions for Amazon Aurora or Maintenance actions for Amazon RDS.

OptInType

[required] A value that specifies the type of opt-in request, or undoes an opt-in request. An opt-in request of type immediate can't be undone.

Valid Values:

  • immediate - Apply the maintenance action immediately.

  • next-maintenance - Apply the maintenance action during the next maintenance window for the resource.

  • ⁠undo-opt-in⁠ - Cancel any existing next-maintenance opt-in requests.


Enables ingress to a DBSecurityGroup using one of two forms of authorization

Description

Enables ingress to a DBSecurityGroup using one of two forms of authorization. First, EC2 or VPC security groups can be added to the DBSecurityGroup if the application using the database is running on EC2 or VPC instances. Second, IP ranges are available if the application accessing your database is running on the internet. Required parameters for this API are one of CIDR range, EC2SecurityGroupId for VPC, or (EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId for non-VPC).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_authorize_db_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_authorize_db_security_group_ingress(
  DBSecurityGroupName,
  CIDRIP = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupName = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupId = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the DB security group to add authorization to.

CIDRIP

The IP range to authorize.

EC2SecurityGroupName

Name of the EC2 security group to authorize. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.

EC2SecurityGroupId

Id of the EC2 security group to authorize. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.

EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId

Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the EC2 security group specified in the EC2SecurityGroupName parameter. The Amazon Web Services access key ID isn't an acceptable value. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.


Backtracks a DB cluster to a specific time, without creating a new DB cluster

Description

Backtracks a DB cluster to a specific time, without creating a new DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_backtrack_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_backtrack_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  BacktrackTo,
  Force = NULL,
  UseEarliestTimeOnPointInTimeUnavailable = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster to be backtracked. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster1

BacktrackTo

[required] The timestamp of the time to backtrack the DB cluster to, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, see the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

If the specified time isn't a consistent time for the DB cluster, Aurora automatically chooses the nearest possible consistent time for the DB cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must contain a valid ISO 8601 timestamp.

  • Can't contain a timestamp set in the future.

Example: ⁠2017-07-08T18:00Z⁠

Force

Specifies whether to force the DB cluster to backtrack when binary logging is enabled. Otherwise, an error occurs when binary logging is enabled.

UseEarliestTimeOnPointInTimeUnavailable

Specifies whether to backtrack the DB cluster to the earliest possible backtrack time when BacktrackTo is set to a timestamp earlier than the earliest backtrack time. When this parameter is disabled and BacktrackTo is set to a timestamp earlier than the earliest backtrack time, an error occurs.


Return an authentication token for a database connection

Description

Return an authentication token used as the password for a database connection.

Usage

rds_build_auth_token(endpoint, user, creds = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

endpoint

[required] Hostname and port needed to connect to the database: ⁠<host>:<port>⁠.

user

[required] User account within the database to sign in with.

creds

Credentials to be signed with.

region

AWS region the database is located in.

Details

See IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL for more information on using IAM database authentication with RDS.

Request syntax

svc$build_auth_token(
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string",
  user = "string",
  creds = list(
    access_key_id = "string",
    secret_access_key = "string",
    session_token = "string"
  )
)

See Also

rds_build_auth_token_v2

Examples

## Not run: 
# This example gets an authentication token for an RDS database, then
# connects to the database using the token.
host <- "database-1.cluster-abcdef123456.us-east-1.rds.amazonaws.com"
port <- 3306
user <- "jane_doe"
token <- svc$build_auth_token(
  endpoint = sprintf("%s:%s", host, port),
  region = "us-east-1",
  user = user
)
conn <- DBI::dbConnect(
  drv = RMariaDB::MariaDB(),
  user = user,
  password = token,
  host = host,
  port = port,
  client.flag = RMariaDB::CLIENT_SSL
)

## End(Not run)


Generates an auth token used to connect to a db with IAM credentials.

Description

See IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL for more information on using IAM database authentication with RDS.

Usage

rds_build_auth_token_v2(DBHostname, Port, DBUsername, Region = NULL)

Arguments

DBHostname

[required] The hostname of the database to connect to.

Port

[required] The port number the database is listening on.

DBUsername

[required] The username to log in as.

Region

The region the database is in. If NULL, the client region will be used.

Value

A presigned url which can be used as an auth token.

See Also

rds_build_auth_token

Examples

## Not run: 
# This example gets an authentication token for an RDS database, then
# connects to the database using the token.
host <- "database-1.cluster-abcdef123456.us-east-1.rds.amazonaws.com"
port <- 3306
user <- "jane_doe"
token <- svc$build_auth_token_v2(
  DBHostname = host,
  Port = port,
  user = user
)
conn <- DBI::dbConnect(
  drv = RMariaDB::MariaDB(),
  user = user,
  password = token,
  host = host,
  port = port,
  client.flag = RMariaDB::CLIENT_SSL
)

## End(Not run)


Cancels an export task in progress that is exporting a snapshot or cluster to Amazon S3

Description

Cancels an export task in progress that is exporting a snapshot or cluster to Amazon S3. Any data that has already been written to the S3 bucket isn't removed.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_cancel_export_task/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_cancel_export_task(ExportTaskIdentifier)

Arguments

ExportTaskIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the snapshot or cluster export task to cancel.


Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group

Description

Copies the specified DB cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_copy_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier or Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the source DB cluster parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid DB cluster parameter group.

TargetDBClusterParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the copied DB cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Can't be null, empty, or blank

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-cluster-param-group1

TargetDBClusterParameterGroupDescription

[required] A description for the copied DB cluster parameter group.

Tags

Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster

Description

Copies a snapshot of a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_copy_db_cluster_snapshot(
  SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL,
  CopyTags = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to copy. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

You can't copy an encrypted, shared DB cluster snapshot from one Amazon Web Services Region to another.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid system snapshot in the "available" state.

  • If the source snapshot is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot identifier.

  • If the source snapshot is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than the copy, specify a valid DB cluster snapshot ARN. For more information, go to Copying Snapshots Across Amazon Web Services Regions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Example: my-cluster-snapshot1

TargetDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot to create from the source DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster-snapshot2

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the Amazon Web Services KMS key.

If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for KmsKeyId to encrypt the copy with a new KMS key. If you don't specify a value for KmsKeyId, then the copy of the DB cluster snapshot is encrypted with the same KMS key as the source DB cluster snapshot.

If you copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot that is shared from another Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for KmsKeyId.

To copy an encrypted DB cluster snapshot to another Amazon Web Services Region, you must set KmsKeyId to the Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier you want to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can't use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.

If you copy an unencrypted DB cluster snapshot and specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, an error is returned.

PreSignedUrl

When you are copying a DB cluster snapshot from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the copy_db_cluster_snapshot API operation in the Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB cluster snapshot to copy. Use the PreSignedUrl parameter when copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from another Amazon Web Services Region. Don't specify PreSignedUrl when copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot in the same Amazon Web Services Region.

This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It's ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.

The presigned URL must be a valid request for the copy_db_cluster_snapshot API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to copy. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:

  • KmsKeyId - The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both the copy_db_cluster_snapshot operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL.

  • DestinationRegion - The name of the Amazon Web Services Region that the DB cluster snapshot is to be created in.

  • SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier - The DB cluster snapshot identifier for the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB cluster snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then your SourceDBClusterSnapshotIdentifier looks like the following example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:cluster-snapshot:aurora-cluster1-snapshot-20161115.

To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.

If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or --source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.

CopyTags

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the source DB cluster snapshot to the target DB cluster snapshot. By default, tags are not copied.

Tags

Copies the specified DB parameter group

Description

Copies the specified DB parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_copy_db_parameter_group(
  SourceDBParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBParameterGroupIdentifier,
  TargetDBParameterGroupDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier or ARN for the source DB parameter group. For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid DB parameter group.

TargetDBParameterGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the copied DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Can't be null, empty, or blank

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-db-parameter-group

TargetDBParameterGroupDescription

[required] A description for the copied DB parameter group.

Tags

Copies the specified DB snapshot

Description

Copies the specified DB snapshot. The source DB snapshot must be in the available state.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_copy_db_snapshot(
  SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier,
  TargetDBSnapshotIdentifier,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  CopyTags = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  TargetCustomAvailabilityZone = NULL,
  CopyOptionGroup = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the source DB snapshot.

If the source snapshot is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot identifier. For example, you might specify rds:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805.

If the source snapshot is in a different Amazon Web Services Region than the copy, specify a valid DB snapshot ARN. For example, you might specify arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805.

If you are copying from a shared manual DB snapshot, this parameter must be the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the shared DB snapshot.

If you are copying an encrypted snapshot this parameter must be in the ARN format for the source Amazon Web Services Region.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid system snapshot in the "available" state.

Example: rds:mydb-2012-04-02-00-01

Example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20130805

TargetDBSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the copy of the snapshot.

Constraints:

  • Can't be null, empty, or blank

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-db-snapshot

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB snapshot. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from your Amazon Web Services account, you can specify a value for this parameter to encrypt the copy with a new KMS key. If you don't specify a value for this parameter, then the copy of the DB snapshot is encrypted with the same Amazon Web Services KMS key as the source DB snapshot.

If you copy an encrypted DB snapshot that is shared from another Amazon Web Services account, then you must specify a value for this parameter.

If you specify this parameter when you copy an unencrypted snapshot, the copy is encrypted.

If you copy an encrypted snapshot to a different Amazon Web Services Region, then you must specify an Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can't use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.

Tags
CopyTags

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the source DB snapshot to the target DB snapshot. By default, tags aren't copied.

PreSignedUrl

When you are copying a snapshot from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the copy_db_snapshot API operation in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB snapshot to copy.

This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It's ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.

You must specify this parameter when you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from another Amazon Web Services Region by using the Amazon RDS API. Don't specify PreSignedUrl when you are copying an encrypted DB snapshot in the same Amazon Web Services Region.

The presigned URL must be a valid request for the copy_db_cluster_snapshot API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster snapshot to copy. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:

  • DestinationRegion - The Amazon Web Services Region that the encrypted DB snapshot is copied to. This Amazon Web Services Region is the same one where the copy_db_snapshot operation is called that contains this presigned URL.

    For example, if you copy an encrypted DB snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region, then you call the copy_db_snapshot operation in the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region and provide a presigned URL that contains a call to the copy_db_snapshot operation in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region. For this example, the DestinationRegion in the presigned URL must be set to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region.

  • KmsKeyId - The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both the copy_db_snapshot operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL.

  • SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier - The DB snapshot identifier for the encrypted snapshot to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB snapshot from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then your SourceDBSnapshotIdentifier looks like the following example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:snapshot:mysql-instance1-snapshot-20161115.

To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.

If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or --source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.

OptionGroupName

The name of an option group to associate with the copy of the snapshot.

Specify this option if you are copying a snapshot from one Amazon Web Services Region to another, and your DB instance uses a nondefault option group. If your source DB instance uses Transparent Data Encryption for Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server, you must specify this option when copying across Amazon Web Services Regions. For more information, see Option group considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

TargetCustomAvailabilityZone

The external custom Availability Zone (CAZ) identifier for the target CAZ.

Example: rds-caz-aiqhTgQv.

CopyOptionGroup

Specifies whether to copy the DB option group associated with the source DB snapshot to the target Amazon Web Services account and associate with the target DB snapshot. The associated option group can be copied only with cross-account snapshot copy calls.


Copies the specified option group

Description

Copies the specified option group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_copy_option_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_copy_option_group(
  SourceOptionGroupIdentifier,
  TargetOptionGroupIdentifier,
  TargetOptionGroupDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceOptionGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the source option group.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid option group.

TargetOptionGroupIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the copied option group.

Constraints:

  • Can't be null, empty, or blank

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-option-group

TargetOptionGroupDescription

[required] The description for the copied option group.

Tags

Creates a blue/green deployment

Description

Creates a blue/green deployment.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_blue_green_deployment/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_blue_green_deployment(
  BlueGreenDeploymentName,
  Source,
  TargetEngineVersion = NULL,
  TargetDBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  TargetDBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  TargetDBInstanceClass = NULL,
  UpgradeTargetStorageConfig = NULL,
  TargetIops = NULL,
  TargetStorageType = NULL,
  TargetAllocatedStorage = NULL,
  TargetStorageThroughput = NULL
)

Arguments

BlueGreenDeploymentName

[required] The name of the blue/green deployment.

Constraints:

  • Can't be the same as an existing blue/green deployment name in the same account and Amazon Web Services Region.

Source

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source production database.

Specify the database that you want to clone. The blue/green deployment creates this database in the green environment. You can make updates to the database in the green environment, such as an engine version upgrade. When you are ready, you can switch the database in the green environment to be the production database.

TargetEngineVersion

The engine version of the database in the green environment.

Specify the engine version to upgrade to in the green environment.

TargetDBParameterGroupName

The DB parameter group associated with the DB instance in the green environment.

To test parameter changes, specify a DB parameter group that is different from the one associated with the source DB instance.

TargetDBClusterParameterGroupName

The DB cluster parameter group associated with the Aurora DB cluster in the green environment.

To test parameter changes, specify a DB cluster parameter group that is different from the one associated with the source DB cluster.

Tags

Tags to assign to the blue/green deployment.

TargetDBInstanceClass

Specify the DB instance class for the databases in the green environment.

This parameter only applies to RDS DB instances, because DB instances within an Aurora DB cluster can have multiple different instance classes. If you're creating a blue/green deployment from an Aurora DB cluster, don't specify this parameter. After the green environment is created, you can individually modify the instance classes of the DB instances within the green DB cluster.

UpgradeTargetStorageConfig

Whether to upgrade the storage file system configuration on the green database. This option migrates the green DB instance from the older 32-bit file system to the preferred configuration. For more information, see Upgrading the storage file system for a DB instance.

TargetIops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to allocate for the green DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS DB instance storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments.

TargetStorageType

The storage type to associate with the green DB instance.

Valid Values: gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments.

TargetAllocatedStorage

The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the green DB instance. You can choose to increase or decrease the allocated storage on the green DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments.

TargetStorageThroughput

The storage throughput value for the green DB instance.

This setting applies only to the gp3 storage type.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora blue/green deployments.


Creates a custom DB engine version (CEV)

Description

Creates a custom DB engine version (CEV).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_custom_db_engine_version/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_custom_db_engine_version(
  Engine,
  EngineVersion,
  DatabaseInstallationFilesS3BucketName = NULL,
  DatabaseInstallationFilesS3Prefix = NULL,
  ImageId = NULL,
  KMSKeyId = NULL,
  Description = NULL,
  Manifest = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  SourceCustomDbEngineVersionIdentifier = NULL,
  UseAwsProvidedLatestImage = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

[required] The database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:

  • custom-oracle-ee

  • custom-oracle-ee-cdb

  • custom-oracle-se2

  • custom-oracle-se2-cdb

EngineVersion

[required] The name of your CEV. The name format is 19.customized_string. For example, a valid CEV name is ⁠19.my_cev1⁠. This setting is required for RDS Custom for Oracle, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of Engine and EngineVersion is unique per customer per Region.

DatabaseInstallationFilesS3BucketName

The name of an Amazon S3 bucket that contains database installation files for your CEV. For example, a valid bucket name is my-custom-installation-files.

DatabaseInstallationFilesS3Prefix

The Amazon S3 directory that contains the database installation files for your CEV. For example, a valid bucket name is 123456789012/cev1. If this setting isn't specified, no prefix is assumed.

ImageId

The ID of the Amazon Machine Image (AMI). For RDS Custom for SQL Server, an AMI ID is required to create a CEV. For RDS Custom for Oracle, the default is the most recent AMI available, but you can specify an AMI ID that was used in a different Oracle CEV. Find the AMIs used by your CEVs by calling the describe_db_engine_versions operation.

KMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted CEV. A symmetric encryption KMS key is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS.

If you have an existing symmetric encryption KMS key in your account, you can use it with RDS Custom. No further action is necessary. If you don't already have a symmetric encryption KMS key in your account, follow the instructions in Creating a symmetric encryption KMS key in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.

You can choose the same symmetric encryption key when you create a CEV and a DB instance, or choose different keys.

Description

An optional description of your CEV.

Manifest

The CEV manifest, which is a JSON document that describes the installation .zip files stored in Amazon S3. Specify the name/value pairs in a file or a quoted string. RDS Custom applies the patches in the order in which they are listed.

The following JSON fields are valid:

MediaImportTemplateVersion

Version of the CEV manifest. The date is in the format YYYY-MM-DD.

databaseInstallationFileNames

Ordered list of installation files for the CEV.

opatchFileNames

Ordered list of OPatch installers used for the Oracle DB engine.

psuRuPatchFileNames

The PSU and RU patches for this CEV.

OtherPatchFileNames

The patches that are not in the list of PSU and RU patches. Amazon RDS applies these patches after applying the PSU and RU patches.

For more information, see Creating the CEV manifest in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Tags
SourceCustomDbEngineVersionIdentifier

The ARN of a CEV to use as a source for creating a new CEV. You can specify a different Amazon Machine Imagine (AMI) by using either Source or UseAwsProvidedLatestImage. You can't specify a different JSON manifest when you specify SourceCustomDbEngineVersionIdentifier.

UseAwsProvidedLatestImage

Specifies whether to use the latest service-provided Amazon Machine Image (AMI) for the CEV. If you specify UseAwsProvidedLatestImage, you can't also specify ImageId.


Creates a new Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster

Description

Creates a new Amazon Aurora DB cluster or Multi-AZ DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_cluster(
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  CharacterSetName = NULL,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MasterUsername = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  ReplicationSourceIdentifier = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  BacktrackWindow = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  EngineMode = NULL,
  ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  RdsCustomClusterConfiguration = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  EnableHttpEndpoint = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  EnableGlobalWriteForwarding = NULL,
  DBClusterInstanceClass = NULL,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  EnableLimitlessDatabase = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  ClusterScalabilityType = NULL,
  DBSystemId = NULL,
  ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnableLocalWriteForwarding = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)

Arguments

AvailabilityZones

A list of Availability Zones (AZs) where you specifically want to create DB instances in the DB cluster.

For information on AZs, see Availability Zones in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

Constraints:

  • Can't specify more than three AZs.

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 1 to 35.

CharacterSetName

The name of the character set (CharacterSet) to associate the DB cluster with.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

DatabaseName

The name for your database of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. A database named postgres is always created. If this parameter is specified, an additional database with this name is created.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier for this DB cluster. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 (for Aurora DB clusters) or 1 to 52 (for Multi-AZ DB clusters) letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster1

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If you don't specify a value, then the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified DB engine and version is used.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DBSubnetGroupName

A DB subnet group to associate with this DB cluster.

This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

Engine

[required] The database engine to use for this DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values:

  • aurora-mysql

  • aurora-postgresql

  • mysql

  • postgres

  • neptune - For information about using Amazon Neptune, see the Amazon Neptune User Guide .

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to use.

To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL version 2 (5.7-compatible) and version 3 (MySQL 8.0-compatible), use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-mysql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

You can supply either 5.7 or 8.0 to use the default engine version for Aurora MySQL version 2 or version 3, respectively.

To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-postgresql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine mysql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine postgres --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

For information about a specific engine, see the following topics:

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Port

The port number on which the instances in the DB cluster accept connections.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values: 1150-65535

Default:

  • RDS for MySQL and Aurora MySQL - 3306

  • RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL - 5432

MasterUsername

The name of the master user for the DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.

MasterUserPassword

The password for the master database user.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • Can contain any printable ASCII character except "/", """, or "@".

  • Can't be specified if ManageMasterUserPassword is turned on.

OptionGroupName

The option group to associate the DB cluster with.

DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can't be modified.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred DB Cluster Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi.

  • Days must be one of Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

ReplicationSourceIdentifier

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance or DB cluster if this DB cluster is created as a read replica.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Tags

Tags to assign to the DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

StorageEncrypted

Specifies whether the DB cluster is encrypted.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

When a KMS key isn't specified in KmsKeyId:

  • If ReplicationSourceIdentifier identifies an encrypted source, then Amazon RDS uses the KMS key used to encrypt the source. Otherwise, Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key.

  • If the StorageEncrypted parameter is enabled and ReplicationSourceIdentifier isn't specified, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

If you create a read replica of an encrypted DB cluster in another Amazon Web Services Region, make sure to set KmsKeyId to a KMS key identifier that is valid in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This KMS key is used to encrypt the read replica in that Amazon Web Services Region.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

PreSignedUrl

When you are replicating a DB cluster from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another, an URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the create_db_cluster operation to be called in the source Amazon Web Services Region where the DB cluster is replicated from. Specify PreSignedUrl only when you are performing cross-Region replication from an encrypted DB cluster.

The presigned URL must be a valid request for the create_db_cluster API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted DB cluster to copy.

The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:

  • KmsKeyId - The KMS key identifier for the KMS key to use to encrypt the copy of the DB cluster in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This should refer to the same KMS key for both the create_db_cluster operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL.

  • DestinationRegion - The name of the Amazon Web Services Region that Aurora read replica will be created in.

  • ReplicationSourceIdentifier - The DB cluster identifier for the encrypted DB cluster to be copied. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are copying an encrypted DB cluster from the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then your ReplicationSourceIdentifier would look like Example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:cluster:aurora-cluster1.

To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.

If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or --source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

BacktrackWindow

The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only

Default: 0

Constraints:

  • If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of log types that need to be enabled for exporting to CloudWatch Logs.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

The following values are valid for each DB engine:

  • Aurora MySQL - audit | error | general | instance | slowquery

  • Aurora PostgreSQL - instance | postgresql

  • RDS for MySQL - error | general | slowquery

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - postgresql | upgrade

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

EngineMode

The DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either provisioned or serverless.

The serverless engine mode only applies for Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters. Aurora Serverless v2 DB clusters use the provisioned engine mode.

For information about limitations and requirements for Serverless DB clusters, see the following sections in the Amazon Aurora User Guide:

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

ScalingConfiguration

For DB clusters in serverless DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

RdsCustomClusterConfiguration

Reserved for future use.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The global cluster ID of an Aurora cluster that becomes the primary cluster in the new global database cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

EnableHttpEndpoint

Specifies whether to enable the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint isn't enabled.

When enabled, the HTTP endpoint provides a connectionless web service API (RDS Data API) for running SQL queries on the DB cluster. You can also query your database from inside the RDS console with the RDS query editor.

For more information, see Using RDS Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the DB cluster to snapshots of the DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB cluster in.

For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster.

For more information, see Kerberos authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

EnableGlobalWriteForwarding

Specifies whether to enable this DB cluster to forward write operations to the primary cluster of a global cluster (Aurora global database). By default, write operations are not allowed on Aurora DB clusters that are secondary clusters in an Aurora global database.

You can set this value only on Aurora DB clusters that are members of an Aurora global database. With this parameter enabled, a secondary cluster can forward writes to the current primary cluster, and the resulting changes are replicated back to this cluster. For the primary DB cluster of an Aurora global database, this value is used immediately if the primary is demoted by a global cluster API operation, but it does nothing until then.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

DBClusterInstanceClass

The compute and memory capacity of each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6gd.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.

For the full list of DB instance classes and availability for your engine, see DB instance class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

AllocatedStorage

The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate to each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB cluster.

For information on storage types for Aurora DB clusters, see Storage configurations for Amazon Aurora DB clusters. For information on storage types for Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Settings for creating Multi-AZ DB clusters.

This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.

When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the Iops parameter is required.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values:

  • Aurora DB clusters - aurora | aurora-iopt1

  • Multi-AZ DB clusters - io1 | io2 | gp3

Default:

  • Aurora DB clusters - aurora

  • Multi-AZ DB clusters - io1

When you create an Aurora DB cluster with the storage type set to aurora-iopt1, the storage type is returned in the response. The storage type isn't returned when you set it to aurora.

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.

For information about valid IOPS values, see Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting is required to create a Multi-AZ DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

Constraints:

  • Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB cluster.

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.

When the DB cluster is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB cluster, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn't permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it.

When the DB cluster isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.

If DBSubnetGroupName isn't specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.

  • If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.

If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB cluster during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB cluster

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values: 0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60

Default: 0

MonitoringRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting up and enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DatabaseInsightsMode

The mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB cluster.

If you set this value to advanced, you must also set the PerformanceInsightsEnabled parameter to true and the PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod parameter to 465.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EnablePerformanceInsights

Specifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.

For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you don't specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain Performance Insights data.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values:

  • 7

  • month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples: 93 (3 months * 31), 341 (11 months * 31), 589 (19 months * 31)

  • 731

Default: 7 days

If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as 94, Amazon RDS issues an error.

EnableLimitlessDatabase

Specifies whether to enable Aurora Limitless Database. You must enable Aurora Limitless Database to create a DB shard group.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

This setting is no longer used. Instead use the ClusterScalabilityType setting.

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration
NetworkType

The network type of the DB cluster.

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

Valid Values: IPV4 | DUAL

ClusterScalabilityType

Specifies the scalability mode of the Aurora DB cluster. When set to limitless, the cluster operates as an Aurora Limitless Database. When set to standard (the default), the cluster uses normal DB instance creation.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

You can't modify this setting after you create the DB cluster.

DBSystemId

Reserved for future use.

ManageMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Can't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if MasterUserPassword is specified.

MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

If you don't specify MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId, then the aws/secretsmanager KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can't use the aws/secretsmanager KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EnableLocalWriteForwarding

Specifies whether read replicas can forward write operations to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren't allowed on reader DB instances.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB cluster's server certificate.

For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this DB cluster.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, creating the DB cluster will fail if the DB major version is past its end of standard support date.

You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support


Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Aurora DB cluster

Description

Creates a new custom endpoint and associates it with an Amazon Aurora DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_cluster_endpoint(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  DBClusterEndpointIdentifier,
  EndpointType,
  StaticMembers = NULL,
  ExcludedMembers = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

DBClusterEndpointIdentifier

[required] The identifier to use for the new endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

EndpointType

[required] The type of the endpoint, one of: READER, WRITER, ANY.

StaticMembers

List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.

ExcludedMembers

List of DB instance identifiers that aren't part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. This parameter is relevant only if the list of static members is empty.

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the Amazon RDS resource.


Creates a new DB cluster parameter group

Description

Creates a new DB cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must not match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.

This value is stored as a lowercase string.

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The DB cluster parameter group family name. A DB cluster parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB cluster parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB cluster running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB cluster parameter group family.

Aurora MySQL

Example: aurora-mysql5.7, aurora-mysql8.0

Aurora PostgreSQL

Example: aurora-postgresql14

RDS for MySQL

Example: mysql8.0

RDS for PostgreSQL

Example: postgres13

To list all of the available parameter group families for a DB engine, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --query "DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily" --engine <engine>⁠

For example, to list all of the available parameter group families for the Aurora PostgreSQL DB engine, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --query "DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily" --engine aurora-postgresql⁠

The output contains duplicates.

The following are the valid DB engine values:

  • aurora-mysql

  • aurora-postgresql

  • mysql

  • postgres

Description

[required] The description for the DB cluster parameter group.

Tags

Tags to assign to the DB cluster parameter group.


Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster

Description

Creates a snapshot of a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_cluster_snapshot(
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster1-snapshot1

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster to create a snapshot for. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

Example: my-cluster1

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the DB cluster snapshot.


Creates a new DB instance

Description

Creates a new DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_instance(
  DBName = NULL,
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass,
  Engine,
  MasterUsername = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  CharacterSetName = NULL,
  NcharCharacterSetName = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
  TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainFqdn = NULL,
  DomainOu = NULL,
  DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
  DomainDnsIps = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  PromotionTier = NULL,
  Timezone = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
  EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
  CustomIamInstanceProfile = NULL,
  BackupTarget = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  StorageThroughput = NULL,
  ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  DBSystemId = NULL,
  DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
  MultiTenant = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)

Arguments

DBName

The meaning of this parameter differs according to the database engine you use.

Amazon Aurora MySQL

The name of the database to create when the primary DB instance of the Aurora MySQL DB cluster is created. If this parameter isn't specified for an Aurora MySQL DB cluster, no database is created in the DB cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must contain 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.

  • Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).

  • Can't be a word reserved by the database engine.

Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL

The name of the database to create when the primary DB instance of the Aurora PostgreSQL DB cluster is created. A database named postgres is always created. If this parameter is specified, an additional database with this name is created.

Constraints:

  • It must contain 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters.

  • Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0 to 9).

  • Can't be a word reserved by the database engine.

Amazon RDS Custom for Oracle

The Oracle System ID (SID) of the created RDS Custom DB instance. If you don't specify a value, the default value is ORCL for non-CDBs and RDSCDB for CDBs.

Default: ORCL

Constraints:

  • Must contain 1 to 8 alphanumeric characters.

  • Must contain a letter.

  • Can't be a word reserved by the database engine.

Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server

Not applicable. Must be null.

RDS for Db2

The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn't specified, no database is created in the DB instance. In some cases, we recommend that you don't add a database name. For more information, see Additional considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must contain 1 to 64 letters or numbers.

  • Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).

  • Can't be a word reserved by the specified database engine.

RDS for MariaDB

The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn't specified, no database is created in the DB instance.

Constraints:

  • Must contain 1 to 64 letters or numbers.

  • Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).

  • Can't be a word reserved by the specified database engine.

RDS for MySQL

The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. If this parameter isn't specified, no database is created in the DB instance.

Constraints:

  • Must contain 1 to 64 letters or numbers.

  • Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).

  • Can't be a word reserved by the specified database engine.

RDS for Oracle

The Oracle System ID (SID) of the created DB instance. If you don't specify a value, the default value is ORCL. You can't specify the string null, or any other reserved word, for DBName.

Default: ORCL

Constraints:

  • Can't be longer than 8 characters.

RDS for PostgreSQL

The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. A database named postgres is always created. If this parameter is specified, an additional database with this name is created.

Constraints:

  • Must contain 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or underscores.

  • Must begin with a letter. Subsequent characters can be letters, underscores, or digits (0-9).

  • Can't be a word reserved by the specified database engine.

RDS for SQL Server

Not applicable. Must be null.

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The identifier for this DB instance. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: mydbinstance

AllocatedStorage

The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Aurora cluster volumes automatically grow as the amount of data in your database increases, though you are only charged for the space that you use in an Aurora cluster volume.

Amazon RDS Custom

Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:

  • General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 40 to 65536 for RDS Custom for Oracle, 16384 for RDS Custom for SQL Server.

  • Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 40 to 65536 for RDS Custom for Oracle, 16384 for RDS Custom for SQL Server.

RDS for Db2

Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:

  • General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.

  • Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.

RDS for MariaDB

Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:

  • General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.

  • Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.

  • Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.

RDS for MySQL

Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:

  • General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.

  • Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.

  • Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.

RDS for Oracle

Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:

  • General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.

  • Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.

  • Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 10 to 3072.

RDS for PostgreSQL

Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:

  • General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3): Must be an integer from 20 to 65536.

  • Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2): Must be an integer from 100 to 65536.

  • Magnetic storage (standard): Must be an integer from 5 to 3072.

RDS for SQL Server

Constraints to the amount of storage for each storage type are the following:

  • General Purpose (SSD) storage (gp2, gp3):

    • Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 16384.

    • Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 16384.

  • Provisioned IOPS storage (io1, io2):

    • Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 100 to 16384.

    • Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 100 to 16384.

  • Magnetic storage (standard):

    • Enterprise and Standard editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 1024.

    • Web and Express editions: Must be an integer from 20 to 1024.

DBInstanceClass

[required] The compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example db.m5.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB instance classes in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Aurora DB instance classes in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Engine

[required] The database engine to use for this DB instance.

Not every database engine is available in every Amazon Web Services Region.

Valid Values:

  • aurora-mysql (for Aurora MySQL DB instances)

  • aurora-postgresql (for Aurora PostgreSQL DB instances)

  • custom-oracle-ee (for RDS Custom for Oracle DB instances)

  • custom-oracle-ee-cdb (for RDS Custom for Oracle DB instances)

  • custom-oracle-se2 (for RDS Custom for Oracle DB instances)

  • custom-oracle-se2-cdb (for RDS Custom for Oracle DB instances)

  • custom-sqlserver-ee (for RDS Custom for SQL Server DB instances)

  • custom-sqlserver-se (for RDS Custom for SQL Server DB instances)

  • custom-sqlserver-web (for RDS Custom for SQL Server DB instances)

  • custom-sqlserver-dev (for RDS Custom for SQL Server DB instances)

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

MasterUsername

The name for the master user.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The name for the master user is managed by the DB cluster.

This setting is required for RDS DB instances.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 16 letters, numbers, or underscores.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.

MasterUserPassword

The password for the master user.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The password for the master user is managed by the DB cluster.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified if ManageMasterUserPassword is turned on.

  • Can include any printable ASCII character except "/", """, or "@". For RDS for Oracle, can't include the "&" (ampersand) or the "'" (single quotes) character.

Length Constraints:

  • RDS for Db2 - Must contain from 8 to 255 characters.

  • RDS for MariaDB - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.

  • RDS for MySQL - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • RDS for Oracle - Must contain from 8 to 30 characters.

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.

DBSecurityGroups

A list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance.

This setting applies to the legacy EC2-Classic platform, which is no longer used to create new DB instances. Use the VpcSecurityGroupIds setting instead.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster.

Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC.

AvailabilityZone

The Availability Zone (AZ) where the database will be created. For information on Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Regions and Availability Zones.

For Amazon Aurora, each Aurora DB cluster hosts copies of its storage in three separate Availability Zones. Specify one of these Availability Zones. Aurora automatically chooses an appropriate Availability Zone if you don't specify one.

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Web Services Region.

Constraints:

  • The AvailabilityZone parameter can't be specified if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.

  • The specified Availability Zone must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the current endpoint.

Example: ⁠us-east-1d⁠

DBSubnetGroupName

A DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance.

Constraints:

  • Must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur. For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi.

  • The day values must be mon | tue | wed | thu | fri | sat | sun.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred backup window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

DBParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance. If you don't specify a value, then Amazon RDS uses the default DB parameter group for the specified DB engine and version.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster.

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 0 to 35.

  • Can't be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas.

  • Can't be set to 0 for an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter. The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

Port

The port number on which the database accepts connections.

This setting doesn't apply to Aurora DB instances. The port number is managed by the cluster.

Valid Values: 1150-65535

Default:

  • RDS for Db2 - 50000

  • RDS for MariaDB - 3306

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - 1433

  • RDS for MySQL - 3306

  • RDS for Oracle - 1521

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - 5432

Constraints:

  • For RDS for Microsoft SQL Server, the value can't be 1234, 1434, 3260, 3343, 3389, 47001, or 49152-49156.

MultiAZ

Specifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. You can't set the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora (DB instance Availability Zones (AZs) are managed by the DB cluster.)

  • RDS Custom

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to use.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The version number of the database engine the DB instance uses is managed by the DB cluster.

For a list of valid engine versions, use the describe_db_engine_versions operation.

The following are the database engines and links to information about the major and minor versions that are available with Amazon RDS. Not every database engine is available for every Amazon Web Services Region.

Amazon RDS Custom for Oracle

A custom engine version (CEV) that you have previously created. This setting is required for RDS Custom for Oracle. The CEV name has the following format: 19.customized_string. A valid CEV name is ⁠19.my_cev1⁠. For more information, see Creating an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Amazon RDS Custom for SQL Server

See RDS Custom for SQL Server general requirements in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

RDS for Db2

For information, see Db2 on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

RDS for MariaDB

For information, see MariaDB on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

RDS for Microsoft SQL Server

For information, see Microsoft SQL Server versions on Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

RDS for MySQL

For information, see MySQL on Amazon RDS versions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

RDS for Oracle

For information, see Oracle Database Engine release notes in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

RDS for PostgreSQL

For information, see Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.

If you create an RDS Custom DB instance, you must set AutoMinorVersionUpgrade to false.

LicenseModel

The license model information for this DB instance.

License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

The default for RDS for Db2 is bring-your-own-license.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values:

  • RDS for Db2 - bring-your-own-license | marketplace-license

  • RDS for MariaDB - general-public-license

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - license-included

  • RDS for MySQL - general-public-license

  • RDS for Oracle - bring-your-own-license | license-included

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - postgresql-license

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS DB instance storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Storage is managed by the DB cluster.

Constraints:

  • For RDS for Db2, MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, and PostgreSQL - Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.

  • For RDS for SQL Server - Must be a multiple between 1 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.

OptionGroupName

The option group to associate the DB instance with.

Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group. Also, that option group can't be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

CharacterSetName

For supported engines, the character set (CharacterSet) to associate the DB instance with.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora - The character set is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster.

  • RDS Custom - However, if you need to change the character set, you can change it on the database itself.

NcharCharacterSetName

The name of the NCHAR character set for the Oracle DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.

When the DB instance is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB instance's virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB instance, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn't permit it.

When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.

If DBSubnetGroupName isn't specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is private.

  • If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is public.

If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is private.

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB instance is public.

Tags

Tags to assign to the DB instance.

DBClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the DB cluster that this DB instance will belong to.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB instance.

If you specify io1, io2, or gp3, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Storage is managed by the DB cluster.

Valid Values: gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard

Default: io1, if the Iops parameter is specified. Otherwise, gp2.

TdeCredentialArn

The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

TdeCredentialPassword

The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

StorageEncrypted

Specifes whether the DB instance is encrypted. By default, it isn't encrypted.

For RDS Custom DB instances, either enable this setting or leave it unset. Otherwise, Amazon RDS reports an error.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The encryption for DB instances is managed by the DB cluster.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster.

If StorageEncrypted is enabled, and you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

For Amazon RDS Custom, a KMS key is required for DB instances. For most RDS engines, if you leave this parameter empty while enabling StorageEncrypted, the engine uses the default KMS key. However, RDS Custom doesn't use the default key when this parameter is empty. You must explicitly specify a key.

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB instance in. Currently, you can create only Db2, MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.

For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora (The domain is managed by the DB cluster.)

  • RDS Custom

DomainFqdn

The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.

Constraints:

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain

DomainOu

The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the distinguished name format.

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: ⁠OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain⁠

DomainAuthSecretArn

The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.

Example: arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456

DomainDnsIps

The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.

Constraints:

  • Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn't a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.

Example: ⁠123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237⁠

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Copying tags to snapshots is managed by the DB cluster. Setting this value for an Aurora DB instance has no effect on the DB cluster setting.

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collection of Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, then you must set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values: 0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60

Default: 0

MonitoringRoleArn

The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting Up and Enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora (The domain is managed by the DB cluster.)

  • RDS Custom

PromotionTier

The order of priority in which an Aurora Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. For more information, see Fault Tolerance for an Aurora DB Cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Default: 1

Valid Values: 0 - 15

Timezone

The time zone of the DB instance. The time zone parameter is currently supported only by RDS for Db2 and RDS for SQL Server.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

For more information, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora (Mapping Amazon Web Services IAM accounts to database accounts is managed by the DB cluster.)

  • RDS Custom

DatabaseInsightsMode

The mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance.

Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can't change this value.

EnablePerformanceInsights

Specifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance. For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you don't specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain Performance Insights data.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values:

  • 7

  • month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples: 93 (3 months * 31), 341 (11 months * 31), 589 (19 months * 31)

  • 731

Default: 7 days

If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as 94, Amazon RDS returns an error.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of log types to enable for exporting to CloudWatch Logs. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora (CloudWatch Logs exports are managed by the DB cluster.)

  • RDS Custom

The following values are valid for each DB engine:

  • RDS for Db2 - diag.log | notify.log

  • RDS for MariaDB - audit | error | general | slowquery

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - agent | error

  • RDS for MySQL - audit | error | general | slowquery

  • RDS for Oracle - alert | audit | listener | trace | oemagent

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - postgresql | upgrade

ProcessorFeatures

The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. You can enable or disable deletion protection for the DB cluster. For more information, see create_db_cluster. DB instances in a DB cluster can be deleted even when deletion protection is enabled for the DB cluster.

MaxAllocatedStorage

The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.

For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora (Storage is managed by the DB cluster.)

  • RDS Custom

EnableCustomerOwnedIp

Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.

A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.

For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.

CustomIamInstanceProfile

The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance.

This setting is required for RDS Custom.

Constraints:

  • The profile must exist in your account.

  • The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.

  • The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix AWSRDSCustom.

For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

BackupTarget

The location for storing automated backups and manual snapshots.

Valid Values:

  • outposts (Amazon Web Services Outposts)

  • region (Amazon Web Services Region)

Default: region

For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

NetworkType

The network type of the DB instance.

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid Values: IPV4 | DUAL

StorageThroughput

The storage throughput value, in mebibyte per second (MiBps), for the DB instance.

This setting applies only to the gp3 storage type.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

ManageMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Can't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if MasterUserPassword is specified.

MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

If you don't specify MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId, then the aws/secretsmanager KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can't use the aws/secretsmanager KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

DBSystemId

The Oracle system identifier (SID), which is the name of the Oracle database instance that manages your database files. In this context, the term "Oracle database instance" refers exclusively to the system global area (SGA) and Oracle background processes. If you don't specify a SID, the value defaults to RDSCDB. The Oracle SID is also the name of your CDB.

DedicatedLogVolume

Indicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled.

MultiTenant

Specifies whether to use the multi-tenant configuration or the single-tenant configuration (default). This parameter only applies to RDS for Oracle container database (CDB) engines.

Note the following restrictions:

  • The DB engine that you specify in the request must support the multi-tenant configuration. If you attempt to enable the multi-tenant configuration on a DB engine that doesn't support it, the request fails.

  • If you specify the multi-tenant configuration when you create your DB instance, you can't later modify this DB instance to use the single-tenant configuration.

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this DB instance.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, creating the DB instance will fail if the DB major version is past its end of standard support date.

This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster.

You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support


Creates a new DB instance that acts as a read replica for an existing source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster

Description

Creates a new DB instance that acts as a read replica for an existing source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster. You can create a read replica for a DB instance running Db2, MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, or SQL Server. You can create a read replica for a Multi-AZ DB cluster running MySQL or PostgreSQL. For more information, see Working with read replicas and Migrating from a Multi-AZ DB cluster to a DB instance using a read replica in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_instance_read_replica/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_instance_read_replica(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  SourceDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  DomainFqdn = NULL,
  DomainOu = NULL,
  DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
  DomainDnsIps = NULL,
  ReplicaMode = NULL,
  MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
  CustomIamInstanceProfile = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  StorageThroughput = NULL,
  EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
  UpgradeStorageConfig = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier of the read replica. This identifier is the unique key that identifies a DB instance. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

SourceDBInstanceIdentifier

The identifier of the DB instance that will act as the source for the read replica. Each DB instance can have up to 15 read replicas, with the exception of Oracle and SQL Server, which can have up to five.

Constraints:

  • Must be the identifier of an existing Db2, MariaDB, MySQL, Oracle, PostgreSQL, or SQL Server DB instance.

  • Can't be specified if the SourceDBClusterIdentifier parameter is also specified.

  • For the limitations of Oracle read replicas, see Version and licensing considerations for RDS for Oracle replicas in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

  • For the limitations of SQL Server read replicas, see Read replica limitations with SQL Server in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

  • The specified DB instance must have automatic backups enabled, that is, its backup retention period must be greater than 0.

  • If the source DB instance is in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the read replica, specify a valid DB instance identifier.

  • If the source DB instance is in a different Amazon Web Services Region from the read replica, specify a valid DB instance ARN. For more information, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide. This doesn't apply to SQL Server or RDS Custom, which don't support cross-Region replicas.

DBInstanceClass

The compute and memory capacity of the read replica, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance.

AvailabilityZone

The Availability Zone (AZ) where the read replica will be created.

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Web Services Region.

Example: ⁠us-east-1d⁠

Port

The port number that the DB instance uses for connections.

Valid Values: 1150-65535

Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance.

MultiAZ

Specifies whether the read replica is in a Multi-AZ deployment.

You can create a read replica as a Multi-AZ DB instance. RDS creates a standby of your replica in another Availability Zone for failover support for the replica. Creating your read replica as a Multi-AZ DB instance is independent of whether the source is a Multi-AZ DB instance or a Multi-AZ DB cluster.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether to automatically apply minor engine upgrades to the read replica during the maintenance window.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Default: Inherits the value from the source DB instance.

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance.

OptionGroupName

The option group to associate the DB instance with. If not specified, RDS uses the option group associated with the source DB instance or cluster.

For SQL Server, you must use the option group associated with the source.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DBParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this read replica DB instance.

For Single-AZ or Multi-AZ DB instance read replica instances, if you don't specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then Amazon RDS uses the DBParameterGroup of the source DB instance for a same Region read replica, or the default DBParameterGroup for the specified DB engine for a cross-Region read replica.

For Multi-AZ DB cluster same Region read replica instances, if you don't specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then Amazon RDS uses the default DBParameterGroup.

Specifying a parameter group for this operation is only supported for MySQL DB instances for cross-Region read replicas, for Multi-AZ DB cluster read replica instances, and for Oracle DB instances. It isn't supported for MySQL DB instances for same Region read replicas or for RDS Custom.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.

When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster's VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn't permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it.

When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

For more information, see create_db_instance.

Tags
DBSubnetGroupName

A DB subnet group for the DB instance. The new DB instance is created in the VPC associated with the DB subnet group. If no DB subnet group is specified, then the new DB instance isn't created in a VPC.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.

  • The specified DB subnet group must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region in which the operation is running.

  • All read replicas in one Amazon Web Services Region that are created from the same source DB instance must either:

    • Specify DB subnet groups from the same VPC. All these read replicas are created in the same VPC.

    • Not specify a DB subnet group. All these read replicas are created outside of any VPC.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the read replica.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC.

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the read replica.

If you specify io1, io2, or gp3, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.

Valid Values: gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard

Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified. Otherwise, gp2.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the read replica to snapshots of the read replica. By default, tags aren't copied.

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the read replica. To disable collection of Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0. The default is 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, then you must set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values: ⁠0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60⁠

Default: 0

MonitoringRoleArn

The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, go to To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted read replica.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you create an encrypted read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the source DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster, don't specify a value for this parameter. A read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region is always encrypted with the same KMS key as the source DB instance or cluster.

If you create an encrypted read replica in a different Amazon Web Services Region, then you must specify a KMS key identifier for the destination Amazon Web Services Region. KMS keys are specific to the Amazon Web Services Region that they are created in, and you can't use KMS keys from one Amazon Web Services Region in another Amazon Web Services Region.

You can't create an encrypted read replica from an unencrypted DB instance or Multi-AZ DB cluster.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom, which uses the same KMS key as the primary replica.

PreSignedUrl

When you are creating a read replica from one Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region to another or from one China Amazon Web Services Region to another, the URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the create_db_instance_read_replica API operation in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB instance.

This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions and China Amazon Web Services Regions. It's ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.

This setting applies only when replicating from a source DB instance. Source DB clusters aren't supported in Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions and China Amazon Web Services Regions.

You must specify this parameter when you create an encrypted read replica from another Amazon Web Services Region by using the Amazon RDS API. Don't specify PreSignedUrl when you are creating an encrypted read replica in the same Amazon Web Services Region.

The presigned URL must be a valid request for the create_db_instance_read_replica API operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region that contains the encrypted source DB instance. The presigned URL request must contain the following parameter values:

  • DestinationRegion - The Amazon Web Services Region that the encrypted read replica is created in. This Amazon Web Services Region is the same one where the create_db_instance_read_replica operation is called that contains this presigned URL.

    For example, if you create an encrypted DB instance in the us-west-1 Amazon Web Services Region, from a source DB instance in the us-east-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then you call the create_db_instance_read_replica operation in the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region and provide a presigned URL that contains a call to the create_db_instance_read_replica operation in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region. For this example, the DestinationRegion in the presigned URL must be set to the us-east-1 Amazon Web Services Region.

  • KmsKeyId - The KMS key identifier for the key to use to encrypt the read replica in the destination Amazon Web Services Region. This is the same identifier for both the create_db_instance_read_replica operation that is called in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, and the operation contained in the presigned URL.

  • SourceDBInstanceIdentifier - The DB instance identifier for the encrypted DB instance to be replicated. This identifier must be in the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for the source Amazon Web Services Region. For example, if you are creating an encrypted read replica from a DB instance in the us-west-2 Amazon Web Services Region, then your SourceDBInstanceIdentifier looks like the following example: arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:instance:mysql-instance1-20161115.

To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.

If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or --source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DatabaseInsightsMode

The mode of Database Insights to enable for the read replica.

This setting isn't supported.

EnablePerformanceInsights

Specifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the read replica.

For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain Performance Insights data.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values:

  • 7

  • month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples: 93 (3 months * 31), 341 (11 months * 31), 589 (19 months * 31)

  • 731

Default: 7 days

If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as 94, Amazon RDS returns an error.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs that the new DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

ProcessorFeatures

The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

UseDefaultProcessorFeatures

Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to create the DB instance in. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain.

For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DomainFqdn

The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.

Constraints:

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain

DomainOu

The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the distinguished name format.

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: ⁠OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain⁠

DomainAuthSecretArn

The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.

Example: arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456

DomainDnsIps

The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.

Constraints:

  • Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn't a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.

Example: ⁠123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237⁠

ReplicaMode

The open mode of the replica database: mounted or read-only.

This parameter is only supported for Oracle DB instances.

Mounted DB replicas are included in Oracle Database Enterprise Edition. The main use case for mounted replicas is cross-Region disaster recovery. The primary database doesn't use Active Data Guard to transmit information to the mounted replica. Because it doesn't accept user connections, a mounted replica can't serve a read-only workload.

You can create a combination of mounted and read-only DB replicas for the same primary DB instance. For more information, see Working with Oracle Read Replicas for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For RDS Custom, you must specify this parameter and set it to mounted. The value won't be set by default. After replica creation, you can manage the open mode manually.

MaxAllocatedStorage

The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.

For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

CustomIamInstanceProfile

The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:

  • The profile must exist in your account.

  • The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.

  • The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix AWSRDSCustom.

For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting is required for RDS Custom DB instances.

NetworkType

The network type of the DB instance.

Valid Values:

  • IPV4

  • DUAL

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for read replica. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

StorageThroughput

Specifies the storage throughput value for the read replica.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora DB instances.

EnableCustomerOwnedIp

Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts read replica.

A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the read replica from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.

For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.

AllocatedStorage

The amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the read replica. Follow the allocation rules specified in create_db_instance.

This setting isn't valid for RDS for SQL Server.

Be sure to allocate enough storage for your read replica so that the create operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth.

SourceDBClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the Multi-AZ DB cluster that will act as the source for the read replica. Each DB cluster can have up to 15 read replicas.

Constraints:

  • Must be the identifier of an existing Multi-AZ DB cluster.

  • Can't be specified if the SourceDBInstanceIdentifier parameter is also specified.

  • The specified DB cluster must have automatic backups enabled, that is, its backup retention period must be greater than 0.

  • The source DB cluster must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the read replica. Cross-Region replication isn't supported.

DedicatedLogVolume

Indicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled.

UpgradeStorageConfig

Whether to upgrade the storage file system configuration on the read replica. This option migrates the read replica from the old storage file system layout to the preferred layout.

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the read replica's server certificate.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.


Creates a new DB parameter group

Description

Creates a new DB parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_parameter_group(
  DBParameterGroupName,
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

This value is stored as a lowercase string.

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The DB parameter group family name. A DB parameter group can be associated with one and only one DB parameter group family, and can be applied only to a DB instance running a database engine and engine version compatible with that DB parameter group family.

To list all of the available parameter group families for a DB engine, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --query "DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily" --engine <engine>⁠

For example, to list all of the available parameter group families for the MySQL DB engine, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --query "DBEngineVersions[].DBParameterGroupFamily" --engine mysql⁠

The output contains duplicates.

The following are the valid DB engine values:

  • aurora-mysql

  • aurora-postgresql

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

Description

[required] The description for the DB parameter group.

Tags

Tags to assign to the DB parameter group.


Creates a new DB proxy

Description

Creates a new DB proxy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_proxy/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_proxy(
  DBProxyName,
  EngineFamily,
  Auth,
  RoleArn,
  VpcSubnetIds,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  RequireTLS = NULL,
  IdleClientTimeout = NULL,
  DebugLogging = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

[required] The identifier for the proxy. This name must be unique for all proxies owned by your Amazon Web Services account in the specified Amazon Web Services Region. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

EngineFamily

[required] The kinds of databases that the proxy can connect to. This value determines which database network protocol the proxy recognizes when it interprets network traffic to and from the database. For Aurora MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and RDS for MySQL databases, specify MYSQL. For Aurora PostgreSQL and RDS for PostgreSQL databases, specify POSTGRESQL. For RDS for Microsoft SQL Server, specify SQLSERVER.

Auth

[required] The authorization mechanism that the proxy uses.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that the proxy uses to access secrets in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

VpcSubnetIds

[required] One or more VPC subnet IDs to associate with the new proxy.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

One or more VPC security group IDs to associate with the new proxy.

RequireTLS

Specifies whether Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption is required for connections to the proxy. By enabling this setting, you can enforce encrypted TLS connections to the proxy.

IdleClientTimeout

The number of seconds that a connection to the proxy can be inactive before the proxy disconnects it. You can set this value higher or lower than the connection timeout limit for the associated database.

DebugLogging

Specifies whether the proxy includes detailed information about SQL statements in its logs. This information helps you to debug issues involving SQL behavior or the performance and scalability of the proxy connections. The debug information includes the text of SQL statements that you submit through the proxy. Thus, only enable this setting when needed for debugging, and only when you have security measures in place to safeguard any sensitive information that appears in the logs.

Tags

An optional set of key-value pairs to associate arbitrary data of your choosing with the proxy.


Creates a DBProxyEndpoint

Description

Creates a DBProxyEndpoint. Only applies to proxies that are associated with Aurora DB clusters. You can use DB proxy endpoints to specify read/write or read-only access to the DB cluster. You can also use DB proxy endpoints to access a DB proxy through a different VPC than the proxy's default VPC.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_proxy_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_proxy_endpoint(
  DBProxyName,
  DBProxyEndpointName,
  VpcSubnetIds,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  TargetRole = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

[required] The name of the DB proxy associated with the DB proxy endpoint that you create.

DBProxyEndpointName

[required] The name of the DB proxy endpoint to create.

VpcSubnetIds

[required] The VPC subnet IDs for the DB proxy endpoint that you create. You can specify a different set of subnet IDs than for the original DB proxy.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

The VPC security group IDs for the DB proxy endpoint that you create. You can specify a different set of security group IDs than for the original DB proxy. The default is the default security group for the VPC.

TargetRole

The role of the DB proxy endpoint. The role determines whether the endpoint can be used for read/write or only read operations. The default is READ_WRITE. The only role that proxies for RDS for Microsoft SQL Server support is READ_WRITE.

Tags

Creates a new DB security group

Description

Creates a new DB security group. DB security groups control access to a DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_security_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_security_group(
  DBSecurityGroupName,
  DBSecurityGroupDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSecurityGroupName

[required] The name for the DB security group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

  • Must not be "Default"

Example: mysecuritygroup

DBSecurityGroupDescription

[required] The description for the DB security group.

Tags

Tags to assign to the DB security group.


Creates a new DB shard group for Aurora Limitless Database

Description

Creates a new DB shard group for Aurora Limitless Database. You must enable Aurora Limitless Database to create a DB shard group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_shard_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_shard_group(
  DBShardGroupIdentifier,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  ComputeRedundancy = NULL,
  MaxACU,
  MinACU = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBShardGroupIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB shard group.

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the primary DB cluster for the DB shard group.

ComputeRedundancy

Specifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:

  • 0 - Creates a DB shard group without a standby DB shard group. This is the default value.

  • 1 - Creates a DB shard group with a standby DB shard group in a different Availability Zone (AZ).

  • 2 - Creates a DB shard group with two standby DB shard groups in two different AZs.

MaxACU

[required] The maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).

MinACU

The minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB shard group is publicly accessible.

When the DB shard group is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB shard group's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB shard group's VPC. Access to the DB shard group is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB shard group doesn't permit it.

When the DB shard group isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB shard group with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.

If DBSubnetGroupName isn't specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB shard group is private.

  • If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB shard group is public.

If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB shard group is private.

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB shard group is public.

Tags

Creates a snapshot of a DB instance

Description

Creates a snapshot of a DB instance. The source DB instance must be in the available or storage-optimization state.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_snapshot(DBSnapshotIdentifier, DBInstanceIdentifier, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

DBSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot.

Constraints:

  • Can't be null, empty, or blank

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-snapshot-id

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB instance that you want to create the snapshot of.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

Tags

Creates a new DB subnet group

Description

Creates a new DB subnet group. DB subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two AZs in the Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_db_subnet_group(
  DBSubnetGroupName,
  DBSubnetGroupDescription,
  SubnetIds,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain no more than 255 letters, numbers, periods, underscores, spaces, or hyphens.

  • Must not be default.

  • First character must be a letter.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

DBSubnetGroupDescription

[required] The description for the DB subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] The EC2 Subnet IDs for the DB subnet group.

Tags

Tags to assign to the DB subnet group.


Creates an RDS event notification subscription

Description

Creates an RDS event notification subscription. This operation requires a topic Amazon Resource Name (ARN) created by either the RDS console, the SNS console, or the SNS API. To obtain an ARN with SNS, you must create a topic in Amazon SNS and subscribe to the topic. The ARN is displayed in the SNS console.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_event_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SnsTopicArn,
  SourceType = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  SourceIds = NULL,
  Enabled = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the subscription.

Constraints: The name must be less than 255 characters.

SnsTopicArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. SNS automatically creates the ARN when you create a topic and subscribe to it.

RDS doesn't support FIFO (first in, first out) topics. For more information, see Message ordering and deduplication (FIFO topics) in the Amazon Simple Notification Service Developer Guide.

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you set this parameter to db-instance. For RDS Proxy events, specify db-proxy. If this value isn't specified, all events are returned.

Valid Values:db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot | db-proxy | zero-etl | custom-engine-version | blue-green-deployment

EventCategories

A list of event categories for a particular source type (SourceType) that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given source type in the "Amazon RDS event categories and event messages" section of the Amazon RDS User Guide or the Amazon Aurora User Guide . You can also see this list by using the describe_event_categories operation.

SourceIds

The list of identifiers of the event sources for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens. It can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Constraints:

  • If SourceIds are supplied, SourceType must also be provided.

  • If the source type is a DB instance, a DBInstanceIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB cluster, a DBClusterIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB security group, a DBSecurityGroupName value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a DBProxyName value must be supplied.

Enabled

Specifies whether to activate the subscription. If the event notification subscription isn't activated, the subscription is created but not active.

Tags

Creates an Aurora global database spread across multiple Amazon Web Services Regions

Description

Creates an Aurora global database spread across multiple Amazon Web Services Regions. The global database contains a single primary cluster with read-write capability, and a read-only secondary cluster that receives data from the primary cluster through high-speed replication performed by the Aurora storage subsystem.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier for this global database cluster. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

SourceDBClusterIdentifier

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to use as the primary cluster of the global database.

If you provide a value for this parameter, don't specify values for the following settings because Amazon Aurora uses the values from the specified source DB cluster:

  • DatabaseName

  • Engine

  • EngineVersion

  • StorageEncrypted

Engine

The database engine to use for this global database cluster.

Valid Values: aurora-mysql | aurora-postgresql

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified if SourceDBClusterIdentifier is specified. In this case, Amazon Aurora uses the engine of the source DB cluster.

EngineVersion

The engine version to use for this global database cluster.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified if SourceDBClusterIdentifier is specified. In this case, Amazon Aurora uses the engine version of the source DB cluster.

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this global database cluster.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your global cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, creating the global cluster will fail if the DB major version is past its end of standard support date.

This setting only applies to Aurora PostgreSQL-based global databases.

You can use this setting to enroll your global cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your global cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the new global database cluster. The global database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.

DatabaseName

The name for your database of up to 64 alphanumeric characters. If you don't specify a name, Amazon Aurora doesn't create a database in the global database cluster.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified if SourceDBClusterIdentifier is specified. In this case, Amazon Aurora uses the database name from the source DB cluster.

StorageEncrypted

Specifies whether to enable storage encryption for the new global database cluster.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified if SourceDBClusterIdentifier is specified. In this case, Amazon Aurora uses the setting from the source DB cluster.

Tags

Tags to assign to the global cluster.


Creates a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift

Description

Creates a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_integration/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_integration(
  SourceArn,
  TargetArn,
  IntegrationName,
  KMSKeyId = NULL,
  AdditionalEncryptionContext = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  DataFilter = NULL,
  Description = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the database to use as the source for replication.

TargetArn

[required] The ARN of the Redshift data warehouse to use as the target for replication.

IntegrationName

[required] The name of the integration.

KMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services Key Management System (Amazon Web Services KMS) key identifier for the key to use to encrypt the integration. If you don't specify an encryption key, RDS uses a default Amazon Web Services owned key.

AdditionalEncryptionContext

An optional set of non-secret key–value pairs that contains additional contextual information about the data. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.

You can only include this parameter if you specify the KMSKeyId parameter.

Tags
DataFilter

Data filtering options for the integration. For more information, see Data filtering for Aurora zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift or Data filtering for Amazon RDS zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.

Description

A description of the integration.


Creates a new option group

Description

Creates a new option group. You can create up to 20 option groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_option_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_option_group(
  OptionGroupName,
  EngineName,
  MajorEngineVersion,
  OptionGroupDescription,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

OptionGroupName

[required] Specifies the name of the option group to be created.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: myoptiongroup

EngineName

[required] The name of the engine to associate this option group with.

Valid Values:

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

MajorEngineVersion

[required] Specifies the major version of the engine that this option group should be associated with.

OptionGroupDescription

[required] The description of the option group.

Tags

Tags to assign to the option group.


Creates a tenant database in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration

Description

Creates a tenant database in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration. Only RDS for Oracle container database (CDB) instances are supported.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_create_tenant_database/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_create_tenant_database(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  TenantDBName,
  MasterUsername,
  MasterUserPassword,
  CharacterSetName = NULL,
  NcharCharacterSetName = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The user-supplied DB instance identifier. RDS creates your tenant database in this DB instance. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

TenantDBName

[required] The user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to create in your DB instance. This parameter has the same constraints as DBName in create_db_instance.

MasterUsername

[required] The name for the master user account in your tenant database. RDS creates this user account in the tenant database and grants privileges to the master user. This parameter is case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 16 letters, numbers, or underscores.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.

MasterUserPassword

[required] The password for the master user in your tenant database.

Constraints:

  • Must be 8 to 30 characters.

  • Can include any printable ASCII character except forward slash (/), double quote (⁠\"⁠), at symbol (@), ampersand (&), or single quote (⁠\'⁠).

CharacterSetName

The character set for your tenant database. If you don't specify a value, the character set name defaults to AL32UTF8.

NcharCharacterSetName

The NCHAR value for the tenant database.

Tags

Deletes a blue/green deployment

Description

Deletes a blue/green deployment.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_blue_green_deployment/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_blue_green_deployment(
  BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier,
  DeleteTarget = NULL
)

Arguments

BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the blue/green deployment to delete. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match an existing blue/green deployment identifier.

DeleteTarget

Specifies whether to delete the resources in the green environment. You can't specify this option if the blue/green deployment status is SWITCHOVER_COMPLETED.


Deletes a custom engine version

Description

Deletes a custom engine version. To run this command, make sure you meet the following prerequisites:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_custom_db_engine_version/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_custom_db_engine_version(Engine, EngineVersion)

Arguments

Engine

[required] The database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:

  • custom-oracle-ee

  • custom-oracle-ee-cdb

  • custom-oracle-se2

  • custom-oracle-se2-cdb

EngineVersion

[required] The custom engine version (CEV) for your DB instance. This option is required for RDS Custom, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of Engine and EngineVersion is unique per customer per Amazon Web Services Region.


The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster

Description

The DeleteDBCluster action deletes a previously provisioned DB cluster. When you delete a DB cluster, all automated backups for that DB cluster are deleted and can't be recovered. Manual DB cluster snapshots of the specified DB cluster are not deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
  FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  DeleteAutomatedBackups = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster to be deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.

SkipFinalSnapshot

Specifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB cluster snapshot before RDS deletes the DB cluster. If you set this value to true, RDS doesn't create a final DB cluster snapshot. If you set this value to false or don't specify it, RDS creates a DB cluster snapshot before it deletes the DB cluster. By default, this parameter is disabled, so RDS creates a final DB cluster snapshot.

If SkipFinalSnapshot is disabled, you must specify a value for the FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter.

FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier

The DB cluster snapshot identifier of the new DB cluster snapshot created when SkipFinalSnapshot is disabled.

If you specify this parameter and also skip the creation of a final DB cluster snapshot with the SkipFinalShapshot parameter, the request results in an error.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

DeleteAutomatedBackups

Specifies whether to remove automated backups immediately after the DB cluster is deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. The default is to remove automated backups immediately after the DB cluster is deleted, unless the Amazon Web Services Backup policy specifies a point-in-time restore rule.


Deletes automated backups using the DbClusterResourceId value of the source DB cluster or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups

Description

Deletes automated backups using the DbClusterResourceId value of the source DB cluster or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster_automated_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_cluster_automated_backup(DbClusterResourceId)

Arguments

DbClusterResourceId

[required] The identifier for the source DB cluster, which can't be changed and which is unique to an Amazon Web Services Region.


Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Aurora DB cluster

Description

Deletes a custom endpoint and removes it from an Amazon Aurora DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_cluster_endpoint(DBClusterEndpointIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterEndpointIdentifier

[required] The identifier associated with the custom endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.


Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group

Description

Deletes a specified DB cluster parameter group. The DB cluster parameter group to be deleted can't be associated with any DB clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_cluster_parameter_group(DBClusterParameterGroupName)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must be the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.

  • You can't delete a default DB cluster parameter group.

  • Can't be associated with any DB clusters.


Deletes a DB cluster snapshot

Description

Deletes a DB cluster snapshot. If the snapshot is being copied, the copy operation is terminated.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_cluster_snapshot(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster snapshot to delete.

Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB cluster snapshot in the available state.


Deletes a previously provisioned DB instance

Description

Deletes a previously provisioned DB instance. When you delete a DB instance, all automated backups for that instance are deleted and can't be recovered. However, manual DB snapshots of the DB instance aren't deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_instance(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
  FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  DeleteAutomatedBackups = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier for the DB instance to be deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the name of an existing DB instance.

SkipFinalSnapshot

Specifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB snapshot before deleting the instance. If you enable this parameter, RDS doesn't create a DB snapshot. If you don't enable this parameter, RDS creates a DB snapshot before the DB instance is deleted. By default, skip isn't enabled, and the DB snapshot is created.

If you don't enable this parameter, you must specify the FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter.

When a DB instance is in a failure state and has a status of failed, incompatible-restore, or incompatible-network, RDS can delete the instance only if you enable this parameter.

If you delete a read replica or an RDS Custom instance, you must enable this setting.

This setting is required for RDS Custom.

FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier

The DBSnapshotIdentifier of the new DBSnapshot created when the SkipFinalSnapshot parameter is disabled.

If you enable this parameter and also enable SkipFinalShapshot, the command results in an error.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters or numbers.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

  • Can't be specified when deleting a read replica.

DeleteAutomatedBackups

Specifies whether to remove automated backups immediately after the DB instance is deleted. This parameter isn't case-sensitive. The default is to remove automated backups immediately after the DB instance is deleted.


Deletes automated backups using the DbiResourceId value of the source DB instance or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups

Description

Deletes automated backups using the DbiResourceId value of the source DB instance or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_instance_automated_backup/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_instance_automated_backup(
  DbiResourceId = NULL,
  DBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn = NULL
)

Arguments

DbiResourceId

The identifier for the source DB instance, which can't be changed and which is unique to an Amazon Web Services Region.

DBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the automated backups to delete, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.


Deletes a specified DB parameter group

Description

Deletes a specified DB parameter group. The DB parameter group to be deleted can't be associated with any DB instances.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_parameter_group(DBParameterGroupName)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must be the name of an existing DB parameter group

  • You can't delete a default DB parameter group

  • Can't be associated with any DB instances


Deletes an existing DB proxy

Description

Deletes an existing DB proxy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_proxy/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_proxy(DBProxyName)

Arguments

DBProxyName

[required] The name of the DB proxy to delete.


Deletes a DBProxyEndpoint

Description

Deletes a DBProxyEndpoint. Doing so removes the ability to access the DB proxy using the endpoint that you defined. The endpoint that you delete might have provided capabilities such as read/write or read-only operations, or using a different VPC than the DB proxy's default VPC.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_proxy_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_proxy_endpoint(DBProxyEndpointName)

Arguments

DBProxyEndpointName

[required] The name of the DB proxy endpoint to delete.


Deletes a DB security group

Description

Deletes a DB security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_security_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_security_group(DBSecurityGroupName)

Arguments

DBSecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the DB security group to delete.

You can't delete the default DB security group.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

  • Must not be "Default"


Deletes an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group

Description

Deletes an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_shard_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_shard_group(DBShardGroupIdentifier)

Arguments

DBShardGroupIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB shard group to delete.


Deletes a DB snapshot

Description

Deletes a DB snapshot. If the snapshot is being copied, the copy operation is terminated.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_snapshot(DBSnapshotIdentifier)

Arguments

DBSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The DB snapshot identifier.

Constraints: Must be the name of an existing DB snapshot in the available state.


Deletes a DB subnet group

Description

Deletes a DB subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_db_subnet_group(DBSubnetGroupName)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the database subnet group to delete.

You can't delete the default subnet group.

Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup


Deletes an RDS event notification subscription

Description

Deletes an RDS event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_event_subscription(SubscriptionName)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to delete.


Deletes a global database cluster

Description

Deletes a global database cluster. The primary and secondary clusters must already be detached or destroyed first.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_global_cluster(GlobalClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the global database cluster being deleted.


Deletes a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift

Description

Deletes a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_integration/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_integration(IntegrationIdentifier)

Arguments

IntegrationIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the integration.


Deletes an existing option group

Description

Deletes an existing option group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_option_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_option_group(OptionGroupName)

Arguments

OptionGroupName

[required] The name of the option group to be deleted.

You can't delete default option groups.


Deletes a tenant database from your DB instance

Description

Deletes a tenant database from your DB instance. This command only applies to RDS for Oracle container database (CDB) instances.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_delete_tenant_database/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_delete_tenant_database(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  TenantDBName,
  SkipFinalSnapshot = NULL,
  FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The user-supplied identifier for the DB instance that contains the tenant database that you want to delete.

TenantDBName

[required] The user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to remove from your DB instance. Amazon RDS deletes the tenant database with this name. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.

SkipFinalSnapshot

Specifies whether to skip the creation of a final DB snapshot before removing the tenant database from your DB instance. If you enable this parameter, RDS doesn't create a DB snapshot. If you don't enable this parameter, RDS creates a DB snapshot before it deletes the tenant database. By default, RDS doesn't skip the final snapshot. If you don't enable this parameter, you must specify the FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier parameter.

FinalDBSnapshotIdentifier

The DBSnapshotIdentifier of the new DBSnapshot created when the SkipFinalSnapshot parameter is disabled.

If you enable this parameter and also enable SkipFinalShapshot, the command results in an error.


Remove the association between one or more DBProxyTarget data structures and a DBProxyTargetGroup

Description

Remove the association between one or more DBProxyTarget data structures and a DBProxyTargetGroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_deregister_db_proxy_targets/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_deregister_db_proxy_targets(
  DBProxyName,
  TargetGroupName = NULL,
  DBInstanceIdentifiers = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifiers = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

[required] The identifier of the DBProxy that is associated with the DBProxyTargetGroup.

TargetGroupName

The identifier of the DBProxyTargetGroup.

DBInstanceIdentifiers

One or more DB instance identifiers.

DBClusterIdentifiers

One or more DB cluster identifiers.


Lists all of the attributes for a customer account

Description

Lists all of the attributes for a customer account. The attributes include Amazon RDS quotas for the account, such as the number of DB instances allowed. The description for a quota includes the quota name, current usage toward that quota, and the quota's maximum value.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_account_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_account_attributes()

Describes one or more blue/green deployments

Description

Describes one or more blue/green deployments.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_blue_green_deployments/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_blue_green_deployments(
  BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier

The blue/green deployment identifier. If you specify this parameter, the response only includes information about the specific blue/green deployment. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match an existing blue/green deployment identifier.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more blue/green deployments to describe.

Valid Values:

  • blue-green-deployment-identifier - Accepts system-generated identifiers for blue/green deployments. The results list only includes information about the blue/green deployments with the specified identifiers.

  • blue-green-deployment-name - Accepts user-supplied names for blue/green deployments. The results list only includes information about the blue/green deployments with the specified names.

  • source - Accepts source databases for a blue/green deployment. The results list only includes information about the blue/green deployments with the specified source databases.

  • target - Accepts target databases for a blue/green deployment. The results list only includes information about the blue/green deployments with the specified target databases.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_blue_green_deployments request. If you specify this parameter, the response only includes records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints:

  • Must be a minimum of 20.

  • Can't exceed 100.


Lists the set of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon RDS for this Amazon Web Services account

Description

Lists the set of certificate authority (CA) certificates provided by Amazon RDS for this Amazon Web Services account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_certificates/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_certificates(
  CertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

CertificateIdentifier

The user-supplied certificate identifier. If this parameter is specified, information for only the identified certificate is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match an existing CertificateIdentifier.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_certificates request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Displays backups for both current and deleted DB clusters

Description

Displays backups for both current and deleted DB clusters. For example, use this operation to find details about automated backups for previously deleted clusters. Current clusters are returned for both the describe_db_cluster_automated_backups and describe_db_clusters operations.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_automated_backups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_cluster_automated_backups(
  DbClusterResourceId = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DbClusterResourceId

The resource ID of the DB cluster that is the source of the automated backup. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

DBClusterIdentifier

(Optional) The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, it must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster. It returns information from the specific DB cluster's automated backup. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Filters

A filter that specifies which resources to return based on status.

Supported filters are the following:

  • status

    • retained - Automated backups for deleted clusters and after backup replication is stopped.

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB cluster automated backups identified by these ARNs.

  • db-cluster-resource-id - Accepts DB resource identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB cluster resources identified by these ARNs.

Returns all resources by default. The status for each resource is specified in the response.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Marker

The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to MaxRecords.


Returns information about backtracks for a DB cluster

Description

Returns information about backtracks for a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_backtracks/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_cluster_backtracks(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  BacktrackIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster to be described. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster1

BacktrackIdentifier

If specified, this value is the backtrack identifier of the backtrack to be described.

Constraints:

Example: ⁠123e4567-e89b-12d3-a456-426655440000⁠

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe. Supported filters include the following:

  • db-cluster-backtrack-id - Accepts backtrack identifiers. The results list includes information about only the backtracks identified by these identifiers.

  • db-cluster-backtrack-status - Accepts any of the following backtrack status values:

    • applying

    • completed

    • failed

    • pending

    The results list includes information about only the backtracks identified by these values.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_backtracks request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Aurora DB cluster

Description

Returns information about endpoints for an Amazon Aurora DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_cluster_endpoints(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DBClusterEndpointIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

The DB cluster identifier of the DB cluster associated with the endpoint. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

DBClusterEndpointIdentifier

The identifier of the endpoint to describe. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Filters

A set of name-value pairs that define which endpoints to include in the output. The filters are specified as name-value pairs, in the format ⁠Name=endpoint_type,Values=endpoint_type1,endpoint_type2,...⁠. Name can be one of: db-cluster-endpoint-type, db-cluster-endpoint-custom-type, db-cluster-endpoint-id, db-cluster-endpoint-status. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-type filter can be one or more of: reader, writer, custom. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-custom-type filter can be one or more of: reader, any. Values for the db-cluster-endpoint-status filter can be one or more of: available, creating, deleting, inactive, modifying.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_endpoints request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBClusterParameterGroup descriptions. If a DBClusterParameterGroupName parameter is specified, the list will contain only the description of the specified DB cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_parameter_groups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group

Description

Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB cluster parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_cluster_parameters(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  Source = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of a specific DB cluster parameter group to return parameter details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

Source

A specific source to return parameters for.

Valid Values:

  • engine-default

  • system

  • user

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB cluster parameters to describe.

The only supported filter is parameter-name. The results list only includes information about the DB cluster parameters with these names.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_parameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot

Description

Returns a list of DB cluster snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes(DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to describe the attributes for.


Returns information about DB cluster snapshots

Description

Returns information about DB cluster snapshots. This API action supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_cluster_snapshots(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotType = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  IncludeShared = NULL,
  IncludePublic = NULL,
  DbClusterResourceId = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

The ID of the DB cluster to retrieve the list of DB cluster snapshots for. This parameter can't be used in conjunction with the DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier parameter. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

A specific DB cluster snapshot identifier to describe. This parameter can't be used in conjunction with the DBClusterIdentifier parameter. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBClusterSnapshot.

  • If this identifier is for an automated snapshot, the SnapshotType parameter must also be specified.

SnapshotType

The type of DB cluster snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:

  • automated - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon RDS for my Amazon Web Services account.

  • manual - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon Web Services account.

  • shared - Return all manual DB cluster snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon Web Services account.

  • public - Return all DB cluster snapshots that have been marked as public.

If you don't specify a SnapshotType value, then both automated and manual DB cluster snapshots are returned. You can include shared DB cluster snapshots with these results by enabling the IncludeShared parameter. You can include public DB cluster snapshots with these results by enabling the IncludePublic parameter.

The IncludeShared and IncludePublic parameters don't apply for SnapshotType values of manual or automated. The IncludePublic parameter doesn't apply when SnapshotType is set to shared. The IncludeShared parameter doesn't apply when SnapshotType is set to public.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB cluster snapshots to describe.

Supported filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs).

  • db-cluster-snapshot-id - Accepts DB cluster snapshot identifiers.

  • snapshot-type - Accepts types of DB cluster snapshots.

  • engine - Accepts names of database engines.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_cluster_snapshots request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

IncludeShared

Specifies whether to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore. By default, these snapshots are not included.

You can give an Amazon Web Services account permission to restore a manual DB cluster snapshot from another Amazon Web Services account by the modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute API action.

IncludePublic

Specifies whether to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account. By default, the public snapshots are not included.

You can share a manual DB cluster snapshot as public by using the modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute API action.

DbClusterResourceId

A specific DB cluster resource ID to describe.


Describes existing Amazon Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Description

Describes existing Amazon Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters. This API supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_clusters(
  DBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  IncludeShared = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

The user-supplied DB cluster identifier or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster. If this parameter is specified, information for only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match an existing DB cluster identifier.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB clusters to describe.

Supported Filters:

  • clone-group-id - Accepts clone group identifiers. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters associated with these clone groups.

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.

  • db-cluster-resource-id - Accepts DB cluster resource identifiers. The results list will only include information about the DB clusters identified by these DB cluster resource identifiers.

  • domain - Accepts Active Directory directory IDs. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters associated with these domains.

  • engine - Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB clusters for these engines.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_clusters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

IncludeShared

Specifies whether the output includes information about clusters shared from other Amazon Web Services accounts.


Describes the properties of specific versions of DB engines

Description

Describes the properties of specific versions of DB engines.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_engine_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_engine_versions(
  Engine = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  DefaultOnly = NULL,
  ListSupportedCharacterSets = NULL,
  ListSupportedTimezones = NULL,
  IncludeAll = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

The database engine to return version details for.

Valid Values:

  • aurora-mysql

  • aurora-postgresql

  • custom-oracle-ee

  • custom-oracle-ee-cdb

  • custom-oracle-se2

  • custom-oracle-se2-cdb

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

EngineVersion

A specific database engine version to return details for.

Example: ⁠5.1.49⁠

DBParameterGroupFamily

The name of a specific DB parameter group family to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match an existing DB parameter group family.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB engine versions to describe.

Supported filters:

  • db-parameter-group-family - Accepts parameter groups family names. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these parameter group families.

  • engine - Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engines.

  • engine-mode - Accepts DB engine modes. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engine modes. Valid DB engine modes are the following:

    • global

    • multimaster

    • parallelquery

    • provisioned

    • serverless

  • engine-version - Accepts engine versions. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these engine versions.

  • status - Accepts engine version statuses. The results list only includes information about the DB engine versions for these statuses. Valid statuses are the following:

    • available

    • deprecated

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the MaxRecords value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

DefaultOnly

Specifies whether to return only the default version of the specified engine or the engine and major version combination.

ListSupportedCharacterSets

Specifies whether to list the supported character sets for each engine version.

If this parameter is enabled and the requested engine supports the CharacterSetName parameter for create_db_instance, the response includes a list of supported character sets for each engine version.

For RDS Custom, the default is not to list supported character sets. If you enable this parameter, RDS Custom returns no results.

ListSupportedTimezones

Specifies whether to list the supported time zones for each engine version.

If this parameter is enabled and the requested engine supports the TimeZone parameter for create_db_instance, the response includes a list of supported time zones for each engine version.

For RDS Custom, the default is not to list supported time zones. If you enable this parameter, RDS Custom returns no results.

IncludeAll

Specifies whether to also list the engine versions that aren't available. The default is to list only available engine versions.


Displays backups for both current and deleted instances

Description

Displays backups for both current and deleted instances. For example, use this operation to find details about automated backups for previously deleted instances. Current instances with retention periods greater than zero (0) are returned for both the describe_db_instance_automated_backups and describe_db_instances operations.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_instance_automated_backups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_instance_automated_backups(
  DbiResourceId = NULL,
  DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  DBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn = NULL
)

Arguments

DbiResourceId

The resource ID of the DB instance that is the source of the automated backup. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

DBInstanceIdentifier

(Optional) The user-supplied instance identifier. If this parameter is specified, it must match the identifier of an existing DB instance. It returns information from the specific DB instance's automated backup. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Filters

A filter that specifies which resources to return based on status.

Supported filters are the following:

  • status

    • active - Automated backups for current instances.

    • creating - Automated backups that are waiting for the first automated snapshot to be available.

    • retained - Automated backups for deleted instances and after backup replication is stopped.

  • db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB instance automated backups identified by these ARNs.

  • dbi-resource-id - Accepts DB resource identifiers and Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list includes only information about the DB instance resources identified by these ARNs.

Returns all resources by default. The status for each resource is specified in the response.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Marker

The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to MaxRecords.

DBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicated automated backups, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.


Describes provisioned RDS instances

Description

Describes provisioned RDS instances. This API supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_instances/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_instances(
  DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

The user-supplied instance identifier or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB instance. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB instance is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB instances to describe.

Supported Filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB instances associated with the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.

  • db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes information about the DB instances identified by these ARNs.

  • dbi-resource-id - Accepts DB instance resource identifiers. The results list only includes information about the DB instances identified by these DB instance resource identifiers.

  • domain - Accepts Active Directory directory IDs. The results list only includes information about the DB instances associated with these domains.

  • engine - Accepts engine names. The results list only includes information about the DB instances for these engines.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_instances request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DB log files for the DB instance

Description

Returns a list of DB log files for the DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_log_files/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_log_files(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  FilenameContains = NULL,
  FileLastWritten = NULL,
  FileSize = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The customer-assigned name of the DB instance that contains the log files you want to list.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

FilenameContains

Filters the available log files for log file names that contain the specified string.

FileLastWritten

Filters the available log files for files written since the specified date, in POSIX timestamp format with milliseconds.

FileSize

Filters the available log files for files larger than the specified size.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Marker

The pagination token provided in the previous request. If this parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBParameterGroup descriptions. If a DBParameterGroupName is specified, the list will contain only the description of the specified DB parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_parameter_groups(
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_parameter_groups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group

Description

Returns the detailed parameter list for a particular DB parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_parameters(
  DBParameterGroupName,
  Source = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of a specific DB parameter group to return details for.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.

Source

The parameter types to return.

Default: All parameter types returned

Valid Values: user | system | engine-default

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB parameters to describe.

The only supported filter is parameter-name. The results list only includes information about the DB parameters with these names.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_parameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about DB proxies

Description

Returns information about DB proxies.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_proxies/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_proxies(
  DBProxyName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

The name of the DB proxy. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxies owned by your Amazon Web Services account ID.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.


Returns information about DB proxy endpoints

Description

Returns information about DB proxy endpoints.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_proxy_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_proxy_endpoints(
  DBProxyName = NULL,
  DBProxyEndpointName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

The name of the DB proxy whose endpoints you want to describe. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxy endpoints associated with all your DB proxies.

DBProxyEndpointName

The name of a DB proxy endpoint to describe. If you omit this parameter, the output includes information about all DB proxy endpoints associated with the specified proxy.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.


Returns information about DB proxy target groups, represented by DBProxyTargetGroup data structures

Description

Returns information about DB proxy target groups, represented by DBProxyTargetGroup data structures.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_proxy_target_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_proxy_target_groups(
  DBProxyName,
  TargetGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

[required] The identifier of the DBProxy associated with the target group.

TargetGroupName

The identifier of the DBProxyTargetGroup to describe.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.


Returns information about DBProxyTarget objects

Description

Returns information about DBProxyTarget objects. This API supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_proxy_targets/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_proxy_targets(
  DBProxyName,
  TargetGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

[required] The identifier of the DBProxyTarget to describe.

TargetGroupName

The identifier of the DBProxyTargetGroup to describe.

Filters

This parameter is not currently supported.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.


Describes the recommendations to resolve the issues for your DB instances, DB clusters, and DB parameter groups

Description

Describes the recommendations to resolve the issues for your DB instances, DB clusters, and DB parameter groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_recommendations/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_recommendations(
  LastUpdatedAfter = NULL,
  LastUpdatedBefore = NULL,
  Locale = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

LastUpdatedAfter

A filter to include only the recommendations that were updated after this specified time.

LastUpdatedBefore

A filter to include only the recommendations that were updated before this specified time.

Locale

The language that you choose to return the list of recommendations.

Valid values:

  • en

  • en_UK

  • de

  • es

  • fr

  • id

  • it

  • ja

  • ko

  • pt_BR

  • zh_TW

  • zh_CN

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more recommendations to describe.

Supported Filters:

  • recommendation-id - Accepts a list of recommendation identifiers. The results list only includes the recommendations whose identifier is one of the specified filter values.

  • status - Accepts a list of recommendation statuses.

    Valid values:

    • active - The recommendations which are ready for you to apply.

    • pending - The applied or scheduled recommendations which are in progress.

    • resolved - The recommendations which are completed.

    • dismissed - The recommendations that you dismissed.

    The results list only includes the recommendations whose status is one of the specified filter values.

  • severity - Accepts a list of recommendation severities. The results list only includes the recommendations whose severity is one of the specified filter values.

    Valid values:

    • high

    • medium

    • low

    • informational

  • type-id - Accepts a list of recommendation type identifiers. The results list only includes the recommendations whose type is one of the specified filter values.

  • dbi-resource-id - Accepts a list of database resource identifiers. The results list only includes the recommendations that generated for the specified databases.

  • cluster-resource-id - Accepts a list of cluster resource identifiers. The results list only includes the recommendations that generated for the specified clusters.

  • pg-arn - Accepts a list of parameter group ARNs. The results list only includes the recommendations that generated for the specified parameter groups.

  • cluster-pg-arn - Accepts a list of cluster parameter group ARNs. The results list only includes the recommendations that generated for the specified cluster parameter groups.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of recommendations to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_recommendations request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of DBSecurityGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBSecurityGroup descriptions. If a DBSecurityGroupName is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions of the specified DB security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_security_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_security_groups(
  DBSecurityGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSecurityGroupName

The name of the DB security group to return details for.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_security_groups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Describes existing Aurora Limitless Database DB shard groups

Description

Describes existing Aurora Limitless Database DB shard groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_shard_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_shard_groups(
  DBShardGroupIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

DBShardGroupIdentifier

The user-supplied DB shard group identifier. If this parameter is specified, information for only the specific DB shard group is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match an existing DB shard group identifier.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB shard groups to describe.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_shard_groups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100


Returns a list of DB snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB snapshot

Description

Returns a list of DB snapshot attribute names and values for a manual DB snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_snapshot_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_snapshot_attributes(DBSnapshotIdentifier)

Arguments

DBSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot to describe the attributes for.


Describes the tenant databases that exist in a DB snapshot

Description

Describes the tenant databases that exist in a DB snapshot. This command only applies to RDS for Oracle DB instances in the multi-tenant configuration.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases(
  DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  DBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotType = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  DbiResourceId = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

The ID of the DB instance used to create the DB snapshots. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

DBSnapshotIdentifier

The ID of a DB snapshot that contains the tenant databases to describe. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • If you specify this parameter, the value must match the ID of an existing DB snapshot.

  • If you specify an automatic snapshot, you must also specify SnapshotType.

SnapshotType

The type of DB snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:

  • automated – All DB snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon RDS for my Amazon Web Services account.

  • manual – All DB snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon Web Services account.

  • shared – All manual DB snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon Web Services account.

  • public – All DB snapshots that have been marked as public.

  • awsbackup – All DB snapshots managed by the Amazon Web Services Backup service.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more tenant databases to describe.

Supported filters:

  • tenant-db-name - Tenant database names. The results list only includes information about the tenant databases that match these tenant DB names.

  • tenant-database-resource-id - Tenant database resource identifiers. The results list only includes information about the tenant databases contained within the DB snapshots.

  • dbi-resource-id - DB instance resource identifiers. The results list only includes information about snapshots containing tenant databases contained within the DB instances identified by these resource identifiers.

  • db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance Amazon Resource Names (ARNs).

  • db-snapshot-id - Accepts DB snapshot identifiers.

  • snapshot-type - Accepts types of DB snapshots.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_snapshot_tenant_databases request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

DbiResourceId

A specific DB resource identifier to describe.


Returns information about DB snapshots

Description

Returns information about DB snapshots. This API action supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_snapshots(
  DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  DBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotType = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  IncludeShared = NULL,
  IncludePublic = NULL,
  DbiResourceId = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

The ID of the DB instance to retrieve the list of DB snapshots for. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

DBSnapshotIdentifier

A specific DB snapshot identifier to describe. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the identifier of an existing DBSnapshot.

  • If this identifier is for an automated snapshot, the SnapshotType parameter must also be specified.

SnapshotType

The type of snapshots to be returned. You can specify one of the following values:

  • automated - Return all DB snapshots that have been automatically taken by Amazon RDS for my Amazon Web Services account.

  • manual - Return all DB snapshots that have been taken by my Amazon Web Services account.

  • shared - Return all manual DB snapshots that have been shared to my Amazon Web Services account.

  • public - Return all DB snapshots that have been marked as public.

  • awsbackup - Return the DB snapshots managed by the Amazon Web Services Backup service.

    For information about Amazon Web Services Backup, see the Amazon Web Services Backup Developer Guide.

    The awsbackup type does not apply to Aurora.

If you don't specify a SnapshotType value, then both automated and manual snapshots are returned. Shared and public DB snapshots are not included in the returned results by default. You can include shared snapshots with these results by enabling the IncludeShared parameter. You can include public snapshots with these results by enabling the IncludePublic parameter.

The IncludeShared and IncludePublic parameters don't apply for SnapshotType values of manual or automated. The IncludePublic parameter doesn't apply when SnapshotType is set to shared. The IncludeShared parameter doesn't apply when SnapshotType is set to public.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more DB snapshots to describe.

Supported filters:

  • db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance Amazon Resource Names (ARNs).

  • db-snapshot-id - Accepts DB snapshot identifiers.

  • dbi-resource-id - Accepts identifiers of source DB instances.

  • snapshot-type - Accepts types of DB snapshots.

  • engine - Accepts names of database engines.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_db_snapshots request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

IncludeShared

Specifies whether to include shared manual DB cluster snapshots from other Amazon Web Services accounts that this Amazon Web Services account has been given permission to copy or restore. By default, these snapshots are not included.

You can give an Amazon Web Services account permission to restore a manual DB snapshot from another Amazon Web Services account by using the modify_db_snapshot_attribute API action.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

IncludePublic

Specifies whether to include manual DB cluster snapshots that are public and can be copied or restored by any Amazon Web Services account. By default, the public snapshots are not included.

You can share a manual DB snapshot as public by using the modify_db_snapshot_attribute API.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

DbiResourceId

A specific DB resource ID to describe.


Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions

Description

Returns a list of DBSubnetGroup descriptions. If a DBSubnetGroupName is specified, the list will contain only the descriptions of the specified DBSubnetGroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_db_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_db_subnet_groups(
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

The name of the DB subnet group to return details for.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeDBSubnetGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine

Description

Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the cluster database engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters(
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group family to return engine parameter information for.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_engine_default_cluster_parameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine

Description

Returns the default engine and system parameter information for the specified database engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_engine_default_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_engine_default_parameters(
  DBParameterGroupFamily,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupFamily

[required] The name of the DB parameter group family.

Valid Values:

  • aurora-mysql5.7

  • aurora-mysql8.0

  • aurora-postgresql10

  • aurora-postgresql11

  • aurora-postgresql12

  • aurora-postgresql13

  • aurora-postgresql14

  • custom-oracle-ee-19

  • custom-oracle-ee-cdb-19

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb10.2

  • mariadb10.3

  • mariadb10.4

  • mariadb10.5

  • mariadb10.6

  • mysql5.7

  • mysql8.0

  • oracle-ee-19

  • oracle-ee-cdb-19

  • oracle-ee-cdb-21

  • oracle-se2-19

  • oracle-se2-cdb-19

  • oracle-se2-cdb-21

  • postgres10

  • postgres11

  • postgres12

  • postgres13

  • postgres14

  • sqlserver-ee-11.0

  • sqlserver-ee-12.0

  • sqlserver-ee-13.0

  • sqlserver-ee-14.0

  • sqlserver-ee-15.0

  • sqlserver-ex-11.0

  • sqlserver-ex-12.0

  • sqlserver-ex-13.0

  • sqlserver-ex-14.0

  • sqlserver-ex-15.0

  • sqlserver-se-11.0

  • sqlserver-se-12.0

  • sqlserver-se-13.0

  • sqlserver-se-14.0

  • sqlserver-se-15.0

  • sqlserver-web-11.0

  • sqlserver-web-12.0

  • sqlserver-web-13.0

  • sqlserver-web-14.0

  • sqlserver-web-15.0

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more parameters to describe.

The only supported filter is parameter-name. The results list only includes information about the parameters with these names.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_engine_default_parameters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type

Description

Displays a list of categories for all event source types, or, if specified, for a specified source type. You can also see this list in the "Amazon RDS event categories and event messages" section of the Amazon RDS User Guide or the Amazon Aurora User Guide .

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_event_categories/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_event_categories(SourceType = NULL, Filters = NULL)

Arguments

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events. For RDS Proxy events, specify db-proxy.

Valid Values: db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot | db-proxy

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.


Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account

Description

Lists all the subscription descriptions for a customer account. The description for a subscription includes SubscriptionName, SNSTopicARN, CustomerID, SourceType, SourceID, CreationTime, and Status.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_event_subscriptions(
  SubscriptionName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to describe.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords .


Returns events related to DB instances, DB clusters, DB parameter groups, DB security groups, DB snapshots, DB cluster snapshots, and RDS Proxies for the past 14 days

Description

Returns events related to DB instances, DB clusters, DB parameter groups, DB security groups, DB snapshots, DB cluster snapshots, and RDS Proxies for the past 14 days. Events specific to a particular DB instance, DB cluster, DB parameter group, DB security group, DB snapshot, DB cluster snapshot group, or RDS Proxy can be obtained by providing the name as a parameter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_events/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_events(
  SourceIdentifier = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceIdentifier

The identifier of the event source for which events are returned. If not specified, then all sources are included in the response.

Constraints:

  • If SourceIdentifier is supplied, SourceType must also be provided.

  • If the source type is a DB instance, a DBInstanceIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB cluster, a DBClusterIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB parameter group, a DBParameterGroupName value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB security group, a DBSecurityGroupName value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB snapshot, a DBSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is a DB cluster snapshot, a DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier value must be supplied.

  • If the source type is an RDS Proxy, a DBProxyName value must be supplied.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

SourceType

The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.

StartTime

The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z

EndTime

The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

Example: 2009-07-08T18:00Z

Duration

The number of minutes to retrieve events for.

Default: 60

EventCategories

A list of event categories that trigger notifications for a event notification subscription.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeEvents request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns information about a snapshot or cluster export to Amazon S3

Description

Returns information about a snapshot or cluster export to Amazon S3. This API operation supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_export_tasks/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_export_tasks(
  ExportTaskIdentifier = NULL,
  SourceArn = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL
)

Arguments

ExportTaskIdentifier

The identifier of the snapshot or cluster export task to be described.

SourceArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster exported to Amazon S3.

Filters

Filters specify one or more snapshot or cluster exports to describe. The filters are specified as name-value pairs that define what to include in the output. Filter names and values are case-sensitive.

Supported filters include the following:

  • export-task-identifier - An identifier for the snapshot or cluster export task.

  • s3-bucket - The Amazon S3 bucket the data is exported to.

  • source-arn - The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster exported to Amazon S3.

  • status - The status of the export task. Must be lowercase. Valid statuses are the following:

    • canceled

    • canceling

    • complete

    • failed

    • in_progress

    • starting

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_export_tasks request. If you specify this parameter, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by the MaxRecords parameter.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response. You can use the marker in a later describe_export_tasks request to retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

SourceType

The type of source for the export.


Returns information about Aurora global database clusters

Description

Returns information about Aurora global database clusters. This API supports pagination.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_global_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_global_clusters(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The user-supplied DB cluster identifier. If this parameter is specified, information from only the specific DB cluster is returned. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match an existing DBClusterIdentifier.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more global database clusters to describe. This parameter is case-sensitive.

Currently, the only supported filter is region.

If used, the request returns information about any global cluster with at least one member (primary or secondary) in the specified Amazon Web Services Regions.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_global_clusters request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Describe one or more zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift

Description

Describe one or more zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_integrations/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_integrations(
  IntegrationIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

IntegrationIdentifier

The unique identifier of the integration.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more resources to return.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_integrations request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Describes all available options for the specified engine

Description

Describes all available options for the specified engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_option_group_options/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_option_group_options(
  EngineName,
  MajorEngineVersion = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

EngineName

[required] The name of the engine to describe options for.

Valid Values:

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

MajorEngineVersion

If specified, filters the results to include only options for the specified major engine version.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Describes the available option groups

Description

Describes the available option groups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_option_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_option_groups(
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  EngineName = NULL,
  MajorEngineVersion = NULL
)

Arguments

OptionGroupName

The name of the option group to describe. Can't be supplied together with EngineName or MajorEngineVersion.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOptionGroups request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

EngineName

A filter to only include option groups associated with this database engine.

Valid Values:

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

MajorEngineVersion

Filters the list of option groups to only include groups associated with a specific database engine version. If specified, then EngineName must also be specified.


Describes the orderable DB instance options for a specified DB engine

Description

Describes the orderable DB instance options for a specified DB engine.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_orderable_db_instance_options/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_orderable_db_instance_options(
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  AvailabilityZoneGroup = NULL,
  Vpc = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

[required] The name of the database engine to describe DB instance options for.

Valid Values:

  • aurora-mysql

  • aurora-postgresql

  • custom-oracle-ee

  • custom-oracle-ee-cdb

  • custom-oracle-se2

  • custom-oracle-se2-cdb

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

EngineVersion

A filter to include only the available options for the specified engine version.

DBInstanceClass

A filter to include only the available options for the specified DB instance class.

LicenseModel

A filter to include only the available options for the specified license model.

RDS Custom supports only the BYOL licensing model.

AvailabilityZoneGroup

The Availability Zone group associated with a Local Zone. Specify this parameter to retrieve available options for the Local Zones in the group.

Omit this parameter to show the available options in the specified Amazon Web Services Region.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Vpc

Specifies whether to show only VPC or non-VPC offerings. RDS Custom supports only VPC offerings.

RDS Custom supports only VPC offerings. If you describe non-VPC offerings for RDS Custom, the output shows VPC offerings.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 1000.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous DescribeOrderableDBInstanceOptions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action

Description

Returns a list of resources (for example, DB instances) that have at least one pending maintenance action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_pending_maintenance_actions/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_pending_maintenance_actions(
  ResourceIdentifier = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceIdentifier

The ARN of a resource to return pending maintenance actions for.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more resources to return pending maintenance actions for.

Supported filters:

  • db-cluster-id - Accepts DB cluster identifiers and DB cluster Amazon Resource Names (ARNs). The results list only includes pending maintenance actions for the DB clusters identified by these ARNs.

  • db-instance-id - Accepts DB instance identifiers and DB instance ARNs. The results list only includes pending maintenance actions for the DB instances identified by these ARNs.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_pending_maintenance_actions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to a number of records specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.


Returns information about reserved DB instances for this account, or about a specified reserved DB instance

Description

Returns information about reserved DB instances for this account, or about a specified reserved DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_reserved_db_instances/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_reserved_db_instances(
  ReservedDBInstanceId = NULL,
  ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  ProductDescription = NULL,
  OfferingType = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  LeaseId = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedDBInstanceId

The reserved DB instance identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified reservation ID.

ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId

The offering identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only purchased reservations matching the specified offering identifier.

DBInstanceClass

The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified DB instances class.

Duration

The duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Specify this parameter to show only reservations for this duration.

Valid Values: 1 | 3 | 31536000 | 94608000

ProductDescription

The product description filter value. Specify this parameter to show only those reservations matching the specified product description.

OfferingType

The offering type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type.

Valid Values: "Partial Upfront" | "All Upfront" | "No Upfront"

MultiAZ

Specifies whether to show only those reservations that support Multi-AZ.

LeaseId

The lease identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the reservation that matches the specified lease ID.

Amazon Web Services Support might request the lease ID for an issue related to a reserved DB instance.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the MaxRecords value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Lists available reserved DB instance offerings

Description

Lists available reserved DB instance offerings.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_reserved_db_instances_offerings(
  ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  ProductDescription = NULL,
  OfferingType = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId

The offering identifier filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offering that matches the specified reservation identifier.

Example: ⁠438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706⁠

DBInstanceClass

The DB instance class filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified DB instance class.

Duration

Duration filter value, specified in years or seconds. Specify this parameter to show only reservations for this duration.

Valid Values: 1 | 3 | 31536000 | 94608000

ProductDescription

Product description filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings that contain the specified product description.

The results show offerings that partially match the filter value.

OfferingType

The offering type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified offering type.

Valid Values: "Partial Upfront" | "All Upfront" | "No Upfront"

MultiAZ

Specifies whether to show only those reservations that support Multi-AZ.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more than the MaxRecords value is available, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.


Returns a list of the source Amazon Web Services Regions where the current Amazon Web Services Region can create a read replica, copy a DB snapshot from, or replicate automated backups from

Description

Returns a list of the source Amazon Web Services Regions where the current Amazon Web Services Region can create a read replica, copy a DB snapshot from, or replicate automated backups from.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_source_regions/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_source_regions(
  RegionName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  Filters = NULL
)

Arguments

RegionName

The source Amazon Web Services Region name. For example, us-east-1.

Constraints:

  • Must specify a valid Amazon Web Services Region name.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so you can retrieve the remaining results.

Default: 100

Constraints: Minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_source_regions request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.


Describes the tenant databases in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration

Description

Describes the tenant databases in a DB instance that uses the multi-tenant configuration. Only RDS for Oracle CDB instances are supported.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_tenant_databases/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_tenant_databases(
  DBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  TenantDBName = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

The user-supplied DB instance identifier, which must match the identifier of an existing instance owned by the Amazon Web Services account. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

TenantDBName

The user-supplied tenant database name, which must match the name of an existing tenant database on the specified DB instance owned by your Amazon Web Services account. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more database tenants to describe.

Supported filters:

  • tenant-db-name - Tenant database names. The results list only includes information about the tenant databases that match these tenant DB names.

  • tenant-database-resource-id - Tenant database resource identifiers.

  • dbi-resource-id - DB instance resource identifiers. The results list only includes information about the tenants contained within the DB instances identified by these resource identifiers.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_tenant_databases request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that you can retrieve the remaining results.


You can call DescribeValidDBInstanceModifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance

Description

You can call describe_valid_db_instance_modifications to learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance. You can use this information when you call modify_db_instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_describe_valid_db_instance_modifications/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_describe_valid_db_instance_modifications(DBInstanceIdentifier)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The customer identifier or the ARN of your DB instance.


Disables the HTTP endpoint for the specified DB cluster

Description

Disables the HTTP endpoint for the specified DB cluster. Disabling this endpoint disables RDS Data API.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_disable_http_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_disable_http_endpoint(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster.


Downloads all or a portion of the specified log file, up to 1 MB in size

Description

Downloads all or a portion of the specified log file, up to 1 MB in size.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_download_db_log_file_portion/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_download_db_log_file_portion(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  LogFileName,
  Marker = NULL,
  NumberOfLines = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The customer-assigned name of the DB instance that contains the log files you want to list.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

LogFileName

[required] The name of the log file to be downloaded.

Marker

The pagination token provided in the previous request or "0". If the Marker parameter is specified the response includes only records beyond the marker until the end of the file or up to NumberOfLines.

NumberOfLines

The number of lines to download. If the number of lines specified results in a file over 1 MB in size, the file is truncated at 1 MB in size.

If the NumberOfLines parameter is specified, then the block of lines returned can be from the beginning or the end of the log file, depending on the value of the Marker parameter.

  • If neither Marker or NumberOfLines are specified, the entire log file is returned up to a maximum of 10000 lines, starting with the most recent log entries first.

  • If NumberOfLines is specified and Marker isn't specified, then the most recent lines from the end of the log file are returned.

  • If Marker is specified as "0", then the specified number of lines from the beginning of the log file are returned.

  • You can download the log file in blocks of lines by specifying the size of the block using the NumberOfLines parameter, and by specifying a value of "0" for the Marker parameter in your first request. Include the Marker value returned in the response as the Marker value for the next request, continuing until the AdditionalDataPending response element returns false.


Enables the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster

Description

Enables the HTTP endpoint for the DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint isn't enabled.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_enable_http_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_enable_http_endpoint(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster.


Forces a failover for a DB cluster

Description

Forces a failover for a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_failover_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_failover_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier, TargetDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster to force a failover for. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster.

TargetDBInstanceIdentifier

The name of the DB instance to promote to the primary DB instance.

Specify the DB instance identifier for an Aurora Replica or a Multi-AZ readable standby in the DB cluster, for example mydbcluster-replica1.

This setting isn't supported for RDS for MySQL Multi-AZ DB clusters.


Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global database cluster to fail over or switch over a global database

Description

Promotes the specified secondary DB cluster to be the primary DB cluster in the global database cluster to fail over or switch over a global database. Switchover operations were previously called "managed planned failovers."

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_failover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_failover_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  TargetDbClusterIdentifier,
  AllowDataLoss = NULL,
  Switchover = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the global database cluster (Aurora global database) this operation should apply to. The identifier is the unique key assigned by the user when the Aurora global database is created. In other words, it's the name of the Aurora global database.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster.

TargetDbClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the secondary Aurora DB cluster that you want to promote to the primary for the global database cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Aurora can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services Region.

AllowDataLoss

Specifies whether to allow data loss for this global database cluster operation. Allowing data loss triggers a global failover operation.

If you don't specify AllowDataLoss, the global database cluster operation defaults to a switchover.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified together with the Switchover parameter.

Switchover

Specifies whether to switch over this global database cluster.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified together with the AllowDataLoss parameter.


Lists all tags on an Amazon RDS resource

Description

Lists all tags on an Amazon RDS resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceName, Filters = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon RDS resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Filters

This parameter isn't currently supported.


Changes the audit policy state of a database activity stream to either locked (default) or unlocked

Description

Changes the audit policy state of a database activity stream to either locked (default) or unlocked. A locked policy is read-only, whereas an unlocked policy is read/write. If your activity stream is started and locked, you can unlock it, customize your audit policy, and then lock your activity stream. Restarting the activity stream isn't required. For more information, see Modifying a database activity stream in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_activity_stream/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_activity_stream(ResourceArn = NULL, AuditPolicyState = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the RDS for Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server DB instance. For example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:db:my-orcl-db.

AuditPolicyState

The audit policy state. When a policy is unlocked, it is read/write. When it is locked, it is read-only. You can edit your audit policy only when the activity stream is unlocked or stopped.


Override the system-default Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) certificate for Amazon RDS for new DB instances, or remove the override

Description

Override the system-default Secure Sockets Layer/Transport Layer Security (SSL/TLS) certificate for Amazon RDS for new DB instances, or remove the override.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_certificates/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_certificates(
  CertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  RemoveCustomerOverride = NULL
)

Arguments

CertificateIdentifier

The new default certificate identifier to override the current one with.

To determine the valid values, use the describe-certificates CLI command or the describe_certificates API operation.

RemoveCustomerOverride

Specifies whether to remove the override for the default certificate. If the override is removed, the default certificate is the system default.


Set the capacity of an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster to a specific value

Description

Set the capacity of an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster to a specific value.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_current_db_cluster_capacity/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_current_db_cluster_capacity(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  Capacity = NULL,
  SecondsBeforeTimeout = NULL,
  TimeoutAction = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster.

Capacity

The DB cluster capacity.

When you change the capacity of a paused Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster, it automatically resumes.

Constraints:

  • For Aurora MySQL, valid capacity values are 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 128, and 256.

  • For Aurora PostgreSQL, valid capacity values are 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64, 192, and 384.

SecondsBeforeTimeout

The amount of time, in seconds, that Aurora Serverless v1 tries to find a scaling point to perform seamless scaling before enforcing the timeout action. The default is 300.

Specify a value between 10 and 600 seconds.

TimeoutAction

The action to take when the timeout is reached, either ForceApplyCapacityChange or RollbackCapacityChange.

ForceApplyCapacityChange, the default, sets the capacity to the specified value as soon as possible.

RollbackCapacityChange ignores the capacity change if a scaling point isn't found in the timeout period.


Modifies the status of a custom engine version (CEV)

Description

Modifies the status of a custom engine version (CEV). You can find CEVs to modify by calling describe_db_engine_versions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_custom_db_engine_version/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_custom_db_engine_version(
  Engine,
  EngineVersion,
  Description = NULL,
  Status = NULL
)

Arguments

Engine

[required] The database engine. RDS Custom for Oracle supports the following values:

  • custom-oracle-ee

  • custom-oracle-ee-cdb

  • custom-oracle-se2

  • custom-oracle-se2-cdb

EngineVersion

[required] The custom engine version (CEV) that you want to modify. This option is required for RDS Custom for Oracle, but optional for Amazon RDS. The combination of Engine and EngineVersion is unique per customer per Amazon Web Services Region.

Description

An optional description of your CEV.

Status

The availability status to be assigned to the CEV. Valid values are as follows:

available

You can use this CEV to create a new RDS Custom DB instance.

inactive

You can create a new RDS Custom instance by restoring a DB snapshot with this CEV. You can't patch or create new instances with this CEV.

You can change any status to any status. A typical reason to change status is to prevent the accidental use of a CEV, or to make a deprecated CEV eligible for use again. For example, you might change the status of your CEV from available to inactive, and from inactive back to available. To change the availability status of the CEV, it must not currently be in use by an RDS Custom instance, snapshot, or automated backup.


Modifies the settings of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or a Multi-AZ DB cluster

Description

Modifies the settings of an Amazon Aurora DB cluster or a Multi-AZ DB cluster. You can change one or more settings by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  NewDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  BacktrackWindow = NULL,
  CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  DBInstanceParameterGroupName = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  EnableHttpEndpoint = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  EnableGlobalWriteForwarding = NULL,
  DBClusterInstanceClass = NULL,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  RotateMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  EngineMode = NULL,
  AllowEngineModeChange = NULL,
  EnableLocalWriteForwarding = NULL,
  AwsBackupRecoveryPointArn = NULL,
  EnableLimitlessDatabase = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier for the cluster being modified. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster.

NewDBClusterIdentifier

The new DB cluster identifier for the DB cluster when renaming a DB cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster2

ApplyImmediately

Specifies whether the modifications in this request are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the DB cluster. If this parameter is disabled, changes to the DB cluster are applied during the next maintenance window.

Most modifications can be applied immediately or during the next scheduled maintenance window. Some modifications, such as turning on deletion protection and changing the master password, are applied immediately—regardless of when you choose to apply them.

By default, this parameter is disabled.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Specify a minimum value of 1.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 1 to 35.

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to use for the DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Port

The port number on which the DB cluster accepts connections.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

Valid Values: 1150-65535

Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.

MasterUserPassword

The new password for the master database user.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • Can contain any printable ASCII character except "/", """, or "@".

  • Can't be specified if ManageMasterUserPassword is turned on.

OptionGroupName

The option group to associate the DB cluster with.

DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can't be modified.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred DB Cluster Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi.

  • Days must be one of Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

BacktrackWindow

The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only

Default: 0

Constraints:

  • If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).

CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration

The configuration setting for the log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

The following values are valid for each DB engine:

  • Aurora MySQL - audit | error | general | instance | slowquery

  • Aurora PostgreSQL - instance | postgresql

  • RDS for MySQL - error | general | slowquery

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - postgresql | upgrade

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade. Changing this parameter results in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless ApplyImmediately is enabled.

If the cluster that you're modifying has one or more read replicas, all replicas must be running an engine version that's the same or later than the version you specify.

To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-mysql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-postgresql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine mysql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine postgres --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

AllowMajorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether major version upgrades are allowed.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • You must allow major version upgrades when specifying a value for the EngineVersion parameter that is a different major version than the DB cluster's current version.

DBInstanceParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to apply to all instances of the DB cluster.

When you apply a parameter group using the DBInstanceParameterGroupName parameter, the DB cluster isn't rebooted automatically. Also, parameter changes are applied immediately rather than during the next maintenance window.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

Default: The existing name setting

Constraints:

  • The DB parameter group must be in the same DB parameter group family as this DB cluster.

  • The DBInstanceParameterGroupName parameter is valid in combination with the AllowMajorVersionUpgrade parameter for a major version upgrade only.

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to move the DB cluster to. Specify none to remove the cluster from its current domain. The domain must be created prior to this operation.

For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

ScalingConfiguration

The scaling properties of the DB cluster. You can only modify scaling properties for DB clusters in serverless DB engine mode.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether the DB cluster has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EnableHttpEndpoint

Specifies whether to enable the HTTP endpoint for an Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. By default, the HTTP endpoint isn't enabled.

When enabled, the HTTP endpoint provides a connectionless web service API (RDS Data API) for running SQL queries on the Aurora Serverless v1 DB cluster. You can also query your database from inside the RDS console with the RDS query editor.

For more information, see Using RDS Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

This parameter applies only to Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters. To enable or disable the HTTP endpoint for an Aurora Serverless v2 or provisioned DB cluster, use the enable_http_endpoint and disable_http_endpoint operations.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the DB cluster to snapshots of the DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EnableGlobalWriteForwarding

Specifies whether to enable this DB cluster to forward write operations to the primary cluster of a global cluster (Aurora global database). By default, write operations are not allowed on Aurora DB clusters that are secondary clusters in an Aurora global database.

You can set this value only on Aurora DB clusters that are members of an Aurora global database. With this parameter enabled, a secondary cluster can forward writes to the current primary cluster, and the resulting changes are replicated back to this cluster. For the primary DB cluster of an Aurora global database, this value is used immediately if the primary is demoted by a global cluster API operation, but it does nothing until then.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

DBClusterInstanceClass

The compute and memory capacity of each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6gd.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.

For the full list of DB instance classes and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

AllocatedStorage

The amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate to each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB cluster.

For information on storage types for Aurora DB clusters, see Storage configurations for Amazon Aurora DB clusters. For information on storage types for Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Settings for creating Multi-AZ DB clusters.

When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the Iops parameter is required.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values:

  • Aurora DB clusters - aurora | aurora-iopt1

  • Multi-AZ DB clusters - io1 | io2 | gp3

Default:

  • Aurora DB clusters - aurora

  • Multi-AZ DB clusters - io1

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.

For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

Constraints:

  • Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB cluster.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether minor engine upgrades are applied automatically to the DB cluster during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are applied automatically.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

Valid Values: 0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60

Default: 0

MonitoringRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

DatabaseInsightsMode

Specifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB cluster.

If you change the value from standard to advanced, you must set the PerformanceInsightsEnabled parameter to true and the PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod parameter to 465.

If you change the value from advanced to standard, you must set the PerformanceInsightsEnabled parameter to false.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EnablePerformanceInsights

Specifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.

For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you don't specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain Performance Insights data.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values:

  • 7

  • month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples: 93 (3 months * 31), 341 (11 months * 31), 589 (19 months * 31)

  • 731

Default: 7 days

If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as 94, Amazon RDS issues an error.

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration
NetworkType

The network type of the DB cluster.

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

Valid Values: IPV4 | DUAL

ManageMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

If the DB cluster doesn't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this management. In this case, you can't specify MasterUserPassword.

If the DB cluster already manages the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, and you specify that the master user password is not managed with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, then you must specify MasterUserPassword. In this case, RDS deletes the secret and uses the new password for the master user specified by MasterUserPassword.

For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

RotateMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password.

This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster. The secret value contains the updated password.

For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Constraints:

  • You must apply the change immediately when rotating the master user password.

MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:

  • The DB cluster doesn't manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

    If the DB cluster already manages the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can't change the KMS key that is used to encrypt the secret.

  • You are turning on ManageMasterUserPassword to manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

    If you are turning on ManageMasterUserPassword and don't specify MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId, then the aws/secretsmanager KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can't use the aws/secretsmanager KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EngineMode

The DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either provisioned or serverless.

The DB engine mode can be modified only from serverless to provisioned.

For more information, see CreateDBCluster.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters only

AllowEngineModeChange

Specifies whether engine mode changes from serverless to provisioned are allowed.

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora Serverless v1 DB clusters only

Constraints:

  • You must allow engine mode changes when specifying a different value for the EngineMode parameter from the DB cluster's current engine mode.

EnableLocalWriteForwarding

Specifies whether read replicas can forward write operations to the writer DB instance in the DB cluster. By default, write operations aren't allowed on reader DB instances.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

AwsBackupRecoveryPointArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the recovery point in Amazon Web Services Backup.

EnableLimitlessDatabase

Specifies whether to enable Aurora Limitless Database. You must enable Aurora Limitless Database to create a DB shard group.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

This setting is no longer used. Instead use the ClusterScalabilityType setting when you create your Aurora Limitless Database DB cluster.

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB cluster's server certificate.

For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for Cluster Type: Multi-AZ DB clusters


Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Aurora DB cluster

Description

Modifies the properties of an endpoint in an Amazon Aurora DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_cluster_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_cluster_endpoint(
  DBClusterEndpointIdentifier,
  EndpointType = NULL,
  StaticMembers = NULL,
  ExcludedMembers = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterEndpointIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the endpoint to modify. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

EndpointType

The type of the endpoint. One of: READER, WRITER, ANY.

StaticMembers

List of DB instance identifiers that are part of the custom endpoint group.

ExcludedMembers

List of DB instance identifiers that aren't part of the custom endpoint group. All other eligible instances are reachable through the custom endpoint. Only relevant if the list of static members is empty.


Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group

Description

Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName, ParameterValue, and ApplyMethod. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_cluster_parameter_group(DBClusterParameterGroupName, Parameters)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group to modify.

Parameters

[required] A list of parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to modify.

Valid Values (for the application method): immediate | pending-reboot

You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters.

When the application method is immediate, changes to dynamic parameters are applied immediately to the DB clusters associated with the parameter group. When the application method is pending-reboot, changes to dynamic and static parameters are applied after a reboot without failover to the DB clusters associated with the parameter group.


Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot

Description

Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_cluster_snapshot_attribute(
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier,
  AttributeName,
  ValuesToAdd = NULL,
  ValuesToRemove = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB cluster snapshot to modify the attributes for.

AttributeName

[required] The name of the DB cluster snapshot attribute to modify.

To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this value to restore.

To view the list of attributes available to modify, use the describe_db_cluster_snapshot_attributes API operation.

ValuesToAdd

A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by AttributeName.

To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account IDs, or all to make the manual DB cluster snapshot restorable by any Amazon Web Services account. Do not add the all value for any manual DB cluster snapshots that contain private information that you don't want available to all Amazon Web Services accounts.

ValuesToRemove

A list of DB cluster snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified by AttributeName.

To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account identifiers, or all to remove authorization for any Amazon Web Services account to copy or restore the DB cluster snapshot. If you specify all, an Amazon Web Services account whose account ID is explicitly added to the restore attribute can still copy or restore a manual DB cluster snapshot.


Modifies settings for a DB instance

Description

Modifies settings for a DB instance. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request. To learn what modifications you can make to your DB instance, call describe_valid_db_instance_modifications before you call modify_db_instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_instance(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  NewDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
  TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainFqdn = NULL,
  DomainOu = NULL,
  DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
  DomainDnsIps = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  DBPortNumber = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  DisableDomain = NULL,
  PromotionTier = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration = NULL,
  ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
  CertificateRotationRestart = NULL,
  ReplicaMode = NULL,
  EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
  AwsBackupRecoveryPointArn = NULL,
  AutomationMode = NULL,
  ResumeFullAutomationModeMinutes = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  StorageThroughput = NULL,
  ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  RotateMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
  MultiTenant = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The identifier of DB instance to modify. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.

AllocatedStorage

The new amount of storage in gibibytes (GiB) to allocate for the DB instance.

For RDS for Db2, MariaDB, RDS for MySQL, RDS for Oracle, and RDS for PostgreSQL, the value supplied must be at least 10% greater than the current value. Values that are not at least 10% greater than the existing value are rounded up so that they are 10% greater than the current value.

For the valid values for allocated storage for each engine, see create_db_instance.

Constraints:

  • When you increase the allocated storage for a DB instance that uses Provisioned IOPS (gp3, io1, or io2 storage type), you must also specify the Iops parameter. You can use the current value for Iops.

DBInstanceClass

The new compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide or Aurora DB instance classes in the Amazon Aurora User Guide. For RDS Custom, see DB instance class support for RDS Custom for Oracle and DB instance class support for RDS Custom for SQL Server.

If you modify the DB instance class, an outage occurs during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you specify ApplyImmediately in your request.

Default: Uses existing setting

Constraints:

  • If you are modifying the DB instance class and upgrading the engine version at the same time, the currently running engine version must be supported on the specified DB instance class. Otherwise, the operation returns an error. In this case, first run the operation to upgrade the engine version, and then run it again to modify the DB instance class.

DBSubnetGroupName

The new DB subnet group for the DB instance. You can use this parameter to move your DB instance to a different VPC. If your DB instance isn't in a VPC, you can also use this parameter to move your DB instance into a VPC. For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Changing the subnet group causes an outage during the change. The change is applied during the next maintenance window, unless you enable ApplyImmediately.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match existing DB subnet group.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

DBSecurityGroups

A list of DB security groups to authorize on this DB instance. Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match existing DB security groups.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of Amazon EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora (The associated list of EC2 VPC security groups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.)

  • RDS Custom

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match existing VPC security group IDs.

ApplyImmediately

Specifies whether the modifications in this request and any pending modifications are asynchronously applied as soon as possible, regardless of the PreferredMaintenanceWindow setting for the DB instance. By default, this parameter is disabled.

If this parameter is disabled, changes to the DB instance are applied during the next maintenance window. Some parameter changes can cause an outage and are applied on the next call to reboot_db_instance, or the next failure reboot. Review the table of parameters in Modifying a DB Instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide to see the impact of enabling or disabling ApplyImmediately for each modified parameter and to determine when the changes are applied.

MasterUserPassword

The new password for the master user.

Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Between the time of the request and the completion of the request, the MasterUserPassword element exists in the PendingModifiedValues element of the operation response.

Amazon RDS API operations never return the password, so this operation provides a way to regain access to a primary instance user if the password is lost. This includes restoring privileges that might have been accidentally revoked.

This setting doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • Amazon Aurora (The password for the master user is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.)

  • RDS Custom

Default: Uses existing setting

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified if ManageMasterUserPassword is turned on.

  • Can include any printable ASCII character except "/", """, or "@". For RDS for Oracle, can't include the "&" (ampersand) or the "'" (single quotes) character.

Length Constraints:

  • RDS for Db2 - Must contain from 8 to 255 characters.

  • RDS for MariaDB - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.

  • RDS for MySQL - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • RDS for Oracle - Must contain from 8 to 30 characters.

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.

DBParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to apply to the DB instance.

Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage. The parameter group name itself is changed immediately, but the actual parameter changes are not applied until you reboot the instance without failover. In this case, the DB instance isn't rebooted automatically, and the parameter changes aren't applied during the next maintenance window. However, if you modify dynamic parameters in the newly associated DB parameter group, these changes are applied immediately without a reboot.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Default: Uses existing setting

Constraints:

  • Must be in the same DB parameter group family as the DB instance.

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain automated backups. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups.

Enabling and disabling backups can result in a brief I/O suspension that lasts from a few seconds to a few minutes, depending on the size and class of your DB instance.

These changes are applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request. If you change the parameter from one non-zero value to another non-zero value, the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The retention period for automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.

Default: Uses existing setting

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 0 to 35.

  • Can't be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas.

  • Can't be set to 0 for an RDS Custom for Oracle DB instance.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, as determined by the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. The daily time range for creating automated backups is managed by the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, which might result in an outage. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage, except in the following situation, and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. If there are pending actions that cause a reboot, and the maintenance window is changed to include the current time, then changing this parameter causes a reboot of the DB instance. If you change this window to the current time, there must be at least 30 minutes between the current time and end of the window to ensure pending changes are applied.

For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Default: Uses existing setting

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi.

  • The day values must be mon | tue | wed | thu | fri | sat | sun.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred backup window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

MultiAZ

Specifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage. The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to upgrade to. Changing this parameter results in an outage and the change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request.

For major version upgrades, if a nondefault DB parameter group is currently in use, a new DB parameter group in the DB parameter group family for the new engine version must be specified. The new DB parameter group can be the default for that DB parameter group family.

If you specify only a major version, Amazon RDS updates the DB instance to the default minor version if the current minor version is lower. For information about valid engine versions, see create_db_instance, or call describe_db_engine_versions.

If the instance that you're modifying is acting as a read replica, the engine version that you specify must be the same or higher than the version that the source DB instance or cluster is running.

In RDS Custom for Oracle, this parameter is supported for read replicas only if they are in the PATCH_DB_FAILURE lifecycle.

Constraints:

  • If you are upgrading the engine version and modifying the DB instance class at the same time, the currently running engine version must be supported on the specified DB instance class. Otherwise, the operation returns an error. In this case, first run the operation to upgrade the engine version, and then run it again to modify the DB instance class.

AllowMajorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether major version upgrades are allowed. Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage and the change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Constraints:

  • Major version upgrades must be allowed when specifying a value for the EngineVersion parameter that's a different major version than the DB instance's current version.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window. An outage occurs when all the following conditions are met:

  • The automatic upgrade is enabled for the maintenance window.

  • A newer minor version is available.

  • RDS has enabled automatic patching for the engine version.

If any of the preceding conditions isn't met, Amazon RDS applies the change as soon as possible and doesn't cause an outage.

For an RDS Custom DB instance, don't enable this setting. Otherwise, the operation returns an error.

LicenseModel

The license model for the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values:

  • RDS for Db2 - bring-your-own-license

  • RDS for MariaDB - general-public-license

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - license-included

  • RDS for MySQL - general-public-license

  • RDS for Oracle - bring-your-own-license | license-included

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - postgresql-license

Iops

The new Provisioned IOPS (I/O operations per second) value for the RDS instance.

Changing this setting doesn't result in an outage and the change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request. If you are migrating from Provisioned IOPS to standard storage, set this value to 0. The DB instance will require a reboot for the change in storage type to take effect.

If you choose to migrate your DB instance from using standard storage to Provisioned IOPS (io1), or from Provisioned IOPS to standard storage, the process can take time. The duration of the migration depends on several factors such as database load, storage size, storage type (standard or Provisioned IOPS), amount of IOPS provisioned (if any), and the number of prior scale storage operations. Typical migration times are under 24 hours, but the process can take up to several days in some cases. During the migration, the DB instance is available for use, but might experience performance degradation. While the migration takes place, nightly backups for the instance are suspended. No other Amazon RDS operations can take place for the instance, including modifying the instance, rebooting the instance, deleting the instance, creating a read replica for the instance, and creating a DB snapshot of the instance.

Constraints:

  • For RDS for MariaDB, RDS for MySQL, RDS for Oracle, and RDS for PostgreSQL - The value supplied must be at least 10% greater than the current value. Values that are not at least 10% greater than the existing value are rounded up so that they are 10% greater than the current value.

  • When you increase the Provisioned IOPS, you must also specify the AllocatedStorage parameter. You can use the current value for AllocatedStorage.

Default: Uses existing setting

OptionGroupName

The option group to associate the DB instance with.

Changing this parameter doesn't result in an outage, with one exception. If the parameter change results in an option group that enables OEM, it can cause a brief period, lasting less than a second, during which new connections are rejected but existing connections aren't interrupted.

The change is applied during the next maintenance window unless the ApplyImmediately parameter is enabled for this request.

Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group, and that option group can't be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

NewDBInstanceIdentifier

The new identifier for the DB instance when renaming a DB instance. When you change the DB instance identifier, an instance reboot occurs immediately if you enable ApplyImmediately, or will occur during the next maintenance window if you disable ApplyImmediately. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: mydbinstance

StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB instance.

If you specify io1, io2, or gp3 you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.

If you choose to migrate your DB instance from using standard storage to gp2 (General Purpose SSD), gp3, or Provisioned IOPS (io1), or from these storage types to standard storage, the process can take time. The duration of the migration depends on several factors such as database load, storage size, storage type (standard or Provisioned IOPS), amount of IOPS provisioned (if any), and the number of prior scale storage operations. Typical migration times are under 24 hours, but the process can take up to several days in some cases. During the migration, the DB instance is available for use, but might experience performance degradation. While the migration takes place, nightly backups for the instance are suspended. No other Amazon RDS operations can take place for the instance, including modifying the instance, rebooting the instance, deleting the instance, creating a read replica for the instance, and creating a DB snapshot of the instance.

Valid Values: gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard

Default: io1, if the Iops parameter is specified. Otherwise, gp2.

TdeCredentialArn

The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

TdeCredentialPassword

The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to move the DB instance to. Specify none to remove the instance from its current domain. You must create the domain before this operation. Currently, you can create only Db2, MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.

For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DomainFqdn

The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.

Constraints:

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain

DomainOu

The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the distinguished name format.

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: ⁠OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain⁠

DomainAuthSecretArn

The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.

Example: arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456

DomainDnsIps

The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.

Constraints:

  • Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn't a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.

Example: ⁠123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237⁠

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags aren't copied.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. Copying tags to snapshots is managed by the DB cluster. Setting this value for an Aurora DB instance has no effect on the DB cluster setting. For more information, see modify_db_cluster.

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collection of Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values: 0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60

Default: 0

DBPortNumber

The port number on which the database accepts connections.

The value of the DBPortNumber parameter must not match any of the port values specified for options in the option group for the DB instance.

If you change the DBPortNumber value, your database restarts regardless of the value of the ApplyImmediately parameter.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values: 1150-65535

Default:

  • Amazon Aurora - 3306

  • RDS for Db2 - 50000

  • RDS for MariaDB - 3306

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - 1433

  • RDS for MySQL - 3306

  • RDS for Oracle - 1521

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - 5432

Constraints:

  • For RDS for Microsoft SQL Server, the value can't be 1234, 1434, 3260, 3343, 3389, 47001, or 49152-49156.

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.

When the DB instance is publicly accessible and you connect from outside of the DB instance's virtual private cloud (VPC), its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the public IP address. When you connect from within the same VPC as the DB instance, the endpoint resolves to the private IP address. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn't permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn't permit it.

When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

PubliclyAccessible only applies to DB instances in a VPC. The DB instance must be part of a public subnet and PubliclyAccessible must be enabled for it to be publicly accessible.

Changes to the PubliclyAccessible parameter are applied immediately regardless of the value of the ApplyImmediately parameter.

MonitoringRoleArn

The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see To create an IAM role for Amazon RDS Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DisableDomain

Specifies whether to remove the DB instance from the Active Directory domain.

PromotionTier

The order of priority in which an Aurora Replica is promoted to the primary instance after a failure of the existing primary instance. For more information, see Fault Tolerance for an Aurora DB Cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Default: 1

Valid Values: 0 - 15

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora. Mapping Amazon Web Services IAM accounts to database accounts is managed by the DB cluster.

For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DatabaseInsightsMode

Specifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance.

Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can't change this value.

EnablePerformanceInsights

Specifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance.

For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you don't specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain Performance Insights data.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values:

  • 7

  • month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples: 93 (3 months * 31), 341 (11 months * 31), 589 (19 months * 31)

  • 731

Default: 7 days

If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as 94, Amazon RDS returns an error.

CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration

The log types to be enabled for export to CloudWatch Logs for a specific DB instance.

A change to the CloudwatchLogsExportConfiguration parameter is always applied to the DB instance immediately. Therefore, the ApplyImmediately parameter has no effect.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

The following values are valid for each DB engine:

  • Aurora MySQL - audit | error | general | slowquery

  • Aurora PostgreSQL - postgresql

  • RDS for MySQL - error | general | slowquery

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - postgresql | upgrade

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

ProcessorFeatures

The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

UseDefaultProcessorFeatures

Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora DB instances. You can enable or disable deletion protection for the DB cluster. For more information, see modify_db_cluster. DB instances in a DB cluster can be deleted even when deletion protection is enabled for the DB cluster.

MaxAllocatedStorage

The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.

For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

CertificateRotationRestart

Specifies whether the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate.

By default, the DB instance is restarted when you rotate your SSL/TLS certificate. The certificate is not updated until the DB instance is restarted.

Set this parameter only if you are not using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance.

If you are using SSL/TLS to connect to the DB instance, follow the appropriate instructions for your DB engine to rotate your SSL/TLS certificate:

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

ReplicaMode

A value that sets the open mode of a replica database to either mounted or read-only.

Currently, this parameter is only supported for Oracle DB instances.

Mounted DB replicas are included in Oracle Enterprise Edition. The main use case for mounted replicas is cross-Region disaster recovery. The primary database doesn't use Active Data Guard to transmit information to the mounted replica. Because it doesn't accept user connections, a mounted replica can't serve a read-only workload. For more information, see Working with Oracle Read Replicas for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

EnableCustomerOwnedIp

Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.

A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.

For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.

AwsBackupRecoveryPointArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the recovery point in Amazon Web Services Backup.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

AutomationMode

The automation mode of the RDS Custom DB instance. If full, the DB instance automates monitoring and instance recovery. If ⁠all paused⁠, the instance pauses automation for the duration set by ResumeFullAutomationModeMinutes.

ResumeFullAutomationModeMinutes

The number of minutes to pause the automation. When the time period ends, RDS Custom resumes full automation.

Default: 60

Constraints:

  • Must be at least 60.

  • Must be no more than 1,440.

NetworkType

The network type of the DB instance.

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid Values: IPV4 | DUAL

StorageThroughput

The storage throughput value for the DB instance.

This setting applies only to the gp3 storage type.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

ManageMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

If the DB instance doesn't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can turn on this management. In this case, you can't specify MasterUserPassword.

If the DB instance already manages the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, and you specify that the master user password is not managed with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, then you must specify MasterUserPassword. In this case, Amazon RDS deletes the secret and uses the new password for the master user specified by MasterUserPassword.

For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Can't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if MasterUserPassword is specified.

RotateMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to rotate the secret managed by Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the master user password.

This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster. The secret value contains the updated password.

For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • You must apply the change immediately when rotating the master user password.

MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

This setting is valid only if both of the following conditions are met:

  • The DB instance doesn't manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

    If the DB instance already manages the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager, you can't change the KMS key used to encrypt the secret.

  • You are turning on ManageMasterUserPassword to manage the master user password in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

    If you are turning on ManageMasterUserPassword and don't specify MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId, then the aws/secretsmanager KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can't use the aws/secretsmanager KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

Engine

The target Oracle DB engine when you convert a non-CDB to a CDB. This intermediate step is necessary to upgrade an Oracle Database 19c non-CDB to an Oracle Database 21c CDB.

Note the following requirements:

  • Make sure that you specify oracle-ee-cdb or oracle-se2-cdb.

  • Make sure that your DB engine runs Oracle Database 19c with an April 2021 or later RU.

Note the following limitations:

  • You can't convert a CDB to a non-CDB.

  • You can't convert a replica database.

  • You can't convert a non-CDB to a CDB and upgrade the engine version in the same command.

  • You can't convert the existing custom parameter or option group when it has options or parameters that are permanent or persistent. In this situation, the DB instance reverts to the default option and parameter group. To avoid reverting to the default, specify a new parameter group with --db-parameter-group-name and a new option group with --option-group-name.

DedicatedLogVolume

Indicates whether the DB instance has a dedicated log volume (DLV) enabled.

MultiTenant

Specifies whether the to convert your DB instance from the single-tenant configuration to the multi-tenant configuration. This parameter is supported only for RDS for Oracle CDB instances.

During the conversion, RDS creates an initial tenant database and associates the DB name, master user name, character set, and national character set metadata with this database. The tags associated with the instance also propagate to the initial tenant database. You can add more tenant databases to your DB instance by using the create_tenant_database operation.

The conversion to the multi-tenant configuration is permanent and irreversible, so you can't later convert back to the single-tenant configuration. When you specify this parameter, you must also specify ApplyImmediately.


Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group

Description

Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group. To modify more than one parameter, submit a list of the following: ParameterName, ParameterValue, and ApplyMethod. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_parameter_group(DBParameterGroupName, Parameters)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.

Parameters

[required] An array of parameter names, values, and the application methods for the parameter update. At least one parameter name, value, and application method must be supplied; later arguments are optional. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

Valid Values (for the application method): immediate | pending-reboot

You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters.

When the application method is immediate, changes to dynamic parameters are applied immediately to the DB instances associated with the parameter group.

When the application method is pending-reboot, changes to dynamic and static parameters are applied after a reboot without failover to the DB instances associated with the parameter group.

You can't use pending-reboot with dynamic parameters on RDS for SQL Server DB instances. Use immediate.

For more information on modifying DB parameters, see Working with DB parameter groups in the Amazon RDS User Guide.


Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy

Description

Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_proxy/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_proxy(
  DBProxyName,
  NewDBProxyName = NULL,
  Auth = NULL,
  RequireTLS = NULL,
  IdleClientTimeout = NULL,
  DebugLogging = NULL,
  RoleArn = NULL,
  SecurityGroups = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

[required] The identifier for the DBProxy to modify.

NewDBProxyName

The new identifier for the DBProxy. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Auth

The new authentication settings for the DBProxy.

RequireTLS

Whether Transport Layer Security (TLS) encryption is required for connections to the proxy. By enabling this setting, you can enforce encrypted TLS connections to the proxy, even if the associated database doesn't use TLS.

IdleClientTimeout

The number of seconds that a connection to the proxy can be inactive before the proxy disconnects it. You can set this value higher or lower than the connection timeout limit for the associated database.

DebugLogging

Whether the proxy includes detailed information about SQL statements in its logs. This information helps you to debug issues involving SQL behavior or the performance and scalability of the proxy connections. The debug information includes the text of SQL statements that you submit through the proxy. Thus, only enable this setting when needed for debugging, and only when you have security measures in place to safeguard any sensitive information that appears in the logs.

RoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role that the proxy uses to access secrets in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

SecurityGroups

The new list of security groups for the DBProxy.


Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy endpoint

Description

Changes the settings for an existing DB proxy endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_proxy_endpoint/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_proxy_endpoint(
  DBProxyEndpointName,
  NewDBProxyEndpointName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyEndpointName

[required] The name of the DB proxy sociated with the DB proxy endpoint that you want to modify.

NewDBProxyEndpointName

The new identifier for the DBProxyEndpoint. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

The VPC security group IDs for the DB proxy endpoint. When the DB proxy endpoint uses a different VPC than the original proxy, you also specify a different set of security group IDs than for the original proxy.


Modifies the properties of a DBProxyTargetGroup

Description

Modifies the properties of a DBProxyTargetGroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_proxy_target_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_proxy_target_group(
  TargetGroupName,
  DBProxyName,
  ConnectionPoolConfig = NULL,
  NewName = NULL
)

Arguments

TargetGroupName

[required] The name of the target group to modify.

DBProxyName

[required] The name of the proxy.

ConnectionPoolConfig

The settings that determine the size and behavior of the connection pool for the target group.

NewName

The new name for the modified DBProxyTarget. An identifier must begin with a letter and must contain only ASCII letters, digits, and hyphens; it can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

You can't rename the default target group.


Updates the recommendation status and recommended action status for the specified recommendation

Description

Updates the recommendation status and recommended action status for the specified recommendation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_recommendation/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_recommendation(
  RecommendationId,
  Locale = NULL,
  Status = NULL,
  RecommendedActionUpdates = NULL
)

Arguments

RecommendationId

[required] The identifier of the recommendation to update.

Locale

The language of the modified recommendation.

Status

The recommendation status to update.

Valid values:

  • active

  • dismissed

RecommendedActionUpdates

The list of recommended action status to update. You can update multiple recommended actions at one time.


Modifies the settings of an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group

Description

Modifies the settings of an Aurora Limitless Database DB shard group. You can change one or more settings by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_shard_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_shard_group(
  DBShardGroupIdentifier,
  MaxACU = NULL,
  MinACU = NULL,
  ComputeRedundancy = NULL
)

Arguments

DBShardGroupIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB shard group to modify.

MaxACU

The maximum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).

MinACU

The minimum capacity of the DB shard group in Aurora capacity units (ACUs).

ComputeRedundancy

Specifies whether to create standby DB shard groups for the DB shard group. Valid values are the following:

  • 0 - Creates a DB shard group without a standby DB shard group. This is the default value.

  • 1 - Creates a DB shard group with a standby DB shard group in a different Availability Zone (AZ).

  • 2 - Creates a DB shard group with two standby DB shard groups in two different AZs.


Updates a manual DB snapshot with a new engine version

Description

Updates a manual DB snapshot with a new engine version. The snapshot can be encrypted or unencrypted, but not shared or public.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_snapshot(
  DBSnapshotIdentifier,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB snapshot to modify.

EngineVersion

The engine version to upgrade the DB snapshot to.

The following are the database engines and engine versions that are available when you upgrade a DB snapshot.

MySQL

For the list of engine versions that are available for upgrading a DB snapshot, see Upgrading a MySQL DB snapshot engine version in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Oracle

  • ⁠19.0.0.0.ru-2022-01.rur-2022-01.r1⁠ (supported for 12.2.0.1 DB snapshots)

  • ⁠19.0.0.0.ru-2022-07.rur-2022-07.r1⁠ (supported for 12.1.0.2 DB snapshots)

  • ⁠12.1.0.2.v8⁠ (supported for 12.1.0.1 DB snapshots)

  • ⁠11.2.0.4.v12⁠ (supported for 11.2.0.2 DB snapshots)

  • ⁠11.2.0.4.v11⁠ (supported for 11.2.0.3 DB snapshots)

PostgreSQL

For the list of engine versions that are available for upgrading a DB snapshot, see Upgrading a PostgreSQL DB snapshot engine version in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

OptionGroupName

The option group to identify with the upgraded DB snapshot.

You can specify this parameter when you upgrade an Oracle DB snapshot. The same option group considerations apply when upgrading a DB snapshot as when upgrading a DB instance. For more information, see Option group considerations in the Amazon RDS User Guide.


Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB snapshot

Description

Adds an attribute and values to, or removes an attribute and values from, a manual DB snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_snapshot_attribute/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_snapshot_attribute(
  DBSnapshotIdentifier,
  AttributeName,
  ValuesToAdd = NULL,
  ValuesToRemove = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot to modify the attributes for.

AttributeName

[required] The name of the DB snapshot attribute to modify.

To manage authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual DB snapshot, set this value to restore.

To view the list of attributes available to modify, use the describe_db_snapshot_attributes API operation.

ValuesToAdd

A list of DB snapshot attributes to add to the attribute specified by AttributeName.

To authorize other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account IDs, or all to make the manual DB snapshot restorable by any Amazon Web Services account. Do not add the all value for any manual DB snapshots that contain private information that you don't want available to all Amazon Web Services accounts.

ValuesToRemove

A list of DB snapshot attributes to remove from the attribute specified by AttributeName.

To remove authorization for other Amazon Web Services accounts to copy or restore a manual snapshot, set this list to include one or more Amazon Web Services account identifiers, or all to remove authorization for any Amazon Web Services account to copy or restore the DB snapshot. If you specify all, an Amazon Web Services account whose account ID is explicitly added to the restore attribute can still copy or restore the manual DB snapshot.


Modifies an existing DB subnet group

Description

Modifies an existing DB subnet group. DB subnet groups must contain at least one subnet in at least two AZs in the Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_db_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_db_subnet_group(
  DBSubnetGroupName,
  DBSubnetGroupDescription = NULL,
  SubnetIds
)

Arguments

DBSubnetGroupName

[required] The name for the DB subnet group. This value is stored as a lowercase string. You can't modify the default subnet group.

Constraints: Must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup. Must not be default.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

DBSubnetGroupDescription

The description for the DB subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] The EC2 subnet IDs for the DB subnet group.


Modifies an existing RDS event notification subscription

Description

Modifies an existing RDS event notification subscription. You can't modify the source identifiers using this call. To change source identifiers for a subscription, use the add_source_identifier_to_subscription and remove_source_identifier_from_subscription calls.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_event_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SnsTopicArn = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  Enabled = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the RDS event notification subscription.

SnsTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic created for event notification. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it.

SourceType

The type of source that is generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a DB instance, you would set this parameter to db-instance. For RDS Proxy events, specify db-proxy. If this value isn't specified, all events are returned.

Valid Values:db-instance | db-cluster | db-parameter-group | db-security-group | db-snapshot | db-cluster-snapshot | db-proxy | zero-etl | custom-engine-version | blue-green-deployment

EventCategories

A list of event categories for a source type (SourceType) that you want to subscribe to. You can see a list of the categories for a given source type in Events in the Amazon RDS User Guide or by using the describe_event_categories operation.

Enabled

Specifies whether to activate the subscription.


Modifies a setting for an Amazon Aurora global database cluster

Description

Modifies a setting for an Amazon Aurora global database cluster. You can change one or more database configuration parameters by specifying these parameters and the new values in the request. For more information on Amazon Aurora, see What is Amazon Aurora? in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  NewGlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AllowMajorVersionUpgrade = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier for the global cluster to modify. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster.

NewGlobalClusterIdentifier

The new cluster identifier for the global database cluster. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster2

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the global database cluster. The global database cluster can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to which you want to upgrade.

To list all of the available engine versions for aurora-mysql (for MySQL-based Aurora global databases), use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-mysql --query '*[]|[?SupportsGlobalDatabases == `true`].[EngineVersion]'⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for aurora-postgresql (for PostgreSQL-based Aurora global databases), use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-postgresql --query '*[]|[?SupportsGlobalDatabases == `true`].[EngineVersion]'⁠

AllowMajorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether to allow major version upgrades.

Constraints: Must be enabled if you specify a value for the EngineVersion parameter that's a different major version than the global cluster's current version.

If you upgrade the major version of a global database, the cluster and DB instance parameter groups are set to the default parameter groups for the new version. Apply any custom parameter groups after completing the upgrade.


Modifies a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift

Description

Modifies a zero-ETL integration with Amazon Redshift.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_integration/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_integration(
  IntegrationIdentifier,
  IntegrationName = NULL,
  DataFilter = NULL,
  Description = NULL
)

Arguments

IntegrationIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the integration to modify.

IntegrationName

A new name for the integration.

DataFilter

A new data filter for the integration. For more information, see Data filtering for Aurora zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift or Data filtering for Amazon RDS zero-ETL integrations with Amazon Redshift.

Description

A new description for the integration.


Modifies an existing option group

Description

Modifies an existing option group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_option_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_option_group(
  OptionGroupName,
  OptionsToInclude = NULL,
  OptionsToRemove = NULL,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL
)

Arguments

OptionGroupName

[required] The name of the option group to be modified.

Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group, and that option group can't be removed from a DB instance once it is associated with a DB instance

OptionsToInclude

Options in this list are added to the option group or, if already present, the specified configuration is used to update the existing configuration.

OptionsToRemove

Options in this list are removed from the option group.

ApplyImmediately

Specifies whether to apply the change immediately or during the next maintenance window for each instance associated with the option group.


Modifies an existing tenant database in a DB instance

Description

Modifies an existing tenant database in a DB instance. You can change the tenant database name or the master user password. This operation is supported only for RDS for Oracle CDB instances using the multi-tenant configuration.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_modify_tenant_database/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_modify_tenant_database(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  TenantDBName,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  NewTenantDBName = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB instance that contains the tenant database that you are modifying. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.

TenantDBName

[required] The user-supplied name of the tenant database that you want to modify. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing tenant database.

MasterUserPassword

The new password for the master user of the specified tenant database in your DB instance.

Amazon RDS operations never return the password, so this action provides a way to regain access to a tenant database user if the password is lost. This includes restoring privileges that might have been accidentally revoked.

Constraints:

  • Can include any printable ASCII character except /, ⁠\"⁠ (double quote), @, & (ampersand), and ⁠\'⁠ (single quote).

Length constraints:

  • Must contain between 8 and 30 characters.

NewTenantDBName

The new name of the tenant database when renaming a tenant database. This parameter isn’t case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Can't be the string null or any other reserved word.

  • Can't be longer than 8 characters.


Promotes a read replica DB instance to a standalone DB instance

Description

Promotes a read replica DB instance to a standalone DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_promote_read_replica/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_promote_read_replica(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing read replica DB instance.

Example: mydbinstance

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. Setting this parameter to 0 disables automated backups.

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 0 to 35.

  • Can't be set to 0 if the DB instance is a source to read replicas.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled, using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.


Promotes a read replica DB cluster to a standalone DB cluster

Description

Promotes a read replica DB cluster to a standalone DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_promote_read_replica_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_promote_read_replica_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the DB cluster read replica to promote. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DB cluster read replica.

Example: my-cluster-replica1


Purchases a reserved DB instance offering

Description

Purchases a reserved DB instance offering.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_purchase_reserved_db_instances_offering(
  ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId,
  ReservedDBInstanceId = NULL,
  DBInstanceCount = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedDBInstancesOfferingId

[required] The ID of the Reserved DB instance offering to purchase.

Example: 438012d3-4052-4cc7-b2e3-8d3372e0e706

ReservedDBInstanceId

Customer-specified identifier to track this reservation.

Example: myreservationID

DBInstanceCount

The number of instances to reserve.

Default: 1

Tags

You might need to reboot your DB cluster, usually for maintenance reasons

Description

You might need to reboot your DB cluster, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain modifications, or if you change the DB cluster parameter group associated with the DB cluster, reboot the DB cluster for the changes to take effect.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reboot_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_reboot_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.


You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons

Description

You might need to reboot your DB instance, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain modifications, or if you change the DB parameter group associated with the DB instance, you must reboot the instance for the changes to take effect.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reboot_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_reboot_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, ForceFailover = NULL)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBInstance.

ForceFailover

Specifies whether the reboot is conducted through a Multi-AZ failover.

Constraint: You can't enable force failover if the instance isn't configured for Multi-AZ.


You might need to reboot your DB shard group, usually for maintenance reasons

Description

You might need to reboot your DB shard group, usually for maintenance reasons. For example, if you make certain modifications, reboot the DB shard group for the changes to take effect.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reboot_db_shard_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_reboot_db_shard_group(DBShardGroupIdentifier)

Arguments

DBShardGroupIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB shard group to reboot.


Associate one or more DBProxyTarget data structures with a DBProxyTargetGroup

Description

Associate one or more DBProxyTarget data structures with a DBProxyTargetGroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_register_db_proxy_targets/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_register_db_proxy_targets(
  DBProxyName,
  TargetGroupName = NULL,
  DBInstanceIdentifiers = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifiers = NULL
)

Arguments

DBProxyName

[required] The identifier of the DBProxy that is associated with the DBProxyTargetGroup.

TargetGroupName

The identifier of the DBProxyTargetGroup.

DBInstanceIdentifiers

One or more DB instance identifiers.

DBClusterIdentifiers

One or more DB cluster identifiers.


Detaches an Aurora secondary cluster from an Aurora global database cluster

Description

Detaches an Aurora secondary cluster from an Aurora global database cluster. The cluster becomes a standalone cluster with read-write capability instead of being read-only and receiving data from a primary cluster in a different Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_from_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_remove_from_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DbClusterIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier to detach from the Aurora global database cluster.

DbClusterIdentifier

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) identifying the cluster that was detached from the Aurora global database cluster.


Removes the asssociation of an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster

Description

Removes the asssociation of an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_role_from_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_remove_role_from_db_cluster(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  RoleArn,
  FeatureName = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB cluster to disassociate the IAM role from.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the Aurora DB cluster, for example ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AuroraAccessRole⁠.

FeatureName

The name of the feature for the DB cluster that the IAM role is to be disassociated from. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.


Disassociates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB instance

Description

Disassociates an Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role from a DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_role_from_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_remove_role_from_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, RoleArn, FeatureName)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB instance to disassociate the IAM role from.

RoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to disassociate from the DB instance, for example, ⁠arn:aws:iam::123456789012:role/AccessRole⁠.

FeatureName

[required] The name of the feature for the DB instance that the IAM role is to be disassociated from. For information about supported feature names, see DBEngineVersion.


Removes a source identifier from an existing RDS event notification subscription

Description

Removes a source identifier from an existing RDS event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_remove_source_identifier_from_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SourceIdentifier
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the RDS event notification subscription you want to remove a source identifier from.

SourceIdentifier

[required] The source identifier to be removed from the subscription, such as the DB instance identifier for a DB instance or the name of a security group.


Removes metadata tags from an Amazon RDS resource

Description

Removes metadata tags from an Amazon RDS resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_remove_tags_from_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_remove_tags_from_resource(ResourceName, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon RDS resource that the tags are removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN). For information about creating an ARN, see Constructing an ARN for Amazon RDS in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

TagKeys

[required] The tag key (name) of the tag to be removed.


Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value

Description

Modifies the parameters of a DB cluster parameter group to the default value. To reset specific parameters submit a list of the following: ParameterName and ApplyMethod. To reset the entire DB cluster parameter group, specify the DBClusterParameterGroupName and ResetAllParameters parameters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_reset_db_cluster_parameter_group(
  DBClusterParameterGroupName,
  ResetAllParameters = NULL,
  Parameters = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB cluster parameter group to reset.

ResetAllParameters

Specifies whether to reset all parameters in the DB cluster parameter group to their default values. You can't use this parameter if there is a list of parameter names specified for the Parameters parameter.

Parameters

A list of parameter names in the DB cluster parameter group to reset to the default values. You can't use this parameter if the ResetAllParameters parameter is enabled.


Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value

Description

Modifies the parameters of a DB parameter group to the engine/system default value. To reset specific parameters, provide a list of the following: ParameterName and ApplyMethod. To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the DBParameterGroup name and ResetAllParameters parameters. When resetting the entire group, dynamic parameters are updated immediately and static parameters are set to pending-reboot to take effect on the next DB instance restart or reboot_db_instance request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_reset_db_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_reset_db_parameter_group(
  DBParameterGroupName,
  ResetAllParameters = NULL,
  Parameters = NULL
)

Arguments

DBParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the DB parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must match the name of an existing DBParameterGroup.

ResetAllParameters

Specifies whether to reset all parameters in the DB parameter group to default values. By default, all parameters in the DB parameter group are reset to default values.

Parameters

To reset the entire DB parameter group, specify the DBParameterGroup name and ResetAllParameters parameters. To reset specific parameters, provide a list of the following: ParameterName and ApplyMethod. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

MySQL

Valid Values (for Apply method): immediate | pending-reboot

You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters, and changes are applied when DB instance reboots.

MariaDB

Valid Values (for Apply method): immediate | pending-reboot

You can use the immediate value with dynamic parameters only. You can use the pending-reboot value for both dynamic and static parameters, and changes are applied when DB instance reboots.

Oracle

Valid Values (for Apply method): pending-reboot


Creates an Amazon Aurora DB cluster from MySQL data stored in an Amazon S3 bucket

Description

Creates an Amazon Aurora DB cluster from MySQL data stored in an Amazon S3 bucket. Amazon RDS must be authorized to access the Amazon S3 bucket and the data must be created using the Percona XtraBackup utility as described in Migrating Data from MySQL by Using an Amazon S3 Bucket in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_cluster_from_s3/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_restore_db_cluster_from_s3(
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  CharacterSetName = NULL,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MasterUsername,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  SourceEngine,
  SourceEngineVersion,
  S3BucketName,
  S3Prefix = NULL,
  S3IngestionRoleArn,
  BacktrackWindow = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)

Arguments

AvailabilityZones

A list of Availability Zones (AZs) where instances in the restored DB cluster can be created.

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups of the restored DB cluster are retained. You must specify a minimum value of 1.

Default: 1

Constraints:

  • Must be a value from 1 to 35

CharacterSetName

A value that indicates that the restored DB cluster should be associated with the specified CharacterSet.

DatabaseName

The database name for the restored DB cluster.

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB cluster to create from the source data in the Amazon S3 bucket. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-cluster1

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with the restored DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default parameter group for the engine version is used.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBClusterParameterGroup.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with the restored DB cluster.

DBSubnetGroupName

A DB subnet group to associate with the restored DB cluster.

Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

Engine

[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this DB cluster.

Valid Values: aurora-mysql (for Aurora MySQL)

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to use.

To list all of the available engine versions for aurora-mysql (Aurora MySQL), use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-mysql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

Aurora MySQL

Examples: ⁠5.7.mysql_aurora.2.12.0⁠, ⁠8.0.mysql_aurora.3.04.0⁠

Port

The port number on which the instances in the restored DB cluster accept connections.

Default: 3306

MasterUsername

[required] The name of the master user for the restored DB cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.

MasterUserPassword

The password for the master database user. This password can contain any printable ASCII character except "/", """, or "@".

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • Can't be specified if ManageMasterUserPassword is turned on.

OptionGroupName

A value that indicates that the restored DB cluster should be associated with the specified option group.

Permanent options can't be removed from an option group. An option group can't be removed from a DB cluster once it is associated with a DB cluster.

PreferredBackupWindow

The daily time range during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled using the BackupRetentionPeriod parameter.

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region. To view the time blocks available, see Backup window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

The default is a 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time for each Amazon Web Services Region, occurring on a random day of the week. To see the time blocks available, see Adjusting the Preferred Maintenance Window in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

Tags
StorageEncrypted

Specifies whether the restored DB cluster is encrypted.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB cluster.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

If the StorageEncrypted parameter is enabled, and you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then Amazon RDS will use your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

SourceEngine

[required] The identifier for the database engine that was backed up to create the files stored in the Amazon S3 bucket.

Valid Values: mysql

SourceEngineVersion

[required] The version of the database that the backup files were created from.

MySQL versions 5.7 and 8.0 are supported.

Example: ⁠5.7.40⁠, ⁠8.0.28⁠

S3BucketName

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket that contains the data used to create the Amazon Aurora DB cluster.

S3Prefix

The prefix for all of the file names that contain the data used to create the Amazon Aurora DB cluster. If you do not specify a SourceS3Prefix value, then the Amazon Aurora DB cluster is created by using all of the files in the Amazon S3 bucket.

S3IngestionRoleArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role that authorizes Amazon RDS to access the Amazon S3 bucket on your behalf.

BacktrackWindow

The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.

Currently, Backtrack is only supported for Aurora MySQL DB clusters.

Default: 0

Constraints:

  • If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.

Aurora MySQL

Possible values are audit, error, general, instance, and slowquery.

Aurora PostgreSQL

Possible value are instance and postgresql.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.

Domain

Specify the Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation.

For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos Authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

DomainIAMRoleName

Specify the name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration
NetworkType

The network type of the DB cluster.

Valid Values:

  • IPV4

  • DUAL

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

ManageMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Can't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if MasterUserPassword is specified.

MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB cluster.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

If you don't specify MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId, then the aws/secretsmanager KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can't use the aws/secretsmanager KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

StorageType

Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.

Valid Values: aurora, aurora-iopt1

Default: aurora

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this DB cluster.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB cluster to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.

You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support


Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot

Description

Creates a new DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_restore_db_cluster_from_snapshot(
  AvailabilityZones = NULL,
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  SnapshotIdentifier,
  Engine,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  BacktrackWindow = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  EngineMode = NULL,
  ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  DBClusterInstanceClass = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  RdsCustomClusterConfiguration = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)

Arguments

AvailabilityZones

Provides the list of Availability Zones (AZs) where instances in the restored DB cluster can be created.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB cluster to create from the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-snapshot-id

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

SnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot to restore from.

You can use either the name or the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to specify a DB cluster snapshot. However, you can use only the ARN to specify a DB snapshot.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing Snapshot.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Engine

[required] The database engine to use for the new DB cluster.

Default: The same as source

Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EngineVersion

The version of the database engine to use for the new DB cluster. If you don't specify an engine version, the default version for the database engine in the Amazon Web Services Region is used.

To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora MySQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-mysql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for Aurora PostgreSQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine aurora-postgresql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for MySQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine mysql --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

To list all of the available engine versions for RDS for PostgreSQL, use the following command:

⁠aws rds describe-db-engine-versions --engine postgres --query "DBEngineVersions[].EngineVersion"⁠

Aurora MySQL

See Database engine updates for Amazon Aurora MySQL in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Aurora PostgreSQL

See Amazon Aurora PostgreSQL releases and engine versions in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

MySQL

See Amazon RDS for MySQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

PostgreSQL

See Amazon RDS for PostgreSQL versions and extensions in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Port

The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections.

Constraints: This value must be 1150-65535

Default: The same port as the original DB cluster.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DBSubnetGroupName

The name of the DB subnet group to use for the new DB cluster.

Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DatabaseName

The database name for the restored DB cluster.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

OptionGroupName

The name of the option group to use for the restored DB cluster.

DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can't be modified.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster will belong to.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Tags

The tags to be assigned to the restored DB cluster.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from a DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

When you don't specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then the following occurs:

  • If the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot in SnapshotIdentifier is encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot.

  • If the DB snapshot or DB cluster snapshot in SnapshotIdentifier isn't encrypted, then the restored DB cluster isn't encrypted.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

BacktrackWindow

The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.

Currently, Backtrack is only supported for Aurora MySQL DB clusters.

Default: 0

Constraints:

  • If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.

RDS for MySQL

Possible values are error, general, and slowquery.

RDS for PostgreSQL

Possible values are postgresql and upgrade.

Aurora MySQL

Possible values are audit, error, general, instance, and slowquery.

Aurora PostgreSQL

Possible value are instance and postgresql.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EngineMode

The DB engine mode of the DB cluster, either provisioned or serverless.

For more information, see CreateDBCluster.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

ScalingConfiguration

For DB clusters in serverless DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster. If this argument is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified engine is used.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing default DB cluster parameter group.

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation. Currently, only MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances can be created in an Active Directory Domain.

For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

DBClusterInstanceClass

The compute and memory capacity of the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6gd.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.

For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

StorageType

Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.

When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the Iops parameter is required.

Valid Values: aurora, aurora-iopt1 (Aurora DB clusters); io1 (Multi-AZ DB clusters)

Default: aurora (Aurora DB clusters); io1 (Multi-AZ DB clusters)

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.

For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.

When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster's VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it.

When the DB cluster isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.

If DBSubnetGroupName isn't specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.

  • If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.

If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration
NetworkType

The network type of the DB cluster.

Valid Values:

  • IPV4

  • DUAL

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

RdsCustomClusterConfiguration

Reserved for future use.

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

Valid Values: 0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60

Default: 0

MonitoringRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

EnablePerformanceInsights

Specifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you don't specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain Performance Insights data.

Valid Values:

  • 7

  • month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples: 93 (3 months * 31), 341 (11 months * 31), 589 (19 months * 31)

  • 731

Default: 7 days

If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as 94, Amazon RDS issues an error.

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this DB cluster.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB cluster to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.

You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support


Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time

Description

Restores a DB cluster to an arbitrary point in time. Users can restore to any point in time before LatestRestorableTime for up to BackupRetentionPeriod days. The target DB cluster is created from the source DB cluster with the same configuration as the original DB cluster, except that the new DB cluster is created with the default DB security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_restore_db_cluster_to_point_in_time(
  DBClusterIdentifier,
  RestoreType = NULL,
  SourceDBClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  RestoreToTime = NULL,
  UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  BacktrackWindow = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  DBClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  EngineMode = NULL,
  DBClusterInstanceClass = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  SourceDbClusterResourceId = NULL,
  RdsCustomClusterConfiguration = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The name of the new DB cluster to be created.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

RestoreType

The type of restore to be performed. You can specify one of the following values:

  • full-copy - The new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.

  • copy-on-write - The new DB cluster is restored as a clone of the source DB cluster.

If you don't specify a RestoreType value, then the new DB cluster is restored as a full copy of the source DB cluster.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

SourceDBClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the source DB cluster from which to restore.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DBCluster.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

RestoreToTime

The date and time to restore the DB cluster to.

Valid Values: Value must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format

Constraints:

  • Must be before the latest restorable time for the DB instance

  • Must be specified if UseLatestRestorableTime parameter isn't provided

  • Can't be specified if the UseLatestRestorableTime parameter is enabled

  • Can't be specified if the RestoreType parameter is copy-on-write

Example: ⁠2015-03-07T23:45:00Z⁠

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

UseLatestRestorableTime

Specifies whether to restore the DB cluster to the latest restorable backup time. By default, the DB cluster isn't restored to the latest restorable backup time.

Constraints: Can't be specified if RestoreToTime parameter is provided.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Port

The port number on which the new DB cluster accepts connections.

Constraints: A value from 1150-65535.

Default: The default port for the engine.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DBSubnetGroupName

The DB subnet group name to use for the new DB cluster.

Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

OptionGroupName

The name of the option group for the new DB cluster.

DB clusters are associated with a default option group that can't be modified.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of VPC security groups that the new DB cluster belongs to.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Tags
KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to use when restoring an encrypted DB cluster from an encrypted DB cluster.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

You can restore to a new DB cluster and encrypt the new DB cluster with a KMS key that is different from the KMS key used to encrypt the source DB cluster. The new DB cluster is encrypted with the KMS key identified by the KmsKeyId parameter.

If you don't specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then the following occurs:

  • If the DB cluster is encrypted, then the restored DB cluster is encrypted using the KMS key that was used to encrypt the source DB cluster.

  • If the DB cluster isn't encrypted, then the restored DB cluster isn't encrypted.

If DBClusterIdentifier refers to a DB cluster that isn't encrypted, then the restore request is rejected.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

For more information, see IAM Database Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or IAM database authentication for MariaDB, MySQL, and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

BacktrackWindow

The target backtrack window, in seconds. To disable backtracking, set this value to 0.

Default: 0

Constraints:

  • If specified, this value must be set to a number from 0 to 259,200 (72 hours).

Valid for: Aurora MySQL DB clusters only

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs that the restored DB cluster is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used.

RDS for MySQL

Possible values are error, general, and slowquery.

RDS for PostgreSQL

Possible values are postgresql and upgrade.

Aurora MySQL

Possible values are audit, error, general, instance, and slowquery.

Aurora PostgreSQL

Possible value are instance and postgresql.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon RDS, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about exporting CloudWatch Logs for Amazon Aurora, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DBClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the custom DB cluster parameter group to associate with this DB cluster.

If the DBClusterParameterGroupName parameter is omitted, the default DB cluster parameter group for the specified engine is used.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB cluster parameter group.

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB cluster. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB cluster to snapshots of the restored DB cluster. The default is not to copy them.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB cluster in. The domain must be created prior to this operation.

For Amazon Aurora DB clusters, Amazon RDS can use Kerberos Authentication to authenticate users that connect to the DB cluster. For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to be used when making API calls to the Directory Service.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

ScalingConfiguration

For DB clusters in serverless DB engine mode, the scaling properties of the DB cluster.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

EngineMode

The engine mode of the new cluster. Specify provisioned or serverless, depending on the type of the cluster you are creating. You can create an Aurora Serverless v1 clone from a provisioned cluster, or a provisioned clone from an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster. To create a clone that is an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster, the original cluster must be an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster or an encrypted provisioned cluster. To create a full copy that is an Aurora Serverless v1 cluster, specify the engine mode serverless.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

DBClusterInstanceClass

The compute and memory capacity of the each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster, for example db.m6gd.xlarge. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines.

For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB instance class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

StorageType

Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB cluster.

When specified for a Multi-AZ DB cluster, a value for the Iops parameter is required.

Valid Values: aurora, aurora-iopt1 (Aurora DB clusters); io1 (Multi-AZ DB clusters)

Default: aurora (Aurora DB clusters); io1 (Multi-AZ DB clusters)

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB cluster is publicly accessible.

When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster's VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it.

When the DB cluster isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB cluster with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

Default: The default behavior varies depending on whether DBSubnetGroupName is specified.

If DBSubnetGroupName isn't specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the default VPC in the target Region doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.

  • If the default VPC in the target Region has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.

If DBSubnetGroupName is specified, and PubliclyAccessible isn't specified, the following applies:

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that doesn’t have an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is private.

  • If the subnets are part of a VPC that has an internet gateway attached to it, the DB cluster is public.

Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to be initially allocated for each DB instance in the Multi-AZ DB cluster.

For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints: Must be a multiple between .5 and 50 of the storage amount for the DB instance.

Valid for: Multi-AZ DB clusters only

ServerlessV2ScalingConfiguration
NetworkType

The network type of the DB cluster.

Valid Values:

  • IPV4

  • DUAL

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB cluster. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Valid for: Aurora DB clusters only

SourceDbClusterResourceId

The resource ID of the source DB cluster from which to restore.

RdsCustomClusterConfiguration

Reserved for future use.

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB cluster. To turn off collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

Valid Values: 0 | 1 | 5 | 10 | 15 | 30 | 60

Default: 0

MonitoringRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that permits RDS to send Enhanced Monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. An example is arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

EnablePerformanceInsights

Specifies whether to turn on Performance Insights for the DB cluster.

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you don't specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain Performance Insights data.

Valid Values:

  • 7

  • month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23. Examples: 93 (3 months * 31), 341 (11 months * 31), 589 (19 months * 31)

  • 731

Default: 7 days

If you specify a retention period that isn't valid, such as 94, Amazon RDS issues an error.

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this DB cluster.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB cluster to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.

You can use this setting to enroll your DB cluster into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB cluster past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see the following sections:

Valid for Cluster Type: Aurora DB clusters and Multi-AZ DB clusters

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support


Creates a new DB instance from a DB snapshot

Description

Creates a new DB instance from a DB snapshot. The target database is created from the source database restore point with most of the source's original configuration, including the default security group and DB parameter group. By default, the new DB instance is created as a Single-AZ deployment, except when the instance is a SQL Server instance that has an option group associated with mirroring. In this case, the instance becomes a Multi-AZ deployment, not a Single-AZ deployment.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_restore_db_instance_from_db_snapshot(
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  DBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  DBName = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
  TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainFqdn = NULL,
  DomainOu = NULL,
  DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
  DomainDnsIps = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
  CustomIamInstanceProfile = NULL,
  BackupTarget = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  StorageThroughput = NULL,
  DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The name of the DB instance to create from the DB snapshot. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 numbers, letters, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: my-snapshot-id

DBSnapshotIdentifier

The identifier for the DB snapshot to restore from.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DB snapshot.

  • Can't be specified when DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier is specified.

  • Must be specified when DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier isn't specified.

  • If you are restoring from a shared manual DB snapshot, the DBSnapshotIdentifier must be the ARN of the shared DB snapshot.

DBInstanceClass

The compute and memory capacity of the Amazon RDS DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Default: The same DBInstanceClass as the original DB instance.

Port

The port number on which the database accepts connections.

Default: The same port as the original DB instance

Constraints: Value must be 1150-65535

AvailabilityZone

The Availability Zone (AZ) where the DB instance will be created.

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone.

Constraint: You can't specify the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.

Example: ⁠us-east-1a⁠

DBSubnetGroupName

The name of the DB subnet group to use for the new instance.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

MultiAZ

Specifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

Constraint: You can't specify the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.

When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance's VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn't permit it.

When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

For more information, see create_db_instance.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether to automatically apply minor version upgrades to the DB instance during the maintenance window.

If you restore an RDS Custom DB instance, you must disable this parameter.

LicenseModel

License model information for the restored DB instance.

License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values:

  • RDS for Db2 - bring-your-own-license | marketplace-license

  • RDS for MariaDB - general-public-license

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - license-included

  • RDS for MySQL - general-public-license

  • RDS for Oracle - bring-your-own-license | license-included

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - postgresql-license

Default: Same as the source.

DBName

The name of the database for the restored DB instance.

This parameter only applies to RDS for Oracle and RDS for SQL Server DB instances. It doesn't apply to the other engines or to RDS Custom DB instances.

Engine

The database engine to use for the new instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

Default: The same as source

Constraint: Must be compatible with the engine of the source. For example, you can restore a MariaDB 10.1 DB instance from a MySQL 5.6 snapshot.

Valid Values:

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

Iops

Specifies the amount of provisioned IOPS for the DB instance, expressed in I/O operations per second. If this parameter isn't specified, the IOPS value is taken from the backup. If this parameter is set to 0, the new instance is converted to a non-PIOPS instance. The conversion takes additional time, though your DB instance is available for connections before the conversion starts.

The provisioned IOPS value must follow the requirements for your database engine. For more information, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints: Must be an integer greater than 1000.

OptionGroupName

The name of the option group to be used for the restored DB instance.

Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group, and that option group can't be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

Tags
StorageType

Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.

Valid Values: gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard

If you specify io1, io2, or gp3, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.

Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified, otherwise gp2

TdeCredentialArn

The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

TdeCredentialPassword

The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.

Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC.

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB instance in. The domain/ must be created prior to this operation. Currently, you can create only Db2, MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.

For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

DomainFqdn

The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.

Constraints:

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain

DomainOu

The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the distinguished name format.

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: ⁠OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain⁠

DomainAuthSecretArn

The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.

Constraints:

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456

DomainDnsIps

The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.

Constraints:

  • Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn't a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.

Example: ⁠123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237⁠

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance.

In most cases, tags aren't copied by default. However, when you restore a DB instance from a DB snapshot, RDS checks whether you specify new tags. If yes, the new tags are added to the restored DB instance. If there are no new tags, RDS looks for the tags from the source DB instance for the DB snapshot, and then adds those tags to the restored DB instance.

For more information, see Copying tags to DB instance snapshots in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping is disabled.

For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs for the restored DB instance to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

ProcessorFeatures

The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

UseDefaultProcessorFeatures

Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

DBParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.

If you don't specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then RDS uses the default DBParameterGroup for the specified DB engine.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB parameter group.

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.

EnableCustomerOwnedIp

Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.

A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.

CustomIamInstanceProfile

The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:

  • The profile must exist in your account.

  • The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.

  • The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix AWSRDSCustom.

For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting is required for RDS Custom.

BackupTarget

Specifies where automated backups and manual snapshots are stored for the restored DB instance.

Possible values are outposts (Amazon Web Services Outposts) and region (Amazon Web Services Region). The default is region.

For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

NetworkType

The network type of the DB instance.

Valid Values:

  • IPV4

  • DUAL

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

StorageThroughput

Specifies the storage throughput value for the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora.

DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier

The identifier for the Multi-AZ DB cluster snapshot to restore from.

For more information on Multi-AZ DB clusters, see Multi-AZ DB cluster deployments in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing Multi-AZ DB cluster snapshot.

  • Can't be specified when DBSnapshotIdentifier is specified.

  • Must be specified when DBSnapshotIdentifier isn't specified.

  • If you are restoring from a shared manual Multi-AZ DB cluster snapshot, the DBClusterSnapshotIdentifier must be the ARN of the shared snapshot.

  • Can't be the identifier of an Aurora DB cluster snapshot.

AllocatedStorage

The amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in CreateDBInstance.

This setting isn't valid for RDS for SQL Server.

Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth.

DedicatedLogVolume

Specifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance.

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this DB instance.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB instance to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.

You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster.

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support


Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) supports importing MySQL databases by using backup files

Description

Amazon Relational Database Service (Amazon RDS) supports importing MySQL databases by using backup files. You can create a backup of your on-premises database, store it on Amazon Simple Storage Service (Amazon S3), and then restore the backup file onto a new Amazon RDS DB instance running MySQL. For more information, see Importing Data into an Amazon RDS MySQL DB Instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_instance_from_s3/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_restore_db_instance_from_s3(
  DBName = NULL,
  DBInstanceIdentifier,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass,
  Engine,
  MasterUsername = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  DBSecurityGroups = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  PreferredBackupWindow = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  EngineVersion = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  StorageEncrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  MonitoringInterval = NULL,
  MonitoringRoleArn = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  SourceEngine,
  SourceEngineVersion,
  S3BucketName,
  S3Prefix = NULL,
  S3IngestionRoleArn,
  DatabaseInsightsMode = NULL,
  EnablePerformanceInsights = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId = NULL,
  PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  StorageThroughput = NULL,
  ManageMasterUserPassword = NULL,
  MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)

Arguments

DBName

The name of the database to create when the DB instance is created. Follow the naming rules specified in create_db_instance.

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

Example: mydbinstance

AllocatedStorage

The amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in create_db_instance.

This setting isn't valid for RDS for SQL Server.

Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth.

DBInstanceClass

[required] The compute and memory capacity of the DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Importing from Amazon S3 isn't supported on the db.t2.micro DB instance class.

Engine

[required] The name of the database engine to be used for this instance.

Valid Values: mysql

MasterUsername

The name for the master user.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 16 letters or numbers.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't be a reserved word for the chosen database engine.

MasterUserPassword

The password for the master user.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified if ManageMasterUserPassword is turned on.

  • Can include any printable ASCII character except "/", """, or "@". For RDS for Oracle, can't include the "&" (ampersand) or the "'" (single quotes) character.

Length Constraints:

  • RDS for Db2 - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.

  • RDS for MariaDB - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.

  • RDS for MySQL - Must contain from 8 to 41 characters.

  • RDS for Oracle - Must contain from 8 to 30 characters.

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - Must contain from 8 to 128 characters.

DBSecurityGroups

A list of DB security groups to associate with this DB instance.

Default: The default DB security group for the database engine.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.

AvailabilityZone

The Availability Zone that the DB instance is created in. For information about Amazon Web Services Regions and Availability Zones, see Regions and Availability Zones in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the endpoint's Amazon Web Services Region.

Example: ⁠us-east-1d⁠

Constraint: The AvailabilityZone parameter can't be specified if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. The specified Availability Zone must be in the same Amazon Web Services Region as the current endpoint.

DBSubnetGroupName

A DB subnet group to associate with this DB instance.

Constraints: If supplied, must match the name of an existing DBSubnetGroup.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The time range each week during which system maintenance can occur, in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC). For more information, see Amazon RDS Maintenance Window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi.

  • Valid Days: Mon, Tue, Wed, Thu, Fri, Sat, Sun.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred backup window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

DBParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.

If you do not specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then the default DBParameterGroup for the specified DB engine is used.

BackupRetentionPeriod

The number of days for which automated backups are retained. Setting this parameter to a positive number enables backups. For more information, see create_db_instance.

PreferredBackupWindow

The time range each day during which automated backups are created if automated backups are enabled. For more information, see Backup window in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the format hh24:mi-hh24:mi.

  • Must be in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC).

  • Must not conflict with the preferred maintenance window.

  • Must be at least 30 minutes.

Port

The port number on which the database accepts connections.

Type: Integer

Valid Values: 1150-65535

Default: 3306

MultiAZ

Specifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment. If the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment, you can't set the AvailabilityZone parameter.

EngineVersion

The version number of the database engine to use. Choose the latest minor version of your database engine. For information about engine versions, see create_db_instance, or call describe_db_engine_versions.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether to automatically apply minor engine upgrades to the DB instance during the maintenance window. By default, minor engine upgrades are not applied automatically.

LicenseModel

The license model for this DB instance. Use general-public-license.

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to allocate initially for the DB instance. For information about valid IOPS values, see Amazon RDS Provisioned IOPS storage in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

OptionGroupName

The name of the option group to associate with this DB instance. If this argument is omitted, the default option group for the specified engine is used.

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.

When the DB instance is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB instance's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB instance's VPC. Access to the DB instance is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access is not permitted if the security group assigned to the DB instance doesn't permit it.

When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

For more information, see create_db_instance.

Tags

A list of tags to associate with this DB instance. For more information, see Tagging Amazon RDS Resources in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

StorageType

Specifies the storage type to be associated with the DB instance.

Valid Values: gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard

If you specify io1, io2, or gp3, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.

Default: io1 if the Iops parameter is specified; otherwise gp2

StorageEncrypted

Specifies whether the new DB instance is encrypted or not.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for an encrypted DB instance.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

If the StorageEncrypted parameter is enabled, and you do not specify a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, then Amazon RDS will use your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.

MonitoringInterval

The interval, in seconds, between points when Enhanced Monitoring metrics are collected for the DB instance. To disable collecting Enhanced Monitoring metrics, specify 0.

If MonitoringRoleArn is specified, then you must also set MonitoringInterval to a value other than 0.

Valid Values: 0, 1, 5, 10, 15, 30, 60

Default: 0

MonitoringRoleArn

The ARN for the IAM role that permits RDS to send enhanced monitoring metrics to Amazon CloudWatch Logs. For example, arn:aws:iam:123456789012:role/emaccess. For information on creating a monitoring role, see Setting Up and Enabling Enhanced Monitoring in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

If MonitoringInterval is set to a value other than 0, then you must supply a MonitoringRoleArn value.

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

SourceEngine

[required] The name of the engine of your source database.

Valid Values: mysql

SourceEngineVersion

[required] The version of the database that the backup files were created from.

MySQL versions 5.6 and 5.7 are supported.

Example: ⁠5.6.40⁠

S3BucketName

[required] The name of your Amazon S3 bucket that contains your database backup file.

S3Prefix

The prefix of your Amazon S3 bucket.

S3IngestionRoleArn

[required] An Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) role with a trust policy and a permissions policy that allows Amazon RDS to access your Amazon S3 bucket. For information about this role, see Creating an IAM role manually in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

DatabaseInsightsMode

Specifies the mode of Database Insights to enable for the DB instance.

Aurora DB instances inherit this value from the DB cluster, so you can't change this value.

EnablePerformanceInsights

Specifies whether to enable Performance Insights for the DB instance.

For more information, see Using Amazon Performance Insights in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of Performance Insights data.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

If you do not specify a value for PerformanceInsightsKMSKeyId, then Amazon RDS uses your default KMS key. There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

PerformanceInsightsRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain Performance Insights data. The default is 7 days. The following values are valid:

  • 7

  • month * 31, where month is a number of months from 1-23

  • 731

For example, the following values are valid:

  • 93 (3 months * 31)

  • 341 (11 months * 31)

  • 589 (19 months * 31)

  • 731

If you specify a retention period such as 94, which isn't a valid value, RDS issues an error.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

ProcessorFeatures

The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.

UseDefaultProcessorFeatures

Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether to enable deletion protection for the DB instance. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.

MaxAllocatedStorage

The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.

For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

NetworkType

The network type of the DB instance.

Valid Values:

  • IPV4

  • DUAL

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

StorageThroughput

Specifies the storage throughput value for the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora.

ManageMasterUserPassword

Specifies whether to manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

For more information, see Password management with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Constraints:

  • Can't manage the master user password with Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager if MasterUserPassword is specified.

MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier to encrypt a secret that is automatically generated and managed in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager.

This setting is valid only if the master user password is managed by RDS in Amazon Web Services Secrets Manager for the DB instance.

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. To use a KMS key in a different Amazon Web Services account, specify the key ARN or alias ARN.

If you don't specify MasterUserSecretKmsKeyId, then the aws/secretsmanager KMS key is used to encrypt the secret. If the secret is in a different Amazon Web Services account, then you can't use the aws/secretsmanager KMS key to encrypt the secret, and you must use a customer managed KMS key.

There is a default KMS key for your Amazon Web Services account. Your Amazon Web Services account has a different default KMS key for each Amazon Web Services Region.

DedicatedLogVolume

Specifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance.

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this DB instance.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB instance to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.

You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster.

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support


Restores a DB instance to an arbitrary point in time

Description

Restores a DB instance to an arbitrary point in time. You can restore to any point in time before the time identified by the LatestRestorableTime property. You can restore to a point up to the number of days specified by the BackupRetentionPeriod property.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_restore_db_instance_to_point_in_time(
  SourceDBInstanceIdentifier = NULL,
  TargetDBInstanceIdentifier,
  RestoreTime = NULL,
  UseLatestRestorableTime = NULL,
  DBInstanceClass = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  DBSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  AutoMinorVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  LicenseModel = NULL,
  DBName = NULL,
  Engine = NULL,
  Iops = NULL,
  OptionGroupName = NULL,
  CopyTagsToSnapshot = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  StorageType = NULL,
  TdeCredentialArn = NULL,
  TdeCredentialPassword = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  Domain = NULL,
  DomainIAMRoleName = NULL,
  DomainFqdn = NULL,
  DomainOu = NULL,
  DomainAuthSecretArn = NULL,
  DomainDnsIps = NULL,
  EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication = NULL,
  EnableCloudwatchLogsExports = NULL,
  ProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  UseDefaultProcessorFeatures = NULL,
  DBParameterGroupName = NULL,
  DeletionProtection = NULL,
  SourceDbiResourceId = NULL,
  MaxAllocatedStorage = NULL,
  SourceDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn = NULL,
  EnableCustomerOwnedIp = NULL,
  CustomIamInstanceProfile = NULL,
  BackupTarget = NULL,
  NetworkType = NULL,
  StorageThroughput = NULL,
  AllocatedStorage = NULL,
  DedicatedLogVolume = NULL,
  CACertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  EngineLifecycleSupport = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBInstanceIdentifier

The identifier of the source DB instance from which to restore.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing DB instance.

TargetDBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The name of the new DB instance to create.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

RestoreTime

The date and time to restore from.

Constraints:

  • Must be a time in Universal Coordinated Time (UTC) format.

  • Must be before the latest restorable time for the DB instance.

  • Can't be specified if the UseLatestRestorableTime parameter is enabled.

Example: ⁠2009-09-07T23:45:00Z⁠

UseLatestRestorableTime

Specifies whether the DB instance is restored from the latest backup time. By default, the DB instance isn't restored from the latest backup time.

Constraints:

  • Can't be specified if the RestoreTime parameter is provided.

DBInstanceClass

The compute and memory capacity of the Amazon RDS DB instance, for example db.m4.large. Not all DB instance classes are available in all Amazon Web Services Regions, or for all database engines. For the full list of DB instance classes, and availability for your engine, see DB Instance Class in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Default: The same DB instance class as the original DB instance.

Port

The port number on which the database accepts connections.

Default: The same port as the original DB instance.

Constraints:

  • The value must be 1150-65535.

AvailabilityZone

The Availability Zone (AZ) where the DB instance will be created.

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone.

Constraints:

  • You can't specify the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.

Example: ⁠us-east-1a⁠

DBSubnetGroupName

The DB subnet group name to use for the new instance.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB subnet group.

Example: mydbsubnetgroup

MultiAZ

Secifies whether the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

Constraints:

  • You can't specify the AvailabilityZone parameter if the DB instance is a Multi-AZ deployment.

PubliclyAccessible

Specifies whether the DB instance is publicly accessible.

When the DB cluster is publicly accessible, its Domain Name System (DNS) endpoint resolves to the private IP address from within the DB cluster's virtual private cloud (VPC). It resolves to the public IP address from outside of the DB cluster's VPC. Access to the DB cluster is ultimately controlled by the security group it uses. That public access isn't permitted if the security group assigned to the DB cluster doesn't permit it.

When the DB instance isn't publicly accessible, it is an internal DB instance with a DNS name that resolves to a private IP address.

For more information, see create_db_instance.

AutoMinorVersionUpgrade

Specifies whether minor version upgrades are applied automatically to the DB instance during the maintenance window.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

LicenseModel

The license model information for the restored DB instance.

License models for RDS for Db2 require additional configuration. The Bring Your Own License (BYOL) model requires a custom parameter group and an Amazon Web Services License Manager self-managed license. The Db2 license through Amazon Web Services Marketplace model requires an Amazon Web Services Marketplace subscription. For more information, see Amazon RDS for Db2 licensing options in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to Amazon Aurora or RDS Custom DB instances.

Valid Values:

  • RDS for Db2 - bring-your-own-license | marketplace-license

  • RDS for MariaDB - general-public-license

  • RDS for Microsoft SQL Server - license-included

  • RDS for MySQL - general-public-license

  • RDS for Oracle - bring-your-own-license | license-included

  • RDS for PostgreSQL - postgresql-license

Default: Same as the source.

DBName

The database name for the restored DB instance.

This parameter doesn't apply to the following DB instances:

  • RDS Custom

  • RDS for Db2

  • RDS for MariaDB

  • RDS for MySQL

Engine

The database engine to use for the new instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

Valid Values:

  • db2-ae

  • db2-se

  • mariadb

  • mysql

  • oracle-ee

  • oracle-ee-cdb

  • oracle-se2

  • oracle-se2-cdb

  • postgres

  • sqlserver-ee

  • sqlserver-se

  • sqlserver-ex

  • sqlserver-web

Default: The same as source

Constraints:

  • Must be compatible with the engine of the source.

Iops

The amount of Provisioned IOPS (input/output operations per second) to initially allocate for the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to SQL Server.

Constraints:

  • Must be an integer greater than 1000.

OptionGroupName

The name of the option group to use for the restored DB instance.

Permanent options, such as the TDE option for Oracle Advanced Security TDE, can't be removed from an option group, and that option group can't be removed from a DB instance after it is associated with a DB instance

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

CopyTagsToSnapshot

Specifies whether to copy all tags from the restored DB instance to snapshots of the DB instance. By default, tags are not copied.

Tags
StorageType

The storage type to associate with the DB instance.

Valid Values: gp2 | gp3 | io1 | io2 | standard

Default: io1, if the Iops parameter is specified. Otherwise, gp2.

Constraints:

  • If you specify io1, io2, or gp3, you must also include a value for the Iops parameter.

TdeCredentialArn

The ARN from the key store with which to associate the instance for TDE encryption.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

TdeCredentialPassword

The password for the given ARN from the key store in order to access the device.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of EC2 VPC security groups to associate with this DB instance.

Default: The default EC2 VPC security group for the DB subnet group's VPC.

Domain

The Active Directory directory ID to restore the DB instance in. Create the domain before running this command. Currently, you can create only the MySQL, Microsoft SQL Server, Oracle, and PostgreSQL DB instances in an Active Directory Domain.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

For more information, see Kerberos Authentication in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

DomainIAMRoleName

The name of the IAM role to use when making API calls to the Directory Service.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

DomainFqdn

The fully qualified domain name (FQDN) of an Active Directory domain.

Constraints:

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: mymanagedADtest.mymanagedAD.mydomain

DomainOu

The Active Directory organizational unit for your DB instance to join.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the distinguished name format.

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: ⁠OU=mymanagedADtestOU,DC=mymanagedADtest,DC=mymanagedAD,DC=mydomain⁠

DomainAuthSecretArn

The ARN for the Secrets Manager secret with the credentials for the user joining the domain.

Constraints:

  • Can't be longer than 64 characters.

Example: arn:aws:secretsmanager:region:account-number:secret:myselfmanagedADtestsecret-123456

DomainDnsIps

The IPv4 DNS IP addresses of your primary and secondary Active Directory domain controllers.

Constraints:

  • Two IP addresses must be provided. If there isn't a secondary domain controller, use the IP address of the primary domain controller for both entries in the list.

Example: ⁠123.124.125.126,234.235.236.237⁠

EnableIAMDatabaseAuthentication

Specifies whether to enable mapping of Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management (IAM) accounts to database accounts. By default, mapping isn't enabled.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

For more information about IAM database authentication, see IAM Database Authentication for MySQL and PostgreSQL in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

EnableCloudwatchLogsExports

The list of logs that the restored DB instance is to export to CloudWatch Logs. The values in the list depend on the DB engine being used. For more information, see Publishing Database Logs to Amazon CloudWatch Logs in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

ProcessorFeatures

The number of CPU cores and the number of threads per core for the DB instance class of the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

UseDefaultProcessorFeatures

Specifies whether the DB instance class of the DB instance uses its default processor features.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

DBParameterGroupName

The name of the DB parameter group to associate with this DB instance.

If you do not specify a value for DBParameterGroupName, then the default DBParameterGroup for the specified DB engine is used.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

Constraints:

  • If supplied, must match the name of an existing DB parameter group.

  • Must be 1 to 255 letters, numbers, or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Can't end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

DeletionProtection

Specifies whether the DB instance has deletion protection enabled. The database can't be deleted when deletion protection is enabled. By default, deletion protection isn't enabled. For more information, see Deleting a DB Instance.

SourceDbiResourceId

The resource ID of the source DB instance from which to restore.

MaxAllocatedStorage

The upper limit in gibibytes (GiB) to which Amazon RDS can automatically scale the storage of the DB instance.

For more information about this setting, including limitations that apply to it, see Managing capacity automatically with Amazon RDS storage autoscaling in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

SourceDBInstanceAutomatedBackupsArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the replicated automated backups from which to restore, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:123456789012:auto-backup:ab-L2IJCEXJP7XQ7HOJ4SIEXAMPLE.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

EnableCustomerOwnedIp

Specifies whether to enable a customer-owned IP address (CoIP) for an RDS on Outposts DB instance.

A CoIP provides local or external connectivity to resources in your Outpost subnets through your on-premises network. For some use cases, a CoIP can provide lower latency for connections to the DB instance from outside of its virtual private cloud (VPC) on your local network.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom.

For more information about RDS on Outposts, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

For more information about CoIPs, see Customer-owned IP addresses in the Amazon Web Services Outposts User Guide.

CustomIamInstanceProfile

The instance profile associated with the underlying Amazon EC2 instance of an RDS Custom DB instance. The instance profile must meet the following requirements:

  • The profile must exist in your account.

  • The profile must have an IAM role that Amazon EC2 has permissions to assume.

  • The instance profile name and the associated IAM role name must start with the prefix AWSRDSCustom.

For the list of permissions required for the IAM role, see Configure IAM and your VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting is required for RDS Custom.

BackupTarget

The location for storing automated backups and manual snapshots for the restored DB instance.

Valid Values:

  • outposts (Amazon Web Services Outposts)

  • region (Amazon Web Services Region)

Default: region

For more information, see Working with Amazon RDS on Amazon Web Services Outposts in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

NetworkType

The network type of the DB instance.

The network type is determined by the DBSubnetGroup specified for the DB instance. A DBSubnetGroup can support only the IPv4 protocol or the IPv4 and the IPv6 protocols (DUAL).

For more information, see Working with a DB instance in a VPC in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

Valid Values:

  • IPV4

  • DUAL

StorageThroughput

The storage throughput value for the DB instance.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom or Amazon Aurora.

AllocatedStorage

The amount of storage (in gibibytes) to allocate initially for the DB instance. Follow the allocation rules specified in create_db_instance.

This setting isn't valid for RDS for SQL Server.

Be sure to allocate enough storage for your new DB instance so that the restore operation can succeed. You can also allocate additional storage for future growth.

DedicatedLogVolume

Specifies whether to enable a dedicated log volume (DLV) for the DB instance.

CACertificateIdentifier

The CA certificate identifier to use for the DB instance's server certificate.

This setting doesn't apply to RDS Custom DB instances.

For more information, see Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB instance in the Amazon RDS User Guide and Using SSL/TLS to encrypt a connection to a DB cluster in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

EngineLifecycleSupport

The life cycle type for this DB instance.

By default, this value is set to open-source-rds-extended-support, which enrolls your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. At the end of standard support, you can avoid charges for Extended Support by setting the value to open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled. In this case, RDS automatically upgrades your restored DB instance to a higher engine version, if the major engine version is past its end of standard support date.

You can use this setting to enroll your DB instance into Amazon RDS Extended Support. With RDS Extended Support, you can run the selected major engine version on your DB instance past the end of standard support for that engine version. For more information, see Using Amazon RDS Extended Support in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

This setting applies only to RDS for MySQL and RDS for PostgreSQL. For Amazon Aurora DB instances, the life cycle type is managed by the DB cluster.

Valid Values: open-source-rds-extended-support | open-source-rds-extended-support-disabled

Default: open-source-rds-extended-support


Revokes ingress from a DBSecurityGroup for previously authorized IP ranges or EC2 or VPC security groups

Description

Revokes ingress from a DBSecurityGroup for previously authorized IP ranges or EC2 or VPC security groups. Required parameters for this API are one of CIDRIP, EC2SecurityGroupId for VPC, or (EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_revoke_db_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_revoke_db_security_group_ingress(
  DBSecurityGroupName,
  CIDRIP = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupName = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupId = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId = NULL
)

Arguments

DBSecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the DB security group to revoke ingress from.

CIDRIP

The IP range to revoke access from. Must be a valid CIDR range. If CIDRIP is specified, EC2SecurityGroupName, EC2SecurityGroupId and EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId can't be provided.

EC2SecurityGroupName

The name of the EC2 security group to revoke access from. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.

EC2SecurityGroupId

The id of the EC2 security group to revoke access from. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.

EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId

The Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the EC2 security group specified in the EC2SecurityGroupName parameter. The Amazon Web Services access key ID isn't an acceptable value. For VPC DB security groups, EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided. Otherwise, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId and either EC2SecurityGroupName or EC2SecurityGroupId must be provided.


Starts a database activity stream to monitor activity on the database

Description

Starts a database activity stream to monitor activity on the database. For more information, see Monitoring Amazon Aurora with Database Activity Streams in the Amazon Aurora User Guide or Monitoring Amazon RDS with Database Activity Streams in the Amazon RDS User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_activity_stream/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_start_activity_stream(
  ResourceArn,
  Mode,
  KmsKeyId,
  ApplyImmediately = NULL,
  EngineNativeAuditFieldsIncluded = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:cluster:das-cluster.

Mode

[required] Specifies the mode of the database activity stream. Database events such as a change or access generate an activity stream event. The database session can handle these events either synchronously or asynchronously.

KmsKeyId

[required] The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encrypting messages in the database activity stream. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key.

ApplyImmediately

Specifies whether or not the database activity stream is to start as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database.

EngineNativeAuditFieldsIncluded

Specifies whether the database activity stream includes engine-native audit fields. This option applies to an Oracle or Microsoft SQL Server DB instance. By default, no engine-native audit fields are included.


Starts an Amazon Aurora DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-cluster CLI command, or the StopDBCluster operation

Description

Starts an Amazon Aurora DB cluster that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-cluster CLI command, or the stop_db_cluster operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_start_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier of the Amazon Aurora DB cluster to be started. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.


Starts an Amazon RDS DB instance that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-instance CLI command, or the StopDBInstance operation

Description

Starts an Amazon RDS DB instance that was stopped using the Amazon Web Services console, the stop-db-instance CLI command, or the stop_db_instance operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_start_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The user-supplied instance identifier.


Enables replication of automated backups to a different Amazon Web Services Region

Description

Enables replication of automated backups to a different Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(
  SourceDBInstanceArn,
  BackupRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  PreSignedUrl = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceDBInstanceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance for the replicated automated backups, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:db:mydatabase.

BackupRetentionPeriod

The retention period for the replicated automated backups.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier for encryption of the replicated automated backups. The KMS key ID is the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the KMS encryption key in the destination Amazon Web Services Region, for example, arn:aws:kms:us-east-1:123456789012:key/AKIAIOSFODNN7EXAMPLE.

PreSignedUrl

In an Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Region, an URL that contains a Signature Version 4 signed request for the start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication operation to call in the Amazon Web Services Region of the source DB instance. The presigned URL must be a valid request for the start_db_instance_automated_backups_replication API operation that can run in the Amazon Web Services Region that contains the source DB instance.

This setting applies only to Amazon Web Services GovCloud (US) Regions. It's ignored in other Amazon Web Services Regions.

To learn how to generate a Signature Version 4 signed request, see Authenticating Requests: Using Query Parameters (Amazon Web Services Signature Version 4) and Signature Version 4 Signing Process.

If you are using an Amazon Web Services SDK tool or the CLI, you can specify SourceRegion (or --source-region for the CLI) instead of specifying PreSignedUrl manually. Specifying SourceRegion autogenerates a presigned URL that is a valid request for the operation that can run in the source Amazon Web Services Region.


Starts an export of DB snapshot or DB cluster data to Amazon S3

Description

Starts an export of DB snapshot or DB cluster data to Amazon S3. The provided IAM role must have access to the S3 bucket.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_start_export_task/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_start_export_task(
  ExportTaskIdentifier,
  SourceArn,
  S3BucketName,
  IamRoleArn,
  KmsKeyId,
  S3Prefix = NULL,
  ExportOnly = NULL
)

Arguments

ExportTaskIdentifier

[required] A unique identifier for the export task. This ID isn't an identifier for the Amazon S3 bucket where the data is to be exported.

SourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot or cluster to export to Amazon S3.

S3BucketName

[required] The name of the Amazon S3 bucket to export the snapshot or cluster data to.

IamRoleArn

[required] The name of the IAM role to use for writing to the Amazon S3 bucket when exporting a snapshot or cluster.

In the IAM policy attached to your IAM role, include the following required actions to allow the transfer of files from Amazon RDS or Amazon Aurora to an S3 bucket:

  • s3:PutObject*

  • s3:GetObject*

  • s3:ListBucket

  • s3:DeleteObject*

  • s3:GetBucketLocation

In the policy, include the resources to identify the S3 bucket and objects in the bucket. The following list of resources shows the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format for accessing S3:

  • arn:aws:s3:::your-s3-bucket

  • ⁠arn:aws:s3:::your-s3-bucket/*⁠

KmsKeyId

[required] The ID of the Amazon Web Services KMS key to use to encrypt the data exported to Amazon S3. The Amazon Web Services KMS key identifier is the key ARN, key ID, alias ARN, or alias name for the KMS key. The caller of this operation must be authorized to run the following operations. These can be set in the Amazon Web Services KMS key policy:

  • kms:Encrypt

  • kms:Decrypt

  • kms:GenerateDataKey

  • kms:GenerateDataKeyWithoutPlaintext

  • kms:ReEncryptFrom

  • kms:ReEncryptTo

  • kms:CreateGrant

  • kms:DescribeKey

  • kms:RetireGrant

S3Prefix

The Amazon S3 bucket prefix to use as the file name and path of the exported data.

ExportOnly

The data to be exported from the snapshot or cluster. If this parameter isn't provided, all of the data is exported.

Valid Values:

  • database - Export all the data from a specified database.

  • database.table table-name - Export a table of the snapshot or cluster. This format is valid only for RDS for MySQL, RDS for MariaDB, and Aurora MySQL.

  • database.schema schema-name - Export a database schema of the snapshot or cluster. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.

  • database.schema.table table-name - Export a table of the database schema. This format is valid only for RDS for PostgreSQL and Aurora PostgreSQL.


Stops a database activity stream that was started using the Amazon Web Services console, the start-activity-stream CLI command, or the StartActivityStream operation

Description

Stops a database activity stream that was started using the Amazon Web Services console, the start-activity-stream CLI command, or the start_activity_stream operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_stop_activity_stream/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_stop_activity_stream(ResourceArn, ApplyImmediately = NULL)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the DB cluster for the database activity stream. For example, arn:aws:rds:us-east-1:12345667890:cluster:das-cluster.

ApplyImmediately

Specifies whether or not the database activity stream is to stop as soon as possible, regardless of the maintenance window for the database.


Stops an Amazon Aurora DB cluster

Description

Stops an Amazon Aurora DB cluster. When you stop a DB cluster, Aurora retains the DB cluster's metadata, including its endpoints and DB parameter groups. Aurora also retains the transaction logs so you can do a point-in-time restore if necessary.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_stop_db_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_stop_db_cluster(DBClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

DBClusterIdentifier

[required] The DB cluster identifier of the Amazon Aurora DB cluster to be stopped. This parameter is stored as a lowercase string.


Stops an Amazon RDS DB instance temporarily

Description

Stops an Amazon RDS DB instance temporarily. When you stop a DB instance, Amazon RDS retains the DB instance's metadata, including its endpoint, DB parameter group, and option group membership. Amazon RDS also retains the transaction logs so you can do a point-in-time restore if necessary. The instance restarts automatically after 7 days.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_stop_db_instance/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_stop_db_instance(DBInstanceIdentifier, DBSnapshotIdentifier = NULL)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The user-supplied instance identifier.

DBSnapshotIdentifier

The user-supplied instance identifier of the DB Snapshot created immediately before the DB instance is stopped.


Stops automated backup replication for a DB instance

Description

Stops automated backup replication for a DB instance.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_stop_db_instance_automated_backups_replication(SourceDBInstanceArn)

Arguments

SourceDBInstanceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the source DB instance for which to stop replicating automate backups, for example, arn:aws:rds:us-west-2:123456789012:db:mydatabase.


Switches over a blue/green deployment

Description

Switches over a blue/green deployment.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_switchover_blue_green_deployment/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_switchover_blue_green_deployment(
  BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier,
  SwitchoverTimeout = NULL
)

Arguments

BlueGreenDeploymentIdentifier

[required] The resource ID of the blue/green deployment.

Constraints:

  • Must match an existing blue/green deployment resource ID.

SwitchoverTimeout

The amount of time, in seconds, for the switchover to complete.

Default: 300

If the switchover takes longer than the specified duration, then any changes are rolled back, and no changes are made to the environments.


Switches over the specified secondary DB cluster to be the new primary DB cluster in the global database cluster

Description

Switches over the specified secondary DB cluster to be the new primary DB cluster in the global database cluster. Switchover operations were previously called "managed planned failovers."

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_switchover_global_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_switchover_global_cluster(
  GlobalClusterIdentifier,
  TargetDbClusterIdentifier
)

Arguments

GlobalClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the global database cluster to switch over. This parameter isn't case-sensitive.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing global database cluster (Aurora global database).

TargetDbClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the secondary Aurora DB cluster to promote to the new primary for the global database cluster. Use the Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the identifier so that Aurora can locate the cluster in its Amazon Web Services Region.


Switches over an Oracle standby database in an Oracle Data Guard environment, making it the new primary database

Description

Switches over an Oracle standby database in an Oracle Data Guard environment, making it the new primary database. Issue this command in the Region that hosts the current standby database.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rds_switchover_read_replica/ for full documentation.

Usage

rds_switchover_read_replica(DBInstanceIdentifier)

Arguments

DBInstanceIdentifier

[required] The DB instance identifier of the current standby database. This value is stored as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must match the identifier of an existing Oracle read replica DB instance.


AWS RDS DataService

Description

RDS Data API

Amazon RDS provides an HTTP endpoint to run SQL statements on an Amazon Aurora DB cluster. To run these statements, you use the RDS Data API (Data API).

Data API is available with the following types of Aurora databases:

For more information about the Data API, see Using RDS Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.

Usage

rdsdataservice(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- rdsdataservice(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

batch_execute_statement Runs a batch SQL statement over an array of data
begin_transaction Starts a SQL transaction
commit_transaction Ends a SQL transaction started with the BeginTransaction operation and commits the changes
execute_sql Runs one or more SQL statements
execute_statement Runs a SQL statement against a database
rollback_transaction Performs a rollback of a transaction

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- rdsdataservice()
svc$batch_execute_statement(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Runs a batch SQL statement over an array of data

Description

Runs a batch SQL statement over an array of data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_batch_execute_statement/ for full documentation.

Usage

rdsdataservice_batch_execute_statement(
  resourceArn,
  secretArn,
  sql,
  database = NULL,
  schema = NULL,
  parameterSets = NULL,
  transactionId = NULL
)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster.

secretArn

[required] The ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. Enter the database user name and password for the credentials in the secret.

For information about creating the secret, see Create a database secret.

sql

[required] The SQL statement to run. Don't include a semicolon (;) at the end of the SQL statement.

database

The name of the database.

schema

The name of the database schema.

Currently, the schema parameter isn't supported.

parameterSets

The parameter set for the batch operation.

The SQL statement is executed as many times as the number of parameter sets provided. To execute a SQL statement with no parameters, use one of the following options:

Array parameters are not supported.

transactionId

The identifier of a transaction that was started by using the begin_transaction operation. Specify the transaction ID of the transaction that you want to include the SQL statement in.

If the SQL statement is not part of a transaction, don't set this parameter.


Starts a SQL transaction

Description

Starts a SQL transaction.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_begin_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

rdsdataservice_begin_transaction(
  resourceArn,
  secretArn,
  database = NULL,
  schema = NULL
)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster.

secretArn

[required] The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster.

database

The name of the database.

schema

The name of the database schema.


Ends a SQL transaction started with the BeginTransaction operation and commits the changes

Description

Ends a SQL transaction started with the begin_transaction operation and commits the changes.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_commit_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

rdsdataservice_commit_transaction(resourceArn, secretArn, transactionId)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster.

secretArn

[required] The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster.

transactionId

[required] The identifier of the transaction to end and commit.


Runs one or more SQL statements

Description

Runs one or more SQL statements.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_execute_sql/ for full documentation.

Usage

rdsdataservice_execute_sql(
  dbClusterOrInstanceArn,
  awsSecretStoreArn,
  sqlStatements,
  database = NULL,
  schema = NULL
)

Arguments

dbClusterOrInstanceArn

[required] The ARN of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster.

awsSecretStoreArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. Enter the database user name and password for the credentials in the secret.

For information about creating the secret, see Create a database secret.

sqlStatements

[required] One or more SQL statements to run on the DB cluster.

You can separate SQL statements from each other with a semicolon (;). Any valid SQL statement is permitted, including data definition, data manipulation, and commit statements.

database

The name of the database.

schema

The name of the database schema.


Runs a SQL statement against a database

Description

Runs a SQL statement against a database.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_execute_statement/ for full documentation.

Usage

rdsdataservice_execute_statement(
  resourceArn,
  secretArn,
  sql,
  database = NULL,
  schema = NULL,
  parameters = NULL,
  transactionId = NULL,
  includeResultMetadata = NULL,
  continueAfterTimeout = NULL,
  resultSetOptions = NULL,
  formatRecordsAs = NULL
)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster.

secretArn

[required] The ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster. Enter the database user name and password for the credentials in the secret.

For information about creating the secret, see Create a database secret.

sql

[required] The SQL statement to run.

database

The name of the database.

schema

The name of the database schema.

Currently, the schema parameter isn't supported.

parameters

The parameters for the SQL statement.

Array parameters are not supported.

transactionId

The identifier of a transaction that was started by using the begin_transaction operation. Specify the transaction ID of the transaction that you want to include the SQL statement in.

If the SQL statement is not part of a transaction, don't set this parameter.

includeResultMetadata

A value that indicates whether to include metadata in the results.

continueAfterTimeout

A value that indicates whether to continue running the statement after the call times out. By default, the statement stops running when the call times out.

For DDL statements, we recommend continuing to run the statement after the call times out. When a DDL statement terminates before it is finished running, it can result in errors and possibly corrupted data structures.

resultSetOptions

Options that control how the result set is returned.

formatRecordsAs

A value that indicates whether to format the result set as a single JSON string. This parameter only applies to SELECT statements and is ignored for other types of statements. Allowed values are NONE and JSON. The default value is NONE. The result is returned in the formattedRecords field.

For usage information about the JSON format for result sets, see Using the Data API in the Amazon Aurora User Guide.


Performs a rollback of a transaction

Description

Performs a rollback of a transaction. Rolling back a transaction cancels its changes.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/rdsdataservice_rollback_transaction/ for full documentation.

Usage

rdsdataservice_rollback_transaction(resourceArn, secretArn, transactionId)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Aurora Serverless DB cluster.

secretArn

[required] The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the DB cluster.

transactionId

[required] The identifier of the transaction to roll back.


Amazon Redshift

Description

Overview

This is an interface reference for Amazon Redshift. It contains documentation for one of the programming or command line interfaces you can use to manage Amazon Redshift clusters. Note that Amazon Redshift is asynchronous, which means that some interfaces may require techniques, such as polling or asynchronous callback handlers, to determine when a command has been applied. In this reference, the parameter descriptions indicate whether a change is applied immediately, on the next instance reboot, or during the next maintenance window. For a summary of the Amazon Redshift cluster management interfaces, go to Using the Amazon Redshift Management Interfaces.

Amazon Redshift manages all the work of setting up, operating, and scaling a data warehouse: provisioning capacity, monitoring and backing up the cluster, and applying patches and upgrades to the Amazon Redshift engine. You can focus on using your data to acquire new insights for your business and customers.

If you are a first-time user of Amazon Redshift, we recommend that you begin by reading the Amazon Redshift Getting Started Guide.

If you are a database developer, the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide explains how to design, build, query, and maintain the databases that make up your data warehouse.

Usage

redshift(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- redshift(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

accept_reserved_node_exchange Exchanges a DC1 Reserved Node for a DC2 Reserved Node with no changes to the configuration (term, payment type, or number of nodes) and no additional costs
add_partner Adds a partner integration to a cluster
associate_data_share_consumer From a datashare consumer account, associates a datashare with the account (AssociateEntireAccount) or the specified namespace (ConsumerArn)
authorize_cluster_security_group_ingress Adds an inbound (ingress) rule to an Amazon Redshift security group
authorize_data_share From a data producer account, authorizes the sharing of a datashare with one or more consumer accounts or managing entities
authorize_endpoint_access Grants access to a cluster
authorize_snapshot_access Authorizes the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot
batch_delete_cluster_snapshots Deletes a set of cluster snapshots
batch_modify_cluster_snapshots Modifies the settings for a set of cluster snapshots
cancel_resize Cancels a resize operation for a cluster
copy_cluster_snapshot Copies the specified automated cluster snapshot to a new manual cluster snapshot
create_authentication_profile Creates an authentication profile with the specified parameters
create_cluster Creates a new cluster with the specified parameters
create_cluster_parameter_group Creates an Amazon Redshift parameter group
create_cluster_security_group Creates a new Amazon Redshift security group
create_cluster_snapshot Creates a manual snapshot of the specified cluster
create_cluster_subnet_group Creates a new Amazon Redshift subnet group
create_custom_domain_association Used to create a custom domain name for a cluster
create_endpoint_access Creates a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint
create_event_subscription Creates an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription
create_hsm_client_certificate Creates an HSM client certificate that an Amazon Redshift cluster will use to connect to the client's HSM in order to store and retrieve the keys used to encrypt the cluster databases
create_hsm_configuration Creates an HSM configuration that contains the information required by an Amazon Redshift cluster to store and use database encryption keys in a Hardware Security Module (HSM)
create_integration Creates a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift
create_redshift_idc_application Creates an Amazon Redshift application for use with IAM Identity Center
create_scheduled_action Creates a scheduled action
create_snapshot_copy_grant Creates a snapshot copy grant that permits Amazon Redshift to use an encrypted symmetric key from Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt copied snapshots in a destination region
create_snapshot_schedule Create a snapshot schedule that can be associated to a cluster and which overrides the default system backup schedule
create_tags Adds tags to a cluster
create_usage_limit Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift feature on a cluster
deauthorize_data_share From a datashare producer account, removes authorization from the specified datashare
delete_authentication_profile Deletes an authentication profile
delete_cluster Deletes a previously provisioned cluster without its final snapshot being created
delete_cluster_parameter_group Deletes a specified Amazon Redshift parameter group
delete_cluster_security_group Deletes an Amazon Redshift security group
delete_cluster_snapshot Deletes the specified manual snapshot
delete_cluster_subnet_group Deletes the specified cluster subnet group
delete_custom_domain_association Contains information about deleting a custom domain association for a cluster
delete_endpoint_access Deletes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint
delete_event_subscription Deletes an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription
delete_hsm_client_certificate Deletes the specified HSM client certificate
delete_hsm_configuration Deletes the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration
delete_integration Deletes a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift
delete_partner Deletes a partner integration from a cluster
delete_redshift_idc_application Deletes an Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application
delete_resource_policy Deletes the resource policy for a specified resource
delete_scheduled_action Deletes a scheduled action
delete_snapshot_copy_grant Deletes the specified snapshot copy grant
delete_snapshot_schedule Deletes a snapshot schedule
delete_tags Deletes tags from a resource
delete_usage_limit Deletes a usage limit from a cluster
deregister_namespace Deregisters a cluster or serverless namespace from the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog
describe_account_attributes Returns a list of attributes attached to an account
describe_authentication_profiles Describes an authentication profile
describe_cluster_db_revisions Returns an array of ClusterDbRevision objects
describe_cluster_parameter_groups Returns a list of Amazon Redshift parameter groups, including parameter groups you created and the default parameter group
describe_cluster_parameters Returns a detailed list of parameters contained within the specified Amazon Redshift parameter group
describe_clusters Returns properties of provisioned clusters including general cluster properties, cluster database properties, maintenance and backup properties, and security and access properties
describe_cluster_security_groups Returns information about Amazon Redshift security groups
describe_cluster_snapshots Returns one or more snapshot objects, which contain metadata about your cluster snapshots
describe_cluster_subnet_groups Returns one or more cluster subnet group objects, which contain metadata about your cluster subnet groups
describe_cluster_tracks Returns a list of all the available maintenance tracks
describe_cluster_versions Returns descriptions of the available Amazon Redshift cluster versions
describe_custom_domain_associations Contains information about custom domain associations for a cluster
describe_data_shares Shows the status of any inbound or outbound datashares available in the specified account
describe_data_shares_for_consumer Returns a list of datashares where the account identifier being called is a consumer account identifier
describe_data_shares_for_producer Returns a list of datashares when the account identifier being called is a producer account identifier
describe_default_cluster_parameters Returns a list of parameter settings for the specified parameter group family
describe_endpoint_access Describes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint
describe_endpoint_authorization Describes an endpoint authorization
describe_event_categories Displays a list of event categories for all event source types, or for a specified source type
describe_events Returns events related to clusters, security groups, snapshots, and parameter groups for the past 14 days
describe_event_subscriptions Lists descriptions of all the Amazon Redshift event notification subscriptions for a customer account
describe_hsm_client_certificates Returns information about the specified HSM client certificate
describe_hsm_configurations Returns information about the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration
describe_inbound_integrations Returns a list of inbound integrations
describe_integrations Describes one or more zero-ETL or S3 event integrations with Amazon Redshift
describe_logging_status Describes whether information, such as queries and connection attempts, is being logged for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster
describe_node_configuration_options Returns properties of possible node configurations such as node type, number of nodes, and disk usage for the specified action type
describe_orderable_cluster_options Returns a list of orderable cluster options
describe_partners Returns information about the partner integrations defined for a cluster
describe_redshift_idc_applications Lists the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center applications
describe_reserved_node_exchange_status Returns exchange status details and associated metadata for a reserved-node exchange
describe_reserved_node_offerings Returns a list of the available reserved node offerings by Amazon Redshift with their descriptions including the node type, the fixed and recurring costs of reserving the node and duration the node will be reserved for you
describe_reserved_nodes Returns the descriptions of the reserved nodes
describe_resize Returns information about the last resize operation for the specified cluster
describe_scheduled_actions Describes properties of scheduled actions
describe_snapshot_copy_grants Returns a list of snapshot copy grants owned by the Amazon Web Services account in the destination region
describe_snapshot_schedules Returns a list of snapshot schedules
describe_storage Returns account level backups storage size and provisional storage
describe_table_restore_status Lists the status of one or more table restore requests made using the RestoreTableFromClusterSnapshot API action
describe_tags Returns a list of tags
describe_usage_limits Shows usage limits on a cluster
disable_logging Stops logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster
disable_snapshot_copy Disables the automatic copying of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster
disassociate_data_share_consumer From a datashare consumer account, remove association for the specified datashare
enable_logging Starts logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster
enable_snapshot_copy Enables the automatic copy of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster
failover_primary_compute Fails over the primary compute unit of the specified Multi-AZ cluster to another Availability Zone
get_cluster_credentials Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log on to an Amazon Redshift database
get_cluster_credentials_with_iam Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to an Amazon Redshift database
get_reserved_node_exchange_configuration_options Gets the configuration options for the reserved-node exchange
get_reserved_node_exchange_offerings Returns an array of DC2 ReservedNodeOfferings that matches the payment type, term, and usage price of the given DC1 reserved node
get_resource_policy Get the resource policy for a specified resource
list_recommendations List the Amazon Redshift Advisor recommendations for one or multiple Amazon Redshift clusters in an Amazon Web Services account
modify_aqua_configuration This operation is retired
modify_authentication_profile Modifies an authentication profile
modify_cluster Modifies the settings for a cluster
modify_cluster_db_revision Modifies the database revision of a cluster
modify_cluster_iam_roles Modifies the list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services
modify_cluster_maintenance Modifies the maintenance settings of a cluster
modify_cluster_parameter_group Modifies the parameters of a parameter group
modify_cluster_snapshot Modifies the settings for a snapshot
modify_cluster_snapshot_schedule Modifies a snapshot schedule for a cluster
modify_cluster_subnet_group Modifies a cluster subnet group to include the specified list of VPC subnets
modify_custom_domain_association Contains information for changing a custom domain association
modify_endpoint_access Modifies a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint
modify_event_subscription Modifies an existing Amazon Redshift event notification subscription
modify_integration Modifies a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift
modify_redshift_idc_application Changes an existing Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application
modify_scheduled_action Modifies a scheduled action
modify_snapshot_copy_retention_period Modifies the number of days to retain snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region
modify_snapshot_schedule Modifies a snapshot schedule
modify_usage_limit Modifies a usage limit in a cluster
pause_cluster Pauses a cluster
purchase_reserved_node_offering Allows you to purchase reserved nodes
put_resource_policy Updates the resource policy for a specified resource
reboot_cluster Reboots a cluster
register_namespace Registers a cluster or serverless namespace to the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog
reject_data_share From a datashare consumer account, rejects the specified datashare
reset_cluster_parameter_group Sets one or more parameters of the specified parameter group to their default values and sets the source values of the parameters to "engine-default"
resize_cluster Changes the size of the cluster
restore_from_cluster_snapshot Creates a new cluster from a snapshot
restore_table_from_cluster_snapshot Creates a new table from a table in an Amazon Redshift cluster snapshot
resume_cluster Resumes a paused cluster
revoke_cluster_security_group_ingress Revokes an ingress rule in an Amazon Redshift security group for a previously authorized IP range or Amazon EC2 security group
revoke_endpoint_access Revokes access to a cluster
revoke_snapshot_access Removes the ability of the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot
rotate_encryption_key Rotates the encryption keys for a cluster
update_partner_status Updates the status of a partner integration

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- redshift()
svc$accept_reserved_node_exchange(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Exchanges a DC1 Reserved Node for a DC2 Reserved Node with no changes to the configuration (term, payment type, or number of nodes) and no additional costs

Description

Exchanges a DC1 Reserved Node for a DC2 Reserved Node with no changes to the configuration (term, payment type, or number of nodes) and no additional costs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_accept_reserved_node_exchange/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_accept_reserved_node_exchange(
  ReservedNodeId,
  TargetReservedNodeOfferingId
)

Arguments

ReservedNodeId

[required] A string representing the node identifier of the DC1 Reserved Node to be exchanged.

TargetReservedNodeOfferingId

[required] The unique identifier of the DC2 Reserved Node offering to be used for the exchange. You can obtain the value for the parameter by calling get_reserved_node_exchange_offerings


Adds a partner integration to a cluster

Description

Adds a partner integration to a cluster. This operation authorizes a partner to push status updates for the specified database. To complete the integration, you also set up the integration on the partner website.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_add_partner/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_add_partner(AccountId, ClusterIdentifier, DatabaseName, PartnerName)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the cluster.

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the cluster that receives data from the partner.

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the database that receives data from the partner.

PartnerName

[required] The name of the partner that is authorized to send data.


From a datashare consumer account, associates a datashare with the account (AssociateEntireAccount) or the specified namespace (ConsumerArn)

Description

From a datashare consumer account, associates a datashare with the account (AssociateEntireAccount) or the specified namespace (ConsumerArn). If you make this association, the consumer can consume the datashare.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_associate_data_share_consumer/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_associate_data_share_consumer(
  DataShareArn,
  AssociateEntireAccount = NULL,
  ConsumerArn = NULL,
  ConsumerRegion = NULL,
  AllowWrites = NULL
)

Arguments

DataShareArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare that the consumer is to use.

AssociateEntireAccount

A value that specifies whether the datashare is associated with the entire account.

ConsumerArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the consumer namespace associated with the datashare.

ConsumerRegion

From a datashare consumer account, associates a datashare with all existing and future namespaces in the specified Amazon Web Services Region.

AllowWrites

If set to true, allows write operations for a datashare.


Adds an inbound (ingress) rule to an Amazon Redshift security group

Description

Adds an inbound (ingress) rule to an Amazon Redshift security group. Depending on whether the application accessing your cluster is running on the Internet or an Amazon EC2 instance, you can authorize inbound access to either a Classless Interdomain Routing (CIDR)/Internet Protocol (IP) range or to an Amazon EC2 security group. You can add as many as 20 ingress rules to an Amazon Redshift security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_authorize_cluster_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_authorize_cluster_security_group_ingress(
  ClusterSecurityGroupName,
  CIDRIP = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupName = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterSecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the security group to which the ingress rule is added.

CIDRIP

The IP range to be added the Amazon Redshift security group.

EC2SecurityGroupName

The EC2 security group to be added the Amazon Redshift security group.

EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId

The Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the security group specified by the EC2SecurityGroupName parameter. The Amazon Web Services Access Key ID is not an acceptable value.

Example: 111122223333


From a data producer account, authorizes the sharing of a datashare with one or more consumer accounts or managing entities

Description

From a data producer account, authorizes the sharing of a datashare with one or more consumer accounts or managing entities. To authorize a datashare for a data consumer, the producer account must have the correct access permissions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_authorize_data_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_authorize_data_share(
  DataShareArn,
  ConsumerIdentifier,
  AllowWrites = NULL
)

Arguments

DataShareArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare namespace that producers are to authorize sharing for.

ConsumerIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the data consumer that is authorized to access the datashare. This identifier is an Amazon Web Services account ID or a keyword, such as ADX.

AllowWrites

If set to true, allows write operations for a datashare.


Grants access to a cluster

Description

Grants access to a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_authorize_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_authorize_endpoint_access(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Account,
  VpcIds = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier of the cluster to grant access to.

Account

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID to grant access to.

VpcIds

The virtual private cloud (VPC) identifiers to grant access to.


Authorizes the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot

Description

Authorizes the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_authorize_snapshot_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_authorize_snapshot_access(
  SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotArn = NULL,
  SnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  AccountWithRestoreAccess
)

Arguments

SnapshotIdentifier

The identifier of the snapshot the account is authorized to restore.

SnapshotArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot to authorize access to.

SnapshotClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the cluster the snapshot was created from.

  • If the snapshot to access doesn't exist and the associated IAM policy doesn't allow access to all () snapshots* - This parameter is required. Otherwise, permissions aren't available to check if the snapshot exists.

  • If the snapshot to access exists - This parameter isn't required. Redshift can retrieve the cluster identifier and use it to validate snapshot authorization.

AccountWithRestoreAccess

[required] The identifier of the Amazon Web Services account authorized to restore the specified snapshot.

To share a snapshot with Amazon Web Services Support, specify amazon-redshift-support.


Deletes a set of cluster snapshots

Description

Deletes a set of cluster snapshots.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_batch_delete_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_batch_delete_cluster_snapshots(Identifiers)

Arguments

Identifiers

[required] A list of identifiers for the snapshots that you want to delete.


Modifies the settings for a set of cluster snapshots

Description

Modifies the settings for a set of cluster snapshots.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_batch_modify_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_batch_modify_cluster_snapshots(
  SnapshotIdentifierList,
  ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  Force = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotIdentifierList

[required] A list of snapshot identifiers you want to modify.

ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If you specify the value -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely.

The number must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.

If you decrease the manual snapshot retention period from its current value, existing manual snapshots that fall outside of the new retention period will return an error. If you want to suppress the errors and delete the snapshots, use the force option.

Force

A boolean value indicating whether to override an exception if the retention period has passed.


Cancels a resize operation for a cluster

Description

Cancels a resize operation for a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_cancel_resize/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_cancel_resize(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier for the cluster that you want to cancel a resize operation for.


Copies the specified automated cluster snapshot to a new manual cluster snapshot

Description

Copies the specified automated cluster snapshot to a new manual cluster snapshot. The source must be an automated snapshot and it must be in the available state.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_copy_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_copy_cluster_snapshot(
  SourceSnapshotIdentifier,
  SourceSnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  TargetSnapshotIdentifier,
  ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier for the source snapshot.

Constraints:

  • Must be the identifier for a valid automated snapshot whose state is available.

SourceSnapshotClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the cluster the source snapshot was created from. This parameter is required if your IAM user has a policy containing a snapshot resource element that specifies anything other than * for the cluster name.

Constraints:

  • Must be the identifier for a valid cluster.

TargetSnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier given to the new manual snapshot.

Constraints:

  • Cannot be null, empty, or blank.

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

  • Must be unique for the Amazon Web Services account that is making the request.

ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely.

The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.

The default value is -1.


Creates an authentication profile with the specified parameters

Description

Creates an authentication profile with the specified parameters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_authentication_profile/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_authentication_profile(
  AuthenticationProfileName,
  AuthenticationProfileContent
)

Arguments

AuthenticationProfileName

[required] The name of the authentication profile to be created.

AuthenticationProfileContent

[required] The content of the authentication profile in JSON format. The maximum length of the JSON string is determined by a quota for your account.


Creates a new cluster with the specified parameters

Description

Creates a new cluster with the specified parameters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_cluster(
  DBName = NULL,
  ClusterIdentifier,
  ClusterType = NULL,
  NodeType,
  MasterUsername,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  ClusterSecurityGroups = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  ClusterSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  ClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  ClusterVersion = NULL,
  AllowVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  NumberOfNodes = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  Encrypted = NULL,
  HsmClientCertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  HsmConfigurationIdentifier = NULL,
  ElasticIp = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  EnhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
  AdditionalInfo = NULL,
  IamRoles = NULL,
  MaintenanceTrackName = NULL,
  SnapshotScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
  AvailabilityZoneRelocation = NULL,
  AquaConfigurationStatus = NULL,
  DefaultIamRoleArn = NULL,
  LoadSampleData = NULL,
  ManageMasterPassword = NULL,
  MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  IpAddressType = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL,
  RedshiftIdcApplicationArn = NULL
)

Arguments

DBName

The name of the first database to be created when the cluster is created.

To create additional databases after the cluster is created, connect to the cluster with a SQL client and use SQL commands to create a database. For more information, go to Create a Database in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide.

Default: dev

Constraints:

  • Must contain 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters.

  • Must contain only lowercase letters.

  • Cannot be a word that is reserved by the service. A list of reserved words can be found in Reserved Words in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide.

ClusterIdentifier

[required] A unique identifier for the cluster. You use this identifier to refer to the cluster for any subsequent cluster operations such as deleting or modifying. The identifier also appears in the Amazon Redshift console.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • Alphabetic characters must be lowercase.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

  • Must be unique for all clusters within an Amazon Web Services account.

Example: myexamplecluster

ClusterType

The type of the cluster. When cluster type is specified as

  • single-node, the NumberOfNodes parameter is not required.

  • multi-node, the NumberOfNodes parameter is required.

Valid Values: multi-node | single-node

Default: multi-node

NodeType

[required] The node type to be provisioned for the cluster. For information about node types, go to Working with Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

Valid Values: dc2.large | dc2.8xlarge | ra3.large | ra3.xlplus | ra3.4xlarge | ra3.16xlarge

MasterUsername

[required] The user name associated with the admin user account for the cluster that is being created.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 - 128 alphanumeric characters or hyphens. The user name can't be PUBLIC.

  • Must contain only lowercase letters, numbers, underscore, plus sign, period (dot), at symbol (@), or hyphen.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Must not contain a colon (:) or a slash (/).

  • Cannot be a reserved word. A list of reserved words can be found in Reserved Words in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide.

MasterUserPassword

The password associated with the admin user account for the cluster that is being created.

You can't use MasterUserPassword if ManageMasterPassword is true.

Constraints:

  • Must be between 8 and 64 characters in length.

  • Must contain at least one uppercase letter.

  • Must contain at least one lowercase letter.

  • Must contain one number.

  • Can be any printable ASCII character (ASCII code 33-126) except ⁠\'⁠ (single quote), ⁠\"⁠ (double quote), ⁠\⁠, /, or @.

ClusterSecurityGroups

A list of security groups to be associated with this cluster.

Default: The default cluster security group for Amazon Redshift.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) security groups to be associated with the cluster.

Default: The default VPC security group is associated with the cluster.

ClusterSubnetGroupName

The name of a cluster subnet group to be associated with this cluster.

If this parameter is not provided the resulting cluster will be deployed outside virtual private cloud (VPC).

AvailabilityZone

The EC2 Availability Zone (AZ) in which you want Amazon Redshift to provision the cluster. For example, if you have several EC2 instances running in a specific Availability Zone, then you might want the cluster to be provisioned in the same zone in order to decrease network latency.

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone in the region that is specified by the endpoint.

Example: ⁠us-east-2d⁠

Constraint: The specified Availability Zone must be in the same region as the current endpoint.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range (in UTC) during which automated cluster maintenance can occur.

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

Default: A 30-minute window selected at random from an 8-hour block of time per region, occurring on a random day of the week. For more information about the time blocks for each region, see Maintenance Windows in Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

ClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the parameter group to be associated with this cluster.

Default: The default Amazon Redshift cluster parameter group. For information about the default parameter group, go to Working with Amazon Redshift Parameter Groups

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days that automated snapshots are retained. If the value is 0, automated snapshots are disabled. Even if automated snapshots are disabled, you can still create manual snapshots when you want with create_cluster_snapshot.

You can't disable automated snapshots for RA3 node types. Set the automated retention period from 1-35 days.

Default: 1

Constraints: Must be a value from 0 to 35.

ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The default number of days to retain a manual snapshot. If the value is -1, the snapshot is retained indefinitely. This setting doesn't change the retention period of existing snapshots.

The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.

Port

The port number on which the cluster accepts incoming connections.

The cluster is accessible only via the JDBC and ODBC connection strings. Part of the connection string requires the port on which the cluster will listen for incoming connections.

Default: 5439

Valid Values:

  • For clusters with ra3 nodes - Select a port within the ranges 5431-5455 or 8191-8215. (If you have an existing cluster with ra3 nodes, it isn't required that you change the port to these ranges.)

  • For clusters with dc2 nodes - Select a port within the range 1150-65535.

ClusterVersion

The version of the Amazon Redshift engine software that you want to deploy on the cluster.

The version selected runs on all the nodes in the cluster.

Constraints: Only version 1.0 is currently available.

Example: 1.0

AllowVersionUpgrade

If true, major version upgrades can be applied during the maintenance window to the Amazon Redshift engine that is running on the cluster.

When a new major version of the Amazon Redshift engine is released, you can request that the service automatically apply upgrades during the maintenance window to the Amazon Redshift engine that is running on your cluster.

Default: true

NumberOfNodes

The number of compute nodes in the cluster. This parameter is required when the ClusterType parameter is specified as multi-node.

For information about determining how many nodes you need, go to Working with Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

If you don't specify this parameter, you get a single-node cluster. When requesting a multi-node cluster, you must specify the number of nodes that you want in the cluster.

Default: 1

Constraints: Value must be at least 1 and no more than 100.

PubliclyAccessible

If true, the cluster can be accessed from a public network.

Default: false

Encrypted

If true, the data in the cluster is encrypted at rest. If you set the value on this parameter to false, the request will fail.

Default: true

HsmClientCertificateIdentifier

Specifies the name of the HSM client certificate the Amazon Redshift cluster uses to retrieve the data encryption keys stored in an HSM.

HsmConfigurationIdentifier

Specifies the name of the HSM configuration that contains the information the Amazon Redshift cluster can use to retrieve and store keys in an HSM.

ElasticIp

The Elastic IP (EIP) address for the cluster.

Constraints: The cluster must be provisioned in EC2-VPC and publicly-accessible through an Internet gateway. Don't specify the Elastic IP address for a publicly accessible cluster with availability zone relocation turned on. For more information about provisioning clusters in EC2-VPC, go to Supported Platforms to Launch Your Cluster in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

Tags

A list of tag instances.

KmsKeyId

The Key Management Service (KMS) key ID of the encryption key that you want to use to encrypt data in the cluster.

EnhancedVpcRouting

An option that specifies whether to create the cluster with enhanced VPC routing enabled. To create a cluster that uses enhanced VPC routing, the cluster must be in a VPC. For more information, see Enhanced VPC Routing in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

If this option is true, enhanced VPC routing is enabled.

Default: false

AdditionalInfo

Reserved.

IamRoles

A list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services. You must supply the IAM roles in their Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format.

The maximum number of IAM roles that you can associate is subject to a quota. For more information, go to Quotas and limits in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

MaintenanceTrackName

An optional parameter for the name of the maintenance track for the cluster. If you don't provide a maintenance track name, the cluster is assigned to the current track.

SnapshotScheduleIdentifier

A unique identifier for the snapshot schedule.

AvailabilityZoneRelocation

The option to enable relocation for an Amazon Redshift cluster between Availability Zones after the cluster is created.

AquaConfigurationStatus

This parameter is retired. It does not set the AQUA configuration status. Amazon Redshift automatically determines whether to use AQUA (Advanced Query Accelerator).

DefaultIamRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that was set as default for the cluster when the cluster was created.

LoadSampleData

A flag that specifies whether to load sample data once the cluster is created.

ManageMasterPassword

If true, Amazon Redshift uses Secrets Manager to manage this cluster's admin credentials. You can't use MasterUserPassword if ManageMasterPassword is true. If ManageMasterPassword is false or not set, Amazon Redshift uses MasterUserPassword for the admin user account's password.

MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId

The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store the cluster's admin credentials secret. You can only use this parameter if ManageMasterPassword is true.

IpAddressType

The IP address types that the cluster supports. Possible values are ipv4 and dualstack.

MultiAZ

If true, Amazon Redshift will deploy the cluster in two Availability Zones (AZ).

RedshiftIdcApplicationArn

The Amazon resource name (ARN) of the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application.


Creates an Amazon Redshift parameter group

Description

Creates an Amazon Redshift parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_cluster_parameter_group(
  ParameterGroupName,
  ParameterGroupFamily,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cluster parameter group.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

  • Must be unique withing your Amazon Web Services account.

This value is stored as a lower-case string.

ParameterGroupFamily

[required] The Amazon Redshift engine version to which the cluster parameter group applies. The cluster engine version determines the set of parameters.

To get a list of valid parameter group family names, you can call describe_cluster_parameter_groups. By default, Amazon Redshift returns a list of all the parameter groups that are owned by your Amazon Web Services account, including the default parameter groups for each Amazon Redshift engine version. The parameter group family names associated with the default parameter groups provide you the valid values. For example, a valid family name is "redshift-1.0".

Description

[required] A description of the parameter group.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


Creates a new Amazon Redshift security group

Description

Creates a new Amazon Redshift security group. You use security groups to control access to non-VPC clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster_security_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_cluster_security_group(
  ClusterSecurityGroupName,
  Description,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterSecurityGroupName

[required] The name for the security group. Amazon Redshift stores the value as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • Must not be "Default".

  • Must be unique for all security groups that are created by your Amazon Web Services account.

Example: examplesecuritygroup

Description

[required] A description for the security group.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


Creates a manual snapshot of the specified cluster

Description

Creates a manual snapshot of the specified cluster. The cluster must be in the available state.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_cluster_snapshot(
  SnapshotIdentifier,
  ClusterIdentifier,
  ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotIdentifier

[required] A unique identifier for the snapshot that you are requesting. This identifier must be unique for all snapshots within the Amazon Web Services account.

Constraints:

  • Cannot be null, empty, or blank

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

Example: my-snapshot-id

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier for which you want a snapshot.

ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely.

The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.

The default value is -1.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


Creates a new Amazon Redshift subnet group

Description

Creates a new Amazon Redshift subnet group. You must provide a list of one or more subnets in your existing Amazon Virtual Private Cloud (Amazon VPC) when creating Amazon Redshift subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_cluster_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_cluster_subnet_group(
  ClusterSubnetGroupName,
  Description,
  SubnetIds,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterSubnetGroupName

[required] The name for the subnet group. Amazon Redshift stores the value as a lowercase string.

Constraints:

  • Must contain no more than 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • Must not be "Default".

  • Must be unique for all subnet groups that are created by your Amazon Web Services account.

Example: examplesubnetgroup

Description

[required] A description for the subnet group.

SubnetIds

[required] An array of VPC subnet IDs. A maximum of 20 subnets can be modified in a single request.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


Used to create a custom domain name for a cluster

Description

Used to create a custom domain name for a cluster. Properties include the custom domain name, the cluster the custom domain is associated with, and the certificate Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_custom_domain_association(
  CustomDomainName,
  CustomDomainCertificateArn,
  ClusterIdentifier
)

Arguments

CustomDomainName

[required] The custom domain name for a custom domain association.

CustomDomainCertificateArn

[required] The certificate Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the custom domain name association.

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier that the custom domain is associated with.


Creates a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint

Description

Creates a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_endpoint_access(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ResourceOwner = NULL,
  EndpointName,
  SubnetGroupName,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier of the cluster to access.

ResourceOwner

The Amazon Web Services account ID of the owner of the cluster. This is only required if the cluster is in another Amazon Web Services account.

EndpointName

[required] The Redshift-managed VPC endpoint name.

An endpoint name must contain 1-30 characters. Valid characters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and hyphen(-). The first character must be a letter. The name can't contain two consecutive hyphens or end with a hyphen.

SubnetGroupName

[required] The subnet group from which Amazon Redshift chooses the subnet to deploy the endpoint.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

The security group that defines the ports, protocols, and sources for inbound traffic that you are authorizing into your endpoint.


Creates an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription

Description

Creates an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription. This action requires an ARN (Amazon Resource Name) of an Amazon SNS topic created by either the Amazon Redshift console, the Amazon SNS console, or the Amazon SNS API. To obtain an ARN with Amazon SNS, you must create a topic in Amazon SNS and subscribe to the topic. The ARN is displayed in the SNS console.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_event_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SnsTopicArn,
  SourceType = NULL,
  SourceIds = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  Severity = NULL,
  Enabled = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the event subscription to be created.

Constraints:

  • Cannot be null, empty, or blank.

  • Must contain from 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

SnsTopicArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon SNS topic used to transmit the event notifications. The ARN is created by Amazon SNS when you create a topic and subscribe to it.

SourceType

The type of source that will be generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a cluster, you would set this parameter to cluster. If this value is not specified, events are returned for all Amazon Redshift objects in your Amazon Web Services account. You must specify a source type in order to specify source IDs.

Valid values: cluster, cluster-parameter-group, cluster-security-group, cluster-snapshot, and scheduled-action.

SourceIds

A list of one or more identifiers of Amazon Redshift source objects. All of the objects must be of the same type as was specified in the source type parameter. The event subscription will return only events generated by the specified objects. If not specified, then events are returned for all objects within the source type specified.

Example: my-cluster-1, my-cluster-2

Example: my-snapshot-20131010

EventCategories

Specifies the Amazon Redshift event categories to be published by the event notification subscription.

Values: configuration, management, monitoring, security, pending

Severity

Specifies the Amazon Redshift event severity to be published by the event notification subscription.

Values: ERROR, INFO

Enabled

A boolean value; set to true to activate the subscription, and set to false to create the subscription but not activate it.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


Creates an HSM client certificate that an Amazon Redshift cluster will use to connect to the client's HSM in order to store and retrieve the keys used to encrypt the cluster databases

Description

Creates an HSM client certificate that an Amazon Redshift cluster will use to connect to the client's HSM in order to store and retrieve the keys used to encrypt the cluster databases.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_hsm_client_certificate/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_hsm_client_certificate(
  HsmClientCertificateIdentifier,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

HsmClientCertificateIdentifier

[required] The identifier to be assigned to the new HSM client certificate that the cluster will use to connect to the HSM to use the database encryption keys.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


Creates an HSM configuration that contains the information required by an Amazon Redshift cluster to store and use database encryption keys in a Hardware Security Module (HSM)

Description

Creates an HSM configuration that contains the information required by an Amazon Redshift cluster to store and use database encryption keys in a Hardware Security Module (HSM). After creating the HSM configuration, you can specify it as a parameter when creating a cluster. The cluster will then store its encryption keys in the HSM.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_hsm_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_hsm_configuration(
  HsmConfigurationIdentifier,
  Description,
  HsmIpAddress,
  HsmPartitionName,
  HsmPartitionPassword,
  HsmServerPublicCertificate,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

HsmConfigurationIdentifier

[required] The identifier to be assigned to the new Amazon Redshift HSM configuration.

Description

[required] A text description of the HSM configuration to be created.

HsmIpAddress

[required] The IP address that the Amazon Redshift cluster must use to access the HSM.

HsmPartitionName

[required] The name of the partition in the HSM where the Amazon Redshift clusters will store their database encryption keys.

HsmPartitionPassword

[required] The password required to access the HSM partition.

HsmServerPublicCertificate

[required] The HSMs public certificate file. When using Cloud HSM, the file name is server.pem.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


Creates a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift

Description

Creates a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_integration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_integration(
  SourceArn,
  TargetArn,
  IntegrationName,
  KMSKeyId = NULL,
  TagList = NULL,
  AdditionalEncryptionContext = NULL,
  Description = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the database to use as the source for replication.

TargetArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Redshift data warehouse to use as the target for replication.

IntegrationName

[required] The name of the integration.

KMSKeyId

An Key Management Service (KMS) key identifier for the key to use to encrypt the integration. If you don't specify an encryption key, the default Amazon Web Services owned key is used.

TagList

A list of tags.

AdditionalEncryptionContext

An optional set of non-secret key–value pairs that contains additional contextual information about the data. For more information, see Encryption context in the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service Developer Guide.

You can only include this parameter if you specify the KMSKeyId parameter.

Description

A description of the integration.


Creates an Amazon Redshift application for use with IAM Identity Center

Description

Creates an Amazon Redshift application for use with IAM Identity Center.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_redshift_idc_application/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_redshift_idc_application(
  IdcInstanceArn,
  RedshiftIdcApplicationName,
  IdentityNamespace = NULL,
  IdcDisplayName,
  IamRoleArn,
  AuthorizedTokenIssuerList = NULL,
  ServiceIntegrations = NULL
)

Arguments

IdcInstanceArn

[required] The Amazon resource name (ARN) of the IAM Identity Center instance where Amazon Redshift creates a new managed application.

RedshiftIdcApplicationName

[required] The name of the Redshift application in IAM Identity Center.

IdentityNamespace

The namespace for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application instance. It determines which managed application verifies the connection token.

IdcDisplayName

[required] The display name for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application instance. It appears in the console.

IamRoleArn

[required] The IAM role ARN for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application instance. It has the required permissions to be assumed and invoke the IDC Identity Center API.

AuthorizedTokenIssuerList

The token issuer list for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application instance.

ServiceIntegrations

A collection of service integrations for the Redshift IAM Identity Center application.


Creates a scheduled action

Description

Creates a scheduled action. A scheduled action contains a schedule and an Amazon Redshift API action. For example, you can create a schedule of when to run the resize_cluster API operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_scheduled_action(
  ScheduledActionName,
  TargetAction,
  Schedule,
  IamRole,
  ScheduledActionDescription = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Enable = NULL
)

Arguments

ScheduledActionName

[required] The name of the scheduled action. The name must be unique within an account. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

TargetAction

[required] A JSON format string of the Amazon Redshift API operation with input parameters. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

Schedule

[required] The schedule in at( ) or cron( ) format. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

IamRole

[required] The IAM role to assume to run the target action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

ScheduledActionDescription

The description of the scheduled action.

StartTime

The start time in UTC of the scheduled action. Before this time, the scheduled action does not trigger. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

EndTime

The end time in UTC of the scheduled action. After this time, the scheduled action does not trigger. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

Enable

If true, the schedule is enabled. If false, the scheduled action does not trigger. For more information about state of the scheduled action, see ScheduledAction.


Creates a snapshot copy grant that permits Amazon Redshift to use an encrypted symmetric key from Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt copied snapshots in a destination region

Description

Creates a snapshot copy grant that permits Amazon Redshift to use an encrypted symmetric key from Key Management Service (KMS) to encrypt copied snapshots in a destination region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_snapshot_copy_grant/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_snapshot_copy_grant(
  SnapshotCopyGrantName,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotCopyGrantName

[required] The name of the snapshot copy grant. This name must be unique in the region for the Amazon Web Services account.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • Alphabetic characters must be lowercase.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

  • Must be unique for all clusters within an Amazon Web Services account.

KmsKeyId

The unique identifier of the encrypted symmetric key to which to grant Amazon Redshift permission. If no key is specified, the default key is used.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


Create a snapshot schedule that can be associated to a cluster and which overrides the default system backup schedule

Description

Create a snapshot schedule that can be associated to a cluster and which overrides the default system backup schedule.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_snapshot_schedule(
  ScheduleDefinitions = NULL,
  ScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
  ScheduleDescription = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  DryRun = NULL,
  NextInvocations = NULL
)

Arguments

ScheduleDefinitions

The definition of the snapshot schedule. The definition is made up of schedule expressions, for example "cron(30 12 *)" or "rate(12 hours)".

ScheduleIdentifier

A unique identifier for a snapshot schedule. Only alphanumeric characters are allowed for the identifier.

ScheduleDescription

The description of the snapshot schedule.

Tags

An optional set of tags you can use to search for the schedule.

DryRun
NextInvocations

Adds tags to a cluster

Description

Adds tags to a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_tags(ResourceName, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) to which you want to add the tag or tags. For example, arn:aws:redshift:us-east-2:123456789:cluster:t1.

Tags

[required] One or more name/value pairs to add as tags to the specified resource. Each tag name is passed in with the parameter Key and the corresponding value is passed in with the parameter Value. The Key and Value parameters are separated by a comma (,). Separate multiple tags with a space. For example, ⁠--tags "Key"="owner","Value"="admin" "Key"="environment","Value"="test" "Key"="version","Value"="1.0"⁠.


Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift feature on a cluster

Description

Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift feature on a cluster. The usage limit is identified by the returned usage limit identifier.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_create_usage_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_create_usage_limit(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  FeatureType,
  LimitType,
  Amount,
  Period = NULL,
  BreachAction = NULL,
  Tags = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster that you want to limit usage.

FeatureType

[required] The Amazon Redshift feature that you want to limit.

LimitType

[required] The type of limit. Depending on the feature type, this can be based on a time duration or data size. If FeatureType is spectrum, then LimitType must be data-scanned. If FeatureType is concurrency-scaling, then LimitType must be time. If FeatureType is cross-region-datasharing, then LimitType must be data-scanned.

Amount

[required] The limit amount. If time-based, this amount is in minutes. If data-based, this amount is in terabytes (TB). The value must be a positive number.

Period

The time period that the amount applies to. A weekly period begins on Sunday. The default is monthly.

BreachAction

The action that Amazon Redshift takes when the limit is reached. The default is log. For more information about this parameter, see UsageLimit.

Tags

A list of tag instances.


From a datashare producer account, removes authorization from the specified datashare

Description

From a datashare producer account, removes authorization from the specified datashare.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_deauthorize_data_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_deauthorize_data_share(DataShareArn, ConsumerIdentifier)

Arguments

DataShareArn

[required] The namespace Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare to remove authorization from.

ConsumerIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the data consumer that is to have authorization removed from the datashare. This identifier is an Amazon Web Services account ID or a keyword, such as ADX.


Deletes an authentication profile

Description

Deletes an authentication profile.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_authentication_profile/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_authentication_profile(AuthenticationProfileName)

Arguments

AuthenticationProfileName

[required] The name of the authentication profile to delete.


Deletes a previously provisioned cluster without its final snapshot being created

Description

Deletes a previously provisioned cluster without its final snapshot being created. A successful response from the web service indicates that the request was received correctly. Use describe_clusters to monitor the status of the deletion. The delete operation cannot be canceled or reverted once submitted. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_cluster(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  SkipFinalClusterSnapshot = NULL,
  FinalClusterSnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  FinalClusterSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to be deleted.

Constraints:

  • Must contain lowercase characters.

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

SkipFinalClusterSnapshot

Determines whether a final snapshot of the cluster is created before Amazon Redshift deletes the cluster. If true, a final cluster snapshot is not created. If false, a final cluster snapshot is created before the cluster is deleted.

The FinalClusterSnapshotIdentifier parameter must be specified if SkipFinalClusterSnapshot is false.

Default: false

FinalClusterSnapshotIdentifier

The identifier of the final snapshot that is to be created immediately before deleting the cluster. If this parameter is provided, SkipFinalClusterSnapshot must be false.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

FinalClusterSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely.

The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.

The default value is -1.


Deletes a specified Amazon Redshift parameter group

Description

Deletes a specified Amazon Redshift parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_cluster_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group to be deleted.

Constraints:

  • Must be the name of an existing cluster parameter group.

  • Cannot delete a default cluster parameter group.


Deletes an Amazon Redshift security group

Description

Deletes an Amazon Redshift security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster_security_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_cluster_security_group(ClusterSecurityGroupName)

Arguments

ClusterSecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the cluster security group to be deleted.


Deletes the specified manual snapshot

Description

Deletes the specified manual snapshot. The snapshot must be in the available state, with no other users authorized to access the snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_cluster_snapshot(
  SnapshotIdentifier,
  SnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the manual snapshot to be deleted.

Constraints: Must be the name of an existing snapshot that is in the available, failed, or cancelled state.

SnapshotClusterIdentifier

The unique identifier of the cluster the snapshot was created from. This parameter is required if your IAM user has a policy containing a snapshot resource element that specifies anything other than * for the cluster name.

Constraints: Must be the name of valid cluster.


Deletes the specified cluster subnet group

Description

Deletes the specified cluster subnet group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_cluster_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_cluster_subnet_group(ClusterSubnetGroupName)

Arguments

ClusterSubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the cluster subnet group name to be deleted.


Contains information about deleting a custom domain association for a cluster

Description

Contains information about deleting a custom domain association for a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_custom_domain_association(ClusterIdentifier, CustomDomainName)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to delete a custom domain association for.

CustomDomainName

[required] The custom domain name for the custom domain association.


Deletes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint

Description

Deletes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_endpoint_access(EndpointName)

Arguments

EndpointName

[required] The Redshift-managed VPC endpoint to delete.


Deletes an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription

Description

Deletes an Amazon Redshift event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_event_subscription(SubscriptionName)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the Amazon Redshift event notification subscription to be deleted.


Deletes the specified HSM client certificate

Description

Deletes the specified HSM client certificate.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_hsm_client_certificate/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_hsm_client_certificate(HsmClientCertificateIdentifier)

Arguments

HsmClientCertificateIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the HSM client certificate to be deleted.


Deletes the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration

Description

Deletes the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_hsm_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_hsm_configuration(HsmConfigurationIdentifier)

Arguments

HsmConfigurationIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the Amazon Redshift HSM configuration to be deleted.


Deletes a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift

Description

Deletes a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_integration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_integration(IntegrationArn)

Arguments

IntegrationArn

[required] The unique identifier of the integration to delete.


Deletes a partner integration from a cluster

Description

Deletes a partner integration from a cluster. Data can still flow to the cluster until the integration is deleted at the partner's website.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_partner/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_partner(
  AccountId,
  ClusterIdentifier,
  DatabaseName,
  PartnerName
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the cluster.

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the cluster that receives data from the partner.

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the database that receives data from the partner.

PartnerName

[required] The name of the partner that is authorized to send data.


Deletes an Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application

Description

Deletes an Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_redshift_idc_application/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_redshift_idc_application(RedshiftIdcApplicationArn)

Arguments

RedshiftIdcApplicationArn

[required] The ARN for a deleted Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application.


Deletes the resource policy for a specified resource

Description

Deletes the resource policy for a specified resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_resource_policy(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource of which its resource policy is deleted.


Deletes a scheduled action

Description

Deletes a scheduled action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_scheduled_action(ScheduledActionName)

Arguments

ScheduledActionName

[required] The name of the scheduled action to delete.


Deletes the specified snapshot copy grant

Description

Deletes the specified snapshot copy grant.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_snapshot_copy_grant/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_snapshot_copy_grant(SnapshotCopyGrantName)

Arguments

SnapshotCopyGrantName

[required] The name of the snapshot copy grant to delete.


Deletes a snapshot schedule

Description

Deletes a snapshot schedule.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_snapshot_schedule(ScheduleIdentifier)

Arguments

ScheduleIdentifier

[required] A unique identifier of the snapshot schedule to delete.


Deletes tags from a resource

Description

Deletes tags from a resource. You must provide the ARN of the resource from which you want to delete the tag or tags.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_tags(ResourceName, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceName

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) from which you want to remove the tag or tags. For example, arn:aws:redshift:us-east-2:123456789:cluster:t1.

TagKeys

[required] The tag key that you want to delete.


Deletes a usage limit from a cluster

Description

Deletes a usage limit from a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_delete_usage_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_delete_usage_limit(UsageLimitId)

Arguments

UsageLimitId

[required] The identifier of the usage limit to delete.


Deregisters a cluster or serverless namespace from the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog

Description

Deregisters a cluster or serverless namespace from the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_deregister_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_deregister_namespace(NamespaceIdentifier, ConsumerIdentifiers)

Arguments

NamespaceIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the cluster or serverless namespace that you want to deregister.

ConsumerIdentifiers

[required] An array containing the ID of the consumer account that you want to deregister the cluster or serverless namespace from.


Returns a list of attributes attached to an account

Description

Returns a list of attributes attached to an account

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_account_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_account_attributes(AttributeNames = NULL)

Arguments

AttributeNames

A list of attribute names.


Describes an authentication profile

Description

Describes an authentication profile.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_authentication_profiles/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_authentication_profiles(AuthenticationProfileName = NULL)

Arguments

AuthenticationProfileName

The name of the authentication profile to describe. If not specified then all authentication profiles owned by the account are listed.


Returns an array of ClusterDbRevision objects

Description

Returns an array of ClusterDbRevision objects.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_db_revisions/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_cluster_db_revisions(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

A unique identifier for a cluster whose ClusterDbRevisions you are requesting. This parameter is case sensitive. All clusters defined for an account are returned by default.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in the marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the marker parameter and retrying the request.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point for returning a set of response records. When the results of a describe_cluster_db_revisions request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Redshift returns a value in the marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the marker parameter and retrying the request.

Constraints: You can specify either the ClusterIdentifier parameter, or the marker parameter, but not both.


Returns a list of Amazon Redshift parameter groups, including parameter groups you created and the default parameter group

Description

Returns a list of Amazon Redshift parameter groups, including parameter groups you created and the default parameter group. For each parameter group, the response includes the parameter group name, description, and parameter group family name. You can optionally specify a name to retrieve the description of a specific parameter group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_parameter_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_cluster_parameter_groups(
  ParameterGroupName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

The name of a specific parameter group for which to return details. By default, details about all parameter groups and the default parameter group are returned.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_cluster_parameter_groups request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching cluster parameter groups that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have parameter groups that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the parameter groups that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching cluster parameter groups that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have parameter groups that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the parameter groups that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Returns a detailed list of parameters contained within the specified Amazon Redshift parameter group

Description

Returns a detailed list of parameters contained within the specified Amazon Redshift parameter group. For each parameter the response includes information such as parameter name, description, data type, value, whether the parameter value is modifiable, and so on.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_cluster_parameters(
  ParameterGroupName,
  Source = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of a cluster parameter group for which to return details.

Source

The parameter types to return. Specify user to show parameters that are different form the default. Similarly, specify engine-default to show parameters that are the same as the default parameter group.

Default: All parameter types returned.

Valid Values: user | engine-default

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_cluster_parameters request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns information about Amazon Redshift security groups

Description

Returns information about Amazon Redshift security groups. If the name of a security group is specified, the response will contain only information about only that security group.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_security_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_cluster_security_groups(
  ClusterSecurityGroupName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterSecurityGroupName

The name of a cluster security group for which you are requesting details. You must specify either the Marker parameter or a ClusterSecurityGroupName parameter, but not both.

Example: securitygroup1

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_cluster_security_groups request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

Constraints: You must specify either the ClusterSecurityGroupName parameter or the Marker parameter, but not both.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching cluster security groups that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have security groups that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the security groups that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching cluster security groups that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have security groups that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the security groups that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Returns one or more snapshot objects, which contain metadata about your cluster snapshots

Description

Returns one or more snapshot objects, which contain metadata about your cluster snapshots. By default, this operation returns information about all snapshots of all clusters that are owned by your Amazon Web Services account. No information is returned for snapshots owned by inactive Amazon Web Services accounts.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_cluster_snapshots(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotArn = NULL,
  SnapshotType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  OwnerAccount = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL,
  ClusterExists = NULL,
  SortingEntities = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the cluster which generated the requested snapshots.

SnapshotIdentifier

The snapshot identifier of the snapshot about which to return information.

SnapshotArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot associated with the message to describe cluster snapshots.

SnapshotType

The type of snapshots for which you are requesting information. By default, snapshots of all types are returned.

Valid Values: automated | manual

StartTime

A value that requests only snapshots created at or after the specified time. The time value is specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

Example: ⁠2012-07-16T18:00:00Z⁠

EndTime

A time value that requests only snapshots created at or before the specified time. The time value is specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

Example: ⁠2012-07-16T18:00:00Z⁠

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_cluster_snapshots request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

OwnerAccount

The Amazon Web Services account used to create or copy the snapshot. Use this field to filter the results to snapshots owned by a particular account. To describe snapshots you own, either specify your Amazon Web Services account, or do not specify the parameter.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching cluster snapshots that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have snapshots that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the snapshots that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching cluster snapshots that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have snapshots that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the snapshots that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.

ClusterExists

A value that indicates whether to return snapshots only for an existing cluster. You can perform table-level restore only by using a snapshot of an existing cluster, that is, a cluster that has not been deleted. Values for this parameter work as follows:

  • If ClusterExists is set to true, ClusterIdentifier is required.

  • If ClusterExists is set to false and ClusterIdentifier isn't specified, all snapshots associated with deleted clusters (orphaned snapshots) are returned.

  • If ClusterExists is set to false and ClusterIdentifier is specified for a deleted cluster, snapshots associated with that cluster are returned.

  • If ClusterExists is set to false and ClusterIdentifier is specified for an existing cluster, no snapshots are returned.

SortingEntities

Returns one or more cluster subnet group objects, which contain metadata about your cluster subnet groups

Description

Returns one or more cluster subnet group objects, which contain metadata about your cluster subnet groups. By default, this operation returns information about all cluster subnet groups that are defined in your Amazon Web Services account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_subnet_groups/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_cluster_subnet_groups(
  ClusterSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterSubnetGroupName

The name of the cluster subnet group for which information is requested.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_cluster_subnet_groups request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching cluster subnet groups that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have subnet groups that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the subnet groups that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching cluster subnet groups that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have subnet groups that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the subnet groups that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Returns a list of all the available maintenance tracks

Description

Returns a list of all the available maintenance tracks.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_tracks/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_cluster_tracks(
  MaintenanceTrackName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

MaintenanceTrackName

The name of the maintenance track.

MaxRecords

An integer value for the maximum number of maintenance tracks to return.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_cluster_tracks request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Redshift returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns descriptions of the available Amazon Redshift cluster versions

Description

Returns descriptions of the available Amazon Redshift cluster versions. You can call this operation even before creating any clusters to learn more about the Amazon Redshift versions. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_cluster_versions/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_cluster_versions(
  ClusterVersion = NULL,
  ClusterParameterGroupFamily = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterVersion

The specific cluster version to return.

Example: 1.0

ClusterParameterGroupFamily

The name of a specific cluster parameter group family to return details for.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_cluster_versions request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns properties of provisioned clusters including general cluster properties, cluster database properties, maintenance and backup properties, and security and access properties

Description

Returns properties of provisioned clusters including general cluster properties, cluster database properties, maintenance and backup properties, and security and access properties. This operation supports pagination. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_clusters/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_clusters(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The unique identifier of a cluster whose properties you are requesting. This parameter is case sensitive.

The default is that all clusters defined for an account are returned.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_clusters request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

Constraints: You can specify either the ClusterIdentifier parameter or the Marker parameter, but not both.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching clusters that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have clusters that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the clusters that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching clusters that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have clusters that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the clusters that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Contains information about custom domain associations for a cluster

Description

Contains information about custom domain associations for a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_custom_domain_associations/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_custom_domain_associations(
  CustomDomainName = NULL,
  CustomDomainCertificateArn = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

CustomDomainName

The custom domain name for the custom domain association.

CustomDomainCertificateArn

The certificate Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the custom domain association.

MaxRecords

The maximum records setting for the associated custom domain.

Marker

The marker for the custom domain association.


Shows the status of any inbound or outbound datashares available in the specified account

Description

Shows the status of any inbound or outbound datashares available in the specified account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_data_shares/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_data_shares(
  DataShareArn = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

DataShareArn

The Amazon resource name (ARN) of the datashare to describe details of.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_data_shares request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns a list of datashares where the account identifier being called is a consumer account identifier

Description

Returns a list of datashares where the account identifier being called is a consumer account identifier.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_data_shares_for_consumer/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_data_shares_for_consumer(
  ConsumerArn = NULL,
  Status = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ConsumerArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the consumer namespace that returns in the list of datashares.

Status

An identifier giving the status of a datashare in the consumer cluster. If this field is specified, Amazon Redshift returns the list of datashares that have the specified status.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_data_shares_for_consumer request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns a list of datashares when the account identifier being called is a producer account identifier

Description

Returns a list of datashares when the account identifier being called is a producer account identifier.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_data_shares_for_producer/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_data_shares_for_producer(
  ProducerArn = NULL,
  Status = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ProducerArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the producer namespace that returns in the list of datashares.

Status

An identifier giving the status of a datashare in the producer. If this field is specified, Amazon Redshift returns the list of datashares that have the specified status.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_data_shares_for_producer request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns a list of parameter settings for the specified parameter group family

Description

Returns a list of parameter settings for the specified parameter group family.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_default_cluster_parameters/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_default_cluster_parameters(
  ParameterGroupFamily,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupFamily

[required] The name of the cluster parameter group family.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_default_cluster_parameters request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Describes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint

Description

Describes a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_endpoint_access(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ResourceOwner = NULL,
  EndpointName = NULL,
  VpcId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier associated with the described endpoint.

ResourceOwner

The Amazon Web Services account ID of the owner of the cluster.

EndpointName

The name of the endpoint to be described.

VpcId

The virtual private cloud (VPC) identifier with access to the cluster.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a Marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_endpoint_access request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by the MaxRecords parameter.


Describes an endpoint authorization

Description

Describes an endpoint authorization.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_endpoint_authorization/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_endpoint_authorization(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Account = NULL,
  Grantee = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier of the cluster to access.

Account

The Amazon Web Services account ID of either the cluster owner (grantor) or grantee. If Grantee parameter is true, then the Account value is of the grantor.

Grantee

Indicates whether to check authorization from a grantor or grantee point of view. If true, Amazon Redshift returns endpoint authorizations that you've been granted. If false (default), checks authorization from a grantor point of view.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a Marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_endpoint_authorization request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by the MaxRecords parameter.


Displays a list of event categories for all event source types, or for a specified source type

Description

Displays a list of event categories for all event source types, or for a specified source type. For a list of the event categories and source types, go to Amazon Redshift Event Notifications.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_event_categories/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_event_categories(SourceType = NULL)

Arguments

SourceType

The source type, such as cluster or parameter group, to which the described event categories apply.

Valid values: cluster, cluster-snapshot, cluster-parameter-group, cluster-security-group, and scheduled-action.


Lists descriptions of all the Amazon Redshift event notification subscriptions for a customer account

Description

Lists descriptions of all the Amazon Redshift event notification subscriptions for a customer account. If you specify a subscription name, lists the description for that subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_event_subscriptions/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_event_subscriptions(
  SubscriptionName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

The name of the Amazon Redshift event notification subscription to be described.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a DescribeEventSubscriptions request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching event notification subscriptions that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have subscriptions that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the subscriptions that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching event notification subscriptions that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have subscriptions that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the subscriptions that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Returns events related to clusters, security groups, snapshots, and parameter groups for the past 14 days

Description

Returns events related to clusters, security groups, snapshots, and parameter groups for the past 14 days. Events specific to a particular cluster, security group, snapshot or parameter group can be obtained by providing the name as a parameter. By default, the past hour of events are returned.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_events/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_events(
  SourceIdentifier = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Duration = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

SourceIdentifier

The identifier of the event source for which events will be returned. If this parameter is not specified, then all sources are included in the response.

Constraints:

If SourceIdentifier is supplied, SourceType must also be provided.

  • Specify a cluster identifier when SourceType is cluster.

  • Specify a cluster security group name when SourceType is cluster-security-group.

  • Specify a cluster parameter group name when SourceType is cluster-parameter-group.

  • Specify a cluster snapshot identifier when SourceType is cluster-snapshot.

SourceType

The event source to retrieve events for. If no value is specified, all events are returned.

Constraints:

If SourceType is supplied, SourceIdentifier must also be provided.

  • Specify cluster when SourceIdentifier is a cluster identifier.

  • Specify cluster-security-group when SourceIdentifier is a cluster security group name.

  • Specify cluster-parameter-group when SourceIdentifier is a cluster parameter group name.

  • Specify cluster-snapshot when SourceIdentifier is a cluster snapshot identifier.

StartTime

The beginning of the time interval to retrieve events for, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

Example: ⁠2009-07-08T18:00Z⁠

EndTime

The end of the time interval for which to retrieve events, specified in ISO 8601 format. For more information about ISO 8601, go to the ISO8601 Wikipedia page.

Example: ⁠2009-07-08T18:00Z⁠

Duration

The number of minutes prior to the time of the request for which to retrieve events. For example, if the request is sent at 18:00 and you specify a duration of 60, then only events which have occurred after 17:00 will be returned.

Default: 60

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_events request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns information about the specified HSM client certificate

Description

Returns information about the specified HSM client certificate. If no certificate ID is specified, returns information about all the HSM certificates owned by your Amazon Web Services account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_hsm_client_certificates/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_hsm_client_certificates(
  HsmClientCertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

HsmClientCertificateIdentifier

The identifier of a specific HSM client certificate for which you want information. If no identifier is specified, information is returned for all HSM client certificates owned by your Amazon Web Services account.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_hsm_client_certificates request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching HSM client certificates that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have HSM client certificates that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the HSM client certificates that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching HSM client certificates that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have HSM client certificates that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the HSM client certificates that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Returns information about the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration

Description

Returns information about the specified Amazon Redshift HSM configuration. If no configuration ID is specified, returns information about all the HSM configurations owned by your Amazon Web Services account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_hsm_configurations/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_hsm_configurations(
  HsmConfigurationIdentifier = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

HsmConfigurationIdentifier

The identifier of a specific Amazon Redshift HSM configuration to be described. If no identifier is specified, information is returned for all HSM configurations owned by your Amazon Web Services account.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_hsm_configurations request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching HSM configurations that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have HSM configurations that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the HSM configurations that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching HSM configurations that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have HSM configurations that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the HSM configurations that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Returns a list of inbound integrations

Description

Returns a list of inbound integrations.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_inbound_integrations/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_inbound_integrations(
  IntegrationArn = NULL,
  TargetArn = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

IntegrationArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the inbound integration.

TargetArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the target of an inbound integration.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_inbound_integrations request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Describes one or more zero-ETL or S3 event integrations with Amazon Redshift

Description

Describes one or more zero-ETL or S3 event integrations with Amazon Redshift.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_integrations/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_integrations(
  IntegrationArn = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  Filters = NULL
)

Arguments

IntegrationArn

The unique identifier of the integration.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_integrations request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by MaxRecords.

Filters

A filter that specifies one or more resources to return.


Describes whether information, such as queries and connection attempts, is being logged for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster

Description

Describes whether information, such as queries and connection attempts, is being logged for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_logging_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_logging_status(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster from which to get the logging status.

Example: examplecluster


Returns properties of possible node configurations such as node type, number of nodes, and disk usage for the specified action type

Description

Returns properties of possible node configurations such as node type, number of nodes, and disk usage for the specified action type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_node_configuration_options/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_node_configuration_options(
  ActionType,
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotArn = NULL,
  OwnerAccount = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

ActionType

[required] The action type to evaluate for possible node configurations. Specify "restore-cluster" to get configuration combinations based on an existing snapshot. Specify "recommend-node-config" to get configuration recommendations based on an existing cluster or snapshot. Specify "resize-cluster" to get configuration combinations for elastic resize based on an existing cluster.

ClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the cluster to evaluate for possible node configurations.

SnapshotIdentifier

The identifier of the snapshot to evaluate for possible node configurations.

SnapshotArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot associated with the message to describe node configuration.

OwnerAccount

The Amazon Web Services account used to create or copy the snapshot. Required if you are restoring a snapshot you do not own, optional if you own the snapshot.

Filters

A set of name, operator, and value items to filter the results.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_node_configuration_options request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 500

Constraints: minimum 100, maximum 500.


Returns a list of orderable cluster options

Description

Returns a list of orderable cluster options. Before you create a new cluster you can use this operation to find what options are available, such as the EC2 Availability Zones (AZ) in the specific Amazon Web Services Region that you can specify, and the node types you can request. The node types differ by available storage, memory, CPU and price. With the cost involved you might want to obtain a list of cluster options in the specific region and specify values when creating a cluster. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_orderable_cluster_options/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_orderable_cluster_options(
  ClusterVersion = NULL,
  NodeType = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterVersion

The version filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified version.

Default: All versions.

Constraints: Must be one of the version returned from describe_cluster_versions.

NodeType

The node type filter value. Specify this parameter to show only the available offerings matching the specified node type.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_orderable_cluster_options request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns information about the partner integrations defined for a cluster

Description

Returns information about the partner integrations defined for a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_partners/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_partners(
  AccountId,
  ClusterIdentifier,
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  PartnerName = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the cluster.

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the cluster whose partner integration is being described.

DatabaseName

The name of the database whose partner integration is being described. If database name is not specified, then all databases in the cluster are described.

PartnerName

The name of the partner that is being described. If partner name is not specified, then all partner integrations are described.


Lists the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center applications

Description

Lists the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center applications.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_redshift_idc_applications/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_redshift_idc_applications(
  RedshiftIdcApplicationArn = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

RedshiftIdcApplicationArn

The ARN for the Redshift application that integrates with IAM Identity Center.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Marker

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the command. If the Marker field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.


Returns exchange status details and associated metadata for a reserved-node exchange

Description

Returns exchange status details and associated metadata for a reserved-node exchange. Statuses include such values as in progress and requested.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_reserved_node_exchange_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_reserved_node_exchange_status(
  ReservedNodeId = NULL,
  ReservedNodeExchangeRequestId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedNodeId

The identifier of the source reserved node in a reserved-node exchange request.

ReservedNodeExchangeRequestId

The identifier of the reserved-node exchange request.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_reserved_node_exchange_status request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by the MaxRecords parameter. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns a list of the available reserved node offerings by Amazon Redshift with their descriptions including the node type, the fixed and recurring costs of reserving the node and duration the node will be reserved for you

Description

Returns a list of the available reserved node offerings by Amazon Redshift with their descriptions including the node type, the fixed and recurring costs of reserving the node and duration the node will be reserved for you. These descriptions help you determine which reserve node offering you want to purchase. You then use the unique offering ID in you call to purchase_reserved_node_offering to reserve one or more nodes for your Amazon Redshift cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_reserved_node_offerings/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_reserved_node_offerings(
  ReservedNodeOfferingId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedNodeOfferingId

The unique identifier for the offering.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_reserved_node_offerings request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns the descriptions of the reserved nodes

Description

Returns the descriptions of the reserved nodes.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_reserved_nodes/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_reserved_nodes(
  ReservedNodeId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedNodeId

Identifier for the node reservation.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_reserved_nodes request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns information about the last resize operation for the specified cluster

Description

Returns information about the last resize operation for the specified cluster. If no resize operation has ever been initiated for the specified cluster, a ⁠HTTP 404⁠ error is returned. If a resize operation was initiated and completed, the status of the resize remains as SUCCEEDED until the next resize.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_resize/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_resize(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of a cluster whose resize progress you are requesting. This parameter is case-sensitive.

By default, resize operations for all clusters defined for an Amazon Web Services account are returned.


Describes properties of scheduled actions

Description

Describes properties of scheduled actions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_scheduled_actions/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_scheduled_actions(
  ScheduledActionName = NULL,
  TargetActionType = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Active = NULL,
  Filters = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

ScheduledActionName

The name of the scheduled action to retrieve.

TargetActionType

The type of the scheduled actions to retrieve.

StartTime

The start time in UTC of the scheduled actions to retrieve. Only active scheduled actions that have invocations after this time are retrieved.

EndTime

The end time in UTC of the scheduled action to retrieve. Only active scheduled actions that have invocations before this time are retrieved.

Active

If true, retrieve only active scheduled actions. If false, retrieve only disabled scheduled actions.

Filters

List of scheduled action filters.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_scheduled_actions request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.


Returns a list of snapshot copy grants owned by the Amazon Web Services account in the destination region

Description

Returns a list of snapshot copy grants owned by the Amazon Web Services account in the destination region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_snapshot_copy_grants/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_snapshot_copy_grants(
  SnapshotCopyGrantName = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotCopyGrantName

The name of the snapshot copy grant.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a DescribeSnapshotCopyGrant request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

Constraints: You can specify either the SnapshotCopyGrantName parameter or the Marker parameter, but not both.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching resources that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have resources tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with all resources that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching resources that are associated with the specified value or values. For example, suppose that you have resources tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with all resources that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Returns a list of snapshot schedules

Description

Returns a list of snapshot schedules.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_snapshot_schedules/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_snapshot_schedules(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The unique identifier for the cluster whose snapshot schedules you want to view.

ScheduleIdentifier

A unique identifier for a snapshot schedule.

TagKeys

The key value for a snapshot schedule tag.

TagValues

The value corresponding to the key of the snapshot schedule tag.

Marker

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned marker value in the marker parameter and retrying the command. If the marker field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.

MaxRecords

The maximum number or response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.


Returns account level backups storage size and provisional storage

Description

Returns account level backups storage size and provisional storage.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_storage/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_storage()

Lists the status of one or more table restore requests made using the RestoreTableFromClusterSnapshot API action

Description

Lists the status of one or more table restore requests made using the restore_table_from_cluster_snapshot API action. If you don't specify a value for the TableRestoreRequestId parameter, then describe_table_restore_status returns the status of all table restore requests ordered by the date and time of the request in ascending order. Otherwise describe_table_restore_status returns the status of the table specified by TableRestoreRequestId.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_table_restore_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_table_restore_status(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  TableRestoreRequestId = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The Amazon Redshift cluster that the table is being restored to.

TableRestoreRequestId

The identifier of the table restore request to return status for. If you don't specify a TableRestoreRequestId value, then describe_table_restore_status returns the status of all in-progress table restore requests.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of records to include in the response. If more records exist than the specified MaxRecords value, a pagination token called a marker is included in the response so that the remaining results can be retrieved.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous describe_table_restore_status request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by the MaxRecords parameter.


Returns a list of tags

Description

Returns a list of tags. You can return tags from a specific resource by specifying an ARN, or you can return all tags for a given type of resource, such as clusters, snapshots, and so on.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_tags/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_tags(
  ResourceName = NULL,
  ResourceType = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceName

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for which you want to describe the tag or tags. For example, arn:aws:redshift:us-east-2:123456789:cluster:t1.

ResourceType

The type of resource with which you want to view tags. Valid resource types are:

  • Cluster

  • CIDR/IP

  • EC2 security group

  • Snapshot

  • Cluster security group

  • Subnet group

  • HSM connection

  • HSM certificate

  • Parameter group

  • Snapshot copy grant

  • Integration (zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration)

    To describe the tags associated with an integration, don't specify ResourceType, instead specify the ResourceName of the integration.

For more information about Amazon Redshift resource types and constructing ARNs, go to Specifying Policy Elements: Actions, Effects, Resources, and Principals in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

MaxRecords

The maximum number or response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Marker

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned marker value in the marker parameter and retrying the command. If the marker field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching resources that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have resources tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with all resources that have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching resources that are associated with the specified value or values. For example, suppose that you have resources tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with all resources that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Shows usage limits on a cluster

Description

Shows usage limits on a cluster. Results are filtered based on the combination of input usage limit identifier, cluster identifier, and feature type parameters:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_describe_usage_limits/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_describe_usage_limits(
  UsageLimitId = NULL,
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  FeatureType = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL,
  TagKeys = NULL,
  TagValues = NULL
)

Arguments

UsageLimitId

The identifier of the usage limit to describe.

ClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the cluster for which you want to describe usage limits.

FeatureType

The feature type for which you want to describe usage limits.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Default: 100

Constraints: minimum 20, maximum 100.

Marker

An optional parameter that specifies the starting point to return a set of response records. When the results of a describe_usage_limits request exceed the value specified in MaxRecords, Amazon Web Services returns a value in the Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.

TagKeys

A tag key or keys for which you want to return all matching usage limit objects that are associated with the specified key or keys. For example, suppose that you have parameter groups that are tagged with keys called owner and environment. If you specify both of these tag keys in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the usage limit objects have either or both of these tag keys associated with them.

TagValues

A tag value or values for which you want to return all matching usage limit objects that are associated with the specified tag value or values. For example, suppose that you have parameter groups that are tagged with values called admin and test. If you specify both of these tag values in the request, Amazon Redshift returns a response with the usage limit objects that have either or both of these tag values associated with them.


Stops logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster

Description

Stops logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_disable_logging/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_disable_logging(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster on which logging is to be stopped.

Example: examplecluster


Disables the automatic copying of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster

Description

Disables the automatic copying of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_disable_snapshot_copy/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_disable_snapshot_copy(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the source cluster that you want to disable copying of snapshots to a destination region.

Constraints: Must be the valid name of an existing cluster that has cross-region snapshot copy enabled.


From a datashare consumer account, remove association for the specified datashare

Description

From a datashare consumer account, remove association for the specified datashare.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_disassociate_data_share_consumer/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_disassociate_data_share_consumer(
  DataShareArn,
  DisassociateEntireAccount = NULL,
  ConsumerArn = NULL,
  ConsumerRegion = NULL
)

Arguments

DataShareArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare to remove association for.

DisassociateEntireAccount

A value that specifies whether association for the datashare is removed from the entire account.

ConsumerArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the consumer namespace that association for the datashare is removed from.

ConsumerRegion

From a datashare consumer account, removes association of a datashare from all the existing and future namespaces in the specified Amazon Web Services Region.


Starts logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster

Description

Starts logging information, such as queries and connection attempts, for the specified Amazon Redshift cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_enable_logging/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_enable_logging(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  BucketName = NULL,
  S3KeyPrefix = NULL,
  LogDestinationType = NULL,
  LogExports = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster on which logging is to be started.

Example: examplecluster

BucketName

The name of an existing S3 bucket where the log files are to be stored.

Constraints:

  • Must be in the same region as the cluster

  • The cluster must have read bucket and put object permissions

S3KeyPrefix

The prefix applied to the log file names.

Valid characters are any letter from any language, any whitespace character, any numeric character, and the following characters: underscore (⁠_⁠), period (.), colon (:), slash (/), equal (=), plus (+), backslash (⁠\⁠), hyphen (-), at symbol (@).

LogDestinationType

The log destination type. An enum with possible values of s3 and cloudwatch.

LogExports

The collection of exported log types. Possible values are connectionlog, useractivitylog, and userlog.


Enables the automatic copy of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster

Description

Enables the automatic copy of snapshots from one region to another region for a specified cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_enable_snapshot_copy/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_enable_snapshot_copy(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  DestinationRegion,
  RetentionPeriod = NULL,
  SnapshotCopyGrantName = NULL,
  ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the source cluster to copy snapshots from.

Constraints: Must be the valid name of an existing cluster that does not already have cross-region snapshot copy enabled.

DestinationRegion

[required] The destination Amazon Web Services Region that you want to copy snapshots to.

Constraints: Must be the name of a valid Amazon Web Services Region. For more information, see Regions and Endpoints in the Amazon Web Services General Reference.

RetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain automated snapshots in the destination region after they are copied from the source region.

Default: 7.

Constraints: Must be at least 1 and no more than 35.

SnapshotCopyGrantName

The name of the snapshot copy grant to use when snapshots of an Amazon Web Services KMS-encrypted cluster are copied to the destination region.

ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days to retain newly copied snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely.

The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.


Fails over the primary compute unit of the specified Multi-AZ cluster to another Availability Zone

Description

Fails over the primary compute unit of the specified Multi-AZ cluster to another Availability Zone.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_failover_primary_compute/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_failover_primary_compute(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the cluster for which the primary compute unit will be failed over to another Availability Zone.


Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log on to an Amazon Redshift database

Description

Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log on to an Amazon Redshift database. The action returns the database user name prefixed with ⁠IAM:⁠ if AutoCreate is False or ⁠IAMA:⁠ if AutoCreate is True. You can optionally specify one or more database user groups that the user will join at log on. By default, the temporary credentials expire in 900 seconds. You can optionally specify a duration between 900 seconds (15 minutes) and 3600 seconds (60 minutes). For more information, see Using IAM Authentication to Generate Database User Credentials in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_cluster_credentials/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_get_cluster_credentials(
  DbUser,
  DbName = NULL,
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DurationSeconds = NULL,
  AutoCreate = NULL,
  DbGroups = NULL,
  CustomDomainName = NULL
)

Arguments

DbUser

[required] The name of a database user. If a user name matching DbUser exists in the database, the temporary user credentials have the same permissions as the existing user. If DbUser doesn't exist in the database and Autocreate is True, a new user is created using the value for DbUser with PUBLIC permissions. If a database user matching the value for DbUser doesn't exist and Autocreate is False, then the command succeeds but the connection attempt will fail because the user doesn't exist in the database.

For more information, see CREATE USER in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters or hyphens. The user name can't be PUBLIC.

  • Must contain uppercase or lowercase letters, numbers, underscore, plus sign, period (dot), at symbol (@), or hyphen.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Must not contain a colon ( : ) or slash ( / ).

  • Cannot be a reserved word. A list of reserved words can be found in Reserved Words in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide.

DbName

The name of a database that DbUser is authorized to log on to. If DbName is not specified, DbUser can log on to any existing database.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters or hyphens

  • Must contain uppercase or lowercase letters, numbers, underscore, plus sign, period (dot), at symbol (@), or hyphen.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Must not contain a colon ( : ) or slash ( / ).

  • Cannot be a reserved word. A list of reserved words can be found in Reserved Words in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide.

ClusterIdentifier

The unique identifier of the cluster that contains the database for which you are requesting credentials. This parameter is case sensitive.

DurationSeconds

The number of seconds until the returned temporary password expires.

Constraint: minimum 900, maximum 3600.

Default: 900

AutoCreate

Create a database user with the name specified for the user named in DbUser if one does not exist.

DbGroups

A list of the names of existing database groups that the user named in DbUser will join for the current session, in addition to any group memberships for an existing user. If not specified, a new user is added only to PUBLIC.

Database group name constraints

  • Must be 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters or hyphens

  • Must contain only lowercase letters, numbers, underscore, plus sign, period (dot), at symbol (@), or hyphen.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Must not contain a colon ( : ) or slash ( / ).

  • Cannot be a reserved word. A list of reserved words can be found in Reserved Words in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide.

CustomDomainName

The custom domain name for the cluster credentials.


Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to an Amazon Redshift database

Description

Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to an Amazon Redshift database. The database user is mapped 1:1 to the source Identity and Access Management (IAM) identity. For more information about IAM identities, see IAM Identities (users, user groups, and roles) in the Amazon Web Services Identity and Access Management User Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_cluster_credentials_with_iam/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_get_cluster_credentials_with_iam(
  DbName = NULL,
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  DurationSeconds = NULL,
  CustomDomainName = NULL
)

Arguments

DbName

The name of the database for which you are requesting credentials. If the database name is specified, the IAM policy must allow access to the resource dbname for the specified database name. If the database name is not specified, access to all databases is allowed.

ClusterIdentifier

The unique identifier of the cluster that contains the database for which you are requesting credentials.

DurationSeconds

The number of seconds until the returned temporary password expires.

Range: 900-3600. Default: 900.

CustomDomainName

The custom domain name for the IAM message cluster credentials.


Gets the configuration options for the reserved-node exchange

Description

Gets the configuration options for the reserved-node exchange. These options include information about the source reserved node and target reserved node offering. Details include the node type, the price, the node count, and the offering type.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_reserved_node_exchange_configuration_options/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_get_reserved_node_exchange_configuration_options(
  ActionType,
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ActionType

[required] The action type of the reserved-node configuration. The action type can be an exchange initiated from either a snapshot or a resize.

ClusterIdentifier

The identifier for the cluster that is the source for a reserved-node exchange.

SnapshotIdentifier

The identifier for the snapshot that is the source for the reserved-node exchange.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a Marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Marker

An optional pagination token provided by a previous get_reserved_node_exchange_configuration_options request. If this parameter is specified, the response includes only records beyond the marker, up to the value specified by the MaxRecords parameter. You can retrieve the next set of response records by providing the returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the request.


Returns an array of DC2 ReservedNodeOfferings that matches the payment type, term, and usage price of the given DC1 reserved node

Description

Returns an array of DC2 ReservedNodeOfferings that matches the payment type, term, and usage price of the given DC1 reserved node.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_reserved_node_exchange_offerings/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_get_reserved_node_exchange_offerings(
  ReservedNodeId,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedNodeId

[required] A string representing the node identifier for the DC1 Reserved Node to be exchanged.

MaxRecords

An integer setting the maximum number of ReservedNodeOfferings to retrieve.

Marker

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of ReservedNodeOfferings.


Get the resource policy for a specified resource

Description

Get the resource policy for a specified resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_get_resource_policy(ResourceArn)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource of which its resource policy is fetched.


List the Amazon Redshift Advisor recommendations for one or multiple Amazon Redshift clusters in an Amazon Web Services account

Description

List the Amazon Redshift Advisor recommendations for one or multiple Amazon Redshift clusters in an Amazon Web Services account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_list_recommendations/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_list_recommendations(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  NamespaceArn = NULL,
  MaxRecords = NULL,
  Marker = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The unique identifier of the Amazon Redshift cluster for which the list of Advisor recommendations is returned. If the neither the cluster identifier and the cluster namespace ARN parameters are specified, then recommendations for all clusters in the account are returned.

NamespaceArn

The Amazon Redshift cluster namespace Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for which the list of Advisor recommendations is returned. If the neither the cluster identifier and the cluster namespace ARN parameters are specified, then recommendations for all clusters in the account are returned.

MaxRecords

The maximum number of response records to return in each call. If the number of remaining response records exceeds the specified MaxRecords value, a value is returned in a marker field of the response. You can retrieve the next set of records by retrying the command with the returned marker value.

Marker

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned marker value in the Marker parameter and retrying the command. If the Marker field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.


This operation is retired

Description

This operation is retired. Calling this operation does not change AQUA configuration. Amazon Redshift automatically determines whether to use AQUA (Advanced Query Accelerator).

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_aqua_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_aqua_configuration(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  AquaConfigurationStatus = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to be modified.

AquaConfigurationStatus

This parameter is retired. Amazon Redshift automatically determines whether to use AQUA (Advanced Query Accelerator).


Modifies an authentication profile

Description

Modifies an authentication profile.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_authentication_profile/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_authentication_profile(
  AuthenticationProfileName,
  AuthenticationProfileContent
)

Arguments

AuthenticationProfileName

[required] The name of the authentication profile to replace.

AuthenticationProfileContent

[required] The new content of the authentication profile in JSON format. The maximum length of the JSON string is determined by a quota for your account.


Modifies the settings for a cluster

Description

Modifies the settings for a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_cluster(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  ClusterType = NULL,
  NodeType = NULL,
  NumberOfNodes = NULL,
  ClusterSecurityGroups = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  MasterUserPassword = NULL,
  ClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  ClusterVersion = NULL,
  AllowVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  HsmClientCertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  HsmConfigurationIdentifier = NULL,
  NewClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  ElasticIp = NULL,
  EnhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
  MaintenanceTrackName = NULL,
  Encrypted = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  AvailabilityZoneRelocation = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  ManageMasterPassword = NULL,
  MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  IpAddressType = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the cluster to be modified.

Example: examplecluster

ClusterType

The new cluster type.

When you submit your cluster resize request, your existing cluster goes into a read-only mode. After Amazon Redshift provisions a new cluster based on your resize requirements, there will be outage for a period while the old cluster is deleted and your connection is switched to the new cluster. You can use describe_resize to track the progress of the resize request.

Valid Values: multi-node | single-node

NodeType

The new node type of the cluster. If you specify a new node type, you must also specify the number of nodes parameter.

For more information about resizing clusters, go to Resizing Clusters in Amazon Redshift in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

Valid Values: dc2.large | dc2.8xlarge | ra3.large | ra3.xlplus | ra3.4xlarge | ra3.16xlarge

NumberOfNodes

The new number of nodes of the cluster. If you specify a new number of nodes, you must also specify the node type parameter.

For more information about resizing clusters, go to Resizing Clusters in Amazon Redshift in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

Valid Values: Integer greater than 0.

ClusterSecurityGroups

A list of cluster security groups to be authorized on this cluster. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

Security groups currently associated with the cluster, and not in the list of groups to apply, will be revoked from the cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens

  • First character must be a letter

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of virtual private cloud (VPC) security groups to be associated with the cluster. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible.

MasterUserPassword

The new password for the cluster admin user. This change is asynchronously applied as soon as possible. Between the time of the request and the completion of the request, the MasterUserPassword element exists in the PendingModifiedValues element of the operation response.

You can't use MasterUserPassword if ManageMasterPassword is true.

Operations never return the password, so this operation provides a way to regain access to the admin user account for a cluster if the password is lost.

Default: Uses existing setting.

Constraints:

  • Must be between 8 and 64 characters in length.

  • Must contain at least one uppercase letter.

  • Must contain at least one lowercase letter.

  • Must contain one number.

  • Can be any printable ASCII character (ASCII code 33-126) except ⁠\'⁠ (single quote), ⁠\"⁠ (double quote), ⁠\⁠, /, or @.

ClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the cluster parameter group to apply to this cluster. This change is applied only after the cluster is rebooted. To reboot a cluster use reboot_cluster.

Default: Uses existing setting.

Constraints: The cluster parameter group must be in the same parameter group family that matches the cluster version.

AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days that automated snapshots are retained. If the value is 0, automated snapshots are disabled. Even if automated snapshots are disabled, you can still create manual snapshots when you want with create_cluster_snapshot.

If you decrease the automated snapshot retention period from its current value, existing automated snapshots that fall outside of the new retention period will be immediately deleted.

You can't disable automated snapshots for RA3 node types. Set the automated retention period from 1-35 days.

Default: Uses existing setting.

Constraints: Must be a value from 0 to 35.

ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The default for number of days that a newly created manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely. This value doesn't retroactively change the retention periods of existing manual snapshots.

The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.

The default value is -1.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range (in UTC) during which system maintenance can occur, if necessary. If system maintenance is necessary during the window, it may result in an outage.

This maintenance window change is made immediately. If the new maintenance window indicates the current time, there must be at least 120 minutes between the current time and end of the window in order to ensure that pending changes are applied.

Default: Uses existing setting.

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi, for example wed:07:30-wed:08:00.

Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun

Constraints: Must be at least 30 minutes.

ClusterVersion

The new version number of the Amazon Redshift engine to upgrade to.

For major version upgrades, if a non-default cluster parameter group is currently in use, a new cluster parameter group in the cluster parameter group family for the new version must be specified. The new cluster parameter group can be the default for that cluster parameter group family. For more information about parameters and parameter groups, go to Amazon Redshift Parameter Groups in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

Example: 1.0

AllowVersionUpgrade

If true, major version upgrades will be applied automatically to the cluster during the maintenance window.

Default: false

HsmClientCertificateIdentifier

Specifies the name of the HSM client certificate the Amazon Redshift cluster uses to retrieve the data encryption keys stored in an HSM.

HsmConfigurationIdentifier

Specifies the name of the HSM configuration that contains the information the Amazon Redshift cluster can use to retrieve and store keys in an HSM.

NewClusterIdentifier

The new identifier for the cluster.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • Alphabetic characters must be lowercase.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

  • Must be unique for all clusters within an Amazon Web Services account.

Example: examplecluster

PubliclyAccessible

If true, the cluster can be accessed from a public network. Only clusters in VPCs can be set to be publicly available.

Default: false

ElasticIp

The Elastic IP (EIP) address for the cluster.

Constraints: The cluster must be provisioned in EC2-VPC and publicly-accessible through an Internet gateway. For more information about provisioning clusters in EC2-VPC, go to Supported Platforms to Launch Your Cluster in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

EnhancedVpcRouting

An option that specifies whether to create the cluster with enhanced VPC routing enabled. To create a cluster that uses enhanced VPC routing, the cluster must be in a VPC. For more information, see Enhanced VPC Routing in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

If this option is true, enhanced VPC routing is enabled.

Default: false

MaintenanceTrackName

The name for the maintenance track that you want to assign for the cluster. This name change is asynchronous. The new track name stays in the PendingModifiedValues for the cluster until the next maintenance window. When the maintenance track changes, the cluster is switched to the latest cluster release available for the maintenance track. At this point, the maintenance track name is applied.

Encrypted

Indicates whether the cluster is encrypted. If the value is encrypted (true) and you provide a value for the KmsKeyId parameter, we encrypt the cluster with the provided KmsKeyId. If you don't provide a KmsKeyId, we encrypt with the default key.

If the value is not encrypted (false), then the cluster is decrypted.

KmsKeyId

The Key Management Service (KMS) key ID of the encryption key that you want to use to encrypt data in the cluster.

AvailabilityZoneRelocation

The option to enable relocation for an Amazon Redshift cluster between Availability Zones after the cluster modification is complete.

AvailabilityZone

The option to initiate relocation for an Amazon Redshift cluster to the target Availability Zone.

Port

The option to change the port of an Amazon Redshift cluster.

Valid Values:

  • For clusters with ra3 nodes - Select a port within the ranges 5431-5455 or 8191-8215. (If you have an existing cluster with ra3 nodes, it isn't required that you change the port to these ranges.)

  • For clusters with dc2 nodes - Select a port within the range 1150-65535.

ManageMasterPassword

If true, Amazon Redshift uses Secrets Manager to manage this cluster's admin credentials. You can't use MasterUserPassword if ManageMasterPassword is true. If ManageMasterPassword is false or not set, Amazon Redshift uses MasterUserPassword for the admin user account's password.

MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId

The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store the cluster's admin credentials secret. You can only use this parameter if ManageMasterPassword is true.

IpAddressType

The IP address types that the cluster supports. Possible values are ipv4 and dualstack.

MultiAZ

If true and the cluster is currently only deployed in a single Availability Zone, the cluster will be modified to be deployed in two Availability Zones.


Modifies the database revision of a cluster

Description

Modifies the database revision of a cluster. The database revision is a unique revision of the database running in a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_db_revision/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_cluster_db_revision(ClusterIdentifier, RevisionTarget)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of a cluster whose database revision you want to modify.

Example: examplecluster

RevisionTarget

[required] The identifier of the database revision. You can retrieve this value from the response to the describe_cluster_db_revisions request.


Modifies the list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services

Description

Modifies the list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_iam_roles/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_cluster_iam_roles(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  AddIamRoles = NULL,
  RemoveIamRoles = NULL,
  DefaultIamRoleArn = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the cluster for which you want to associate or disassociate IAM roles.

AddIamRoles

Zero or more IAM roles to associate with the cluster. The roles must be in their Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format.

RemoveIamRoles

Zero or more IAM roles in ARN format to disassociate from the cluster.

DefaultIamRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that was set as default for the cluster when the cluster was last modified.


Modifies the maintenance settings of a cluster

Description

Modifies the maintenance settings of a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_maintenance/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_cluster_maintenance(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  DeferMaintenance = NULL,
  DeferMaintenanceIdentifier = NULL,
  DeferMaintenanceStartTime = NULL,
  DeferMaintenanceEndTime = NULL,
  DeferMaintenanceDuration = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] A unique identifier for the cluster.

DeferMaintenance

A boolean indicating whether to enable the deferred maintenance window.

DeferMaintenanceIdentifier

A unique identifier for the deferred maintenance window.

DeferMaintenanceStartTime

A timestamp indicating the start time for the deferred maintenance window.

DeferMaintenanceEndTime

A timestamp indicating end time for the deferred maintenance window. If you specify an end time, you can't specify a duration.

DeferMaintenanceDuration

An integer indicating the duration of the maintenance window in days. If you specify a duration, you can't specify an end time. The duration must be 45 days or less.


Modifies the parameters of a parameter group

Description

Modifies the parameters of a parameter group. For the parameters parameter, it can't contain ASCII characters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_cluster_parameter_group(ParameterGroupName, Parameters)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the parameter group to be modified.

Parameters

[required] An array of parameters to be modified. A maximum of 20 parameters can be modified in a single request.

For each parameter to be modified, you must supply at least the parameter name and parameter value; other name-value pairs of the parameter are optional.

For the workload management (WLM) configuration, you must supply all the name-value pairs in the wlm_json_configuration parameter.


Modifies the settings for a snapshot

Description

Modifies the settings for a snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_cluster_snapshot(
  SnapshotIdentifier,
  ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  Force = NULL
)

Arguments

SnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the snapshot whose setting you want to modify.

ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days that a manual snapshot is retained. If the value is -1, the manual snapshot is retained indefinitely.

If the manual snapshot falls outside of the new retention period, you can specify the force option to immediately delete the snapshot.

The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.

Force

A Boolean option to override an exception if the retention period has already passed.


Modifies a snapshot schedule for a cluster

Description

Modifies a snapshot schedule for a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_cluster_snapshot_schedule(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  ScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
  DisassociateSchedule = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] A unique identifier for the cluster whose snapshot schedule you want to modify.

ScheduleIdentifier

A unique alphanumeric identifier for the schedule that you want to associate with the cluster.

DisassociateSchedule

A boolean to indicate whether to remove the assoiciation between the cluster and the schedule.


Modifies a cluster subnet group to include the specified list of VPC subnets

Description

Modifies a cluster subnet group to include the specified list of VPC subnets. The operation replaces the existing list of subnets with the new list of subnets.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_cluster_subnet_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_cluster_subnet_group(
  ClusterSubnetGroupName,
  Description = NULL,
  SubnetIds
)

Arguments

ClusterSubnetGroupName

[required] The name of the subnet group to be modified.

Description

A text description of the subnet group to be modified.

SubnetIds

[required] An array of VPC subnet IDs. A maximum of 20 subnets can be modified in a single request.


Contains information for changing a custom domain association

Description

Contains information for changing a custom domain association.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_custom_domain_association(
  CustomDomainName,
  CustomDomainCertificateArn,
  ClusterIdentifier
)

Arguments

CustomDomainName

[required] The custom domain name for a changed custom domain association.

CustomDomainCertificateArn

[required] The certificate Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the changed custom domain association.

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to change a custom domain association for.


Modifies a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint

Description

Modifies a Redshift-managed VPC endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_endpoint_access(EndpointName, VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL)

Arguments

EndpointName

[required] The endpoint to be modified.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

The complete list of VPC security groups associated with the endpoint after the endpoint is modified.


Modifies an existing Amazon Redshift event notification subscription

Description

Modifies an existing Amazon Redshift event notification subscription.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_event_subscription/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_event_subscription(
  SubscriptionName,
  SnsTopicArn = NULL,
  SourceType = NULL,
  SourceIds = NULL,
  EventCategories = NULL,
  Severity = NULL,
  Enabled = NULL
)

Arguments

SubscriptionName

[required] The name of the modified Amazon Redshift event notification subscription.

SnsTopicArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the SNS topic to be used by the event notification subscription.

SourceType

The type of source that will be generating the events. For example, if you want to be notified of events generated by a cluster, you would set this parameter to cluster. If this value is not specified, events are returned for all Amazon Redshift objects in your Amazon Web Services account. You must specify a source type in order to specify source IDs.

Valid values: cluster, cluster-parameter-group, cluster-security-group, cluster-snapshot, and scheduled-action.

SourceIds

A list of one or more identifiers of Amazon Redshift source objects. All of the objects must be of the same type as was specified in the source type parameter. The event subscription will return only events generated by the specified objects. If not specified, then events are returned for all objects within the source type specified.

Example: my-cluster-1, my-cluster-2

Example: my-snapshot-20131010

EventCategories

Specifies the Amazon Redshift event categories to be published by the event notification subscription.

Values: configuration, management, monitoring, security, pending

Severity

Specifies the Amazon Redshift event severity to be published by the event notification subscription.

Values: ERROR, INFO

Enabled

A Boolean value indicating if the subscription is enabled. true indicates the subscription is enabled


Modifies a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift

Description

Modifies a zero-ETL integration or S3 event integration with Amazon Redshift.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_integration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_integration(
  IntegrationArn,
  Description = NULL,
  IntegrationName = NULL
)

Arguments

IntegrationArn

[required] The unique identifier of the integration to modify.

Description

A new description for the integration.

IntegrationName

A new name for the integration.


Changes an existing Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application

Description

Changes an existing Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_redshift_idc_application/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_redshift_idc_application(
  RedshiftIdcApplicationArn,
  IdentityNamespace = NULL,
  IamRoleArn = NULL,
  IdcDisplayName = NULL,
  AuthorizedTokenIssuerList = NULL,
  ServiceIntegrations = NULL
)

Arguments

RedshiftIdcApplicationArn

[required] The ARN for the Redshift application that integrates with IAM Identity Center.

IdentityNamespace

The namespace for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application to change. It determines which managed application verifies the connection token.

IamRoleArn

The IAM role ARN associated with the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application to change. It has the required permissions to be assumed and invoke the IDC Identity Center API.

IdcDisplayName

The display name for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application to change. It appears on the console.

AuthorizedTokenIssuerList

The authorized token issuer list for the Amazon Redshift IAM Identity Center application to change.

ServiceIntegrations

A collection of service integrations associated with the application.


Modifies a scheduled action

Description

Modifies a scheduled action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_scheduled_action(
  ScheduledActionName,
  TargetAction = NULL,
  Schedule = NULL,
  IamRole = NULL,
  ScheduledActionDescription = NULL,
  StartTime = NULL,
  EndTime = NULL,
  Enable = NULL
)

Arguments

ScheduledActionName

[required] The name of the scheduled action to modify.

TargetAction

A modified JSON format of the scheduled action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

Schedule

A modified schedule in either at( ) or cron( ) format. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

IamRole

A different IAM role to assume to run the target action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

ScheduledActionDescription

A modified description of the scheduled action.

StartTime

A modified start time of the scheduled action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

EndTime

A modified end time of the scheduled action. For more information about this parameter, see ScheduledAction.

Enable

A modified enable flag of the scheduled action. If true, the scheduled action is active. If false, the scheduled action is disabled.


Modifies the number of days to retain snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region

Description

Modifies the number of days to retain snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region. By default, this operation only changes the retention period of copied automated snapshots. The retention periods for both new and existing copied automated snapshots are updated with the new retention period. You can set the manual option to change only the retention periods of copied manual snapshots. If you set this option, only newly copied manual snapshots have the new retention period.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_snapshot_copy_retention_period/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_snapshot_copy_retention_period(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  RetentionPeriod,
  Manual = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the cluster for which you want to change the retention period for either automated or manual snapshots that are copied to a destination Amazon Web Services Region.

Constraints: Must be the valid name of an existing cluster that has cross-region snapshot copy enabled.

RetentionPeriod

[required] The number of days to retain automated snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region after they are copied from the source Amazon Web Services Region.

By default, this only changes the retention period of copied automated snapshots.

If you decrease the retention period for automated snapshots that are copied to a destination Amazon Web Services Region, Amazon Redshift deletes any existing automated snapshots that were copied to the destination Amazon Web Services Region and that fall outside of the new retention period.

Constraints: Must be at least 1 and no more than 35 for automated snapshots.

If you specify the manual option, only newly copied manual snapshots will have the new retention period.

If you specify the value of -1 newly copied manual snapshots are retained indefinitely.

Constraints: The number of days must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653 for manual snapshots.

Manual

Indicates whether to apply the snapshot retention period to newly copied manual snapshots instead of automated snapshots.


Modifies a snapshot schedule

Description

Modifies a snapshot schedule. Any schedule associated with a cluster is modified asynchronously.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_snapshot_schedule/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_snapshot_schedule(ScheduleIdentifier, ScheduleDefinitions)

Arguments

ScheduleIdentifier

[required] A unique alphanumeric identifier of the schedule to modify.

ScheduleDefinitions

[required] An updated list of schedule definitions. A schedule definition is made up of schedule expressions, for example, "cron(30 12 *)" or "rate(12 hours)".


Modifies a usage limit in a cluster

Description

Modifies a usage limit in a cluster. You can't modify the feature type or period of a usage limit.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_modify_usage_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_modify_usage_limit(UsageLimitId, Amount = NULL, BreachAction = NULL)

Arguments

UsageLimitId

[required] The identifier of the usage limit to modify.

Amount

The new limit amount. For more information about this parameter, see UsageLimit.

BreachAction

The new action that Amazon Redshift takes when the limit is reached. For more information about this parameter, see UsageLimit.


Pauses a cluster

Description

Pauses a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_pause_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_pause_cluster(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to be paused.


Allows you to purchase reserved nodes

Description

Allows you to purchase reserved nodes. Amazon Redshift offers a predefined set of reserved node offerings. You can purchase one or more of the offerings. You can call the describe_reserved_node_offerings API to obtain the available reserved node offerings. You can call this API by providing a specific reserved node offering and the number of nodes you want to reserve.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_purchase_reserved_node_offering/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_purchase_reserved_node_offering(
  ReservedNodeOfferingId,
  NodeCount = NULL
)

Arguments

ReservedNodeOfferingId

[required] The unique identifier of the reserved node offering you want to purchase.

NodeCount

The number of reserved nodes that you want to purchase.

Default: 1


Updates the resource policy for a specified resource

Description

Updates the resource policy for a specified resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_put_resource_policy(ResourceArn, Policy)

Arguments

ResourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource of which its resource policy is updated.

Policy

[required] The content of the resource policy being updated.


Reboots a cluster

Description

Reboots a cluster. This action is taken as soon as possible. It results in a momentary outage to the cluster, during which the cluster status is set to rebooting. A cluster event is created when the reboot is completed. Any pending cluster modifications (see modify_cluster) are applied at this reboot. For more information about managing clusters, go to Amazon Redshift Clusters in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_reboot_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_reboot_cluster(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier.


Registers a cluster or serverless namespace to the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog

Description

Registers a cluster or serverless namespace to the Amazon Web Services Glue Data Catalog.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_register_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_register_namespace(NamespaceIdentifier, ConsumerIdentifiers)

Arguments

NamespaceIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the cluster or serverless namespace that you want to register.

ConsumerIdentifiers

[required] An array containing the ID of the consumer account that you want to register the namespace to.


From a datashare consumer account, rejects the specified datashare

Description

From a datashare consumer account, rejects the specified datashare.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_reject_data_share/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_reject_data_share(DataShareArn)

Arguments

DataShareArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the datashare to reject.


Sets one or more parameters of the specified parameter group to their default values and sets the source values of the parameters to "engine-default"

Description

Sets one or more parameters of the specified parameter group to their default values and sets the source values of the parameters to "engine-default". To reset the entire parameter group specify the ResetAllParameters parameter. For parameter changes to take effect you must reboot any associated clusters.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_reset_cluster_parameter_group/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_reset_cluster_parameter_group(
  ParameterGroupName,
  ResetAllParameters = NULL,
  Parameters = NULL
)

Arguments

ParameterGroupName

[required] The name of the cluster parameter group to be reset.

ResetAllParameters

If true, all parameters in the specified parameter group will be reset to their default values.

Default: true

Parameters

An array of names of parameters to be reset. If ResetAllParameters option is not used, then at least one parameter name must be supplied.

Constraints: A maximum of 20 parameters can be reset in a single request.


Changes the size of the cluster

Description

Changes the size of the cluster. You can change the cluster's type, or change the number or type of nodes. The default behavior is to use the elastic resize method. With an elastic resize, your cluster is available for read and write operations more quickly than with the classic resize method.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_resize_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_resize_cluster(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  ClusterType = NULL,
  NodeType = NULL,
  NumberOfNodes = NULL,
  Classic = NULL,
  ReservedNodeId = NULL,
  TargetReservedNodeOfferingId = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier for the cluster to resize.

ClusterType

The new cluster type for the specified cluster.

NodeType

The new node type for the nodes you are adding. If not specified, the cluster's current node type is used.

NumberOfNodes

The new number of nodes for the cluster. If not specified, the cluster's current number of nodes is used.

Classic

A boolean value indicating whether the resize operation is using the classic resize process. If you don't provide this parameter or set the value to false, the resize type is elastic.

ReservedNodeId

The identifier of the reserved node.

TargetReservedNodeOfferingId

The identifier of the target reserved node offering.


Creates a new cluster from a snapshot

Description

Creates a new cluster from a snapshot. By default, Amazon Redshift creates the resulting cluster with the same configuration as the original cluster from which the snapshot was created, except that the new cluster is created with the default cluster security and parameter groups. After Amazon Redshift creates the cluster, you can use the modify_cluster API to associate a different security group and different parameter group with the restored cluster. If you are using a DS node type, you can also choose to change to another DS node type of the same size during restore.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_restore_from_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_restore_from_cluster_snapshot(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotArn = NULL,
  SnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Port = NULL,
  AvailabilityZone = NULL,
  AllowVersionUpgrade = NULL,
  ClusterSubnetGroupName = NULL,
  PubliclyAccessible = NULL,
  OwnerAccount = NULL,
  HsmClientCertificateIdentifier = NULL,
  HsmConfigurationIdentifier = NULL,
  ElasticIp = NULL,
  ClusterParameterGroupName = NULL,
  ClusterSecurityGroups = NULL,
  VpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  PreferredMaintenanceWindow = NULL,
  AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  NodeType = NULL,
  EnhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
  AdditionalInfo = NULL,
  IamRoles = NULL,
  MaintenanceTrackName = NULL,
  SnapshotScheduleIdentifier = NULL,
  NumberOfNodes = NULL,
  AvailabilityZoneRelocation = NULL,
  AquaConfigurationStatus = NULL,
  DefaultIamRoleArn = NULL,
  ReservedNodeId = NULL,
  TargetReservedNodeOfferingId = NULL,
  Encrypted = NULL,
  ManageMasterPassword = NULL,
  MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  IpAddressType = NULL,
  MultiAZ = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster that will be created from restoring the snapshot.

Constraints:

  • Must contain from 1 to 63 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • Alphabetic characters must be lowercase.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

  • Must be unique for all clusters within an Amazon Web Services account.

SnapshotIdentifier

The name of the snapshot from which to create the new cluster. This parameter isn't case sensitive. You must specify this parameter or snapshotArn, but not both.

Example: my-snapshot-id

SnapshotArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot associated with the message to restore from a cluster. You must specify this parameter or snapshotIdentifier, but not both.

SnapshotClusterIdentifier

The name of the cluster the source snapshot was created from. This parameter is required if your IAM user has a policy containing a snapshot resource element that specifies anything other than * for the cluster name.

Port

The port number on which the cluster accepts connections.

Default: The same port as the original cluster.

Valid values: For clusters with DC2 nodes, must be within the range 1150-65535. For clusters with ra3 nodes, must be within the ranges 5431-5455 or 8191-8215.

AvailabilityZone

The Amazon EC2 Availability Zone in which to restore the cluster.

Default: A random, system-chosen Availability Zone.

Example: ⁠us-east-2a⁠

AllowVersionUpgrade

If true, major version upgrades can be applied during the maintenance window to the Amazon Redshift engine that is running on the cluster.

Default: true

ClusterSubnetGroupName

The name of the subnet group where you want to cluster restored.

A snapshot of cluster in VPC can be restored only in VPC. Therefore, you must provide subnet group name where you want the cluster restored.

PubliclyAccessible

If true, the cluster can be accessed from a public network.

Default: false

OwnerAccount

The Amazon Web Services account used to create or copy the snapshot. Required if you are restoring a snapshot you do not own, optional if you own the snapshot.

HsmClientCertificateIdentifier

Specifies the name of the HSM client certificate the Amazon Redshift cluster uses to retrieve the data encryption keys stored in an HSM.

HsmConfigurationIdentifier

Specifies the name of the HSM configuration that contains the information the Amazon Redshift cluster can use to retrieve and store keys in an HSM.

ElasticIp

The Elastic IP (EIP) address for the cluster. Don't specify the Elastic IP address for a publicly accessible cluster with availability zone relocation turned on.

ClusterParameterGroupName

The name of the parameter group to be associated with this cluster.

Default: The default Amazon Redshift cluster parameter group. For information about the default parameter group, go to Working with Amazon Redshift Parameter Groups.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 255 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • First character must be a letter.

  • Cannot end with a hyphen or contain two consecutive hyphens.

ClusterSecurityGroups

A list of security groups to be associated with this cluster.

Default: The default cluster security group for Amazon Redshift.

Cluster security groups only apply to clusters outside of VPCs.

VpcSecurityGroupIds

A list of Virtual Private Cloud (VPC) security groups to be associated with the cluster.

Default: The default VPC security group is associated with the cluster.

VPC security groups only apply to clusters in VPCs.

PreferredMaintenanceWindow

The weekly time range (in UTC) during which automated cluster maintenance can occur.

Format: ddd:hh24:mi-ddd:hh24:mi

Default: The value selected for the cluster from which the snapshot was taken. For more information about the time blocks for each region, see Maintenance Windows in Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

Valid Days: Mon | Tue | Wed | Thu | Fri | Sat | Sun

Constraints: Minimum 30-minute window.

AutomatedSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The number of days that automated snapshots are retained. If the value is 0, automated snapshots are disabled. Even if automated snapshots are disabled, you can still create manual snapshots when you want with create_cluster_snapshot.

You can't disable automated snapshots for RA3 node types. Set the automated retention period from 1-35 days.

Default: The value selected for the cluster from which the snapshot was taken.

Constraints: Must be a value from 0 to 35.

ManualSnapshotRetentionPeriod

The default number of days to retain a manual snapshot. If the value is -1, the snapshot is retained indefinitely. This setting doesn't change the retention period of existing snapshots.

The value must be either -1 or an integer between 1 and 3,653.

KmsKeyId

The Key Management Service (KMS) key ID of the encryption key that encrypts data in the cluster restored from a shared snapshot. You can also provide the key ID when you restore from an unencrypted snapshot to an encrypted cluster in the same account. Additionally, you can specify a new KMS key ID when you restore from an encrypted snapshot in the same account in order to change it. In that case, the restored cluster is encrypted with the new KMS key ID.

NodeType

The node type that the restored cluster will be provisioned with.

If you have a DC instance type, you must restore into that same instance type and size. In other words, you can only restore a dc2.large node type into another dc2 type. For more information about node types, see About Clusters and Nodes in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

EnhancedVpcRouting

An option that specifies whether to create the cluster with enhanced VPC routing enabled. To create a cluster that uses enhanced VPC routing, the cluster must be in a VPC. For more information, see Enhanced VPC Routing in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

If this option is true, enhanced VPC routing is enabled.

Default: false

AdditionalInfo

Reserved.

IamRoles

A list of Identity and Access Management (IAM) roles that can be used by the cluster to access other Amazon Web Services services. You must supply the IAM roles in their Amazon Resource Name (ARN) format.

The maximum number of IAM roles that you can associate is subject to a quota. For more information, go to Quotas and limits in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

MaintenanceTrackName

The name of the maintenance track for the restored cluster. When you take a snapshot, the snapshot inherits the MaintenanceTrack value from the cluster. The snapshot might be on a different track than the cluster that was the source for the snapshot. For example, suppose that you take a snapshot of a cluster that is on the current track and then change the cluster to be on the trailing track. In this case, the snapshot and the source cluster are on different tracks.

SnapshotScheduleIdentifier

A unique identifier for the snapshot schedule.

NumberOfNodes

The number of nodes specified when provisioning the restored cluster.

AvailabilityZoneRelocation

The option to enable relocation for an Amazon Redshift cluster between Availability Zones after the cluster is restored.

AquaConfigurationStatus

This parameter is retired. It does not set the AQUA configuration status. Amazon Redshift automatically determines whether to use AQUA (Advanced Query Accelerator).

DefaultIamRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the IAM role that was set as default for the cluster when the cluster was last modified while it was restored from a snapshot.

ReservedNodeId

The identifier of the target reserved node offering.

TargetReservedNodeOfferingId

The identifier of the target reserved node offering.

Encrypted

Enables support for restoring an unencrypted snapshot to a cluster encrypted with Key Management Service (KMS) and a customer managed key.

ManageMasterPassword

If true, Amazon Redshift uses Secrets Manager to manage the restored cluster's admin credentials. If ManageMasterPassword is false or not set, Amazon Redshift uses the admin credentials the cluster had at the time the snapshot was taken.

MasterPasswordSecretKmsKeyId

The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store the cluster's admin credentials secret. You can only use this parameter if ManageMasterPassword is true.

IpAddressType

The IP address type for the cluster. Possible values are ipv4 and dualstack.

MultiAZ

If true, the snapshot will be restored to a cluster deployed in two Availability Zones.


Creates a new table from a table in an Amazon Redshift cluster snapshot

Description

Creates a new table from a table in an Amazon Redshift cluster snapshot. You must create the new table within the Amazon Redshift cluster that the snapshot was taken from.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_restore_table_from_cluster_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_restore_table_from_cluster_snapshot(
  ClusterIdentifier,
  SnapshotIdentifier,
  SourceDatabaseName,
  SourceSchemaName = NULL,
  SourceTableName,
  TargetDatabaseName = NULL,
  TargetSchemaName = NULL,
  NewTableName,
  EnableCaseSensitiveIdentifier = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the Amazon Redshift cluster to restore the table to.

SnapshotIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the snapshot to restore the table from. This snapshot must have been created from the Amazon Redshift cluster specified by the ClusterIdentifier parameter.

SourceDatabaseName

[required] The name of the source database that contains the table to restore from.

SourceSchemaName

The name of the source schema that contains the table to restore from. If you do not specify a SourceSchemaName value, the default is public.

SourceTableName

[required] The name of the source table to restore from.

TargetDatabaseName

The name of the database to restore the table to.

TargetSchemaName

The name of the schema to restore the table to.

NewTableName

[required] The name of the table to create as a result of the current request.

EnableCaseSensitiveIdentifier

Indicates whether name identifiers for database, schema, and table are case sensitive. If true, the names are case sensitive. If false (default), the names are not case sensitive.


Resumes a paused cluster

Description

Resumes a paused cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_resume_cluster/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_resume_cluster(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The identifier of the cluster to be resumed.


Revokes an ingress rule in an Amazon Redshift security group for a previously authorized IP range or Amazon EC2 security group

Description

Revokes an ingress rule in an Amazon Redshift security group for a previously authorized IP range or Amazon EC2 security group. To add an ingress rule, see authorize_cluster_security_group_ingress. For information about managing security groups, go to Amazon Redshift Cluster Security Groups in the Amazon Redshift Cluster Management Guide.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_revoke_cluster_security_group_ingress/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_revoke_cluster_security_group_ingress(
  ClusterSecurityGroupName,
  CIDRIP = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupName = NULL,
  EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterSecurityGroupName

[required] The name of the security Group from which to revoke the ingress rule.

CIDRIP

The IP range for which to revoke access. This range must be a valid Classless Inter-Domain Routing (CIDR) block of IP addresses. If CIDRIP is specified, EC2SecurityGroupName and EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId cannot be provided.

EC2SecurityGroupName

The name of the EC2 Security Group whose access is to be revoked. If EC2SecurityGroupName is specified, EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId must also be provided and CIDRIP cannot be provided.

EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId

The Amazon Web Services account number of the owner of the security group specified in the EC2SecurityGroupName parameter. The Amazon Web Services access key ID is not an acceptable value. If EC2SecurityGroupOwnerId is specified, EC2SecurityGroupName must also be provided. and CIDRIP cannot be provided.

Example: 111122223333


Revokes access to a cluster

Description

Revokes access to a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_revoke_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_revoke_endpoint_access(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Account = NULL,
  VpcIds = NULL,
  Force = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster to revoke access from.

Account

The Amazon Web Services account ID whose access is to be revoked.

VpcIds

The virtual private cloud (VPC) identifiers for which access is to be revoked.

Force

Indicates whether to force the revoke action. If true, the Redshift-managed VPC endpoints associated with the endpoint authorization are also deleted.


Removes the ability of the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot

Description

Removes the ability of the specified Amazon Web Services account to restore the specified snapshot. If the account is currently restoring the snapshot, the restore will run to completion.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_revoke_snapshot_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_revoke_snapshot_access(
  SnapshotIdentifier = NULL,
  SnapshotArn = NULL,
  SnapshotClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  AccountWithRestoreAccess
)

Arguments

SnapshotIdentifier

The identifier of the snapshot that the account can no longer access.

SnapshotArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot associated with the message to revoke access.

SnapshotClusterIdentifier

The identifier of the cluster the snapshot was created from. This parameter is required if your IAM user has a policy containing a snapshot resource element that specifies anything other than * for the cluster name.

AccountWithRestoreAccess

[required] The identifier of the Amazon Web Services account that can no longer restore the specified snapshot.


Rotates the encryption keys for a cluster

Description

Rotates the encryption keys for a cluster.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_rotate_encryption_key/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_rotate_encryption_key(ClusterIdentifier)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The unique identifier of the cluster that you want to rotate the encryption keys for.

Constraints: Must be the name of valid cluster that has encryption enabled.


Updates the status of a partner integration

Description

Updates the status of a partner integration.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshift_update_partner_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshift_update_partner_status(
  AccountId,
  ClusterIdentifier,
  DatabaseName,
  PartnerName,
  Status,
  StatusMessage = NULL
)

Arguments

AccountId

[required] The Amazon Web Services account ID that owns the cluster.

ClusterIdentifier

[required] The cluster identifier of the cluster whose partner integration status is being updated.

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the database whose partner integration status is being updated.

PartnerName

[required] The name of the partner whose integration status is being updated.

Status

[required] The value of the updated status.

StatusMessage

The status message provided by the partner.


Redshift Data API Service

Description

You can use the Amazon Redshift Data API to run queries on Amazon Redshift tables. You can run SQL statements, which are committed if the statement succeeds.

For more information about the Amazon Redshift Data API and CLI usage examples, see Using the Amazon Redshift Data API in the Amazon Redshift Management Guide.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- redshiftdataapiservice(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

batch_execute_statement Runs one or more SQL statements, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL)
cancel_statement Cancels a running query
describe_statement Describes the details about a specific instance when a query was run by the Amazon Redshift Data API
describe_table Describes the detailed information about a table from metadata in the cluster
execute_statement Runs an SQL statement, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL)
get_statement_result Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in JSON format
get_statement_result_v2 Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in CSV format
list_databases List the databases in a cluster
list_schemas Lists the schemas in a database
list_statements List of SQL statements
list_tables List the tables in a database

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- redshiftdataapiservice()
svc$batch_execute_statement(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Runs one or more SQL statements, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL)

Description

Runs one or more SQL statements, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL). Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_batch_execute_statement/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_batch_execute_statement(
  ClientToken = NULL,
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Database = NULL,
  DbUser = NULL,
  ResultFormat = NULL,
  SecretArn = NULL,
  SessionId = NULL,
  SessionKeepAliveSeconds = NULL,
  Sqls,
  StatementName = NULL,
  WithEvent = NULL,
  WorkgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientToken

A unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request.

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

Database

The name of the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

DbUser

The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials.

ResultFormat

The data format of the result of the SQL statement. If no format is specified, the default is JSON.

SecretArn

The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager.

SessionId

The session identifier of the query.

SessionKeepAliveSeconds

The number of seconds to keep the session alive after the query finishes. The maximum time a session can keep alive is 24 hours. After 24 hours, the session is forced closed and the query is terminated.

Sqls

[required] One or more SQL statements to run.

 The SQL statements are run as a single transaction. They run serially in the order of the array. Subsequent SQL statements don\'t start until the previous statement in the array completes. If any SQL statement fails, then because they are run as one transaction, all work is rolled back.</p>
StatementName

The name of the SQL statements. You can name the SQL statements when you create them to identify the query.

WithEvent

A value that indicates whether to send an event to the Amazon EventBridge event bus after the SQL statements run.

WorkgroupName

The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.


Cancels a running query

Description

Cancels a running query. To be canceled, a query must be running.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_cancel_statement/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_cancel_statement(Id)

Arguments

Id

[required] The identifier of the SQL statement to cancel. This value is a universally unique identifier (UUID) generated by Amazon Redshift Data API. This identifier is returned by BatchExecuteStatment, ExecuteStatment, and list_statements.


Describes the details about a specific instance when a query was run by the Amazon Redshift Data API

Description

Describes the details about a specific instance when a query was run by the Amazon Redshift Data API. The information includes when the query started, when it finished, the query status, the number of rows returned, and the SQL statement.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_describe_statement/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_describe_statement(Id)

Arguments

Id

[required] The identifier of the SQL statement to describe. This value is a universally unique identifier (UUID) generated by Amazon Redshift Data API. A suffix indicates the number of the SQL statement. For example, ⁠d9b6c0c9-0747-4bf4-b142-e8883122f766:2⁠ has a suffix of ⁠:2⁠ that indicates the second SQL statement of a batch query. This identifier is returned by BatchExecuteStatment, execute_statement, and list_statements.


Describes the detailed information about a table from metadata in the cluster

Description

Describes the detailed information about a table from metadata in the cluster. The information includes its columns. A token is returned to page through the column list. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_describe_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_describe_table(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ConnectedDatabase = NULL,
  Database,
  DbUser = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  Schema = NULL,
  SecretArn = NULL,
  Table = NULL,
  WorkgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

ConnectedDatabase

A database name. The connected database is specified when you connect with your authentication credentials.

Database

[required] The name of the database that contains the tables to be described. If ConnectedDatabase is not specified, this is also the database to connect to with your authentication credentials.

DbUser

The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials.

MaxResults

The maximum number of tables to return in the response. If more tables exist than fit in one response, then NextToken is returned to page through the results.

NextToken

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.

Schema

The schema that contains the table. If no schema is specified, then matching tables for all schemas are returned.

SecretArn

The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager.

Table

The table name. If no table is specified, then all tables for all matching schemas are returned. If no table and no schema is specified, then all tables for all schemas in the database are returned

WorkgroupName

The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.


Runs an SQL statement, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL)

Description

Runs an SQL statement, which can be data manipulation language (DML) or data definition language (DDL). This statement must be a single SQL statement. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_execute_statement/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_execute_statement(
  ClientToken = NULL,
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Database = NULL,
  DbUser = NULL,
  Parameters = NULL,
  ResultFormat = NULL,
  SecretArn = NULL,
  SessionId = NULL,
  SessionKeepAliveSeconds = NULL,
  Sql,
  StatementName = NULL,
  WithEvent = NULL,
  WorkgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientToken

A unique, case-sensitive identifier that you provide to ensure the idempotency of the request.

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

Database

The name of the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

DbUser

The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials.

Parameters

The parameters for the SQL statement.

ResultFormat

The data format of the result of the SQL statement. If no format is specified, the default is JSON.

SecretArn

The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager.

SessionId

The session identifier of the query.

SessionKeepAliveSeconds

The number of seconds to keep the session alive after the query finishes. The maximum time a session can keep alive is 24 hours. After 24 hours, the session is forced closed and the query is terminated.

Sql

[required] The SQL statement text to run.

StatementName

The name of the SQL statement. You can name the SQL statement when you create it to identify the query.

WithEvent

A value that indicates whether to send an event to the Amazon EventBridge event bus after the SQL statement runs.

WorkgroupName

The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.


Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in JSON format

Description

Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in JSON format. The execute_statement or batch_execute_statement operation that ran the SQL statement must have specified ResultFormat as JSON , or let the format default to JSON. A token is returned to page through the statement results.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_get_statement_result/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_get_statement_result(Id, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

Id

[required] The identifier of the SQL statement whose results are to be fetched. This value is a universally unique identifier (UUID) generated by Amazon Redshift Data API. A suffix indicates then number of the SQL statement. For example, ⁠d9b6c0c9-0747-4bf4-b142-e8883122f766:2⁠ has a suffix of ⁠:2⁠ that indicates the second SQL statement of a batch query. This identifier is returned by BatchExecuteStatment, ExecuteStatment, and list_statements.

NextToken

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.


Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in CSV format

Description

Fetches the temporarily cached result of an SQL statement in CSV format. The execute_statement or batch_execute_statement operation that ran the SQL statement must have specified ResultFormat as CSV. A token is returned to page through the statement results.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_get_statement_result_v2/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_get_statement_result_v2(Id, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

Id

[required] The identifier of the SQL statement whose results are to be fetched. This value is a universally unique identifier (UUID) generated by Amazon Redshift Data API. A suffix indicates then number of the SQL statement. For example, ⁠d9b6c0c9-0747-4bf4-b142-e8883122f766:2⁠ has a suffix of ⁠:2⁠ that indicates the second SQL statement of a batch query. This identifier is returned by BatchExecuteStatment, ExecuteStatment, and list_statements.

NextToken

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.


List the databases in a cluster

Description

List the databases in a cluster. A token is returned to page through the database list. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_list_databases/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_list_databases(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  Database,
  DbUser = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  SecretArn = NULL,
  WorkgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

Database

[required] The name of the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

DbUser

The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials.

MaxResults

The maximum number of databases to return in the response. If more databases exist than fit in one response, then NextToken is returned to page through the results.

NextToken

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.

SecretArn

The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager.

WorkgroupName

The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.


Lists the schemas in a database

Description

Lists the schemas in a database. A token is returned to page through the schema list. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_list_schemas/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_list_schemas(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ConnectedDatabase = NULL,
  Database,
  DbUser = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  SchemaPattern = NULL,
  SecretArn = NULL,
  WorkgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

ConnectedDatabase

A database name. The connected database is specified when you connect with your authentication credentials.

Database

[required] The name of the database that contains the schemas to list. If ConnectedDatabase is not specified, this is also the database to connect to with your authentication credentials.

DbUser

The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials.

MaxResults

The maximum number of schemas to return in the response. If more schemas exist than fit in one response, then NextToken is returned to page through the results.

NextToken

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.

SchemaPattern

A pattern to filter results by schema name. Within a schema pattern, "%" means match any substring of 0 or more characters and "_" means match any one character. Only schema name entries matching the search pattern are returned.

SecretArn

The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager.

WorkgroupName

The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.


List of SQL statements

Description

List of SQL statements. By default, only finished statements are shown. A token is returned to page through the statement list.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_list_statements/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_list_statements(
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  RoleLevel = NULL,
  StatementName = NULL,
  Status = NULL
)

Arguments

MaxResults

The maximum number of SQL statements to return in the response. If more SQL statements exist than fit in one response, then NextToken is returned to page through the results.

NextToken

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.

RoleLevel

A value that filters which statements to return in the response. If true, all statements run by the caller's IAM role are returned. If false, only statements run by the caller's IAM role in the current IAM session are returned. The default is true.

StatementName

The name of the SQL statement specified as input to batch_execute_statement or execute_statement to identify the query. You can list multiple statements by providing a prefix that matches the beginning of the statement name. For example, to list myStatement1, myStatement2, myStatement3, and so on, then provide the a value of myStatement. Data API does a case-sensitive match of SQL statement names to the prefix value you provide.

Status

The status of the SQL statement to list. Status values are defined as follows:

  • ABORTED - The query run was stopped by the user.

  • ALL - A status value that includes all query statuses. This value can be used to filter results.

  • FAILED - The query run failed.

  • FINISHED - The query has finished running.

  • PICKED - The query has been chosen to be run.

  • STARTED - The query run has started.

  • SUBMITTED - The query was submitted, but not yet processed.


List the tables in a database

Description

List the tables in a database. If neither SchemaPattern nor TablePattern are specified, then all tables in the database are returned. A token is returned to page through the table list. Depending on the authorization method, use one of the following combinations of request parameters:

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftdataapiservice_list_tables/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftdataapiservice_list_tables(
  ClusterIdentifier = NULL,
  ConnectedDatabase = NULL,
  Database,
  DbUser = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  SchemaPattern = NULL,
  SecretArn = NULL,
  TablePattern = NULL,
  WorkgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

ClusterIdentifier

The cluster identifier. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.

ConnectedDatabase

A database name. The connected database is specified when you connect with your authentication credentials.

Database

[required] The name of the database that contains the tables to list. If ConnectedDatabase is not specified, this is also the database to connect to with your authentication credentials.

DbUser

The database user name. This parameter is required when connecting to a cluster as a database user and authenticating using temporary credentials.

MaxResults

The maximum number of tables to return in the response. If more tables exist than fit in one response, then NextToken is returned to page through the results.

NextToken

A value that indicates the starting point for the next set of response records in a subsequent request. If a value is returned in a response, you can retrieve the next set of records by providing this returned NextToken value in the next NextToken parameter and retrying the command. If the NextToken field is empty, all response records have been retrieved for the request.

SchemaPattern

A pattern to filter results by schema name. Within a schema pattern, "%" means match any substring of 0 or more characters and "_" means match any one character. Only schema name entries matching the search pattern are returned. If SchemaPattern is not specified, then all tables that match TablePattern are returned. If neither SchemaPattern or TablePattern are specified, then all tables are returned.

SecretArn

The name or ARN of the secret that enables access to the database. This parameter is required when authenticating using Secrets Manager.

TablePattern

A pattern to filter results by table name. Within a table pattern, "%" means match any substring of 0 or more characters and "_" means match any one character. Only table name entries matching the search pattern are returned. If TablePattern is not specified, then all tables that match SchemaPatternare returned. If neither SchemaPattern or TablePattern are specified, then all tables are returned.

WorkgroupName

The serverless workgroup name or Amazon Resource Name (ARN). This parameter is required when connecting to a serverless workgroup and authenticating using either Secrets Manager or temporary credentials.


Redshift Serverless

Description

This is an interface reference for Amazon Redshift Serverless. It contains documentation for one of the programming or command line interfaces you can use to manage Amazon Redshift Serverless.

Amazon Redshift Serverless automatically provisions data warehouse capacity and intelligently scales the underlying resources based on workload demands. Amazon Redshift Serverless adjusts capacity in seconds to deliver consistently high performance and simplified operations for even the most demanding and volatile workloads. Amazon Redshift Serverless lets you focus on using your data to acquire new insights for your business and customers.

To learn more about Amazon Redshift Serverless, see What is Amazon Redshift Serverless?.

Usage

redshiftserverless(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- redshiftserverless(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

convert_recovery_point_to_snapshot Converts a recovery point to a snapshot
create_custom_domain_association Creates a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless
create_endpoint_access Creates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint
create_namespace Creates a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless
create_scheduled_action Creates a scheduled action
create_snapshot Creates a snapshot of all databases in a namespace
create_snapshot_copy_configuration Creates a snapshot copy configuration that lets you copy snapshots to another Amazon Web Services Region
create_usage_limit Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift Serverless usage type
create_workgroup Creates an workgroup in Amazon Redshift Serverless
delete_custom_domain_association Deletes a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless
delete_endpoint_access Deletes an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint
delete_namespace Deletes a namespace from Amazon Redshift Serverless
delete_resource_policy Deletes the specified resource policy
delete_scheduled_action Deletes a scheduled action
delete_snapshot Deletes a snapshot from Amazon Redshift Serverless
delete_snapshot_copy_configuration Deletes a snapshot copy configuration
delete_usage_limit Deletes a usage limit from Amazon Redshift Serverless
delete_workgroup Deletes a workgroup
get_credentials Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to Amazon Redshift Serverless
get_custom_domain_association Gets information about a specific custom domain association
get_endpoint_access Returns information, such as the name, about a VPC endpoint
get_namespace Returns information about a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless
get_recovery_point Returns information about a recovery point
get_resource_policy Returns a resource policy
get_scheduled_action Returns information about a scheduled action
get_snapshot Returns information about a specific snapshot
get_table_restore_status Returns information about a TableRestoreStatus object
get_usage_limit Returns information about a usage limit
get_workgroup Returns information about a specific workgroup
list_custom_domain_associations Lists custom domain associations for Amazon Redshift Serverless
list_endpoint_access Returns an array of EndpointAccess objects and relevant information
list_managed_workgroups Returns information about a list of specified managed workgroups in your account
list_namespaces Returns information about a list of specified namespaces
list_recovery_points Returns an array of recovery points
list_scheduled_actions Returns a list of scheduled actions
list_snapshot_copy_configurations Returns a list of snapshot copy configurations
list_snapshots Returns a list of snapshots
list_table_restore_status Returns information about an array of TableRestoreStatus objects
list_tags_for_resource Lists the tags assigned to a resource
list_usage_limits Lists all usage limits within Amazon Redshift Serverless
list_workgroups Returns information about a list of specified workgroups
put_resource_policy Creates or updates a resource policy
restore_from_recovery_point Restore the data from a recovery point
restore_from_snapshot Restores a namespace from a snapshot
restore_table_from_recovery_point Restores a table from a recovery point to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance
restore_table_from_snapshot Restores a table from a snapshot to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance
tag_resource Assigns one or more tags to a resource
untag_resource Removes a tag or set of tags from a resource
update_custom_domain_association Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless certificate associated with a custom domain
update_endpoint_access Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed endpoint
update_namespace Updates a namespace with the specified settings
update_scheduled_action Updates a scheduled action
update_snapshot Updates a snapshot
update_snapshot_copy_configuration Updates a snapshot copy configuration
update_usage_limit Update a usage limit in Amazon Redshift Serverless
update_workgroup Updates a workgroup with the specified configuration settings

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- redshiftserverless()
svc$convert_recovery_point_to_snapshot(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Converts a recovery point to a snapshot

Description

Converts a recovery point to a snapshot. For more information about recovery points and snapshots, see Working with snapshots and recovery points.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_convert_recovery_point_to_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_convert_recovery_point_to_snapshot(
  recoveryPointId,
  retentionPeriod = NULL,
  snapshotName,
  tags = NULL
)

Arguments

recoveryPointId

[required] The unique identifier of the recovery point.

retentionPeriod

How long to retain the snapshot.

snapshotName

[required] The name of the snapshot.

tags

An array of Tag objects to associate with the created snapshot.


Creates a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Creates a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_create_custom_domain_association(
  customDomainCertificateArn,
  customDomainName,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

customDomainCertificateArn

[required] The custom domain name’s certificate Amazon resource name (ARN).

customDomainName

[required] The custom domain name to associate with the workgroup.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup associated with the database.


Creates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint

Description

Creates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_create_endpoint_access(
  endpointName,
  ownerAccount = NULL,
  subnetIds,
  vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

endpointName

[required] The name of the VPC endpoint. An endpoint name must contain 1-30 characters. Valid characters are A-Z, a-z, 0-9, and hyphen(-). The first character must be a letter. The name can't contain two consecutive hyphens or end with a hyphen.

ownerAccount

The owner Amazon Web Services account for the Amazon Redshift Serverless workgroup.

subnetIds

[required] The unique identifers of subnets from which Amazon Redshift Serverless chooses one to deploy a VPC endpoint.

vpcSecurityGroupIds

The unique identifiers of the security group that defines the ports, protocols, and sources for inbound traffic that you are authorizing into your endpoint.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup to associate with the VPC endpoint.


Creates a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Creates a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_create_namespace(
  adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  adminUserPassword = NULL,
  adminUsername = NULL,
  dbName = NULL,
  defaultIamRoleArn = NULL,
  iamRoles = NULL,
  kmsKeyId = NULL,
  logExports = NULL,
  manageAdminPassword = NULL,
  namespaceName,
  redshiftIdcApplicationArn = NULL,
  tags = NULL
)

Arguments

adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId

The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store the namespace's admin credentials secret. You can only use this parameter if manageAdminPassword is true.

adminUserPassword

The password of the administrator for the first database created in the namespace.

You can't use adminUserPassword if manageAdminPassword is true.

adminUsername

The username of the administrator for the first database created in the namespace.

dbName

The name of the first database created in the namespace.

defaultIamRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to set as a default in the namespace.

iamRoles

A list of IAM roles to associate with the namespace.

kmsKeyId

The ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service key used to encrypt your data.

logExports

The types of logs the namespace can export. Available export types are userlog, connectionlog, and useractivitylog.

manageAdminPassword

If true, Amazon Redshift uses Secrets Manager to manage the namespace's admin credentials. You can't use adminUserPassword if manageAdminPassword is true. If manageAdminPassword is false or not set, Amazon Redshift uses adminUserPassword for the admin user account's password.

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace.

redshiftIdcApplicationArn

The ARN for the Redshift application that integrates with IAM Identity Center.

tags

A list of tag instances.


Creates a scheduled action

Description

Creates a scheduled action. A scheduled action contains a schedule and an Amazon Redshift API action. For example, you can create a schedule of when to run the create_snapshot API operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_create_scheduled_action(
  enabled = NULL,
  endTime = NULL,
  namespaceName,
  roleArn,
  schedule,
  scheduledActionDescription = NULL,
  scheduledActionName,
  startTime = NULL,
  targetAction
)

Arguments

enabled

Indicates whether the schedule is enabled. If false, the scheduled action does not trigger. For more information about state of the scheduled action, see ScheduledAction.

endTime

The end time in UTC when the schedule is no longer active. After this time, the scheduled action does not trigger.

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace for which to create a scheduled action.

roleArn

[required] The ARN of the IAM role to assume to run the scheduled action. This IAM role must have permission to run the Amazon Redshift Serverless API operation in the scheduled action. This IAM role must allow the Amazon Redshift scheduler to schedule creating snapshots. (Principal scheduler.redshift.amazonaws.com) to assume permissions on your behalf. For more information about the IAM role to use with the Amazon Redshift scheduler, see Using Identity-Based Policies for Amazon Redshift in the Amazon Redshift Management Guide

schedule

[required] The schedule for a one-time (at timestamp format) or recurring (cron format) scheduled action. Schedule invocations must be separated by at least one hour. Times are in UTC.

  • Format of at timestamp is yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss. For example, ⁠2016-03-04T17:27:00⁠.

  • Format of cron expression is ⁠(Minutes Hours Day-of-month Month Day-of-week Year)⁠. For example, "(0 10 ? * MON *)". For more information, see Cron Expressions in the Amazon CloudWatch Events User Guide.

scheduledActionDescription

The description of the scheduled action.

scheduledActionName

[required] The name of the scheduled action.

startTime

The start time in UTC when the schedule is active. Before this time, the scheduled action does not trigger.

targetAction

[required]


Creates a snapshot of all databases in a namespace

Description

Creates a snapshot of all databases in a namespace. For more information about snapshots, see Working with snapshots and recovery points.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_create_snapshot(
  namespaceName,
  retentionPeriod = NULL,
  snapshotName,
  tags = NULL
)

Arguments

namespaceName

[required] The namespace to create a snapshot for.

retentionPeriod

How long to retain the created snapshot.

snapshotName

[required] The name of the snapshot.

tags

An array of Tag objects to associate with the snapshot.


Creates a snapshot copy configuration that lets you copy snapshots to another Amazon Web Services Region

Description

Creates a snapshot copy configuration that lets you copy snapshots to another Amazon Web Services Region.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_snapshot_copy_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_create_snapshot_copy_configuration(
  destinationKmsKeyId = NULL,
  destinationRegion,
  namespaceName,
  snapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)

Arguments

destinationKmsKeyId

The KMS key to use to encrypt your snapshots in the destination Amazon Web Services Region.

destinationRegion

[required] The destination Amazon Web Services Region that you want to copy snapshots to.

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace to copy snapshots from.

snapshotRetentionPeriod

The retention period of the snapshots that you copy to the destination Amazon Web Services Region.


Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift Serverless usage type

Description

Creates a usage limit for a specified Amazon Redshift Serverless usage type. The usage limit is identified by the returned usage limit identifier.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_usage_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_create_usage_limit(
  amount,
  breachAction = NULL,
  period = NULL,
  resourceArn,
  usageType
)

Arguments

amount

[required] The limit amount. If time-based, this amount is in Redshift Processing Units (RPU) consumed per hour. If data-based, this amount is in terabytes (TB) of data transferred between Regions in cross-account sharing. The value must be a positive number.

breachAction

The action that Amazon Redshift Serverless takes when the limit is reached. The default is log.

period

The time period that the amount applies to. A weekly period begins on Sunday. The default is monthly.

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the Amazon Redshift Serverless resource to create the usage limit for.

usageType

[required] The type of Amazon Redshift Serverless usage to create a usage limit for.


Creates an workgroup in Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Creates an workgroup in Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_create_workgroup/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_create_workgroup(
  baseCapacity = NULL,
  configParameters = NULL,
  enhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
  ipAddressType = NULL,
  maxCapacity = NULL,
  namespaceName,
  port = NULL,
  pricePerformanceTarget = NULL,
  publiclyAccessible = NULL,
  securityGroupIds = NULL,
  subnetIds = NULL,
  tags = NULL,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

baseCapacity

The base data warehouse capacity of the workgroup in Redshift Processing Units (RPUs).

configParameters

An array of parameters to set for advanced control over a database. The options are auto_mv, datestyle, enable_case_sensitive_identifier, enable_user_activity_logging, query_group, search_path, require_ssl, use_fips_ssl, and query monitoring metrics that let you define performance boundaries. For more information about query monitoring rules and available metrics, see Query monitoring metrics for Amazon Redshift Serverless.

enhancedVpcRouting

The value that specifies whether to turn on enhanced virtual private cloud (VPC) routing, which forces Amazon Redshift Serverless to route traffic through your VPC instead of over the internet.

ipAddressType

The IP address type that the workgroup supports. Possible values are ipv4 and dualstack.

maxCapacity

The maximum data-warehouse capacity Amazon Redshift Serverless uses to serve queries. The max capacity is specified in RPUs.

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace to associate with the workgroup.

port

The custom port to use when connecting to a workgroup. Valid port ranges are 5431-5455 and 8191-8215. The default is 5439.

pricePerformanceTarget

An object that represents the price performance target settings for the workgroup.

publiclyAccessible

A value that specifies whether the workgroup can be accessed from a public network.

securityGroupIds

An array of security group IDs to associate with the workgroup.

subnetIds

An array of VPC subnet IDs to associate with the workgroup.

tags

A array of tag instances.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the created workgroup.


Deletes a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Deletes a custom domain association for Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_custom_domain_association(
  customDomainName,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

customDomainName

[required] The custom domain name associated with the workgroup.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup associated with the database.


Deletes an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint

Description

Deletes an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed VPC endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_endpoint_access(endpointName)

Arguments

endpointName

[required] The name of the VPC endpoint to delete.


Deletes a namespace from Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Deletes a namespace from Amazon Redshift Serverless. Before you delete the namespace, you can create a final snapshot that has all of the data within the namespace.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_namespace(
  finalSnapshotName = NULL,
  finalSnapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL,
  namespaceName
)

Arguments

finalSnapshotName

The name of the snapshot to be created before the namespace is deleted.

finalSnapshotRetentionPeriod

How long to retain the final snapshot.

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace to delete.


Deletes the specified resource policy

Description

Deletes the specified resource policy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_resource_policy(resourceArn)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the policy to delete.


Deletes a scheduled action

Description

Deletes a scheduled action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_scheduled_action(scheduledActionName)

Arguments

scheduledActionName

[required] The name of the scheduled action to delete.


Deletes a snapshot from Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Deletes a snapshot from Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_snapshot(snapshotName)

Arguments

snapshotName

[required] The name of the snapshot to be deleted.


Deletes a snapshot copy configuration

Description

Deletes a snapshot copy configuration

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_snapshot_copy_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_snapshot_copy_configuration(
  snapshotCopyConfigurationId
)

Arguments

snapshotCopyConfigurationId

[required] The ID of the snapshot copy configuration to delete.


Deletes a usage limit from Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Deletes a usage limit from Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_usage_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_usage_limit(usageLimitId)

Arguments

usageLimitId

[required] The unique identifier of the usage limit to delete.


Deletes a workgroup

Description

Deletes a workgroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_delete_workgroup/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_delete_workgroup(workgroupName)

Arguments

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup to be deleted.


Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Returns a database user name and temporary password with temporary authorization to log in to Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_credentials/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_credentials(
  customDomainName = NULL,
  dbName = NULL,
  durationSeconds = NULL,
  workgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

customDomainName

The custom domain name associated with the workgroup. The custom domain name or the workgroup name must be included in the request.

dbName

The name of the database to get temporary authorization to log on to.

Constraints:

  • Must be 1 to 64 alphanumeric characters or hyphens.

  • Must contain only uppercase or lowercase letters, numbers, underscore, plus sign, period (dot), at symbol (@), or hyphen.

  • The first character must be a letter.

  • Must not contain a colon ( : ) or slash ( / ).

  • Cannot be a reserved word. A list of reserved words can be found in Reserved Words in the Amazon Redshift Database Developer Guide

durationSeconds

The number of seconds until the returned temporary password expires. The minimum is 900 seconds, and the maximum is 3600 seconds.

workgroupName

The name of the workgroup associated with the database.


Gets information about a specific custom domain association

Description

Gets information about a specific custom domain association.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_custom_domain_association(
  customDomainName,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

customDomainName

[required] The custom domain name associated with the workgroup.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup associated with the database.


Returns information, such as the name, about a VPC endpoint

Description

Returns information, such as the name, about a VPC endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_endpoint_access(endpointName)

Arguments

endpointName

[required] The name of the VPC endpoint to return information for.


Returns information about a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Returns information about a namespace in Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_namespace(namespaceName)

Arguments

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace to retrieve information for.


Returns information about a recovery point

Description

Returns information about a recovery point.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_recovery_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_recovery_point(recoveryPointId)

Arguments

recoveryPointId

[required] The unique identifier of the recovery point to return information for.


Returns a resource policy

Description

Returns a resource policy.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_resource_policy(resourceArn)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to return.


Returns information about a scheduled action

Description

Returns information about a scheduled action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_scheduled_action(scheduledActionName)

Arguments

scheduledActionName

[required] The name of the scheduled action.


Returns information about a specific snapshot

Description

Returns information about a specific snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_snapshot(
  ownerAccount = NULL,
  snapshotArn = NULL,
  snapshotName = NULL
)

Arguments

ownerAccount

The owner Amazon Web Services account of a snapshot shared with another user.

snapshotArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot to return.

snapshotName

The name of the snapshot to return.


Returns information about a TableRestoreStatus object

Description

Returns information about a TableRestoreStatus object.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_table_restore_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_table_restore_status(tableRestoreRequestId)

Arguments

tableRestoreRequestId

[required] The ID of the restore_table_from_snapshot request to return status for.


Returns information about a usage limit

Description

Returns information about a usage limit.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_usage_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_usage_limit(usageLimitId)

Arguments

usageLimitId

[required] The unique identifier of the usage limit to return information for.


Returns information about a specific workgroup

Description

Returns information about a specific workgroup.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_get_workgroup/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_get_workgroup(workgroupName)

Arguments

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup to return information for.


Lists custom domain associations for Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Lists custom domain associations for Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_custom_domain_associations/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_custom_domain_associations(
  customDomainCertificateArn = NULL,
  customDomainName = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

customDomainCertificateArn

The custom domain name’s certificate Amazon resource name (ARN).

customDomainName

The custom domain name associated with the workgroup.

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

nextToken

When nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page.


Returns an array of EndpointAccess objects and relevant information

Description

Returns an array of EndpointAccess objects and relevant information.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_endpoint_access(
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  ownerAccount = NULL,
  vpcId = NULL,
  workgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

nextToken

If your initial list_endpoint_access operation returns a nextToken, you can include the returned nextToken in following list_endpoint_access operations, which returns results in the next page.

ownerAccount

The owner Amazon Web Services account for the Amazon Redshift Serverless workgroup.

vpcId

The unique identifier of the virtual private cloud with access to Amazon Redshift Serverless.

workgroupName

The name of the workgroup associated with the VPC endpoint to return.


Returns information about a list of specified managed workgroups in your account

Description

Returns information about a list of specified managed workgroups in your account.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_managed_workgroups/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_managed_workgroups(
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  sourceArn = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

nextToken

If your initial ListManagedWorkgroups operation returns a nextToken, you can include the returned nextToken in following ListManagedWorkgroups operations, which returns results in the next page.

sourceArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) for the managed workgroup in the AWS Glue Data Catalog.


Returns information about a list of specified namespaces

Description

Returns information about a list of specified namespaces.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_namespaces/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_namespaces(maxResults = NULL, nextToken = NULL)

Arguments

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

nextToken

If your initial list_namespaces operation returns a nextToken, you can include the returned nextToken in following list_namespaces operations, which returns results in the next page.


Returns an array of recovery points

Description

Returns an array of recovery points.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_recovery_points/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_recovery_points(
  endTime = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL,
  namespaceArn = NULL,
  namespaceName = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  startTime = NULL
)

Arguments

endTime

The time when creation of the recovery point finished.

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

namespaceArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the namespace from which to list recovery points.

namespaceName

The name of the namespace to list recovery points for.

nextToken

If your initial list_recovery_points operation returns a nextToken, you can include the returned nextToken in following list_recovery_points operations, which returns results in the next page.

startTime

The time when the recovery point's creation was initiated.


Returns a list of scheduled actions

Description

Returns a list of scheduled actions. You can use the flags to filter the list of returned scheduled actions.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_scheduled_actions/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_scheduled_actions(
  maxResults = NULL,
  namespaceName = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. Use nextToken to display the next page of results.

namespaceName

The name of namespace associated with the scheduled action to retrieve.

nextToken

If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page.


Returns a list of snapshot copy configurations

Description

Returns a list of snapshot copy configurations.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_snapshot_copy_configurations/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_snapshot_copy_configurations(
  maxResults = NULL,
  namespaceName = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

namespaceName

The namespace from which to list all snapshot copy configurations.

nextToken

If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page.


Returns a list of snapshots

Description

Returns a list of snapshots.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_snapshots/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_snapshots(
  endTime = NULL,
  maxResults = NULL,
  namespaceArn = NULL,
  namespaceName = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  ownerAccount = NULL,
  startTime = NULL
)

Arguments

endTime

The timestamp showing when the snapshot creation finished.

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

namespaceArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the namespace from which to list all snapshots.

namespaceName

The namespace from which to list all snapshots.

nextToken

If nextToken is returned, there are more results available. The value of nextToken is a unique pagination token for each page. Make the call again using the returned token to retrieve the next page.

ownerAccount

The owner Amazon Web Services account of the snapshot.

startTime

The time when the creation of the snapshot was initiated.


Returns information about an array of TableRestoreStatus objects

Description

Returns information about an array of TableRestoreStatus objects.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_table_restore_status/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_table_restore_status(
  maxResults = NULL,
  namespaceName = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  workgroupName = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

namespaceName

The namespace from which to list all of the statuses of restore_table_from_snapshot operations .

nextToken

If your initial list_table_restore_status operation returns a nextToken, you can include the returned nextToken in following list_table_restore_status operations. This will return results on the next page.

workgroupName

The workgroup from which to list all of the statuses of restore_table_from_snapshot operations.


Lists the tags assigned to a resource

Description

Lists the tags assigned to a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_tags_for_resource(resourceArn)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to list tags for.


Lists all usage limits within Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Lists all usage limits within Amazon Redshift Serverless.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_usage_limits/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_usage_limits(
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  resourceArn = NULL,
  usageType = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to get the next page of results. The default is 100.

nextToken

If your initial list_usage_limits operation returns a nextToken, you can include the returned nextToken in following list_usage_limits operations, which returns results in the next page.

resourceArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) associated with the resource whose usage limits you want to list.

usageType

The Amazon Redshift Serverless feature whose limits you want to see.


Returns information about a list of specified workgroups

Description

Returns information about a list of specified workgroups.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_list_workgroups/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_list_workgroups(
  maxResults = NULL,
  nextToken = NULL,
  ownerAccount = NULL
)

Arguments

maxResults

An optional parameter that specifies the maximum number of results to return. You can use nextToken to display the next page of results.

nextToken

If your initial ListWorkgroups operation returns a nextToken, you can include the returned nextToken in following ListNamespaces operations, which returns results in the next page.

ownerAccount

The owner Amazon Web Services account for the Amazon Redshift Serverless workgroup.


Creates or updates a resource policy

Description

Creates or updates a resource policy. Currently, you can use policies to share snapshots across Amazon Web Services accounts.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_put_resource_policy/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_put_resource_policy(policy, resourceArn)

Arguments

policy

[required] The policy to create or update. For example, the following policy grants a user authorization to restore a snapshot.

⁠"{\"Version\": \"2012-10-17\", \"Statement\" : [{ \"Sid\": \"AllowUserRestoreFromSnapshot\", \"Principal\":{\"AWS\": [\"739247239426\"]}, \"Action\": [\"redshift-serverless:RestoreFromSnapshot\"] , \"Effect\": \"Allow\" }]}"⁠

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the account to create or update a resource policy for.


Restore the data from a recovery point

Description

Restore the data from a recovery point.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_restore_from_recovery_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_restore_from_recovery_point(
  namespaceName,
  recoveryPointId,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace to restore data into.

recoveryPointId

[required] The unique identifier of the recovery point to restore from.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup used to restore data.


Restores a namespace from a snapshot

Description

Restores a namespace from a snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_restore_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_restore_from_snapshot(
  adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  manageAdminPassword = NULL,
  namespaceName,
  ownerAccount = NULL,
  snapshotArn = NULL,
  snapshotName = NULL,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId

The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store the namespace's admin credentials secret.

manageAdminPassword

If true, Amazon Redshift uses Secrets Manager to manage the restored snapshot's admin credentials. If MmanageAdminPassword is false or not set, Amazon Redshift uses the admin credentials that the namespace or cluster had at the time the snapshot was taken.

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace to restore the snapshot to.

ownerAccount

The Amazon Web Services account that owns the snapshot.

snapshotArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the snapshot to restore from. Required if restoring from Amazon Redshift Serverless to a provisioned cluster. Must not be specified at the same time as snapshotName.

The format of the ARN is arn:aws:redshift:\<region\>:\<account_id\>:snapshot:\<cluster_identifier\>/\<snapshot_identifier\>.

snapshotName

The name of the snapshot to restore from. Must not be specified at the same time as snapshotArn.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup used to restore the snapshot.


Restores a table from a recovery point to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance

Description

Restores a table from a recovery point to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance. You can't use this operation to restore tables with interleaved sort keys.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_restore_table_from_recovery_point/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_restore_table_from_recovery_point(
  activateCaseSensitiveIdentifier = NULL,
  namespaceName,
  newTableName,
  recoveryPointId,
  sourceDatabaseName,
  sourceSchemaName = NULL,
  sourceTableName,
  targetDatabaseName = NULL,
  targetSchemaName = NULL,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

activateCaseSensitiveIdentifier

Indicates whether name identifiers for database, schema, and table are case sensitive. If true, the names are case sensitive. If false, the names are not case sensitive. The default is false.

namespaceName

[required] Namespace of the recovery point to restore from.

newTableName

[required] The name of the table to create from the restore operation.

recoveryPointId

[required] The ID of the recovery point to restore the table from.

sourceDatabaseName

[required] The name of the source database that contains the table being restored.

sourceSchemaName

The name of the source schema that contains the table being restored.

sourceTableName

[required] The name of the source table being restored.

targetDatabaseName

The name of the database to restore the table to.

targetSchemaName

The name of the schema to restore the table to.

workgroupName

[required] The workgroup to restore the table to.


Restores a table from a snapshot to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance

Description

Restores a table from a snapshot to your Amazon Redshift Serverless instance. You can't use this operation to restore tables with interleaved sort keys.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_restore_table_from_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_restore_table_from_snapshot(
  activateCaseSensitiveIdentifier = NULL,
  namespaceName,
  newTableName,
  snapshotName,
  sourceDatabaseName,
  sourceSchemaName = NULL,
  sourceTableName,
  targetDatabaseName = NULL,
  targetSchemaName = NULL,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

activateCaseSensitiveIdentifier

Indicates whether name identifiers for database, schema, and table are case sensitive. If true, the names are case sensitive. If false, the names are not case sensitive. The default is false.

namespaceName

[required] The namespace of the snapshot to restore from.

newTableName

[required] The name of the table to create from the restore operation.

snapshotName

[required] The name of the snapshot to restore the table from.

sourceDatabaseName

[required] The name of the source database that contains the table being restored.

sourceSchemaName

The name of the source schema that contains the table being restored.

sourceTableName

[required] The name of the source table being restored.

targetDatabaseName

The name of the database to restore the table to.

targetSchemaName

The name of the schema to restore the table to.

workgroupName

[required] The workgroup to restore the table to.


Assigns one or more tags to a resource

Description

Assigns one or more tags to a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_tag_resource(resourceArn, tags)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to tag.

tags

[required] The map of the key-value pairs used to tag the resource.


Removes a tag or set of tags from a resource

Description

Removes a tag or set of tags from a resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_untag_resource(resourceArn, tagKeys)

Arguments

resourceArn

[required] The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the resource to remove tags from.

tagKeys

[required] The tag or set of tags to remove from the resource.


Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless certificate associated with a custom domain

Description

Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless certificate associated with a custom domain.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_custom_domain_association/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_update_custom_domain_association(
  customDomainCertificateArn,
  customDomainName,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

customDomainCertificateArn

[required] The custom domain name’s certificate Amazon resource name (ARN). This is optional.

customDomainName

[required] The custom domain name associated with the workgroup.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup associated with the database.


Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed endpoint

Description

Updates an Amazon Redshift Serverless managed endpoint.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_endpoint_access/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_update_endpoint_access(
  endpointName,
  vpcSecurityGroupIds = NULL
)

Arguments

endpointName

[required] The name of the VPC endpoint to update.

vpcSecurityGroupIds

The list of VPC security groups associated with the endpoint after the endpoint is modified.


Updates a namespace with the specified settings

Description

Updates a namespace with the specified settings. Unless required, you can't update multiple parameters in one request. For example, you must specify both adminUsername and adminUserPassword to update either field, but you can't update both kmsKeyId and logExports in a single request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_namespace/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_update_namespace(
  adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId = NULL,
  adminUserPassword = NULL,
  adminUsername = NULL,
  defaultIamRoleArn = NULL,
  iamRoles = NULL,
  kmsKeyId = NULL,
  logExports = NULL,
  manageAdminPassword = NULL,
  namespaceName
)

Arguments

adminPasswordSecretKmsKeyId

The ID of the Key Management Service (KMS) key used to encrypt and store the namespace's admin credentials secret. You can only use this parameter if manageAdminPassword is true.

adminUserPassword

The password of the administrator for the first database created in the namespace. This parameter must be updated together with adminUsername.

You can't use adminUserPassword if manageAdminPassword is true.

adminUsername

The username of the administrator for the first database created in the namespace. This parameter must be updated together with adminUserPassword.

defaultIamRoleArn

The Amazon Resource Name (ARN) of the IAM role to set as a default in the namespace. This parameter must be updated together with iamRoles.

iamRoles

A list of IAM roles to associate with the namespace. This parameter must be updated together with defaultIamRoleArn.

kmsKeyId

The ID of the Amazon Web Services Key Management Service key used to encrypt your data.

logExports

The types of logs the namespace can export. The export types are userlog, connectionlog, and useractivitylog.

manageAdminPassword

If true, Amazon Redshift uses Secrets Manager to manage the namespace's admin credentials. You can't use adminUserPassword if manageAdminPassword is true. If manageAdminPassword is false or not set, Amazon Redshift uses adminUserPassword for the admin user account's password.

namespaceName

[required] The name of the namespace to update. You can't update the name of a namespace once it is created.


Updates a scheduled action

Description

Updates a scheduled action.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_scheduled_action/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_update_scheduled_action(
  enabled = NULL,
  endTime = NULL,
  roleArn = NULL,
  schedule = NULL,
  scheduledActionDescription = NULL,
  scheduledActionName,
  startTime = NULL,
  targetAction = NULL
)

Arguments

enabled

Specifies whether to enable the scheduled action.

endTime

The end time in UTC of the scheduled action to update.

roleArn

The ARN of the IAM role to assume to run the scheduled action. This IAM role must have permission to run the Amazon Redshift Serverless API operation in the scheduled action. This IAM role must allow the Amazon Redshift scheduler to schedule creating snapshots (Principal scheduler.redshift.amazonaws.com) to assume permissions on your behalf. For more information about the IAM role to use with the Amazon Redshift scheduler, see Using Identity-Based Policies for Amazon Redshift in the Amazon Redshift Management Guide

schedule

The schedule for a one-time (at timestamp format) or recurring (cron format) scheduled action. Schedule invocations must be separated by at least one hour. Times are in UTC.

  • Format of at timestamp is yyyy-mm-ddThh:mm:ss. For example, ⁠2016-03-04T17:27:00⁠.

  • Format of cron expression is ⁠(Minutes Hours Day-of-month Month Day-of-week Year)⁠. For example, "(0 10 ? * MON *)". For more information, see Cron Expressions in the Amazon CloudWatch Events User Guide.

scheduledActionDescription

The descripion of the scheduled action to update to.

scheduledActionName

[required] The name of the scheduled action to update to.

startTime

The start time in UTC of the scheduled action to update to.

targetAction

Updates a snapshot

Description

Updates a snapshot.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_snapshot/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_update_snapshot(retentionPeriod = NULL, snapshotName)

Arguments

retentionPeriod

The new retention period of the snapshot.

snapshotName

[required] The name of the snapshot.


Updates a snapshot copy configuration

Description

Updates a snapshot copy configuration.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_snapshot_copy_configuration/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_update_snapshot_copy_configuration(
  snapshotCopyConfigurationId,
  snapshotRetentionPeriod = NULL
)

Arguments

snapshotCopyConfigurationId

[required] The ID of the snapshot copy configuration to update.

snapshotRetentionPeriod

The new retention period of how long to keep a snapshot in the destination Amazon Web Services Region.


Update a usage limit in Amazon Redshift Serverless

Description

Update a usage limit in Amazon Redshift Serverless. You can't update the usage type or period of a usage limit.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_usage_limit/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_update_usage_limit(
  amount = NULL,
  breachAction = NULL,
  usageLimitId
)

Arguments

amount

The new limit amount. If time-based, this amount is in Redshift Processing Units (RPU) consumed per hour. If data-based, this amount is in terabytes (TB) of data transferred between Regions in cross-account sharing. The value must be a positive number.

breachAction

The new action that Amazon Redshift Serverless takes when the limit is reached.

usageLimitId

[required] The identifier of the usage limit to update.


Updates a workgroup with the specified configuration settings

Description

Updates a workgroup with the specified configuration settings. You can't update multiple parameters in one request. For example, you can update baseCapacity or port in a single request, but you can't update both in the same request.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/redshiftserverless_update_workgroup/ for full documentation.

Usage

redshiftserverless_update_workgroup(
  baseCapacity = NULL,
  configParameters = NULL,
  enhancedVpcRouting = NULL,
  ipAddressType = NULL,
  maxCapacity = NULL,
  port = NULL,
  pricePerformanceTarget = NULL,
  publiclyAccessible = NULL,
  securityGroupIds = NULL,
  subnetIds = NULL,
  workgroupName
)

Arguments

baseCapacity

The new base data warehouse capacity in Redshift Processing Units (RPUs).

configParameters

An array of parameters to set for advanced control over a database. The options are auto_mv, datestyle, enable_case_sensitive_identifier, enable_user_activity_logging, query_group, search_path, require_ssl, use_fips_ssl, and query monitoring metrics that let you define performance boundaries. For more information about query monitoring rules and available metrics, see Query monitoring metrics for Amazon Redshift Serverless.

enhancedVpcRouting

The value that specifies whether to turn on enhanced virtual private cloud (VPC) routing, which forces Amazon Redshift Serverless to route traffic through your VPC.

ipAddressType

The IP address type that the workgroup supports. Possible values are ipv4 and dualstack.

maxCapacity

The maximum data-warehouse capacity Amazon Redshift Serverless uses to serve queries. The max capacity is specified in RPUs.

port

The custom port to use when connecting to a workgroup. Valid port ranges are 5431-5455 and 8191-8215. The default is 5439.

pricePerformanceTarget

An object that represents the price performance target settings for the workgroup.

publiclyAccessible

A value that specifies whether the workgroup can be accessible from a public network.

securityGroupIds

An array of security group IDs to associate with the workgroup.

subnetIds

An array of VPC subnet IDs to associate with the workgroup.

workgroupName

[required] The name of the workgroup to update. You can't update the name of a workgroup once it is created.


Objects exported from other packages

Description

These objects are imported from other packages. Follow the links below to see their documentation.

paws.common

config, credentials, creds, list_paginators, paginate, paginate_lapply, paginate_sapply, paws_stream_parser


Amazon SimpleDB

Description

Amazon SimpleDB is a web service providing the core database functions of data indexing and querying in the cloud. By offloading the time and effort associated with building and operating a web-scale database, SimpleDB provides developers the freedom to focus on application development.

A traditional, clustered relational database requires a sizable upfront capital outlay, is complex to design, and often requires extensive and repetitive database administration. Amazon SimpleDB is dramatically simpler, requiring no schema, automatically indexing your data and providing a simple API for storage and access. This approach eliminates the administrative burden of data modeling, index maintenance, and performance tuning. Developers gain access to this functionality within Amazon's proven computing environment, are able to scale instantly, and pay only for what they use.

Visit http://aws.amazon.com/simpledb/ for more information.

Usage

simpledb(config = list(), credentials = list(), endpoint = NULL, region = NULL)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- simpledb(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

batch_delete_attributes Performs multiple DeleteAttributes operations in a single call, which reduces round trips and latencies
batch_put_attributes The BatchPutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes within one or more items
create_domain The CreateDomain operation creates a new domain
delete_attributes Deletes one or more attributes associated with an item
delete_domain The DeleteDomain operation deletes a domain
domain_metadata Returns information about the domain, including when the domain was created, the number of items and attributes in the domain, and the size of the attribute names and values
get_attributes Returns all of the attributes associated with the specified item
list_domains The ListDomains operation lists all domains associated with the Access Key ID
put_attributes The PutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes in an item
select The Select operation returns a set of attributes for ItemNames that match the select expression

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- simpledb()
svc$batch_delete_attributes(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Performs multiple DeleteAttributes operations in a single call, which reduces round trips and latencies

Description

Performs multiple DeleteAttributes operations in a single call, which reduces round trips and latencies. This enables Amazon SimpleDB to optimize requests, which generally yields better throughput.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_batch_delete_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_batch_delete_attributes(DomainName, Items)

Arguments

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain in which the attributes are being deleted.

Items

[required] A list of items on which to perform the operation.


The BatchPutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes within one or more items

Description

The batch_put_attributes operation creates or replaces attributes within one or more items. By using this operation, the client can perform multiple PutAttribute operation with a single call. This helps yield savings in round trips and latencies, enabling Amazon SimpleDB to optimize requests and generally produce better throughput.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_batch_put_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_batch_put_attributes(DomainName, Items)

Arguments

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain in which the attributes are being stored.

Items

[required] A list of items on which to perform the operation.


The CreateDomain operation creates a new domain

Description

The create_domain operation creates a new domain. The domain name should be unique among the domains associated with the Access Key ID provided in the request. The create_domain operation may take 10 or more seconds to complete.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_create_domain/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_create_domain(DomainName)

Arguments

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain to create. The name can range between 3 and 255 characters and can contain the following characters: a-z, A-Z, 0-9, '_', '-', and '.'.


Deletes one or more attributes associated with an item

Description

Deletes one or more attributes associated with an item. If all attributes of the item are deleted, the item is deleted.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_delete_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_delete_attributes(
  DomainName,
  ItemName,
  Attributes = NULL,
  Expected = NULL
)

Arguments

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain in which to perform the operation.

ItemName

[required] The name of the item. Similar to rows on a spreadsheet, items represent individual objects that contain one or more value-attribute pairs.

Attributes

A list of Attributes. Similar to columns on a spreadsheet, attributes represent categories of data that can be assigned to items.

Expected

The update condition which, if specified, determines whether the specified attributes will be deleted or not. The update condition must be satisfied in order for this request to be processed and the attributes to be deleted.


The DeleteDomain operation deletes a domain

Description

The delete_domain operation deletes a domain. Any items (and their attributes) in the domain are deleted as well. The delete_domain operation might take 10 or more seconds to complete.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_delete_domain/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_delete_domain(DomainName)

Arguments

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain to delete.


Returns information about the domain, including when the domain was created, the number of items and attributes in the domain, and the size of the attribute names and values

Description

Returns information about the domain, including when the domain was created, the number of items and attributes in the domain, and the size of the attribute names and values.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_domain_metadata/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_domain_metadata(DomainName)

Arguments

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain for which to display the metadata of.


Returns all of the attributes associated with the specified item

Description

Returns all of the attributes associated with the specified item. Optionally, the attributes returned can be limited to one or more attributes by specifying an attribute name parameter.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_get_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_get_attributes(
  DomainName,
  ItemName,
  AttributeNames = NULL,
  ConsistentRead = NULL
)

Arguments

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain in which to perform the operation.

ItemName

[required] The name of the item.

AttributeNames

The names of the attributes.

ConsistentRead

Determines whether or not strong consistency should be enforced when data is read from SimpleDB. If true, any data previously written to SimpleDB will be returned. Otherwise, results will be consistent eventually, and the client may not see data that was written immediately before your read.


The ListDomains operation lists all domains associated with the Access Key ID

Description

The list_domains operation lists all domains associated with the Access Key ID. It returns domain names up to the limit set by MaxNumberOfDomains. A NextToken is returned if there are more than MaxNumberOfDomains domains. Calling list_domains successive times with the NextToken provided by the operation returns up to MaxNumberOfDomains more domain names with each successive operation call.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_list_domains/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_list_domains(MaxNumberOfDomains = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

MaxNumberOfDomains

The maximum number of domain names you want returned. The range is 1 to 100. The default setting is 100.

NextToken

A string informing Amazon SimpleDB where to start the next list of domain names.


The PutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes in an item

Description

The PutAttributes operation creates or replaces attributes in an item. The client may specify new attributes using a combination of the Attribute.X.Name and Attribute.X.Value parameters. The client specifies the first attribute by the parameters Attribute.0.Name and Attribute.0.Value, the second attribute by the parameters Attribute.1.Name and Attribute.1.Value, and so on.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_put_attributes/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_put_attributes(DomainName, ItemName, Attributes, Expected = NULL)

Arguments

DomainName

[required] The name of the domain in which to perform the operation.

ItemName

[required] The name of the item.

Attributes

[required] The list of attributes.

Expected

The update condition which, if specified, determines whether the specified attributes will be updated or not. The update condition must be satisfied in order for this request to be processed and the attributes to be updated.


The Select operation returns a set of attributes for ItemNames that match the select expression

Description

The select operation returns a set of attributes for ItemNames that match the select expression. select is similar to the standard SQL SELECT statement.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/simpledb_select/ for full documentation.

Usage

simpledb_select(SelectExpression, NextToken = NULL, ConsistentRead = NULL)

Arguments

SelectExpression

[required] The expression used to query the domain.

NextToken

A string informing Amazon SimpleDB where to start the next list of ItemNames.

ConsistentRead

Determines whether or not strong consistency should be enforced when data is read from SimpleDB. If true, any data previously written to SimpleDB will be returned. Otherwise, results will be consistent eventually, and the client may not see data that was written immediately before your read.


Amazon Timestream Query

Description

Amazon Timestream Query

Usage

timestreamquery(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- timestreamquery(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

cancel_query Cancels a query that has been issued
create_scheduled_query Create a scheduled query that will be run on your behalf at the configured schedule
delete_scheduled_query Deletes a given scheduled query
describe_account_settings Describes the settings for your account that include the query pricing model and the configured maximum TCUs the service can use for your query workload
describe_endpoints DescribeEndpoints returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against
describe_scheduled_query Provides detailed information about a scheduled query
execute_scheduled_query You can use this API to run a scheduled query manually
list_scheduled_queries Gets a list of all scheduled queries in the caller's Amazon account and Region
list_tags_for_resource List all tags on a Timestream query resource
prepare_query A synchronous operation that allows you to submit a query with parameters to be stored by Timestream for later running
query Query is a synchronous operation that enables you to run a query against your Amazon Timestream data
tag_resource Associate a set of tags with a Timestream resource
untag_resource Removes the association of tags from a Timestream query resource
update_account_settings Transitions your account to use TCUs for query pricing and modifies the maximum query compute units that you've configured
update_scheduled_query Update a scheduled query

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- timestreamquery()
svc$cancel_query(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Cancels a query that has been issued

Description

Cancels a query that has been issued. Cancellation is provided only if the query has not completed running before the cancellation request was issued. Because cancellation is an idempotent operation, subsequent cancellation requests will return a CancellationMessage, indicating that the query has already been canceled. See code sample for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_cancel_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_cancel_query(QueryId)

Arguments

QueryId

[required] The ID of the query that needs to be cancelled. QueryID is returned as part of the query result.


Create a scheduled query that will be run on your behalf at the configured schedule

Description

Create a scheduled query that will be run on your behalf at the configured schedule. Timestream assumes the execution role provided as part of the ScheduledQueryExecutionRoleArn parameter to run the query. You can use the NotificationConfiguration parameter to configure notification for your scheduled query operations.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_create_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_create_scheduled_query(
  Name,
  QueryString,
  ScheduleConfiguration,
  NotificationConfiguration,
  TargetConfiguration = NULL,
  ClientToken = NULL,
  ScheduledQueryExecutionRoleArn,
  Tags = NULL,
  KmsKeyId = NULL,
  ErrorReportConfiguration
)

Arguments

Name

[required] Name of the scheduled query.

QueryString

[required] The query string to run. Parameter names can be specified in the query string @ character followed by an identifier. The named Parameter ⁠@scheduled_runtime⁠ is reserved and can be used in the query to get the time at which the query is scheduled to run.

The timestamp calculated according to the ScheduleConfiguration parameter, will be the value of ⁠@scheduled_runtime⁠ paramater for each query run. For example, consider an instance of a scheduled query executing on 2021-12-01 00:00:00. For this instance, the ⁠@scheduled_runtime⁠ parameter is initialized to the timestamp 2021-12-01 00:00:00 when invoking the query.

ScheduleConfiguration

[required] The schedule configuration for the query.

NotificationConfiguration

[required] Notification configuration for the scheduled query. A notification is sent by Timestream when a query run finishes, when the state is updated or when you delete it.

TargetConfiguration

Configuration used for writing the result of a query.

ClientToken

Using a ClientToken makes the call to CreateScheduledQuery idempotent, in other words, making the same request repeatedly will produce the same result. Making multiple identical CreateScheduledQuery requests has the same effect as making a single request.

  • If CreateScheduledQuery is called without a ClientToken, the Query SDK generates a ClientToken on your behalf.

  • After 8 hours, any request with the same ClientToken is treated as a new request.

ScheduledQueryExecutionRoleArn

[required] The ARN for the IAM role that Timestream will assume when running the scheduled query.

Tags

A list of key-value pairs to label the scheduled query.

KmsKeyId

The Amazon KMS key used to encrypt the scheduled query resource, at-rest. If the Amazon KMS key is not specified, the scheduled query resource will be encrypted with a Timestream owned Amazon KMS key. To specify a KMS key, use the key ID, key ARN, alias name, or alias ARN. When using an alias name, prefix the name with alias/

If ErrorReportConfiguration uses SSE_KMS as encryption type, the same KmsKeyId is used to encrypt the error report at rest.

ErrorReportConfiguration

[required] Configuration for error reporting. Error reports will be generated when a problem is encountered when writing the query results.


Deletes a given scheduled query

Description

Deletes a given scheduled query. This is an irreversible operation.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_delete_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_delete_scheduled_query(ScheduledQueryArn)

Arguments

ScheduledQueryArn

[required] The ARN of the scheduled query.


Describes the settings for your account that include the query pricing model and the configured maximum TCUs the service can use for your query workload

Description

Describes the settings for your account that include the query pricing model and the configured maximum TCUs the service can use for your query workload.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_describe_account_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_describe_account_settings()

DescribeEndpoints returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against

Description

DescribeEndpoints returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against. This API is available through both Write and Query.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_describe_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_describe_endpoints()

Provides detailed information about a scheduled query

Description

Provides detailed information about a scheduled query.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_describe_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_describe_scheduled_query(ScheduledQueryArn)

Arguments

ScheduledQueryArn

[required] The ARN of the scheduled query.


You can use this API to run a scheduled query manually

Description

You can use this API to run a scheduled query manually.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_execute_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_execute_scheduled_query(
  ScheduledQueryArn,
  InvocationTime,
  ClientToken = NULL,
  QueryInsights = NULL
)

Arguments

ScheduledQueryArn

[required] ARN of the scheduled query.

InvocationTime

[required] The timestamp in UTC. Query will be run as if it was invoked at this timestamp.

ClientToken

Not used.

QueryInsights

Encapsulates settings for enabling QueryInsights.

Enabling QueryInsights returns insights and metrics as a part of the Amazon SNS notification for the query that you executed. You can use QueryInsights to tune your query performance and cost.


Gets a list of all scheduled queries in the caller's Amazon account and Region

Description

Gets a list of all scheduled queries in the caller's Amazon account and Region. list_scheduled_queries is eventually consistent.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_list_scheduled_queries/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_list_scheduled_queries(MaxResults = NULL, NextToken = NULL)

Arguments

MaxResults

The maximum number of items to return in the output. If the total number of items available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as the argument to the subsequent call to ListScheduledQueriesRequest.

NextToken

A pagination token to resume pagination.


List all tags on a Timestream query resource

Description

List all tags on a Timestream query resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_list_tags_for_resource(
  ResourceARN,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL
)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The Timestream resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

MaxResults

The maximum number of tags to return.

NextToken

A pagination token to resume pagination.


A synchronous operation that allows you to submit a query with parameters to be stored by Timestream for later running

Description

A synchronous operation that allows you to submit a query with parameters to be stored by Timestream for later running. Timestream only supports using this operation with ValidateOnly set to true.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_prepare_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_prepare_query(QueryString, ValidateOnly = NULL)

Arguments

QueryString

[required] The Timestream query string that you want to use as a prepared statement. Parameter names can be specified in the query string @ character followed by an identifier.

ValidateOnly

By setting this value to true, Timestream will only validate that the query string is a valid Timestream query, and not store the prepared query for later use.


Query is a synchronous operation that enables you to run a query against your Amazon Timestream data

Description

query is a synchronous operation that enables you to run a query against your Amazon Timestream data.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_query(
  QueryString,
  ClientToken = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxRows = NULL,
  QueryInsights = NULL
)

Arguments

QueryString

[required] The query to be run by Timestream.

ClientToken

Unique, case-sensitive string of up to 64 ASCII characters specified when a query request is made. Providing a ClientToken makes the call to query idempotent. This means that running the same query repeatedly will produce the same result. In other words, making multiple identical query requests has the same effect as making a single request. When using ClientToken in a query, note the following:

  • If the Query API is instantiated without a ClientToken, the Query SDK generates a ClientToken on your behalf.

  • If the query invocation only contains the ClientToken but does not include a NextToken, that invocation of query is assumed to be a new query run.

  • If the invocation contains NextToken, that particular invocation is assumed to be a subsequent invocation of a prior call to the Query API, and a result set is returned.

  • After 4 hours, any request with the same ClientToken is treated as a new request.

NextToken

A pagination token used to return a set of results. When the query API is invoked using NextToken, that particular invocation is assumed to be a subsequent invocation of a prior call to query, and a result set is returned. However, if the query invocation only contains the ClientToken, that invocation of query is assumed to be a new query run.

Note the following when using NextToken in a query:

  • A pagination token can be used for up to five query invocations, OR for a duration of up to 1 hour – whichever comes first.

  • Using the same NextToken will return the same set of records. To keep paginating through the result set, you must to use the most recent nextToken.

  • Suppose a query invocation returns two NextToken values, TokenA and TokenB. If TokenB is used in a subsequent query invocation, then TokenA is invalidated and cannot be reused.

  • To request a previous result set from a query after pagination has begun, you must re-invoke the Query API.

  • The latest NextToken should be used to paginate until null is returned, at which point a new NextToken should be used.

  • If the IAM principal of the query initiator and the result reader are not the same and/or the query initiator and the result reader do not have the same query string in the query requests, the query will fail with an ⁠Invalid pagination token⁠ error.

MaxRows

The total number of rows to be returned in the query output. The initial run of query with a MaxRows value specified will return the result set of the query in two cases:

  • The size of the result is less than ⁠1MB⁠.

  • The number of rows in the result set is less than the value of maxRows.

Otherwise, the initial invocation of query only returns a NextToken, which can then be used in subsequent calls to fetch the result set. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value in the subsequent command.

If the row size is large (e.g. a row has many columns), Timestream may return fewer rows to keep the response size from exceeding the 1 MB limit. If MaxRows is not provided, Timestream will send the necessary number of rows to meet the 1 MB limit.

QueryInsights

Encapsulates settings for enabling QueryInsights.

Enabling QueryInsights returns insights and metrics in addition to query results for the query that you executed. You can use QueryInsights to tune your query performance.


Associate a set of tags with a Timestream resource

Description

Associate a set of tags with a Timestream resource. You can then activate these user-defined tags so that they appear on the Billing and Cost Management console for cost allocation tracking.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] Identifies the Timestream resource to which tags should be added. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Tags

[required] The tags to be assigned to the Timestream resource.


Removes the association of tags from a Timestream query resource

Description

Removes the association of tags from a Timestream query resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The Timestream resource that the tags will be removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

TagKeys

[required] A list of tags keys. Existing tags of the resource whose keys are members of this list will be removed from the Timestream resource.


Transitions your account to use TCUs for query pricing and modifies the maximum query compute units that you've configured

Description

Transitions your account to use TCUs for query pricing and modifies the maximum query compute units that you've configured. If you reduce the value of MaxQueryTCU to a desired configuration, the new value can take up to 24 hours to be effective.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_update_account_settings/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_update_account_settings(
  MaxQueryTCU = NULL,
  QueryPricingModel = NULL,
  QueryCompute = NULL
)

Arguments

MaxQueryTCU

The maximum number of compute units the service will use at any point in time to serve your queries. To run queries, you must set a minimum capacity of 4 TCU. You can set the maximum number of TCU in multiples of 4, for example, 4, 8, 16, 32, and so on. The maximum value supported for MaxQueryTCU is 1000. To request an increase to this soft limit, contact Amazon Web Services Support. For information about the default quota for maxQueryTCU, see Default quotas. This configuration is applicable only for on-demand usage of Timestream Compute Units (TCUs).

The maximum value supported for MaxQueryTCU is 1000. To request an increase to this soft limit, contact Amazon Web Services Support. For information about the default quota for maxQueryTCU, see Default quotas.

QueryPricingModel

The pricing model for queries in an account.

The QueryPricingModel parameter is used by several Timestream operations; however, the update_account_settings API operation doesn't recognize any values other than COMPUTE_UNITS.

QueryCompute

Modifies the query compute settings configured in your account, including the query pricing model and provisioned Timestream Compute Units (TCUs) in your account.

This API is idempotent, meaning that making the same request multiple times will have the same effect as making the request once.


Update a scheduled query

Description

Update a scheduled query.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamquery_update_scheduled_query/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamquery_update_scheduled_query(ScheduledQueryArn, State)

Arguments

ScheduledQueryArn

[required] ARN of the scheuled query.

State

[required] State of the scheduled query.


Amazon Timestream Write

Description

Amazon Timestream is a fast, scalable, fully managed time-series database service that makes it easy to store and analyze trillions of time-series data points per day. With Timestream, you can easily store and analyze IoT sensor data to derive insights from your IoT applications. You can analyze industrial telemetry to streamline equipment management and maintenance. You can also store and analyze log data and metrics to improve the performance and availability of your applications.

Timestream is built from the ground up to effectively ingest, process, and store time-series data. It organizes data to optimize query processing. It automatically scales based on the volume of data ingested and on the query volume to ensure you receive optimal performance while inserting and querying data. As your data grows over time, Timestream’s adaptive query processing engine spans across storage tiers to provide fast analysis while reducing costs.

Usage

timestreamwrite(
  config = list(),
  credentials = list(),
  endpoint = NULL,
  region = NULL
)

Arguments

config

Optional configuration of credentials, endpoint, and/or region.

  • credentials:

    • creds:

      • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

      • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

      • session_token: AWS temporary session token

    • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

    • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

  • endpoint: The complete URL to use for the constructed client.

  • region: The AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

  • close_connection: Immediately close all HTTP connections.

  • timeout: The time in seconds till a timeout exception is thrown when attempting to make a connection. The default is 60 seconds.

  • s3_force_path_style: Set this to true to force the request to use path-style addressing, i.e. ⁠http://s3.amazonaws.com/BUCKET/KEY⁠.

  • sts_regional_endpoint: Set sts regional endpoint resolver to regional or legacy https://docs.aws.amazon.com/sdkref/latest/guide/feature-sts-regionalized-endpoints.html

credentials

Optional credentials shorthand for the config parameter

  • creds:

    • access_key_id: AWS access key ID

    • secret_access_key: AWS secret access key

    • session_token: AWS temporary session token

  • profile: The name of a profile to use. If not given, then the default profile is used.

  • anonymous: Set anonymous credentials.

endpoint

Optional shorthand for complete URL to use for the constructed client.

region

Optional shorthand for AWS Region used in instantiating the client.

Value

A client for the service. You can call the service's operations using syntax like svc$operation(...), where svc is the name you've assigned to the client. The available operations are listed in the Operations section.

Service syntax

svc <- timestreamwrite(
  config = list(
    credentials = list(
      creds = list(
        access_key_id = "string",
        secret_access_key = "string",
        session_token = "string"
      ),
      profile = "string",
      anonymous = "logical"
    ),
    endpoint = "string",
    region = "string",
    close_connection = "logical",
    timeout = "numeric",
    s3_force_path_style = "logical",
    sts_regional_endpoint = "string"
  ),
  credentials = list(
    creds = list(
      access_key_id = "string",
      secret_access_key = "string",
      session_token = "string"
    ),
    profile = "string",
    anonymous = "logical"
  ),
  endpoint = "string",
  region = "string"
)

Operations

create_batch_load_task Creates a new Timestream batch load task
create_database Creates a new Timestream database
create_table Adds a new table to an existing database in your account
delete_database Deletes a given Timestream database
delete_table Deletes a given Timestream table
describe_batch_load_task Returns information about the batch load task, including configurations, mappings, progress, and other details
describe_database Returns information about the database, including the database name, time that the database was created, and the total number of tables found within the database
describe_endpoints Returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against
describe_table Returns information about the table, including the table name, database name, retention duration of the memory store and the magnetic store
list_batch_load_tasks Provides a list of batch load tasks, along with the name, status, when the task is resumable until, and other details
list_databases Returns a list of your Timestream databases
list_tables Provides a list of tables, along with the name, status, and retention properties of each table
list_tags_for_resource Lists all tags on a Timestream resource
resume_batch_load_task Resume batch load task
tag_resource Associates a set of tags with a Timestream resource
untag_resource Removes the association of tags from a Timestream resource
update_database Modifies the KMS key for an existing database
update_table Modifies the retention duration of the memory store and magnetic store for your Timestream table
write_records Enables you to write your time-series data into Timestream

Examples

## Not run: 
svc <- timestreamwrite()
svc$create_batch_load_task(
  Foo = 123
)

## End(Not run)


Creates a new Timestream batch load task

Description

Creates a new Timestream batch load task. A batch load task processes data from a CSV source in an S3 location and writes to a Timestream table. A mapping from source to target is defined in a batch load task. Errors and events are written to a report at an S3 location. For the report, if the KMS key is not specified, the report will be encrypted with an S3 managed key when SSE_S3 is the option. Otherwise an error is thrown. For more information, see Amazon Web Services managed keys. Service quotas apply. For details, see code sample.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_create_batch_load_task/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_create_batch_load_task(
  ClientToken = NULL,
  DataModelConfiguration = NULL,
  DataSourceConfiguration,
  ReportConfiguration,
  TargetDatabaseName,
  TargetTableName,
  RecordVersion = NULL
)

Arguments

ClientToken
DataModelConfiguration
DataSourceConfiguration

[required] Defines configuration details about the data source for a batch load task.

ReportConfiguration

[required]

TargetDatabaseName

[required] Target Timestream database for a batch load task.

TargetTableName

[required] Target Timestream table for a batch load task.

RecordVersion

Creates a new Timestream database

Description

Creates a new Timestream database. If the KMS key is not specified, the database will be encrypted with a Timestream managed KMS key located in your account. For more information, see Amazon Web Services managed keys. Service quotas apply. For details, see code sample.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_create_database/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_create_database(DatabaseName, KmsKeyId = NULL, Tags = NULL)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the Timestream database.

KmsKeyId

The KMS key for the database. If the KMS key is not specified, the database will be encrypted with a Timestream managed KMS key located in your account. For more information, see Amazon Web Services managed keys.

Tags

A list of key-value pairs to label the table.


Adds a new table to an existing database in your account

Description

Adds a new table to an existing database in your account. In an Amazon Web Services account, table names must be at least unique within each Region if they are in the same database. You might have identical table names in the same Region if the tables are in separate databases. While creating the table, you must specify the table name, database name, and the retention properties. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_create_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_create_table(
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  RetentionProperties = NULL,
  Tags = NULL,
  MagneticStoreWriteProperties = NULL,
  Schema = NULL
)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the Timestream database.

TableName

[required] The name of the Timestream table.

RetentionProperties

The duration for which your time-series data must be stored in the memory store and the magnetic store.

Tags

A list of key-value pairs to label the table.

MagneticStoreWriteProperties

Contains properties to set on the table when enabling magnetic store writes.

Schema

The schema of the table.


Deletes a given Timestream database

Description

Deletes a given Timestream database. This is an irreversible operation. After a database is deleted, the time-series data from its tables cannot be recovered.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_delete_database/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_delete_database(DatabaseName)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the Timestream database to be deleted.


Deletes a given Timestream table

Description

Deletes a given Timestream table. This is an irreversible operation. After a Timestream database table is deleted, the time-series data stored in the table cannot be recovered.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_delete_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_delete_table(DatabaseName, TableName)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the database where the Timestream database is to be deleted.

TableName

[required] The name of the Timestream table to be deleted.


Returns information about the batch load task, including configurations, mappings, progress, and other details

Description

Returns information about the batch load task, including configurations, mappings, progress, and other details. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_describe_batch_load_task/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_describe_batch_load_task(TaskId)

Arguments

TaskId

[required] The ID of the batch load task.


Returns information about the database, including the database name, time that the database was created, and the total number of tables found within the database

Description

Returns information about the database, including the database name, time that the database was created, and the total number of tables found within the database. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_describe_database/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_describe_database(DatabaseName)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the Timestream database.


Returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against

Description

Returns a list of available endpoints to make Timestream API calls against. This API operation is available through both the Write and Query APIs.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_describe_endpoints/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_describe_endpoints()

Returns information about the table, including the table name, database name, retention duration of the memory store and the magnetic store

Description

Returns information about the table, including the table name, database name, retention duration of the memory store and the magnetic store. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_describe_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_describe_table(DatabaseName, TableName)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the Timestream database.

TableName

[required] The name of the Timestream table.


Provides a list of batch load tasks, along with the name, status, when the task is resumable until, and other details

Description

Provides a list of batch load tasks, along with the name, status, when the task is resumable until, and other details. See code sample for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_list_batch_load_tasks/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_list_batch_load_tasks(
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL,
  TaskStatus = NULL
)

Arguments

NextToken

A token to specify where to start paginating. This is the NextToken from a previously truncated response.

MaxResults

The total number of items to return in the output. If the total number of items available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation.

TaskStatus

Status of the batch load task.


Returns a list of your Timestream databases

Description

Returns a list of your Timestream databases. Service quotas apply. See code sample for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_list_databases/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_list_databases(NextToken = NULL, MaxResults = NULL)

Arguments

NextToken

The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation.

MaxResults

The total number of items to return in the output. If the total number of items available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation.


Provides a list of tables, along with the name, status, and retention properties of each table

Description

Provides a list of tables, along with the name, status, and retention properties of each table. See code sample for details.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_list_tables/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_list_tables(
  DatabaseName = NULL,
  NextToken = NULL,
  MaxResults = NULL
)

Arguments

DatabaseName

The name of the Timestream database.

NextToken

The pagination token. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation.

MaxResults

The total number of items to return in the output. If the total number of items available is more than the value specified, a NextToken is provided in the output. To resume pagination, provide the NextToken value as argument of a subsequent API invocation.


Lists all tags on a Timestream resource

Description

Lists all tags on a Timestream resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_list_tags_for_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_list_tags_for_resource(ResourceARN)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The Timestream resource with tags to be listed. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).


Resume batch load task

Description

Resume batch load task

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_resume_batch_load_task/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_resume_batch_load_task(TaskId)

Arguments

TaskId

[required] The ID of the batch load task to resume.


Associates a set of tags with a Timestream resource

Description

Associates a set of tags with a Timestream resource. You can then activate these user-defined tags so that they appear on the Billing and Cost Management console for cost allocation tracking.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_tag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_tag_resource(ResourceARN, Tags)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] Identifies the Timestream resource to which tags should be added. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

Tags

[required] The tags to be assigned to the Timestream resource.


Removes the association of tags from a Timestream resource

Description

Removes the association of tags from a Timestream resource.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_untag_resource/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_untag_resource(ResourceARN, TagKeys)

Arguments

ResourceARN

[required] The Timestream resource that the tags will be removed from. This value is an Amazon Resource Name (ARN).

TagKeys

[required] A list of tags keys. Existing tags of the resource whose keys are members of this list will be removed from the Timestream resource.


Modifies the KMS key for an existing database

Description

Modifies the KMS key for an existing database. While updating the database, you must specify the database name and the identifier of the new KMS key to be used (KmsKeyId). If there are any concurrent update_database requests, first writer wins.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_update_database/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_update_database(DatabaseName, KmsKeyId)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the database.

KmsKeyId

[required] The identifier of the new KMS key (KmsKeyId) to be used to encrypt the data stored in the database. If the KmsKeyId currently registered with the database is the same as the KmsKeyId in the request, there will not be any update.

You can specify the KmsKeyId using any of the following:

  • Key ID: ⁠1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠

  • Key ARN: ⁠arn:aws:kms:us-east-1:111122223333:key/1234abcd-12ab-34cd-56ef-1234567890ab⁠

  • Alias name: alias/ExampleAlias

  • Alias ARN: arn:aws:kms:us-east-1:111122223333:alias/ExampleAlias


Modifies the retention duration of the memory store and magnetic store for your Timestream table

Description

Modifies the retention duration of the memory store and magnetic store for your Timestream table. Note that the change in retention duration takes effect immediately. For example, if the retention period of the memory store was initially set to 2 hours and then changed to 24 hours, the memory store will be capable of holding 24 hours of data, but will be populated with 24 hours of data 22 hours after this change was made. Timestream does not retrieve data from the magnetic store to populate the memory store.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_update_table/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_update_table(
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  RetentionProperties = NULL,
  MagneticStoreWriteProperties = NULL,
  Schema = NULL
)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the Timestream database.

TableName

[required] The name of the Timestream table.

RetentionProperties

The retention duration of the memory store and the magnetic store.

MagneticStoreWriteProperties

Contains properties to set on the table when enabling magnetic store writes.

Schema

The schema of the table.


Enables you to write your time-series data into Timestream

Description

Enables you to write your time-series data into Timestream. You can specify a single data point or a batch of data points to be inserted into the system. Timestream offers you a flexible schema that auto detects the column names and data types for your Timestream tables based on the dimension names and data types of the data points you specify when invoking writes into the database.

See https://www.paws-r-sdk.com/docs/timestreamwrite_write_records/ for full documentation.

Usage

timestreamwrite_write_records(
  DatabaseName,
  TableName,
  CommonAttributes = NULL,
  Records
)

Arguments

DatabaseName

[required] The name of the Timestream database.

TableName

[required] The name of the Timestream table.

CommonAttributes

A record that contains the common measure, dimension, time, and version attributes shared across all the records in the request. The measure and dimension attributes specified will be merged with the measure and dimension attributes in the records object when the data is written into Timestream. Dimensions may not overlap, or a ValidationException will be thrown. In other words, a record must contain dimensions with unique names.

Records

[required] An array of records that contain the unique measure, dimension, time, and version attributes for each time-series data point.

mirror server hosted at Truenetwork, Russian Federation.